Leadership and Faculty Development
Scholarship On Teaching - Topic: Leadership and Faculty Development - 313 results
Select an item by clicking its checkboxEthical Dimensions of College and University Teaching: Understanding and Honoring the Special Relationship Between Teachers and Students
Additional Info:
This volume focuses on the ethical dimensions of teaching, bringing fresh insights and perspectives to inform ongoing discussions of ethics among faculty colleagues, administrators, and students. From these chapters emerges a dominant principle: responsibility to students is directly related to understanding of one's ethical self, and the first step in establishing that ethical identity is self-reflection. By teaching ethically, faculty members model and advocate appropriate behavior to students in a ...
This volume focuses on the ethical dimensions of teaching, bringing fresh insights and perspectives to inform ongoing discussions of ethics among faculty colleagues, administrators, and students. From these chapters emerges a dominant principle: responsibility to students is directly related to understanding of one's ethical self, and the first step in establishing that ethical identity is self-reflection. By teaching ethically, faculty members model and advocate appropriate behavior to students in a ...
Additional Info:
This volume focuses on the ethical dimensions of teaching, bringing fresh insights and perspectives to inform ongoing discussions of ethics among faculty colleagues, administrators, and students. From these chapters emerges a dominant principle: responsibility to students is directly related to understanding of one's ethical self, and the first step in establishing that ethical identity is self-reflection. By teaching ethically, faculty members model and advocate appropriate behavior to students in a voice more effective than any proclamation. They also answer calls for accountability from the public, the press, and politicians. In all, teaching ethically requires transformations of structures, attitudes, and persons--faculty as well as students--if faculty are to meet fully their responsibilities to themselves, to their students, and to society. This is the 66th issue of New Directions for Teaching and Learning. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals page. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The ethics of teaching / David C. Smith
Teaching the subject: developmental identities in teaching / Mary Burgan
The ethics of student-faculty friendships / Richard L. Baker, Jr.
Between apathy and advocacy: teaching and modeling ethical reflection / Karen Hanson
nstitutional commitment to fairness in college teaching / Rita Cobb Rodabaugh
Differentiating the related concepts of ethics, morality, law and justice / Terry T. Ray
The ethics of knowledge / Clark Kerr
Ethical principles for college and university teaching / Harry Murray, Eileen Gillese, Madeline Lennon, Paul Mercer, Marilyn Robinson
Making responsible academic ethical decisions / Charles H. Reynolds
Intervening with colleagues / Patricia Keith-Spiegel, Arno F. Wittig, David V. Perkins, Deborah Ware Balogh, Bernard E. Whitley, Jr.
Reflecting on the ethics and values of our practice / Ronald A. Smith
Toward more ethical teaching / Linc. Fisch
Ethics in teaching: putting it together / Kathleen McGrory.
This volume focuses on the ethical dimensions of teaching, bringing fresh insights and perspectives to inform ongoing discussions of ethics among faculty colleagues, administrators, and students. From these chapters emerges a dominant principle: responsibility to students is directly related to understanding of one's ethical self, and the first step in establishing that ethical identity is self-reflection. By teaching ethically, faculty members model and advocate appropriate behavior to students in a voice more effective than any proclamation. They also answer calls for accountability from the public, the press, and politicians. In all, teaching ethically requires transformations of structures, attitudes, and persons--faculty as well as students--if faculty are to meet fully their responsibilities to themselves, to their students, and to society. This is the 66th issue of New Directions for Teaching and Learning. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals page. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The ethics of teaching / David C. Smith
Teaching the subject: developmental identities in teaching / Mary Burgan
The ethics of student-faculty friendships / Richard L. Baker, Jr.
Between apathy and advocacy: teaching and modeling ethical reflection / Karen Hanson
nstitutional commitment to fairness in college teaching / Rita Cobb Rodabaugh
Differentiating the related concepts of ethics, morality, law and justice / Terry T. Ray
The ethics of knowledge / Clark Kerr
Ethical principles for college and university teaching / Harry Murray, Eileen Gillese, Madeline Lennon, Paul Mercer, Marilyn Robinson
Making responsible academic ethical decisions / Charles H. Reynolds
Intervening with colleagues / Patricia Keith-Spiegel, Arno F. Wittig, David V. Perkins, Deborah Ware Balogh, Bernard E. Whitley, Jr.
Reflecting on the ethics and values of our practice / Ronald A. Smith
Toward more ethical teaching / Linc. Fisch
Ethics in teaching: putting it together / Kathleen McGrory.
"Scholarship: A Sacred Vocation"
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Teachers Bringing Out the Best in Teachers: A Guide to Peer Consultation for Administrators and Teachers
Additional Info:
From the Publisher Most teachers have experienced some kind of formal mentoring or induction program. What these programs can miss is the meaningful daily interaction with peers that builds mutual trust and instructional collaboration-the organic, coachable moments that boost professional learning. Based on a unique investigative study of nearly 300 teachers, this powerful new resource provides informative teacher perspectives of informal, naturally occurring, teacher-to-teacher professional development. Jo and Joseph Blase use ...
From the Publisher Most teachers have experienced some kind of formal mentoring or induction program. What these programs can miss is the meaningful daily interaction with peers that builds mutual trust and instructional collaboration-the organic, coachable moments that boost professional learning. Based on a unique investigative study of nearly 300 teachers, this powerful new resource provides informative teacher perspectives of informal, naturally occurring, teacher-to-teacher professional development. Jo and Joseph Blase use ...
Additional Info:
From the Publisher Most teachers have experienced some kind of formal mentoring or induction program. What these programs can miss is the meaningful daily interaction with peers that builds mutual trust and instructional collaboration-the organic, coachable moments that boost professional learning. Based on a unique investigative study of nearly 300 teachers, this powerful new resource provides informative teacher perspectives of informal, naturally occurring, teacher-to-teacher professional development. Jo and Joseph Blase use this research to identify the following five teacher behaviors that can positively influence other teachers’ morale, teaching skills, and professional growth:
* Building healthy relationships by communicating, caring, and developing trust
* Using five guiding principles for structuring learning experiences
* Planning and organizing for learning
* Showing and sharing
* Guiding for classroom management
This excellent resource helps school leaders promote a culture that encourages lasting professional development. Each chapter presents practical concepts and strategies that can occur in and out of the classroom. Educators share specific experiences and examples, showing each skill in action.
School leaders will learn what strong teacher peer "consultants" actually do that leads to improved teacher confidence and motivation, enhanced trust and mutual respect, and reflective instructional behavior among their colleagues. These cost-effective, authentic strategies will build camaraderie and leadership in your school, engaging colleagues as a team in the vital mission of all schools-educating our youth.
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Teachers helping teachers : the case for peer consultation
ch. 2 Peer consultation skill #1 : building healthy relationships by communicating, caring, and developing trust
ch. 3 Peer consultation skill #2 : using the five guiding principles for structuring learning experiences
ch. 4 Peer consultation skill #3 : planning and organizing for learning
ch. 5 Peer consultation skill #4 : showing and sharing
ch. 6 Peer consultation skill #5 : guiding for classroom management
ch. 7 Unleashing the hidden potential of peer consultation
Resource : research methods and procedures
From the Publisher Most teachers have experienced some kind of formal mentoring or induction program. What these programs can miss is the meaningful daily interaction with peers that builds mutual trust and instructional collaboration-the organic, coachable moments that boost professional learning. Based on a unique investigative study of nearly 300 teachers, this powerful new resource provides informative teacher perspectives of informal, naturally occurring, teacher-to-teacher professional development. Jo and Joseph Blase use this research to identify the following five teacher behaviors that can positively influence other teachers’ morale, teaching skills, and professional growth:
* Building healthy relationships by communicating, caring, and developing trust
* Using five guiding principles for structuring learning experiences
* Planning and organizing for learning
* Showing and sharing
* Guiding for classroom management
This excellent resource helps school leaders promote a culture that encourages lasting professional development. Each chapter presents practical concepts and strategies that can occur in and out of the classroom. Educators share specific experiences and examples, showing each skill in action.
School leaders will learn what strong teacher peer "consultants" actually do that leads to improved teacher confidence and motivation, enhanced trust and mutual respect, and reflective instructional behavior among their colleagues. These cost-effective, authentic strategies will build camaraderie and leadership in your school, engaging colleagues as a team in the vital mission of all schools-educating our youth.
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Teachers helping teachers : the case for peer consultation
ch. 2 Peer consultation skill #1 : building healthy relationships by communicating, caring, and developing trust
ch. 3 Peer consultation skill #2 : using the five guiding principles for structuring learning experiences
ch. 4 Peer consultation skill #3 : planning and organizing for learning
ch. 5 Peer consultation skill #4 : showing and sharing
ch. 6 Peer consultation skill #5 : guiding for classroom management
ch. 7 Unleashing the hidden potential of peer consultation
Resource : research methods and procedures
"Publish, Don't Perish: Submitting Research Articles to Refereed Journals"
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Assuring Quality in Online Education: Practices and Processes at the Teaching, Resource, and Program Levels
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Online distance education continues to grow at a fast pace, even outpacing the overall growth of U.S. higher education. Demands for quality are coming from all shareholders involved. As if caught by surprise, a patchwork response to quality is often the typical organizational response. The result can be inconsistent and ...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Online distance education continues to grow at a fast pace, even outpacing the overall growth of U.S. higher education. Demands for quality are coming from all shareholders involved. As if caught by surprise, a patchwork response to quality is often the typical organizational response. The result can be inconsistent and ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Online distance education continues to grow at a fast pace, even outpacing the overall growth of U.S. higher education. Demands for quality are coming from all shareholders involved. As if caught by surprise, a patchwork response to quality is often the typical organizational response. The result can be inconsistent and uncoordinated levels of value to those invested in online learning. This often promotes negative images of the educational experience and institution.
Comprised of highly regarded experts in the field, this edited volume provides a comprehensive overview of quality assurance, a snapshot of current practices and proven recommendations for raising standards of quality in online education.
Topics discussed include:
* Improving practices for teaching online
* Using educational analytics for quality assurance and improvement
* Accessibility: An important dimension of quality assurance
* Assuring quality in online course design
* Assuring quality in learner support, academic resources, advising and counseling
* The role and realities of accreditation
This text clearly answers the call for addressing quality from a broad, deep and coordinated understanding. It addresses the complexities of quality assurance in higher education and offers professionals top-shelf advice and support.
*This text is also appropriate for students enrolled in Educational Technology and Higher Education Administration Masters and PhD programs (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgements
Foreword
Preface
Part One: Overview and Implications of Practices and Processes for Assuring Quality
ch. 1 Stakeholders of Quality Assurance in Online Education: Inputs and Outputs (Deborah Adair and Sebastian Diaz)
ch. 2 Cost, Access, and Quality: Breaking the Iron Triangle Through Disruptive Technology-Based Innovations (Stella C.S. Porto)
ch. 3 The Sloan Consortium Pillars and Quality Scorecard (Janet C. Moore and Kaye Shelton)
ch. 4 K–12 Online Learning: Recommendations for Assuring Quality (Susan Patrick, MAthhew Wicks, and Allison Powell)
ch. 5 Progress Toward Transparency and Quality Assurance (Cali Morrison, Karen Paulson, and Russell Poulin)
Part Two: Quality Assurance and Continuous Improvement at the Course Design and Teaching Levels
ch. 6 A Process to Improve Course Design: A Key Variable in Course Quality (Deborah Adair)
ch. 7 A Model for Determining the Effectiveness and Impact of Faculty Professional Development (Lawrence C. Ragan and Carol Ann McQuiggan)
ch. 8 The Power of a Collaborative, Collegial Approach to Improving Online Teaching and Learning (Leonard Bogle, Scott Day, Daniel Matthews, and KAren Swan)
ch. 9 Engaging Online Faculty and Administrators in the Assessment Process (Jennifer Stephens-Helm, Karan Powell, and Julie Atwood)
ch. 10 Disability and Accessibility: Proactive Strategies to Improve Quality (Barbara A. Frey and Lorna R. Kearns)
ch. 11 Assuring Quality for an Expanding Population of Culturally Diverse Students (Kay Shattuck, Jennifer A. Linder-VanBerschot, Janice Maloney Migh, Carrie Main, and Donlad Black)
Part Three: Processes for Assuring Quality at Resource and Program Levels
ch. 12 Ethics Matters: Assuring Quality at the Academic Program Level (Melody M. Thompson and Gary W. Kuhne)
ch. 13 Academic Advising: A Link to a Quality Experience for Students (Heather L. Chakiris)
ch. 14 Learning Analytics: A Tool for Quality Assurance ( Phillip Ice, Mellissa Layne, and Wallace Boston)
ch. 15 Using Principles of Knowledge Management for Educational Quality Assurance ( Sebastian Diaz, Wallace Boston, Melissa LAyne , and Phillip Ice)
ch. 16 An Adaptive Model for Calculating Contact Hours in Distance-Education Courses (Karan Powell, Jennifer Stephens-Helm, Melissa Layne, and Phillip Ice)
ch. 17 The Role and Realities of Accreditation: A Practical Guide for Programs and Institutions Preparing for an Accreditation Visit (Susan Biro, Christine Mullins, and Jean Runyon)
Part Four: Final Thoughts
ch. 18 Saying “Quality Assurance” When We Mean Something Else (Julie Porosky Hamlin)
ch. 19 Bumblebees Can’t Fly! (John Sener)
Editor and Contributors
Index
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Online distance education continues to grow at a fast pace, even outpacing the overall growth of U.S. higher education. Demands for quality are coming from all shareholders involved. As if caught by surprise, a patchwork response to quality is often the typical organizational response. The result can be inconsistent and uncoordinated levels of value to those invested in online learning. This often promotes negative images of the educational experience and institution.
Comprised of highly regarded experts in the field, this edited volume provides a comprehensive overview of quality assurance, a snapshot of current practices and proven recommendations for raising standards of quality in online education.
Topics discussed include:
* Improving practices for teaching online
* Using educational analytics for quality assurance and improvement
* Accessibility: An important dimension of quality assurance
* Assuring quality in online course design
* Assuring quality in learner support, academic resources, advising and counseling
* The role and realities of accreditation
This text clearly answers the call for addressing quality from a broad, deep and coordinated understanding. It addresses the complexities of quality assurance in higher education and offers professionals top-shelf advice and support.
*This text is also appropriate for students enrolled in Educational Technology and Higher Education Administration Masters and PhD programs (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgements
Foreword
Preface
Part One: Overview and Implications of Practices and Processes for Assuring Quality
ch. 1 Stakeholders of Quality Assurance in Online Education: Inputs and Outputs (Deborah Adair and Sebastian Diaz)
ch. 2 Cost, Access, and Quality: Breaking the Iron Triangle Through Disruptive Technology-Based Innovations (Stella C.S. Porto)
ch. 3 The Sloan Consortium Pillars and Quality Scorecard (Janet C. Moore and Kaye Shelton)
ch. 4 K–12 Online Learning: Recommendations for Assuring Quality (Susan Patrick, MAthhew Wicks, and Allison Powell)
ch. 5 Progress Toward Transparency and Quality Assurance (Cali Morrison, Karen Paulson, and Russell Poulin)
Part Two: Quality Assurance and Continuous Improvement at the Course Design and Teaching Levels
ch. 6 A Process to Improve Course Design: A Key Variable in Course Quality (Deborah Adair)
ch. 7 A Model for Determining the Effectiveness and Impact of Faculty Professional Development (Lawrence C. Ragan and Carol Ann McQuiggan)
ch. 8 The Power of a Collaborative, Collegial Approach to Improving Online Teaching and Learning (Leonard Bogle, Scott Day, Daniel Matthews, and KAren Swan)
ch. 9 Engaging Online Faculty and Administrators in the Assessment Process (Jennifer Stephens-Helm, Karan Powell, and Julie Atwood)
ch. 10 Disability and Accessibility: Proactive Strategies to Improve Quality (Barbara A. Frey and Lorna R. Kearns)
ch. 11 Assuring Quality for an Expanding Population of Culturally Diverse Students (Kay Shattuck, Jennifer A. Linder-VanBerschot, Janice Maloney Migh, Carrie Main, and Donlad Black)
Part Three: Processes for Assuring Quality at Resource and Program Levels
ch. 12 Ethics Matters: Assuring Quality at the Academic Program Level (Melody M. Thompson and Gary W. Kuhne)
ch. 13 Academic Advising: A Link to a Quality Experience for Students (Heather L. Chakiris)
ch. 14 Learning Analytics: A Tool for Quality Assurance ( Phillip Ice, Mellissa Layne, and Wallace Boston)
ch. 15 Using Principles of Knowledge Management for Educational Quality Assurance ( Sebastian Diaz, Wallace Boston, Melissa LAyne , and Phillip Ice)
ch. 16 An Adaptive Model for Calculating Contact Hours in Distance-Education Courses (Karan Powell, Jennifer Stephens-Helm, Melissa Layne, and Phillip Ice)
ch. 17 The Role and Realities of Accreditation: A Practical Guide for Programs and Institutions Preparing for an Accreditation Visit (Susan Biro, Christine Mullins, and Jean Runyon)
Part Four: Final Thoughts
ch. 18 Saying “Quality Assurance” When We Mean Something Else (Julie Porosky Hamlin)
ch. 19 Bumblebees Can’t Fly! (John Sener)
Editor and Contributors
Index
Joining the Mission: A Guide for (Mainly) New College Faculty
Additional Info:
Joining the Mission is a helpful guide for new (and experienced) faculty at religious colleges and universities. Susan VanZanten here provides an orientation to the world of Christian higher education and an introduction to the academic profession of teaching, scholarship, and service, with a special emphasis on opportunities and challenges common to “mission-driven” institutions. From designing a syllabus to dealing with problem students, from working with committees to achieving a ...
Joining the Mission is a helpful guide for new (and experienced) faculty at religious colleges and universities. Susan VanZanten here provides an orientation to the world of Christian higher education and an introduction to the academic profession of teaching, scholarship, and service, with a special emphasis on opportunities and challenges common to “mission-driven” institutions. From designing a syllabus to dealing with problem students, from working with committees to achieving a ...
Additional Info:
Joining the Mission is a helpful guide for new (and experienced) faculty at religious colleges and universities. Susan VanZanten here provides an orientation to the world of Christian higher education and an introduction to the academic profession of teaching, scholarship, and service, with a special emphasis on opportunities and challenges common to “mission-driven” institutions. From designing a syllabus to dealing with problem students, from working with committees to achieving a balanced life, VanZanten's guidebook will help faculty across the disciplines — Art to Zoology and every subject between — understand better what it means to pursue faithfully a vocation as professor. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface: The Beginning of a Vocation
ch. 1 What Is a Mission-Driven Institution?
ch. 2 A Very Brief History of Western Higher Education
ch. 3 Teaching: Call and Response
ch. 4 Teaching: Brick by Brick
ch. 5 The Faithful Professor: Multiple Paradigms for Faith and Learning
ch. 6 How Outrageous Is Faithful Scholarships?
ch. 7 Beyond Professing Alone: Becoming an Academic Citizen
ch. 8 Composing a Life: Balance and Improvisation
Appendix
Acknowledgments
Joining the Mission is a helpful guide for new (and experienced) faculty at religious colleges and universities. Susan VanZanten here provides an orientation to the world of Christian higher education and an introduction to the academic profession of teaching, scholarship, and service, with a special emphasis on opportunities and challenges common to “mission-driven” institutions. From designing a syllabus to dealing with problem students, from working with committees to achieving a balanced life, VanZanten's guidebook will help faculty across the disciplines — Art to Zoology and every subject between — understand better what it means to pursue faithfully a vocation as professor. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface: The Beginning of a Vocation
ch. 1 What Is a Mission-Driven Institution?
ch. 2 A Very Brief History of Western Higher Education
ch. 3 Teaching: Call and Response
ch. 4 Teaching: Brick by Brick
ch. 5 The Faithful Professor: Multiple Paradigms for Faith and Learning
ch. 6 How Outrageous Is Faithful Scholarships?
ch. 7 Beyond Professing Alone: Becoming an Academic Citizen
ch. 8 Composing a Life: Balance and Improvisation
Appendix
Acknowledgments
Additional Info:
Modeled on guides produced for other fields, this document is intended to provide department chairs and deans with a set of strategic questions and suggested steps for conducing a review of their program. We intend this document to be helpful for chairs undertaking annual reviews and reviews for accrediting agencies. It contains an introductory statement on the study of religion; a discussion of the preliminary steps in constructing a successful ...
Modeled on guides produced for other fields, this document is intended to provide department chairs and deans with a set of strategic questions and suggested steps for conducing a review of their program. We intend this document to be helpful for chairs undertaking annual reviews and reviews for accrediting agencies. It contains an introductory statement on the study of religion; a discussion of the preliminary steps in constructing a successful ...
Additional Info:
Modeled on guides produced for other fields, this document is intended to provide department chairs and deans with a set of strategic questions and suggested steps for conducing a review of their program. We intend this document to be helpful for chairs undertaking annual reviews and reviews for accrediting agencies. It contains an introductory statement on the study of religion; a discussion of the preliminary steps in constructing a successful review; a step-by-step description of their review process, and a description of how to conceptualized the write an effective “self-study narrative.” (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface. The Study of Religion Today and in the Past
Strengthening Your Program and the Field
Purpose of the Guide
Accreditation
What's At Stake
The Review Process
Step 1. The Decision to Conduct the Review
Step 2. Preliminary Preparation for the Review
Step 3. Self-Study
Writing the Evaluative Narrative
List of Sections and Topics for the Narrative
History of the Program
Goals and Defining Characteristics of the Program
Curriculum
Advising System
Resources for Undergraduate Program–faculty, TAs, etc.
Other Program Features
Faculty
Relations with Other Departments and Programs
Governance Structure
Degree to Which Program Seeks Advice and Participation From Other Faculty
Quality and Stability of Leadership
Staff
Funding
Other Local Program Issues
Graduate Program
Overview: General Quality, Trends, Reputation, etc.
Students
Requirements
Curriculum
Advising System
Qualifying Examinations
Master's Theses and/or Dissertations
Time to Degree
Teaching Experience and Training
Financial Support
Summary of Planned Changes in Program
Appendices
Data
Checklist of Documents to Include as Appendices in Self-Study
Table of Contents of Documents Included in the Self-Study
Evaluative Narrative
Descriptive and Quantitative Appendices
Step 4. The External Review
Identifying External Reviewers
Organizing Participants for External Reviewers' Interviews and Meetings
Interacting with the External Reviewers
Being Clear about Priorities
Following up on the External Review
Step 5. Response to the External Review Report
Step 6. Administration Response
Appendix A. Writing the Self-Study Narrative
Introductory Sections of the Self-Study
History of the Program
Program Goals and Definition
Program Structure
Strategic Sections of the Self-Study
The Undergraduate Program
Overview
Students
Requirements
Curriculum
Other Aspects of the Undergraduate Program
Advising
Resources
The Graduate Program
Overview
Students
Requirements
Curriculum
Advising
Qualifying Examination
Master's Theses; Dissertations
Time to Degree
Teaching Experience and Training
Financial Support
Other Program Features
Faculty
Relations with Other Departments and Programs
Governance Structure
Staff
Funding
Space, Equipment, Library Resources, and Other Resources
Other Local Issues
Concluding Sections of the Self-Study
Summary of Planned Changes in the Program
Concluding Flourish
Modeled on guides produced for other fields, this document is intended to provide department chairs and deans with a set of strategic questions and suggested steps for conducing a review of their program. We intend this document to be helpful for chairs undertaking annual reviews and reviews for accrediting agencies. It contains an introductory statement on the study of religion; a discussion of the preliminary steps in constructing a successful review; a step-by-step description of their review process, and a description of how to conceptualized the write an effective “self-study narrative.” (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface. The Study of Religion Today and in the Past
Strengthening Your Program and the Field
Purpose of the Guide
Accreditation
What's At Stake
The Review Process
Step 1. The Decision to Conduct the Review
Step 2. Preliminary Preparation for the Review
Step 3. Self-Study
Writing the Evaluative Narrative
List of Sections and Topics for the Narrative
History of the Program
Goals and Defining Characteristics of the Program
Curriculum
Advising System
Resources for Undergraduate Program–faculty, TAs, etc.
Other Program Features
Faculty
Relations with Other Departments and Programs
Governance Structure
Degree to Which Program Seeks Advice and Participation From Other Faculty
Quality and Stability of Leadership
Staff
Funding
Other Local Program Issues
Graduate Program
Overview: General Quality, Trends, Reputation, etc.
Students
Requirements
Curriculum
Advising System
Qualifying Examinations
Master's Theses and/or Dissertations
Time to Degree
Teaching Experience and Training
Financial Support
Summary of Planned Changes in Program
Appendices
Data
Checklist of Documents to Include as Appendices in Self-Study
Table of Contents of Documents Included in the Self-Study
Evaluative Narrative
Descriptive and Quantitative Appendices
Step 4. The External Review
Identifying External Reviewers
Organizing Participants for External Reviewers' Interviews and Meetings
Interacting with the External Reviewers
Being Clear about Priorities
Following up on the External Review
Step 5. Response to the External Review Report
Step 6. Administration Response
Appendix A. Writing the Self-Study Narrative
Introductory Sections of the Self-Study
History of the Program
Program Goals and Definition
Program Structure
Strategic Sections of the Self-Study
The Undergraduate Program
Overview
Students
Requirements
Curriculum
Other Aspects of the Undergraduate Program
Advising
Resources
The Graduate Program
Overview
Students
Requirements
Curriculum
Advising
Qualifying Examination
Master's Theses; Dissertations
Time to Degree
Teaching Experience and Training
Financial Support
Other Program Features
Faculty
Relations with Other Departments and Programs
Governance Structure
Staff
Funding
Space, Equipment, Library Resources, and Other Resources
Other Local Issues
Concluding Sections of the Self-Study
Summary of Planned Changes in the Program
Concluding Flourish
Additional Info:
Designed to spark reflection and lively dialogue in College and university departments and faculty development programs, Dilemmas in Teaching is a collection of short, insightful cases that will strike a chord with experienced faculty and help prepare newer faculty and teaching assistants for the complexities of their chosen profession. Written by faculty as part of a six-year project sponsored by The Collaboration for the Advancement of College Teaching & Learning, the ...
Designed to spark reflection and lively dialogue in College and university departments and faculty development programs, Dilemmas in Teaching is a collection of short, insightful cases that will strike a chord with experienced faculty and help prepare newer faculty and teaching assistants for the complexities of their chosen profession. Written by faculty as part of a six-year project sponsored by The Collaboration for the Advancement of College Teaching & Learning, the ...
Additional Info:
Designed to spark reflection and lively dialogue in College and university departments and faculty development programs, Dilemmas in Teaching is a collection of short, insightful cases that will strike a chord with experienced faculty and help prepare newer faculty and teaching assistants for the complexities of their chosen profession. Written by faculty as part of a six-year project sponsored by The Collaboration for the Advancement of College Teaching & Learning, the twenty-nine cases are grouped in three sections, each with an introduction, focusing on the classroom, departments and institutions, and the changing culture in higher education. Features include a listing of case abstracts, discussion questions, essays about using cases in faculty development, and a bibliography. This collection is a useful resource for college, department, and faculty development center libraries — certain to be pulled off the shelf often for individual reflection and faculty development programming. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
Part I: Resource Materials
ch. 1 Stories for Reflective Teaching: using cases in faculty development (Chris M. Anson)
ch. 2 In Case You're Writing a Case: some suggestions (Kathryn Heltne Swanson)
Part II: Cases about Classrooms
ch. 3 Critical Thinking or Thinking Critically (James H. Smith)
ch. 4 Group Cases: one professor's dilemma (Srinivasan Ragothaman)
ch. 5 Judgment Day (Marie McNeff)
ch. 6 The Loafing Letdown (Ronald A. Klocke)
ch. 7 The Case of the Harassed Teacher (Tony Filipvitch)
ch. 8 Yes, Virginia, You're in a Pickle (Mary R. DeMaine)
ch. 9 Too Much Thinking (Richard Jewell)
ch. 10 Grade Expectations (Jeannine L. Saabye)
ch. 11 The Jonas Incident (Chris M. Anson)
Part III:Cases about Departments and Institutions
ch. 12 The Academic Purist (Deborah Petersen-Perlman)
ch. 13 Best in the Class (Carol Rutz)
ch. 14 The Fly in the Ointment (James Swanson)
ch. 15 Risky Business (Lesley K. Cafarelli)
ch. 16 To 'B' or not to 'B': a case of academic appeal (Benedict J. Arogyaswamy)
ch. 17 To Tell or not to Tell (Shamsul Huda, Argirl L. Morgan, and William Serban)
ch. 18 Unpopular Senior Professor (Bruce L. Smith)
ch. 19 Wendy Lamb (Tom Mason and Melissa Shepard)
ch. 20 Assessment at Woebegone State (Lesley K. Cafarelli)
ch. 21 Is Something Rotten in Denmark? (Rebecca Kamm)
ch. 22 Teaching Semantics: euphemisms, taboos, and obscenities (Richard Betting)
Part IV: Cases about the Changing Culture As It Affects Higher Education
ch. 23 The Cancer Student (Carol Rutz)
ch. 24 Facing the Reality of Students' Preparation and Research Skills (Deborah Peterson-Perlman)
ch. 25 Faltering Steps Under the Americans with Disabilities Act (Richard W. Metcalf)
ch. 26 Jalen (Eugene Hermitte and Phyllis Worthy Dawkins)
ch. 27 Special Circumstances (Jeannine L. Saabye)
ch. 28 They're Acting Really Squirrelly (Thomas D. Peacock)
ch. 29 Organic Lab is Hell (Maria C. Milletti and Elva Mae Nicholson)
ch. 30 Who's Learning? (Beverly J. Stratton)
ch. 31 Dissin' the Prof (Susan J. Huber)
Bibliography
Designed to spark reflection and lively dialogue in College and university departments and faculty development programs, Dilemmas in Teaching is a collection of short, insightful cases that will strike a chord with experienced faculty and help prepare newer faculty and teaching assistants for the complexities of their chosen profession. Written by faculty as part of a six-year project sponsored by The Collaboration for the Advancement of College Teaching & Learning, the twenty-nine cases are grouped in three sections, each with an introduction, focusing on the classroom, departments and institutions, and the changing culture in higher education. Features include a listing of case abstracts, discussion questions, essays about using cases in faculty development, and a bibliography. This collection is a useful resource for college, department, and faculty development center libraries — certain to be pulled off the shelf often for individual reflection and faculty development programming. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
Part I: Resource Materials
ch. 1 Stories for Reflective Teaching: using cases in faculty development (Chris M. Anson)
ch. 2 In Case You're Writing a Case: some suggestions (Kathryn Heltne Swanson)
Part II: Cases about Classrooms
ch. 3 Critical Thinking or Thinking Critically (James H. Smith)
ch. 4 Group Cases: one professor's dilemma (Srinivasan Ragothaman)
ch. 5 Judgment Day (Marie McNeff)
ch. 6 The Loafing Letdown (Ronald A. Klocke)
ch. 7 The Case of the Harassed Teacher (Tony Filipvitch)
ch. 8 Yes, Virginia, You're in a Pickle (Mary R. DeMaine)
ch. 9 Too Much Thinking (Richard Jewell)
ch. 10 Grade Expectations (Jeannine L. Saabye)
ch. 11 The Jonas Incident (Chris M. Anson)
Part III:Cases about Departments and Institutions
ch. 12 The Academic Purist (Deborah Petersen-Perlman)
ch. 13 Best in the Class (Carol Rutz)
ch. 14 The Fly in the Ointment (James Swanson)
ch. 15 Risky Business (Lesley K. Cafarelli)
ch. 16 To 'B' or not to 'B': a case of academic appeal (Benedict J. Arogyaswamy)
ch. 17 To Tell or not to Tell (Shamsul Huda, Argirl L. Morgan, and William Serban)
ch. 18 Unpopular Senior Professor (Bruce L. Smith)
ch. 19 Wendy Lamb (Tom Mason and Melissa Shepard)
ch. 20 Assessment at Woebegone State (Lesley K. Cafarelli)
ch. 21 Is Something Rotten in Denmark? (Rebecca Kamm)
ch. 22 Teaching Semantics: euphemisms, taboos, and obscenities (Richard Betting)
Part IV: Cases about the Changing Culture As It Affects Higher Education
ch. 23 The Cancer Student (Carol Rutz)
ch. 24 Facing the Reality of Students' Preparation and Research Skills (Deborah Peterson-Perlman)
ch. 25 Faltering Steps Under the Americans with Disabilities Act (Richard W. Metcalf)
ch. 26 Jalen (Eugene Hermitte and Phyllis Worthy Dawkins)
ch. 27 Special Circumstances (Jeannine L. Saabye)
ch. 28 They're Acting Really Squirrelly (Thomas D. Peacock)
ch. 29 Organic Lab is Hell (Maria C. Milletti and Elva Mae Nicholson)
ch. 30 Who's Learning? (Beverly J. Stratton)
ch. 31 Dissin' the Prof (Susan J. Huber)
Bibliography
Additional Info:
Hiring new tenure-track faculty and seeing them through to tenure is an onerous responsibility for department chairs, with significant departmental and institutional consequences.
The Department Chair's Role in Developing New Faculty into Teachers and Scholars is designed to help chairs with the three critical stages of junior faculty socialization: 1) recruitment and hiring; 2) the first year; and 3) evaluating new faculty performance. The authors offer concrete advice and activities; make ...
Hiring new tenure-track faculty and seeing them through to tenure is an onerous responsibility for department chairs, with significant departmental and institutional consequences.
The Department Chair's Role in Developing New Faculty into Teachers and Scholars is designed to help chairs with the three critical stages of junior faculty socialization: 1) recruitment and hiring; 2) the first year; and 3) evaluating new faculty performance. The authors offer concrete advice and activities; make ...
Additional Info:
Hiring new tenure-track faculty and seeing them through to tenure is an onerous responsibility for department chairs, with significant departmental and institutional consequences.
The Department Chair's Role in Developing New Faculty into Teachers and Scholars is designed to help chairs with the three critical stages of junior faculty socialization: 1) recruitment and hiring; 2) the first year; and 3) evaluating new faculty performance. The authors offer concrete advice and activities; make extensive use of real-life situations; and provide generic examples of letters, checklists, and orientations that can be adapted to individual contexts.
This book provides the tools chairs need to adapt habit and intuition into effective management practices. The advice will help department chairs achieve the mission and objective of their own units, as well as their colleges and campuses. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Organizing the search for a new faculty member
ch. 2 Negotiating the job offer
ch. 3 Providing information before and upon arrival
ch. 4 Addressing professional/institutional questions
ch. 5 Planning an effective departmental orientation
ch. 6 Orienting new faculty to teaching
ch. 7 Addressing service concerns
ch. 8 Developing full-year orientation programs
ch. 9 Creating mentoring relationships
ch. 10 Demystifying the promotion and tenure process
ch. 11 Developing productive researchers and effective teachers
ch. 12 Monitoring service obligations
ch. 13 Explaining evaluation procedures
Hiring new tenure-track faculty and seeing them through to tenure is an onerous responsibility for department chairs, with significant departmental and institutional consequences.
The Department Chair's Role in Developing New Faculty into Teachers and Scholars is designed to help chairs with the three critical stages of junior faculty socialization: 1) recruitment and hiring; 2) the first year; and 3) evaluating new faculty performance. The authors offer concrete advice and activities; make extensive use of real-life situations; and provide generic examples of letters, checklists, and orientations that can be adapted to individual contexts.
This book provides the tools chairs need to adapt habit and intuition into effective management practices. The advice will help department chairs achieve the mission and objective of their own units, as well as their colleges and campuses. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Organizing the search for a new faculty member
ch. 2 Negotiating the job offer
ch. 3 Providing information before and upon arrival
ch. 4 Addressing professional/institutional questions
ch. 5 Planning an effective departmental orientation
ch. 6 Orienting new faculty to teaching
ch. 7 Addressing service concerns
ch. 8 Developing full-year orientation programs
ch. 9 Creating mentoring relationships
ch. 10 Demystifying the promotion and tenure process
ch. 11 Developing productive researchers and effective teachers
ch. 12 Monitoring service obligations
ch. 13 Explaining evaluation procedures
An Evidence-based Guide to College and University Teaching Developing the Model Teacher
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: What makes a good college teacher? This book provides an evidence- based answer to that question by presenting a set of "model teaching characteristics" that define what makes a good college teacher. Based on six fundamental areas of teaching competency known as Model Teaching Characteristics outlined by The Society for the ...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: What makes a good college teacher? This book provides an evidence- based answer to that question by presenting a set of "model teaching characteristics" that define what makes a good college teacher. Based on six fundamental areas of teaching competency known as Model Teaching Characteristics outlined by The Society for the ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: What makes a good college teacher? This book provides an evidence- based answer to that question by presenting a set of "model teaching characteristics" that define what makes a good college teacher. Based on six fundamental areas of teaching competency known as Model Teaching Characteristics outlined by The Society for the Teaching of Psychology (STP), this book describes how college faculty from all disciplines and at all levels of experience can use these characteristics to evaluate, guide, and improve their teaching. Evidence based research supports the inclusion of each characteristic, each of which is illustrated through example, to help readers master the skills. Readers learn to evaluate their teaching abilities by providing guidance on what to document and how to accumulate and organize the evidence. Two introductory chapters outline the model teaching characteristics followed by six chapters, each devoted to one of the characteristics: training, instructional methods, course content, assessment, syllabus construction, and student evaluations. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Defining Model Teaching
Structure of the Book
Yes, This Book is for You
Acknowledgments
About the Authors
ch. 1 Why Do We Need Model Teachers?
ch. 2 What is Great Teaching?
ch. 3 How do we Train to be Model Teachers?
ch. 4 What Instructional Methods do Model Teachers Use?
ch. 5 What do Students Learn in Model Teachers’ Courses?
ch. 6 How do Model Teachers Assess Student Learning?
ch. 7 How do Model Teachers Construct Syllabi?
ch. 8 How do Model Teachers Use Student Evaluations?
Epilogue
Avoid Teacherly Regret: One Last Self-Assessment
What is Stopping You?
Appendix: The Model Teaching Criteria Scale
References
Author Index
Subject Index
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: What makes a good college teacher? This book provides an evidence- based answer to that question by presenting a set of "model teaching characteristics" that define what makes a good college teacher. Based on six fundamental areas of teaching competency known as Model Teaching Characteristics outlined by The Society for the Teaching of Psychology (STP), this book describes how college faculty from all disciplines and at all levels of experience can use these characteristics to evaluate, guide, and improve their teaching. Evidence based research supports the inclusion of each characteristic, each of which is illustrated through example, to help readers master the skills. Readers learn to evaluate their teaching abilities by providing guidance on what to document and how to accumulate and organize the evidence. Two introductory chapters outline the model teaching characteristics followed by six chapters, each devoted to one of the characteristics: training, instructional methods, course content, assessment, syllabus construction, and student evaluations. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Defining Model Teaching
Structure of the Book
Yes, This Book is for You
Acknowledgments
About the Authors
ch. 1 Why Do We Need Model Teachers?
ch. 2 What is Great Teaching?
ch. 3 How do we Train to be Model Teachers?
ch. 4 What Instructional Methods do Model Teachers Use?
ch. 5 What do Students Learn in Model Teachers’ Courses?
ch. 6 How do Model Teachers Assess Student Learning?
ch. 7 How do Model Teachers Construct Syllabi?
ch. 8 How do Model Teachers Use Student Evaluations?
Epilogue
Avoid Teacherly Regret: One Last Self-Assessment
What is Stopping You?
Appendix: The Model Teaching Criteria Scale
References
Author Index
Subject Index
Indigenous Leadership in Higher Education
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: This volume offers new perspectives from Indigenous leaders in academic affairs, student affairs and central administration to improve colleges and universities in service to Indigenous students and professionals. It discusses and illustrates ways that leadership norms, values, assumptions and behaviors can often find their origins in cultural identities, and how such ...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: This volume offers new perspectives from Indigenous leaders in academic affairs, student affairs and central administration to improve colleges and universities in service to Indigenous students and professionals. It discusses and illustrates ways that leadership norms, values, assumptions and behaviors can often find their origins in cultural identities, and how such ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: This volume offers new perspectives from Indigenous leaders in academic affairs, student affairs and central administration to improve colleges and universities in service to Indigenous students and professionals. It discusses and illustrates ways that leadership norms, values, assumptions and behaviors can often find their origins in cultural identities, and how such assumptions can affect the evolvement of colleges and universities in serving Indigenous Peoples. It contributes to leadership development and reflection among novice, experienced, and emerging leaders in higher education and provides key recommendations for transforming higher education.
This book introduces readers to relationships between Indigenous identities and leadership in diverse educational environments and institutions and will benefit policy makers in education, student affairs professionals, scholars, faculty and students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Figures
List of Tables
Preface
Part I: Gathering Wisdom: Indigenous Leadership in Higher Education
ch. 1 Indigenous Leadership in Higher Education
ch. 2 Collected Insights on Indigenous Leadership
Part II: Indigenous Leadership Essays
ch. 3 Views on Indigenous Leadership (Bryan Brayboy)
ch. 4 Designing Tribal Educational Leadership (Cheryl Crazy Bull)
ch. 5 Indigenous Leadership (Cornel Pewewardy)
ch. 6 American Indian Leadership (Ange Bunner)
ch. 7 Educational Warrior (Ferlin Clark)
ch. 8 Indigenous Dissidence: Cultivating a Leadership Politic of Hózhó (Charlotte Davidson)
ch. 9 The Leadership Tree: The Emergence of Indigenous Well-Being Factors in Rural Leadership (Shawn Secatero)
ch. 10 Kuleana Acts: Identity in Action (Erin Kahunawaika’ala Wright)
ch. 11 Identify Yourself (Melvin Monette)
ch. 12 Being of Service to Our People (Heather Shotton)
ch. 13 To Be Mestiza: Blending Leadership Traditions (Alicia Fedelina Chávez)
ch. 14 My Climb to the Highest Rung (Cassandra Manuelito Kerkvliet)
ch. 15 Diary of a Professional Indian (Michael Hanitchak)
ch. 16 Consciously Leading with Ancestors Prayers and Community in the Heart (Robin Starr "Zape-tah-hol-ah" Minthorn)
ch. 17 Leadership Found (Carolyn Kenny)
ch. 18 Path of a Modern Warrior: Leadership Perspectives through Cultural Teachings (Corey Still)
ch. 19 For the Native American Student: Take Opportunities and Don’t be Afraid to Take Leadership Head On…Tips for Success in Higher Education (Jessica Harjo)
ch. 20 Ma Ke Ala Pono: A Journey through My Leadership (Kamakana Aquino)
ch. 21 Aspiring for Something Greater than Myself (Natalie Becenti)
ch. 22 The Seven Teachings: A Full Circle of Support (Tyler Parisien)
ch. 23 Living My Dream, Off the Rez (Shoni Schimmel)
Part III: Recommendations for Higher Education
ch. 24 Toward an Indigenous Transformation of Higher Education
Index
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: This volume offers new perspectives from Indigenous leaders in academic affairs, student affairs and central administration to improve colleges and universities in service to Indigenous students and professionals. It discusses and illustrates ways that leadership norms, values, assumptions and behaviors can often find their origins in cultural identities, and how such assumptions can affect the evolvement of colleges and universities in serving Indigenous Peoples. It contributes to leadership development and reflection among novice, experienced, and emerging leaders in higher education and provides key recommendations for transforming higher education.
This book introduces readers to relationships between Indigenous identities and leadership in diverse educational environments and institutions and will benefit policy makers in education, student affairs professionals, scholars, faculty and students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Figures
List of Tables
Preface
Part I: Gathering Wisdom: Indigenous Leadership in Higher Education
ch. 1 Indigenous Leadership in Higher Education
ch. 2 Collected Insights on Indigenous Leadership
Part II: Indigenous Leadership Essays
ch. 3 Views on Indigenous Leadership (Bryan Brayboy)
ch. 4 Designing Tribal Educational Leadership (Cheryl Crazy Bull)
ch. 5 Indigenous Leadership (Cornel Pewewardy)
ch. 6 American Indian Leadership (Ange Bunner)
ch. 7 Educational Warrior (Ferlin Clark)
ch. 8 Indigenous Dissidence: Cultivating a Leadership Politic of Hózhó (Charlotte Davidson)
ch. 9 The Leadership Tree: The Emergence of Indigenous Well-Being Factors in Rural Leadership (Shawn Secatero)
ch. 10 Kuleana Acts: Identity in Action (Erin Kahunawaika’ala Wright)
ch. 11 Identify Yourself (Melvin Monette)
ch. 12 Being of Service to Our People (Heather Shotton)
ch. 13 To Be Mestiza: Blending Leadership Traditions (Alicia Fedelina Chávez)
ch. 14 My Climb to the Highest Rung (Cassandra Manuelito Kerkvliet)
ch. 15 Diary of a Professional Indian (Michael Hanitchak)
ch. 16 Consciously Leading with Ancestors Prayers and Community in the Heart (Robin Starr "Zape-tah-hol-ah" Minthorn)
ch. 17 Leadership Found (Carolyn Kenny)
ch. 18 Path of a Modern Warrior: Leadership Perspectives through Cultural Teachings (Corey Still)
ch. 19 For the Native American Student: Take Opportunities and Don’t be Afraid to Take Leadership Head On…Tips for Success in Higher Education (Jessica Harjo)
ch. 20 Ma Ke Ala Pono: A Journey through My Leadership (Kamakana Aquino)
ch. 21 Aspiring for Something Greater than Myself (Natalie Becenti)
ch. 22 The Seven Teachings: A Full Circle of Support (Tyler Parisien)
ch. 23 Living My Dream, Off the Rez (Shoni Schimmel)
Part III: Recommendations for Higher Education
ch. 24 Toward an Indigenous Transformation of Higher Education
Index
Organizing Academic Work in Higher Education Teaching, learning and identities
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Organizing Academic Work in Higher Education explores how managers influence teaching, learning and academic identities and how new initiatives in teaching and learning change the organizational structure of universities. By building on organizational studies and higher education studies literatures, Organizing Academic Work in Higher Education offers a unique perspective, presenting empirical evidence ...
Click Here for Book Review
Organizing Academic Work in Higher Education explores how managers influence teaching, learning and academic identities and how new initiatives in teaching and learning change the organizational structure of universities. By building on organizational studies and higher education studies literatures, Organizing Academic Work in Higher Education offers a unique perspective, presenting empirical evidence ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Organizing Academic Work in Higher Education explores how managers influence teaching, learning and academic identities and how new initiatives in teaching and learning change the organizational structure of universities. By building on organizational studies and higher education studies literatures, Organizing Academic Work in Higher Education offers a unique perspective, presenting empirical evidence from different parts of the world. This edited collection provides a conceptual frame of organizational change in universities in the context of New Public Management reforms and links it to the core activities of teaching and learning.
Split into four main sections:
- University from the organizational perspective,
- Organizing teaching,
- Organizing learning and
- Organizing identities,
this book uses a strong international perspective to provide insights from three continents regarding the major differences in the relationships between the university as an organization and academics.
It contains highly pertinent, scientifically driven case studies on the role and boundaries of managerial behaviour in universities. It supplies evidence-based knowledge on the effectiveness of management behaviour and tools to university managers and higher education policy-makers worldwide. Academics who aspire to institutionalize their successful academic practices in certain university structures will find this book of particular value.
Organizing Academic Work in Higher Education will be a vital companion for academic interest in higher education management, transformation of universities, teaching, learning, academic work and identities. Bringing together the study of the organizational transformation in higher education with the study of teaching, learning and academic identity, Organizing Academic Work in Higher Education presents a unique cross-national and cross-regional comparative perspective. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Illustrations
Acknowledgements
Contributors
Series editors’ instruction (David Palfreyman, Ted Tapper, and Scott L. Thomas)
Organizing academic work in higher education: teaching, learning, and identities - an introduction (Liudvika Leisyte and Uwe Wilkesmann)
Part 1 - University From the Organizational Perspective
ch. 1 Universities, teaching, and learning (Jay R. Dee)
ch. 2 Teaching matters, too: Different ways of governing a disregarded institution(Uwe Wilkesmann)
ch. 3 Bridging the duality between universities and the academic profession: A tale of protected spaces, strategic gaming and institutional entrepreneurs (Liudvika Leisyte)
ch. 4 Organizing and managing university education (Hamish Coates and Emmaline Bexley)
Part 2 - Organizing Teaching
ch. 5 Toward a conceptualization of faculty decision-making about curricular and instructional change (Lisa R. Lattice and Jennifer R. Pollard)
ch. 6 Institutional (teaching) entrepreneurs wanted! - Considerations on the professoriate’s potency to enhance academic teaching in Germany (Christian J. Schmid and Sabine Lauer)
ch. 7 Organizing teaching in Chinese universities (Shuangye Chen)
Part 3 - Organizing learning
ch. 8 Learners and Organizations: competing patterns of risk, trust and responsibility (Ray Land)
ch. 9 Organizing teaching in project teacher teams across established disciplines using wearable technology – Digital Didactical Designing a new form of practice (Isa Jahnke, Eva Marell-Olsson and Thomas Mejtoff)
ch. 10 Changing organizational structure and culture to enhance teaching and learning: Cases in a university in Hong Kong (Samuel K. W. Chu and Sanny S. W. Mok)
Part 4. Organizing identities
ch. 11 Multiversities and academic identities: change, continuities and complexities (Mary Henkel)
ch. 12 Boundary crossing and maintenance among UK and Dutch bioscientists: Toward hybrid identities of academic entrepreneurs (Liudvika Leisyte and Bengu Hosch-Dayican)
ch. 13 University academic promotion system and academic identity: An institutional logics perspective (Yuzhuo Cai and Gaoming Zheng)
Conclusion (Rosemary Deem)
Index
Click Here for Book Review
Organizing Academic Work in Higher Education explores how managers influence teaching, learning and academic identities and how new initiatives in teaching and learning change the organizational structure of universities. By building on organizational studies and higher education studies literatures, Organizing Academic Work in Higher Education offers a unique perspective, presenting empirical evidence from different parts of the world. This edited collection provides a conceptual frame of organizational change in universities in the context of New Public Management reforms and links it to the core activities of teaching and learning.
Split into four main sections:
- University from the organizational perspective,
- Organizing teaching,
- Organizing learning and
- Organizing identities,
this book uses a strong international perspective to provide insights from three continents regarding the major differences in the relationships between the university as an organization and academics.
It contains highly pertinent, scientifically driven case studies on the role and boundaries of managerial behaviour in universities. It supplies evidence-based knowledge on the effectiveness of management behaviour and tools to university managers and higher education policy-makers worldwide. Academics who aspire to institutionalize their successful academic practices in certain university structures will find this book of particular value.
Organizing Academic Work in Higher Education will be a vital companion for academic interest in higher education management, transformation of universities, teaching, learning, academic work and identities. Bringing together the study of the organizational transformation in higher education with the study of teaching, learning and academic identity, Organizing Academic Work in Higher Education presents a unique cross-national and cross-regional comparative perspective. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Illustrations
Acknowledgements
Contributors
Series editors’ instruction (David Palfreyman, Ted Tapper, and Scott L. Thomas)
Organizing academic work in higher education: teaching, learning, and identities - an introduction (Liudvika Leisyte and Uwe Wilkesmann)
Part 1 - University From the Organizational Perspective
ch. 1 Universities, teaching, and learning (Jay R. Dee)
ch. 2 Teaching matters, too: Different ways of governing a disregarded institution(Uwe Wilkesmann)
ch. 3 Bridging the duality between universities and the academic profession: A tale of protected spaces, strategic gaming and institutional entrepreneurs (Liudvika Leisyte)
ch. 4 Organizing and managing university education (Hamish Coates and Emmaline Bexley)
Part 2 - Organizing Teaching
ch. 5 Toward a conceptualization of faculty decision-making about curricular and instructional change (Lisa R. Lattice and Jennifer R. Pollard)
ch. 6 Institutional (teaching) entrepreneurs wanted! - Considerations on the professoriate’s potency to enhance academic teaching in Germany (Christian J. Schmid and Sabine Lauer)
ch. 7 Organizing teaching in Chinese universities (Shuangye Chen)
Part 3 - Organizing learning
ch. 8 Learners and Organizations: competing patterns of risk, trust and responsibility (Ray Land)
ch. 9 Organizing teaching in project teacher teams across established disciplines using wearable technology – Digital Didactical Designing a new form of practice (Isa Jahnke, Eva Marell-Olsson and Thomas Mejtoff)
ch. 10 Changing organizational structure and culture to enhance teaching and learning: Cases in a university in Hong Kong (Samuel K. W. Chu and Sanny S. W. Mok)
Part 4. Organizing identities
ch. 11 Multiversities and academic identities: change, continuities and complexities (Mary Henkel)
ch. 12 Boundary crossing and maintenance among UK and Dutch bioscientists: Toward hybrid identities of academic entrepreneurs (Liudvika Leisyte and Bengu Hosch-Dayican)
ch. 13 University academic promotion system and academic identity: An institutional logics perspective (Yuzhuo Cai and Gaoming Zheng)
Conclusion (Rosemary Deem)
Index
Additional Info:
Practical advice and candid reflection on the author’s 20 years experience writing both successful and unsuccessful grant proposals.
Practical advice and candid reflection on the author’s 20 years experience writing both successful and unsuccessful grant proposals.
Additional Info:
Practical advice and candid reflection on the author’s 20 years experience writing both successful and unsuccessful grant proposals.
Practical advice and candid reflection on the author’s 20 years experience writing both successful and unsuccessful grant proposals.
A Leader's Guide to Competency-Based Education: From Inception to Implementation
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
As interest in competency-based education (CBE) continues to grow by leaps and bounds, the need for a practical resource to guide development of high-quality CBE programs led the authors to write this book. Until now, there has been no how-to manual that captures in one place a big picture view of CBE ...
Click Here for Book Review
As interest in competency-based education (CBE) continues to grow by leaps and bounds, the need for a practical resource to guide development of high-quality CBE programs led the authors to write this book. Until now, there has been no how-to manual that captures in one place a big picture view of CBE ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
As interest in competency-based education (CBE) continues to grow by leaps and bounds, the need for a practical resource to guide development of high-quality CBE programs led the authors to write this book. Until now, there has been no how-to manual that captures in one place a big picture view of CBE along with the down-to-earth means for building a CBE program.
A variety of pressures are driving the growth in CBE, including the need for alternatives to the current model of higher education (with its dismal completion rates); the potential to better manage the iron triangle of costs, access, and quality; the need for graduates to be better prepared for the workforce; and the demands of adult learners for programs with the flexible time and personalized learning that CBE offers.
Designed to help institutional leaders become more competent in designing, building, and scaling high-quality competency-based education (CBE) programs, this book provides context, guidelines, and process. The process is based on ten design elements that emerged from research funded by the Gates Foundation, and sponsored by AAC&U, ACE, EDUCAUSE, and the Competency-Based Education Network (C-BEN), with thought partners CAEL and Quality Matters. In short, the book will serve administrators, higher education leaders, faculty, staff, and others who have an interest in CBE by:
• Giving context to enable the audience to discover the importance of each design element and to help frame the CBE program (the “why”); • Providing models, checklists, and considerations to determine the “what” component for each design element;
• Sharing outlines and templates for the design elements to enable institutions to build quality, relevant, and rigorous CBE programs (the “how”). (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword by Amy Laitinen
Introduction
Ch 1. Institutional Culture
Ch 2. Program Design
Ch 3. Assessment Essentials and Strategies
Ch 4. The Learning Journey
Ch 5. Faculty and Staff Models and Considerations
Ch 6. Business Models, Processes, and Systems
Ch 7. Approval Considerations
Ch 8. Conclusion and Next Steps
References
About the Authors
Index
Click Here for Book Review
As interest in competency-based education (CBE) continues to grow by leaps and bounds, the need for a practical resource to guide development of high-quality CBE programs led the authors to write this book. Until now, there has been no how-to manual that captures in one place a big picture view of CBE along with the down-to-earth means for building a CBE program.
A variety of pressures are driving the growth in CBE, including the need for alternatives to the current model of higher education (with its dismal completion rates); the potential to better manage the iron triangle of costs, access, and quality; the need for graduates to be better prepared for the workforce; and the demands of adult learners for programs with the flexible time and personalized learning that CBE offers.
Designed to help institutional leaders become more competent in designing, building, and scaling high-quality competency-based education (CBE) programs, this book provides context, guidelines, and process. The process is based on ten design elements that emerged from research funded by the Gates Foundation, and sponsored by AAC&U, ACE, EDUCAUSE, and the Competency-Based Education Network (C-BEN), with thought partners CAEL and Quality Matters. In short, the book will serve administrators, higher education leaders, faculty, staff, and others who have an interest in CBE by:
• Giving context to enable the audience to discover the importance of each design element and to help frame the CBE program (the “why”); • Providing models, checklists, and considerations to determine the “what” component for each design element;
• Sharing outlines and templates for the design elements to enable institutions to build quality, relevant, and rigorous CBE programs (the “how”). (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword by Amy Laitinen
Introduction
Ch 1. Institutional Culture
Ch 2. Program Design
Ch 3. Assessment Essentials and Strategies
Ch 4. The Learning Journey
Ch 5. Faculty and Staff Models and Considerations
Ch 6. Business Models, Processes, and Systems
Ch 7. Approval Considerations
Ch 8. Conclusion and Next Steps
References
About the Authors
Index
Additional Info:
This rich and insightful book explores the critical process of mentoring and presents practical tools for facitlitating the experience from beginning to end. It is based on Laurent A. Daloz's popular and widely used conept that mentoring is a learning journey, in which the mentor and mentee serve as companions along the way. Now leaders, managers,teachers, and leaders form any career, professional, or educational setting can successfully navigate the ...
This rich and insightful book explores the critical process of mentoring and presents practical tools for facitlitating the experience from beginning to end. It is based on Laurent A. Daloz's popular and widely used conept that mentoring is a learning journey, in which the mentor and mentee serve as companions along the way. Now leaders, managers,teachers, and leaders form any career, professional, or educational setting can successfully navigate the ...
Additional Info:
This rich and insightful book explores the critical process of mentoring and presents practical tools for facitlitating the experience from beginning to end. It is based on Laurent A. Daloz's popular and widely used conept that mentoring is a learning journey, in which the mentor and mentee serve as companions along the way. Now leaders, managers,teachers, and leaders form any career, professional, or educational setting can successfully navigate the learning journey by using the hand-on worksheets and exericses in this unique resource. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
The Author
ch. 1 Grounding the Work: Focusing on Learning
ch. 2 Working the Ground: Considering Context
ch. 3 To Everything There Is a Season: Predictable Phases
ch. 4 Tilling the Soil: Preparing
ch. 5 Planting Seeds: Negotiating
ch. 6 Nurturing Growth: Enabling
ch. 7 Reaping the Harvest: Coming to Closure
ch. 8 Regenerating Personal Growth Through Mentoring
App. A Creating a Mentoring Culture
App. B Digging Deeper: Resources for Further Learning
References
Index
This rich and insightful book explores the critical process of mentoring and presents practical tools for facitlitating the experience from beginning to end. It is based on Laurent A. Daloz's popular and widely used conept that mentoring is a learning journey, in which the mentor and mentee serve as companions along the way. Now leaders, managers,teachers, and leaders form any career, professional, or educational setting can successfully navigate the learning journey by using the hand-on worksheets and exericses in this unique resource. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
The Author
ch. 1 Grounding the Work: Focusing on Learning
ch. 2 Working the Ground: Considering Context
ch. 3 To Everything There Is a Season: Predictable Phases
ch. 4 Tilling the Soil: Preparing
ch. 5 Planting Seeds: Negotiating
ch. 6 Nurturing Growth: Enabling
ch. 7 Reaping the Harvest: Coming to Closure
ch. 8 Regenerating Personal Growth Through Mentoring
App. A Creating a Mentoring Culture
App. B Digging Deeper: Resources for Further Learning
References
Index
Inquiry Into the College Classroom: A Journey Toward Scholarly Teaching
Additional Info:
An essential companion for university faculty interested in conducting scholarly inquiry into their classroom teaching, this practical guide presents a formal model for making visible the careful, difficult, and intentional scholarly work entailed in exploring a teaching question. As a how-to guide, this is an invaluable resource for planning and conducting classroom research—formulating questions and hypotheses, defining a data collection methodology, collecting data, measuring the impact, and documenting the ...
An essential companion for university faculty interested in conducting scholarly inquiry into their classroom teaching, this practical guide presents a formal model for making visible the careful, difficult, and intentional scholarly work entailed in exploring a teaching question. As a how-to guide, this is an invaluable resource for planning and conducting classroom research—formulating questions and hypotheses, defining a data collection methodology, collecting data, measuring the impact, and documenting the ...
Additional Info:
An essential companion for university faculty interested in conducting scholarly inquiry into their classroom teaching, this practical guide presents a formal model for making visible the careful, difficult, and intentional scholarly work entailed in exploring a teaching question. As a how-to guide, this is an invaluable resource for planning and conducting classroom research—formulating questions and hypotheses, defining a data collection methodology, collecting data, measuring the impact, and documenting the results. Inquiry Into the College Classroom is filled with richly illustrative examples that highlight how university faculty from a range of academic disciplines have performed scholarly inquiries into their teaching and leads faculty on a journey that includes:
* Developing a formal model for structuring the exploration of a classroom inquiry question
* Providing a practical and useful guide for faculty interested in exploring teaching and learning challenges
* Detailing faculty experiences in measuring specific changes in student learning or perspectives
* Demonstrating how to document classroom inquiry in a form to be shared, used, and reviewed by other faculty
* Sharing useful and practical suggestions for getting started with a classroom inquiry
* Highlighting different models for disseminating classroom inquiry work
* Linking classroom inquiry to larger conversations about the scholarship of teaching and learning
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Exhibits
About the Authors
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 A Guide for Scholarly Inquiry into Teaching
What Is Happening in My Classroom?
Teaching: A Scholarly Journey
A Model for Your Classroom Inquiry
Reflecting on Course Background, History, and Development
Identifying an Issue to Investigate
Defining an Inquiry Hypothesis
Developing an Investigative Plan
Relating Your Inquiry to What Has Been Done Before
Seeking Institutional Approval and Student Consent
Teaching the Course
Interpreting and Evaluating Your Findings
Reflecting on the Inquiry Process
Checklist for Assessing Classroom Inquiry
What's Next
ch. 2 The Basic Structure of Classroom Inquiry
ch. 3 Incorporating Additional Forms of Data Collection
ch. 4 Using Classroom Inquiry to Answer Multiple Questions
ch. 5 Overcoming Challenges With Data Collection
ch. 6 Linking Classroom Inquiry With Disciplinary Research
ch. 7 Obtaining Useful Inquiry Results, but More Data Is Needed
ch. 8 Using Classroom Inquiry to Evaluate New Assessment Measures
ch. 9 Classroom Inquiry for Measuring Feedback on Student Learning and Aptitudes
ch. 10 Classroom Inquiry and Scholarly Teaching
ch. 11 Beginning Your Scholarly Journey
Lessons Concerning Classroom Inquiry
Practical Advice forConducting Your Inquiry
From Scholarly Teaching to the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning
Models for Disseminating Your Inquiry Work
Resources for Learning More
An Invitation to Set Out on Your Scholarly Journey
Bibliography
Index
An essential companion for university faculty interested in conducting scholarly inquiry into their classroom teaching, this practical guide presents a formal model for making visible the careful, difficult, and intentional scholarly work entailed in exploring a teaching question. As a how-to guide, this is an invaluable resource for planning and conducting classroom research—formulating questions and hypotheses, defining a data collection methodology, collecting data, measuring the impact, and documenting the results. Inquiry Into the College Classroom is filled with richly illustrative examples that highlight how university faculty from a range of academic disciplines have performed scholarly inquiries into their teaching and leads faculty on a journey that includes:
* Developing a formal model for structuring the exploration of a classroom inquiry question
* Providing a practical and useful guide for faculty interested in exploring teaching and learning challenges
* Detailing faculty experiences in measuring specific changes in student learning or perspectives
* Demonstrating how to document classroom inquiry in a form to be shared, used, and reviewed by other faculty
* Sharing useful and practical suggestions for getting started with a classroom inquiry
* Highlighting different models for disseminating classroom inquiry work
* Linking classroom inquiry to larger conversations about the scholarship of teaching and learning
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Exhibits
About the Authors
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 A Guide for Scholarly Inquiry into Teaching
What Is Happening in My Classroom?
Teaching: A Scholarly Journey
A Model for Your Classroom Inquiry
Reflecting on Course Background, History, and Development
Identifying an Issue to Investigate
Defining an Inquiry Hypothesis
Developing an Investigative Plan
Relating Your Inquiry to What Has Been Done Before
Seeking Institutional Approval and Student Consent
Teaching the Course
Interpreting and Evaluating Your Findings
Reflecting on the Inquiry Process
Checklist for Assessing Classroom Inquiry
What's Next
ch. 2 The Basic Structure of Classroom Inquiry
ch. 3 Incorporating Additional Forms of Data Collection
ch. 4 Using Classroom Inquiry to Answer Multiple Questions
ch. 5 Overcoming Challenges With Data Collection
ch. 6 Linking Classroom Inquiry With Disciplinary Research
ch. 7 Obtaining Useful Inquiry Results, but More Data Is Needed
ch. 8 Using Classroom Inquiry to Evaluate New Assessment Measures
ch. 9 Classroom Inquiry for Measuring Feedback on Student Learning and Aptitudes
ch. 10 Classroom Inquiry and Scholarly Teaching
ch. 11 Beginning Your Scholarly Journey
Lessons Concerning Classroom Inquiry
Practical Advice forConducting Your Inquiry
From Scholarly Teaching to the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning
Models for Disseminating Your Inquiry Work
Resources for Learning More
An Invitation to Set Out on Your Scholarly Journey
Bibliography
Index
Additional Info:
Discussions surrounding collegial practices and exchanges are common, but this volume departs from the usual and focuses on serious problems facing professionals in higher education--from being "open to corrections" and paying more attention to the "ethics of higher education," to creating collegial models that counter the traditional models of "insistent individualism." Bennett looks at the basic structure of what academic professionalism in higher education is and could be. Focusing on ...
Discussions surrounding collegial practices and exchanges are common, but this volume departs from the usual and focuses on serious problems facing professionals in higher education--from being "open to corrections" and paying more attention to the "ethics of higher education," to creating collegial models that counter the traditional models of "insistent individualism." Bennett looks at the basic structure of what academic professionalism in higher education is and could be. Focusing on ...
Additional Info:
Discussions surrounding collegial practices and exchanges are common, but this volume departs from the usual and focuses on serious problems facing professionals in higher education--from being "open to corrections" and paying more attention to the "ethics of higher education," to creating collegial models that counter the traditional models of "insistent individualism." Bennett looks at the basic structure of what academic professionalism in higher education is and could be. Focusing on the flaws of autonomy that weaken the academy, he develops a more "relational model," which emphasizes "togetherness," "constructive education," "roles and virtues," "hospitality," and "thoughtfulness." He defines and reviews criticism, and he covers topics such as faculty individualism, departmental separatism, generational differences, codes of ethics, collective bargaining, and the competition in the academy for funding and students. The author does not call for an "unreachable academic utopia," but rather for change toward incorporating the collegial ethic of hospitableness and thoughtfulness. Not a bad idea in a world that often seems self-absorbed and disconnected. Upper-division undergraduates through professionals. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Prologue
ch. 1 Assessing the Academy
ch. 2 Self and Community in the Collegium
ch. 3 Professionalism: Academic or Collegial?
ch. 4 Institutions: Fragmented or Connected?
ch. 5 Relationality in Teaching and Scholarship
ch. 6 Creating and Nourishing Communities of Hope
Epilogue
Bibliography
Index
Discussions surrounding collegial practices and exchanges are common, but this volume departs from the usual and focuses on serious problems facing professionals in higher education--from being "open to corrections" and paying more attention to the "ethics of higher education," to creating collegial models that counter the traditional models of "insistent individualism." Bennett looks at the basic structure of what academic professionalism in higher education is and could be. Focusing on the flaws of autonomy that weaken the academy, he develops a more "relational model," which emphasizes "togetherness," "constructive education," "roles and virtues," "hospitality," and "thoughtfulness." He defines and reviews criticism, and he covers topics such as faculty individualism, departmental separatism, generational differences, codes of ethics, collective bargaining, and the competition in the academy for funding and students. The author does not call for an "unreachable academic utopia," but rather for change toward incorporating the collegial ethic of hospitableness and thoughtfulness. Not a bad idea in a world that often seems self-absorbed and disconnected. Upper-division undergraduates through professionals. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Prologue
ch. 1 Assessing the Academy
ch. 2 Self and Community in the Collegium
ch. 3 Professionalism: Academic or Collegial?
ch. 4 Institutions: Fragmented or Connected?
ch. 5 Relationality in Teaching and Scholarship
ch. 6 Creating and Nourishing Communities of Hope
Epilogue
Bibliography
Index
Writing for Educators: Personal Essays and Practical Advice
Additional Info:
This book is for new faculty, graduate students, teachers, administrators, and other academics who want to write more clearly and have their work published. The essays focus on writing journal articles, dissertations, grants, edited books, and other writing in educational settings. The authors are educators who share their own first-hand experiences that provide novice writers with important knowledge and support in the quest for success in professional scholarly writing. A ...
This book is for new faculty, graduate students, teachers, administrators, and other academics who want to write more clearly and have their work published. The essays focus on writing journal articles, dissertations, grants, edited books, and other writing in educational settings. The authors are educators who share their own first-hand experiences that provide novice writers with important knowledge and support in the quest for success in professional scholarly writing. A ...
Additional Info:
This book is for new faculty, graduate students, teachers, administrators, and other academics who want to write more clearly and have their work published. The essays focus on writing journal articles, dissertations, grants, edited books, and other writing in educational settings. The authors are educators who share their own first-hand experiences that provide novice writers with important knowledge and support in the quest for success in professional scholarly writing. A variety of authors discuss the writer's craft, including issues of voice, audience, planning,drafting, revision, conventions, style, submitting to journals, editorial review, and editing. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Section I: Finding Your Voice
ch. 1 What? Me Write? Six Reasons to Write for Publication (James J. Carpenter)
ch. 2 Finding Ideas and Developing the Confidence to Write for Publication (Chris Pescatore)
ch. 3 Writing-to-Learn in the Process of Researching (Maureen Boyd)
ch. 4 Reading as a Way to Develop a Writing Identity (Nicholas Paley)
Section II: Writing An Article Or Dissertation
ch. 5 From Idea to Printed Page (Marilyn Tallerico)
ch. 6 Writing to be Read: Clarity and Power in Scholarly Writing (C. Beth Rainforth)
ch. 7 Creating a Corpus: Writing to Shape Practice (Beverly Rainforth)
ch. 8 Nine Notes From a Novice: Publishing a Teaching Idea (Margaret Golden)
ch. 9 Writing With Publication in Mind (Joan Bouza Koster)
ch. 10 Completing a Dissertation in Just Over 2 Years (Holly Hansen-Thomas)
ch. 11 Four Children and a Dissertation (Sandi Graham)
Section III: Reviews, Revising, and Editing
ch. 12 Surviving the Review Process: The Good, the Bad, and the Ugly (Jenny Gordon)
ch. 13 Rethink, Rewrite, Revise: Mining the Gold (Heather K. Sheridan-Thomas)
ch. 14 Revisiting for Successful Publication (Mitch Rosenwald)
ch. 15 Editing a Book: Nine Questions and Some Answers (Karen Bromley)
ch. 16 An Editor's Perspective on the Importance of Style (Jean Schmittau)
Section IV: Grant Writing
ch. 17 Writing a Grant Proposal (Karen Bromley)
ch. 18 Grant Writing for Teachers (Pat Krizan)
ch. 19 The Collaborative Grant Development Process (Allison Alden)
Section V: Other Writing In Educational Settings
ch. 20 On-Demand Writing by Administrators (Carol Stark)
ch. 21 A Principal's Writing Experiences (Doug Green)
ch. 22 My Surprising Life as an Author (Jo Malin)
Appendices
About the Authors
This book is for new faculty, graduate students, teachers, administrators, and other academics who want to write more clearly and have their work published. The essays focus on writing journal articles, dissertations, grants, edited books, and other writing in educational settings. The authors are educators who share their own first-hand experiences that provide novice writers with important knowledge and support in the quest for success in professional scholarly writing. A variety of authors discuss the writer's craft, including issues of voice, audience, planning,drafting, revision, conventions, style, submitting to journals, editorial review, and editing. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Section I: Finding Your Voice
ch. 1 What? Me Write? Six Reasons to Write for Publication (James J. Carpenter)
ch. 2 Finding Ideas and Developing the Confidence to Write for Publication (Chris Pescatore)
ch. 3 Writing-to-Learn in the Process of Researching (Maureen Boyd)
ch. 4 Reading as a Way to Develop a Writing Identity (Nicholas Paley)
Section II: Writing An Article Or Dissertation
ch. 5 From Idea to Printed Page (Marilyn Tallerico)
ch. 6 Writing to be Read: Clarity and Power in Scholarly Writing (C. Beth Rainforth)
ch. 7 Creating a Corpus: Writing to Shape Practice (Beverly Rainforth)
ch. 8 Nine Notes From a Novice: Publishing a Teaching Idea (Margaret Golden)
ch. 9 Writing With Publication in Mind (Joan Bouza Koster)
ch. 10 Completing a Dissertation in Just Over 2 Years (Holly Hansen-Thomas)
ch. 11 Four Children and a Dissertation (Sandi Graham)
Section III: Reviews, Revising, and Editing
ch. 12 Surviving the Review Process: The Good, the Bad, and the Ugly (Jenny Gordon)
ch. 13 Rethink, Rewrite, Revise: Mining the Gold (Heather K. Sheridan-Thomas)
ch. 14 Revisiting for Successful Publication (Mitch Rosenwald)
ch. 15 Editing a Book: Nine Questions and Some Answers (Karen Bromley)
ch. 16 An Editor's Perspective on the Importance of Style (Jean Schmittau)
Section IV: Grant Writing
ch. 17 Writing a Grant Proposal (Karen Bromley)
ch. 18 Grant Writing for Teachers (Pat Krizan)
ch. 19 The Collaborative Grant Development Process (Allison Alden)
Section V: Other Writing In Educational Settings
ch. 20 On-Demand Writing by Administrators (Carol Stark)
ch. 21 A Principal's Writing Experiences (Doug Green)
ch. 22 My Surprising Life as an Author (Jo Malin)
Appendices
About the Authors
Additional Info:
Higher education is becoming destabilized in the face of extraordinarily rapid change. The composition of the academy's most valuable asset—the faculty—and the essential nature of faculty work are being transformed. Jack H. Schuster and Martin J. Finkelstein describe the transformation of the American faculty in the most extensive and ambitious analysis of the American academic profession undertaken in a generation.
A century ago the American research ...
Higher education is becoming destabilized in the face of extraordinarily rapid change. The composition of the academy's most valuable asset—the faculty—and the essential nature of faculty work are being transformed. Jack H. Schuster and Martin J. Finkelstein describe the transformation of the American faculty in the most extensive and ambitious analysis of the American academic profession undertaken in a generation.
A century ago the American research ...
Additional Info:
Higher education is becoming destabilized in the face of extraordinarily rapid change. The composition of the academy's most valuable asset—the faculty—and the essential nature of faculty work are being transformed. Jack H. Schuster and Martin J. Finkelstein describe the transformation of the American faculty in the most extensive and ambitious analysis of the American academic profession undertaken in a generation.
A century ago the American research university emerged as a new organizational form animated by the professionalized, discipline-based scholar. The research university model persisted through two world wars and greatly varying economic conditions. In recent years, however, a new order has surfaced, organized around a globalized, knowledge-based economy, powerful privatization and market forces, and stunning new information technologies. These developments have transformed the higher education enterprise in ways barely imaginable in generations past.
At the heart of that transformation, but largely invisible, has been a restructuring of academic appointments, academic work, and academic careers—a reconfiguring widely decried but heretofore inadequately described. This volume depicts the scope and depth of the transformation, combing empirical data drawn from three decades of national higher education surveys. The authors' portrait, at once startling and disturbing, provides the context for interpreting these developments as part of a larger structural evolution of the national higher education system. They outline the stakes for the nation and the challenging work to be done. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Contents
Preface
Acknowledgments
List of Figures and Tables
Part One. Overview of the American Faculty
ch. 1. Establishing the Framework
ch. 2. The American Faculty in Perspective
ch. 3. The Professoriate in Profile
Part Two. The Faculty at Work
ch. 4. The Changing Complexion of Faculty Work
ch. 5. Academic Culture and Values and the Quality of Worklife
Part Three. The Academic Career
ch. 6. The Changing Academic Career
ch. 7. The Revolution in Academic Appointments: A Closer Look
ch. 8. Compensation and Academic Careers: Trends and Issues
ch. 9. Pathways to the Professoriate
Part Four. Contemporary Academic Life: An Assessment
ch. 10. American Academic Life Restructured
ch. 11. What's Ahead? Agendas for Policy Analysis, Research, and Action on Academic
Staffing
Appendixes
A. Descriptions of the National Faculty Surveys
B. Selected National Faculty Surveys: A Concordance of Contents
C. Understanding Faculty Trends: Challenges to and Strategies for Interpreting Survey Data
D. Variables for Classifying Faculty Subgroups
E. Master Notes on Contents of Tables and Figures
F. Academic Appointments: Historical Milestones
G. Faculty Compensation: Data Sources
H. Note on Accessing Survey Instruments
I. Faculty Diversity: Race and Ethnicity Categories
J. Appendix Tables and Figures
List of Tables
Tables
References
About the Authors
Index
Higher education is becoming destabilized in the face of extraordinarily rapid change. The composition of the academy's most valuable asset—the faculty—and the essential nature of faculty work are being transformed. Jack H. Schuster and Martin J. Finkelstein describe the transformation of the American faculty in the most extensive and ambitious analysis of the American academic profession undertaken in a generation.
A century ago the American research university emerged as a new organizational form animated by the professionalized, discipline-based scholar. The research university model persisted through two world wars and greatly varying economic conditions. In recent years, however, a new order has surfaced, organized around a globalized, knowledge-based economy, powerful privatization and market forces, and stunning new information technologies. These developments have transformed the higher education enterprise in ways barely imaginable in generations past.
At the heart of that transformation, but largely invisible, has been a restructuring of academic appointments, academic work, and academic careers—a reconfiguring widely decried but heretofore inadequately described. This volume depicts the scope and depth of the transformation, combing empirical data drawn from three decades of national higher education surveys. The authors' portrait, at once startling and disturbing, provides the context for interpreting these developments as part of a larger structural evolution of the national higher education system. They outline the stakes for the nation and the challenging work to be done. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Contents
Preface
Acknowledgments
List of Figures and Tables
Part One. Overview of the American Faculty
ch. 1. Establishing the Framework
ch. 2. The American Faculty in Perspective
ch. 3. The Professoriate in Profile
Part Two. The Faculty at Work
ch. 4. The Changing Complexion of Faculty Work
ch. 5. Academic Culture and Values and the Quality of Worklife
Part Three. The Academic Career
ch. 6. The Changing Academic Career
ch. 7. The Revolution in Academic Appointments: A Closer Look
ch. 8. Compensation and Academic Careers: Trends and Issues
ch. 9. Pathways to the Professoriate
Part Four. Contemporary Academic Life: An Assessment
ch. 10. American Academic Life Restructured
ch. 11. What's Ahead? Agendas for Policy Analysis, Research, and Action on Academic
Staffing
Appendixes
A. Descriptions of the National Faculty Surveys
B. Selected National Faculty Surveys: A Concordance of Contents
C. Understanding Faculty Trends: Challenges to and Strategies for Interpreting Survey Data
D. Variables for Classifying Faculty Subgroups
E. Master Notes on Contents of Tables and Figures
F. Academic Appointments: Historical Milestones
G. Faculty Compensation: Data Sources
H. Note on Accessing Survey Instruments
I. Faculty Diversity: Race and Ethnicity Categories
J. Appendix Tables and Figures
List of Tables
Tables
References
About the Authors
Index
Additional Info:
Mapping the Territory of Teaching offers a review of the most current and important writings on the topic of scholarship of teaching and learning in higher education. One of the foremost experts in the field, Editor Maryellen Weimer is uniquely qualified to bring this information together. (From the Publisher)
Mapping the Territory of Teaching offers a review of the most current and important writings on the topic of scholarship of teaching and learning in higher education. One of the foremost experts in the field, Editor Maryellen Weimer is uniquely qualified to bring this information together. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Mapping the Territory of Teaching offers a review of the most current and important writings on the topic of scholarship of teaching and learning in higher education. One of the foremost experts in the field, Editor Maryellen Weimer is uniquely qualified to bring this information together. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Why and how to look
ch. 2 What to look at
ch. 3 Scholarly work on teaching and learning : an overview
ch. 4 The lens of experience : wisdom of practice
ch. 5 The lens of objectivity : research scholarship
ch. 6 Promising possibilities
ch. 7 Looking ahead : learning from what's behind
ch. 8 From looking to doing : advice for faculty
ch. 9 From looking to doing : advice for academic leaders
App. A Discipline-based pedagogical periodicals
App. B Cross-disciplinary and topical pedagogical periodicals
Mapping the Territory of Teaching offers a review of the most current and important writings on the topic of scholarship of teaching and learning in higher education. One of the foremost experts in the field, Editor Maryellen Weimer is uniquely qualified to bring this information together. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Why and how to look
ch. 2 What to look at
ch. 3 Scholarly work on teaching and learning : an overview
ch. 4 The lens of experience : wisdom of practice
ch. 5 The lens of objectivity : research scholarship
ch. 6 Promising possibilities
ch. 7 Looking ahead : learning from what's behind
ch. 8 From looking to doing : advice for faculty
ch. 9 From looking to doing : advice for academic leaders
App. A Discipline-based pedagogical periodicals
App. B Cross-disciplinary and topical pedagogical periodicals
Additional Info:
In this book, seventeen senior leaders from faith-based colleges and universities across North America--collectively bringing with them hundreds of years of leadership experience--share fresh insights into the theory and practice of Christian higher education leadership. These authors speak honestly about the successes, failures, and demands that have shaped their current leadership decisions and their visions for the future.In this book, seventeen senior leaders from faith-based colleges and universities across ...
In this book, seventeen senior leaders from faith-based colleges and universities across North America--collectively bringing with them hundreds of years of leadership experience--share fresh insights into the theory and practice of Christian higher education leadership. These authors speak honestly about the successes, failures, and demands that have shaped their current leadership decisions and their visions for the future.In this book, seventeen senior leaders from faith-based colleges and universities across ...
Additional Info:
In this book, seventeen senior leaders from faith-based colleges and universities across North America--collectively bringing with them hundreds of years of leadership experience--share fresh insights into the theory and practice of Christian higher education leadership. These authors speak honestly about the successes, failures, and demands that have shaped their current leadership decisions and their visions for the future.In this book, seventeen senior leaders from faith-based colleges and universities across North America--collectively bringing with them hundreds of years of leadership experience--share fresh insights into the theory and practice of Christian higher education leadership. These authors speak honestly about the successes, failures, and demands that have shaped their current leadership decisions and their visions for the future. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Foreword
Introduction
Part I: The Interior Life of Thriving Leaders
ch. 1 Thriving as a Leader: The Role of Resilience and Relationships
ch. 2 Leading from the Center: Body and Place
ch. 3 Honoring Giftedness: A Strengths Approach to Leadership
Part II: The Social Intelligence of Thriving Leaders
ch. 4 Tell Me a Story: Using as Old Tool to Sustain Culture, Embrace Change, and Envision a Bold Future
ch. 5 The Difference Trust Makes
ch. 6 Orchestrating a Life of Influence
ch. 7 Inside Faculty Culture
ch. 8 Building a Powerful Leadership Team
ch. 9 Mentoring for Leadership
Part III: How Leaders Can Shape a Thriving Organizational Culture
ch. 10 Metaphors Matter: Organizational Culture Shaped by Image
ch. 11 Beyond "Hospitality": Moving out of the Host-Guest Metaphor into an Intercultural "World House"
ch. 12 Toward a Distinctive, Christ-Honoring Campus Culture: Working the Vision
ch. 13 Leading a Turnaround and the Joy of a Third-Class Ticket
ch. 14 Leadership in the Fifth Dimension: Balancing Time with the Timeless
Epilogue
About the Author
About the Contributors
Bibliography
In this book, seventeen senior leaders from faith-based colleges and universities across North America--collectively bringing with them hundreds of years of leadership experience--share fresh insights into the theory and practice of Christian higher education leadership. These authors speak honestly about the successes, failures, and demands that have shaped their current leadership decisions and their visions for the future.In this book, seventeen senior leaders from faith-based colleges and universities across North America--collectively bringing with them hundreds of years of leadership experience--share fresh insights into the theory and practice of Christian higher education leadership. These authors speak honestly about the successes, failures, and demands that have shaped their current leadership decisions and their visions for the future. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Foreword
Introduction
Part I: The Interior Life of Thriving Leaders
ch. 1 Thriving as a Leader: The Role of Resilience and Relationships
ch. 2 Leading from the Center: Body and Place
ch. 3 Honoring Giftedness: A Strengths Approach to Leadership
Part II: The Social Intelligence of Thriving Leaders
ch. 4 Tell Me a Story: Using as Old Tool to Sustain Culture, Embrace Change, and Envision a Bold Future
ch. 5 The Difference Trust Makes
ch. 6 Orchestrating a Life of Influence
ch. 7 Inside Faculty Culture
ch. 8 Building a Powerful Leadership Team
ch. 9 Mentoring for Leadership
Part III: How Leaders Can Shape a Thriving Organizational Culture
ch. 10 Metaphors Matter: Organizational Culture Shaped by Image
ch. 11 Beyond "Hospitality": Moving out of the Host-Guest Metaphor into an Intercultural "World House"
ch. 12 Toward a Distinctive, Christ-Honoring Campus Culture: Working the Vision
ch. 13 Leading a Turnaround and the Joy of a Third-Class Ticket
ch. 14 Leadership in the Fifth Dimension: Balancing Time with the Timeless
Epilogue
About the Author
About the Contributors
Bibliography
A Handbook on Legal Issues in Theological Field Education
Additional Info:
When you think about legal issues and field education, how do you feel?
What thoughts come to mind when you think of culture in this context?
What stories and teachings from our faith tradition can inform the interface between legal issues and field education?
(From the Publisher)
When you think about legal issues and field education, how do you feel?
What thoughts come to mind when you think of culture in this context?
What stories and teachings from our faith tradition can inform the interface between legal issues and field education?
(From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
When you think about legal issues and field education, how do you feel?
What thoughts come to mind when you think of culture in this context?
What stories and teachings from our faith tradition can inform the interface between legal issues and field education?
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
(Collaborative effort of the Presbyterian Theological Field Educators (PTFE)
Preface
ch. 1 Legal issues and theological field education
ch. 2 How can students and supervisors get themselves and their theological schools in trouble in a field education placement?
ch. 3 What do field educators need to know about students?
ch. 4 What do field educators need to know about supervisors?
ch. 5 Legal issues and the administration of theological field education
ch. 6 Legal issues and the teaching of theological field education
Resources
Appendix
When you think about legal issues and field education, how do you feel?
What thoughts come to mind when you think of culture in this context?
What stories and teachings from our faith tradition can inform the interface between legal issues and field education?
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
(Collaborative effort of the Presbyterian Theological Field Educators (PTFE)
Preface
ch. 1 Legal issues and theological field education
ch. 2 How can students and supervisors get themselves and their theological schools in trouble in a field education placement?
ch. 3 What do field educators need to know about students?
ch. 4 What do field educators need to know about supervisors?
ch. 5 Legal issues and the administration of theological field education
ch. 6 Legal issues and the teaching of theological field education
Resources
Appendix
Advice for New Faculty Members
Additional Info:
Nihil Nimus is a unique and essential guide to the start of a successful academic career. As its title suggests (nothing in excess), it advocates moderation in ways of working, based on the single-most reliable difference between new faculty who thrive and those who struggle. By following its practical, easy-to-use rules, novice faculty can learn to teach with the highest levels of student approval, involvement, and comprehension, with only modest ...
Nihil Nimus is a unique and essential guide to the start of a successful academic career. As its title suggests (nothing in excess), it advocates moderation in ways of working, based on the single-most reliable difference between new faculty who thrive and those who struggle. By following its practical, easy-to-use rules, novice faculty can learn to teach with the highest levels of student approval, involvement, and comprehension, with only modest ...
Additional Info:
Nihil Nimus is a unique and essential guide to the start of a successful academic career. As its title suggests (nothing in excess), it advocates moderation in ways of working, based on the single-most reliable difference between new faculty who thrive and those who struggle. By following its practical, easy-to-use rules, novice faculty can learn to teach with the highest levels of student approval, involvement, and comprehension, with only modest preparation times and a greater reliance on spontaneity and student participation. Similarly, new faculty can use its rule-based practices to write with ease, increasing productivity, creativity, and publishability through brief, daily sessions of focused and relaxed work. And they can socialize more successfully by learning about often-misunderstood aspects of academic culture, including mentoring. Each rule in Advice for New Faculty Members has been tested on hundreds of new faculty and proven effective over the long run -- even in attaining permanent appointment. It is the first guidebook to move beyond anecdotes and surmises for its directives, based on the author's extensive experience and solid research in the areas of staff and faculty development. For new teachers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface.
Introduction: Why New Professors Need Timely Advice.
ch. 1 Moderate Work at Teaching
Wait.
Begin Before Feeling Ready.
Prepare and Present in Brief, Regular Sessions.
Stop.
Moderate Over-attachment and Overreaction.
Moderate Negative Thinking and Strong Emotions.
Let Others Do Some of the Work.
Moderate Classroom Incivilities.
Summary and Extension of the Nihil Nimus Approach to Teaching.
ch. 2 Write in Mindful Ways.
Rationale for a Mindful Approach to Writing.
Wait.
Begin Before Feeling Ready.
Prepare and Present in Brief, Regular Sessions.
Stop.
Moderate Over-attachment and Overreaction.
Moderate Negative Thinking and Strong Emotions.
Let Others Do Some of the Work.
Moderate Classroom Incivilities.
A Summary of Chapter 2 and its Mindful Ways of Writing.
ch. 3 Socialize and Serve with Compassion.
Introduction: Why Compassion Is Ultimately Important.
Learn about Academic Culture, Early, Patiently.
Let Others Do Some of Your Work.
Combine Self-Service with Service for Others.
General Summary: Catalog Summary of Nihil Nimus Rules
Sources.
Appendix: Readings by the Numbers.
Nihil Nimus is a unique and essential guide to the start of a successful academic career. As its title suggests (nothing in excess), it advocates moderation in ways of working, based on the single-most reliable difference between new faculty who thrive and those who struggle. By following its practical, easy-to-use rules, novice faculty can learn to teach with the highest levels of student approval, involvement, and comprehension, with only modest preparation times and a greater reliance on spontaneity and student participation. Similarly, new faculty can use its rule-based practices to write with ease, increasing productivity, creativity, and publishability through brief, daily sessions of focused and relaxed work. And they can socialize more successfully by learning about often-misunderstood aspects of academic culture, including mentoring. Each rule in Advice for New Faculty Members has been tested on hundreds of new faculty and proven effective over the long run -- even in attaining permanent appointment. It is the first guidebook to move beyond anecdotes and surmises for its directives, based on the author's extensive experience and solid research in the areas of staff and faculty development. For new teachers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface.
Introduction: Why New Professors Need Timely Advice.
ch. 1 Moderate Work at Teaching
Wait.
Begin Before Feeling Ready.
Prepare and Present in Brief, Regular Sessions.
Stop.
Moderate Over-attachment and Overreaction.
Moderate Negative Thinking and Strong Emotions.
Let Others Do Some of the Work.
Moderate Classroom Incivilities.
Summary and Extension of the Nihil Nimus Approach to Teaching.
ch. 2 Write in Mindful Ways.
Rationale for a Mindful Approach to Writing.
Wait.
Begin Before Feeling Ready.
Prepare and Present in Brief, Regular Sessions.
Stop.
Moderate Over-attachment and Overreaction.
Moderate Negative Thinking and Strong Emotions.
Let Others Do Some of the Work.
Moderate Classroom Incivilities.
A Summary of Chapter 2 and its Mindful Ways of Writing.
ch. 3 Socialize and Serve with Compassion.
Introduction: Why Compassion Is Ultimately Important.
Learn about Academic Culture, Early, Patiently.
Let Others Do Some of Your Work.
Combine Self-Service with Service for Others.
General Summary: Catalog Summary of Nihil Nimus Rules
Sources.
Appendix: Readings by the Numbers.
The Economics and Organization of Theological Education
Additional Info:
Journal Issue.
Journal Issue.
Additional Info:
Journal Issue.
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Protestant Theological Education in 1968
ch. 2 The 1970s: Alternatives for Change
Appendix: Seminary Facility Planning: A Case Study of Alternative
Approaches
List of Tables
List of Figures
Journal Issue.
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Protestant Theological Education in 1968
ch. 2 The 1970s: Alternatives for Change
Appendix: Seminary Facility Planning: A Case Study of Alternative
Approaches
List of Tables
List of Figures
So You Want to Be a Professor? A Handbook for Graduate Students
Additional Info:
Maybe you'd like to combine the two loves of your life, teaching and scholarship, and perhaps build a satisfying and profitable academic career, but you're not sure if this is really what you want or how to go about it. Or maybe you've made up your mind but need some good advice on how to succeed. If so, this book is written for you. So You Want To Be a ...
Maybe you'd like to combine the two loves of your life, teaching and scholarship, and perhaps build a satisfying and profitable academic career, but you're not sure if this is really what you want or how to go about it. Or maybe you've made up your mind but need some good advice on how to succeed. If so, this book is written for you. So You Want To Be a ...
Additional Info:
Maybe you'd like to combine the two loves of your life, teaching and scholarship, and perhaps build a satisfying and profitable academic career, but you're not sure if this is really what you want or how to go about it. Or maybe you've made up your mind but need some good advice on how to succeed. If so, this book is written for you. So You Want To Be a Professor begins with a discussion of jobs in academia and how to find them. Chapters cover a wide range of political skills for future academic success, including lecturing, organizing a course, meeting your first class, testing, maintaining a research program, and writing for publication. No other book provides such a practical overview of essential career-building skills. Even junior faculty will benefit from the advice in this engaging, comprehensive book. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Employment Opportunities in Academia
ch. 2 Getting an Academic Job
ch. 3 Learning to Teach
ch. 4 Organizing a Course
ch. 5 Presenting a Course
ch. 6 Meeting Your First Class
ch. 7 Testing and Evaluation
ch. 8 Advising and Mentoring
ch. 9 Research and Scholarship
ch. 10 Publishing
ch. 11 Getting Tenure
ch. 12 Academic Integrity
ch. 13 Getting Fired
ch. 14 The Academic Career
Maybe you'd like to combine the two loves of your life, teaching and scholarship, and perhaps build a satisfying and profitable academic career, but you're not sure if this is really what you want or how to go about it. Or maybe you've made up your mind but need some good advice on how to succeed. If so, this book is written for you. So You Want To Be a Professor begins with a discussion of jobs in academia and how to find them. Chapters cover a wide range of political skills for future academic success, including lecturing, organizing a course, meeting your first class, testing, maintaining a research program, and writing for publication. No other book provides such a practical overview of essential career-building skills. Even junior faculty will benefit from the advice in this engaging, comprehensive book. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Employment Opportunities in Academia
ch. 2 Getting an Academic Job
ch. 3 Learning to Teach
ch. 4 Organizing a Course
ch. 5 Presenting a Course
ch. 6 Meeting Your First Class
ch. 7 Testing and Evaluation
ch. 8 Advising and Mentoring
ch. 9 Research and Scholarship
ch. 10 Publishing
ch. 11 Getting Tenure
ch. 12 Academic Integrity
ch. 13 Getting Fired
ch. 14 The Academic Career
Additional Info:
Written by experts in teaching and administration, this guide offers practical, research-based information for faculty members and administrators in search of new approaches for assessing and improving faculty potential. By recognizing that faculty evaluation can be a difficult, time-consuming, and costly process, the authors of Evaluating Faculty Performance have distilled existing evaluation practices into useful recommendations for strengthening the overall system.
Offering numerous suggestions for improving evaluation methods, ...
Written by experts in teaching and administration, this guide offers practical, research-based information for faculty members and administrators in search of new approaches for assessing and improving faculty potential. By recognizing that faculty evaluation can be a difficult, time-consuming, and costly process, the authors of Evaluating Faculty Performance have distilled existing evaluation practices into useful recommendations for strengthening the overall system.
Offering numerous suggestions for improving evaluation methods, ...
Additional Info:
Written by experts in teaching and administration, this guide offers practical, research-based information for faculty members and administrators in search of new approaches for assessing and improving faculty potential. By recognizing that faculty evaluation can be a difficult, time-consuming, and costly process, the authors of Evaluating Faculty Performance have distilled existing evaluation practices into useful recommendations for strengthening the overall system.
Offering numerous suggestions for improving evaluation methods, assessing program weaknesses, and avoiding common problems, the book
* Examines compelling reasons for developing effective and systematic faculty assessment processes
* Discusses how to create a climate for positive change by favoring performance counseling over performance evaluation
* Identifies the essential elements and best practices in assessment, while also revealing what not to do in evaluating performance
* Explains the value of the professional portfolio in assessment teaching, and offers advice on how to complete a portfolio
* Outlines key issues, dangers, and benchmarks for success in straightforward language
Included are field-tested forms and checklists that can be used to measure faculty performance in teaching, research, and service. The suggestions for improving faculty assessment are clear and practicable—sensible advice for strengthening a process that is of increasing importance in higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Building a Successful Evaluation Program (Peter Seldin)
ch. 2 Essential Operating Principles and Key Guidelines (Peter Seldin)
ch. 3 Building a Climate For Faculty evaluation That Improves Teaching (Mary Lou HJiggerson)
ch. 4 Uses and Abuses of Student Ratings (William Pallett)
ch. 5 Institutional Service (Clement A. Seldin)
ch. 6 Peer Observations as a Catalyst for Faculty Development (Barbara J. Millis)
ch. 7 Self-Evaluation: Composing an Academic Life Narrative (Thomas V. McGovern)
ch. 8 Teaching Portfolios (Monica A. Devanas)
ch. 9 Evaluating Faculty Research (Teck-Kah Lim)
ch. 10 Teaching Evaluation Follies: Misperception and Misbehavior in Student Evaluations of Teachers (Jane S. Halonen, Geroge B. Ellenberg)
ch. 11 Using Evaluation Data to Improve Teaching effectiveness (Todd Zakrajsek)
ch. 12 Using Evaluation Data for Personnel Decisions (David Fite)
ch. 13 The Professional Portfolio: Expanding the Value of Portfolio Development (John Zubizarreta)
ch. 14 Summary and Recommendations for Evaluating Faculty Performance (J. Elizabeth Miller)
Appendix: Selected Forms to Evaluate Teaching, Advising, Research, and Service
Index
Written by experts in teaching and administration, this guide offers practical, research-based information for faculty members and administrators in search of new approaches for assessing and improving faculty potential. By recognizing that faculty evaluation can be a difficult, time-consuming, and costly process, the authors of Evaluating Faculty Performance have distilled existing evaluation practices into useful recommendations for strengthening the overall system.
Offering numerous suggestions for improving evaluation methods, assessing program weaknesses, and avoiding common problems, the book
* Examines compelling reasons for developing effective and systematic faculty assessment processes
* Discusses how to create a climate for positive change by favoring performance counseling over performance evaluation
* Identifies the essential elements and best practices in assessment, while also revealing what not to do in evaluating performance
* Explains the value of the professional portfolio in assessment teaching, and offers advice on how to complete a portfolio
* Outlines key issues, dangers, and benchmarks for success in straightforward language
Included are field-tested forms and checklists that can be used to measure faculty performance in teaching, research, and service. The suggestions for improving faculty assessment are clear and practicable—sensible advice for strengthening a process that is of increasing importance in higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Building a Successful Evaluation Program (Peter Seldin)
ch. 2 Essential Operating Principles and Key Guidelines (Peter Seldin)
ch. 3 Building a Climate For Faculty evaluation That Improves Teaching (Mary Lou HJiggerson)
ch. 4 Uses and Abuses of Student Ratings (William Pallett)
ch. 5 Institutional Service (Clement A. Seldin)
ch. 6 Peer Observations as a Catalyst for Faculty Development (Barbara J. Millis)
ch. 7 Self-Evaluation: Composing an Academic Life Narrative (Thomas V. McGovern)
ch. 8 Teaching Portfolios (Monica A. Devanas)
ch. 9 Evaluating Faculty Research (Teck-Kah Lim)
ch. 10 Teaching Evaluation Follies: Misperception and Misbehavior in Student Evaluations of Teachers (Jane S. Halonen, Geroge B. Ellenberg)
ch. 11 Using Evaluation Data to Improve Teaching effectiveness (Todd Zakrajsek)
ch. 12 Using Evaluation Data for Personnel Decisions (David Fite)
ch. 13 The Professional Portfolio: Expanding the Value of Portfolio Development (John Zubizarreta)
ch. 14 Summary and Recommendations for Evaluating Faculty Performance (J. Elizabeth Miller)
Appendix: Selected Forms to Evaluate Teaching, Advising, Research, and Service
Index
Additional Info:
Formally known as a “Small Group Instructional Diagnosis” (SGID), specialists from the Illinois State Center for Teaching, Learning and Technology visit a classroom and interview the students in a consensus-building process that enables instructors to gain insights into students' perceptions about the class and their learning.
Formally known as a “Small Group Instructional Diagnosis” (SGID), specialists from the Illinois State Center for Teaching, Learning and Technology visit a classroom and interview the students in a consensus-building process that enables instructors to gain insights into students' perceptions about the class and their learning.
Additional Info:
Formally known as a “Small Group Instructional Diagnosis” (SGID), specialists from the Illinois State Center for Teaching, Learning and Technology visit a classroom and interview the students in a consensus-building process that enables instructors to gain insights into students' perceptions about the class and their learning.
Formally known as a “Small Group Instructional Diagnosis” (SGID), specialists from the Illinois State Center for Teaching, Learning and Technology visit a classroom and interview the students in a consensus-building process that enables instructors to gain insights into students' perceptions about the class and their learning.
Critical Response Process: A Method For Getting Useful Feedback On Anything You make, From Dance to Dessert, First Edition
Additional Info:
Liz Lerman's Critical Response Process is a multi-step, group system for giving and receiving useful feedback on creative processes and artistic work-in-progress. Originated in the early 1990's by choreographer and MacArthur "Genius Grant" Fellow Liz Lerman, the Process has been widely embraced by artists, educators, and administrators. It has been applied in such diverse contexts as choreography classes, post-performance discussions, actor/playwright collaborations, curatorial decision-making, and university level curriculum assessment. ...
Liz Lerman's Critical Response Process is a multi-step, group system for giving and receiving useful feedback on creative processes and artistic work-in-progress. Originated in the early 1990's by choreographer and MacArthur "Genius Grant" Fellow Liz Lerman, the Process has been widely embraced by artists, educators, and administrators. It has been applied in such diverse contexts as choreography classes, post-performance discussions, actor/playwright collaborations, curatorial decision-making, and university level curriculum assessment. ...
Additional Info:
Liz Lerman's Critical Response Process is a multi-step, group system for giving and receiving useful feedback on creative processes and artistic work-in-progress. Originated in the early 1990's by choreographer and MacArthur "Genius Grant" Fellow Liz Lerman, the Process has been widely embraced by artists, educators, and administrators. It has been applied in such diverse contexts as choreography classes, post-performance discussions, actor/playwright collaborations, curatorial decision-making, and university level curriculum assessment. In addition to reflection on the work at hand, the Critical Response Process affords artists a voice and a degree of control within the critique of their work promoting dialogue with audiences, fellow artists, students, mentors, and other colleagues.
This book, Liz Lerman's Critical Response Process, offers a detailed introduction to the Process, beginning with its three roles and four core steps. With particular emphasis on the role of the facilitator, this illustrated publication offers guidance on how artists and participants can get the most out of the Process and the opportunities it offers to ask question, give answers, and voice opinions. A final chapter discusses adaptations and variations. Charts and annotated sample dialogues demonstrate the inner workings of the Process. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction by Liz Lerman
ch. 1 The Process
ch. 2 The Roles
ch. 3 The Steps
ch. 4 Facilitation Fundamentals
ch. 5 Deepening the Dialogue
ch. 6 Variations
ch. 7 Conclusion
ch. 8 Sample Dialogues
ch. 9 Acknowledgements
Charts
ch. 10 Forming Neutral Questions
ch. 11 The Three Roles
ch. 12 Steps & Sequence
Liz Lerman's Critical Response Process is a multi-step, group system for giving and receiving useful feedback on creative processes and artistic work-in-progress. Originated in the early 1990's by choreographer and MacArthur "Genius Grant" Fellow Liz Lerman, the Process has been widely embraced by artists, educators, and administrators. It has been applied in such diverse contexts as choreography classes, post-performance discussions, actor/playwright collaborations, curatorial decision-making, and university level curriculum assessment. In addition to reflection on the work at hand, the Critical Response Process affords artists a voice and a degree of control within the critique of their work promoting dialogue with audiences, fellow artists, students, mentors, and other colleagues.
This book, Liz Lerman's Critical Response Process, offers a detailed introduction to the Process, beginning with its three roles and four core steps. With particular emphasis on the role of the facilitator, this illustrated publication offers guidance on how artists and participants can get the most out of the Process and the opportunities it offers to ask question, give answers, and voice opinions. A final chapter discusses adaptations and variations. Charts and annotated sample dialogues demonstrate the inner workings of the Process. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction by Liz Lerman
ch. 1 The Process
ch. 2 The Roles
ch. 3 The Steps
ch. 4 Facilitation Fundamentals
ch. 5 Deepening the Dialogue
ch. 6 Variations
ch. 7 Conclusion
ch. 8 Sample Dialogues
ch. 9 Acknowledgements
Charts
ch. 10 Forming Neutral Questions
ch. 11 The Three Roles
ch. 12 Steps & Sequence
"'The Long Obedience...': Biblical Reflections on the Vocation of Administrative Service"
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Collaborative working is an increasingly vital part of Higher Education academic life. Traditionally, university culture supported individual research and scholarship. Today, the focus has shifted from the individual to the group or team. Collaborative Working in Higher Education takes the reader on a journey of examination, discussion, and reflection of emerging collaborative practices. The book offers suggestions for developing practice via a broad overview of the key aspects of collaboration ...
Collaborative working is an increasingly vital part of Higher Education academic life. Traditionally, university culture supported individual research and scholarship. Today, the focus has shifted from the individual to the group or team. Collaborative Working in Higher Education takes the reader on a journey of examination, discussion, and reflection of emerging collaborative practices. The book offers suggestions for developing practice via a broad overview of the key aspects of collaboration ...
Additional Info:
Collaborative working is an increasingly vital part of Higher Education academic life. Traditionally, university culture supported individual research and scholarship. Today, the focus has shifted from the individual to the group or team. Collaborative Working in Higher Education takes the reader on a journey of examination, discussion, and reflection of emerging collaborative practices. The book offers suggestions for developing practice via a broad overview of the key aspects of collaboration and collaborative working, informed by focused case studies and the international perspectives of the contributing authors.
The book has three main parts:
Part I: Examines the social nature of collaborative working from a practical and critical perspective, focusing on four dimensions of collaborative working: academic practice, professional dialogues, personal and organizational engagement and social structures. It considers organizational models, varied approaches, potential challenges posed by collaborative working, and reflection on the management of collaboration at different stages.
Part II: Focuses on the different aspects of collaborative working, building on the dimensions introduced in Part I, and addressing the crossing of boundaries. It looks at different contexts for collaboration (e.g. discipline-based, departmental, institutional and international) using case studies as examples of collaborative strategies in action, providing learning points and recommendations for practical applications.
Part III: In addition to considering forms of collaboration for the future, this part of the book engages the reader with athough-provoking round-table discussion that itself embodies an act of collaboration.
Collaborative Working in Higher Education is a comprehensive analysis of how collaboration is reforming academic life. It examines the shifts in working practices and reflects on how that shift can be supported and developed to improve practice. Higher Education faculty, administrators, researchers, managers and anyone involved in collaborative working across their institution will find this book a highly useful guide as they embark on their own collaborations. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Case Studies
List of Figures
List of Tables
Foreword by Ronald Barnett
Acknowledgements
List of Contributors
Part I
Collaborative Working in Higher Education
ch. 1 Opening Up Collaborative Working
ch. 2 Theoretical Perspectives: The Collaborative Cocktail
ch. 3 Establishing and Sustaining Collaborations
Part II
Case Studies in Collaboration
ch. 4 Brokers of Collaboration
ch. 5 Crossing Boundaries in Collaboration
ch. 6 Proximity and Virtuality in Collaborative Research
ch. 7 Challenging Patterns of Practice through Collaborative Working
Part III
Developing the Social Academy
ch. 8 Squaring the Circle: Round-Table Discussion on Collaborative Working
ch. 9 A Collaborative Future for the Academy
Index
Collaborative working is an increasingly vital part of Higher Education academic life. Traditionally, university culture supported individual research and scholarship. Today, the focus has shifted from the individual to the group or team. Collaborative Working in Higher Education takes the reader on a journey of examination, discussion, and reflection of emerging collaborative practices. The book offers suggestions for developing practice via a broad overview of the key aspects of collaboration and collaborative working, informed by focused case studies and the international perspectives of the contributing authors.
The book has three main parts:
Part I: Examines the social nature of collaborative working from a practical and critical perspective, focusing on four dimensions of collaborative working: academic practice, professional dialogues, personal and organizational engagement and social structures. It considers organizational models, varied approaches, potential challenges posed by collaborative working, and reflection on the management of collaboration at different stages.
Part II: Focuses on the different aspects of collaborative working, building on the dimensions introduced in Part I, and addressing the crossing of boundaries. It looks at different contexts for collaboration (e.g. discipline-based, departmental, institutional and international) using case studies as examples of collaborative strategies in action, providing learning points and recommendations for practical applications.
Part III: In addition to considering forms of collaboration for the future, this part of the book engages the reader with athough-provoking round-table discussion that itself embodies an act of collaboration.
Collaborative Working in Higher Education is a comprehensive analysis of how collaboration is reforming academic life. It examines the shifts in working practices and reflects on how that shift can be supported and developed to improve practice. Higher Education faculty, administrators, researchers, managers and anyone involved in collaborative working across their institution will find this book a highly useful guide as they embark on their own collaborations. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Case Studies
List of Figures
List of Tables
Foreword by Ronald Barnett
Acknowledgements
List of Contributors
Part I
Collaborative Working in Higher Education
ch. 1 Opening Up Collaborative Working
ch. 2 Theoretical Perspectives: The Collaborative Cocktail
ch. 3 Establishing and Sustaining Collaborations
Part II
Case Studies in Collaboration
ch. 4 Brokers of Collaboration
ch. 5 Crossing Boundaries in Collaboration
ch. 6 Proximity and Virtuality in Collaborative Research
ch. 7 Challenging Patterns of Practice through Collaborative Working
Part III
Developing the Social Academy
ch. 8 Squaring the Circle: Round-Table Discussion on Collaborative Working
ch. 9 A Collaborative Future for the Academy
Index
Scholarship in the Postmodern Era: New Venues, New Values, New Visions
Additional Info:
A little over a decade ago, Ernest Boyer's Scholarship Reconsidered burst upon the academic scene, igniting a robust national conversation that maintains its vitbaality to this day. This volume aims at advancing that important conversation. Its first section focuses on the new settings and circumstances in which the act of scholarship is being played out; its second identifies and explores the fresh set of values currently informing today's scholarly practices; ...
A little over a decade ago, Ernest Boyer's Scholarship Reconsidered burst upon the academic scene, igniting a robust national conversation that maintains its vitbaality to this day. This volume aims at advancing that important conversation. Its first section focuses on the new settings and circumstances in which the act of scholarship is being played out; its second identifies and explores the fresh set of values currently informing today's scholarly practices; ...
Additional Info:
A little over a decade ago, Ernest Boyer's Scholarship Reconsidered burst upon the academic scene, igniting a robust national conversation that maintains its vitbaality to this day. This volume aims at advancing that important conversation. Its first section focuses on the new settings and circumstances in which the act of scholarship is being played out; its second identifies and explores the fresh set of values currently informing today's scholarly practices; and its third looks to the future of scholarship, identifying trends, causative factors, and potentialities that promise to shape scholars and their scholarship in the new millennium. One of the greatest legacies of Scholarship Reconsidered is the advocacy of a more holistic and humane approach to promoting, evaluating, and rewarding scholarship. This volume hopes to help nurture that legacy.
This is the 90th volume of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 Beyond Scholarship Reconsidered: Toward an Enlarged Vision of the Scholarly Work of Faculty Members (R. Eugene Rice)
ch. 2 Transforming the Scholarly Process Through Information Technology (Wallace Hannum)
ch. 3 Nurturing Scholarship Through Holistic Faculty Development: A Synergistic Approach (Kenneth J. Zahorski)
ch. 4 New Conceptions of Scholarship for a New Generation of Faculty Members (Mary Deane Sorcinelli)
ch. 5 Engendering Trust Through Institutional Policies and Practices (Ann F. Lucas)
ch. 6 The Soul of Scholarship (Kina S. Mallard
ch. 7 Defining Scholarship for the Twenty-First Century (Robert M. Diamond)
ch. 8 Student-Faculty Collaborations, Undergraduate Research, and Collaboration as an Administrative Model (Ronald L. Dotterer)
ch. 9 Nurturing an Ethos of Community Engagement (Jerry Berberet)
Index
A little over a decade ago, Ernest Boyer's Scholarship Reconsidered burst upon the academic scene, igniting a robust national conversation that maintains its vitbaality to this day. This volume aims at advancing that important conversation. Its first section focuses on the new settings and circumstances in which the act of scholarship is being played out; its second identifies and explores the fresh set of values currently informing today's scholarly practices; and its third looks to the future of scholarship, identifying trends, causative factors, and potentialities that promise to shape scholars and their scholarship in the new millennium. One of the greatest legacies of Scholarship Reconsidered is the advocacy of a more holistic and humane approach to promoting, evaluating, and rewarding scholarship. This volume hopes to help nurture that legacy.
This is the 90th volume of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 Beyond Scholarship Reconsidered: Toward an Enlarged Vision of the Scholarly Work of Faculty Members (R. Eugene Rice)
ch. 2 Transforming the Scholarly Process Through Information Technology (Wallace Hannum)
ch. 3 Nurturing Scholarship Through Holistic Faculty Development: A Synergistic Approach (Kenneth J. Zahorski)
ch. 4 New Conceptions of Scholarship for a New Generation of Faculty Members (Mary Deane Sorcinelli)
ch. 5 Engendering Trust Through Institutional Policies and Practices (Ann F. Lucas)
ch. 6 The Soul of Scholarship (Kina S. Mallard
ch. 7 Defining Scholarship for the Twenty-First Century (Robert M. Diamond)
ch. 8 Student-Faculty Collaborations, Undergraduate Research, and Collaboration as an Administrative Model (Ronald L. Dotterer)
ch. 9 Nurturing an Ethos of Community Engagement (Jerry Berberet)
Index
Additional Info:
Teaching, Learning and Research in Higher Education offers a combination of critical perspectives and practical advice that is ideally suited for individuals interested in enhancing their practice through analysis and critique. The aim is to promote a critical understanding of one's own practices: to foster personal and professional formation through a reflexive engagement with one's environment and circumstances. At a practical level this means to continuously think about how to ...
Teaching, Learning and Research in Higher Education offers a combination of critical perspectives and practical advice that is ideally suited for individuals interested in enhancing their practice through analysis and critique. The aim is to promote a critical understanding of one's own practices: to foster personal and professional formation through a reflexive engagement with one's environment and circumstances. At a practical level this means to continuously think about how to ...
Additional Info:
Teaching, Learning and Research in Higher Education offers a combination of critical perspectives and practical advice that is ideally suited for individuals interested in enhancing their practice through analysis and critique. The aim is to promote a critical understanding of one's own practices: to foster personal and professional formation through a reflexive engagement with one's environment and circumstances. At a practical level this means to continuously think about how to adjust practice rather than following a formulaic approach derived from any particular educational theory.
Teaching, Learning and Research in Higher Education argues that academics can find space for their own agency in the midst of institutional policies and practices that serve to frame, as well as delimit and constrain, what counts as good academic work in teaching and research. This text bridges a gap between those books that provide a high-level analysis of contemporary higher education, the more practical texts on how to be a good teacher in higher education, and those texts which aim to improve teaching through better understanding of the learning process.
Topical chapters include:
Teacher-learner relationship, Learning groups, Practice-oriented learning, Teaching for diversity, e-learning, Assessment, Approaches to Staff Development, Quality assurance, Supervision and Research education, Doing research, and Teaching & Research.
A must-have resource for higher education professions, academic developers, professionals, and anyone looking to improve their teaching and learning practices, Teaching,Learning and Research in Higher Education is also appropriate for continuing and professional development courses in the UK and teaching and learning courses in the US.
Mark Tennant is Dean of the University Graduate School, University of Technology, Sydney.
Cathi McMullen is Lecturer in the School of Marketing and Management at Charles Sturt University.
Dan Kaczynski is Professor in the Educational Leadership department at Central Michigan University. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Illustrations
Preface
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 Perspectives on Quality Teaching
ch. 3 Reconceptualising the Development of University Teaching Expertise
ch. 4 Framing Teacher-Learner Relationships
ch. 5 Learning Groups
ch. 6 Teaching for Diversity
ch. 7 Assessment
ch. 8 Promoting Workplace-Oriented Learning
ch. 9 Learning in the Digital Age
ch. 10 Postgraduate Research Education
ch. 11 Teaching and Research
Reference
Teaching, Learning and Research in Higher Education offers a combination of critical perspectives and practical advice that is ideally suited for individuals interested in enhancing their practice through analysis and critique. The aim is to promote a critical understanding of one's own practices: to foster personal and professional formation through a reflexive engagement with one's environment and circumstances. At a practical level this means to continuously think about how to adjust practice rather than following a formulaic approach derived from any particular educational theory.
Teaching, Learning and Research in Higher Education argues that academics can find space for their own agency in the midst of institutional policies and practices that serve to frame, as well as delimit and constrain, what counts as good academic work in teaching and research. This text bridges a gap between those books that provide a high-level analysis of contemporary higher education, the more practical texts on how to be a good teacher in higher education, and those texts which aim to improve teaching through better understanding of the learning process.
Topical chapters include:
Teacher-learner relationship, Learning groups, Practice-oriented learning, Teaching for diversity, e-learning, Assessment, Approaches to Staff Development, Quality assurance, Supervision and Research education, Doing research, and Teaching & Research.
A must-have resource for higher education professions, academic developers, professionals, and anyone looking to improve their teaching and learning practices, Teaching,Learning and Research in Higher Education is also appropriate for continuing and professional development courses in the UK and teaching and learning courses in the US.
Mark Tennant is Dean of the University Graduate School, University of Technology, Sydney.
Cathi McMullen is Lecturer in the School of Marketing and Management at Charles Sturt University.
Dan Kaczynski is Professor in the Educational Leadership department at Central Michigan University. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Illustrations
Preface
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 Perspectives on Quality Teaching
ch. 3 Reconceptualising the Development of University Teaching Expertise
ch. 4 Framing Teacher-Learner Relationships
ch. 5 Learning Groups
ch. 6 Teaching for Diversity
ch. 7 Assessment
ch. 8 Promoting Workplace-Oriented Learning
ch. 9 Learning in the Digital Age
ch. 10 Postgraduate Research Education
ch. 11 Teaching and Research
Reference
Additional Info:
Most courses in colleges and universities are taught by only one instructor. This is often necessitated by the financial exigencies of educational institutions, but is also due to an academic tradition in which the ideal is a single expert teaching in a single discipline. The rapidly changing realities of both the higher education and job markets, however, have called the traditional ideal into question. Interdisciplinary collaborative teaching is one way ...
Most courses in colleges and universities are taught by only one instructor. This is often necessitated by the financial exigencies of educational institutions, but is also due to an academic tradition in which the ideal is a single expert teaching in a single discipline. The rapidly changing realities of both the higher education and job markets, however, have called the traditional ideal into question. Interdisciplinary collaborative teaching is one way ...
Additional Info:
Most courses in colleges and universities are taught by only one instructor. This is often necessitated by the financial exigencies of educational institutions, but is also due to an academic tradition in which the ideal is a single expert teaching in a single discipline. The rapidly changing realities of both the higher education and job markets, however, have called the traditional ideal into question. Interdisciplinary collaborative teaching is one way to adapt to the needs of twenty-first-century students, by modeling lifelong learning for students and inviting instructors to be more deliberately reflective about disciplinary assumptions, learning styles, and pedagogies.
Most courses in colleges and universities are taught by only one instructor. This is often necessitated by the financial exigencies of educational institutions, but is also due to an academic tradition in which the ideal is a single expert teaching in a single discipline. The rapidly changing realities of both the higher education and job markets, however, have called the traditional ideal into question. Interdisciplinary collaborative teaching is one way to adapt to the needs of twenty-first-century students, by modeling lifelong learning for students and inviting instructors to be more deliberately reflective about disciplinary assumptions, learning styles, and pedagogies.
Using Cases to Improve College Teaching: A Guide to More Reflective Practice
Additional Info:
This monograph explores practical and theoretical issues in use of case studies for college faculty to reflect on and improve instruction. Six chapters: (1) describe teaching case studies, with an overview of how and why they are used; (2) explore the rationale for their use within the frameworks of scholarship and professional development; (3) present three brief case studies and suggestions for their use in discussion; (4) present reports from faculty groups who have ...
This monograph explores practical and theoretical issues in use of case studies for college faculty to reflect on and improve instruction. Six chapters: (1) describe teaching case studies, with an overview of how and why they are used; (2) explore the rationale for their use within the frameworks of scholarship and professional development; (3) present three brief case studies and suggestions for their use in discussion; (4) present reports from faculty groups who have ...
Additional Info:
This monograph explores practical and theoretical issues in use of case studies for college faculty to reflect on and improve instruction. Six chapters: (1) describe teaching case studies, with an overview of how and why they are used; (2) explore the rationale for their use within the frameworks of scholarship and professional development; (3) present three brief case studies and suggestions for their use in discussion; (4) present reports from faculty groups who have written case studies, with their suggestions on how to proceed; (5) discuss nine issues that have emerged through the use of cases (how they can place the focus on learning as well as teaching, possible alternative formats, getting at the more subtle issues of practice, going beyond problems to the problematic, whether and how cases can represent best practice, including content issues, using cases to build on one another, creating occasions for more productive use of cases, and the impact of case use on teaching improvement); and (6) describe three possible scenarios illustrating how cases might contribute to a campus culture that takes teaching and learning seriously. Four additional cases and teaching suggestions are appended as is a list of 13 resource organizations. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Cases about college teaching and learning - a picture of emerging practice
ch. 2 The Case for cases - a deeper rationale
ch. 3 Using cases on your campus - three examples and strategies for making them work
ch. 4 Writing cases on your campus
ch. 5 Achieving the promise of cases - next steps and emerging issues
ch. 6 Cases and campus culture
Appendices - References - Sources Cited, Projects, People, Materials, Additional Cases
This monograph explores practical and theoretical issues in use of case studies for college faculty to reflect on and improve instruction. Six chapters: (1) describe teaching case studies, with an overview of how and why they are used; (2) explore the rationale for their use within the frameworks of scholarship and professional development; (3) present three brief case studies and suggestions for their use in discussion; (4) present reports from faculty groups who have written case studies, with their suggestions on how to proceed; (5) discuss nine issues that have emerged through the use of cases (how they can place the focus on learning as well as teaching, possible alternative formats, getting at the more subtle issues of practice, going beyond problems to the problematic, whether and how cases can represent best practice, including content issues, using cases to build on one another, creating occasions for more productive use of cases, and the impact of case use on teaching improvement); and (6) describe three possible scenarios illustrating how cases might contribute to a campus culture that takes teaching and learning seriously. Four additional cases and teaching suggestions are appended as is a list of 13 resource organizations. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Cases about college teaching and learning - a picture of emerging practice
ch. 2 The Case for cases - a deeper rationale
ch. 3 Using cases on your campus - three examples and strategies for making them work
ch. 4 Writing cases on your campus
ch. 5 Achieving the promise of cases - next steps and emerging issues
ch. 6 Cases and campus culture
Appendices - References - Sources Cited, Projects, People, Materials, Additional Cases
Aspects of Management and Governance
Additional Info:
Journal Issue.
Journal Issue.
Additional Info:
Journal Issue.
Table Of Content:
Seminary Staff Officers Set New Directions in Claremont Meeting (Henry W. Brooks)
Managerial Implications of Theological Education in the 1970s (Jesse H. Ziegler)
Crisis in Theological Education (Charles Shelby Rooks)
The Computer—For Seminaries? (C. Richard Broome)
Governance of the Theological School (Wesner Fallaw)
Student Power and Governance (Gerald L. Painter and Raymond Bryan Brown)
Theological Education: A Bird’s Eye Perspective (Richard L. Rising)
Action Training: A Methodology and Theology (Nathan Kollar)
AATS News
Announcements
Directory Changes
Bibliographic Suggestions
Journal Issue.
Table Of Content:
Seminary Staff Officers Set New Directions in Claremont Meeting (Henry W. Brooks)
Managerial Implications of Theological Education in the 1970s (Jesse H. Ziegler)
Crisis in Theological Education (Charles Shelby Rooks)
The Computer—For Seminaries? (C. Richard Broome)
Governance of the Theological School (Wesner Fallaw)
Student Power and Governance (Gerald L. Painter and Raymond Bryan Brown)
Theological Education: A Bird’s Eye Perspective (Richard L. Rising)
Action Training: A Methodology and Theology (Nathan Kollar)
AATS News
Announcements
Directory Changes
Bibliographic Suggestions
Additional Info:
Reviews 20 principles or steps in an effective faculty evaluation system, arguing that while most institutions’ claim that the purpose of their fculty evaluation system is the improvement of teaching, the primary purpose is actually almost always to make personnel decisions. Idea Paper no. 33, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Reviews 20 principles or steps in an effective faculty evaluation system, arguing that while most institutions’ claim that the purpose of their fculty evaluation system is the improvement of teaching, the primary purpose is actually almost always to make personnel decisions. Idea Paper no. 33, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Additional Info:
Reviews 20 principles or steps in an effective faculty evaluation system, arguing that while most institutions’ claim that the purpose of their fculty evaluation system is the improvement of teaching, the primary purpose is actually almost always to make personnel decisions. Idea Paper no. 33, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Reviews 20 principles or steps in an effective faculty evaluation system, arguing that while most institutions’ claim that the purpose of their fculty evaluation system is the improvement of teaching, the primary purpose is actually almost always to make personnel decisions. Idea Paper no. 33, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
The Department Chair as Transformative Diversity Leader: Building Inclusive Learning Environments in Higher Education
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: With the imminent demographic shifts in our society and the need to prepare students for citizenship in a global, knowledge-based society, the role of the academic department chair in creating diverse and inclusive learning environments is arguably the most pivotal position in higher education today.
In the United States, ...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: With the imminent demographic shifts in our society and the need to prepare students for citizenship in a global, knowledge-based society, the role of the academic department chair in creating diverse and inclusive learning environments is arguably the most pivotal position in higher education today.
In the United States, ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: With the imminent demographic shifts in our society and the need to prepare students for citizenship in a global, knowledge-based society, the role of the academic department chair in creating diverse and inclusive learning environments is arguably the most pivotal position in higher education today.
In the United States, increasing minority student enrollment coupled with the emergence of a minority majority American nation by 2042 demands that academic institutions be responsive to these changing demographics. The isolation of the ivory tower is no longer an option. This is the first book to address the role of the department chair in diversity and addresses an unmet need by providing a research-based, systematic approach to diversity leadership in the academic department based upon survey findings and in-person interviews.
The department chair represents the nexus between the faculty and the administration and is positioned uniquely to impact diversity progress. Research indicates that more than 80 percent of academic decisions regarding appointment, curriculum, tenure and promotion, classroom pedagogy, and student outcomes are made by the department chair in consultation with the faculty.
This book examines the multidimensional contributions that chairs make in advancing diversity within their departments and institutions in the representation of diverse faculty and staff; in tenure and promotion; curricular change; student learning outcomes; and departmental climate. The scope and content of the book is not limited to institutions in the United States but is applicable to academic institutions globally in their efforts to address the access and success of increasingly diverse student populations.
It addresses institutional power structures and the role of the dean in relation to the appointment of chairs and their impact on the success of chairs from non-dominant groups, including female, minority, and lesbian/gay/transgendered individuals who serve in predominantly white male departments.
Using qualitative and quantitative research methods, the book analyzes predominant structural and behavioral barriers that can impede diversity progress within the academic department. It then focuses upon the opportunities and challenges chairs face in their collaborative journey with faculty and administration toward inclusive departmental and institutional practices. Each chapter provides concrete strategies that chairs can use to strengthen diversity in the academic department.
Addressed to department chairs, deans, faculty, and administrative leaders in higher education in all Western societies facing demographic change and global challenges, this book offers a critical road map to creating the successful academic institutions that will meet the needs of our changing populations. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Illustrations
Foreword (Walter H. Gmelch)
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Prelude
ch. 2 Retooling the Educational Playing Field
ch. 3 The Chair’s Vantage Point on Diversity
ch. 4 Building a New Taxonomy for Diversity in the Academic Department
ch. 5 The Chair’s Leadership Role in Formal and Informal Processes
ch. 6 Bridge Building: The Chair’s Role in Fostering Diversity Learning Outcomes and Student Identity Development
ch. 7 Developing a Comprehensive Action Plan for Diversity
ch. 8 Summation and Recommendations
Appendix A: Distribution of Chairs by Discipline, Region, and Institutional Type
Appendix B: Blind Spots and Levers
About the Authors
Index
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: With the imminent demographic shifts in our society and the need to prepare students for citizenship in a global, knowledge-based society, the role of the academic department chair in creating diverse and inclusive learning environments is arguably the most pivotal position in higher education today.
In the United States, increasing minority student enrollment coupled with the emergence of a minority majority American nation by 2042 demands that academic institutions be responsive to these changing demographics. The isolation of the ivory tower is no longer an option. This is the first book to address the role of the department chair in diversity and addresses an unmet need by providing a research-based, systematic approach to diversity leadership in the academic department based upon survey findings and in-person interviews.
The department chair represents the nexus between the faculty and the administration and is positioned uniquely to impact diversity progress. Research indicates that more than 80 percent of academic decisions regarding appointment, curriculum, tenure and promotion, classroom pedagogy, and student outcomes are made by the department chair in consultation with the faculty.
This book examines the multidimensional contributions that chairs make in advancing diversity within their departments and institutions in the representation of diverse faculty and staff; in tenure and promotion; curricular change; student learning outcomes; and departmental climate. The scope and content of the book is not limited to institutions in the United States but is applicable to academic institutions globally in their efforts to address the access and success of increasingly diverse student populations.
It addresses institutional power structures and the role of the dean in relation to the appointment of chairs and their impact on the success of chairs from non-dominant groups, including female, minority, and lesbian/gay/transgendered individuals who serve in predominantly white male departments.
Using qualitative and quantitative research methods, the book analyzes predominant structural and behavioral barriers that can impede diversity progress within the academic department. It then focuses upon the opportunities and challenges chairs face in their collaborative journey with faculty and administration toward inclusive departmental and institutional practices. Each chapter provides concrete strategies that chairs can use to strengthen diversity in the academic department.
Addressed to department chairs, deans, faculty, and administrative leaders in higher education in all Western societies facing demographic change and global challenges, this book offers a critical road map to creating the successful academic institutions that will meet the needs of our changing populations. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Illustrations
Foreword (Walter H. Gmelch)
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Prelude
ch. 2 Retooling the Educational Playing Field
ch. 3 The Chair’s Vantage Point on Diversity
ch. 4 Building a New Taxonomy for Diversity in the Academic Department
ch. 5 The Chair’s Leadership Role in Formal and Informal Processes
ch. 6 Bridge Building: The Chair’s Role in Fostering Diversity Learning Outcomes and Student Identity Development
ch. 7 Developing a Comprehensive Action Plan for Diversity
ch. 8 Summation and Recommendations
Appendix A: Distribution of Chairs by Discipline, Region, and Institutional Type
Appendix B: Blind Spots and Levers
About the Authors
Index
Additional Info:
From Pen America, a resource for faculty, staff, and students providing practical, principled guidance for how campuses can best remain open to all voices. Sections on resources and the law, on such issues as: Academic Freedom, Campus Climate, Discrimination & Harassment, Diversity & Inclusion, Hateful expression, Invited Speakers, and Protests on Campus.
From Pen America, a resource for faculty, staff, and students providing practical, principled guidance for how campuses can best remain open to all voices. Sections on resources and the law, on such issues as: Academic Freedom, Campus Climate, Discrimination & Harassment, Diversity & Inclusion, Hateful expression, Invited Speakers, and Protests on Campus.
Additional Info:
From Pen America, a resource for faculty, staff, and students providing practical, principled guidance for how campuses can best remain open to all voices. Sections on resources and the law, on such issues as: Academic Freedom, Campus Climate, Discrimination & Harassment, Diversity & Inclusion, Hateful expression, Invited Speakers, and Protests on Campus.
From Pen America, a resource for faculty, staff, and students providing practical, principled guidance for how campuses can best remain open to all voices. Sections on resources and the law, on such issues as: Academic Freedom, Campus Climate, Discrimination & Harassment, Diversity & Inclusion, Hateful expression, Invited Speakers, and Protests on Campus.
Start Talking: A Handbook for Engaging Difficult Dialogues in Higher Education
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
The University of Alaska Anchorage and Alaska Pacific University created Start Talking: A Handbook for Engaging Difficult Dialogues in Higher Education, a field manual for professors who wish to engage their students more effectively in conversations about the most important issues of our time. The book addresses themes of academic freedom; classroom ...
Click Here for Book Review
The University of Alaska Anchorage and Alaska Pacific University created Start Talking: A Handbook for Engaging Difficult Dialogues in Higher Education, a field manual for professors who wish to engage their students more effectively in conversations about the most important issues of our time. The book addresses themes of academic freedom; classroom ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
The University of Alaska Anchorage and Alaska Pacific University created Start Talking: A Handbook for Engaging Difficult Dialogues in Higher Education, a field manual for professors who wish to engage their students more effectively in conversations about the most important issues of our time. The book addresses themes of academic freedom; classroom safety; rhetoric and debate; race, class and culture; science and religion; and business, politics and social justice. For information about the project, including faculty intensives on difficult dialogues and indigenous ways of teaching and learning, see UAA Initiatives. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Who We Are
ch. 1 Ground Rules
ch. 2 Rhetoric, Debate
ch. 3 Race, Class, Culture
ch. 4 Science, Religion
ch. 5 Business, Politics, Social Justice
ch. 6 Outcomes
ch. 7 Keep Talking
References
Index of Contributors Index of Techniques
Click Here for Book Review
The University of Alaska Anchorage and Alaska Pacific University created Start Talking: A Handbook for Engaging Difficult Dialogues in Higher Education, a field manual for professors who wish to engage their students more effectively in conversations about the most important issues of our time. The book addresses themes of academic freedom; classroom safety; rhetoric and debate; race, class and culture; science and religion; and business, politics and social justice. For information about the project, including faculty intensives on difficult dialogues and indigenous ways of teaching and learning, see UAA Initiatives. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Who We Are
ch. 1 Ground Rules
ch. 2 Rhetoric, Debate
ch. 3 Race, Class, Culture
ch. 4 Science, Religion
ch. 5 Business, Politics, Social Justice
ch. 6 Outcomes
ch. 7 Keep Talking
References
Index of Contributors Index of Techniques
Context and Content in the Preparation of Future Faculty
Additional Info:
This edited book series serves as a guide to the study of improved training, employment and administration of graduate and professional student development programs. A new publication that addresses a critical need in higher education. The series is designed to highlight all aspects of professional development of graduate and professional students. (From the Publisher)
This edited book series serves as a guide to the study of improved training, employment and administration of graduate and professional student development programs. A new publication that addresses a critical need in higher education. The series is designed to highlight all aspects of professional development of graduate and professional students. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This edited book series serves as a guide to the study of improved training, employment and administration of graduate and professional student development programs. A new publication that addresses a critical need in higher education. The series is designed to highlight all aspects of professional development of graduate and professional students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor’s Introduction
Section 1— How Graduate Students View the Graduate School Experience
ch. 1 Doctoral Students Make Meaning of Their Experience: A Constructivist Inquiry
ch. 2 Instructional Concerns of Kinesiology Basic Instruction Program Graduate Teaching Assistants
Section 2—Educating Graduate Students for Their Roles as College Instructors
ch. 3 A Prep Course for Graduate Teaching Assistants: Building a Community
ch. 4 A Pedagogy Course’s Influence on Graduate Students’ Self-Awareness as Teacher-Scholars
Section 3—The Challenges Involved in the Education of Future Faculty
ch. 5 Student Engagement Challenges in Teaching about Controversial Issues
ch. 6 Students’ Perceptions of Lesson Objectives in Introductory Mathematics Courses Taught by Teaching Assistants
ch. 7 The Effectiveness of Online Case-based Instruction on International Teaching Assistants’ Presentation and Active Listening Strategies
Section 4—Models in Context: Educating Graduate Students for Future Roles as Academics
ch. 8 An Interdisciplinary Approach to Graduate TA Training: A Reflection of Best Practice
ch. 9 One Process, Two Contexts: Collaborating to Design Professional Development for Graduate Student Educators
This edited book series serves as a guide to the study of improved training, employment and administration of graduate and professional student development programs. A new publication that addresses a critical need in higher education. The series is designed to highlight all aspects of professional development of graduate and professional students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor’s Introduction
Section 1— How Graduate Students View the Graduate School Experience
ch. 1 Doctoral Students Make Meaning of Their Experience: A Constructivist Inquiry
ch. 2 Instructional Concerns of Kinesiology Basic Instruction Program Graduate Teaching Assistants
Section 2—Educating Graduate Students for Their Roles as College Instructors
ch. 3 A Prep Course for Graduate Teaching Assistants: Building a Community
ch. 4 A Pedagogy Course’s Influence on Graduate Students’ Self-Awareness as Teacher-Scholars
Section 3—The Challenges Involved in the Education of Future Faculty
ch. 5 Student Engagement Challenges in Teaching about Controversial Issues
ch. 6 Students’ Perceptions of Lesson Objectives in Introductory Mathematics Courses Taught by Teaching Assistants
ch. 7 The Effectiveness of Online Case-based Instruction on International Teaching Assistants’ Presentation and Active Listening Strategies
Section 4—Models in Context: Educating Graduate Students for Future Roles as Academics
ch. 8 An Interdisciplinary Approach to Graduate TA Training: A Reflection of Best Practice
ch. 9 One Process, Two Contexts: Collaborating to Design Professional Development for Graduate Student Educators
Additional Info:
The University of North Dakota provides this online “handbook” to its faculty to help them navigate the university’s teaching evaluation process. The site provides lots of helpful reminders of what to keep in mind when critically evaluating your own teaching.
The University of North Dakota provides this online “handbook” to its faculty to help them navigate the university’s teaching evaluation process. The site provides lots of helpful reminders of what to keep in mind when critically evaluating your own teaching.
Additional Info:
The University of North Dakota provides this online “handbook” to its faculty to help them navigate the university’s teaching evaluation process. The site provides lots of helpful reminders of what to keep in mind when critically evaluating your own teaching.
The University of North Dakota provides this online “handbook” to its faculty to help them navigate the university’s teaching evaluation process. The site provides lots of helpful reminders of what to keep in mind when critically evaluating your own teaching.
The New Faculty Member : Supporting and Fostering Professional Development
Additional Info:
For the first time in decades, most American campuses are in the midst of hiring large groups of new faculty. As competition for the most qualified candidates increases, institutions must work harder than ever to attract and retain the best and most diverse prospects. This often requires investing considerable resources in recruitment and hiring--and makes it imperative that new hires are not lost to competitors or to unhappy or unproductive ...
For the first time in decades, most American campuses are in the midst of hiring large groups of new faculty. As competition for the most qualified candidates increases, institutions must work harder than ever to attract and retain the best and most diverse prospects. This often requires investing considerable resources in recruitment and hiring--and makes it imperative that new hires are not lost to competitors or to unhappy or unproductive ...
Additional Info:
For the first time in decades, most American campuses are in the midst of hiring large groups of new faculty. As competition for the most qualified candidates increases, institutions must work harder than ever to attract and retain the best and most diverse prospects. This often requires investing considerable resources in recruitment and hiring--and makes it imperative that new hires are not lost to competitors or to unhappy or unproductive beginnings. In this book, Robert Boice offers a range of proven support strategies designed to help new faculty thrive--from campuswide programs for nurturing newcomers to projects that help them to help themselves. Boice identifies the major challenges facing most new faculty--teaching, scholarly writing, and simply fitting in as colleagues--and provides tested solutions for helping them cope. He outlines a structured mentoring program to build collegiality through social support networks. And he presents specific techniques for helping new faculty find time, fluency, and balance as writers, including advice on dealing with editorial evaluations or rejections. The author also details a variety of self-help projects, including exercise and mood management groups run largely by new faculty, as well as faculty handbooks and newsletters. And perhaps most important, he tells how to gain the crucial support of department chairs, deans, and other administrators, secure funds to get programs off the ground, and keep new programs manageable and successful. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 Introduction: New Faculty--A Neglected Resource
Pt. 1 Obstacles Confronting New Faculty Members
ch. 2 Gaining the Acceptance of Colleagues
ch. 3 Establishing Teaching Styles and Skills
ch. 4 Developing Habits of Writing Productivity
Pt. 2 Helping New Faculty Overcome Obstacles
ch. 5 Mentoring to Build Collegiality
ch. 6 Establishing Basic Teaching Skills
ch. 7 Encouraging Scholarly Productivity
ch. 8 Helping New Faculty Help Themselves
Pt. 3 Building an Institutional Support System
ch. 9 Recruitment and Orientation
ch. 10 Retention and Tenure
ch. 11 Tailoring Programs to Special Needs
ch. 12 Enlisting Chairs and Other Administrators
ch. 13 Strategies for Getting Programs Under Way
Resource: Questionnaire Used to Interview New Faculty
References
Index
For the first time in decades, most American campuses are in the midst of hiring large groups of new faculty. As competition for the most qualified candidates increases, institutions must work harder than ever to attract and retain the best and most diverse prospects. This often requires investing considerable resources in recruitment and hiring--and makes it imperative that new hires are not lost to competitors or to unhappy or unproductive beginnings. In this book, Robert Boice offers a range of proven support strategies designed to help new faculty thrive--from campuswide programs for nurturing newcomers to projects that help them to help themselves. Boice identifies the major challenges facing most new faculty--teaching, scholarly writing, and simply fitting in as colleagues--and provides tested solutions for helping them cope. He outlines a structured mentoring program to build collegiality through social support networks. And he presents specific techniques for helping new faculty find time, fluency, and balance as writers, including advice on dealing with editorial evaluations or rejections. The author also details a variety of self-help projects, including exercise and mood management groups run largely by new faculty, as well as faculty handbooks and newsletters. And perhaps most important, he tells how to gain the crucial support of department chairs, deans, and other administrators, secure funds to get programs off the ground, and keep new programs manageable and successful. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 Introduction: New Faculty--A Neglected Resource
Pt. 1 Obstacles Confronting New Faculty Members
ch. 2 Gaining the Acceptance of Colleagues
ch. 3 Establishing Teaching Styles and Skills
ch. 4 Developing Habits of Writing Productivity
Pt. 2 Helping New Faculty Overcome Obstacles
ch. 5 Mentoring to Build Collegiality
ch. 6 Establishing Basic Teaching Skills
ch. 7 Encouraging Scholarly Productivity
ch. 8 Helping New Faculty Help Themselves
Pt. 3 Building an Institutional Support System
ch. 9 Recruitment and Orientation
ch. 10 Retention and Tenure
ch. 11 Tailoring Programs to Special Needs
ch. 12 Enlisting Chairs and Other Administrators
ch. 13 Strategies for Getting Programs Under Way
Resource: Questionnaire Used to Interview New Faculty
References
Index
Additional Info:
University of Texas guidebook for teacher portfolio.
University of Texas guidebook for teacher portfolio.
Additional Info:
University of Texas guidebook for teacher portfolio.
University of Texas guidebook for teacher portfolio.
"Packet on the Teaching Portfolio"
Additional Info:
The following content and formatting suggestions have been compiled to help give you ideas about your own Teaching Portfolio. There are many possibilities, and other formation and/or content could suite your situation better. The aim is not necessarily to come up with a standardized document, but one which has coherence and simplicity and which also gives, like a good CV, the best picture of your history and experience. The ...
The following content and formatting suggestions have been compiled to help give you ideas about your own Teaching Portfolio. There are many possibilities, and other formation and/or content could suite your situation better. The aim is not necessarily to come up with a standardized document, but one which has coherence and simplicity and which also gives, like a good CV, the best picture of your history and experience. The ...
Additional Info:
The following content and formatting suggestions have been compiled to help give you ideas about your own Teaching Portfolio. There are many possibilities, and other formation and/or content could suite your situation better. The aim is not necessarily to come up with a standardized document, but one which has coherence and simplicity and which also gives, like a good CV, the best picture of your history and experience. The Derek Bok Center is happy to help you with a Teaching Portfolio to suit your needs. Keep in mind the following possibilities and limitations of our services:
What We Cannot Provide:
Editorial advice
Packaging
Duplicating
Filing
Distribution
What We Can Provide:
Help with documentation of teaching
Help with developing teaching strategies, techniques, skills
Consultations on broadening teaching repertoire
Help in developing syllabi, special content, entire courses or aspects of courses
Help with teaching innovations, development/implementation
Templates and sample portfolios
The following content and formatting suggestions have been compiled to help give you ideas about your own Teaching Portfolio. There are many possibilities, and other formation and/or content could suite your situation better. The aim is not necessarily to come up with a standardized document, but one which has coherence and simplicity and which also gives, like a good CV, the best picture of your history and experience. The Derek Bok Center is happy to help you with a Teaching Portfolio to suit your needs. Keep in mind the following possibilities and limitations of our services:
What We Cannot Provide:
Editorial advice
Packaging
Duplicating
Filing
Distribution
What We Can Provide:
Help with documentation of teaching
Help with developing teaching strategies, techniques, skills
Consultations on broadening teaching repertoire
Help in developing syllabi, special content, entire courses or aspects of courses
Help with teaching innovations, development/implementation
Templates and sample portfolios
Successful Faculty Development and Evaluation: The Complete Teaching Portfolio
Additional Info:
This report relates to the concept of teaching portfolios. It discusses the importance of accounting for institutional culture when introducing the concept of teaching portfolios. Includes information on how the department chair can help to improve teaching. (From the Publisher)
This report relates to the concept of teaching portfolios. It discusses the importance of accounting for institutional culture when introducing the concept of teaching portfolios. Includes information on how the department chair can help to improve teaching. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This report relates to the concept of teaching portfolios. It discusses the importance of accounting for institutional culture when introducing the concept of teaching portfolios. Includes information on how the department chair can help to improve teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
What is a Teaching Portfolio?
What Goes into a Teaching Portfolio?
Evaluating Portfolios
Formative Evaluation Techniques
Shaping an Institutional Definition of Good Teaching
The Organizational Culture and Teaching Portfolios
The Role of Department Chairs
Conclusion
References
Index
This report relates to the concept of teaching portfolios. It discusses the importance of accounting for institutional culture when introducing the concept of teaching portfolios. Includes information on how the department chair can help to improve teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
What is a Teaching Portfolio?
What Goes into a Teaching Portfolio?
Evaluating Portfolios
Formative Evaluation Techniques
Shaping an Institutional Definition of Good Teaching
The Organizational Culture and Teaching Portfolios
The Role of Department Chairs
Conclusion
References
Index
Additional Info:
No other book exists that assists academics in learning how to use social media to benefit their teaching and research.
- the editor has an extensive background in social media teaching, consulting, research, and everyday use
- all the contributors come to the book with a common goal, from various expertise areas and perspectives
This book provides an overview of social media technologies in the context ...
No other book exists that assists academics in learning how to use social media to benefit their teaching and research.
- the editor has an extensive background in social media teaching, consulting, research, and everyday use
- all the contributors come to the book with a common goal, from various expertise areas and perspectives
This book provides an overview of social media technologies in the context ...
Additional Info:
No other book exists that assists academics in learning how to use social media to benefit their teaching and research.
- the editor has an extensive background in social media teaching, consulting, research, and everyday use
- all the contributors come to the book with a common goal, from various expertise areas and perspectives
This book provides an overview of social media technologies in the context of practical implementation for academics, guided by applied research findings, current best practices, and the author’s successful experiences with using social media in academic settings. It also provides academics with sensible and easy strategies for implementing a wide spectrum of social media and related technologies - such as blogs, wikis, Facebook, and various Google tools for professional, teaching, and research endeavours.
Readership: Academics and academic librarians with professional, teaching and research responsibilities in all fields who are interested in learning more about using social media in the context of their careers, will find this book invaluable. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of figures and tables
Acknowledgements
About the editor
About the contributors
Introduction (Diane Rasmussen Neal)
Part 1 - The Nuts and Bolts of Social Media for Academics
ch. 1 Blogging your academic self: the what, the why and the how long? (Carolyn Hank)
- Introduction
- Scholars in the blogosphere
- Motivations and benefits
- Blog publishing: getting started … or getting more
- Your blog today? Tomorrow?
- Conclusions
- Notes
- References
ch. 2 Non-academic and academic social networking sites for online scholarly communities (Anatolly Gruzd)
- Introduction
- General public platforms for online scholarly communities
- Academic sites for online scholarly communities
- Conclusions
- Acknowledgements
- References
ch. 3 Research and teaching in real time: 24/7 collaborative networks (Anabel Quan-Haase)
- Real-time technologies for academics
- The concept of real time
- Real-time technologies and research
- Real-time technologies and teaching
- Choosing a real-time technology
- Conclusions
- Acknowledgements
- Notes
- References
ch. 4 Locating scholarly papers of interest online
- Introduction (Maureen Henninger)
- Overview of online scholarly search services
- Scholarly communication and social media
- Use and purpose of scholarly search services
- Impact of the Open Access movement
- Search engine functionality
- Social media and public scholarly search
- Conclusions
- Notes
- References
- Appendix: features of web-based public scholarly search services
ch. 5 Tracking references with social media tools: organizing what you’ve read or want to read (Jackie Krause)
- Introduction
- Why use online social bibliographic tools?
- A look at top social bibliographic tools: Zotero, Mendeley, CiteULike and Connotea
- How these tools can improve your research, writing and collaboration
- How to choose the right tool for your needs
- Conclusions
- References
ch. 6 Pragmatics of Twitter use for academics: tweeting in and out of the classroom (Lynne Y. Williams, and Jackie Krause)
- What is Twitter? An introduction
- How can Twitter be used by academics?
- How to get started
- Research
- Teaching
- Professional branding
- ‘In the field’: academics using Twitter
- Using Twitter to encourage professional engagement, connection and collaboration
- Is tweeting for you?
- References
ch. 7 The academy goes mobile: an overview of mobile applications in higher education (Adam Craig)
- Introduction
- Leveraging the backchannel and immediate collaboration
- QR codes: creating linkages to online content in physical space
- Treading lightly in uncharted territory
- References
Part 2 - Putting Social Media Into Practice
ch. 8 Incorporating web-based engagement and participatory interaction into your courses (Jaruee Henninger, and Diane Rasmussen Neal)
- Online engagement and interaction: what does it mean?
- Choose the right tools for the job
- Social networking services in the classroom: a case study
- Wikis in the classroom
- Tools for virtual conferences: a case study
- Conclusions
- Notes
- References
ch. 9 When good research goes viral! Getting your work noticed online (Diane Rasmussem Neal)
- Introduction
- Social networking: Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, YouTube, and so on
- Google, you and ‘the filter bubble’
- Official university pages: viral is not always better
- Conclusions
- References
ch. 10 Who is the ‘virtual’ you and do you know who’s watching you? (Lynne Y. Williams)
- Awareness of data privacy, digital footprints, maintaining separate work and personal online identities, and other types of identity concerns
- What is an online identity?
- What is privacy?
- Data privacy and the ‘virtual’ you
- Tracking your digital footprints
- Keeping your work ‘you’ and your personal ‘you’ apart
- What should you know in order to adequately protect all of your ‘you’s?
- References
ch. 11 Social media for academic libraries
- Introduction (David J. Flander)
- Overview of social media types and sites
- Creating a Facebook page
- Promoting and managing the library’s Facebook page
- Social media policies and procedures
- Community acceptable behaviour policies
- Monitoring and interacting with your users
- Users must have persistent identifiers
- Identifying and stopping bad behaviour
- Conclusions
- Note
- References
ch. 12 Learning social media: student and instructor perspectives (Robert Foster, and Diane Rasmussen Neal)
- Introduction
- Designing and delivering a class in social media
- The students’ motivations and expectations for the course
- The instructor’s expectations
- Students’ views about the course
- Students’ take-aways from the course
- The instructor’s take-aways from the course
- Conclusions from the student
- Conclusions from the instructor
- References
Index
No other book exists that assists academics in learning how to use social media to benefit their teaching and research.
- the editor has an extensive background in social media teaching, consulting, research, and everyday use
- all the contributors come to the book with a common goal, from various expertise areas and perspectives
This book provides an overview of social media technologies in the context of practical implementation for academics, guided by applied research findings, current best practices, and the author’s successful experiences with using social media in academic settings. It also provides academics with sensible and easy strategies for implementing a wide spectrum of social media and related technologies - such as blogs, wikis, Facebook, and various Google tools for professional, teaching, and research endeavours.
Readership: Academics and academic librarians with professional, teaching and research responsibilities in all fields who are interested in learning more about using social media in the context of their careers, will find this book invaluable. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of figures and tables
Acknowledgements
About the editor
About the contributors
Introduction (Diane Rasmussen Neal)
Part 1 - The Nuts and Bolts of Social Media for Academics
ch. 1 Blogging your academic self: the what, the why and the how long? (Carolyn Hank)
- Introduction
- Scholars in the blogosphere
- Motivations and benefits
- Blog publishing: getting started … or getting more
- Your blog today? Tomorrow?
- Conclusions
- Notes
- References
ch. 2 Non-academic and academic social networking sites for online scholarly communities (Anatolly Gruzd)
- Introduction
- General public platforms for online scholarly communities
- Academic sites for online scholarly communities
- Conclusions
- Acknowledgements
- References
ch. 3 Research and teaching in real time: 24/7 collaborative networks (Anabel Quan-Haase)
- Real-time technologies for academics
- The concept of real time
- Real-time technologies and research
- Real-time technologies and teaching
- Choosing a real-time technology
- Conclusions
- Acknowledgements
- Notes
- References
ch. 4 Locating scholarly papers of interest online
- Introduction (Maureen Henninger)
- Overview of online scholarly search services
- Scholarly communication and social media
- Use and purpose of scholarly search services
- Impact of the Open Access movement
- Search engine functionality
- Social media and public scholarly search
- Conclusions
- Notes
- References
- Appendix: features of web-based public scholarly search services
ch. 5 Tracking references with social media tools: organizing what you’ve read or want to read (Jackie Krause)
- Introduction
- Why use online social bibliographic tools?
- A look at top social bibliographic tools: Zotero, Mendeley, CiteULike and Connotea
- How these tools can improve your research, writing and collaboration
- How to choose the right tool for your needs
- Conclusions
- References
ch. 6 Pragmatics of Twitter use for academics: tweeting in and out of the classroom (Lynne Y. Williams, and Jackie Krause)
- What is Twitter? An introduction
- How can Twitter be used by academics?
- How to get started
- Research
- Teaching
- Professional branding
- ‘In the field’: academics using Twitter
- Using Twitter to encourage professional engagement, connection and collaboration
- Is tweeting for you?
- References
ch. 7 The academy goes mobile: an overview of mobile applications in higher education (Adam Craig)
- Introduction
- Leveraging the backchannel and immediate collaboration
- QR codes: creating linkages to online content in physical space
- Treading lightly in uncharted territory
- References
Part 2 - Putting Social Media Into Practice
ch. 8 Incorporating web-based engagement and participatory interaction into your courses (Jaruee Henninger, and Diane Rasmussen Neal)
- Online engagement and interaction: what does it mean?
- Choose the right tools for the job
- Social networking services in the classroom: a case study
- Wikis in the classroom
- Tools for virtual conferences: a case study
- Conclusions
- Notes
- References
ch. 9 When good research goes viral! Getting your work noticed online (Diane Rasmussem Neal)
- Introduction
- Social networking: Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, YouTube, and so on
- Google, you and ‘the filter bubble’
- Official university pages: viral is not always better
- Conclusions
- References
ch. 10 Who is the ‘virtual’ you and do you know who’s watching you? (Lynne Y. Williams)
- Awareness of data privacy, digital footprints, maintaining separate work and personal online identities, and other types of identity concerns
- What is an online identity?
- What is privacy?
- Data privacy and the ‘virtual’ you
- Tracking your digital footprints
- Keeping your work ‘you’ and your personal ‘you’ apart
- What should you know in order to adequately protect all of your ‘you’s?
- References
ch. 11 Social media for academic libraries
- Introduction (David J. Flander)
- Overview of social media types and sites
- Creating a Facebook page
- Promoting and managing the library’s Facebook page
- Social media policies and procedures
- Community acceptable behaviour policies
- Monitoring and interacting with your users
- Users must have persistent identifiers
- Identifying and stopping bad behaviour
- Conclusions
- Note
- References
ch. 12 Learning social media: student and instructor perspectives (Robert Foster, and Diane Rasmussen Neal)
- Introduction
- Designing and delivering a class in social media
- The students’ motivations and expectations for the course
- The instructor’s expectations
- Students’ views about the course
- Students’ take-aways from the course
- The instructor’s take-aways from the course
- Conclusions from the student
- Conclusions from the instructor
- References
Index
"American Association of University Professors' Report on Collegiality as a Criterion for Faculty Evaluation"
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Interdisciplinary Courses and Team Teaching: New Arrangements for Learning
Additional Info:
James Davis offers a realistic and stimulating examination of interdisciplinary theory and practice. In addition to providing specific tips on successful team teaching, the book features information drawn from the professional literature, survey results, and useful examples from the author's personal experience. It also includes a listing of nearly 100 interdisciplinary, team-taught courses currently being offered at colleges and universities throughout North America. The book demonstrates that team teaching, when effectively ...
James Davis offers a realistic and stimulating examination of interdisciplinary theory and practice. In addition to providing specific tips on successful team teaching, the book features information drawn from the professional literature, survey results, and useful examples from the author's personal experience. It also includes a listing of nearly 100 interdisciplinary, team-taught courses currently being offered at colleges and universities throughout North America. The book demonstrates that team teaching, when effectively ...
Additional Info:
James Davis offers a realistic and stimulating examination of interdisciplinary theory and practice. In addition to providing specific tips on successful team teaching, the book features information drawn from the professional literature, survey results, and useful examples from the author's personal experience. It also includes a listing of nearly 100 interdisciplinary, team-taught courses currently being offered at colleges and universities throughout North America. The book demonstrates that team teaching, when effectively implemented, is fulfilling for both educator and student. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Part I Structure and Delivery of Courses
ch. 1 Interdisciplinary Courses and Team Teaching: Definitions and Examples
ch. 2 The Rationale for Interdisciplinary Courses: The Problem of Specialization
ch. 3 Structuring and Delivering Interdisciplinary Courses: Approximating the Ideal
ch. 4 When Faculty Work in Teams: Learning from the Research on Groups and Teams
ch. 5 Faculty and Student Perceptions of Team Teaching: Satisfactions and Frustrations
ch. 6 Future Prospects for Interdisciplinary Courses: Issues and Problems
Part II Selected Examples of Courses
ch. 7 Examples of Interdisciplinary Courses and Programs
Conclusion
Notes
Index
James Davis offers a realistic and stimulating examination of interdisciplinary theory and practice. In addition to providing specific tips on successful team teaching, the book features information drawn from the professional literature, survey results, and useful examples from the author's personal experience. It also includes a listing of nearly 100 interdisciplinary, team-taught courses currently being offered at colleges and universities throughout North America. The book demonstrates that team teaching, when effectively implemented, is fulfilling for both educator and student. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Part I Structure and Delivery of Courses
ch. 1 Interdisciplinary Courses and Team Teaching: Definitions and Examples
ch. 2 The Rationale for Interdisciplinary Courses: The Problem of Specialization
ch. 3 Structuring and Delivering Interdisciplinary Courses: Approximating the Ideal
ch. 4 When Faculty Work in Teams: Learning from the Research on Groups and Teams
ch. 5 Faculty and Student Perceptions of Team Teaching: Satisfactions and Frustrations
ch. 6 Future Prospects for Interdisciplinary Courses: Issues and Problems
Part II Selected Examples of Courses
ch. 7 Examples of Interdisciplinary Courses and Programs
Conclusion
Notes
Index
Ethics and the University
Additional Info:
Brings together two related topics: the practice of ethics in the university, and the teaching of practical or applied ethics in the university. Surveys practical ethics, offering an explanation of its recent emergence as a university subject, and identifies some problems that the subject generates for universities. Examines research ethics, including the problem of plagiarism, and discusses how ethics can be integrated into the university curriculum and what part particular ...
Brings together two related topics: the practice of ethics in the university, and the teaching of practical or applied ethics in the university. Surveys practical ethics, offering an explanation of its recent emergence as a university subject, and identifies some problems that the subject generates for universities. Examines research ethics, including the problem of plagiarism, and discusses how ethics can be integrated into the university curriculum and what part particular ...
Additional Info:
Brings together two related topics: the practice of ethics in the university, and the teaching of practical or applied ethics in the university. Surveys practical ethics, offering an explanation of its recent emergence as a university subject, and identifies some problems that the subject generates for universities. Examines research ethics, including the problem of plagiarism, and discusses how ethics can be integrated into the university curriculum and what part particular cases should play in teaching of ethics. Also looks at sexual ethics. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 The ethics boom, philosophy, and the university
ch. 2 Academic freedom, academic ethics, and professorial ethics
ch. 3 The new world of research ethics: a preliminary map
ch. 4 Science: after such knowledge, what responsibility?
ch. 5 University research and the wages of commerce
ch. 6 Of Babbage and kings: a study of a plagiarism complaint
ch. 7 Ethics across the curriculum
ch. 8 Case method
ch. 9 A moral problem in teaching of practical ethics
ch. 10 Sex and the university
Index
Brings together two related topics: the practice of ethics in the university, and the teaching of practical or applied ethics in the university. Surveys practical ethics, offering an explanation of its recent emergence as a university subject, and identifies some problems that the subject generates for universities. Examines research ethics, including the problem of plagiarism, and discusses how ethics can be integrated into the university curriculum and what part particular cases should play in teaching of ethics. Also looks at sexual ethics. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 The ethics boom, philosophy, and the university
ch. 2 Academic freedom, academic ethics, and professorial ethics
ch. 3 The new world of research ethics: a preliminary map
ch. 4 Science: after such knowledge, what responsibility?
ch. 5 University research and the wages of commerce
ch. 6 Of Babbage and kings: a study of a plagiarism complaint
ch. 7 Ethics across the curriculum
ch. 8 Case method
ch. 9 A moral problem in teaching of practical ethics
ch. 10 Sex and the university
Index
Additional Info:
Describes the seven areas that should be considered when evaluating teaching: subject matter mastery, curriculum development, course design, delivery instruction, assessment of instruction, availability to students, and administrative requirements. Idea Paper no. 21, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Describes the seven areas that should be considered when evaluating teaching: subject matter mastery, curriculum development, course design, delivery instruction, assessment of instruction, availability to students, and administrative requirements. Idea Paper no. 21, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Additional Info:
Describes the seven areas that should be considered when evaluating teaching: subject matter mastery, curriculum development, course design, delivery instruction, assessment of instruction, availability to students, and administrative requirements. Idea Paper no. 21, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Describes the seven areas that should be considered when evaluating teaching: subject matter mastery, curriculum development, course design, delivery instruction, assessment of instruction, availability to students, and administrative requirements. Idea Paper no. 21, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Additional Info:
A method for fostering constructive dialogue where conflicts are driven by differences in identity, beliefs, and values. Workshops, resources, blog, client services.
A method for fostering constructive dialogue where conflicts are driven by differences in identity, beliefs, and values. Workshops, resources, blog, client services.
Additional Info:
A method for fostering constructive dialogue where conflicts are driven by differences in identity, beliefs, and values. Workshops, resources, blog, client services.
A method for fostering constructive dialogue where conflicts are driven by differences in identity, beliefs, and values. Workshops, resources, blog, client services.
Additional Info:
Reviews 20 principles or steps in an effective faculty evaluation system, arguing that while most institutions’ claim that the purpose of their fculty evaluation system is the improvement of teaching, the primary purpose is actually almost always to make personnel decisions. Idea Paper no. 33, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Reviews 20 principles or steps in an effective faculty evaluation system, arguing that while most institutions’ claim that the purpose of their fculty evaluation system is the improvement of teaching, the primary purpose is actually almost always to make personnel decisions. Idea Paper no. 33, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Additional Info:
Reviews 20 principles or steps in an effective faculty evaluation system, arguing that while most institutions’ claim that the purpose of their fculty evaluation system is the improvement of teaching, the primary purpose is actually almost always to make personnel decisions. Idea Paper no. 33, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Reviews 20 principles or steps in an effective faculty evaluation system, arguing that while most institutions’ claim that the purpose of their fculty evaluation system is the improvement of teaching, the primary purpose is actually almost always to make personnel decisions. Idea Paper no. 33, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Additional Info:
* Do students gain when they are taught by active researchers?
* Should all faculty be involved in research?
* What are the benefits students (and their parents) should get from studying at an elite research university – and paying higher fees for the privilege?
In Scholarship Re-Considered, Ernest Boyer challenged US universities to "break out of the tired old teaching versus research debate." This book provides an international perspective ...
* Do students gain when they are taught by active researchers?
* Should all faculty be involved in research?
* What are the benefits students (and their parents) should get from studying at an elite research university – and paying higher fees for the privilege?
In Scholarship Re-Considered, Ernest Boyer challenged US universities to "break out of the tired old teaching versus research debate." This book provides an international perspective ...
Additional Info:
* Do students gain when they are taught by active researchers?
* Should all faculty be involved in research?
* What are the benefits students (and their parents) should get from studying at an elite research university – and paying higher fees for the privilege?
In Scholarship Re-Considered, Ernest Boyer challenged US universities to "break out of the tired old teaching versus research debate." This book provides an international perspective on how universities, departments and individual faculty have successfully sought to connect their research to the benefit of student learning and institutional mission. It directly addresses the ways teaching-research links can be developed.
Building on research, the literature and wide practical experience, the authors show how academic research activity can be connected to academic teaching activity in such a way as to ensure that neither operates in a vacuum and, most importantly, that each can be enhanced by the other.
The book addresses the issues at the individual, course and institutional levels, as well as at the level of public policy. An important work for faculty, faculty developers and administrators. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Notes on the authors
Preface
Acknowledgements
ch. 1 Overview: reshaping teaching in higher education to support the links between teaching and research
ch. 2 What research and scholarship tell us about teaching-research relationships in higher education
ch. 3 Academic research and student motivation in higher education
ch. 4 Designing the curriculum to link teaching and research
ch. 5 Organizing the institution to link teaching and research
ch. 6 Organizing the department to link teaching and research
ch. 7 Organizing the national and international administration of higher education to link teaching and research
References
Further reading
Index
* Do students gain when they are taught by active researchers?
* Should all faculty be involved in research?
* What are the benefits students (and their parents) should get from studying at an elite research university – and paying higher fees for the privilege?
In Scholarship Re-Considered, Ernest Boyer challenged US universities to "break out of the tired old teaching versus research debate." This book provides an international perspective on how universities, departments and individual faculty have successfully sought to connect their research to the benefit of student learning and institutional mission. It directly addresses the ways teaching-research links can be developed.
Building on research, the literature and wide practical experience, the authors show how academic research activity can be connected to academic teaching activity in such a way as to ensure that neither operates in a vacuum and, most importantly, that each can be enhanced by the other.
The book addresses the issues at the individual, course and institutional levels, as well as at the level of public policy. An important work for faculty, faculty developers and administrators. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Notes on the authors
Preface
Acknowledgements
ch. 1 Overview: reshaping teaching in higher education to support the links between teaching and research
ch. 2 What research and scholarship tell us about teaching-research relationships in higher education
ch. 3 Academic research and student motivation in higher education
ch. 4 Designing the curriculum to link teaching and research
ch. 5 Organizing the institution to link teaching and research
ch. 6 Organizing the department to link teaching and research
ch. 7 Organizing the national and international administration of higher education to link teaching and research
References
Further reading
Index
Additional Info:
Peer review provides informed considerations of a candidate’s teaching that student ratings cannot address: breadth, depth, and rigor of course objectives and materials; patterns of and procedures for course management; and a contextualized sense of the interactions between teacher and students as a whole.
Peer review provides informed considerations of a candidate’s teaching that student ratings cannot address: breadth, depth, and rigor of course objectives and materials; patterns of and procedures for course management; and a contextualized sense of the interactions between teacher and students as a whole.
Additional Info:
Peer review provides informed considerations of a candidate’s teaching that student ratings cannot address: breadth, depth, and rigor of course objectives and materials; patterns of and procedures for course management; and a contextualized sense of the interactions between teacher and students as a whole.
Peer review provides informed considerations of a candidate’s teaching that student ratings cannot address: breadth, depth, and rigor of course objectives and materials; patterns of and procedures for course management; and a contextualized sense of the interactions between teacher and students as a whole.
Success Strategies for Adjunct Faculty
Additional Info:
Success Strategies for Adjunct Faculty provides adjunct instructors with a multi-faceted toolkit for increasing both effectiveness and efficiency in today's college courses and enhances their opportunities for success.
Building upon the research and strategies recommended in The Adjunct Professor's Guide to Success, Dr. Lyons leverages his subsequent workshop experiences throughout North America as well as focused research. The book adds new self-analysis tools that enable the instructor to ...
Success Strategies for Adjunct Faculty provides adjunct instructors with a multi-faceted toolkit for increasing both effectiveness and efficiency in today's college courses and enhances their opportunities for success.
Building upon the research and strategies recommended in The Adjunct Professor's Guide to Success, Dr. Lyons leverages his subsequent workshop experiences throughout North America as well as focused research. The book adds new self-analysis tools that enable the instructor to ...
Additional Info:
Success Strategies for Adjunct Faculty provides adjunct instructors with a multi-faceted toolkit for increasing both effectiveness and efficiency in today's college courses and enhances their opportunities for success.
Building upon the research and strategies recommended in The Adjunct Professor's Guide to Success, Dr. Lyons leverages his subsequent workshop experiences throughout North America as well as focused research. The book adds new self-analysis tools that enable the instructor to integrate personal strengths into course planning and delivery, provides additional course management tools, such as a model mentoring agreement and an exam development exercise. Brand new features include testimonials from 28 successful adjunct professors throughout North America, which open and close each of the book's 14 chapters, as well as a new chapter focused on infusing technology into the adjunct professor's instruction. The book includes a rich array of online support resources. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 A Current Perspective on Adjunct Teaching
ch. 2 Formulating a Master Strategy
ch. 3 Today's College Students
ch. 4 Strategic Course Planning
ch. 5 Launching Your Course Effectively
ch. 6 Managing the Context of Your Course
ch. 7 Instructor-Directed Learning Methods
ch. 8 Student-Driven Learning Methods
ch. 9 Infusing Technology into Your Teaching
ch. 10 Managing the Examination Process
ch. 11 Alternative Methods of Assessing Student Learning
ch. 12 Bringing Your Course to an Effective Conclusion
ch. 13 Evaluating the Effectiveness of Your Teaching
ch. 14 Managing Your Adjunct Career
Bibliography
Index
Success Strategies for Adjunct Faculty provides adjunct instructors with a multi-faceted toolkit for increasing both effectiveness and efficiency in today's college courses and enhances their opportunities for success.
Building upon the research and strategies recommended in The Adjunct Professor's Guide to Success, Dr. Lyons leverages his subsequent workshop experiences throughout North America as well as focused research. The book adds new self-analysis tools that enable the instructor to integrate personal strengths into course planning and delivery, provides additional course management tools, such as a model mentoring agreement and an exam development exercise. Brand new features include testimonials from 28 successful adjunct professors throughout North America, which open and close each of the book's 14 chapters, as well as a new chapter focused on infusing technology into the adjunct professor's instruction. The book includes a rich array of online support resources. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 A Current Perspective on Adjunct Teaching
ch. 2 Formulating a Master Strategy
ch. 3 Today's College Students
ch. 4 Strategic Course Planning
ch. 5 Launching Your Course Effectively
ch. 6 Managing the Context of Your Course
ch. 7 Instructor-Directed Learning Methods
ch. 8 Student-Driven Learning Methods
ch. 9 Infusing Technology into Your Teaching
ch. 10 Managing the Examination Process
ch. 11 Alternative Methods of Assessing Student Learning
ch. 12 Bringing Your Course to an Effective Conclusion
ch. 13 Evaluating the Effectiveness of Your Teaching
ch. 14 Managing Your Adjunct Career
Bibliography
Index
Governance of Theological Schools
Additional Info:
Journal Issue.
Journal Issue.
Additional Info:
Journal Issue.
Table Of Content:
Multilateral Brokerage in Governance (William K. McElvaney)
Reflections on Student Participation in Governance (Carl W. Rohfs)
Reflections on Administrative Life Style
Within a Church Related Seminary (William H. Kade)
Within an Evangelical Multidenominational Seminary (Frank Bateman Stanger)
Effects of Faculty Unionization on Seminary Governance
As Seen by a President (Walter F. Peterson)
As Seen by a Faculty Member (Carnegie Samuel Calian)
Models of Governance (Dwight E. Stevenson)
Divinity School Governance Within a University Structure
A Private Canadian University Perspective (Elliott B. Allen)
A Private U.S. University Perspective (Krister Stendahl)
Journal Issue.
Table Of Content:
Multilateral Brokerage in Governance (William K. McElvaney)
Reflections on Student Participation in Governance (Carl W. Rohfs)
Reflections on Administrative Life Style
Within a Church Related Seminary (William H. Kade)
Within an Evangelical Multidenominational Seminary (Frank Bateman Stanger)
Effects of Faculty Unionization on Seminary Governance
As Seen by a President (Walter F. Peterson)
As Seen by a Faculty Member (Carnegie Samuel Calian)
Models of Governance (Dwight E. Stevenson)
Divinity School Governance Within a University Structure
A Private Canadian University Perspective (Elliott B. Allen)
A Private U.S. University Perspective (Krister Stendahl)
Additional Info:
This 6 page essay from the Association of American Colleges & Universities (AAC&U) deals with the different levels of investing in faculty: preparing graduate students to be successful future faculty; supporting new faculty entering the college/university; the mentoring of faculty close to retirement who have invested their lives in the support of education. Publisher: Project Kaleidoscope
This 6 page essay from the Association of American Colleges & Universities (AAC&U) deals with the different levels of investing in faculty: preparing graduate students to be successful future faculty; supporting new faculty entering the college/university; the mentoring of faculty close to retirement who have invested their lives in the support of education. Publisher: Project Kaleidoscope
Additional Info:
This 6 page essay from the Association of American Colleges & Universities (AAC&U) deals with the different levels of investing in faculty: preparing graduate students to be successful future faculty; supporting new faculty entering the college/university; the mentoring of faculty close to retirement who have invested their lives in the support of education. Publisher: Project Kaleidoscope
This 6 page essay from the Association of American Colleges & Universities (AAC&U) deals with the different levels of investing in faculty: preparing graduate students to be successful future faculty; supporting new faculty entering the college/university; the mentoring of faculty close to retirement who have invested their lives in the support of education. Publisher: Project Kaleidoscope
Exploring The Role of Contingent Instructional Staff in Undergraduate Learning
Additional Info:
The majority of undergraduate instructors hold contingent appointments, a term used here to include not only the non-tenure-track part-time faculty but also many instructional staff who lack faculty status, an increasing proportion of full-time non-tenure track faculty, and a substantial number of graduate student teaching assistants. This volume seeks to foster a dialogue, long overdue, between those who believe that the academy has failed to give adequate respect and support ...
The majority of undergraduate instructors hold contingent appointments, a term used here to include not only the non-tenure-track part-time faculty but also many instructional staff who lack faculty status, an increasing proportion of full-time non-tenure track faculty, and a substantial number of graduate student teaching assistants. This volume seeks to foster a dialogue, long overdue, between those who believe that the academy has failed to give adequate respect and support ...
Additional Info:
The majority of undergraduate instructors hold contingent appointments, a term used here to include not only the non-tenure-track part-time faculty but also many instructional staff who lack faculty status, an increasing proportion of full-time non-tenure track faculty, and a substantial number of graduate student teaching assistants. This volume seeks to foster a dialogue, long overdue, between those who believe that the academy has failed to give adequate respect and support to undergraduate instruction and those who believe that the academy has failed to give adequate support and respect to the selection and terms and conditions of employment of undergraduate instructors. It may be that the increasing dependence on contingent appointments imperils undergraduate learning no less than it imperils the future of the academic profession. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 The Faculty Makeover: What Does It Mean for Students? (Jack H. Schuster)
ch. 2 Changing Relationship, Changing Values in the American Classroom (Robert B. Townsend)
ch. 3 Part-Time Faculty: Why Should We Care? (Maureen Murphy Nutting)
ch. 4 Contingent Faculty and Student Learning: Welcome to the Strativersity (Karen Thompson)
ch. 5 How Does University Decision Making Shape the Faculty? (John G. Cross, Edie N. Goldenberg)
ch. 6 The Choices Before Us: An Administrator's Perspective on Faculty Staffing and Student Learning in General Education Courses (Gary W. Reichard)
ch. 7 A Regional Accreditation Perspective on Contingent Faculty Appointments (Sandra E. Elman)
ch. 8 Reappraisal and Implications for Policy and Research (Ernst Benjamin)
Index
The majority of undergraduate instructors hold contingent appointments, a term used here to include not only the non-tenure-track part-time faculty but also many instructional staff who lack faculty status, an increasing proportion of full-time non-tenure track faculty, and a substantial number of graduate student teaching assistants. This volume seeks to foster a dialogue, long overdue, between those who believe that the academy has failed to give adequate respect and support to undergraduate instruction and those who believe that the academy has failed to give adequate support and respect to the selection and terms and conditions of employment of undergraduate instructors. It may be that the increasing dependence on contingent appointments imperils undergraduate learning no less than it imperils the future of the academic profession. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 The Faculty Makeover: What Does It Mean for Students? (Jack H. Schuster)
ch. 2 Changing Relationship, Changing Values in the American Classroom (Robert B. Townsend)
ch. 3 Part-Time Faculty: Why Should We Care? (Maureen Murphy Nutting)
ch. 4 Contingent Faculty and Student Learning: Welcome to the Strativersity (Karen Thompson)
ch. 5 How Does University Decision Making Shape the Faculty? (John G. Cross, Edie N. Goldenberg)
ch. 6 The Choices Before Us: An Administrator's Perspective on Faculty Staffing and Student Learning in General Education Courses (Gary W. Reichard)
ch. 7 A Regional Accreditation Perspective on Contingent Faculty Appointments (Sandra E. Elman)
ch. 8 Reappraisal and Implications for Policy and Research (Ernst Benjamin)
Index
Managing Online Instructor Workload: Strategies for Finding Balance and Success
Additional Info:
A large number of institutions are now providing online programs, requiring instructors to change the way they think about teaching and master a distinct set of workload management skills. The first book to discuss workload management for online instructors, Managing Online Instructor Workload offers practical strategies, advice, and examples for how to prioritize, balance, and manage an online teaching workload. Based on surveys and interviews, the timely and comprehensive insight ...
A large number of institutions are now providing online programs, requiring instructors to change the way they think about teaching and master a distinct set of workload management skills. The first book to discuss workload management for online instructors, Managing Online Instructor Workload offers practical strategies, advice, and examples for how to prioritize, balance, and manage an online teaching workload. Based on surveys and interviews, the timely and comprehensive insight ...
Additional Info:
A large number of institutions are now providing online programs, requiring instructors to change the way they think about teaching and master a distinct set of workload management skills. The first book to discuss workload management for online instructors, Managing Online Instructor Workload offers practical strategies, advice, and examples for how to prioritize, balance, and manage an online teaching workload. Based on surveys and interviews, the timely and comprehensive insight in this book is essential for online instructors, instructional designers, faculty developers and others involved in online learning.
Table Of Content:
List of Tables
Preface
About the Authors
ch. 1 Issues and Challenges When Teaching Online
Institutional Issues and Challenges
Instructional Issues and Challenges
Our Study on Instructor Workload When Teaching Online
Summary
ch. 2 Instructors' Stories for Balancing Workload
Co-Teaching as a Strategy for Balancing Workload
Planning Ahead as a Way to Predict Workload
Giving Individual Feedback as a Workload Management Strategy
Managing Time, Rather Than Time Managing You
Blocking Out Time for the Online Course
Teaching Online During Short Terms
Using Time Allocation Strategies When Teaching for Multiple Institutions
Teaching Online Exclusively from Home
Managing Workload Based on Years of Experience
Teaching Online for a Variety of Institutions
Cohort Program as a Time-Saver
Managing Similar Tasks When Designing for Multiple Courses
Teaching a Recurring Mixed-Mode Online Course
Managing Workload When Current Information Drives Content
Summary
ch. 3 Looking at Workload from a Design Perspective
Identifying Course Tasks
Why It Is Important to Use an Instructional Design Process
Design Framework for Creating a Sense of Presence
Using a Template to Manage Tasks and Prioritize Time
Summary
ch. 4 Managing Tasks and Prioritizing Time
Creating a New Online Course
Converting a Face-to-Face Course
Revising an Existing Online Course
Summary
ch. 5 Using Workload Strategies for Maintaining Quality of Life
Design Strategies
Support Strategies
Teaching Strategies
Time Allocation Strategies
Summary
ch. 6 Final Thoughts and Practical Implications for Balancing Workload
Teaching from an Open Perspective
Adapting the Course Design
Modifying Workload Strategies
Rethinking How to Prioritize Time and Manage Workload
Practical Implications for Balancing Workload
Glossary
References
Index
A large number of institutions are now providing online programs, requiring instructors to change the way they think about teaching and master a distinct set of workload management skills. The first book to discuss workload management for online instructors, Managing Online Instructor Workload offers practical strategies, advice, and examples for how to prioritize, balance, and manage an online teaching workload. Based on surveys and interviews, the timely and comprehensive insight in this book is essential for online instructors, instructional designers, faculty developers and others involved in online learning.
Table Of Content:
List of Tables
Preface
About the Authors
ch. 1 Issues and Challenges When Teaching Online
Institutional Issues and Challenges
Instructional Issues and Challenges
Our Study on Instructor Workload When Teaching Online
Summary
ch. 2 Instructors' Stories for Balancing Workload
Co-Teaching as a Strategy for Balancing Workload
Planning Ahead as a Way to Predict Workload
Giving Individual Feedback as a Workload Management Strategy
Managing Time, Rather Than Time Managing You
Blocking Out Time for the Online Course
Teaching Online During Short Terms
Using Time Allocation Strategies When Teaching for Multiple Institutions
Teaching Online Exclusively from Home
Managing Workload Based on Years of Experience
Teaching Online for a Variety of Institutions
Cohort Program as a Time-Saver
Managing Similar Tasks When Designing for Multiple Courses
Teaching a Recurring Mixed-Mode Online Course
Managing Workload When Current Information Drives Content
Summary
ch. 3 Looking at Workload from a Design Perspective
Identifying Course Tasks
Why It Is Important to Use an Instructional Design Process
Design Framework for Creating a Sense of Presence
Using a Template to Manage Tasks and Prioritize Time
Summary
ch. 4 Managing Tasks and Prioritizing Time
Creating a New Online Course
Converting a Face-to-Face Course
Revising an Existing Online Course
Summary
ch. 5 Using Workload Strategies for Maintaining Quality of Life
Design Strategies
Support Strategies
Teaching Strategies
Time Allocation Strategies
Summary
ch. 6 Final Thoughts and Practical Implications for Balancing Workload
Teaching from an Open Perspective
Adapting the Course Design
Modifying Workload Strategies
Rethinking How to Prioritize Time and Manage Workload
Practical Implications for Balancing Workload
Glossary
References
Index
Additional Info:
Institutions face tremendous potential loss if midcareer employees (like mid-career faculty?) are not happy and productive. Midcareer problems are “pervasive, largely invisible, and culturally uncharted.”
Institutions face tremendous potential loss if midcareer employees (like mid-career faculty?) are not happy and productive. Midcareer problems are “pervasive, largely invisible, and culturally uncharted.”
Additional Info:
Institutions face tremendous potential loss if midcareer employees (like mid-career faculty?) are not happy and productive. Midcareer problems are “pervasive, largely invisible, and culturally uncharted.”
Institutions face tremendous potential loss if midcareer employees (like mid-career faculty?) are not happy and productive. Midcareer problems are “pervasive, largely invisible, and culturally uncharted.”
Mentoring Faculty for Midcareer Issues
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
"Why Professors Don't Change"
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Four primary factors are relevant to social and cultural diversity in the college classroom: students, teachers, course content, and teaching methods. Faculty can use understanding of these factors and their interrelationships to facilitate learning in an increasingly multicultural environment.
Four primary factors are relevant to social and cultural diversity in the college classroom: students, teachers, course content, and teaching methods. Faculty can use understanding of these factors and their interrelationships to facilitate learning in an increasingly multicultural environment.
Additional Info:
Four primary factors are relevant to social and cultural diversity in the college classroom: students, teachers, course content, and teaching methods. Faculty can use understanding of these factors and their interrelationships to facilitate learning in an increasingly multicultural environment.
Four primary factors are relevant to social and cultural diversity in the college classroom: students, teachers, course content, and teaching methods. Faculty can use understanding of these factors and their interrelationships to facilitate learning in an increasingly multicultural environment.
"Librarians and Teaching Faculty in Collaboration: New Incentives, New Opportunities"
Additional Info:
New campus-wide initiatives and developing a technology now provide librarians with fresh tools for supporting and assisting faculty as fellow educators. Librarians can participate in instruction activities as collaborators and by acting as teachers to the teaching faculty Librarians can foster this interaction by cooperating in assessment and accreditation processes, and by joining in learning communities and writing programs. This article will explore ways that the librarian can partner in ...
New campus-wide initiatives and developing a technology now provide librarians with fresh tools for supporting and assisting faculty as fellow educators. Librarians can participate in instruction activities as collaborators and by acting as teachers to the teaching faculty Librarians can foster this interaction by cooperating in assessment and accreditation processes, and by joining in learning communities and writing programs. This article will explore ways that the librarian can partner in ...
Additional Info:
New campus-wide initiatives and developing a technology now provide librarians with fresh tools for supporting and assisting faculty as fellow educators. Librarians can participate in instruction activities as collaborators and by acting as teachers to the teaching faculty Librarians can foster this interaction by cooperating in assessment and accreditation processes, and by joining in learning communities and writing programs. This article will explore ways that the librarian can partner in professional development with faculty by participating in curriculum planning and educational assessment.
New campus-wide initiatives and developing a technology now provide librarians with fresh tools for supporting and assisting faculty as fellow educators. Librarians can participate in instruction activities as collaborators and by acting as teachers to the teaching faculty Librarians can foster this interaction by cooperating in assessment and accreditation processes, and by joining in learning communities and writing programs. This article will explore ways that the librarian can partner in professional development with faculty by participating in curriculum planning and educational assessment.
Additional Info:
Compared research papers before and after implementation of an inquiry-based library instruction program at the University of New Mexico to asses the program's effectiveness and consider its future development. Discusses increased collaboration between the library and the English department and suggests more training for instructors and greater emphasis on a rhetorical research approach.
Compared research papers before and after implementation of an inquiry-based library instruction program at the University of New Mexico to asses the program's effectiveness and consider its future development. Discusses increased collaboration between the library and the English department and suggests more training for instructors and greater emphasis on a rhetorical research approach.
Additional Info:
Compared research papers before and after implementation of an inquiry-based library instruction program at the University of New Mexico to asses the program's effectiveness and consider its future development. Discusses increased collaboration between the library and the English department and suggests more training for instructors and greater emphasis on a rhetorical research approach.
Compared research papers before and after implementation of an inquiry-based library instruction program at the University of New Mexico to asses the program's effectiveness and consider its future development. Discusses increased collaboration between the library and the English department and suggests more training for instructors and greater emphasis on a rhetorical research approach.
Additional Info:
In this report, we review social science and library studies literatures on librarian-faculty relations, and present a preliminary sociological analysis of these relations. We find an asymmetrical disconnection between both groups: Librarians and faculty identify a disconnection that keeps the two separated, but only librarians view this disconnection as problematic.
In this report, we review social science and library studies literatures on librarian-faculty relations, and present a preliminary sociological analysis of these relations. We find an asymmetrical disconnection between both groups: Librarians and faculty identify a disconnection that keeps the two separated, but only librarians view this disconnection as problematic.
Additional Info:
In this report, we review social science and library studies literatures on librarian-faculty relations, and present a preliminary sociological analysis of these relations. We find an asymmetrical disconnection between both groups: Librarians and faculty identify a disconnection that keeps the two separated, but only librarians view this disconnection as problematic.
In this report, we review social science and library studies literatures on librarian-faculty relations, and present a preliminary sociological analysis of these relations. We find an asymmetrical disconnection between both groups: Librarians and faculty identify a disconnection that keeps the two separated, but only librarians view this disconnection as problematic.
"The Teaching Portfolio"
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
"Reflections on a privilege: Becoming part of the course through a collaboration on Blackboard"
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
"The Ethics of Learner-Centered Education: Dynamics That Impede the Process"
Additional Info:
Discusses the fact that despite a decade of changing ideas about student learning and instruction based on learner-centered education, most faculty still rely on lectures. Identifies individual and group dynamics that impede collaborative learning, considers the moral base of collaborative learning, and offers some guiding principles of growth-oriented learning.
Discusses the fact that despite a decade of changing ideas about student learning and instruction based on learner-centered education, most faculty still rely on lectures. Identifies individual and group dynamics that impede collaborative learning, considers the moral base of collaborative learning, and offers some guiding principles of growth-oriented learning.
Additional Info:
Discusses the fact that despite a decade of changing ideas about student learning and instruction based on learner-centered education, most faculty still rely on lectures. Identifies individual and group dynamics that impede collaborative learning, considers the moral base of collaborative learning, and offers some guiding principles of growth-oriented learning.
Discusses the fact that despite a decade of changing ideas about student learning and instruction based on learner-centered education, most faculty still rely on lectures. Identifies individual and group dynamics that impede collaborative learning, considers the moral base of collaborative learning, and offers some guiding principles of growth-oriented learning.
Additional Info:
From the Publisher
Written for anyone who works with graduate students to support their teaching efforts in American research universities, this book draws on the extensive experience of professional educators who represent a variety of programs throughout the United States. They understand the common constraints of many TA development classes, workshops, and programs, as well as the need for motivating and sophisticated techniques that are, at the same time, ...
From the Publisher
Written for anyone who works with graduate students to support their teaching efforts in American research universities, this book draws on the extensive experience of professional educators who represent a variety of programs throughout the United States. They understand the common constraints of many TA development classes, workshops, and programs, as well as the need for motivating and sophisticated techniques that are, at the same time, ...
Additional Info:
From the Publisher
Written for anyone who works with graduate students to support their teaching efforts in American research universities, this book draws on the extensive experience of professional educators who represent a variety of programs throughout the United States. They understand the common constraints of many TA development classes, workshops, and programs, as well as the need for motivating and sophisticated techniques that are, at the same time, practical and focused. Their contributions to this book have proven to be effective in developing the sophisticated communication skills required by TAs across the disciplines.
Table Of Content:
About the Authors
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
Part I: TA Development
ch. 1 Getting Started
Acknowledging Teaching Fears: The Three-Minute Free Response (Janet Rankin)
An Approach to Successful Collaborative Learning (Nancy C McClure)
Blended Learning: Focusing on Effective Teaching Through Online Discussions and Concept Mapping (Gabriele Bauer)
Diversity in the Classroom: Working Effectively with Undergraduate ESL Students (Shawna Shapiro)
Engaging Students in Active Learning (Shawna Shapiro)
Identity and Authority in the Classroom: An Exercise for New TAs (Mary C Wright)
Planning and Facilitating Discussion (Phillip M Edwards, Stacy Grooters, Margaret Lawrence)
Problems, Pitfalls, and Surprises in Teaching: Mini Cases (Lori Breslow, J Mark Schuster)
Responding to Student Writing (Stacy Grooters, Jennie Dorman)
Stand and Deliver: Developing Impromptu Speaking Skills (Jane Dunphy)
A TA Orientation Plenary Session on University Policies and Resources for Teaching (Derek Bruff)
Teaching in Computer Classrooms (Shaun K Kane, Joe Hannah, Phillip M Edwards, Jennie Dorman)
Teaching in Lab Settings (Jennie Dorman, Michelle Smith, Sara O’Brien, Karen Freisem)
ch. 2 Advanced Skills
Classroom Management Skills: Expanding Your Repertoire (Lee Warren)
Determining Appropriate Course Goalsand Pacing: An Exercise for Advanced TAs (Allyson Polsky McCabe, Lu Zhang)
Developing Effective Consulting Skills (Michele Marincovich, Marcelo Clerici-Arias, Mariatte Denman, Robyn Wright Dunbar)
Interdisciplinary Soapbox (Jill Bible, Robyn Wright Dunbar)
Introduction to Online Teaching and Learning: Using Asynchronous Discussions Effectively (Mary C Wright)
Reaction and Response: Group Problem Solving and Effective Feedback (Jane Dunphy)
Teaching Practice: Emphasis on Active Learning (Tershia Pinder)
ch. 3 Professional Development
ASPECTS: Advancing Students’ Professional Excellence with Certificates in Teaching Series (Mark Decker)
Mock Search Committee: Introduction to the Teaching Philosophy (Judith Gibber)
Teaching Portfolio Overview: Peer and Whole Group Discussion (Gabriele Bauer)
Part II: ITA Development
ch. 4 Culture
Cultural Adjustments (Barbara Gourlay)
Diversity Awareness for ITAs (Doris Yaffe Shiffman)
High-Context Versus Low-Context Culture: Case Studies (Christine Liptak, Colleen Meyers, Kyoung-Ah Nam, Elena Stetsenko)
The High School Visit (Catherine Ross)
Interviews: Surveying College Undergraduates Who Attended High School in the United States (Margo Sampson, Vel Chesser, Stacey Lane Tice)
ch. 5 Pedagogy
American Teaching Performance (Pamela Pollock)
Movie-Based Activities for the ITA Course (Theresa L Pettit)
Pedagogical Uses of Critical Incidents Videos for ITAs (Stacey Lane Tice, Margo Sampson, Vel Chesser)
Practice Identifying and Teaching to a Variety of Learning Styles (Anne Halbert)
Preparing the ITA for Office Hours (Elizabeth Wittner)
ch. 6 Language
Departmental Introduction Speech (Kimberly Kenyon)
Developing Oral Communication Skills (Margaret Lawrence)
Discovering and Teaching the Vocabulary of the Academic Communities (Doris Yaffe Shiffman)
Editorial Jigsaw (Barbara Gourlay)
Fielding Questions: The IgNobel Prizes (Barbara Thompson)
The Fine Art of Q&A (Barbara Gourlay)
The Greek Alphabet: Speaking in Symbols (Barbara Gourlay)
"International Teaching Assistant of the Year" Speech (Kimberly Kenyon)
Mimicking American TA Discourse (Janet Goodwin)
Practicing Communication Strategies (Doris Yaffe Shiffman)
Presentation Summaries—Take Two! (Barbara Thompson)
Working with Authentic TA Discourse (Janet Goodwin)
Resources
Index
From the Publisher
Written for anyone who works with graduate students to support their teaching efforts in American research universities, this book draws on the extensive experience of professional educators who represent a variety of programs throughout the United States. They understand the common constraints of many TA development classes, workshops, and programs, as well as the need for motivating and sophisticated techniques that are, at the same time, practical and focused. Their contributions to this book have proven to be effective in developing the sophisticated communication skills required by TAs across the disciplines.
Table Of Content:
About the Authors
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
Part I: TA Development
ch. 1 Getting Started
Acknowledging Teaching Fears: The Three-Minute Free Response (Janet Rankin)
An Approach to Successful Collaborative Learning (Nancy C McClure)
Blended Learning: Focusing on Effective Teaching Through Online Discussions and Concept Mapping (Gabriele Bauer)
Diversity in the Classroom: Working Effectively with Undergraduate ESL Students (Shawna Shapiro)
Engaging Students in Active Learning (Shawna Shapiro)
Identity and Authority in the Classroom: An Exercise for New TAs (Mary C Wright)
Planning and Facilitating Discussion (Phillip M Edwards, Stacy Grooters, Margaret Lawrence)
Problems, Pitfalls, and Surprises in Teaching: Mini Cases (Lori Breslow, J Mark Schuster)
Responding to Student Writing (Stacy Grooters, Jennie Dorman)
Stand and Deliver: Developing Impromptu Speaking Skills (Jane Dunphy)
A TA Orientation Plenary Session on University Policies and Resources for Teaching (Derek Bruff)
Teaching in Computer Classrooms (Shaun K Kane, Joe Hannah, Phillip M Edwards, Jennie Dorman)
Teaching in Lab Settings (Jennie Dorman, Michelle Smith, Sara O’Brien, Karen Freisem)
ch. 2 Advanced Skills
Classroom Management Skills: Expanding Your Repertoire (Lee Warren)
Determining Appropriate Course Goalsand Pacing: An Exercise for Advanced TAs (Allyson Polsky McCabe, Lu Zhang)
Developing Effective Consulting Skills (Michele Marincovich, Marcelo Clerici-Arias, Mariatte Denman, Robyn Wright Dunbar)
Interdisciplinary Soapbox (Jill Bible, Robyn Wright Dunbar)
Introduction to Online Teaching and Learning: Using Asynchronous Discussions Effectively (Mary C Wright)
Reaction and Response: Group Problem Solving and Effective Feedback (Jane Dunphy)
Teaching Practice: Emphasis on Active Learning (Tershia Pinder)
ch. 3 Professional Development
ASPECTS: Advancing Students’ Professional Excellence with Certificates in Teaching Series (Mark Decker)
Mock Search Committee: Introduction to the Teaching Philosophy (Judith Gibber)
Teaching Portfolio Overview: Peer and Whole Group Discussion (Gabriele Bauer)
Part II: ITA Development
ch. 4 Culture
Cultural Adjustments (Barbara Gourlay)
Diversity Awareness for ITAs (Doris Yaffe Shiffman)
High-Context Versus Low-Context Culture: Case Studies (Christine Liptak, Colleen Meyers, Kyoung-Ah Nam, Elena Stetsenko)
The High School Visit (Catherine Ross)
Interviews: Surveying College Undergraduates Who Attended High School in the United States (Margo Sampson, Vel Chesser, Stacey Lane Tice)
ch. 5 Pedagogy
American Teaching Performance (Pamela Pollock)
Movie-Based Activities for the ITA Course (Theresa L Pettit)
Pedagogical Uses of Critical Incidents Videos for ITAs (Stacey Lane Tice, Margo Sampson, Vel Chesser)
Practice Identifying and Teaching to a Variety of Learning Styles (Anne Halbert)
Preparing the ITA for Office Hours (Elizabeth Wittner)
ch. 6 Language
Departmental Introduction Speech (Kimberly Kenyon)
Developing Oral Communication Skills (Margaret Lawrence)
Discovering and Teaching the Vocabulary of the Academic Communities (Doris Yaffe Shiffman)
Editorial Jigsaw (Barbara Gourlay)
Fielding Questions: The IgNobel Prizes (Barbara Thompson)
The Fine Art of Q&A (Barbara Gourlay)
The Greek Alphabet: Speaking in Symbols (Barbara Gourlay)
"International Teaching Assistant of the Year" Speech (Kimberly Kenyon)
Mimicking American TA Discourse (Janet Goodwin)
Practicing Communication Strategies (Doris Yaffe Shiffman)
Presentation Summaries—Take Two! (Barbara Thompson)
Working with Authentic TA Discourse (Janet Goodwin)
Resources
Index
Additional Info:
A tool to facilitate discussion about diversity in hiring at colleges and universities. The website includes a study guide and order form for a free live action film in which a search committee debates candidate qualifications for an open position.This web site will prepare you to show the film and help your audience to demystify subtle discrimination, examine assumptions, and become change-agents.
A tool to facilitate discussion about diversity in hiring at colleges and universities. The website includes a study guide and order form for a free live action film in which a search committee debates candidate qualifications for an open position.This web site will prepare you to show the film and help your audience to demystify subtle discrimination, examine assumptions, and become change-agents.
Additional Info:
A tool to facilitate discussion about diversity in hiring at colleges and universities. The website includes a study guide and order form for a free live action film in which a search committee debates candidate qualifications for an open position.This web site will prepare you to show the film and help your audience to demystify subtle discrimination, examine assumptions, and become change-agents.
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 How To Use This Film: Facilitation Guidelines
ch. 2 Key Concepts
ch. 3 Research on Bias
ch. 4 Common Shortcuts
ch. 5 Frequently Asked Questions
ch. 6 Best Practices for Search Committees
ch. 7 Further Reading
A tool to facilitate discussion about diversity in hiring at colleges and universities. The website includes a study guide and order form for a free live action film in which a search committee debates candidate qualifications for an open position.This web site will prepare you to show the film and help your audience to demystify subtle discrimination, examine assumptions, and become change-agents.
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 How To Use This Film: Facilitation Guidelines
ch. 2 Key Concepts
ch. 3 Research on Bias
ch. 4 Common Shortcuts
ch. 5 Frequently Asked Questions
ch. 6 Best Practices for Search Committees
ch. 7 Further Reading
Administrative Staff Development in Theological Schools
Additional Info:
Journal Issue.
Journal Issue.
Additional Info:
Journal Issue.
Table Of Content:
The Professional Manager within the Mission of the Theological Schoo (Dayton D. Hultgren)
What We Need to Know About Law—Federal and State (Wesley S. Walton)
Government Aid—Buried Treasure (Robert E. Broadwell)
Government Aid—Hidden Curse (John W. Baker)
From Student to Ministry through Theological Education (W. Robert Martin, Jr.)
Resource List for Seminary Registrars (Vera L. Watts)
Marketing and Recruitment: Two Unholy Words and Their Possible Usefulness in Theological Education (Lowell H. Fewster)
What Is Theological Research? (H. Darrell Lance)
Journal Issue.
Table Of Content:
The Professional Manager within the Mission of the Theological Schoo (Dayton D. Hultgren)
What We Need to Know About Law—Federal and State (Wesley S. Walton)
Government Aid—Buried Treasure (Robert E. Broadwell)
Government Aid—Hidden Curse (John W. Baker)
From Student to Ministry through Theological Education (W. Robert Martin, Jr.)
Resource List for Seminary Registrars (Vera L. Watts)
Marketing and Recruitment: Two Unholy Words and Their Possible Usefulness in Theological Education (Lowell H. Fewster)
What Is Theological Research? (H. Darrell Lance)
Additional Info:
Walks through the entire process, covering issues such as: peer observation versus peer evaluation; formative versus summative peer observation process, key issues to remember, recommendations, etc.
Walks through the entire process, covering issues such as: peer observation versus peer evaluation; formative versus summative peer observation process, key issues to remember, recommendations, etc.
Additional Info:
Walks through the entire process, covering issues such as: peer observation versus peer evaluation; formative versus summative peer observation process, key issues to remember, recommendations, etc.
Walks through the entire process, covering issues such as: peer observation versus peer evaluation; formative versus summative peer observation process, key issues to remember, recommendations, etc.
"Teaching-Related Stress: The Emotional Management of Faculty"
Additional Info:
The work of faculty is stressful, yet most stress studies focus on faculty's research rather than teaching. This study examined the experience of nine tenured professors in search of answers to these questions: What classroom interactions do faculty find stressful? Why do faculty find these activities stressful? How do faculty explain, perform, and organize classroom practices to cope with these stresses?
The work of faculty is stressful, yet most stress studies focus on faculty's research rather than teaching. This study examined the experience of nine tenured professors in search of answers to these questions: What classroom interactions do faculty find stressful? Why do faculty find these activities stressful? How do faculty explain, perform, and organize classroom practices to cope with these stresses?
Additional Info:
The work of faculty is stressful, yet most stress studies focus on faculty's research rather than teaching. This study examined the experience of nine tenured professors in search of answers to these questions: What classroom interactions do faculty find stressful? Why do faculty find these activities stressful? How do faculty explain, perform, and organize classroom practices to cope with these stresses?
The work of faculty is stressful, yet most stress studies focus on faculty's research rather than teaching. This study examined the experience of nine tenured professors in search of answers to these questions: What classroom interactions do faculty find stressful? Why do faculty find these activities stressful? How do faculty explain, perform, and organize classroom practices to cope with these stresses?
The Scholarship of Teaching and Learning in Canada Institutional Impact
Additional Info:
Develop effective models of practice and positively impact institutional teaching and learning quality. This volume provides examples and evidence of the ways in which post-secondary institutions in Canada have developed and sustained programs around the scholarship of teaching and learning (SoTL) that impact the institutional pedagogical climate. Topics include:
- the historical development of SoTL in Canada,
- institutional SoTL practices, including evidence of impact,
- ...
Develop effective models of practice and positively impact institutional teaching and learning quality. This volume provides examples and evidence of the ways in which post-secondary institutions in Canada have developed and sustained programs around the scholarship of teaching and learning (SoTL) that impact the institutional pedagogical climate. Topics include:
- the historical development of SoTL in Canada,
- institutional SoTL practices, including evidence of impact,
- ...
Additional Info:
Develop effective models of practice and positively impact institutional teaching and learning quality. This volume provides examples and evidence of the ways in which post-secondary institutions in Canada have developed and sustained programs around the scholarship of teaching and learning (SoTL) that impact the institutional pedagogical climate. Topics include:
- the historical development of SoTL in Canada,
- institutional SoTL practices, including evidence of impact,
- program design and case studies, and
- continuing challenges with this work.
This is the 146th volume of this Jossey-Bass higher education series. It offers a comprehensive range of ideas and techniques for improving college teaching based on the experience of seasoned instructors and the latest findings of educational and psychological researchers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor’s Notes (Nicola Simmons)
Foreword (Nancy Chick)
Section One: Canadian Context
ch. 1 The History of SoTL in Canada: Answering Calls for Action (Nicola Simmons, Gary Poole)
This chapter provides an account of the historical development of SoTL in Canada, including recommendations for moving forward
ch. 2 The Canadian Teaching Commons: The Scholarship of Teaching and Learning in Canadian Higher Education (Brad Wuetheric, Stan Yu)
This chapter maps the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning (SoTL) terrain in Canada through the perceptions of SoTL scholars at four levels (micro, meso, macro, mega)
Section Two: Program Design And Evaluation
ch. 3 The Intentional Design of a SoTL Initiative (Cheryl Amundsen, Esma Emmioglu, Veronica Hotton, Gregory Hum, Cindy Xin)
This chapter outlines how rationale and description of a program design are the underpinnings to evaluate any Scholarship of Teaching and Learning initiative and shows how this supports building on prior practice
ch. 4 The Scholarship of Teaching and Learning (SoTL) at Renaissance College (University of New Brunswick): A Case Study of SoTL at the Faculty Level (Thomas Mengel)
This chapter discusses how a university college moves SoTL forward by aligning with the larger institution and taking advantage of SoTLfriendly existing promotion and tenure policies
ch. 5 Developing the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning at the McMaster Institute for Innovation and Excellence in Teaching and Learning (Elizabeth Marquis, Arshad Ahmad)
This chapter outlines how research fellow positions, engagement of students as co-inquirers, and mapping priority areas for scholarship have the potential for substantial impact on institutional teaching, learning, and SOTL
Section Three: Exploring the Impact of SoTL Initiatives
ch. 6 SoTL2: Inquiring into the Impact of Inquiry (Janice Miller-Young, Michelle Yeo, Karen Manarin, Miriam Carey, Jim Zimmer)
This chapter examines the impact of Mount Royal’s SoTL program on participants’ scholarship at individual, department, and institutional levels as the institution moved from a college to a university
ch. 7 Exploring the SoTL Landscape at the University of Saskatchewan (Brad Wuetherick, Stan Yu, Jim Greer)
This chapter examines who conducts Scholarship of Teaching and Learning, and to what extent, at the University of Saskatchewan and what barriers and challenges impede SoTL work
ch. 8 Reconceptualizing the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning at the University of Waterloo: An Account of Influences and Impact (Julie A. Timmermans, Donna E. Ellis) This chapter outlines how one institution capitalized on events to move from a focus on SoTL to scholarly teaching and discusses the resulting benefits to the culture of teaching and learning
Section Four: Institutionally Networked SoTL
ch. 9 The Role of Small Significant Networks and Leadership in the Institutional Embedding of SoTL (Roselynn Verwoord, Gary Poole)
This chapter builds on notions of social networks, showing how consideration of their nature, relationships between them, and support for them can help create a positive teaching culture
ch. 10 Building Sustained Action: Supporting an Institutional Practice of SoTL at the University of Guelph (Natasha Kenny, Gavan P.L. Watson, Serge Desmarais)
This chapter outlines the symbiotic relationship between engagement in SoTL and a teaching-focused institutional culture, identifying the importance of committed leaders, rewards and recognition, and integrated networks at all organizational levels
Section Five: Synthesis
ch. 11 Synthesizing SoTL Institutional Initiatives toward National Impact (Nicola Simmons)
This chapter draws together the themes in this issue and outlines a model for building from institutional SoTL impact to national initiatives
Index
Develop effective models of practice and positively impact institutional teaching and learning quality. This volume provides examples and evidence of the ways in which post-secondary institutions in Canada have developed and sustained programs around the scholarship of teaching and learning (SoTL) that impact the institutional pedagogical climate. Topics include:
- the historical development of SoTL in Canada,
- institutional SoTL practices, including evidence of impact,
- program design and case studies, and
- continuing challenges with this work.
This is the 146th volume of this Jossey-Bass higher education series. It offers a comprehensive range of ideas and techniques for improving college teaching based on the experience of seasoned instructors and the latest findings of educational and psychological researchers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor’s Notes (Nicola Simmons)
Foreword (Nancy Chick)
Section One: Canadian Context
ch. 1 The History of SoTL in Canada: Answering Calls for Action (Nicola Simmons, Gary Poole)
This chapter provides an account of the historical development of SoTL in Canada, including recommendations for moving forward
ch. 2 The Canadian Teaching Commons: The Scholarship of Teaching and Learning in Canadian Higher Education (Brad Wuetheric, Stan Yu)
This chapter maps the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning (SoTL) terrain in Canada through the perceptions of SoTL scholars at four levels (micro, meso, macro, mega)
Section Two: Program Design And Evaluation
ch. 3 The Intentional Design of a SoTL Initiative (Cheryl Amundsen, Esma Emmioglu, Veronica Hotton, Gregory Hum, Cindy Xin)
This chapter outlines how rationale and description of a program design are the underpinnings to evaluate any Scholarship of Teaching and Learning initiative and shows how this supports building on prior practice
ch. 4 The Scholarship of Teaching and Learning (SoTL) at Renaissance College (University of New Brunswick): A Case Study of SoTL at the Faculty Level (Thomas Mengel)
This chapter discusses how a university college moves SoTL forward by aligning with the larger institution and taking advantage of SoTLfriendly existing promotion and tenure policies
ch. 5 Developing the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning at the McMaster Institute for Innovation and Excellence in Teaching and Learning (Elizabeth Marquis, Arshad Ahmad)
This chapter outlines how research fellow positions, engagement of students as co-inquirers, and mapping priority areas for scholarship have the potential for substantial impact on institutional teaching, learning, and SOTL
Section Three: Exploring the Impact of SoTL Initiatives
ch. 6 SoTL2: Inquiring into the Impact of Inquiry (Janice Miller-Young, Michelle Yeo, Karen Manarin, Miriam Carey, Jim Zimmer)
This chapter examines the impact of Mount Royal’s SoTL program on participants’ scholarship at individual, department, and institutional levels as the institution moved from a college to a university
ch. 7 Exploring the SoTL Landscape at the University of Saskatchewan (Brad Wuetherick, Stan Yu, Jim Greer)
This chapter examines who conducts Scholarship of Teaching and Learning, and to what extent, at the University of Saskatchewan and what barriers and challenges impede SoTL work
ch. 8 Reconceptualizing the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning at the University of Waterloo: An Account of Influences and Impact (Julie A. Timmermans, Donna E. Ellis) This chapter outlines how one institution capitalized on events to move from a focus on SoTL to scholarly teaching and discusses the resulting benefits to the culture of teaching and learning
Section Four: Institutionally Networked SoTL
ch. 9 The Role of Small Significant Networks and Leadership in the Institutional Embedding of SoTL (Roselynn Verwoord, Gary Poole)
This chapter builds on notions of social networks, showing how consideration of their nature, relationships between them, and support for them can help create a positive teaching culture
ch. 10 Building Sustained Action: Supporting an Institutional Practice of SoTL at the University of Guelph (Natasha Kenny, Gavan P.L. Watson, Serge Desmarais)
This chapter outlines the symbiotic relationship between engagement in SoTL and a teaching-focused institutional culture, identifying the importance of committed leaders, rewards and recognition, and integrated networks at all organizational levels
Section Five: Synthesis
ch. 11 Synthesizing SoTL Institutional Initiatives toward National Impact (Nicola Simmons)
This chapter draws together the themes in this issue and outlines a model for building from institutional SoTL impact to national initiatives
Index
Additional Info:
Reviews scholarly literature to recommend how to use student evaluations effectively to improve teaching. Idea Paper no. 22, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Reviews scholarly literature to recommend how to use student evaluations effectively to improve teaching. Idea Paper no. 22, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Additional Info:
Reviews scholarly literature to recommend how to use student evaluations effectively to improve teaching. Idea Paper no. 22, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Reviews scholarly literature to recommend how to use student evaluations effectively to improve teaching. Idea Paper no. 22, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Additional Info:
Cornell University resources for mentoring new faculty, including links for: Best Practices in Mentoring of New Faculty, The Mentoring Relationship, The Successful Mentee, Ideas for Mentors, Questions you might ask peers/senior faculty, Mentoring Guidelines, and Suggestions for Supporting New Faculty
Cornell University resources for mentoring new faculty, including links for: Best Practices in Mentoring of New Faculty, The Mentoring Relationship, The Successful Mentee, Ideas for Mentors, Questions you might ask peers/senior faculty, Mentoring Guidelines, and Suggestions for Supporting New Faculty
Additional Info:
Cornell University resources for mentoring new faculty, including links for: Best Practices in Mentoring of New Faculty, The Mentoring Relationship, The Successful Mentee, Ideas for Mentors, Questions you might ask peers/senior faculty, Mentoring Guidelines, and Suggestions for Supporting New Faculty
Cornell University resources for mentoring new faculty, including links for: Best Practices in Mentoring of New Faculty, The Mentoring Relationship, The Successful Mentee, Ideas for Mentors, Questions you might ask peers/senior faculty, Mentoring Guidelines, and Suggestions for Supporting New Faculty
New Teacher Mentoring: Hopes and Promise for Improving Teacher Effectiveness
Additional Info:
This book is written for K-12 educational contexts, but many of its ideas and analyses can be applied to higher education contexts.
This book is written for K-12 educational contexts, but many of its ideas and analyses can be applied to higher education contexts.
Additional Info:
This book is written for K-12 educational contexts, but many of its ideas and analyses can be applied to higher education contexts.
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgements
Introduction
Part I High-Quality New Teacher Mentoring
ch. 1 What We Know and Don't Know About Mentoring and Induction
ch. 2 The Principles of High-Quality Mentoring
ch. 3 Mentor Professional Development
Part II The Case Studies
ch. 4 Durham Public School
ch. 5 Boston Public Schools
ch. 6 New York City Department of Education
ch. 7 Chicago Public Schools
Part III Conclusions and Recommendations
ch. 8 Analyzing Trends: Strategies Honed, Questions Raised, Levers for Change
ch. 9 Implications and Recommendations for Educational Stakeholders
Notes
About the Authors
About the New Teacher Center
Index
This book is written for K-12 educational contexts, but many of its ideas and analyses can be applied to higher education contexts.
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgements
Introduction
Part I High-Quality New Teacher Mentoring
ch. 1 What We Know and Don't Know About Mentoring and Induction
ch. 2 The Principles of High-Quality Mentoring
ch. 3 Mentor Professional Development
Part II The Case Studies
ch. 4 Durham Public School
ch. 5 Boston Public Schools
ch. 6 New York City Department of Education
ch. 7 Chicago Public Schools
Part III Conclusions and Recommendations
ch. 8 Analyzing Trends: Strategies Honed, Questions Raised, Levers for Change
ch. 9 Implications and Recommendations for Educational Stakeholders
Notes
About the Authors
About the New Teacher Center
Index
Additional Info:
Exhaustive and annotated review of the literature on student evaluation of teaching. Idea Paper no. 32, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Exhaustive and annotated review of the literature on student evaluation of teaching. Idea Paper no. 32, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Additional Info:
Exhaustive and annotated review of the literature on student evaluation of teaching. Idea Paper no. 32, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Exhaustive and annotated review of the literature on student evaluation of teaching. Idea Paper no. 32, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Additional Info:
Digital technology offers a host of opportunities and challenges for theological education. In this essay the author considers possible futures for theological education through creative uses of technology. The first half of the essay identifies five areas in which theological educators have had to gain technology skills in the last several years: 1. Individual facility with a personal computer; 2. Functioning capably in a connected world; 3. Information literacy for research and ministry; 4. ...
Digital technology offers a host of opportunities and challenges for theological education. In this essay the author considers possible futures for theological education through creative uses of technology. The first half of the essay identifies five areas in which theological educators have had to gain technology skills in the last several years: 1. Individual facility with a personal computer; 2. Functioning capably in a connected world; 3. Information literacy for research and ministry; 4. ...
Additional Info:
Digital technology offers a host of opportunities and challenges for theological education. In this essay the author considers possible futures for theological education through creative uses of technology. The first half of the essay identifies five areas in which theological educators have had to gain technology skills in the last several years: 1. Individual facility with a personal computer; 2. Functioning capably in a connected world; 3. Information literacy for research and ministry; 4. Technology for face-to-face instruction; and 5. Technology for asynchronous teaching and learning. The second half of the essay identifies the forces that will likely drive technology learning for theological educators in the coming few years: 1. The pressure to meet student expectations; 2. The pressure to enrich the classroom experience by engaging the visual learner; 3. The pressure to enhance the traditional course through richer pedagogical strategies available with technology; and 4. The pressure to offer distance programs.
Digital technology offers a host of opportunities and challenges for theological education. In this essay the author considers possible futures for theological education through creative uses of technology. The first half of the essay identifies five areas in which theological educators have had to gain technology skills in the last several years: 1. Individual facility with a personal computer; 2. Functioning capably in a connected world; 3. Information literacy for research and ministry; 4. Technology for face-to-face instruction; and 5. Technology for asynchronous teaching and learning. The second half of the essay identifies the forces that will likely drive technology learning for theological educators in the coming few years: 1. The pressure to meet student expectations; 2. The pressure to enrich the classroom experience by engaging the visual learner; 3. The pressure to enhance the traditional course through richer pedagogical strategies available with technology; and 4. The pressure to offer distance programs.
Getting Mentored in Graduate School
Additional Info:
Getting Mentored in Graduate School is the first guide to mentoring relationships written exclusively for graduate students. Research has shown that students who are mentored enjoy many benefits, including better training, greater career success, and a stronger professional identity. Authors Johnson and Huwe draw directly from their own experiences as mentor and protégé to advise students on finding a mentor and maintaining the mentor relationship throughout graduate school.
<...
Getting Mentored in Graduate School is the first guide to mentoring relationships written exclusively for graduate students. Research has shown that students who are mentored enjoy many benefits, including better training, greater career success, and a stronger professional identity. Authors Johnson and Huwe draw directly from their own experiences as mentor and protégé to advise students on finding a mentor and maintaining the mentor relationship throughout graduate school.
<...
Additional Info:
Getting Mentored in Graduate School is the first guide to mentoring relationships written exclusively for graduate students. Research has shown that students who are mentored enjoy many benefits, including better training, greater career success, and a stronger professional identity. Authors Johnson and Huwe draw directly from their own experiences as mentor and protégé to advise students on finding a mentor and maintaining the mentor relationship throughout graduate school.
Conversational, accessible, and informative, this book offers practical strategies that can be employed not only by students pursuing mentorships but also by professors seeking to improve their mentoring skills. Johnson and Huwe arm readers with the tools they need to anticipate and prevent common pitfalls and to resolve problems that may arise in mentoring relationships.
This book is essential reading for students who want to learn and master the unwritten rules that lead to finding a mentor and getting more from graduate school and your career. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
I. About Mentoring
ch. 1 What Mentoring Is
ch. 2 What a Mentor Can Do For You
ch. 3 Who Gets Mentored and Why
II. How to Find a Mentor
ch. 4 What to Look For in a Mentor
ch. 5 The Intentional Protégé: Initiating a Mentor Relationship
III. How to Manage the Mentor Relationship
ch. 6 Designing the Mentor Relationship
ch. 7 The Stages of Mentor Relationships (What to Expect)
ch. 8 Potential Problems (and How to Handle Them)
ch. 9 On Being an Excellent Protégé
ch. 10 Mentoring for Women and Minorities
ch. 11 Some Additional Ways to Get Mentored
References
Index
About the Authors
Getting Mentored in Graduate School is the first guide to mentoring relationships written exclusively for graduate students. Research has shown that students who are mentored enjoy many benefits, including better training, greater career success, and a stronger professional identity. Authors Johnson and Huwe draw directly from their own experiences as mentor and protégé to advise students on finding a mentor and maintaining the mentor relationship throughout graduate school.
Conversational, accessible, and informative, this book offers practical strategies that can be employed not only by students pursuing mentorships but also by professors seeking to improve their mentoring skills. Johnson and Huwe arm readers with the tools they need to anticipate and prevent common pitfalls and to resolve problems that may arise in mentoring relationships.
This book is essential reading for students who want to learn and master the unwritten rules that lead to finding a mentor and getting more from graduate school and your career. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
I. About Mentoring
ch. 1 What Mentoring Is
ch. 2 What a Mentor Can Do For You
ch. 3 Who Gets Mentored and Why
II. How to Find a Mentor
ch. 4 What to Look For in a Mentor
ch. 5 The Intentional Protégé: Initiating a Mentor Relationship
III. How to Manage the Mentor Relationship
ch. 6 Designing the Mentor Relationship
ch. 7 The Stages of Mentor Relationships (What to Expect)
ch. 8 Potential Problems (and How to Handle Them)
ch. 9 On Being an Excellent Protégé
ch. 10 Mentoring for Women and Minorities
ch. 11 Some Additional Ways to Get Mentored
References
Index
About the Authors
The Elements of Mentoring, Revised Edition
Additional Info:
Patterned after Strunk and White's classic The Elements of Style, this new edition concisely summarizes the substantial existing research on the art and science of mentoring. The Elements of Mentoring reduces this wealth of published material on the topic to the sixty-five most important and pithy truths for supervisors in all fields. These explore what excellent mentors do, what makes an excellent mentor, how to set up a successful mentor-proté...
Patterned after Strunk and White's classic The Elements of Style, this new edition concisely summarizes the substantial existing research on the art and science of mentoring. The Elements of Mentoring reduces this wealth of published material on the topic to the sixty-five most important and pithy truths for supervisors in all fields. These explore what excellent mentors do, what makes an excellent mentor, how to set up a successful mentor-proté...
Additional Info:
Patterned after Strunk and White's classic The Elements of Style, this new edition concisely summarizes the substantial existing research on the art and science of mentoring. The Elements of Mentoring reduces this wealth of published material on the topic to the sixty-five most important and pithy truths for supervisors in all fields. These explore what excellent mentors do, what makes an excellent mentor, how to set up a successful mentor-protégé relationship, how to work through problems that develop between mentor and protégé, what it means to mentor with integrity, and how to end the relationship when it has run its course. Succinct and comprehensive, this is a must-have for any mentor or mentor-to-be. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
What Excellent Mentors Do: Matters of Skill
ch. 1 Select Your Protégés Carefully
ch. 2 Know Your Protégés
ch. 3 Expect Excellence (and Nothing Else) ch. 4 Affirm, Affirm, Affirm, and Then Affirm Some More
ch. 5 Provide Sponsorship
ch. 6 Be a Teacher and a Coach
ch. 7 Encourage and Support
ch. 8 Offer Counsel in Difficult Times
ch. 9 Protect When Necessary
ch. 10 Stimulate Growth with Challenging Assignments
ch. 11 Give Protégés Exposure and Promote Their Visibility
ch. 12 Nurture Creativity
ch. 13 Provide Correction -- Even When Painful
ch. 14 Narrate Growth and Development
ch. 15 Self-Disclose When Appropriate
ch. 16 Accept Increasing Friendship and Mutuality
ch. 17 Teach Faceting ch. 18 Be an Intentional Model
ch. 19 Display Dependability
Traits of Excellent Mentors: Matters of Style and Personality
ch. 20 Exude Warmth
ch. 21 Listen Actively
ch. 22 Show Unconditional Regard
ch. 23 Tolerate Idealization
ch. 24 Embrace Humor
ch. 25 Do Not Expect Perfection
ch. 26 Attend to Interpersonal Cues
ch. 27 Be Trustworthy
ch. 28 Respect Values
ch. 29 Do Not Stoop to Jealousy
Arranging the Mentor Protégé Relationship: Matters of Beginning
ch. 30 Carefully Consider the "Match"
ch. 31 Clarify Expectations
ch. 32 Define Relationship Boundaries
ch. 33 Consider Protégé Relationship Style
ch. 34 Describe Potential Benefits and Risks
ch. 35 Be Sensitive to Gender
ch. 36 Be Sensitive to Race and Ethnicity
ch. 37 Plan for Change at the Outset
ch. 38 Schedule Periodic Review or Evaluations
Knowing Thyself as a Mentor: Matters of Integrity
ch. 39 Consider the Consequences of Being a Mentor
ch. 40 Practice Self-Care
ch. 41 Be Productive
ch. 42 Make Sure You Are Competent
ch. 43 Hold Yourself Accountable
ch. 44 Respect the Power of Attraction
ch. 45 Accept the Burden of Power
ch. 46 Practice Humility
ch. 47 Never Exploit Protégés
ch. 48 Above All, Do No Harm
ch. 49 Slow Down the Process
ch. 50 Tell the Truth
ch. 51 Seek Consultation
ch. 52 Document Carefully
ch. 53 Dispute Your Irrational Thinking
Welcoming Change and Saying Goodbye: Matters of Closure
ch. 54 Welcome Change and Growth
ch. 55 Accept Endings
ch. 56 Find Helpful Ways to Say Goodbye
ch. 57 Mentor as a Way of Life
References
Index
Patterned after Strunk and White's classic The Elements of Style, this new edition concisely summarizes the substantial existing research on the art and science of mentoring. The Elements of Mentoring reduces this wealth of published material on the topic to the sixty-five most important and pithy truths for supervisors in all fields. These explore what excellent mentors do, what makes an excellent mentor, how to set up a successful mentor-protégé relationship, how to work through problems that develop between mentor and protégé, what it means to mentor with integrity, and how to end the relationship when it has run its course. Succinct and comprehensive, this is a must-have for any mentor or mentor-to-be. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
What Excellent Mentors Do: Matters of Skill
ch. 1 Select Your Protégés Carefully
ch. 2 Know Your Protégés
ch. 3 Expect Excellence (and Nothing Else) ch. 4 Affirm, Affirm, Affirm, and Then Affirm Some More
ch. 5 Provide Sponsorship
ch. 6 Be a Teacher and a Coach
ch. 7 Encourage and Support
ch. 8 Offer Counsel in Difficult Times
ch. 9 Protect When Necessary
ch. 10 Stimulate Growth with Challenging Assignments
ch. 11 Give Protégés Exposure and Promote Their Visibility
ch. 12 Nurture Creativity
ch. 13 Provide Correction -- Even When Painful
ch. 14 Narrate Growth and Development
ch. 15 Self-Disclose When Appropriate
ch. 16 Accept Increasing Friendship and Mutuality
ch. 17 Teach Faceting ch. 18 Be an Intentional Model
ch. 19 Display Dependability
Traits of Excellent Mentors: Matters of Style and Personality
ch. 20 Exude Warmth
ch. 21 Listen Actively
ch. 22 Show Unconditional Regard
ch. 23 Tolerate Idealization
ch. 24 Embrace Humor
ch. 25 Do Not Expect Perfection
ch. 26 Attend to Interpersonal Cues
ch. 27 Be Trustworthy
ch. 28 Respect Values
ch. 29 Do Not Stoop to Jealousy
Arranging the Mentor Protégé Relationship: Matters of Beginning
ch. 30 Carefully Consider the "Match"
ch. 31 Clarify Expectations
ch. 32 Define Relationship Boundaries
ch. 33 Consider Protégé Relationship Style
ch. 34 Describe Potential Benefits and Risks
ch. 35 Be Sensitive to Gender
ch. 36 Be Sensitive to Race and Ethnicity
ch. 37 Plan for Change at the Outset
ch. 38 Schedule Periodic Review or Evaluations
Knowing Thyself as a Mentor: Matters of Integrity
ch. 39 Consider the Consequences of Being a Mentor
ch. 40 Practice Self-Care
ch. 41 Be Productive
ch. 42 Make Sure You Are Competent
ch. 43 Hold Yourself Accountable
ch. 44 Respect the Power of Attraction
ch. 45 Accept the Burden of Power
ch. 46 Practice Humility
ch. 47 Never Exploit Protégés
ch. 48 Above All, Do No Harm
ch. 49 Slow Down the Process
ch. 50 Tell the Truth
ch. 51 Seek Consultation
ch. 52 Document Carefully
ch. 53 Dispute Your Irrational Thinking
Welcoming Change and Saying Goodbye: Matters of Closure
ch. 54 Welcome Change and Growth
ch. 55 Accept Endings
ch. 56 Find Helpful Ways to Say Goodbye
ch. 57 Mentor as a Way of Life
References
Index
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Paths to the Professoriate: Strategies for Enriching the Preparation of Future Faculty
Additional Info:
It has been estimated that in the next ten years, about half of the current higher education faculty will retire. How can we best prepare the next generation of faculty members to fill this tremendous gap in our educational system?
Paths to the Professoriate offers all those involved in higher education—everyone from administrators to scholars to graduate students—a much-needed resource that brings together major research, the ...
It has been estimated that in the next ten years, about half of the current higher education faculty will retire. How can we best prepare the next generation of faculty members to fill this tremendous gap in our educational system?
Paths to the Professoriate offers all those involved in higher education—everyone from administrators to scholars to graduate students—a much-needed resource that brings together major research, the ...
Additional Info:
It has been estimated that in the next ten years, about half of the current higher education faculty will retire. How can we best prepare the next generation of faculty members to fill this tremendous gap in our educational system?
Paths to the Professoriate offers all those involved in higher education—everyone from administrators to scholars to graduate students—a much-needed resource that brings together major research, the most important developments in practice, and informed analysis on improving graduate education and preparing the future faculty. This important book includes chapters from some of the best-known researchers, practitioners, and scholars working to prepare the faculty of the future.
In one volume, the authors offer a synthesis of what has been learned about the challenges and concerns in graduate education as preparation for faculty careers, highlight the various projects and approaches for improving graduate education, and identify strategies for institutional leaders, department chairs, faculty advisors, and graduate students. Paths to the Professoriate:
* Presents important reasons for considering ways to improve the preparation of the next generation of faculty
* Describes research studies concerning the graduate school experience
* Highlights illustrative examples of innovative programs and projects
* Provides a synthesis of key lessons from the research and projects addressing the preparation of future faculty
This solidly research-based book covers such vital topics as: the lack of systematic developmentally organized preparation for those aspiring to teaching careers in higher education; graduate students’ perceptions of their graduate experiences and their preparation for faculty work; particular challenges confronting Black doctoral students; reasons students leave doctoral study; programs to prepare graduate students for roles as teaching scholars and engaged citizens; strategies to help graduate students and faculty members identify mutual goals and resolve conflicts; and much more.
Paths to the Professoriate offers all those concerned with the fate of higher education a valuable resource for the future. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
About the Authors
Pt. 1 Introduction
ch. 1 The Challenge to Prepare the Next Generation of Faculty
Pt. 2 The Research
ch. 2 The Survey of Doctoral Education and Career Preparation: The Importance of Disciplinary Contexts
ch. 3 The Development of Graduate Students as Teaching Scholars: A Four-Year Longitudinal Study
ch. 4 The 2000 National Doctoral Program Survey: An On-Line Study of Students' Voices
ch. 5 Theories and Strategies of Academic Career Socialization: Improving Paths to the Professoriate for Black Graduate Students
ch. 6 Research on the Structure and Process of Graduate Education: Retaining Students
ch. 7 "So You Want to Become a Professor!": Lessons for the PhDs - Ten Years Later Study
Pt. 3 Strategies for Reform
ch. 8 The Scholarship of Teaching and Learning: Contributing to Reform in Graduate Education
ch. 9 Preparing Future Faculty: Changing the Culture of Doctoral Education
ch. 10 Re-envisioning the Ph.D.: A Challenge for the Twenty-First Century
ch. 11 Toward a Responsive Ph.D.: New Partnerships, Paradigms, Practices, and People
ch. 12 The Carnegie Initiative on the Doctorate: Creating Stewards of the Discipline
ch. 13 Michigan State University's Conflict Resolution Program: Setting Expectations and Resolving Conflicts
Pt. 4 Synthesis, Lessons, and Future Directions
ch. 14 Future Directions: Strategies to Enhance Paths to the Professoriate
Index
It has been estimated that in the next ten years, about half of the current higher education faculty will retire. How can we best prepare the next generation of faculty members to fill this tremendous gap in our educational system?
Paths to the Professoriate offers all those involved in higher education—everyone from administrators to scholars to graduate students—a much-needed resource that brings together major research, the most important developments in practice, and informed analysis on improving graduate education and preparing the future faculty. This important book includes chapters from some of the best-known researchers, practitioners, and scholars working to prepare the faculty of the future.
In one volume, the authors offer a synthesis of what has been learned about the challenges and concerns in graduate education as preparation for faculty careers, highlight the various projects and approaches for improving graduate education, and identify strategies for institutional leaders, department chairs, faculty advisors, and graduate students. Paths to the Professoriate:
* Presents important reasons for considering ways to improve the preparation of the next generation of faculty
* Describes research studies concerning the graduate school experience
* Highlights illustrative examples of innovative programs and projects
* Provides a synthesis of key lessons from the research and projects addressing the preparation of future faculty
This solidly research-based book covers such vital topics as: the lack of systematic developmentally organized preparation for those aspiring to teaching careers in higher education; graduate students’ perceptions of their graduate experiences and their preparation for faculty work; particular challenges confronting Black doctoral students; reasons students leave doctoral study; programs to prepare graduate students for roles as teaching scholars and engaged citizens; strategies to help graduate students and faculty members identify mutual goals and resolve conflicts; and much more.
Paths to the Professoriate offers all those concerned with the fate of higher education a valuable resource for the future. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
About the Authors
Pt. 1 Introduction
ch. 1 The Challenge to Prepare the Next Generation of Faculty
Pt. 2 The Research
ch. 2 The Survey of Doctoral Education and Career Preparation: The Importance of Disciplinary Contexts
ch. 3 The Development of Graduate Students as Teaching Scholars: A Four-Year Longitudinal Study
ch. 4 The 2000 National Doctoral Program Survey: An On-Line Study of Students' Voices
ch. 5 Theories and Strategies of Academic Career Socialization: Improving Paths to the Professoriate for Black Graduate Students
ch. 6 Research on the Structure and Process of Graduate Education: Retaining Students
ch. 7 "So You Want to Become a Professor!": Lessons for the PhDs - Ten Years Later Study
Pt. 3 Strategies for Reform
ch. 8 The Scholarship of Teaching and Learning: Contributing to Reform in Graduate Education
ch. 9 Preparing Future Faculty: Changing the Culture of Doctoral Education
ch. 10 Re-envisioning the Ph.D.: A Challenge for the Twenty-First Century
ch. 11 Toward a Responsive Ph.D.: New Partnerships, Paradigms, Practices, and People
ch. 12 The Carnegie Initiative on the Doctorate: Creating Stewards of the Discipline
ch. 13 Michigan State University's Conflict Resolution Program: Setting Expectations and Resolving Conflicts
Pt. 4 Synthesis, Lessons, and Future Directions
ch. 14 Future Directions: Strategies to Enhance Paths to the Professoriate
Index
On Being a Mentor: A Guide for Higher Education
Additional Info:
On Being a Mentor is the definitive guide for faculty in higher education who wish to mentor both students and junior faculty. It features strategies, guidelines, best practices, and recommendations for professors who wish to excel in this area. Written in a pithy style, this no-nonsense guide offers straightforward advice about managing problem mentorships and measuring mentorship outcomes. Practical cases studies, vignettes, and step-by-step guidelines illuminate the process of mentoring ...
On Being a Mentor is the definitive guide for faculty in higher education who wish to mentor both students and junior faculty. It features strategies, guidelines, best practices, and recommendations for professors who wish to excel in this area. Written in a pithy style, this no-nonsense guide offers straightforward advice about managing problem mentorships and measuring mentorship outcomes. Practical cases studies, vignettes, and step-by-step guidelines illuminate the process of mentoring ...
Additional Info:
On Being a Mentor is the definitive guide for faculty in higher education who wish to mentor both students and junior faculty. It features strategies, guidelines, best practices, and recommendations for professors who wish to excel in this area. Written in a pithy style, this no-nonsense guide offers straightforward advice about managing problem mentorships and measuring mentorship outcomes. Practical cases studies, vignettes, and step-by-step guidelines illuminate the process of mentoring throughout.
Other outstanding features include:
*research-based advice on the rules of engagement for mentoring, mentor functions, qualities of good mentors, and methods for forming and managing student-faculty relationships;
*summaries of the common mentoring relationship phases and guidance for adhering to ethical principles when serving as a mentor;
*guidance about mentoring specific populations, including undergraduate and graduate students, faculty, and protégés who differ from the mentor in terms of sex and race; and
*recommendations for department chairs and deans on how to foster an academic culture of mentoring.
On Being a Mentor is intended for professors, department chairs, and deans in a variety of educational settings, including colleges, universities, and medical and law schools and is suitable for professors in all fields of study including the sciences, humanities, psychology, education, and management. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Part I: On Mentoring
ch. 1 Why Mentoring Matters
ch. 2 The Contours of Mentoring
ch. 3 Mentoring in Academic: A Glimpse Inside
Part II: On Being a Mentor
ch. 4 What Mentors Do: Mentoring Functions
ch. 5 Who Mentors Are: Mentorship-Facilitating Characteristics and Qualities
ch. 6 Designing a Mentorship
ch. 7 The Seasons of Mentorship: Common Relationship Phases
ch. 8 The Ethical Mentor: Doing No Harm
Part III: On Mentoring Specific Groups
ch. 9 Mentoring Undergraduates
ch. 10 Mentoring Graduate Students
ch. 11 Mentoring Junior Faculty
ch. 12 Mentoring Across Sex
ch. 13 Mentoring Across Race
Part IV: Managing Mentorship
ch. 14 Diagnosis and Treatment of Mentorship Dysfunction
ch. 15 Assessing Mentoring Outcomes
ch. 16 Recommendations for Department Chairs and Deans
References
Author of Index
Subject Index
On Being a Mentor is the definitive guide for faculty in higher education who wish to mentor both students and junior faculty. It features strategies, guidelines, best practices, and recommendations for professors who wish to excel in this area. Written in a pithy style, this no-nonsense guide offers straightforward advice about managing problem mentorships and measuring mentorship outcomes. Practical cases studies, vignettes, and step-by-step guidelines illuminate the process of mentoring throughout.
Other outstanding features include:
*research-based advice on the rules of engagement for mentoring, mentor functions, qualities of good mentors, and methods for forming and managing student-faculty relationships;
*summaries of the common mentoring relationship phases and guidance for adhering to ethical principles when serving as a mentor;
*guidance about mentoring specific populations, including undergraduate and graduate students, faculty, and protégés who differ from the mentor in terms of sex and race; and
*recommendations for department chairs and deans on how to foster an academic culture of mentoring.
On Being a Mentor is intended for professors, department chairs, and deans in a variety of educational settings, including colleges, universities, and medical and law schools and is suitable for professors in all fields of study including the sciences, humanities, psychology, education, and management. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Part I: On Mentoring
ch. 1 Why Mentoring Matters
ch. 2 The Contours of Mentoring
ch. 3 Mentoring in Academic: A Glimpse Inside
Part II: On Being a Mentor
ch. 4 What Mentors Do: Mentoring Functions
ch. 5 Who Mentors Are: Mentorship-Facilitating Characteristics and Qualities
ch. 6 Designing a Mentorship
ch. 7 The Seasons of Mentorship: Common Relationship Phases
ch. 8 The Ethical Mentor: Doing No Harm
Part III: On Mentoring Specific Groups
ch. 9 Mentoring Undergraduates
ch. 10 Mentoring Graduate Students
ch. 11 Mentoring Junior Faculty
ch. 12 Mentoring Across Sex
ch. 13 Mentoring Across Race
Part IV: Managing Mentorship
ch. 14 Diagnosis and Treatment of Mentorship Dysfunction
ch. 15 Assessing Mentoring Outcomes
ch. 16 Recommendations for Department Chairs and Deans
References
Author of Index
Subject Index
Additional Info:
Winner of the Virginia and Warren Stone Prize awarded annually by Harvard University Press for an outstanding book on education and society. What makes a great teacher great? Who are the professors students remember long after graduation? This book, the conclusion of a fifteen-year study of nearly one hundred college teachers in a wide variety of fields and universities, offers valuable answers for all educators. The short answer is -- ...
Winner of the Virginia and Warren Stone Prize awarded annually by Harvard University Press for an outstanding book on education and society. What makes a great teacher great? Who are the professors students remember long after graduation? This book, the conclusion of a fifteen-year study of nearly one hundred college teachers in a wide variety of fields and universities, offers valuable answers for all educators. The short answer is -- ...
Additional Info:
Winner of the Virginia and Warren Stone Prize awarded annually by Harvard University Press for an outstanding book on education and society. What makes a great teacher great? Who are the professors students remember long after graduation? This book, the conclusion of a fifteen-year study of nearly one hundred college teachers in a wide variety of fields and universities, offers valuable answers for all educators. The short answer is -- it's not what teachers do, it's what they understand. Lesson plans and lecture notes matter less than the special way teachers comprehend the subject and value human learning. Whether historians or physicists, in El Paso or St. Paul, the best teachers know their subjects inside and out -- but they also know how to engage and challenge students and to provoke impassioned responses. Most of all, they believe two things fervently: that teaching matters and that students can learn. In stories both humorous and touching, Ken Bain describes examples of ingenuity and compassion, of students' discoveries of new ideas and the depth of their own potential. What the Best College Teachers Do is a treasure trove of insight and inspiration for first-year teachers and seasoned educators alike. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Introduction: Defining the Best
ch. 2 What Do They Know about How We Learn?
ch. 3 How Do they Prepare to Teach?
ch. 4 What Do They Expect of Their Students?
ch. 5 How Do They Conduct Class?
ch. 6 How Do They Treat Their Students?
ch. 7 How Do They Evaluate Their Students and Themselves?
Epilogue: What Can We Learn From Them?
App How the Study Was Conducted
Notes
Acknowledgments
Index
Winner of the Virginia and Warren Stone Prize awarded annually by Harvard University Press for an outstanding book on education and society. What makes a great teacher great? Who are the professors students remember long after graduation? This book, the conclusion of a fifteen-year study of nearly one hundred college teachers in a wide variety of fields and universities, offers valuable answers for all educators. The short answer is -- it's not what teachers do, it's what they understand. Lesson plans and lecture notes matter less than the special way teachers comprehend the subject and value human learning. Whether historians or physicists, in El Paso or St. Paul, the best teachers know their subjects inside and out -- but they also know how to engage and challenge students and to provoke impassioned responses. Most of all, they believe two things fervently: that teaching matters and that students can learn. In stories both humorous and touching, Ken Bain describes examples of ingenuity and compassion, of students' discoveries of new ideas and the depth of their own potential. What the Best College Teachers Do is a treasure trove of insight and inspiration for first-year teachers and seasoned educators alike. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Introduction: Defining the Best
ch. 2 What Do They Know about How We Learn?
ch. 3 How Do they Prepare to Teach?
ch. 4 What Do They Expect of Their Students?
ch. 5 How Do They Conduct Class?
ch. 6 How Do They Treat Their Students?
ch. 7 How Do They Evaluate Their Students and Themselves?
Epilogue: What Can We Learn From Them?
App How the Study Was Conducted
Notes
Acknowledgments
Index
Teaching American Students: A Guide for International Faculty and Teaching Assistants
Additional Info:
Many faculty and graduate students from other countries expect language difficulties when they teach, but are unprepared for other surprises: different cultures make different assumptions about the academic background of college students, how students learn, the appropriate roles of teachers and students, and even the fundamental purpose of a college education.
The third edition of Teaching American Students explains the expectations of undergraduates at American colleges and universities ...
Many faculty and graduate students from other countries expect language difficulties when they teach, but are unprepared for other surprises: different cultures make different assumptions about the academic background of college students, how students learn, the appropriate roles of teachers and students, and even the fundamental purpose of a college education.
The third edition of Teaching American Students explains the expectations of undergraduates at American colleges and universities ...
Additional Info:
Many faculty and graduate students from other countries expect language difficulties when they teach, but are unprepared for other surprises: different cultures make different assumptions about the academic background of college students, how students learn, the appropriate roles of teachers and students, and even the fundamental purpose of a college education.
The third edition of Teaching American Students explains the expectations of undergraduates at American colleges and universities and offers practical strategies for teaching, including how to give clear presentations, how to teach interactively, and how to communicate effectively. Also included are illustrative examples as well as advice from international faculty and teaching assistants. Appendices offer concrete suggestions on topics from planning the first day of class to grading papers and problem sets. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Starting out : a quick guide for beginning teachers
ch. 2 Assumptions that affect teaching in the American classroom
ch. 3 Bridging the gap : approaching your students and helping them approach you
ch. 4 Giving presentations that students can understand
ch. 5 Leading a discussion : providing direction and continuity
ch. 6 Understanding meanings beyond words
ch. 7 Appendices
Many faculty and graduate students from other countries expect language difficulties when they teach, but are unprepared for other surprises: different cultures make different assumptions about the academic background of college students, how students learn, the appropriate roles of teachers and students, and even the fundamental purpose of a college education.
The third edition of Teaching American Students explains the expectations of undergraduates at American colleges and universities and offers practical strategies for teaching, including how to give clear presentations, how to teach interactively, and how to communicate effectively. Also included are illustrative examples as well as advice from international faculty and teaching assistants. Appendices offer concrete suggestions on topics from planning the first day of class to grading papers and problem sets. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Starting out : a quick guide for beginning teachers
ch. 2 Assumptions that affect teaching in the American classroom
ch. 3 Bridging the gap : approaching your students and helping them approach you
ch. 4 Giving presentations that students can understand
ch. 5 Leading a discussion : providing direction and continuity
ch. 6 Understanding meanings beyond words
ch. 7 Appendices
Evaluating Teaching and Learning: A practical handbook for colleges, universities and the scholarship of teaching
Additional Info:
Every semester, colleges and universities ask students to complete innumerable course and teaching evaluation questionnaires to evaluate the learning and teaching in courses they have taken. For many universities it is a requirement that all courses be evaluated every semester. The laudable rationale is that the feedback provided will enable instructors to improve their teaching and the curriculum, thus enhancing the quality of student learning.
In spite of ...
Every semester, colleges and universities ask students to complete innumerable course and teaching evaluation questionnaires to evaluate the learning and teaching in courses they have taken. For many universities it is a requirement that all courses be evaluated every semester. The laudable rationale is that the feedback provided will enable instructors to improve their teaching and the curriculum, thus enhancing the quality of student learning.
In spite of ...
Additional Info:
Every semester, colleges and universities ask students to complete innumerable course and teaching evaluation questionnaires to evaluate the learning and teaching in courses they have taken. For many universities it is a requirement that all courses be evaluated every semester. The laudable rationale is that the feedback provided will enable instructors to improve their teaching and the curriculum, thus enhancing the quality of student learning.
In spite of this there is little evidence that it does improve the quality of teaching and learning. Ratings only improve if the instruments and the presentation of results are sufficiently diagnostic to identify potential improvements and there is effective counselling. Evaluating Teaching and Learning explains how evaluation can be more effective in enhancing the quality of teaching and learning and introduces broader and more diverse forms of evaluation.
This guide explains how to develop questionnaires and protocols which are valid, reliabile and diagnostic. It also contains proven instruments that have undergone appropriate testing procedures, together with a substantial item bank. The book looks at the specific national frameworks for the evaluation of teaching in use in the USA, UK and Australia.
It caters for diverse methodologies, both quantitative and qualitative and offers solutions that allow evaluation at a wide range of levels: from classrooms to programmes to departments and entire institutions. With detail on all aspects of the main evaluation techniques and instruments, the authors show how effective evaluation can make use of a variety of approaches and combine them into an effective project.
With a companion website which has listings of the questionnaires and item bank, this book will be of interest to those concerned with organising and conducting evaluation in a college, university, faculty or department. It will also appeal to those engaged in the scholarship of teaching and learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgements
ch. 1 Evaluation Principles
ch. 2 Questionnaire design
ch. 3 Questionnaires
ch. 4 Item Bank
ch. 5 Collecting and Processing Questionnaire Data
ch. 6 Collection of Qualitative Data
ch. 7 Analysis of Qualitative Data
ch. 8 Observation
ch. 9 Use of Assessment for Evaluation
ch. 10 Using Evaluation Data for the Scholarship of Teaching
ch. 11 International Perspectives on Teaching Evaluation
ch. 12 Institutional Use of Teaching Evaluation Data
ch. 13 Conclusion
Every semester, colleges and universities ask students to complete innumerable course and teaching evaluation questionnaires to evaluate the learning and teaching in courses they have taken. For many universities it is a requirement that all courses be evaluated every semester. The laudable rationale is that the feedback provided will enable instructors to improve their teaching and the curriculum, thus enhancing the quality of student learning.
In spite of this there is little evidence that it does improve the quality of teaching and learning. Ratings only improve if the instruments and the presentation of results are sufficiently diagnostic to identify potential improvements and there is effective counselling. Evaluating Teaching and Learning explains how evaluation can be more effective in enhancing the quality of teaching and learning and introduces broader and more diverse forms of evaluation.
This guide explains how to develop questionnaires and protocols which are valid, reliabile and diagnostic. It also contains proven instruments that have undergone appropriate testing procedures, together with a substantial item bank. The book looks at the specific national frameworks for the evaluation of teaching in use in the USA, UK and Australia.
It caters for diverse methodologies, both quantitative and qualitative and offers solutions that allow evaluation at a wide range of levels: from classrooms to programmes to departments and entire institutions. With detail on all aspects of the main evaluation techniques and instruments, the authors show how effective evaluation can make use of a variety of approaches and combine them into an effective project.
With a companion website which has listings of the questionnaires and item bank, this book will be of interest to those concerned with organising and conducting evaluation in a college, university, faculty or department. It will also appeal to those engaged in the scholarship of teaching and learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgements
ch. 1 Evaluation Principles
ch. 2 Questionnaire design
ch. 3 Questionnaires
ch. 4 Item Bank
ch. 5 Collecting and Processing Questionnaire Data
ch. 6 Collection of Qualitative Data
ch. 7 Analysis of Qualitative Data
ch. 8 Observation
ch. 9 Use of Assessment for Evaluation
ch. 10 Using Evaluation Data for the Scholarship of Teaching
ch. 11 International Perspectives on Teaching Evaluation
ch. 12 Institutional Use of Teaching Evaluation Data
ch. 13 Conclusion
Additional Info:
More and more, graduate students are seeking quality training in leadership skills as well as in teaching and research.
More and more, graduate students are seeking quality training in leadership skills as well as in teaching and research.
Additional Info:
More and more, graduate students are seeking quality training in leadership skills as well as in teaching and research.
More and more, graduate students are seeking quality training in leadership skills as well as in teaching and research.
Additional Info:
Argues that if teachers wish to see greater recognition and reward attached to teaching they must change the status of teaching from private to community property. Need to reconnect teaching to the disciplines; The problem with student evaluation forms that are identical across the disciplines; More.
Argues that if teachers wish to see greater recognition and reward attached to teaching they must change the status of teaching from private to community property. Need to reconnect teaching to the disciplines; The problem with student evaluation forms that are identical across the disciplines; More.
Additional Info:
Argues that if teachers wish to see greater recognition and reward attached to teaching they must change the status of teaching from private to community property. Need to reconnect teaching to the disciplines; The problem with student evaluation forms that are identical across the disciplines; More.
Argues that if teachers wish to see greater recognition and reward attached to teaching they must change the status of teaching from private to community property. Need to reconnect teaching to the disciplines; The problem with student evaluation forms that are identical across the disciplines; More.
The Disciplines Speak: Rewarding the Scholarly, Professional, and Creative Work of Faculty
Additional Info:
This set of two volumes offers statements from disciplinary/professional societies on what faculty work deserves recognition and reward in their unique culture/community. Volume I covers religion, history, geography, math, chemistry, the arts, business, journalism, and family/consumer science, plus the National Education Association. (From the Publisher)
This set of two volumes offers statements from disciplinary/professional societies on what faculty work deserves recognition and reward in their unique culture/community. Volume I covers religion, history, geography, math, chemistry, the arts, business, journalism, and family/consumer science, plus the National Education Association. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This set of two volumes offers statements from disciplinary/professional societies on what faculty work deserves recognition and reward in their unique culture/community. Volume I covers religion, history, geography, math, chemistry, the arts, business, journalism, and family/consumer science, plus the National Education Association. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Eugene Rice)
Editors' Note
Describing the Work of Faculty: Disciplinary Perspectives
Statements (Robert M. Diamond and Bromwyn E. Adam)
Statements
ch. 1 Humanities and Social Sciences
American Academy of Religion - Religious Studies and the Redefining Scholarship Project (A Report of the AAR Ad Hoc Committee on "Defining Scholarly Work")
American Historical Association - Redefining Historical Scholarship (Report of the American Historical Association Ad Hoc Committee on Redefining Scholarly Work)
Association of American Geographers - Toward a Reconsideration of Faculty Roles and Rewards in Geography, Faculty Roles and Rewards
ch. 2 Natural Sciences
American Chemical Society - Report of the American Chemical Society Task Force on the Definition of Scholarship in Chemistry (J. Ivan Legg; Laurence A. Nafie; Paula P. Brownlee; William E. Broderick; Norman C. Craig; Marcetta Y. Darensbourg; William B. DeLauder; Slayton A. Evans, Jr.; Ursula M. Mazur; Theodore E. Tabor; Edward K. Mellon; and Joseph G. Morse)
Joint Policy Board for Mathematics - Recognition and Rewards in the Mathematical Sciences (Report of the Joint Policy Board for Mathematics, Committee on Professional Recognition and Rewards (excerpt))
ch. 3 Fine, Performing and Applied Arts
National Office for Arts Accreditation in Higher Education - The Work of Arts Faculties in Higher Education
Landscape Architectural Accreditation Board
National Architectural Accrediting Board
National Association of Schools of Art and Design
National Association of Schools of Dance
National Association of Schools of Music
National Association of Schools of Theatre
4 Professional Programs
American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business - Defining Scholarly Work in Management Education (William K. Laidlaw, Jr.)
Association for Education in Journalism and Mass Communication - Report of the Association for Education in Journalism & Mass Communication on the Definition of Scholarship in Journalism (Task Force)
Council of Administrators of Family and Consumer Sciences - Recognition and Rewards in the Family and Consumer Sciences
Appendix
National Education Association (NEA) Statement on Faculty Reward Structures
References and Resources
About AAHE
This set of two volumes offers statements from disciplinary/professional societies on what faculty work deserves recognition and reward in their unique culture/community. Volume I covers religion, history, geography, math, chemistry, the arts, business, journalism, and family/consumer science, plus the National Education Association. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Eugene Rice)
Editors' Note
Describing the Work of Faculty: Disciplinary Perspectives
Statements (Robert M. Diamond and Bromwyn E. Adam)
Statements
ch. 1 Humanities and Social Sciences
American Academy of Religion - Religious Studies and the Redefining Scholarship Project (A Report of the AAR Ad Hoc Committee on "Defining Scholarly Work")
American Historical Association - Redefining Historical Scholarship (Report of the American Historical Association Ad Hoc Committee on Redefining Scholarly Work)
Association of American Geographers - Toward a Reconsideration of Faculty Roles and Rewards in Geography, Faculty Roles and Rewards
ch. 2 Natural Sciences
American Chemical Society - Report of the American Chemical Society Task Force on the Definition of Scholarship in Chemistry (J. Ivan Legg; Laurence A. Nafie; Paula P. Brownlee; William E. Broderick; Norman C. Craig; Marcetta Y. Darensbourg; William B. DeLauder; Slayton A. Evans, Jr.; Ursula M. Mazur; Theodore E. Tabor; Edward K. Mellon; and Joseph G. Morse)
Joint Policy Board for Mathematics - Recognition and Rewards in the Mathematical Sciences (Report of the Joint Policy Board for Mathematics, Committee on Professional Recognition and Rewards (excerpt))
ch. 3 Fine, Performing and Applied Arts
National Office for Arts Accreditation in Higher Education - The Work of Arts Faculties in Higher Education
Landscape Architectural Accreditation Board
National Architectural Accrediting Board
National Association of Schools of Art and Design
National Association of Schools of Dance
National Association of Schools of Music
National Association of Schools of Theatre
4 Professional Programs
American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business - Defining Scholarly Work in Management Education (William K. Laidlaw, Jr.)
Association for Education in Journalism and Mass Communication - Report of the Association for Education in Journalism & Mass Communication on the Definition of Scholarship in Journalism (Task Force)
Council of Administrators of Family and Consumer Sciences - Recognition and Rewards in the Family and Consumer Sciences
Appendix
National Education Association (NEA) Statement on Faculty Reward Structures
References and Resources
About AAHE
Additional Info:
The first textbook to offer novice and experienced teachers guidelines for the “how” and “why” of self-study teacher research
Designed to help pre- and in-service teachers plan, implement, and assess a manageable self-study research project, this unique textbook covers the foundation, history, theoretical underpinnings, and methods of self-study research. Author Anastasia Samaras encourages readers to think deeply about both the “how” and the “why” of this essential professional ...
The first textbook to offer novice and experienced teachers guidelines for the “how” and “why” of self-study teacher research
Designed to help pre- and in-service teachers plan, implement, and assess a manageable self-study research project, this unique textbook covers the foundation, history, theoretical underpinnings, and methods of self-study research. Author Anastasia Samaras encourages readers to think deeply about both the “how” and the “why” of this essential professional ...
Additional Info:
The first textbook to offer novice and experienced teachers guidelines for the “how” and “why” of self-study teacher research
Designed to help pre- and in-service teachers plan, implement, and assess a manageable self-study research project, this unique textbook covers the foundation, history, theoretical underpinnings, and methods of self-study research. Author Anastasia Samaras encourages readers to think deeply about both the “how” and the “why” of this essential professional development tool as they pose questions and formulate personal theories to improve professional practice.
Written in a reader-friendly style and filled with interactive activities and examples, the book helps teachers every step of the way as they learn and refine research skills; conduct a literature review; design a research study; work in validation groups; collect and analyze data; interpret findings; develop skills in peer critique and review; and write, present, and publish their studies.
Key Features
• A Self-Study Project Planner assists teachers in understanding both the details and process of conducting self-study research.
• A Critical Friends Portfolio includes innovative critical collaborative inquiries to support the completion of a high quality final research project.
• Advice from the most senior self-study academics working in the U.S. and internationally is included, along with descriptions of the self-study methodology that has been refined over time.
• Examples demonstrate the connections between self-study research, teachers’ professional growth, and their students’ learning.
• Tables, charts, and visuals help readers see the big picture and stay organized.
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
List of Tables
Part I: The 6 Ws of Self-Study Research
ch. 1 Understanding Self-Study: What and Why
ch. 2 Overview of the Self-Study Process: What and How
ch. 3 The Self-Study Community: When and Where and Who
ch. 4 The Self-Study Research Methodology: Why and How
ch. 5 Self-Study Methods: Why and How
Part II: Your Self-Study Project
ch. 6 Design
ch. 7 Protect
ch. 8 Organize Data
ch. 9 Collect Data
ch. 10 Analyze Data
ch. 11 Assess Research Quality
ch. 12 Write
ch. 13 Present and Publish
Appendix A: Sample of a Self-Study Teacher Research Exemplar Brief Highlighting Five Foci
Appendix B: Self-Study is Not Just for Classroom Teachers
Glossary
References
Index
About the Author
The first textbook to offer novice and experienced teachers guidelines for the “how” and “why” of self-study teacher research
Designed to help pre- and in-service teachers plan, implement, and assess a manageable self-study research project, this unique textbook covers the foundation, history, theoretical underpinnings, and methods of self-study research. Author Anastasia Samaras encourages readers to think deeply about both the “how” and the “why” of this essential professional development tool as they pose questions and formulate personal theories to improve professional practice.
Written in a reader-friendly style and filled with interactive activities and examples, the book helps teachers every step of the way as they learn and refine research skills; conduct a literature review; design a research study; work in validation groups; collect and analyze data; interpret findings; develop skills in peer critique and review; and write, present, and publish their studies.
Key Features
• A Self-Study Project Planner assists teachers in understanding both the details and process of conducting self-study research.
• A Critical Friends Portfolio includes innovative critical collaborative inquiries to support the completion of a high quality final research project.
• Advice from the most senior self-study academics working in the U.S. and internationally is included, along with descriptions of the self-study methodology that has been refined over time.
• Examples demonstrate the connections between self-study research, teachers’ professional growth, and their students’ learning.
• Tables, charts, and visuals help readers see the big picture and stay organized.
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
List of Tables
Part I: The 6 Ws of Self-Study Research
ch. 1 Understanding Self-Study: What and Why
ch. 2 Overview of the Self-Study Process: What and How
ch. 3 The Self-Study Community: When and Where and Who
ch. 4 The Self-Study Research Methodology: Why and How
ch. 5 Self-Study Methods: Why and How
Part II: Your Self-Study Project
ch. 6 Design
ch. 7 Protect
ch. 8 Organize Data
ch. 9 Collect Data
ch. 10 Analyze Data
ch. 11 Assess Research Quality
ch. 12 Write
ch. 13 Present and Publish
Appendix A: Sample of a Self-Study Teacher Research Exemplar Brief Highlighting Five Foci
Appendix B: Self-Study is Not Just for Classroom Teachers
Glossary
References
Index
About the Author
Additional Info:
Classroom instructors implementing pedagogical strategies for embodied learning about sexuality and religion need institutional support and assistance from colleagues and mentors to be successful. One means of providing institutional and peer support for classroom instructors is to host and lead a pedagogy workshop. Building on the work of Ott and Stephens on embodied learning and other articles and teaching tactics found throughout this issue of Teaching Theology and Religion, this ...
Classroom instructors implementing pedagogical strategies for embodied learning about sexuality and religion need institutional support and assistance from colleagues and mentors to be successful. One means of providing institutional and peer support for classroom instructors is to host and lead a pedagogy workshop. Building on the work of Ott and Stephens on embodied learning and other articles and teaching tactics found throughout this issue of Teaching Theology and Religion, this ...
Additional Info:
Classroom instructors implementing pedagogical strategies for embodied learning about sexuality and religion need institutional support and assistance from colleagues and mentors to be successful. One means of providing institutional and peer support for classroom instructors is to host and lead a pedagogy workshop. Building on the work of Ott and Stephens on embodied learning and other articles and teaching tactics found throughout this issue of Teaching Theology and Religion, this article presents a sample design for a two-hour workshop with faculty and/or graduate teaching assistants on the topic of teaching sexuality and religion. Non-expert facilitators can lead this workshop and it is intended to start a conversation about pedagogy rather than to provide definitive answers to end the discussion. The goals are to demystify a taboo topic and to provide concrete strategies for teaching that will promote responsible engagement and a better-integrated learning experience for students.
Classroom instructors implementing pedagogical strategies for embodied learning about sexuality and religion need institutional support and assistance from colleagues and mentors to be successful. One means of providing institutional and peer support for classroom instructors is to host and lead a pedagogy workshop. Building on the work of Ott and Stephens on embodied learning and other articles and teaching tactics found throughout this issue of Teaching Theology and Religion, this article presents a sample design for a two-hour workshop with faculty and/or graduate teaching assistants on the topic of teaching sexuality and religion. Non-expert facilitators can lead this workshop and it is intended to start a conversation about pedagogy rather than to provide definitive answers to end the discussion. The goals are to demystify a taboo topic and to provide concrete strategies for teaching that will promote responsible engagement and a better-integrated learning experience for students.
Additional Info:
The number of part-time faculty members is increasing steadily, to the point that most colleges and universities could not function efficiently without them. The evening and weekend availability of adjunct faculty enables us to expand class schedules to serve the educational needs of nontraditional students, and their expertise offers students important real-world perspectives.Yet there is often a lack of preparation or support for their vital role. Best Practices for ...
The number of part-time faculty members is increasing steadily, to the point that most colleges and universities could not function efficiently without them. The evening and weekend availability of adjunct faculty enables us to expand class schedules to serve the educational needs of nontraditional students, and their expertise offers students important real-world perspectives.Yet there is often a lack of preparation or support for their vital role. Best Practices for ...
Additional Info:
The number of part-time faculty members is increasing steadily, to the point that most colleges and universities could not function efficiently without them. The evening and weekend availability of adjunct faculty enables us to expand class schedules to serve the educational needs of nontraditional students, and their expertise offers students important real-world perspectives.Yet there is often a lack of preparation or support for their vital role. Best Practices for Supporting Adjunct Faculty is written for a full range of academic leaders, including instructional administrators, department chairs, and directors of teaching and learning centers. It showcases proven initiatives at a variety of institutional types—two- and four year, public and private—that help achieve the needs of adjunct instructors, while increasing their effectiveness within institutions’ existing delivery systems. This book provides research data on the initiatives highlighted, and valuable ideas for institutions expanding their professional development opportunities for part-time instructors—thus enhancing student learning and improving accountability outcomes. Contents include:
* Deepening our understanding of adjunct faculty
* Ensuring an effective start for adjunct faculty
* Supporting adjunct faculty through face-to-face and online programming
* Mentoring adjunct instructors in a variety of approaches
* Building community and a sense of mission
* Analysis of orientation, pre-service training, recognition, and comprehensive professional development programs for adjunct faculty
* Portraits of proven programs and strategies for implementing initiatives atyour institution
* An adjunct professor’s perspective on the benefits of supporting your part-timers’ teaching
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
About the Authors
Preface
ch. 1 Deepening Our Understanding of Adjunct Faculty (Richard E. Lyons)
ch. 2 Ensuring an Effective Start for Adjunct Faculty: Orientation With Multiple Options (Kevin Yee)
ch. 3 The Part-Time Faculty Institute: Strategically Designed and Continually Assessed (Marianne H. Hutti, Gale S. Rhodes, Joni Allison, and Evelyn Lauterbach)
ch. 4 A Proven Program for Supporting Adjunct Faculty Online, (Daryl Peterson)
ch. 5 Mentoring Adjunct Instructors: Fostering Bonds That Strengthen Teaching and Learning (Cynthia Zutter)
ch. 6 A Mentoring Network for Adjunct Faculty: From Proposal to Pilot to Five-Year Plan, (Gayle Nolan, Cynthia Siegrist, and Nancy Richard)
ch. 7 A Consortium Approach to Supporting Part-Time Faculty, (Helen Burnstad, Ben Hayes, Cindy Hoss, and Ann-Marie West)
ch. 8 An Applied Course in Teaching That Serves the Home and Neighboring Institutions (Thomas Lux)
ch. 9 The Associate Program: A Foundation for Professional Growth in Adjunct Faculty (Russell Richardson)
ch. 10 Adjunct Faculty Associates Professional Development Program (Keith Barker, and Dan Mercier)
ch. 11 Supporting Adjunct Faculty Through Orientation and Mentoring Initiatives and an Online Professional Development Course (Jeanne C. Silliman)
ch. 12 A Proven, Comprehensive Program for Preparing and Supporting Adjunct Faculty Members (Frank Harber, and Richard E. Lyons)
ch. 13 Initiating a Support System for Adjunct Faculty: The First Year (Laura Renninger, Shannon Holliday, and Marie Carter)
ch. 14 The Two-Year Effort to Build a Program That Provides Part-Time Faculty Pedagogical Support, Community, and a Sense of Mission, (H. Edward Lambert, and Milton D. Cox)
ch. 15 Professional Development Geared to Part-Timers' Needs: An Adjunct Professor's Perspective (Jason Schwartz)
Index
The number of part-time faculty members is increasing steadily, to the point that most colleges and universities could not function efficiently without them. The evening and weekend availability of adjunct faculty enables us to expand class schedules to serve the educational needs of nontraditional students, and their expertise offers students important real-world perspectives.Yet there is often a lack of preparation or support for their vital role. Best Practices for Supporting Adjunct Faculty is written for a full range of academic leaders, including instructional administrators, department chairs, and directors of teaching and learning centers. It showcases proven initiatives at a variety of institutional types—two- and four year, public and private—that help achieve the needs of adjunct instructors, while increasing their effectiveness within institutions’ existing delivery systems. This book provides research data on the initiatives highlighted, and valuable ideas for institutions expanding their professional development opportunities for part-time instructors—thus enhancing student learning and improving accountability outcomes. Contents include:
* Deepening our understanding of adjunct faculty
* Ensuring an effective start for adjunct faculty
* Supporting adjunct faculty through face-to-face and online programming
* Mentoring adjunct instructors in a variety of approaches
* Building community and a sense of mission
* Analysis of orientation, pre-service training, recognition, and comprehensive professional development programs for adjunct faculty
* Portraits of proven programs and strategies for implementing initiatives atyour institution
* An adjunct professor’s perspective on the benefits of supporting your part-timers’ teaching
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
About the Authors
Preface
ch. 1 Deepening Our Understanding of Adjunct Faculty (Richard E. Lyons)
ch. 2 Ensuring an Effective Start for Adjunct Faculty: Orientation With Multiple Options (Kevin Yee)
ch. 3 The Part-Time Faculty Institute: Strategically Designed and Continually Assessed (Marianne H. Hutti, Gale S. Rhodes, Joni Allison, and Evelyn Lauterbach)
ch. 4 A Proven Program for Supporting Adjunct Faculty Online, (Daryl Peterson)
ch. 5 Mentoring Adjunct Instructors: Fostering Bonds That Strengthen Teaching and Learning (Cynthia Zutter)
ch. 6 A Mentoring Network for Adjunct Faculty: From Proposal to Pilot to Five-Year Plan, (Gayle Nolan, Cynthia Siegrist, and Nancy Richard)
ch. 7 A Consortium Approach to Supporting Part-Time Faculty, (Helen Burnstad, Ben Hayes, Cindy Hoss, and Ann-Marie West)
ch. 8 An Applied Course in Teaching That Serves the Home and Neighboring Institutions (Thomas Lux)
ch. 9 The Associate Program: A Foundation for Professional Growth in Adjunct Faculty (Russell Richardson)
ch. 10 Adjunct Faculty Associates Professional Development Program (Keith Barker, and Dan Mercier)
ch. 11 Supporting Adjunct Faculty Through Orientation and Mentoring Initiatives and an Online Professional Development Course (Jeanne C. Silliman)
ch. 12 A Proven, Comprehensive Program for Preparing and Supporting Adjunct Faculty Members (Frank Harber, and Richard E. Lyons)
ch. 13 Initiating a Support System for Adjunct Faculty: The First Year (Laura Renninger, Shannon Holliday, and Marie Carter)
ch. 14 The Two-Year Effort to Build a Program That Provides Part-Time Faculty Pedagogical Support, Community, and a Sense of Mission, (H. Edward Lambert, and Milton D. Cox)
ch. 15 Professional Development Geared to Part-Timers' Needs: An Adjunct Professor's Perspective (Jason Schwartz)
Index
Developing Teaching Style in Adult Education
Additional Info:
Presenting numerous activities--for both individuals and groups--designed to foster self-knowledge and growth in teaching, the authors examine the primary elements of the teaching-learning exchange. Valuable special resources, including scales for measuring beliefs and values about teaching describes individual teaching styles. (From the Publisher)
Presenting numerous activities--for both individuals and groups--designed to foster self-knowledge and growth in teaching, the authors examine the primary elements of the teaching-learning exchange. Valuable special resources, including scales for measuring beliefs and values about teaching describes individual teaching styles. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Presenting numerous activities--for both individuals and groups--designed to foster self-knowledge and growth in teaching, the authors examine the primary elements of the teaching-learning exchange. Valuable special resources, including scales for measuring beliefs and values about teaching describes individual teaching styles. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The Authors
Pt. 1 Exploring the Personal Side of Teaching
ch. 1 Relating Personal Growth and Teaching Style
ch. 2 Understanding Basic Concepts of Teaching and Learning
ch. 3 Analyzing the Instructional Process
Pt. 2 Reflecting on the Teaching and Learning Exchange
ch. 4 Content
ch. 5 Environment
ch. 6 The Teacher
ch. 7 The Learning Community
ch. 8 The Learner
Pt. 3 Integrating Teaching Concepts with Teaching Style
ch. 9 Matching Methods to Teaching Style
ch. 10 Developing a Personal Style
Resource A. The Van Tilburg/Heimlich Teaching Beliefs Scale
Resource B. The Norland/Heimlich Teaching Values Scale
Resource C. Focusing on Culture as a Characteristic of Learners
Resource D. Representative Teaching Methods and Techniques
References
Index
Presenting numerous activities--for both individuals and groups--designed to foster self-knowledge and growth in teaching, the authors examine the primary elements of the teaching-learning exchange. Valuable special resources, including scales for measuring beliefs and values about teaching describes individual teaching styles. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The Authors
Pt. 1 Exploring the Personal Side of Teaching
ch. 1 Relating Personal Growth and Teaching Style
ch. 2 Understanding Basic Concepts of Teaching and Learning
ch. 3 Analyzing the Instructional Process
Pt. 2 Reflecting on the Teaching and Learning Exchange
ch. 4 Content
ch. 5 Environment
ch. 6 The Teacher
ch. 7 The Learning Community
ch. 8 The Learner
Pt. 3 Integrating Teaching Concepts with Teaching Style
ch. 9 Matching Methods to Teaching Style
ch. 10 Developing a Personal Style
Resource A. The Van Tilburg/Heimlich Teaching Beliefs Scale
Resource B. The Norland/Heimlich Teaching Values Scale
Resource C. Focusing on Culture as a Characteristic of Learners
Resource D. Representative Teaching Methods and Techniques
References
Index
Additional Info:
If you're willing to move outside your familiar and comfortable way of teaching and try team teaching, you'll find many challenges but also many rewards.
If you're willing to move outside your familiar and comfortable way of teaching and try team teaching, you'll find many challenges but also many rewards.
Additional Info:
If you're willing to move outside your familiar and comfortable way of teaching and try team teaching, you'll find many challenges but also many rewards.
If you're willing to move outside your familiar and comfortable way of teaching and try team teaching, you'll find many challenges but also many rewards.
Mentor in a Manual: Climbing the Academic Ladder to Tenure
Additional Info:
For assistant professors envisioning tenure, this completely revised publication is about as close to being a mentor as a book can be! Using a representative institution and a prototype assistant professor, Mentor in a Manual provides invaluable counsel for those on the tenure track. Twelve chapters take the new hire through each step with advice on making it through the mazes. (From the Publisher)
For assistant professors envisioning tenure, this completely revised publication is about as close to being a mentor as a book can be! Using a representative institution and a prototype assistant professor, Mentor in a Manual provides invaluable counsel for those on the tenure track. Twelve chapters take the new hire through each step with advice on making it through the mazes. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
For assistant professors envisioning tenure, this completely revised publication is about as close to being a mentor as a book can be! Using a representative institution and a prototype assistant professor, Mentor in a Manual provides invaluable counsel for those on the tenure track. Twelve chapters take the new hire through each step with advice on making it through the mazes. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword by Allan W. Ostar
Publisher's Notes
Preface to the Anniversary Edition
Preface to the Second Edition
ch. 1: Acquiring a Professional Frame of Mind
ch. 2: Getting to Know Your Territory
ch. 3: Grasping Generic Institutional Expectations
ch. 4: Appreciating the Practical Politics of Getting Promoted
ch. 5: The Teaching Challenge: Preparing to Teach
ch. 6: The Teaching Challenge: In the Classroom
ch. 7: The Teaching Challenge: Outside the Classroom
ch. 8: The Research Paradigm
ch. 9: The Service Syndrome
ch. 10: A Bottom Line: Getting Published
ch. 11: Bell, Candle, and Book
ch. 12: Presenting Your Credentials for the Ultimate Decision
Appendix A: What Do I Do if I Don’t Make Tenure?
Appendix B: Suggested Readings
Index
For assistant professors envisioning tenure, this completely revised publication is about as close to being a mentor as a book can be! Using a representative institution and a prototype assistant professor, Mentor in a Manual provides invaluable counsel for those on the tenure track. Twelve chapters take the new hire through each step with advice on making it through the mazes. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword by Allan W. Ostar
Publisher's Notes
Preface to the Anniversary Edition
Preface to the Second Edition
ch. 1: Acquiring a Professional Frame of Mind
ch. 2: Getting to Know Your Territory
ch. 3: Grasping Generic Institutional Expectations
ch. 4: Appreciating the Practical Politics of Getting Promoted
ch. 5: The Teaching Challenge: Preparing to Teach
ch. 6: The Teaching Challenge: In the Classroom
ch. 7: The Teaching Challenge: Outside the Classroom
ch. 8: The Research Paradigm
ch. 9: The Service Syndrome
ch. 10: A Bottom Line: Getting Published
ch. 11: Bell, Candle, and Book
ch. 12: Presenting Your Credentials for the Ultimate Decision
Appendix A: What Do I Do if I Don’t Make Tenure?
Appendix B: Suggested Readings
Index
147 Practical Tips for Emerging Scholars: From Publishing to Time Management, Grant Seeking, and Beyond
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Higher educations professionals face a myriad of competing demands on their time. Many of these pressures exist apart from teaching and outside the classroom altogether. Career requirements can seem to be never ending, and if they are not carefully managed and balanced, they can overrun even the most committed scholar’s ...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Higher educations professionals face a myriad of competing demands on their time. Many of these pressures exist apart from teaching and outside the classroom altogether. Career requirements can seem to be never ending, and if they are not carefully managed and balanced, they can overrun even the most committed scholar’s ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Higher educations professionals face a myriad of competing demands on their time. Many of these pressures exist apart from teaching and outside the classroom altogether. Career requirements can seem to be never ending, and if they are not carefully managed and balanced, they can overrun even the most committed scholar’s resolve.
The latest book in Atwood’s 147 Tips series, 147 Practical Tips for Emerging Scholars presents readers with a much-needed guide to the varied ins and outs of a career in higher education. Advocating detailed planning and clear priorities, the authors have crafted a thorough and accessible book to simplify and de-stress the navigation of a scholar’s world. Their pragmatic and detailed tips offer advice on crucial topics including:
- Writing grants
- Research
- Working with technology
- Collaboration
- Mentoring
The authors write:
147 Practical Tips for Emerging Scholars assists you in developing your successful professional journey as a scholar by delivering proven and succinct guidance.... You can use this book as a ready reference that you can turn to again and again for solid direction, clarity, and encouragement.
This essential volume offers fresh and enriching insights, and will prove an indispensable tool for higher education professionals - new and veteran alike. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Dedication
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Time Management and the Missing Operating Instructions
ch. 2 How to Approach Academic Careers Systematically
Tips Categories
-Taking Control of Your Career as a Scholar
- Building A Research Agenda
- General Writing Tips
- Developing and Writing Your Literature Review
- Presenting at Conferences
- Publishing in Refereed Journals
- Writing Grants
- Writing Academic Books
- Ethics and Responsibility
- Technology for Writing and Teaching
- Passing It On: Collaborating and Mentoring
References
Appendix A: Resource Appendix
Appendix B: Three Research and Publication Tracking Tables
About the Authors
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Higher educations professionals face a myriad of competing demands on their time. Many of these pressures exist apart from teaching and outside the classroom altogether. Career requirements can seem to be never ending, and if they are not carefully managed and balanced, they can overrun even the most committed scholar’s resolve.
The latest book in Atwood’s 147 Tips series, 147 Practical Tips for Emerging Scholars presents readers with a much-needed guide to the varied ins and outs of a career in higher education. Advocating detailed planning and clear priorities, the authors have crafted a thorough and accessible book to simplify and de-stress the navigation of a scholar’s world. Their pragmatic and detailed tips offer advice on crucial topics including:
- Writing grants
- Research
- Working with technology
- Collaboration
- Mentoring
The authors write:
147 Practical Tips for Emerging Scholars assists you in developing your successful professional journey as a scholar by delivering proven and succinct guidance.... You can use this book as a ready reference that you can turn to again and again for solid direction, clarity, and encouragement.
This essential volume offers fresh and enriching insights, and will prove an indispensable tool for higher education professionals - new and veteran alike. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Dedication
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Time Management and the Missing Operating Instructions
ch. 2 How to Approach Academic Careers Systematically
Tips Categories
-Taking Control of Your Career as a Scholar
- Building A Research Agenda
- General Writing Tips
- Developing and Writing Your Literature Review
- Presenting at Conferences
- Publishing in Refereed Journals
- Writing Grants
- Writing Academic Books
- Ethics and Responsibility
- Technology for Writing and Teaching
- Passing It On: Collaborating and Mentoring
References
Appendix A: Resource Appendix
Appendix B: Three Research and Publication Tracking Tables
About the Authors
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Using Cases in Higher Education: A Guide for Faculty and Administrators
Additional Info:
Using Cases in Higher Education: A Guide for Faculty and Administrators is an essential resource created for faculty and administrators who utilize case studies to analyze, assess, and respond to the complex and difficult issues facing higher education leaders. While this volume will prove useful with any case study, it is specifically designed to complement the series of casebooks and teaching notes, starting with Casebook I: Faculty Employment Policies and ...
Using Cases in Higher Education: A Guide for Faculty and Administrators is an essential resource created for faculty and administrators who utilize case studies to analyze, assess, and respond to the complex and difficult issues facing higher education leaders. While this volume will prove useful with any case study, it is specifically designed to complement the series of casebooks and teaching notes, starting with Casebook I: Faculty Employment Policies and ...
Additional Info:
Using Cases in Higher Education: A Guide for Faculty and Administrators is an essential resource created for faculty and administrators who utilize case studies to analyze, assess, and respond to the complex and difficult issues facing higher education leaders. While this volume will prove useful with any case study, it is specifically designed to complement the series of casebooks and teaching notes, starting with Casebook I: Faculty Employment Policies and Teaching Notes to Casebook I: Faculty Employment Policies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction: Teaching and Learning with Case Studies
ch. 1. Overview: Using Cases in Higher Education
ch. 2. Case Studies as Teaching Tools
ch. 3. Essential Elements of Effective Case Teaching
ch. 4. Post-Discussion Learning
Annotated Bibliography
Appendix Kansas State University Case
Index
Using Cases in Higher Education: A Guide for Faculty and Administrators is an essential resource created for faculty and administrators who utilize case studies to analyze, assess, and respond to the complex and difficult issues facing higher education leaders. While this volume will prove useful with any case study, it is specifically designed to complement the series of casebooks and teaching notes, starting with Casebook I: Faculty Employment Policies and Teaching Notes to Casebook I: Faculty Employment Policies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction: Teaching and Learning with Case Studies
ch. 1. Overview: Using Cases in Higher Education
ch. 2. Case Studies as Teaching Tools
ch. 3. Essential Elements of Effective Case Teaching
ch. 4. Post-Discussion Learning
Annotated Bibliography
Appendix Kansas State University Case
Index
Additional Info:
Lee Shulman has been president of the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching since 1997. He is a former president of the American Educational Research Association as well as past president of the National Academy of Education. In this second volume of a landmark two volume collection of Shulman's best work, he addresses such compelling questions as What are the most effective approaches to teaching? How important is knowledge of ...
Lee Shulman has been president of the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching since 1997. He is a former president of the American Educational Research Association as well as past president of the National Academy of Education. In this second volume of a landmark two volume collection of Shulman's best work, he addresses such compelling questions as What are the most effective approaches to teaching? How important is knowledge of ...
Additional Info:
Lee Shulman has been president of the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching since 1997. He is a former president of the American Educational Research Association as well as past president of the National Academy of Education. In this second volume of a landmark two volume collection of Shulman's best work, he addresses such compelling questions as What are the most effective approaches to teaching? How important is knowledge of subject matter to a teacher's success? And, how do we measure success in teaching and learning? (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Sources
About the Author
Acknowledgments
Foreword
Introduction
Pt. 1 Learning
ch. 1 Professing the Liberal Arts
ch. 2 Taking Learning Seriously
ch. 3 Problem-Based Learning: The Pedagogies of Uncertainty
ch. 4 Making Differences: A Table of Learning
Pt. 2 The Profession of Teaching
ch. 5 Knowledge and Teaching: Foundations of the New Reform
ch. 6 Learning to Teach
ch. 7 Toward a Pedagogy of Substance
ch. 8 Teaching as Community Property: Putting an End to Pedagogical Solitude
ch. 9 The Scholarship of Teaching: New Elaborations, New Developments
ch. 10 From Minsk to Pinsk: Why a Scholarship of Teaching and Learning?
ch. 11 Lamarck's Revenge: Teaching Among the Scholarships
ch. 12 From Idea to Prototype: Three Exercises in the Peer Review of Teaching
ch. 13 The Pedagogical Colloquium: Three Models
ch. 14 Course Anatomy: The Dissection and Analysis of Knowledge Through Teaching
ch. 15 Visions of the Possible: Models for Campus Support of the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning
ch. 16 The Doctoral Imperative: Examining the Ends of Erudition
Index
Lee Shulman has been president of the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching since 1997. He is a former president of the American Educational Research Association as well as past president of the National Academy of Education. In this second volume of a landmark two volume collection of Shulman's best work, he addresses such compelling questions as What are the most effective approaches to teaching? How important is knowledge of subject matter to a teacher's success? And, how do we measure success in teaching and learning? (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Sources
About the Author
Acknowledgments
Foreword
Introduction
Pt. 1 Learning
ch. 1 Professing the Liberal Arts
ch. 2 Taking Learning Seriously
ch. 3 Problem-Based Learning: The Pedagogies of Uncertainty
ch. 4 Making Differences: A Table of Learning
Pt. 2 The Profession of Teaching
ch. 5 Knowledge and Teaching: Foundations of the New Reform
ch. 6 Learning to Teach
ch. 7 Toward a Pedagogy of Substance
ch. 8 Teaching as Community Property: Putting an End to Pedagogical Solitude
ch. 9 The Scholarship of Teaching: New Elaborations, New Developments
ch. 10 From Minsk to Pinsk: Why a Scholarship of Teaching and Learning?
ch. 11 Lamarck's Revenge: Teaching Among the Scholarships
ch. 12 From Idea to Prototype: Three Exercises in the Peer Review of Teaching
ch. 13 The Pedagogical Colloquium: Three Models
ch. 14 Course Anatomy: The Dissection and Analysis of Knowledge Through Teaching
ch. 15 Visions of the Possible: Models for Campus Support of the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning
ch. 16 The Doctoral Imperative: Examining the Ends of Erudition
Index
Making Teaching Community Property: A Menu for Peer Collaboration and Peer Review
Additional Info:
Describes strategies through which faculty can document and "go public" with their teaching - be it for purposes of improvement or evaluation. Each of nine chapters features a different strategy - from the fairly simple, low-risk "teaching circle," to "course portfolios," to more formal departmental occasions such as faculty hiring - with reports by faculty who have actually tried each strategy, guidelines for good practice, and an annotated list of ...
Describes strategies through which faculty can document and "go public" with their teaching - be it for purposes of improvement or evaluation. Each of nine chapters features a different strategy - from the fairly simple, low-risk "teaching circle," to "course portfolios," to more formal departmental occasions such as faculty hiring - with reports by faculty who have actually tried each strategy, guidelines for good practice, and an annotated list of ...
Additional Info:
Describes strategies through which faculty can document and "go public" with their teaching - be it for purposes of improvement or evaluation. Each of nine chapters features a different strategy - from the fairly simple, low-risk "teaching circle," to "course portfolios," to more formal departmental occasions such as faculty hiring - with reports by faculty who have actually tried each strategy, guidelines for good practice, and an annotated list of resources. Offers lessons campuses can use to create more effective systems for the formal evaluation and reward of teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface by Russell Edgerton
Introduction
ch. 1 Teaching Circles: Starting the Conversation; Setting a Scholarly Tone Teaching Circles in the History Department at Kent State University by John Jameson; Fostering Collective Responsibility for Student Learning Teaching Seminars in the University of North Carolina at Charlotte Mathematics Department by Charles Burnap and Miriam Leiva; Learning Together An Online Faculty Conversation About Online Student Conversation at Rio Hondo College by Susan Obler
ch. 2 Reciprocal Visits and Observations: Opening the Classroom Door; Reciprocal Classroom Visits An Experiment in the Temple University History Department by William Cutler and Howard Spodek; The Teacher Observation/Peer Support (TOPS) Program at California State University-Dominguez Hills by Kathleen McEnerney and Jamie L. Webb; The Featured Faculty Program at Eastern Michigan University byDeborah DeZure
ch. 3 Mentoring: Teachers Teaching Other Teachers; A New Faculty Mentoring Program in the Stanford English Department byDavid Halliburton;The Faculty Tutorial Program at Saint Olaf College by Jonathan Hill; The Issue of Supply Fostering Senior Faculty Leadership at The College of Saint Catherine by Marilou Eldred
ch. 4 A Focus on Student Learning; Interviewing Each Other's Students in the Legal Studies Program at the University of Georgia by Peter Shedd; Classroom Assessment as a Context for Faculty Conversation and Collaboration at California State University-Long Beach by Susan Nummedal; Making Students More Active Agents in Their Learning TQM in the Syracuse University School of Business by Frances Zollers
ch. 5 Portfolios: Putting the Pieces Together; Inventing a New Genre The Course Portfolio at the University of Wisconsin-La Crosse by William Cerbin; Developing a Course Portfolio in Math A Report From the University of Nebraska-Lincoln by Steve Dunbar
ch. 6 Team Teaching and Teaching Teams; Teaching Teams in the Math Department at the University of Nebraska-Lincoln by Steve Dunbar; A Team Approach to Course Design and Teaching in an Integrated Arts and Humanities Course at Alverno College by Kevin Casey; Coordinated Studies A Model for Faculty Collaboration and Team Teaching in a Consortium of Washington Campuses by Jean MacGregor; Team Teaching About Teaching the Disciplines The Pedagogy Seminar at Millersville University by Barbara Stengel
ch. 7 Collaborative Inquiry and Pedagogical Scholarship; Collaborative Inquiry in the Teaching of Writing Theory and Practice at the University of Nebraska-Lincoln by Joy Ritchie; Collaborative Inquiry in an Early Childhood Education Course at the University of Wyoming by Jane Nelson; A Collaborative, Comparative Study of Student Learning in Chemistry at the University of Wisconsin-Madison by John Wright
ch. 8 Departmental Occasions for Collaboration; The Pedagogical Colloquium Focusing on Teaching in the Hiring Process in the Stanford University History Department by Richard Roberts; A Professional Development Program for Graduate Students Fostering Collaboration in the Writing Program at Northern Arizona University by Geoffrey Chase; The Departmental Teaching Library A Mathematics Course File at the University of North Carolina at Charlotte by Charles Burnap
ch. 9 Intercampus Collaboration and external Review of Teaching External Peer Review of Teaching A New Effort in the Chemistry Department at IUPUI by David Malik; Piloting Long Distance Interviews With Students as a Potential Component of the External Peer Review of Teaching by Jere Morehead
Conclusion: From Peer Collaboration to Peer Review
About the AAHE Teaching Initiative
About the AAHE’s Peer Review of Teaching Project
Describes strategies through which faculty can document and "go public" with their teaching - be it for purposes of improvement or evaluation. Each of nine chapters features a different strategy - from the fairly simple, low-risk "teaching circle," to "course portfolios," to more formal departmental occasions such as faculty hiring - with reports by faculty who have actually tried each strategy, guidelines for good practice, and an annotated list of resources. Offers lessons campuses can use to create more effective systems for the formal evaluation and reward of teaching. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface by Russell Edgerton
Introduction
ch. 1 Teaching Circles: Starting the Conversation; Setting a Scholarly Tone Teaching Circles in the History Department at Kent State University by John Jameson; Fostering Collective Responsibility for Student Learning Teaching Seminars in the University of North Carolina at Charlotte Mathematics Department by Charles Burnap and Miriam Leiva; Learning Together An Online Faculty Conversation About Online Student Conversation at Rio Hondo College by Susan Obler
ch. 2 Reciprocal Visits and Observations: Opening the Classroom Door; Reciprocal Classroom Visits An Experiment in the Temple University History Department by William Cutler and Howard Spodek; The Teacher Observation/Peer Support (TOPS) Program at California State University-Dominguez Hills by Kathleen McEnerney and Jamie L. Webb; The Featured Faculty Program at Eastern Michigan University byDeborah DeZure
ch. 3 Mentoring: Teachers Teaching Other Teachers; A New Faculty Mentoring Program in the Stanford English Department byDavid Halliburton;The Faculty Tutorial Program at Saint Olaf College by Jonathan Hill; The Issue of Supply Fostering Senior Faculty Leadership at The College of Saint Catherine by Marilou Eldred
ch. 4 A Focus on Student Learning; Interviewing Each Other's Students in the Legal Studies Program at the University of Georgia by Peter Shedd; Classroom Assessment as a Context for Faculty Conversation and Collaboration at California State University-Long Beach by Susan Nummedal; Making Students More Active Agents in Their Learning TQM in the Syracuse University School of Business by Frances Zollers
ch. 5 Portfolios: Putting the Pieces Together; Inventing a New Genre The Course Portfolio at the University of Wisconsin-La Crosse by William Cerbin; Developing a Course Portfolio in Math A Report From the University of Nebraska-Lincoln by Steve Dunbar
ch. 6 Team Teaching and Teaching Teams; Teaching Teams in the Math Department at the University of Nebraska-Lincoln by Steve Dunbar; A Team Approach to Course Design and Teaching in an Integrated Arts and Humanities Course at Alverno College by Kevin Casey; Coordinated Studies A Model for Faculty Collaboration and Team Teaching in a Consortium of Washington Campuses by Jean MacGregor; Team Teaching About Teaching the Disciplines The Pedagogy Seminar at Millersville University by Barbara Stengel
ch. 7 Collaborative Inquiry and Pedagogical Scholarship; Collaborative Inquiry in the Teaching of Writing Theory and Practice at the University of Nebraska-Lincoln by Joy Ritchie; Collaborative Inquiry in an Early Childhood Education Course at the University of Wyoming by Jane Nelson; A Collaborative, Comparative Study of Student Learning in Chemistry at the University of Wisconsin-Madison by John Wright
ch. 8 Departmental Occasions for Collaboration; The Pedagogical Colloquium Focusing on Teaching in the Hiring Process in the Stanford University History Department by Richard Roberts; A Professional Development Program for Graduate Students Fostering Collaboration in the Writing Program at Northern Arizona University by Geoffrey Chase; The Departmental Teaching Library A Mathematics Course File at the University of North Carolina at Charlotte by Charles Burnap
ch. 9 Intercampus Collaboration and external Review of Teaching External Peer Review of Teaching A New Effort in the Chemistry Department at IUPUI by David Malik; Piloting Long Distance Interviews With Students as a Potential Component of the External Peer Review of Teaching by Jere Morehead
Conclusion: From Peer Collaboration to Peer Review
About the AAHE Teaching Initiative
About the AAHE’s Peer Review of Teaching Project
Mapping the Range of Graduate Student Professional Development: Studies in Graduate and Professional Student Development, Number 14
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: This edited book series serves as a guide to the study of improved training, employment and administration of graduate and professional student development programs. A new publication that addresses a critical need in higher education. The series is designed to highlight all aspects of professional development of graduate and professional students. (...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: This edited book series serves as a guide to the study of improved training, employment and administration of graduate and professional student development programs. A new publication that addresses a critical need in higher education. The series is designed to highlight all aspects of professional development of graduate and professional students. (...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: This edited book series serves as a guide to the study of improved training, employment and administration of graduate and professional student development programs. A new publication that addresses a critical need in higher education. The series is designed to highlight all aspects of professional development of graduate and professional students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Section 1: Taxonomy of TA Training Programs
ch 1 Graduate Student Professional Development: A Decade after Calls for National Reform
Section 2: Orientations
ch. 2 An Introductory Classification of Graduate Teaching Assistant Orientations
Section 3: Mentor and Lead TA Programs
ch. 3 Assessing Graduate Consultant Programs: Directors’ Perceptions of Rationales, Content, Activities, and Benefits
ch. 4 Teaching Mentorship Programs for Graduate Student Development
Section 4: Teaching Courses
ch. 5 Graduate and Professional Student Development: The Role of the Pedagogy Course
ch. 6 Rethinking Courses in College Pedagogy for the Sciences: An Analysis and Subsequent Model
Section 5: Teaching Certificates
ch. 7 Graduate Student Teaching Certificates: Survey of Current Programs
ch. 8 Leveraging Existing PFF Resources to Create a Certificate of University Teaching
Section 6: Other Programming
ch. 9 A Comparative Study of GTA Development in Japan and the US
Section 7: Conclusion
ch. 10 Steps Toward a Framework for an Intended Curriculum for Graduate and Professional Students: How We Talk about What We Do
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: This edited book series serves as a guide to the study of improved training, employment and administration of graduate and professional student development programs. A new publication that addresses a critical need in higher education. The series is designed to highlight all aspects of professional development of graduate and professional students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Section 1: Taxonomy of TA Training Programs
ch 1 Graduate Student Professional Development: A Decade after Calls for National Reform
Section 2: Orientations
ch. 2 An Introductory Classification of Graduate Teaching Assistant Orientations
Section 3: Mentor and Lead TA Programs
ch. 3 Assessing Graduate Consultant Programs: Directors’ Perceptions of Rationales, Content, Activities, and Benefits
ch. 4 Teaching Mentorship Programs for Graduate Student Development
Section 4: Teaching Courses
ch. 5 Graduate and Professional Student Development: The Role of the Pedagogy Course
ch. 6 Rethinking Courses in College Pedagogy for the Sciences: An Analysis and Subsequent Model
Section 5: Teaching Certificates
ch. 7 Graduate Student Teaching Certificates: Survey of Current Programs
ch. 8 Leveraging Existing PFF Resources to Create a Certificate of University Teaching
Section 6: Other Programming
ch. 9 A Comparative Study of GTA Development in Japan and the US
Section 7: Conclusion
ch. 10 Steps Toward a Framework for an Intended Curriculum for Graduate and Professional Students: How We Talk about What We Do
Assessing and Improving Your Teaching: Strategies and Rubrics for Faculty Growth and Student Learning
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: In order to make appropriate changes to improve your teaching and your students’ learning, first you need to know how you’re teaching now. Figure it out for yourself and invigorate your teaching on your own terms!
This practical evidence-based guide promotes excellence in teaching and improved student learning ...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: In order to make appropriate changes to improve your teaching and your students’ learning, first you need to know how you’re teaching now. Figure it out for yourself and invigorate your teaching on your own terms!
This practical evidence-based guide promotes excellence in teaching and improved student learning ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: In order to make appropriate changes to improve your teaching and your students’ learning, first you need to know how you’re teaching now. Figure it out for yourself and invigorate your teaching on your own terms!
This practical evidence-based guide promotes excellence in teaching and improved student learning through self-reflection and self-assessment of one’s teaching. Phyllis Blumberg starts by reviewing the current approaches to instructor evaluation and describes their inadequacies. She then presents a new model of assessing teaching that builds upon a broader base of evidence and sources of support. This new model leads to self-assessment rubrics, which are available for download, and the book will guide you in how to use them. The book includes case studies of completed critical reflection rubrics from a variety of disciplines, including the performing and visual arts and the hard sciences, to show how they can be used in different ways and how to explore the richness of the data you’ll uncover. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 Growing Your Teaching Effectiveness: An Overview
Part I - A Teaching Model That Promotes Better Learning
ch. 2 Beliefs Leading to Better Teaching
ch. 3 Essential Aspects of Effective Teachingv ch. 4 Documenting Critical Self-Refl ection of Teaching
ch. 5 Evidence-Based Approaches to Enhance Teaching
ch. 6 Finding and Using Literature to Promote Better Teaching
Part 2 - A Model To Assess Teaching To Promote Better Learning
ch. 7 Principles of Assessing Teaching
ch. 8 Model for Assessing Teaching
Part 3 - Self Assessment Rubrics
ch. 9 How to Assess Teaching Using Rubrics Based on the Assessment Model
ch. 10 What These Rubrics Assess, and How That Improves Teaching
Part 4 - Cases Showing Effective Uses For the Rubrics
Introduction
ch. 11 How a Beginning Assistant Professor Used Rubrics to Plan and Track Her Personal Faculty Development
ch. 12 How a Faculty Developer Used the Rubrics with a Pretenure Instructor to Facilitate Improvement
ch. 13 How an Experienced Professor Used the Rubrics to Document Her Scholarship of Teaching and Learning
ch. 14 How a Pretenured Professor Used the Rubrics to Assess His Mentoring Undergraduate and Graduate Students in Research
ch. 15 How an Experienced Clinical Professor Used the Rubrics to Assess His Changed Roles While Precepting or Supervising Students in Hospital Settings
Comparisons among the Cases
References
Appendix: Rubrics for Self-Assessment of Teaching: Tools for Improving Different Types of Teaching
Index
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: In order to make appropriate changes to improve your teaching and your students’ learning, first you need to know how you’re teaching now. Figure it out for yourself and invigorate your teaching on your own terms!
This practical evidence-based guide promotes excellence in teaching and improved student learning through self-reflection and self-assessment of one’s teaching. Phyllis Blumberg starts by reviewing the current approaches to instructor evaluation and describes their inadequacies. She then presents a new model of assessing teaching that builds upon a broader base of evidence and sources of support. This new model leads to self-assessment rubrics, which are available for download, and the book will guide you in how to use them. The book includes case studies of completed critical reflection rubrics from a variety of disciplines, including the performing and visual arts and the hard sciences, to show how they can be used in different ways and how to explore the richness of the data you’ll uncover. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Author
ch. 1 Growing Your Teaching Effectiveness: An Overview
Part I - A Teaching Model That Promotes Better Learning
ch. 2 Beliefs Leading to Better Teaching
ch. 3 Essential Aspects of Effective Teachingv ch. 4 Documenting Critical Self-Refl ection of Teaching
ch. 5 Evidence-Based Approaches to Enhance Teaching
ch. 6 Finding and Using Literature to Promote Better Teaching
Part 2 - A Model To Assess Teaching To Promote Better Learning
ch. 7 Principles of Assessing Teaching
ch. 8 Model for Assessing Teaching
Part 3 - Self Assessment Rubrics
ch. 9 How to Assess Teaching Using Rubrics Based on the Assessment Model
ch. 10 What These Rubrics Assess, and How That Improves Teaching
Part 4 - Cases Showing Effective Uses For the Rubrics
Introduction
ch. 11 How a Beginning Assistant Professor Used Rubrics to Plan and Track Her Personal Faculty Development
ch. 12 How a Faculty Developer Used the Rubrics with a Pretenure Instructor to Facilitate Improvement
ch. 13 How an Experienced Professor Used the Rubrics to Document Her Scholarship of Teaching and Learning
ch. 14 How a Pretenured Professor Used the Rubrics to Assess His Mentoring Undergraduate and Graduate Students in Research
ch. 15 How an Experienced Clinical Professor Used the Rubrics to Assess His Changed Roles While Precepting or Supervising Students in Hospital Settings
Comparisons among the Cases
References
Appendix: Rubrics for Self-Assessment of Teaching: Tools for Improving Different Types of Teaching
Index
Additional Info:
Reflective practice has moved from the margins to the mainstream of professional education. However, in this process, its radical potential has been subsumed by individualistic, rather than situated, understandings of practice. Presenting critical perspectives that challenge the current paradigm, this book aims to move beyond reflective practice. It proposes new conceptualisations and offers fresh approaches relevant across professions. Contributors include both academics and practitioners concerned with the training and development ...
Reflective practice has moved from the margins to the mainstream of professional education. However, in this process, its radical potential has been subsumed by individualistic, rather than situated, understandings of practice. Presenting critical perspectives that challenge the current paradigm, this book aims to move beyond reflective practice. It proposes new conceptualisations and offers fresh approaches relevant across professions. Contributors include both academics and practitioners concerned with the training and development ...
Additional Info:
Reflective practice has moved from the margins to the mainstream of professional education. However, in this process, its radical potential has been subsumed by individualistic, rather than situated, understandings of practice. Presenting critical perspectives that challenge the current paradigm, this book aims to move beyond reflective practice. It proposes new conceptualisations and offers fresh approaches relevant across professions. Contributors include both academics and practitioners concerned with the training and development of professionals.
Definitions of reflection (which are often implicit) often focus on the individual's internal thought processes and responsibility for their actions. The individual - what they did/thought/felt – is emphasised with little recognition of context, power dynamics or ideological challenge. This book presents the work of practitioners, educators, academics and researchers who see this as problematic and are moving towards a more critical approach to reflective practice.
With an overview from the editors and fourteen chapters considering new conceptualisations, professional perspectives and new practices, Beyond Reflective Practice examines what new forms of professional reflective practice are emerging. It examines in particular the relationships between reflective practitioners and those upon whom they practise. It looks at the ways in which the world of professional work has changed and the ways in which professional practice needs to change to meet the needs of this new world. It will be relevant for those concerned with initial and ongoing professional learning, both in work and in educational contexts. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
List of Contributors
Introduction and Overview
Part I: Conceptual Challenges
ch. 1 Professionalism and social change – the implications of social change for the ‘reflective practitioner' (Nick Frost)
ch. 2 Relocating reflection in the context of practice (David Boud)
ch. 3 Beyond reflective practice: reworking the "critical" in critical reflection (Jan Fook)
ch. 4 A learning practice: Conceptualizing professional lifelong learning for the healthcare sector (Stephen Billett and Jennifer Newton)
ch. 5 Really reflexive practice: auto/biographical research and struggles for a critical reflexivity (Linden West)
Part II: Professional Perspectives
ch. 6 Voices from the past: professional discourse and reflective practice (Janet Hargreaves)
ch. 7 It’s all right for you two, you obviously like each other: recognizing challenges in pursuing collaborative professional learning through team teaching (Sue Knights, Lois Meyer and Jane Sampson)
ch. 8 Preparing for patient-centered practice: developing the patient voice in health professional learning (Penny Morris, Ernest Dalton, Andrea McGoverin, Fiona O'Neil, Jools Symons)
ch. 9 Informal Learning by Professionals in the United Kingdom (Geoffrey Chivers)
ch. 10 Judgment, narrative and discourse: a critique of reflective practice (David Satltiel)
Part III: New Practices
ch. 11 Re-imagining reflection: creating a theatrical space for the imagination in productive reflection (Kate Collier)
ch. 12 A step too far? From professional reflective practice to spirituality ( Cheryl Hunt)
ch. 13 Developing critical reflection within an interprofessional learning program (Kart Karban and Sue Smith)
ch. 14 Beyond reflection dogma (John Sweet)
Reflective practice has moved from the margins to the mainstream of professional education. However, in this process, its radical potential has been subsumed by individualistic, rather than situated, understandings of practice. Presenting critical perspectives that challenge the current paradigm, this book aims to move beyond reflective practice. It proposes new conceptualisations and offers fresh approaches relevant across professions. Contributors include both academics and practitioners concerned with the training and development of professionals.
Definitions of reflection (which are often implicit) often focus on the individual's internal thought processes and responsibility for their actions. The individual - what they did/thought/felt – is emphasised with little recognition of context, power dynamics or ideological challenge. This book presents the work of practitioners, educators, academics and researchers who see this as problematic and are moving towards a more critical approach to reflective practice.
With an overview from the editors and fourteen chapters considering new conceptualisations, professional perspectives and new practices, Beyond Reflective Practice examines what new forms of professional reflective practice are emerging. It examines in particular the relationships between reflective practitioners and those upon whom they practise. It looks at the ways in which the world of professional work has changed and the ways in which professional practice needs to change to meet the needs of this new world. It will be relevant for those concerned with initial and ongoing professional learning, both in work and in educational contexts. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
List of Contributors
Introduction and Overview
Part I: Conceptual Challenges
ch. 1 Professionalism and social change – the implications of social change for the ‘reflective practitioner' (Nick Frost)
ch. 2 Relocating reflection in the context of practice (David Boud)
ch. 3 Beyond reflective practice: reworking the "critical" in critical reflection (Jan Fook)
ch. 4 A learning practice: Conceptualizing professional lifelong learning for the healthcare sector (Stephen Billett and Jennifer Newton)
ch. 5 Really reflexive practice: auto/biographical research and struggles for a critical reflexivity (Linden West)
Part II: Professional Perspectives
ch. 6 Voices from the past: professional discourse and reflective practice (Janet Hargreaves)
ch. 7 It’s all right for you two, you obviously like each other: recognizing challenges in pursuing collaborative professional learning through team teaching (Sue Knights, Lois Meyer and Jane Sampson)
ch. 8 Preparing for patient-centered practice: developing the patient voice in health professional learning (Penny Morris, Ernest Dalton, Andrea McGoverin, Fiona O'Neil, Jools Symons)
ch. 9 Informal Learning by Professionals in the United Kingdom (Geoffrey Chivers)
ch. 10 Judgment, narrative and discourse: a critique of reflective practice (David Satltiel)
Part III: New Practices
ch. 11 Re-imagining reflection: creating a theatrical space for the imagination in productive reflection (Kate Collier)
ch. 12 A step too far? From professional reflective practice to spirituality ( Cheryl Hunt)
ch. 13 Developing critical reflection within an interprofessional learning program (Kart Karban and Sue Smith)
ch. 14 Beyond reflection dogma (John Sweet)
Using Action Inquiry in Engaged Research: An Organizing Guide
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Using Action Inquiry in Engaged Research: A Professional Guide offers higher education and school professionals practical guidance and methods for using the Action Inquiry Model (AIM) in engaged research initiatives and community partnerships. Replete with group exercises and case studies, this guide was originally developed to supplement workshops for faculty, administrators and ...
Click Here for Book Review
Using Action Inquiry in Engaged Research: A Professional Guide offers higher education and school professionals practical guidance and methods for using the Action Inquiry Model (AIM) in engaged research initiatives and community partnerships. Replete with group exercises and case studies, this guide was originally developed to supplement workshops for faculty, administrators and ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Using Action Inquiry in Engaged Research: A Professional Guide offers higher education and school professionals practical guidance and methods for using the Action Inquiry Model (AIM) in engaged research initiatives and community partnerships. Replete with group exercises and case studies, this guide was originally developed to supplement workshops for faculty, administrators and students working on action initiatives that focused on critical educational issues facing local communities. It provides a useful framework and straightforward techniques for building empowering partnerships.
The Action Inquiry Model (AIM) includes four stages:
• Assessment: Using research and experience to identify critical challenges facing the university with respect to the improvement of educational opportunities
• Organization: Developing workgroups to collaborate on initiatives that address critical challenges; providing financial support for new initiatives; and providing release time and professional development opportunities for faculty and staff who engage in reform initiatives
• Action Initiatives: Treating reforms as pilot tests for new strategies, as a means of promoting organizational learning, professional development, and student success
• Evaluation: Integrating the evaluation of current programs and incorporating new initiatives into the reform process.
This guide provides two methods for learning the inquiry process: a step-by-step process for defining tasks for teams of researchers and practitioners working together to use research to inform the educational improvement; and sets of case studies on assessment and action inquiry to inform groups in collectively discussing problems and strategies, an approach that supports the classroom use of the Guide.
The key tasks in action inquiry initiatives include:
1. Build an understanding of the challenge
2 Identify the causes of the challenge using data to test hypotheses
2. Look internally and externally for solutions
3. Assess possible solutions
4. Develop action plans
5. Implement pilot test, and evaluate
This guide is appropriate for professional development programs and as a text for higher education Masters and Ph.D. programs. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Tables
Figures
Foreword (Timothy K. Eatman)
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Getting Started
ch. 2 Focus on Barriers to Social Justice
ch. 3 Organizing for Change
ch. 4 Using Information for Change
ch. 5 Learning From Experience
Afterword (Rick Dalton)
References
About the Contributors
Index
Click Here for Book Review
Using Action Inquiry in Engaged Research: A Professional Guide offers higher education and school professionals practical guidance and methods for using the Action Inquiry Model (AIM) in engaged research initiatives and community partnerships. Replete with group exercises and case studies, this guide was originally developed to supplement workshops for faculty, administrators and students working on action initiatives that focused on critical educational issues facing local communities. It provides a useful framework and straightforward techniques for building empowering partnerships.
The Action Inquiry Model (AIM) includes four stages:
• Assessment: Using research and experience to identify critical challenges facing the university with respect to the improvement of educational opportunities
• Organization: Developing workgroups to collaborate on initiatives that address critical challenges; providing financial support for new initiatives; and providing release time and professional development opportunities for faculty and staff who engage in reform initiatives
• Action Initiatives: Treating reforms as pilot tests for new strategies, as a means of promoting organizational learning, professional development, and student success
• Evaluation: Integrating the evaluation of current programs and incorporating new initiatives into the reform process.
This guide provides two methods for learning the inquiry process: a step-by-step process for defining tasks for teams of researchers and practitioners working together to use research to inform the educational improvement; and sets of case studies on assessment and action inquiry to inform groups in collectively discussing problems and strategies, an approach that supports the classroom use of the Guide.
The key tasks in action inquiry initiatives include:
1. Build an understanding of the challenge
2 Identify the causes of the challenge using data to test hypotheses
2. Look internally and externally for solutions
3. Assess possible solutions
4. Develop action plans
5. Implement pilot test, and evaluate
This guide is appropriate for professional development programs and as a text for higher education Masters and Ph.D. programs. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Tables
Figures
Foreword (Timothy K. Eatman)
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Getting Started
ch. 2 Focus on Barriers to Social Justice
ch. 3 Organizing for Change
ch. 4 Using Information for Change
ch. 5 Learning From Experience
Afterword (Rick Dalton)
References
About the Contributors
Index
Handbook for Associate Instructors
Additional Info:
"This handbook provides essential information on regulations and procedures. It is a compilation of policy and procedure statements from a variety of the Department, College of Arts and Science, and the University Graduate School documents. It is intended as a guide to fulfilling the responsibilities associated with an appointment as an Associate Instructure"
"This handbook provides essential information on regulations and procedures. It is a compilation of policy and procedure statements from a variety of the Department, College of Arts and Science, and the University Graduate School documents. It is intended as a guide to fulfilling the responsibilities associated with an appointment as an Associate Instructure"
Additional Info:
"This handbook provides essential information on regulations and procedures. It is a compilation of policy and procedure statements from a variety of the Department, College of Arts and Science, and the University Graduate School documents. It is intended as a guide to fulfilling the responsibilities associated with an appointment as an Associate Instructure"
Table Of Content:
1 Associate Instructor as Teacher
1 Preparing to Teach
2 Your Own Class
4 A Section of a Larger Class
5 The Syllabus
6 Class Rolls and Grade Books
6 Course Packets and Readers
7 Classrooms
7 Office Hours
9 Ideas for Teaching
9 Choosing an Instructional Style
11 First Class Survival Tips
12 Skills of a Good Teacher
12 Show You Care
14 Keep Students Engaged
16 Communication Checklist
20 Using Instructional Media
25 Discussion Sections
25 Preparing for Discussions
27 Facilitating Discussions
28 Problems With Discussions
30 Laboratory Sections
30 Preparing Lab Sections
31 Managing Lab Sections
31 Safety Procedures
31 Student Preparation
32 Supervising the Experiment
32 Refrain from giving outright answers
33 Lecturing
33 Preparing Lectures
36 Questioning in the Classroom
37 Rewarding Student Participation and Providing Feedback
38 Teaching Outside the Field of Specialty
39 Evaluation of Student Performance
39 Determining Evaluative Criteria
40 Test Construction
42 Constructing Writing Assignments
43 Responding to Student Writing
45 Grading
46 Recording and Distribution of Grades
46 Complaints about Grades
47 The University Grading System
48 Evaluation of Instruction
48 Teacher-Course Evaluation Options for AIs
50 Ethics and the Associate Instructor
50 Academic Integrity
50 Academic Misconduct
52 Privacy of Student Records
52 Letters of Recommendation
53 Sexual Harassment
54 Assisting Emotionally Troubled Students
54 Assisting Students with Disabilities
54 Diversity
54 Accomodating Religious Holidays
55 Teachings with Student Diversity in Mind
59 Cultural Differences for International AIs
60 What Help is Available for New Instructors?
61 Sources
62 Bibliography on College Teaching
64 References
Appendix: Instructor's Guide to Student Services
"This handbook provides essential information on regulations and procedures. It is a compilation of policy and procedure statements from a variety of the Department, College of Arts and Science, and the University Graduate School documents. It is intended as a guide to fulfilling the responsibilities associated with an appointment as an Associate Instructure"
Table Of Content:
1 Associate Instructor as Teacher
1 Preparing to Teach
2 Your Own Class
4 A Section of a Larger Class
5 The Syllabus
6 Class Rolls and Grade Books
6 Course Packets and Readers
7 Classrooms
7 Office Hours
9 Ideas for Teaching
9 Choosing an Instructional Style
11 First Class Survival Tips
12 Skills of a Good Teacher
12 Show You Care
14 Keep Students Engaged
16 Communication Checklist
20 Using Instructional Media
25 Discussion Sections
25 Preparing for Discussions
27 Facilitating Discussions
28 Problems With Discussions
30 Laboratory Sections
30 Preparing Lab Sections
31 Managing Lab Sections
31 Safety Procedures
31 Student Preparation
32 Supervising the Experiment
32 Refrain from giving outright answers
33 Lecturing
33 Preparing Lectures
36 Questioning in the Classroom
37 Rewarding Student Participation and Providing Feedback
38 Teaching Outside the Field of Specialty
39 Evaluation of Student Performance
39 Determining Evaluative Criteria
40 Test Construction
42 Constructing Writing Assignments
43 Responding to Student Writing
45 Grading
46 Recording and Distribution of Grades
46 Complaints about Grades
47 The University Grading System
48 Evaluation of Instruction
48 Teacher-Course Evaluation Options for AIs
50 Ethics and the Associate Instructor
50 Academic Integrity
50 Academic Misconduct
52 Privacy of Student Records
52 Letters of Recommendation
53 Sexual Harassment
54 Assisting Emotionally Troubled Students
54 Assisting Students with Disabilities
54 Diversity
54 Accomodating Religious Holidays
55 Teachings with Student Diversity in Mind
59 Cultural Differences for International AIs
60 What Help is Available for New Instructors?
61 Sources
62 Bibliography on College Teaching
64 References
Appendix: Instructor's Guide to Student Services
Additional Info:
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Additional Info:
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Table Of Content:
Introduction to the Leadership Study Project (G. Douglass Lewis)
The Presidential Experience in Theological Education: A Study of Executive Leadership (Leon Pacala)
A Retrospective Study of The Institute for Theological Education Management (William L. Baumgaertner)
Walking the Narrow Path: Female Administrators in ATS Schools (Barbara Brown Zikmund)
Theological Education and Racial/Ethnic Leadership (J. Oscar McCloud)
Principles for Developing Executive Leaders (D. Douglas McKenna and Jeffrey J. McHenry)
Nonprofit Executive Leadership Education Study (David J. Nygren and Miriam D. Ukeritis)
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Table Of Content:
Introduction to the Leadership Study Project (G. Douglass Lewis)
The Presidential Experience in Theological Education: A Study of Executive Leadership (Leon Pacala)
A Retrospective Study of The Institute for Theological Education Management (William L. Baumgaertner)
Walking the Narrow Path: Female Administrators in ATS Schools (Barbara Brown Zikmund)
Theological Education and Racial/Ethnic Leadership (J. Oscar McCloud)
Principles for Developing Executive Leaders (D. Douglas McKenna and Jeffrey J. McHenry)
Nonprofit Executive Leadership Education Study (David J. Nygren and Miriam D. Ukeritis)
Additional Info:
Provides resources for department chairs, directors of graduate studies, graduate faculty, graduate deans, and others interested in the quality of graduate education. Produced by Vanderbilt University’s Center for Teaching.
Provides resources for department chairs, directors of graduate studies, graduate faculty, graduate deans, and others interested in the quality of graduate education. Produced by Vanderbilt University’s Center for Teaching.
Additional Info:
Provides resources for department chairs, directors of graduate studies, graduate faculty, graduate deans, and others interested in the quality of graduate education. Produced by Vanderbilt University’s Center for Teaching.
Provides resources for department chairs, directors of graduate studies, graduate faculty, graduate deans, and others interested in the quality of graduate education. Produced by Vanderbilt University’s Center for Teaching.
The Dean's Demise: Sexual Harassment in a Divinity School
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Not everyone is surprised at the rumor suggesting that Karl Wolfe, Dean of The University School, recently told Rebecca Swingle, new professor at the school, that a promotion could be more easily attained were she to sleep with him. Certainly those least surprised were several female students who had been the target ...
Click Here for Book Review
Not everyone is surprised at the rumor suggesting that Karl Wolfe, Dean of The University School, recently told Rebecca Swingle, new professor at the school, that a promotion could be more easily attained were she to sleep with him. Certainly those least surprised were several female students who had been the target ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Not everyone is surprised at the rumor suggesting that Karl Wolfe, Dean of The University School, recently told Rebecca Swingle, new professor at the school, that a promotion could be more easily attained were she to sleep with him. Certainly those least surprised were several female students who had been the target of the Dean's amorous behavior. But the question remains--who might stand and suggest that such behavior should not occur in a divinity school, of all places?
The Dean's Demise offers readers a fictional case study in how something like sexual harassment impacts a divinity school's educational vision, its theological understanding of community, and the practical issues of governance.
Table Of Content:
Prologue: 1979
Ten Years Later, 1989,
Fall Academic Quarter
Ch. One
Ch. Two
Ch. Three
Ch. Four
Ch. Five Ch. Six
Ch. Seven
Ch. Eight
Winter Quarter 1989/1990
Ch. Nine
Ch. Ten
Ch. Eleven
Ch. Twelve
Ch. Thirteen
Ch. Fourteen
Ch. Fifteen
Ch. Sixteen
Ch. Seventeen
Ch. Eighteen
Ch. Nineteen
Ch. Twenty
Ch. Twenty-One
Ch. Twenty-Two
Ch. Twenty-Three
Ch. Twenty-Four
Spring Quarter 1990
Ch. Twenty-Five
Ch. Twenty-Six
Ch. Twenty-Seven
Early Summer 1993
Ch. Twenty-Eight
Click Here for Book Review
Not everyone is surprised at the rumor suggesting that Karl Wolfe, Dean of The University School, recently told Rebecca Swingle, new professor at the school, that a promotion could be more easily attained were she to sleep with him. Certainly those least surprised were several female students who had been the target of the Dean's amorous behavior. But the question remains--who might stand and suggest that such behavior should not occur in a divinity school, of all places?
The Dean's Demise offers readers a fictional case study in how something like sexual harassment impacts a divinity school's educational vision, its theological understanding of community, and the practical issues of governance.
Table Of Content:
Prologue: 1979
Ten Years Later, 1989,
Fall Academic Quarter
Ch. One
Ch. Two
Ch. Three
Ch. Four
Ch. Five Ch. Six
Ch. Seven
Ch. Eight
Winter Quarter 1989/1990
Ch. Nine
Ch. Ten
Ch. Eleven
Ch. Twelve
Ch. Thirteen
Ch. Fourteen
Ch. Fifteen
Ch. Sixteen
Ch. Seventeen
Ch. Eighteen
Ch. Nineteen
Ch. Twenty
Ch. Twenty-One
Ch. Twenty-Two
Ch. Twenty-Three
Ch. Twenty-Four
Spring Quarter 1990
Ch. Twenty-Five
Ch. Twenty-Six
Ch. Twenty-Seven
Early Summer 1993
Ch. Twenty-Eight
"Academic Administration as an Inner Journey"
Additional Info:
Journal Issue
Journal Issue
Additional Info:
Journal Issue
Journal Issue
Additional Info:
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Additional Info:
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Table Of Content:
Introduction (James L. Waits)
Issues for Future Faculty Planning (Joseph C. Hough, Jr.)
Choosing and Nurturing Faculty for an Unconventional Seminary (Barbara Brown Zikmund and William McKinney)
Faculty Development: An Organic Perspective (Samuel T. Logan, Jr.)
Evaluating an Uncertain Craft: Faculty Assessment and Theological Education (Mary C. Boys, SNJM)
Standards for Innovation: The Case for Theological Librarians (Stephen D. Crocco and Sara J. Myers)
Riding the Whirlwind: The Community of Scholars as a Response to the Changing Face of Theological Education (David D. Thayer, SS)
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Table Of Content:
Introduction (James L. Waits)
Issues for Future Faculty Planning (Joseph C. Hough, Jr.)
Choosing and Nurturing Faculty for an Unconventional Seminary (Barbara Brown Zikmund and William McKinney)
Faculty Development: An Organic Perspective (Samuel T. Logan, Jr.)
Evaluating an Uncertain Craft: Faculty Assessment and Theological Education (Mary C. Boys, SNJM)
Standards for Innovation: The Case for Theological Librarians (Stephen D. Crocco and Sara J. Myers)
Riding the Whirlwind: The Community of Scholars as a Response to the Changing Face of Theological Education (David D. Thayer, SS)
Additional Info:
The Survival Guide for New Faculty Members: Outlining the Keys to Success for Promotion and Tenure provides new faculty members with practical, down-to-earth wisdom and suggestions for successfully working through to tenure and promotion. The authors—both successful and experienced administrators and experts in higher education—have provided an extremely well-organized and useful guide for new faculty members. It focuses on all aspects of becoming a new faculty member including ...
The Survival Guide for New Faculty Members: Outlining the Keys to Success for Promotion and Tenure provides new faculty members with practical, down-to-earth wisdom and suggestions for successfully working through to tenure and promotion. The authors—both successful and experienced administrators and experts in higher education—have provided an extremely well-organized and useful guide for new faculty members. It focuses on all aspects of becoming a new faculty member including ...
Additional Info:
The Survival Guide for New Faculty Members: Outlining the Keys to Success for Promotion and Tenure provides new faculty members with practical, down-to-earth wisdom and suggestions for successfully working through to tenure and promotion. The authors—both successful and experienced administrators and experts in higher education—have provided an extremely well-organized and useful guide for new faculty members. It focuses on all aspects of becoming a new faculty member including the various expectations in completing a successful journey toward promotion and tenure. The book underscores the importance of recognizing the three facets of faculty life of teaching, research, and service. This volume clearly sets out, compares, and separates those three components with clarity and provides very useful advice for putting the three together. Taken together with the chapters on “Documenting Your Progress” and “Promotion and Tenure,” new faculty are provided with a solid, practical introduction to building a foundation for success in higher education. Feedback and tips are also provided within each chapter. It is written in a style that readers will be able to easily comprehend and understand and is supported with many examples. In addition, the information can be easily applied to new faculty at various types of institutions of higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Part I: The Basic Fundamentals
ch. 1 Choosing The Right Institution
Searching the Chronicle of Higher Education
Type of University
What to Look for Regarding a Faculty Position
Application Materials
Phone Interview
Campus Visit
Questions to Ask While on Campus
Job Offer/Negotiations
Conclusion
Faculty Tips on Getting Started
ch. 2 What To Do Prior To Arriving At Your New Institution
Finish Your Dissertation
What if You Don’t Finish?
Finding a Place to Live
School Options
Transportation
Athletic Events
Community and Cultural Events
Children’s Programs
Visiting the Community
Shopping
Nightlife
Parks
Discuss Class Load
Faculty Expectations and Support
Conclusion
Faculty Tips about Relocating
ch. 3 Learning About Your New Institution Once You Are There
Core Curriculum
Programs Offered
New Faculty Training
Faculty Mentors
Faculty Evaluations
Funding Opportunities
Internal Funding Opportunities
External Funding Opportunities
University Culture
Conclusion
Faculty Tips on Learning about Your Institution
Part II: The Nuts and Bolts of Success
ch. 4 Teaching
Class Load and Schedule
Course Teams
Syllabus Development
Assessments
Teaching Style
Available Technology and Support
Being Successful
Student Issues
Faculty Expectations
Conclusion
Faculty Tips about Teaching
ch. 5 Research and Scholarly Activity
Release Time
Developing Ideas
Research Agenda
Human Subjects Process
Manuscript Preparation
Presentations
Grant Funding
Being Successful
Collaboration/Outreach
Faculty Expectations
Conclusion
Faculty Tips about Scholarly Activity
ch. 6 Service
Department Service
College Service
University Service
Public School Service
Community Organization Service
Professional Organization Service
Documentation of Service
Being Successful
Faculty Expectations
Conclusion
Faculty Tips about Service
Part III: The Final Steps
ch. 7 Documenting Your Progress
Keeping Track
Developing a Plan
Constant Updates
Documenting your Work
Conclusion
Faculty Tips on Documenting your Progress
ch. 8 Promotion and Tenure
When does Promotion and Tenure Occur?
Preparation for Promotion and Tenure
What do you submit for Promotion and Tenure?
What are the Procedures and Timelines for Promotion and Tenure? What Happens if you are Denied Promotion and Tenure?
Conclusion
Faculty Tips about Promotion and Tenure
ch. 9 Creating A Harmony For Being Successful
Find Your Niche
Focus on your Strengths
Be Realistic
Find a Balance
Conclusion
Faculty Tips on Being Successful
Appendices
Appendix A: University Research Grant Application
Appendix B: Sample Undergraduate Syllabus
Appendix C: Sample Graduate Syllabus
Appendix D: Sample Human Subjects Proposal Form
Appendix E: Sample Human Subjects Reviewer Form
Appendix F: Completed Human Subjects Proposal
Appendix G: Sample Promotion and Tenure Packet
Index
The Survival Guide for New Faculty Members: Outlining the Keys to Success for Promotion and Tenure provides new faculty members with practical, down-to-earth wisdom and suggestions for successfully working through to tenure and promotion. The authors—both successful and experienced administrators and experts in higher education—have provided an extremely well-organized and useful guide for new faculty members. It focuses on all aspects of becoming a new faculty member including the various expectations in completing a successful journey toward promotion and tenure. The book underscores the importance of recognizing the three facets of faculty life of teaching, research, and service. This volume clearly sets out, compares, and separates those three components with clarity and provides very useful advice for putting the three together. Taken together with the chapters on “Documenting Your Progress” and “Promotion and Tenure,” new faculty are provided with a solid, practical introduction to building a foundation for success in higher education. Feedback and tips are also provided within each chapter. It is written in a style that readers will be able to easily comprehend and understand and is supported with many examples. In addition, the information can be easily applied to new faculty at various types of institutions of higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Part I: The Basic Fundamentals
ch. 1 Choosing The Right Institution
Searching the Chronicle of Higher Education
Type of University
What to Look for Regarding a Faculty Position
Application Materials
Phone Interview
Campus Visit
Questions to Ask While on Campus
Job Offer/Negotiations
Conclusion
Faculty Tips on Getting Started
ch. 2 What To Do Prior To Arriving At Your New Institution
Finish Your Dissertation
What if You Don’t Finish?
Finding a Place to Live
School Options
Transportation
Athletic Events
Community and Cultural Events
Children’s Programs
Visiting the Community
Shopping
Nightlife
Parks
Discuss Class Load
Faculty Expectations and Support
Conclusion
Faculty Tips about Relocating
ch. 3 Learning About Your New Institution Once You Are There
Core Curriculum
Programs Offered
New Faculty Training
Faculty Mentors
Faculty Evaluations
Funding Opportunities
Internal Funding Opportunities
External Funding Opportunities
University Culture
Conclusion
Faculty Tips on Learning about Your Institution
Part II: The Nuts and Bolts of Success
ch. 4 Teaching
Class Load and Schedule
Course Teams
Syllabus Development
Assessments
Teaching Style
Available Technology and Support
Being Successful
Student Issues
Faculty Expectations
Conclusion
Faculty Tips about Teaching
ch. 5 Research and Scholarly Activity
Release Time
Developing Ideas
Research Agenda
Human Subjects Process
Manuscript Preparation
Presentations
Grant Funding
Being Successful
Collaboration/Outreach
Faculty Expectations
Conclusion
Faculty Tips about Scholarly Activity
ch. 6 Service
Department Service
College Service
University Service
Public School Service
Community Organization Service
Professional Organization Service
Documentation of Service
Being Successful
Faculty Expectations
Conclusion
Faculty Tips about Service
Part III: The Final Steps
ch. 7 Documenting Your Progress
Keeping Track
Developing a Plan
Constant Updates
Documenting your Work
Conclusion
Faculty Tips on Documenting your Progress
ch. 8 Promotion and Tenure
When does Promotion and Tenure Occur?
Preparation for Promotion and Tenure
What do you submit for Promotion and Tenure?
What are the Procedures and Timelines for Promotion and Tenure? What Happens if you are Denied Promotion and Tenure?
Conclusion
Faculty Tips about Promotion and Tenure
ch. 9 Creating A Harmony For Being Successful
Find Your Niche
Focus on your Strengths
Be Realistic
Find a Balance
Conclusion
Faculty Tips on Being Successful
Appendices
Appendix A: University Research Grant Application
Appendix B: Sample Undergraduate Syllabus
Appendix C: Sample Graduate Syllabus
Appendix D: Sample Human Subjects Proposal Form
Appendix E: Sample Human Subjects Reviewer Form
Appendix F: Completed Human Subjects Proposal
Appendix G: Sample Promotion and Tenure Packet
Index
Higher Education Reconsidered: Executing Change to Drive Collective Impact
Additional Info:
Here for Book Review
Abstract: Focuses on the opportunities and challenges of using the science of change to improve the academic enterprise.
This is not another book about why higher education needs to change. This volume is about how to facilitate change. What could higher education achieve if varied stakeholders decided to work together to ...
Here for Book Review
Abstract: Focuses on the opportunities and challenges of using the science of change to improve the academic enterprise.
This is not another book about why higher education needs to change. This volume is about how to facilitate change. What could higher education achieve if varied stakeholders decided to work together to ...
Additional Info:
Here for Book Review
Abstract: Focuses on the opportunities and challenges of using the science of change to improve the academic enterprise.
This is not another book about why higher education needs to change. This volume is about how to facilitate change. What could higher education achieve if varied stakeholders decided to work together to accomplish a shared vision by using data and scaling up evidence-based interventions? The contributors offer examples and instructions to help execute change in order to drive collective impact. When we understand large-scale change in other sectors, such as healthcare, business, and the social sector, it can help inform us of what collective impact looks like and how to get there. A deeper investigation into the science of change will enable us to work towards increasing access, overcoming racial disparities, reducing the need for remediation, and improving learning outcomes. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Illustrations
Foreword: Bringing Collective Impact to Higher Education (Nancy L. Zimpher)
Acknowledgments
Introduction (Jason E. Lane)
ch. 1 Collective Leadership in Higher Education: Moving from Competition to Collaboration to Impact (Jason E. Lane, B. Alex Finsel, and Taya L. Owens)
ch. 2 The Inconvenient Truth about Change Management: Why It Isn’t Working and What to Do about It (Scott Keller and Carolyn Aiken)
ch. 3 From Perpetuation to Innovation: Breaking through Barriers to Change in Higher Education (Jonathan S. Gagliardi)
ch. 4 The Rise of Collective Impact (Jeff Edmondson and Nancy L. Zimpher)
ch. 5 Using Design Thinking to Drive Collective Impact in Higher Education (David J. Weerts, Christopher J. Rasmussen, and Virajita Singh)
ch. 6 The Albany Promise Story: How a Community Came Together to Go All-in on Education Reform (Juliette Price)
ch. 7 What Large-scale Change Looks Like and How to Get There: Theories of Action A conversation (Jeff Edmondson, Jason Helgerson, Danette Howard, James Kvaal, Becky Kanis Margiotta, and Joe McCannon Moderated by David Leonhardt)
Contributors
Index
Here for Book Review
Abstract: Focuses on the opportunities and challenges of using the science of change to improve the academic enterprise.
This is not another book about why higher education needs to change. This volume is about how to facilitate change. What could higher education achieve if varied stakeholders decided to work together to accomplish a shared vision by using data and scaling up evidence-based interventions? The contributors offer examples and instructions to help execute change in order to drive collective impact. When we understand large-scale change in other sectors, such as healthcare, business, and the social sector, it can help inform us of what collective impact looks like and how to get there. A deeper investigation into the science of change will enable us to work towards increasing access, overcoming racial disparities, reducing the need for remediation, and improving learning outcomes. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Illustrations
Foreword: Bringing Collective Impact to Higher Education (Nancy L. Zimpher)
Acknowledgments
Introduction (Jason E. Lane)
ch. 1 Collective Leadership in Higher Education: Moving from Competition to Collaboration to Impact (Jason E. Lane, B. Alex Finsel, and Taya L. Owens)
ch. 2 The Inconvenient Truth about Change Management: Why It Isn’t Working and What to Do about It (Scott Keller and Carolyn Aiken)
ch. 3 From Perpetuation to Innovation: Breaking through Barriers to Change in Higher Education (Jonathan S. Gagliardi)
ch. 4 The Rise of Collective Impact (Jeff Edmondson and Nancy L. Zimpher)
ch. 5 Using Design Thinking to Drive Collective Impact in Higher Education (David J. Weerts, Christopher J. Rasmussen, and Virajita Singh)
ch. 6 The Albany Promise Story: How a Community Came Together to Go All-in on Education Reform (Juliette Price)
ch. 7 What Large-scale Change Looks Like and How to Get There: Theories of Action A conversation (Jeff Edmondson, Jason Helgerson, Danette Howard, James Kvaal, Becky Kanis Margiotta, and Joe McCannon Moderated by David Leonhardt)
Contributors
Index
Diversifying the Faculty: A Guidebook for Search Committees
Additional Info:
This monograph suggests ways in which an institution can diversify its faculty and facilitate the work of the search committee before a candidate ever reaches the interview stage. It outlines a step-by-step process to improve the likelihood of a successful search, and it recommends items to consider after a hire is confirmed to ensure that the new faculty member will be more likely to stay. The sections are: (1) Before the ...
This monograph suggests ways in which an institution can diversify its faculty and facilitate the work of the search committee before a candidate ever reaches the interview stage. It outlines a step-by-step process to improve the likelihood of a successful search, and it recommends items to consider after a hire is confirmed to ensure that the new faculty member will be more likely to stay. The sections are: (1) Before the ...
Additional Info:
This monograph suggests ways in which an institution can diversify its faculty and facilitate the work of the search committee before a candidate ever reaches the interview stage. It outlines a step-by-step process to improve the likelihood of a successful search, and it recommends items to consider after a hire is confirmed to ensure that the new faculty member will be more likely to stay. The sections are: (1) Before the Search Begins; (2) The Search Process; and (3) After the Search. Appendixes contain a checklist of best practices, a list of leading institutions for minority Ph.D.s, a list of baccalaureate institutions identified as producers of numbers of female doctorates; and a list of Web resources of programs for building diverse faculties. An annotated bibliography lists 59 sources for additional information. (Contains 36 references.) (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Part 1 - Before the search begins
Communicating the educational rationale
Aligning departmental and institutional commitments
Creating a welcoming environment
Securing resources
Countering segregated networks
Part 2 - The Search process
Forming the search committee
Educating the search committee on personnel issues
Debunking the myths
Creating the position description
Attracting a diverse candidate pool
Examining hiring biases
Hosting campus visits
Making the offer
Part 3 - After the search
Supporting the new hire
Assessing the search process and outcome
A final note
Appendices
A. Checklist of best practices
B. Leading Ph.D. institutions of minority Ph.D.s, 1993-1997
C. Baccalaureate institutions identified as women doctorate productivity leaders
D. Web resources of programs for building diverse faculties
Notes
References
Annotated Bibliography
This monograph suggests ways in which an institution can diversify its faculty and facilitate the work of the search committee before a candidate ever reaches the interview stage. It outlines a step-by-step process to improve the likelihood of a successful search, and it recommends items to consider after a hire is confirmed to ensure that the new faculty member will be more likely to stay. The sections are: (1) Before the Search Begins; (2) The Search Process; and (3) After the Search. Appendixes contain a checklist of best practices, a list of leading institutions for minority Ph.D.s, a list of baccalaureate institutions identified as producers of numbers of female doctorates; and a list of Web resources of programs for building diverse faculties. An annotated bibliography lists 59 sources for additional information. (Contains 36 references.) (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Part 1 - Before the search begins
Communicating the educational rationale
Aligning departmental and institutional commitments
Creating a welcoming environment
Securing resources
Countering segregated networks
Part 2 - The Search process
Forming the search committee
Educating the search committee on personnel issues
Debunking the myths
Creating the position description
Attracting a diverse candidate pool
Examining hiring biases
Hosting campus visits
Making the offer
Part 3 - After the search
Supporting the new hire
Assessing the search process and outcome
A final note
Appendices
A. Checklist of best practices
B. Leading Ph.D. institutions of minority Ph.D.s, 1993-1997
C. Baccalaureate institutions identified as women doctorate productivity leaders
D. Web resources of programs for building diverse faculties
Notes
References
Annotated Bibliography
Additional Info:
International seminarians seeking an education at academic institutions located in the United States often face a host of learning challenges. Seminary faculty that teach in these institutions are often confronted with a need to adjust their teaching methods to facilitate learning by international students. This essay outlines specific strategies to facilitate academic success of international seminarians by offering specific teaching methods for faculty and learning strategies for international students. Topics ...
International seminarians seeking an education at academic institutions located in the United States often face a host of learning challenges. Seminary faculty that teach in these institutions are often confronted with a need to adjust their teaching methods to facilitate learning by international students. This essay outlines specific strategies to facilitate academic success of international seminarians by offering specific teaching methods for faculty and learning strategies for international students. Topics ...
Additional Info:
International seminarians seeking an education at academic institutions located in the United States often face a host of learning challenges. Seminary faculty that teach in these institutions are often confronted with a need to adjust their teaching methods to facilitate learning by international students. This essay outlines specific strategies to facilitate academic success of international seminarians by offering specific teaching methods for faculty and learning strategies for international students. Topics include training faculty in how to respond to diverse learning styles, expanding learning environments beyond the classroom, methods for enhancing student participation, and development of assignments. Strategies for student success include developing skills in how to improve note taking, critical reading, and writing.
International seminarians seeking an education at academic institutions located in the United States often face a host of learning challenges. Seminary faculty that teach in these institutions are often confronted with a need to adjust their teaching methods to facilitate learning by international students. This essay outlines specific strategies to facilitate academic success of international seminarians by offering specific teaching methods for faculty and learning strategies for international students. Topics include training faculty in how to respond to diverse learning styles, expanding learning environments beyond the classroom, methods for enhancing student participation, and development of assignments. Strategies for student success include developing skills in how to improve note taking, critical reading, and writing.
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
The article discusses the emerging models of mentoring as a vital contribution to a successful academic career. Mentoring has been defined as one-to-one relationship win which an experienced faculty member guides and supports the career development of early-career faculty member and research on faculty development. The article highlights the faculty-development resources which were published since 2000 and offers fresh models, concepts and thinking on mentoring in higher education. The resources provides ...
The article discusses the emerging models of mentoring as a vital contribution to a successful academic career. Mentoring has been defined as one-to-one relationship win which an experienced faculty member guides and supports the career development of early-career faculty member and research on faculty development. The article highlights the faculty-development resources which were published since 2000 and offers fresh models, concepts and thinking on mentoring in higher education. The resources provides ...
Additional Info:
The article discusses the emerging models of mentoring as a vital contribution to a successful academic career. Mentoring has been defined as one-to-one relationship win which an experienced faculty member guides and supports the career development of early-career faculty member and research on faculty development. The article highlights the faculty-development resources which were published since 2000 and offers fresh models, concepts and thinking on mentoring in higher education. The resources provides new conceptualizations of mentoring, recent studies on mentoring, faculty-development programs and practices, and issues on gender and race.
The article discusses the emerging models of mentoring as a vital contribution to a successful academic career. Mentoring has been defined as one-to-one relationship win which an experienced faculty member guides and supports the career development of early-career faculty member and research on faculty development. The article highlights the faculty-development resources which were published since 2000 and offers fresh models, concepts and thinking on mentoring in higher education. The resources provides new conceptualizations of mentoring, recent studies on mentoring, faculty-development programs and practices, and issues on gender and race.
Handbook for Academic Authors, Fourth edition
Additional Info:
This new edition of a common-sense guide to all aspects of academic publishing contains an entirely new chapter on writing nonfiction for a general audience. It has been revised and updated throughout to reflect the state of new technologies and their meaning to authors. (From the Publisher)
This new edition of a common-sense guide to all aspects of academic publishing contains an entirely new chapter on writing nonfiction for a general audience. It has been revised and updated throughout to reflect the state of new technologies and their meaning to authors. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This new edition of a common-sense guide to all aspects of academic publishing contains an entirely new chapter on writing nonfiction for a general audience. It has been revised and updated throughout to reflect the state of new technologies and their meaning to authors. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Illustrations
Preface
Preface to the Second Edition
Preface to the Third Edition
Preface to the Fourth Edition
ch. 1 The Publishing Partnership
ch. 2 Journal Articles
ch. 3 Revising a Dissertation
ch. 4 Finding a Publisher for the Scholarly Book
ch. 5 Working with Your Publisher
ch. 6 Multiauthor Books and Anthologies
ch. 7 Finding a Publisher for the College Textbook
ch. 8 Working with Your Textbook Publisher
ch. 9 Books for General Readers
ch. 10 The Mechanics of Authorship
ch. 11 Costs and Prices
ch. 12 Electronic Publishing
Bibliography
Index
This new edition of a common-sense guide to all aspects of academic publishing contains an entirely new chapter on writing nonfiction for a general audience. It has been revised and updated throughout to reflect the state of new technologies and their meaning to authors. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Illustrations
Preface
Preface to the Second Edition
Preface to the Third Edition
Preface to the Fourth Edition
ch. 1 The Publishing Partnership
ch. 2 Journal Articles
ch. 3 Revising a Dissertation
ch. 4 Finding a Publisher for the Scholarly Book
ch. 5 Working with Your Publisher
ch. 6 Multiauthor Books and Anthologies
ch. 7 Finding a Publisher for the College Textbook
ch. 8 Working with Your Textbook Publisher
ch. 9 Books for General Readers
ch. 10 The Mechanics of Authorship
ch. 11 Costs and Prices
ch. 12 Electronic Publishing
Bibliography
Index
Alternative Solutions to Higher Education’s Challenges: An Appreciative Approach to Reform
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Moving beyond critique, Alternative Solutions to Higher Education’s Challenges uses an appreciative approach to highlight what is working in colleges and universities and offers an examination of how institutions can improve practice. Drawing on examples and cases from real higher education institutions, this book offers a solution-focused framework that challenges ...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Moving beyond critique, Alternative Solutions to Higher Education’s Challenges uses an appreciative approach to highlight what is working in colleges and universities and offers an examination of how institutions can improve practice. Drawing on examples and cases from real higher education institutions, this book offers a solution-focused framework that challenges ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Moving beyond critique, Alternative Solutions to Higher Education’s Challenges uses an appreciative approach to highlight what is working in colleges and universities and offers an examination of how institutions can improve practice. Drawing on examples and cases from real higher education institutions, this book offers a solution-focused framework that challenges the negative assumptions that have plagued higher education. Chapters explore how current narratives have perpetuated and maintained systematic flaws in our education system and have hindered reform. This invaluable resource breaks from the substantial literature that only highlights the many problems facing higher education today, and instead provides alternative strategies and essential recommendations for moving higher education institutions forward. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Developing a Toolbox for Appreciative Approaches to Change
ch. 2 Cultivating Organizational Strengths Through Democratic Leadership
ch. 3 Fostering an Enriching Community Life and Effective Public Service
ch. 4 Centering Institutional Practices Around Meaningful Student Learning
ch. 5 Leveraging Liberal Education to Promote Equal Opportunity
ch. 6 Embracing the Heart in the Head(y) World of Higher Education
ch. 7 Reclaiming Teaching in Person
ch. 8 Moving Forward
References
Index
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Moving beyond critique, Alternative Solutions to Higher Education’s Challenges uses an appreciative approach to highlight what is working in colleges and universities and offers an examination of how institutions can improve practice. Drawing on examples and cases from real higher education institutions, this book offers a solution-focused framework that challenges the negative assumptions that have plagued higher education. Chapters explore how current narratives have perpetuated and maintained systematic flaws in our education system and have hindered reform. This invaluable resource breaks from the substantial literature that only highlights the many problems facing higher education today, and instead provides alternative strategies and essential recommendations for moving higher education institutions forward. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Developing a Toolbox for Appreciative Approaches to Change
ch. 2 Cultivating Organizational Strengths Through Democratic Leadership
ch. 3 Fostering an Enriching Community Life and Effective Public Service
ch. 4 Centering Institutional Practices Around Meaningful Student Learning
ch. 5 Leveraging Liberal Education to Promote Equal Opportunity
ch. 6 Embracing the Heart in the Head(y) World of Higher Education
ch. 7 Reclaiming Teaching in Person
ch. 8 Moving Forward
References
Index
Additional Info:
High-performance mentors are not born. Even experienced educators need training in order to provide constructive support to entry-year teachers. James B. Rowley's mentoring framework has been used to successfully train thousands of teachers to acquire the six essential behaviors of high-performance mentoring: committing, accepting, communicating, coaching, learning, and inspiring.
With more than twenty years of experience in training mentor teachers, Rowley blends real-life stories with established research to help ...
High-performance mentors are not born. Even experienced educators need training in order to provide constructive support to entry-year teachers. James B. Rowley's mentoring framework has been used to successfully train thousands of teachers to acquire the six essential behaviors of high-performance mentoring: committing, accepting, communicating, coaching, learning, and inspiring.
With more than twenty years of experience in training mentor teachers, Rowley blends real-life stories with established research to help ...
Additional Info:
High-performance mentors are not born. Even experienced educators need training in order to provide constructive support to entry-year teachers. James B. Rowley's mentoring framework has been used to successfully train thousands of teachers to acquire the six essential behaviors of high-performance mentoring: committing, accepting, communicating, coaching, learning, and inspiring.
With more than twenty years of experience in training mentor teachers, Rowley blends real-life stories with established research to help readers
* Understand mentoring as a performance continuum with escalating developmental stages
* Improve assessment, communication, and coaching skills
* Reflect on the mentoring process and analyze mentoring relationships
* Utilize mentoring as a pathway to personal and professional growth
Designed for both experienced and novice mentor teachers, this book will also be an enormously useful resource for mentor program coordinators, trainers, staff developers, and principals who want to assure that participants grow in their teaching practice as a result of the mentoring experience.
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 Mentoring
ch. 3 Committing
ch. 4 Accepting
ch. 5 Communicating
ch. 6 Coaching
ch. 7 Learning
ch. 8 Inspiring
High-performance mentors are not born. Even experienced educators need training in order to provide constructive support to entry-year teachers. James B. Rowley's mentoring framework has been used to successfully train thousands of teachers to acquire the six essential behaviors of high-performance mentoring: committing, accepting, communicating, coaching, learning, and inspiring.
With more than twenty years of experience in training mentor teachers, Rowley blends real-life stories with established research to help readers
* Understand mentoring as a performance continuum with escalating developmental stages
* Improve assessment, communication, and coaching skills
* Reflect on the mentoring process and analyze mentoring relationships
* Utilize mentoring as a pathway to personal and professional growth
Designed for both experienced and novice mentor teachers, this book will also be an enormously useful resource for mentor program coordinators, trainers, staff developers, and principals who want to assure that participants grow in their teaching practice as a result of the mentoring experience.
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 Mentoring
ch. 3 Committing
ch. 4 Accepting
ch. 5 Communicating
ch. 6 Coaching
ch. 7 Learning
ch. 8 Inspiring
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Team Teaching in Religious Studies: Editor's Introduction (Ellen Posman, and Reid B. Locklin)
ch. 2 Embodies Religion, Embodied Teaching: Team Teaching "Food Religion" (Norma Baumel Joseph, and Leslie C. Orr)
ch. 3 Brain, Stomach and Soul (Cara Anthony, and Elsie Amel)
ch. 4 Building Interdisciplinary Networks: Team Teaching Benefits for Religious Studies Professors (Melissa Stewart, and Deborah Field)
ch. 5 Jews and Christians Learn from Memoirs: A Collegially Taught Course (Mary C. Boys, and Sarah Tauber)
ch. 6 Team Teaching India's Identities across State and National Borders (Amy L. Allocco, and Brian K. Pennington)
ch. 7 Team Teaching in Religious Studies: Suggested Resources
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Team Teaching in Religious Studies: Editor's Introduction (Ellen Posman, and Reid B. Locklin)
ch. 2 Embodies Religion, Embodied Teaching: Team Teaching "Food Religion" (Norma Baumel Joseph, and Leslie C. Orr)
ch. 3 Brain, Stomach and Soul (Cara Anthony, and Elsie Amel)
ch. 4 Building Interdisciplinary Networks: Team Teaching Benefits for Religious Studies Professors (Melissa Stewart, and Deborah Field)
ch. 5 Jews and Christians Learn from Memoirs: A Collegially Taught Course (Mary C. Boys, and Sarah Tauber)
ch. 6 Team Teaching India's Identities across State and National Borders (Amy L. Allocco, and Brian K. Pennington)
ch. 7 Team Teaching in Religious Studies: Suggested Resources
Additional Info:
1. They are value-driven. 2. They are connected to the world around them. 3. They require solitude and quiet. 4. They pace themselves. 5. They have contact with nature. 6. They are creative and playful. 7. They are adaptive to change. 8. They learn from down-time. 9. They are always in training. 10. They are future-oriented.
1. They are value-driven. 2. They are connected to the world around them. 3. They require solitude and quiet. 4. They pace themselves. 5. They have contact with nature. 6. They are creative and playful. 7. They are adaptive to change. 8. They learn from down-time. 9. They are always in training. 10. They are future-oriented.
Additional Info:
1. They are value-driven. 2. They are connected to the world around them. 3. They require solitude and quiet. 4. They pace themselves. 5. They have contact with nature. 6. They are creative and playful. 7. They are adaptive to change. 8. They learn from down-time. 9. They are always in training. 10. They are future-oriented.
1. They are value-driven. 2. They are connected to the world around them. 3. They require solitude and quiet. 4. They pace themselves. 5. They have contact with nature. 6. They are creative and playful. 7. They are adaptive to change. 8. They learn from down-time. 9. They are always in training. 10. They are future-oriented.
Faculty Mentoring: A Practical Manual for Mentors, Mentees, Administrators, and Faculty Developers
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Faculty mentoring programs greatly benefit the institutions that have instituted them, and are effective in attracting and retaining good faculty.
Prospective faculty members commonly ask about mentoring at on-campus interviews, and indicate that it is a consideration when choosing a position. Mentoring programs also increase the retention rate of ...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Faculty mentoring programs greatly benefit the institutions that have instituted them, and are effective in attracting and retaining good faculty.
Prospective faculty members commonly ask about mentoring at on-campus interviews, and indicate that it is a consideration when choosing a position. Mentoring programs also increase the retention rate of ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Faculty mentoring programs greatly benefit the institutions that have instituted them, and are effective in attracting and retaining good faculty.
Prospective faculty members commonly ask about mentoring at on-campus interviews, and indicate that it is a consideration when choosing a position. Mentoring programs also increase the retention rate of junior faculty, greatly reducing recruitment costs, and particularly help integrate women, minority and international faculty members into the institution, while providing all new hires with an orientation to the culture, mission and identity of the college or university.
The book provides step-by-step guidelines for setting up, planning, and facilitating mentoring programs for new faculty members, whether one-on-one, or using a successful group model developed and refined over twenty-five years by the authors. While it offers detailed guidance on instituting such programs at the departmental level, it also makes the case for establishing school or institutional level programs, and delineates the considerable benefits and economies of scale these can achieve.
The authors provide guidance for mentors and mentees on developing group mentoring and individual mentor / protégé relationships – the corresponding chapters being available online for separate purchase; as well as detailed outlines and advice to department chairs, administrators and facilitators on how to establish and conduct institution-wide group mentoring programs, and apply or modify the material to meet their specific needs.
For training and faculty development purposes, we also offer two chapters as individual e-booklets. Each respectively provides a succinct summary of the roles and expectations of the roles of Mentor and Mentee.
Faculty Mentoring / Mentor Guide
The booklets are affordably priced, and intended for individual purchase by mentors and mentees, and are only available through our Web site. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Milton D. Cox)
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Overview and Purpose of the Manual
ch. 1 Tips for Mentors Inside or Outside the Department
ch. 2 Guidelines for Setting Up, Planning, and Facilitating a Mentoring Group
ch. 3 New Faculty Tips on Having a Successful Mentoring Experience
ch. 4 Tips for Guidance of Departmental Mentoring
ch. 5 Guidelines for Administrators
ch. 6 Advice for the Director of a Faculty Mentoring Program
ch. 7 Review of Mentoring in the Higher Education Literature
Appendices
Appendix A: Book and Web Resources
Appendix B: Relationship-Building Exercises
Appendix C: Active Mentoring Worksheets
Appendix D: Closure Activities
Appendix E: Group Mentoring Materials
Appendix F: Program Implementation Materials
Appendix G: Program Assessment Materials
Appendix H: Department-Level Materials
Appendix I: Sample Program Documents
About the Authors
Index
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Faculty mentoring programs greatly benefit the institutions that have instituted them, and are effective in attracting and retaining good faculty.
Prospective faculty members commonly ask about mentoring at on-campus interviews, and indicate that it is a consideration when choosing a position. Mentoring programs also increase the retention rate of junior faculty, greatly reducing recruitment costs, and particularly help integrate women, minority and international faculty members into the institution, while providing all new hires with an orientation to the culture, mission and identity of the college or university.
The book provides step-by-step guidelines for setting up, planning, and facilitating mentoring programs for new faculty members, whether one-on-one, or using a successful group model developed and refined over twenty-five years by the authors. While it offers detailed guidance on instituting such programs at the departmental level, it also makes the case for establishing school or institutional level programs, and delineates the considerable benefits and economies of scale these can achieve.
The authors provide guidance for mentors and mentees on developing group mentoring and individual mentor / protégé relationships – the corresponding chapters being available online for separate purchase; as well as detailed outlines and advice to department chairs, administrators and facilitators on how to establish and conduct institution-wide group mentoring programs, and apply or modify the material to meet their specific needs.
For training and faculty development purposes, we also offer two chapters as individual e-booklets. Each respectively provides a succinct summary of the roles and expectations of the roles of Mentor and Mentee.
Faculty Mentoring / Mentor Guide
The booklets are affordably priced, and intended for individual purchase by mentors and mentees, and are only available through our Web site. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Milton D. Cox)
Acknowledgments
Introduction: Overview and Purpose of the Manual
ch. 1 Tips for Mentors Inside or Outside the Department
ch. 2 Guidelines for Setting Up, Planning, and Facilitating a Mentoring Group
ch. 3 New Faculty Tips on Having a Successful Mentoring Experience
ch. 4 Tips for Guidance of Departmental Mentoring
ch. 5 Guidelines for Administrators
ch. 6 Advice for the Director of a Faculty Mentoring Program
ch. 7 Review of Mentoring in the Higher Education Literature
Appendices
Appendix A: Book and Web Resources
Appendix B: Relationship-Building Exercises
Appendix C: Active Mentoring Worksheets
Appendix D: Closure Activities
Appendix E: Group Mentoring Materials
Appendix F: Program Implementation Materials
Appendix G: Program Assessment Materials
Appendix H: Department-Level Materials
Appendix I: Sample Program Documents
About the Authors
Index
Additional Info:
An early demonstration of the value to teachers (and students) of writing the scholarship of teaching (SoTL) by defining a challenge to classroom learning, a “problem” to be investigated (much as we define a problem for our guild research to address) – in this case: learning goals and student pre-knowledge.
An early demonstration of the value to teachers (and students) of writing the scholarship of teaching (SoTL) by defining a challenge to classroom learning, a “problem” to be investigated (much as we define a problem for our guild research to address) – in this case: learning goals and student pre-knowledge.
Additional Info:
An early demonstration of the value to teachers (and students) of writing the scholarship of teaching (SoTL) by defining a challenge to classroom learning, a “problem” to be investigated (much as we define a problem for our guild research to address) – in this case: learning goals and student pre-knowledge.
An early demonstration of the value to teachers (and students) of writing the scholarship of teaching (SoTL) by defining a challenge to classroom learning, a “problem” to be investigated (much as we define a problem for our guild research to address) – in this case: learning goals and student pre-knowledge.
Additional Info:
Contact the Ideas Center for a pdf. Techniques for observing the classroom behavior of teachers and students are examined. These techniques provide a framework for analyzing and understanding classroom interaction, for making decisions about what should be happening, and for changing instructional behavior when it is necessary. The observation methods allow collection, analysis, and presentation of accurate, objective, useful, and persuasive data. Persuasive data contain no value judgments. One method ...
Contact the Ideas Center for a pdf. Techniques for observing the classroom behavior of teachers and students are examined. These techniques provide a framework for analyzing and understanding classroom interaction, for making decisions about what should be happening, and for changing instructional behavior when it is necessary. The observation methods allow collection, analysis, and presentation of accurate, objective, useful, and persuasive data. Persuasive data contain no value judgments. One method ...
Additional Info:
Contact the Ideas Center for a pdf. Techniques for observing the classroom behavior of teachers and students are examined. These techniques provide a framework for analyzing and understanding classroom interaction, for making decisions about what should be happening, and for changing instructional behavior when it is necessary. The observation methods allow collection, analysis, and presentation of accurate, objective, useful, and persuasive data. Persuasive data contain no value judgments. One method is the selective verbatim technique, which involves having the observer record what is actually said within the confines of a category previously specified by the teacher. Some common categories for selective verbatim include: teacher questions, teacher responses to student statements, teacher directions and assignments, teacher responses to questions, verbal mannerisms, teacher reward and praise statements, teacher criticism, student responses to teacher questions, student questions, and student initiated statements. Examples are presented as illustration. A seating chart can be the basis for several types of informal records about the teachers' and students' classroom behavior. It is primarily used to measure nonverbal behavior, but it is sometimes useful for measuring verbal behavior. The basic element is a diagram, examples of which are included. Seating charts are useful for analyzing "at task" behavior: data indicating whether or not individual students were engaged in the task or tasks the teacher indicated were appropriate. A verbal flow chart is one way of analyzing how classroom procedures inhibit, encourage, or allow students to participate in classroom interactions. A list of common teaching activities and a technique for recording them for analysis is included.
Contact the Ideas Center for a pdf. Techniques for observing the classroom behavior of teachers and students are examined. These techniques provide a framework for analyzing and understanding classroom interaction, for making decisions about what should be happening, and for changing instructional behavior when it is necessary. The observation methods allow collection, analysis, and presentation of accurate, objective, useful, and persuasive data. Persuasive data contain no value judgments. One method is the selective verbatim technique, which involves having the observer record what is actually said within the confines of a category previously specified by the teacher. Some common categories for selective verbatim include: teacher questions, teacher responses to student statements, teacher directions and assignments, teacher responses to questions, verbal mannerisms, teacher reward and praise statements, teacher criticism, student responses to teacher questions, student questions, and student initiated statements. Examples are presented as illustration. A seating chart can be the basis for several types of informal records about the teachers' and students' classroom behavior. It is primarily used to measure nonverbal behavior, but it is sometimes useful for measuring verbal behavior. The basic element is a diagram, examples of which are included. Seating charts are useful for analyzing "at task" behavior: data indicating whether or not individual students were engaged in the task or tasks the teacher indicated were appropriate. A verbal flow chart is one way of analyzing how classroom procedures inhibit, encourage, or allow students to participate in classroom interactions. A list of common teaching activities and a technique for recording them for analysis is included.
The Effective, Efficient Professor: Teaching Scholarship and Service
Additional Info:
The Effective, Efficient Professor: Teaching, Scholarship and Service develops methods to improve the proficiency and time management skills of faculty in all areas of their careers. Most faculty are discipline experts but have not studied methods to improve their teaching, scholarship or service. This book applies efficiency and time management methods to academe. Throughout the book, the author shows how student learning and academic productivity can be improved by being ...
The Effective, Efficient Professor: Teaching, Scholarship and Service develops methods to improve the proficiency and time management skills of faculty in all areas of their careers. Most faculty are discipline experts but have not studied methods to improve their teaching, scholarship or service. This book applies efficiency and time management methods to academe. Throughout the book, the author shows how student learning and academic productivity can be improved by being ...
Additional Info:
The Effective, Efficient Professor: Teaching, Scholarship and Service develops methods to improve the proficiency and time management skills of faculty in all areas of their careers. Most faculty are discipline experts but have not studied methods to improve their teaching, scholarship or service. This book applies efficiency and time management methods to academe. Throughout the book, the author shows how student learning and academic productivity can be improved by being aware of effective time management techniques. A variety of efficient and effective teaching methods are explored. Scholarship, service, and working with graduate students are also discussed. This book will help college faculty at all levels of instruction take charge of their careers! For college professors in all disciplines. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Figures and Tables
Preface
Introduction: Effectiveness and Efficiency in Academe
Pt. 1Time Management Techniques for Academics
ch. 1 Missions, Goals, and Activities
ch. 2 Applying Time Management Methods
Pt. Effective and Efficient Teaching
ch. 3 Teaching and Learning
ch. 4 Lecture-Style Classes
ch. 5 Problem-Oriented Learning
ch. 6 Rapport with Students and Advising
Pt. Effective, Efficient Students
ch. 7 Undergraduates
ch. 8 Graduate Students and Graduate Programs
Pt. Scholarship and Service
ch. 9 Scholarship and Writing: Still the Path to Fame and Promotion
ch. 10 Service and Administration: Citizenship in the Institution
ch. 11 Closure: Making Changes
References
Index
The Effective, Efficient Professor: Teaching, Scholarship and Service develops methods to improve the proficiency and time management skills of faculty in all areas of their careers. Most faculty are discipline experts but have not studied methods to improve their teaching, scholarship or service. This book applies efficiency and time management methods to academe. Throughout the book, the author shows how student learning and academic productivity can be improved by being aware of effective time management techniques. A variety of efficient and effective teaching methods are explored. Scholarship, service, and working with graduate students are also discussed. This book will help college faculty at all levels of instruction take charge of their careers! For college professors in all disciplines. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Figures and Tables
Preface
Introduction: Effectiveness and Efficiency in Academe
Pt. 1Time Management Techniques for Academics
ch. 1 Missions, Goals, and Activities
ch. 2 Applying Time Management Methods
Pt. Effective and Efficient Teaching
ch. 3 Teaching and Learning
ch. 4 Lecture-Style Classes
ch. 5 Problem-Oriented Learning
ch. 6 Rapport with Students and Advising
Pt. Effective, Efficient Students
ch. 7 Undergraduates
ch. 8 Graduate Students and Graduate Programs
Pt. Scholarship and Service
ch. 9 Scholarship and Writing: Still the Path to Fame and Promotion
ch. 10 Service and Administration: Citizenship in the Institution
ch. 11 Closure: Making Changes
References
Index
Getting It Published: A Guide for Scholars and Anyone Else Serious about Serious Books
Additional Info:
Germano's short volume is filled with useful advice drawn from a career as editor at an academic press (formerly editor-in-chief and humanities editor at Columbia UP, he's now vice president and publishing director at Routledge) and written in an admirably direct style that preserves a personal tone that will appeal to the recent PhD's and new authors who will be his best audience. The gamut of publishing is covered, from ...
Germano's short volume is filled with useful advice drawn from a career as editor at an academic press (formerly editor-in-chief and humanities editor at Columbia UP, he's now vice president and publishing director at Routledge) and written in an admirably direct style that preserves a personal tone that will appeal to the recent PhD's and new authors who will be his best audience. The gamut of publishing is covered, from ...
Additional Info:
Germano's short volume is filled with useful advice drawn from a career as editor at an academic press (formerly editor-in-chief and humanities editor at Columbia UP, he's now vice president and publishing director at Routledge) and written in an admirably direct style that preserves a personal tone that will appeal to the recent PhD's and new authors who will be his best audience. The gamut of publishing is covered, from basics on publishers and their duties, to the details of writing, editing, and presenting a proposal; surviving the review process; the details of contracts; writing for collections and anthologies; and how to present the finished manuscript. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 What Do Publishers Do?
ch. 3 Writing the Manuscript
ch. 4 Selecting a Publisher
ch. 5 Your Proposal
ch. 6 What Editors Look For
ch. 7 Surviving the Review Process
ch. 8 What a Contract Means
ch. 9 Collections and Anthologies
ch. 10 Quotations, Pictures, and Other Headaches
ch. 11 How to Deliver a Manuscript
ch. 12 And Then What Happens to It
ch. 13 This Book - And the Next
For Further Reading
Index
Germano's short volume is filled with useful advice drawn from a career as editor at an academic press (formerly editor-in-chief and humanities editor at Columbia UP, he's now vice president and publishing director at Routledge) and written in an admirably direct style that preserves a personal tone that will appeal to the recent PhD's and new authors who will be his best audience. The gamut of publishing is covered, from basics on publishers and their duties, to the details of writing, editing, and presenting a proposal; surviving the review process; the details of contracts; writing for collections and anthologies; and how to present the finished manuscript. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 What Do Publishers Do?
ch. 3 Writing the Manuscript
ch. 4 Selecting a Publisher
ch. 5 Your Proposal
ch. 6 What Editors Look For
ch. 7 Surviving the Review Process
ch. 8 What a Contract Means
ch. 9 Collections and Anthologies
ch. 10 Quotations, Pictures, and Other Headaches
ch. 11 How to Deliver a Manuscript
ch. 12 And Then What Happens to It
ch. 13 This Book - And the Next
For Further Reading
Index
Leading from the Center: The Emerging Role of the Chief Academic Officer in Theological Schools
Additional Info:
Presents the results of a research study which surveyed the state of the deans of 75 percent of North American theological schools. The study profiles, who the deans are the types of work that they due, and their role in the administration and governance of schools. Reasons for high turnover are explored and recommendations are made to help schools encourage and develop leadership qualities in academic deans. (From the Publisher)
Presents the results of a research study which surveyed the state of the deans of 75 percent of North American theological schools. The study profiles, who the deans are the types of work that they due, and their role in the administration and governance of schools. Reasons for high turnover are explored and recommendations are made to help schools encourage and develop leadership qualities in academic deans. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Presents the results of a research study which surveyed the state of the deans of 75 percent of North American theological schools. The study profiles, who the deans are the types of work that they due, and their role in the administration and governance of schools. Reasons for high turnover are explored and recommendations are made to help schools encourage and develop leadership qualities in academic deans. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Part One: Roles, Responsibilities, and Relationships
ch. 1 The Nature and Scope of the Dean's Work
ch. 2 Managerial and Leadership Roles
ch. 3 The Dean-President Relationship
ch. 4 The Dean-Faculty Relationship
ch. 5 The Dean's Work with Senior Administrators, Boards, and Church Leaders
Part Two: Administration as a Vocation
ch. 6 Recruitment and Hiring of Chief Academic Officers
ch. 7 Evaluation and Professional Development
ch. 8 Academic Leadership: The Challenges Ahead
Afterword Advice to Prospective Deans
Appendices
Acknowledgements
Index
Presents the results of a research study which surveyed the state of the deans of 75 percent of North American theological schools. The study profiles, who the deans are the types of work that they due, and their role in the administration and governance of schools. Reasons for high turnover are explored and recommendations are made to help schools encourage and develop leadership qualities in academic deans. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Part One: Roles, Responsibilities, and Relationships
ch. 1 The Nature and Scope of the Dean's Work
ch. 2 Managerial and Leadership Roles
ch. 3 The Dean-President Relationship
ch. 4 The Dean-Faculty Relationship
ch. 5 The Dean's Work with Senior Administrators, Boards, and Church Leaders
Part Two: Administration as a Vocation
ch. 6 Recruitment and Hiring of Chief Academic Officers
ch. 7 Evaluation and Professional Development
ch. 8 Academic Leadership: The Challenges Ahead
Afterword Advice to Prospective Deans
Appendices
Acknowledgements
Index
Additional Info:
Research, teaching, service, and public outreach — all are aspects of being a tenured professor. But this list of responsibilities is missing a central component: actual scholarly learning — disciplinary knowledge that faculty teach, explore in research, and share with the academic community. How do professors pursue such learning when they must give their attention as well to administrative and other obligations?
Professing to Learn explores university professors' scholarly growth ...
Research, teaching, service, and public outreach — all are aspects of being a tenured professor. But this list of responsibilities is missing a central component: actual scholarly learning — disciplinary knowledge that faculty teach, explore in research, and share with the academic community. How do professors pursue such learning when they must give their attention as well to administrative and other obligations?
Professing to Learn explores university professors' scholarly growth ...
Additional Info:
Research, teaching, service, and public outreach — all are aspects of being a tenured professor. But this list of responsibilities is missing a central component: actual scholarly learning — disciplinary knowledge that faculty teach, explore in research, and share with the academic community. How do professors pursue such learning when they must give their attention as well to administrative and other obligations?
Professing to Learn explores university professors' scholarly growth and learning in the years immediately following the award of tenure, a crucial period that has a lasting impact on the academic career. Some launch from this point to multiple accomplishments and accolades, while others falter, their academic pursuits stalled. What contributes to these different outcomes?
Drawing on interviews with seventy-eight professors in diverse disciplines and fields at five major American research universities, Anna Neumann describes how tenured faculty shape and disseminate their own disciplinary knowledge while attending committee meetings, grading exams, holding office hours, administering programs and departments, and negotiating with colleagues. By exploring the intellectual activities pursued by these faculty and their ongoing efforts to develop and define their academic interests, Professing to Learn directs the attention of higher education professionals and policy makers to the core aim of higher education: the creation of academic knowledge through research, teaching, and service. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
1. Into the Middle: Mapping the Early Post-Tenure Career in the Research University
2. The Heart of the Matter: Passionate Thought and Scholarly Learning
3. Mindwork: What and How Professors Strive to Learn
4. Location: Where Professors Purse Their Scholarly Learning
5. Becoming Strategic: Recently Tenured University Professors as Agents of Scholarly Learning
6. Organizing to Learn: What Universities Provide for Professors' Scholarly Learning
7. The Middle Remapped: Toward an Ecology of Learning in the Early Post-Tenure Career
Appendix A: Study Designs and Background Data
Appendix B: Interview Protocols and Consent Forms for the Four Universities Project
Appendix C: Framework: University Professors' Scholarly Learning
Notes
Bibliography
Index
Research, teaching, service, and public outreach — all are aspects of being a tenured professor. But this list of responsibilities is missing a central component: actual scholarly learning — disciplinary knowledge that faculty teach, explore in research, and share with the academic community. How do professors pursue such learning when they must give their attention as well to administrative and other obligations?
Professing to Learn explores university professors' scholarly growth and learning in the years immediately following the award of tenure, a crucial period that has a lasting impact on the academic career. Some launch from this point to multiple accomplishments and accolades, while others falter, their academic pursuits stalled. What contributes to these different outcomes?
Drawing on interviews with seventy-eight professors in diverse disciplines and fields at five major American research universities, Anna Neumann describes how tenured faculty shape and disseminate their own disciplinary knowledge while attending committee meetings, grading exams, holding office hours, administering programs and departments, and negotiating with colleagues. By exploring the intellectual activities pursued by these faculty and their ongoing efforts to develop and define their academic interests, Professing to Learn directs the attention of higher education professionals and policy makers to the core aim of higher education: the creation of academic knowledge through research, teaching, and service. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Introduction
1. Into the Middle: Mapping the Early Post-Tenure Career in the Research University
2. The Heart of the Matter: Passionate Thought and Scholarly Learning
3. Mindwork: What and How Professors Strive to Learn
4. Location: Where Professors Purse Their Scholarly Learning
5. Becoming Strategic: Recently Tenured University Professors as Agents of Scholarly Learning
6. Organizing to Learn: What Universities Provide for Professors' Scholarly Learning
7. The Middle Remapped: Toward an Ecology of Learning in the Early Post-Tenure Career
Appendix A: Study Designs and Background Data
Appendix B: Interview Protocols and Consent Forms for the Four Universities Project
Appendix C: Framework: University Professors' Scholarly Learning
Notes
Bibliography
Index
Academic Leadership: A Study of Chief Academic Officers in Theological Schools
Additional Info:
The monographs collected in this volume are based on research into the role of chief academic officers in North American theological schools. (From the Publisher)
The monographs collected in this volume are based on research into the role of chief academic officers in North American theological schools. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
The monographs collected in this volume are based on research into the role of chief academic officers in North American theological schools. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Leading from the center : the role of the chief academic officer / by Jeanne P. McLean
ch. 2 Challenges of academic administration : rewards and stresses in the role of the chief academic officer / by Karen M. Ristau
ch. 3 Career paths and hiring practices of chief academic officers in theological schools / by Mary Abdul-Rahman
ch. 4 Professional development for chief academic officers / by Jeanne P. McLean
ch. 5 Dean-faculty relationships / by Jeanne P. McLean with Nicholas Cafarelli
The monographs collected in this volume are based on research into the role of chief academic officers in North American theological schools. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Leading from the center : the role of the chief academic officer / by Jeanne P. McLean
ch. 2 Challenges of academic administration : rewards and stresses in the role of the chief academic officer / by Karen M. Ristau
ch. 3 Career paths and hiring practices of chief academic officers in theological schools / by Mary Abdul-Rahman
ch. 4 Professional development for chief academic officers / by Jeanne P. McLean
ch. 5 Dean-faculty relationships / by Jeanne P. McLean with Nicholas Cafarelli
We're Losing Our Minds: Rethinking American Higher Education
Additional Info:
America is being held back by the quality and quantity of learning in college. This is a true educational emergency! Many college graduates cannot think critically, write effectively, solve problems, understand complex issues, or meet employers' expectations. We are losing our minds—and endangering our social, economic, and scientific leadership. Critics say higher education costs too much and should be more efficient. But the real problem is value, not cost; ...
America is being held back by the quality and quantity of learning in college. This is a true educational emergency! Many college graduates cannot think critically, write effectively, solve problems, understand complex issues, or meet employers' expectations. We are losing our minds—and endangering our social, economic, and scientific leadership. Critics say higher education costs too much and should be more efficient. But the real problem is value, not cost; ...
Additional Info:
America is being held back by the quality and quantity of learning in college. This is a true educational emergency! Many college graduates cannot think critically, write effectively, solve problems, understand complex issues, or meet employers' expectations. We are losing our minds—and endangering our social, economic, and scientific leadership. Critics say higher education costs too much and should be more efficient. But the real problem is value, not cost; financial 'solutions' alone won't work. In this book, Keeling and Hersh argue that the only solution - making learning the highest priority in college - demands fundamental change throughout higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgements
ch.1 Higher Education Without Higher Learning
ch. 2 Judging College Quality
ch. 3 The Developmental Basis of Higher Learning
ch. 4 The Neuroscience of Learning
ch. 5 Assessment for Higher Learning
ch. 6 More is Not Better, Better is More: A Framework for Rethinking American Higher Education
ch. 7 Talk of Change is Not Change: Rethinking American Higher Education
Notes
Index
America is being held back by the quality and quantity of learning in college. This is a true educational emergency! Many college graduates cannot think critically, write effectively, solve problems, understand complex issues, or meet employers' expectations. We are losing our minds—and endangering our social, economic, and scientific leadership. Critics say higher education costs too much and should be more efficient. But the real problem is value, not cost; financial 'solutions' alone won't work. In this book, Keeling and Hersh argue that the only solution - making learning the highest priority in college - demands fundamental change throughout higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgements
ch.1 Higher Education Without Higher Learning
ch. 2 Judging College Quality
ch. 3 The Developmental Basis of Higher Learning
ch. 4 The Neuroscience of Learning
ch. 5 Assessment for Higher Learning
ch. 6 More is Not Better, Better is More: A Framework for Rethinking American Higher Education
ch. 7 Talk of Change is Not Change: Rethinking American Higher Education
Notes
Index
Additional Info:
Adjuncts have become the lifeline of a vast majority of colleges and universities. They teach many of the foundation and core courses taken by first and second year students, they teach professional courses in which their own life experiences are invaluable, and they step in on short notice to fill in for regular faculty engaged in research or away on sabbaticals.
A survey of over 4,000 institutions conducted by ...
Adjuncts have become the lifeline of a vast majority of colleges and universities. They teach many of the foundation and core courses taken by first and second year students, they teach professional courses in which their own life experiences are invaluable, and they step in on short notice to fill in for regular faculty engaged in research or away on sabbaticals.
A survey of over 4,000 institutions conducted by ...
Additional Info:
Adjuncts have become the lifeline of a vast majority of colleges and universities. They teach many of the foundation and core courses taken by first and second year students, they teach professional courses in which their own life experiences are invaluable, and they step in on short notice to fill in for regular faculty engaged in research or away on sabbaticals.
A survey of over 4,000 institutions conducted by the US Department of Education reveals that adjuncts are being hired at a much higher rate than full-time faculty. This is due partly to increased enrollment, partly to reduced budgets, partly as a deliberate administrative strategy, and partly to convenience.
The importance of adjuncts to the college or university cannot be overstated. This book provides academic administrators and faculty developers with proactive, practical and results-producing approaches that can help transform fragmented faculties into inclusive and cohesive teaching and scholarly communities.
Structured in an easy-to-follow, practical format, this book provides an invaluable resource of thoughtful and pragmatic approaches to ensure the both quality and satisfaction on the part of the institution and the adjuncts. Topics are presented in a thematic sequence that allows decision-makers to focus on their priority areas; guidance is provided for systematic planning and implementation.
The contents focus on connecting adjunct faculty to core institutional functions and structures: Connection #1 - To The Institution; Connection #2 - To The Department; Connection #3 - To The Profession & The Discipline; Connection #4 - To Teaching; Connection #5 - To Students; Connection #6 - To Scholarship. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Connection 1 To the institution : steps in creating an inclusive teaching community
ch. 2 Connection 2 To the department : steps in developing a collegial community
ch. 3 Connection 3 To teaching : steps in enhancing a culture of quality teaching
ch. 4 Connection 4 To students : steps in fostering and sustaining a supporting learning environment
ch. 5 Connection 5 To scholarship : nurturing the whole professional - teacher and scholar
Adjuncts have become the lifeline of a vast majority of colleges and universities. They teach many of the foundation and core courses taken by first and second year students, they teach professional courses in which their own life experiences are invaluable, and they step in on short notice to fill in for regular faculty engaged in research or away on sabbaticals.
A survey of over 4,000 institutions conducted by the US Department of Education reveals that adjuncts are being hired at a much higher rate than full-time faculty. This is due partly to increased enrollment, partly to reduced budgets, partly as a deliberate administrative strategy, and partly to convenience.
The importance of adjuncts to the college or university cannot be overstated. This book provides academic administrators and faculty developers with proactive, practical and results-producing approaches that can help transform fragmented faculties into inclusive and cohesive teaching and scholarly communities.
Structured in an easy-to-follow, practical format, this book provides an invaluable resource of thoughtful and pragmatic approaches to ensure the both quality and satisfaction on the part of the institution and the adjuncts. Topics are presented in a thematic sequence that allows decision-makers to focus on their priority areas; guidance is provided for systematic planning and implementation.
The contents focus on connecting adjunct faculty to core institutional functions and structures: Connection #1 - To The Institution; Connection #2 - To The Department; Connection #3 - To The Profession & The Discipline; Connection #4 - To Teaching; Connection #5 - To Students; Connection #6 - To Scholarship. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Connection 1 To the institution : steps in creating an inclusive teaching community
ch. 2 Connection 2 To the department : steps in developing a collegial community
ch. 3 Connection 3 To teaching : steps in enhancing a culture of quality teaching
ch. 4 Connection 4 To students : steps in fostering and sustaining a supporting learning environment
ch. 5 Connection 5 To scholarship : nurturing the whole professional - teacher and scholar
Working Theories for Teaching Assistant Development
Additional Info:
This extensive, edited volume showcases established and emerging scholars in the field of Teaching Assistant (TA) and International Teaching Assistant (ITA) education. Working Theories goes beyond reporting good practices or program descriptions, which typically comprises many books on TA and ITA development. Instead, Working Theories places time-tested, robust theories, frameworks, and models of TA and ITA learning and development at the center of graduate student education by providing a scholarly ...
This extensive, edited volume showcases established and emerging scholars in the field of Teaching Assistant (TA) and International Teaching Assistant (ITA) education. Working Theories goes beyond reporting good practices or program descriptions, which typically comprises many books on TA and ITA development. Instead, Working Theories places time-tested, robust theories, frameworks, and models of TA and ITA learning and development at the center of graduate student education by providing a scholarly ...
Additional Info:
This extensive, edited volume showcases established and emerging scholars in the field of Teaching Assistant (TA) and International Teaching Assistant (ITA) education. Working Theories goes beyond reporting good practices or program descriptions, which typically comprises many books on TA and ITA development. Instead, Working Theories places time-tested, robust theories, frameworks, and models of TA and ITA learning and development at the center of graduate student education by providing a scholarly venue for description, explication, and application of these theories. In turn, these theories and models from psychology, sociology, pedagogy, discourse analysis, and second language learning will be presented in such as way as to inform good practice, but above all, motivate future research. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Organization of the Volume
Part One - Chapters Focusing on Teaching Assistants in General
ch. 1 Scalable Design Principles for TA Development: Lessons from Research, Theory and Experience
ch. 2 The Role of Theory in TA and ITA Research
ch. 3 Feedback about Graduate Teaching Assistants’ Pedagogical Practices: Content Validation of a Survey Informed from Principles of the “How People Learn” Framework
ch. 4 A Theoretical and Empirical Basis for Studying Student-Instructor Relationships
ch. 5 Teaching Assistant Development Through a Fresh Lens: A Self-determination Framework
ch. 6 Preparing the Future Professoriate in Second Language Acquisition
ch. 7 The Development of Disciplinary Communication Competence Among Teaching Assistants: A Research Agenda
ch. 8 Using Grounded Theory to Develop Emergent Explanations on how Second and Foreign Language TAs Construct Their Teacher Theory
ch. 9 Conceptualizing Graduate Teaching Assistant Development Through Stages of Concern
ch. 10 Appropriating Conceptual and Pedagogical Tools of Literacy
ch. 11 Does Instruction Make a Difference? Concept Development in Applied Linguistics M.A. Students
Part Two - Articles Focusing More Exclusively on International Teaching Assistants
ch. 12 Rapport Management of International Teaching Assistants in Their Teaching
ch. 13 A Microethnographic Case Study of Fulbright Language Teaching Assistants
ch. 14 The Roles of Teacher Theory and Domain Theory in Materials and Research in International Teaching Assistant Education
ch. 15 The Instructional Discourse of Domestic and International Teaching Assistants
ch. 16 Written English into Spoken: A Functional Discourse Analysis of American, Indian, and Chinese TA Presentations
ch. 17 The Washback of a Task-based Test of Spoken Language on the Development of ITAs Strategic Compentence
ch. 18 Chinese International Teaching Assistants and the Essence of Intercultural Competence in University Contexts
ch. 19 Learning to Make Suggestions in a Chemistry Lab
ch. 20 Conversation Analysis of the Classroom Communication of a Math ITA
This extensive, edited volume showcases established and emerging scholars in the field of Teaching Assistant (TA) and International Teaching Assistant (ITA) education. Working Theories goes beyond reporting good practices or program descriptions, which typically comprises many books on TA and ITA development. Instead, Working Theories places time-tested, robust theories, frameworks, and models of TA and ITA learning and development at the center of graduate student education by providing a scholarly venue for description, explication, and application of these theories. In turn, these theories and models from psychology, sociology, pedagogy, discourse analysis, and second language learning will be presented in such as way as to inform good practice, but above all, motivate future research. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Organization of the Volume
Part One - Chapters Focusing on Teaching Assistants in General
ch. 1 Scalable Design Principles for TA Development: Lessons from Research, Theory and Experience
ch. 2 The Role of Theory in TA and ITA Research
ch. 3 Feedback about Graduate Teaching Assistants’ Pedagogical Practices: Content Validation of a Survey Informed from Principles of the “How People Learn” Framework
ch. 4 A Theoretical and Empirical Basis for Studying Student-Instructor Relationships
ch. 5 Teaching Assistant Development Through a Fresh Lens: A Self-determination Framework
ch. 6 Preparing the Future Professoriate in Second Language Acquisition
ch. 7 The Development of Disciplinary Communication Competence Among Teaching Assistants: A Research Agenda
ch. 8 Using Grounded Theory to Develop Emergent Explanations on how Second and Foreign Language TAs Construct Their Teacher Theory
ch. 9 Conceptualizing Graduate Teaching Assistant Development Through Stages of Concern
ch. 10 Appropriating Conceptual and Pedagogical Tools of Literacy
ch. 11 Does Instruction Make a Difference? Concept Development in Applied Linguistics M.A. Students
Part Two - Articles Focusing More Exclusively on International Teaching Assistants
ch. 12 Rapport Management of International Teaching Assistants in Their Teaching
ch. 13 A Microethnographic Case Study of Fulbright Language Teaching Assistants
ch. 14 The Roles of Teacher Theory and Domain Theory in Materials and Research in International Teaching Assistant Education
ch. 15 The Instructional Discourse of Domestic and International Teaching Assistants
ch. 16 Written English into Spoken: A Functional Discourse Analysis of American, Indian, and Chinese TA Presentations
ch. 17 The Washback of a Task-based Test of Spoken Language on the Development of ITAs Strategic Compentence
ch. 18 Chinese International Teaching Assistants and the Essence of Intercultural Competence in University Contexts
ch. 19 Learning to Make Suggestions in a Chemistry Lab
ch. 20 Conversation Analysis of the Classroom Communication of a Math ITA
Additional Info:
Each year, hundreds of academics begin new faculty appointments. Some are just launching new careers, while others are advancing to new campuses. As faculty members and their institutions struggle to ease the passage to a new environment, they are faced with critical questions. What are the challenges of the transition process? And how does that process differ for first-time faculty and seasoned faculty?
Drawing on a study conducted ...
Each year, hundreds of academics begin new faculty appointments. Some are just launching new careers, while others are advancing to new campuses. As faculty members and their institutions struggle to ease the passage to a new environment, they are faced with critical questions. What are the challenges of the transition process? And how does that process differ for first-time faculty and seasoned faculty?
Drawing on a study conducted ...
Additional Info:
Each year, hundreds of academics begin new faculty appointments. Some are just launching new careers, while others are advancing to new campuses. As faculty members and their institutions struggle to ease the passage to a new environment, they are faced with critical questions. What are the challenges of the transition process? And how does that process differ for first-time faculty and seasoned faculty?
Drawing on a study conducted by researchers at the National Center on Postsecondary Teaching, Learning, and Assessment, Faculty in New Jobs shows how faculty and institutions can work together to ease the transition to a new job and facilitate the process of mastering academic work. Robert Menges and his associates offer practical, real-world advice covering all phases of the faculty career--from the difficult early process of settling in, to becoming socially and academically established, to ultimately building the institutional supports necessary for a successful career.
The authors provide newcomers with valuable strategies for adapting to campus culture, building professional relationships, establishing a teaching style, and successfully juggling the diverse responsibilities of the faculty role. They also explain what institutions can do to select, support, and evaluate faculty more effectively. They describe the institutional climate that supports effective faculty transitions into and out of academia. They discuss what administrators can do to help faculty better understand and participate in the institutional culture, while also challenging and changing it in positive ways. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Contributors
ch. 1 Being a Newcomer
ch. 2 Dilemmas of Newly Hired Faculty
ch. 3 New Faculty Talk About Stress
ch. 4 Experiences of Women, Experiences of Men
ch. 5 Perspectives from Faculty of Color
ch. 6 Mentoring and Collegiality
ch. 7 Learning What Students Understand
ch. 8 Seeking and Using Feedback
ch. 9 Feeling in Control
ch. 10 Faculty Well-Being and Vitality
ch. 11 How Disciplinary Consensus Affects Faculty
ch. 12 Establishing a Teaching Development Culture
ch. 13 Learning from Leavers
ch. 14 Accountability for Faculty Welfare
Index
Each year, hundreds of academics begin new faculty appointments. Some are just launching new careers, while others are advancing to new campuses. As faculty members and their institutions struggle to ease the passage to a new environment, they are faced with critical questions. What are the challenges of the transition process? And how does that process differ for first-time faculty and seasoned faculty?
Drawing on a study conducted by researchers at the National Center on Postsecondary Teaching, Learning, and Assessment, Faculty in New Jobs shows how faculty and institutions can work together to ease the transition to a new job and facilitate the process of mastering academic work. Robert Menges and his associates offer practical, real-world advice covering all phases of the faculty career--from the difficult early process of settling in, to becoming socially and academically established, to ultimately building the institutional supports necessary for a successful career.
The authors provide newcomers with valuable strategies for adapting to campus culture, building professional relationships, establishing a teaching style, and successfully juggling the diverse responsibilities of the faculty role. They also explain what institutions can do to select, support, and evaluate faculty more effectively. They describe the institutional climate that supports effective faculty transitions into and out of academia. They discuss what administrators can do to help faculty better understand and participate in the institutional culture, while also challenging and changing it in positive ways. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Contributors
ch. 1 Being a Newcomer
ch. 2 Dilemmas of Newly Hired Faculty
ch. 3 New Faculty Talk About Stress
ch. 4 Experiences of Women, Experiences of Men
ch. 5 Perspectives from Faculty of Color
ch. 6 Mentoring and Collegiality
ch. 7 Learning What Students Understand
ch. 8 Seeking and Using Feedback
ch. 9 Feeling in Control
ch. 10 Faculty Well-Being and Vitality
ch. 11 How Disciplinary Consensus Affects Faculty
ch. 12 Establishing a Teaching Development Culture
ch. 13 Learning from Leavers
ch. 14 Accountability for Faculty Welfare
Index
Additional Info:
** By the authors of the acclaimed Introduction to Rubrics
** Major growth of interest in keeping journals or diaries for personal reflection and growth; and as a teaching tool
** Will appeal to college faculty, administrators and teachers
One of the most powerful ways to learn, reflect and make sense of our lives is through journal keeping.
This book presents the potential uses and benefits of ...
** By the authors of the acclaimed Introduction to Rubrics
** Major growth of interest in keeping journals or diaries for personal reflection and growth; and as a teaching tool
** Will appeal to college faculty, administrators and teachers
One of the most powerful ways to learn, reflect and make sense of our lives is through journal keeping.
This book presents the potential uses and benefits of ...
Additional Info:
** By the authors of the acclaimed Introduction to Rubrics
** Major growth of interest in keeping journals or diaries for personal reflection and growth; and as a teaching tool
** Will appeal to college faculty, administrators and teachers
One of the most powerful ways to learn, reflect and make sense of our lives is through journal keeping.
This book presents the potential uses and benefits of journals for personal and professional development-particularly for those in academic life; and demonstrates journals' potential to foster college students' learning, fluency and voice, and creative thinking.
In professional life, a journal helps to organize, prioritize and address the many expectations of a faculty member's or administrator's roles. Journals are effective for developing time management skills, building problem-solving skills, fostering insight, and decreasing stress.
Both writing and rereading journal entries allow the journal keeper to document thinking; to track changes and review observations; and to examine assumptions and so gain fresh perspectives and insights over past events.
The authors present the background to help readers make an informed decision about the value of journals and to determine whether journals will fit appropriately with their teaching objectives or help manage their personal and professional lives. They offer insights and advice on selecting the format or formats and techniques most appropriate for the reader's purposes. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Tables and Figures
Acknowledgements
Preface
Part One
Journal Writing and Its Theoretical Foundation
ch. 1 Journal Writing: Definition and Rationale
ch. 2 Reflection and Learning from Experience
ch. 3 Reflection and Adult Development Theory
Part Two
Using Journals in Classrooms and Professional Life
ch. 4 Introducing and Structuring Classroom Journal Writing
ch. 5 Classroom Journal-Writing Techniques
ch. 6 Grading Classroom Journal Writing
ch. 7 Journal Writing in Professional Life
ch. 8 Journal Writing in the Computer Age
Part Three
A Collection of Case Studies
Teaching with Journals and Keeping Journals in Professional Life
ch. 9 Case Studies: Teaching With Journals
ch. 10 Case Studies: Journal Keeping in Professional Life
Afterword
Appendices
A. Journal Writing Techniques
B. Contributor Contact Information
References
Index
** By the authors of the acclaimed Introduction to Rubrics
** Major growth of interest in keeping journals or diaries for personal reflection and growth; and as a teaching tool
** Will appeal to college faculty, administrators and teachers
One of the most powerful ways to learn, reflect and make sense of our lives is through journal keeping.
This book presents the potential uses and benefits of journals for personal and professional development-particularly for those in academic life; and demonstrates journals' potential to foster college students' learning, fluency and voice, and creative thinking.
In professional life, a journal helps to organize, prioritize and address the many expectations of a faculty member's or administrator's roles. Journals are effective for developing time management skills, building problem-solving skills, fostering insight, and decreasing stress.
Both writing and rereading journal entries allow the journal keeper to document thinking; to track changes and review observations; and to examine assumptions and so gain fresh perspectives and insights over past events.
The authors present the background to help readers make an informed decision about the value of journals and to determine whether journals will fit appropriately with their teaching objectives or help manage their personal and professional lives. They offer insights and advice on selecting the format or formats and techniques most appropriate for the reader's purposes. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Tables and Figures
Acknowledgements
Preface
Part One
Journal Writing and Its Theoretical Foundation
ch. 1 Journal Writing: Definition and Rationale
ch. 2 Reflection and Learning from Experience
ch. 3 Reflection and Adult Development Theory
Part Two
Using Journals in Classrooms and Professional Life
ch. 4 Introducing and Structuring Classroom Journal Writing
ch. 5 Classroom Journal-Writing Techniques
ch. 6 Grading Classroom Journal Writing
ch. 7 Journal Writing in Professional Life
ch. 8 Journal Writing in the Computer Age
Part Three
A Collection of Case Studies
Teaching with Journals and Keeping Journals in Professional Life
ch. 9 Case Studies: Teaching With Journals
ch. 10 Case Studies: Journal Keeping in Professional Life
Afterword
Appendices
A. Journal Writing Techniques
B. Contributor Contact Information
References
Index
Additional Info:
Simon presents Roman Catholic and Protestant perspectives on ways to nurture new faculty at church-related educational institutions, for those involved in administering faculty development programs and for those seeking advice on designing and implementing such programs. (From the Publisher)
Simon presents Roman Catholic and Protestant perspectives on ways to nurture new faculty at church-related educational institutions, for those involved in administering faculty development programs and for those seeking advice on designing and implementing such programs. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Simon presents Roman Catholic and Protestant perspectives on ways to nurture new faculty at church-related educational institutions, for those involved in administering faculty development programs and for those seeking advice on designing and implementing such programs. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Mentoring as an Exercise of Practical Wisdom
ch. 1 Mentoring and Christian Mission
ch. 2 All Mentoring Is Local: Thinking about How Your Program Fits Your Institution
ch. 3 All Mentoring Is Personal: Making Sure Your Program Fits Your Faculty
ch. 4 Getting There from Here
ch. 5 Facing Challenges and Achieving Lasting Success
ch. 6 The Bottom Line: Outcomes of Mentoring
App. 1 Reflection Questions for Mentoring Directors
App. 2 Reflection and Discussion Questions for Mentor Training
App. 3 Questions for Mentors and New Faculty to Reflect on Together
Selected Topical Bibliography
Contributors
Simon presents Roman Catholic and Protestant perspectives on ways to nurture new faculty at church-related educational institutions, for those involved in administering faculty development programs and for those seeking advice on designing and implementing such programs. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Mentoring as an Exercise of Practical Wisdom
ch. 1 Mentoring and Christian Mission
ch. 2 All Mentoring Is Local: Thinking about How Your Program Fits Your Institution
ch. 3 All Mentoring Is Personal: Making Sure Your Program Fits Your Faculty
ch. 4 Getting There from Here
ch. 5 Facing Challenges and Achieving Lasting Success
ch. 6 The Bottom Line: Outcomes of Mentoring
App. 1 Reflection Questions for Mentoring Directors
App. 2 Reflection and Discussion Questions for Mentor Training
App. 3 Questions for Mentors and New Faculty to Reflect on Together
Selected Topical Bibliography
Contributors
The Craft of Research
Additional Info:
Here's a concise, practical guide to mastering the art of research. Filled with the tested strategies and expert advice of three distinguished scholars, this book helps you plan, carry out, and report on research in any field, at any level - a term paper, a dissertation, an article, or a book. The Craft of Research is about more than the mechanics of fact gathering: it's a unique introduction to doing ...
Here's a concise, practical guide to mastering the art of research. Filled with the tested strategies and expert advice of three distinguished scholars, this book helps you plan, carry out, and report on research in any field, at any level - a term paper, a dissertation, an article, or a book. The Craft of Research is about more than the mechanics of fact gathering: it's a unique introduction to doing ...
Additional Info:
Here's a concise, practical guide to mastering the art of research. Filled with the tested strategies and expert advice of three distinguished scholars, this book helps you plan, carry out, and report on research in any field, at any level - a term paper, a dissertation, an article, or a book. The Craft of Research is about more than the mechanics of fact gathering: it's a unique introduction to doing research effectively. Clearly written and easy to use, it teaches the skills that are essential to the success of any research project. Wayne Booth, Gregory Colomb, and Joseph Williams chart every stage of the research process, from finding a topic and generating research questions about it to marshalling evidence, constructing arguments, creating a first draft, and revising that draft for a final report that meets the needs of a community of readers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Thinking in Print: The Uses of Research, Public and Private
ch. 2 Connecting with Your Reader: (Re)Creating Your Self and Your Audience
ch. 3 From Topics to Questions
ch. 4 From Questions to Problems
ch. 5 From Questions to Sources
ch. 6 Using Sources
ch. 7 Making Good Arguments: An Overview
ch. 8 Claims and Evidence
ch. 9 Warrants
ch. 10 Qualifications
ch. 11 Pre-Drafting and Drafting
ch. 12 Communicating Evidence Visually
ch. 13 Revising Your Organization and Argument
ch. 14 Revising Style: Telling Your Story Clearly
ch. 15 Introductions
Index
Here's a concise, practical guide to mastering the art of research. Filled with the tested strategies and expert advice of three distinguished scholars, this book helps you plan, carry out, and report on research in any field, at any level - a term paper, a dissertation, an article, or a book. The Craft of Research is about more than the mechanics of fact gathering: it's a unique introduction to doing research effectively. Clearly written and easy to use, it teaches the skills that are essential to the success of any research project. Wayne Booth, Gregory Colomb, and Joseph Williams chart every stage of the research process, from finding a topic and generating research questions about it to marshalling evidence, constructing arguments, creating a first draft, and revising that draft for a final report that meets the needs of a community of readers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Thinking in Print: The Uses of Research, Public and Private
ch. 2 Connecting with Your Reader: (Re)Creating Your Self and Your Audience
ch. 3 From Topics to Questions
ch. 4 From Questions to Problems
ch. 5 From Questions to Sources
ch. 6 Using Sources
ch. 7 Making Good Arguments: An Overview
ch. 8 Claims and Evidence
ch. 9 Warrants
ch. 10 Qualifications
ch. 11 Pre-Drafting and Drafting
ch. 12 Communicating Evidence Visually
ch. 13 Revising Your Organization and Argument
ch. 14 Revising Style: Telling Your Story Clearly
ch. 15 Introductions
Index
Additional Info:
The EPAC Community of Practice provides a huge store of resources on electronic teaching portfolios, as well as a viritual community of webcasts, blogs, queries, and conferences.
The EPAC Community of Practice provides a huge store of resources on electronic teaching portfolios, as well as a viritual community of webcasts, blogs, queries, and conferences.
Additional Info:
The EPAC Community of Practice provides a huge store of resources on electronic teaching portfolios, as well as a viritual community of webcasts, blogs, queries, and conferences.
The EPAC Community of Practice provides a huge store of resources on electronic teaching portfolios, as well as a viritual community of webcasts, blogs, queries, and conferences.
Additional Info:
As in her other work, JoAnn Moody demonstrates a keen understanding of the day-to-day challenges of faculty issues, drawing from careful research as well as from close connections to the issues facing early-stage faculty. She reminds us that effective mentoring is designed around a flexible set of approaches and cannot be based on what she appropriately labels myths.
As in her other work, JoAnn Moody demonstrates a keen understanding of the day-to-day challenges of faculty issues, drawing from careful research as well as from close connections to the issues facing early-stage faculty. She reminds us that effective mentoring is designed around a flexible set of approaches and cannot be based on what she appropriately labels myths.
Additional Info:
As in her other work, JoAnn Moody demonstrates a keen understanding of the day-to-day challenges of faculty issues, drawing from careful research as well as from close connections to the issues facing early-stage faculty. She reminds us that effective mentoring is designed around a flexible set of approaches and cannot be based on what she appropriately labels myths.
Table Of Content:
Section A: Myths & assumptions
Section B: Missing elements of the mentoring process
Section C: Missing elements in the design of formal mentoring program (e.g., workshops for mentors & mentees)
Section D: Supplementary materials (e.g., checklists, illustrations & discussion scenarios)
As in her other work, JoAnn Moody demonstrates a keen understanding of the day-to-day challenges of faculty issues, drawing from careful research as well as from close connections to the issues facing early-stage faculty. She reminds us that effective mentoring is designed around a flexible set of approaches and cannot be based on what she appropriately labels myths.
Table Of Content:
Section A: Myths & assumptions
Section B: Missing elements of the mentoring process
Section C: Missing elements in the design of formal mentoring program (e.g., workshops for mentors & mentees)
Section D: Supplementary materials (e.g., checklists, illustrations & discussion scenarios)
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Additional Info:
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Table Of Content:
Governance and the Future of Theological Education (Daniel O. Aleshire)
Governance: What is it?(G. Douglass Lewis)
Faculty Powers in Shared Governance (David L. Tiede)
More than Simply Getting Along: The Goal of Shared Governance in Theological Schools (Rebekah Burch Basinger)
Report from United Theological Seminary of the Twin Cities (Eleazar S. Fernandez and Richard D. Weis)
Report from Iliff School of Theology (Jacob Kinnard and Ann Graham Brock)
Report from Multnomah Biblical Seminary (John L. Terveen)
Report from St. Peter's Seminary (John Dool and Brian Dunn)
Report from Denver Seminary (W. David Buschart and Bradley J. Widstrom)
Report from Ashland Theological Seminary (Wyndy Corbin Reuschling and Lee Wetherbee)
Attending to the Collective Vocation (Gordon T. Smith)
The Academic Teaching and the Practical Needs of the Clergy (John Bright)
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Table Of Content:
Governance and the Future of Theological Education (Daniel O. Aleshire)
Governance: What is it?(G. Douglass Lewis)
Faculty Powers in Shared Governance (David L. Tiede)
More than Simply Getting Along: The Goal of Shared Governance in Theological Schools (Rebekah Burch Basinger)
Report from United Theological Seminary of the Twin Cities (Eleazar S. Fernandez and Richard D. Weis)
Report from Iliff School of Theology (Jacob Kinnard and Ann Graham Brock)
Report from Multnomah Biblical Seminary (John L. Terveen)
Report from St. Peter's Seminary (John Dool and Brian Dunn)
Report from Denver Seminary (W. David Buschart and Bradley J. Widstrom)
Report from Ashland Theological Seminary (Wyndy Corbin Reuschling and Lee Wetherbee)
Attending to the Collective Vocation (Gordon T. Smith)
The Academic Teaching and the Practical Needs of the Clergy (John Bright)
Additional Info:
Praise for The Mentee's Guide
"The Mentee's Guide inspires and guides the potential mentee, provides new insights for the adventure in learning that lies ahead, and underscores my personal belief and experience that mentoring is circular. The mentor gains as much as the mentee in this evocative relationship. Lois Zachary's new book is a great gift." —Frances Hesselbein, chairman and founding president, Leader to Leader Institute
"...
Praise for The Mentee's Guide
"The Mentee's Guide inspires and guides the potential mentee, provides new insights for the adventure in learning that lies ahead, and underscores my personal belief and experience that mentoring is circular. The mentor gains as much as the mentee in this evocative relationship. Lois Zachary's new book is a great gift." —Frances Hesselbein, chairman and founding president, Leader to Leader Institute
"...
Additional Info:
Praise for The Mentee's Guide
"The Mentee's Guide inspires and guides the potential mentee, provides new insights for the adventure in learning that lies ahead, and underscores my personal belief and experience that mentoring is circular. The mentor gains as much as the mentee in this evocative relationship. Lois Zachary's new book is a great gift." —Frances Hesselbein, chairman and founding president, Leader to Leader Institute
"Whether you are the mentee or mentor, born or made for the role, you will gain much more from the relationship by practicing the fun and easy A-to-Z principles of The Mentee's Guide by the master of excellence, Lois Zachary." —Ken Shelton, editor, Leadership Excellence
"With this deeply practical book filled with stories and useful exercises, Lois Zachary completes her groundbreaking trilogy on mentoring. Must-reading for those in search of a richer understanding of this deeply human relationship as well as anyone seeking a mentor, whether for new skills, job advancement, or deeper wisdom." —Laurent A. Parks Daloz, senior fellow, the Whidbey Institute, and author, Mentor: Guiding the Journey of Adult Learners
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
The Authors
ch. 1 The Power and Process of Mentoring
ch. 2 Preparing Yourself to Make the Most of Mentoring
ch. 3 Finding and Getting to Know Your Mentor
ch. 4 Establishing Agreements with Your Mentor
ch. 5 Doing the Work
ch. 6 Coming to Closure with Your Mentor
ch. 7 Making the Transition to from Mentee to Mentor
Appendix: Digging Deeper: An Annotated List of Helpful Resources
References
Index
Praise for The Mentee's Guide
"The Mentee's Guide inspires and guides the potential mentee, provides new insights for the adventure in learning that lies ahead, and underscores my personal belief and experience that mentoring is circular. The mentor gains as much as the mentee in this evocative relationship. Lois Zachary's new book is a great gift." —Frances Hesselbein, chairman and founding president, Leader to Leader Institute
"Whether you are the mentee or mentor, born or made for the role, you will gain much more from the relationship by practicing the fun and easy A-to-Z principles of The Mentee's Guide by the master of excellence, Lois Zachary." —Ken Shelton, editor, Leadership Excellence
"With this deeply practical book filled with stories and useful exercises, Lois Zachary completes her groundbreaking trilogy on mentoring. Must-reading for those in search of a richer understanding of this deeply human relationship as well as anyone seeking a mentor, whether for new skills, job advancement, or deeper wisdom." —Laurent A. Parks Daloz, senior fellow, the Whidbey Institute, and author, Mentor: Guiding the Journey of Adult Learners
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
The Authors
ch. 1 The Power and Process of Mentoring
ch. 2 Preparing Yourself to Make the Most of Mentoring
ch. 3 Finding and Getting to Know Your Mentor
ch. 4 Establishing Agreements with Your Mentor
ch. 5 Doing the Work
ch. 6 Coming to Closure with Your Mentor
ch. 7 Making the Transition to from Mentee to Mentor
Appendix: Digging Deeper: An Annotated List of Helpful Resources
References
Index
Additional Info:
In university teachers’ hectic lives, finding space to reflect, restore, renew, and recommit can seem impossible. Jean Koh Peters and Mark Weisberg believe regular reflection is critical and have designed A Teacher’s Reflection Book to help teachers and other professionals find that space. Growing out of the authors’ extensive experience facilitating retreats and leading teaching and learning workshops, the book builds on their discoveries in those settings, supporting and ...
In university teachers’ hectic lives, finding space to reflect, restore, renew, and recommit can seem impossible. Jean Koh Peters and Mark Weisberg believe regular reflection is critical and have designed A Teacher’s Reflection Book to help teachers and other professionals find that space. Growing out of the authors’ extensive experience facilitating retreats and leading teaching and learning workshops, the book builds on their discoveries in those settings, supporting and ...
Additional Info:
In university teachers’ hectic lives, finding space to reflect, restore, renew, and recommit can seem impossible. Jean Koh Peters and Mark Weisberg believe regular reflection is critical and have designed A Teacher’s Reflection Book to help teachers and other professionals find that space. Growing out of the authors’ extensive experience facilitating retreats and leading teaching and learning workshops, the book builds on their discoveries in those settings, supporting and promoting teachers’ self-directed development.
Inviting that development, A Teacher’s Reflection Book is a cornucopia of stories, exercises, and examples that will inspire teachers to make reflection a cornerstone of their daily lives. With its multiple suggestions and strategies, it offers something for every reader, and is responsive to teachers’ needs at all stages of their careers.
The book’s six chapters offer readers several perspectives from which to reflect. Some sections offer glimpses of teachers in the midst of their daily teaching lives, while others step away, inviting readers to reflect on what it means to have a vocation as a teacher.
The book explores how we listen, a crucial yet rarely taught skill, essential for reflecting, as well as for learning and teaching. And it invites teachers to reflect on their students: who they are, and what and how they learn. For those latter reflections, the authors turn the focus on fear, which so pervades university life and which can distort learners’ and teachers’ perspectives and responses. Throughout this book, readers will visit several classrooms and listen to the evocative voices of several thoughtful students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Gratitudes
ch. 1 How Does a Teacher Say Hello?
I. A Look at Several First Classes II. Exercises to Focus on Hello
II. Exercises to Focus on Hello
A. What Is the First Experience Students Have in Your Course? What Is Their First Experience in Class?
B. What Are the Dispositions of Your Classroom?
C. Fast Forward Through the Semester You’re about to Start
D. Consider “Entrainment” and the Rhythms of Your Semester
E. Think about Hellos in Popular Culture
F. How Will You Deal with Fluctuating Student Attendance During “Shopping Periods”?
G. What Will Be the Role of Technology in Your Classroom, and Will You Make Space to Express That in Your Hello?
H. Will You Know Your Students’ Names?
I. How Will You Handle Your Announcements?
J. As You Begin, How Do You Want the Central Ideas of the Course to Emerge?
K. Consider Generating Ideas by Using Beginning Rituals in Other Settings
III. Final Thoughts about Hello
IV. Conclusion Notes
ch. 2 Reflection: What It Is and How to Practice It
I. Introduction: A Reflection on the Need for Reflection
II. Essential Elements of Reflection—What Makes Reflection Work for You?
A. Identify Meaningful Elements of Reflection That Uniquely Suit Your Needs
B. Three Recommended Elements of Reflection: Starting Focal Point, Experience, Non-judgment
1. A Starting Focal Point
2. Experience
3. Non-judgment
III. A Session of Reflection: The Individual Reflection Event
A. Individual Reflection Event: The Retreat Model
B. Examples of Individual Reflection Events
1. Reflection Event — With a Group, at Our Retreat
2. Reflection Event — Alone, at a Conference, Further Reflected Upon Alone, after the Conference
IV. What a Practice of Mindful Reflection Might Look Like
A. The Spirit of Mindful Reflection — A Practice, Not a Habit
B. The Structure of Mindful Reflection — Useful Strategies
C. Additional Suggestions for Developing a Reflection Practice
1. Downshifting, Making the Transition
2. Giving Oneself Permission
3. Dealing with Technology and Time
D. Creating Conditions for Reflection
V. Conclusion
Notes
ch. 3 Experiments in Listening
I. Looking Retrospectively at Your Experiences of Listening
A. Ask Analytical or General Questions about Your Listening
1. Ten Freewriting/Brainstorming Prompts
2. Explore Your Listening on a Doubting and Believing Spectrum
B. Explore Critical Incidents from the Past
1. High Points and Low Points as a Listener
2. Profile of the Three Best Listeners I Know
3. High Points and Low Points as a Person Being Listened To
II. Looking Prospectively: Analyzing Your Listening for New Insights
A. Collect New Data
B. Experiment with Your Listening
1. Use the Doubting-Believing Spectrum: Two Variants
2. Wait Five Seconds before Responding
3. Don’t Offer Advice
4. Listen with Your Hands Occupied
5. Practice Non-judgment
6. Try a Group Exercise
ch. 4 Who Are Our Students, and How and What Do They Learn in Our Classrooms?
I. Who Were We as Students: Our Best/Worst Moments as Students
II. Student Voices
III. A Culture of Fear and Its Consequences
A. Three Classrooms, Three Nightmare Scenarios
IV. What Can We Do to Facilitate Learning?
A. Teach Non-judgmentally/Teach Non-judgment
B. Discern the Gift, Not the Gifted
C. Use Midstream, or Formative, Assessment
D. Anticipate Difficult Incidents
E. Take One More Minute
F. Trust Ourselves
V. Conclusion
Notes
ch. 5 The Teacher and Vocation
I. Discovering Vocation
A. UnderstandingVocation
B. FindingYourVocation:FourExercises
1. Write Your Obituary
2. Find and Explore a Governing Metaphor
3. Compose a Job Description
4. Visit or Write Your Future Self
C. A Life Lived in Vocation: Implications
II. Nurturing Vocation in Ordinary Times: Two Sets of Processes You Can Trust
A. Internal Processes You Can Trust
B. ExternalProcessesYouCanTrust
III. Some Elements of a Teacher’s Vocation
A. Writing
B. ClassroomTeaching
IV. Conclusion
Notes
ch. 6 How Does a Teacher Say Goodbye?
I. Introduction
II. Invitations for Thinking about Goodbye
III. Ideas for Last Classes/Meetings
A. A Closing Circle
B. Completing the Circle
C. Jean’s Goodbye and Coupon
D. Postcards and Silent Witness
IV. Goodbye: A Unique Moment of Reflection
V. Conclusion
Notes
Appendix • Resources for Reflecting
About the Authors
Index
In university teachers’ hectic lives, finding space to reflect, restore, renew, and recommit can seem impossible. Jean Koh Peters and Mark Weisberg believe regular reflection is critical and have designed A Teacher’s Reflection Book to help teachers and other professionals find that space. Growing out of the authors’ extensive experience facilitating retreats and leading teaching and learning workshops, the book builds on their discoveries in those settings, supporting and promoting teachers’ self-directed development.
Inviting that development, A Teacher’s Reflection Book is a cornucopia of stories, exercises, and examples that will inspire teachers to make reflection a cornerstone of their daily lives. With its multiple suggestions and strategies, it offers something for every reader, and is responsive to teachers’ needs at all stages of their careers.
The book’s six chapters offer readers several perspectives from which to reflect. Some sections offer glimpses of teachers in the midst of their daily teaching lives, while others step away, inviting readers to reflect on what it means to have a vocation as a teacher.
The book explores how we listen, a crucial yet rarely taught skill, essential for reflecting, as well as for learning and teaching. And it invites teachers to reflect on their students: who they are, and what and how they learn. For those latter reflections, the authors turn the focus on fear, which so pervades university life and which can distort learners’ and teachers’ perspectives and responses. Throughout this book, readers will visit several classrooms and listen to the evocative voices of several thoughtful students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Gratitudes
ch. 1 How Does a Teacher Say Hello?
I. A Look at Several First Classes II. Exercises to Focus on Hello
II. Exercises to Focus on Hello
A. What Is the First Experience Students Have in Your Course? What Is Their First Experience in Class?
B. What Are the Dispositions of Your Classroom?
C. Fast Forward Through the Semester You’re about to Start
D. Consider “Entrainment” and the Rhythms of Your Semester
E. Think about Hellos in Popular Culture
F. How Will You Deal with Fluctuating Student Attendance During “Shopping Periods”?
G. What Will Be the Role of Technology in Your Classroom, and Will You Make Space to Express That in Your Hello?
H. Will You Know Your Students’ Names?
I. How Will You Handle Your Announcements?
J. As You Begin, How Do You Want the Central Ideas of the Course to Emerge?
K. Consider Generating Ideas by Using Beginning Rituals in Other Settings
III. Final Thoughts about Hello
IV. Conclusion Notes
ch. 2 Reflection: What It Is and How to Practice It
I. Introduction: A Reflection on the Need for Reflection
II. Essential Elements of Reflection—What Makes Reflection Work for You?
A. Identify Meaningful Elements of Reflection That Uniquely Suit Your Needs
B. Three Recommended Elements of Reflection: Starting Focal Point, Experience, Non-judgment
1. A Starting Focal Point
2. Experience
3. Non-judgment
III. A Session of Reflection: The Individual Reflection Event
A. Individual Reflection Event: The Retreat Model
B. Examples of Individual Reflection Events
1. Reflection Event — With a Group, at Our Retreat
2. Reflection Event — Alone, at a Conference, Further Reflected Upon Alone, after the Conference
IV. What a Practice of Mindful Reflection Might Look Like
A. The Spirit of Mindful Reflection — A Practice, Not a Habit
B. The Structure of Mindful Reflection — Useful Strategies
C. Additional Suggestions for Developing a Reflection Practice
1. Downshifting, Making the Transition
2. Giving Oneself Permission
3. Dealing with Technology and Time
D. Creating Conditions for Reflection
V. Conclusion
Notes
ch. 3 Experiments in Listening
I. Looking Retrospectively at Your Experiences of Listening
A. Ask Analytical or General Questions about Your Listening
1. Ten Freewriting/Brainstorming Prompts
2. Explore Your Listening on a Doubting and Believing Spectrum
B. Explore Critical Incidents from the Past
1. High Points and Low Points as a Listener
2. Profile of the Three Best Listeners I Know
3. High Points and Low Points as a Person Being Listened To
II. Looking Prospectively: Analyzing Your Listening for New Insights
A. Collect New Data
B. Experiment with Your Listening
1. Use the Doubting-Believing Spectrum: Two Variants
2. Wait Five Seconds before Responding
3. Don’t Offer Advice
4. Listen with Your Hands Occupied
5. Practice Non-judgment
6. Try a Group Exercise
ch. 4 Who Are Our Students, and How and What Do They Learn in Our Classrooms?
I. Who Were We as Students: Our Best/Worst Moments as Students
II. Student Voices
III. A Culture of Fear and Its Consequences
A. Three Classrooms, Three Nightmare Scenarios
IV. What Can We Do to Facilitate Learning?
A. Teach Non-judgmentally/Teach Non-judgment
B. Discern the Gift, Not the Gifted
C. Use Midstream, or Formative, Assessment
D. Anticipate Difficult Incidents
E. Take One More Minute
F. Trust Ourselves
V. Conclusion
Notes
ch. 5 The Teacher and Vocation
I. Discovering Vocation
A. UnderstandingVocation
B. FindingYourVocation:FourExercises
1. Write Your Obituary
2. Find and Explore a Governing Metaphor
3. Compose a Job Description
4. Visit or Write Your Future Self
C. A Life Lived in Vocation: Implications
II. Nurturing Vocation in Ordinary Times: Two Sets of Processes You Can Trust
A. Internal Processes You Can Trust
B. ExternalProcessesYouCanTrust
III. Some Elements of a Teacher’s Vocation
A. Writing
B. ClassroomTeaching
IV. Conclusion
Notes
ch. 6 How Does a Teacher Say Goodbye?
I. Introduction
II. Invitations for Thinking about Goodbye
III. Ideas for Last Classes/Meetings
A. A Closing Circle
B. Completing the Circle
C. Jean’s Goodbye and Coupon
D. Postcards and Silent Witness
IV. Goodbye: A Unique Moment of Reflection
V. Conclusion
Notes
Appendix • Resources for Reflecting
About the Authors
Index
Additional Info:
This article explores a variety of personal and professional boundary issues encountered by seminary faculty. The authors contend that boundary crossing is inevitable in contemporary theological education, which is structured such that professors engage in multiple roles with students as they attend to the education of the whole person. Guidelines are reviewed for minimizing risk to students and professors. Topics include life as a community member, student-faculty friendship, and romantic ...
This article explores a variety of personal and professional boundary issues encountered by seminary faculty. The authors contend that boundary crossing is inevitable in contemporary theological education, which is structured such that professors engage in multiple roles with students as they attend to the education of the whole person. Guidelines are reviewed for minimizing risk to students and professors. Topics include life as a community member, student-faculty friendship, and romantic ...
Additional Info:
This article explores a variety of personal and professional boundary issues encountered by seminary faculty. The authors contend that boundary crossing is inevitable in contemporary theological education, which is structured such that professors engage in multiple roles with students as they attend to the education of the whole person. Guidelines are reviewed for minimizing risk to students and professors. Topics include life as a community member, student-faculty friendship, and romantic relationships. Attention to work/life balance is seen as critical to the prevention of misconduct. The article ends with a call for continued conversation as well as institutional accountability and change.
This article explores a variety of personal and professional boundary issues encountered by seminary faculty. The authors contend that boundary crossing is inevitable in contemporary theological education, which is structured such that professors engage in multiple roles with students as they attend to the education of the whole person. Guidelines are reviewed for minimizing risk to students and professors. Topics include life as a community member, student-faculty friendship, and romantic relationships. Attention to work/life balance is seen as critical to the prevention of misconduct. The article ends with a call for continued conversation as well as institutional accountability and change.
Additional Info:
The AAUP's website provides a wealth of materials to advance academic freedom and shared governance, to define fundamental professional values and standards for higher education, and to ensure higher education's contribution to the common good.
The AAUP's website provides a wealth of materials to advance academic freedom and shared governance, to define fundamental professional values and standards for higher education, and to ensure higher education's contribution to the common good.
Additional Info:
The AAUP's website provides a wealth of materials to advance academic freedom and shared governance, to define fundamental professional values and standards for higher education, and to ensure higher education's contribution to the common good.
The AAUP's website provides a wealth of materials to advance academic freedom and shared governance, to define fundamental professional values and standards for higher education, and to ensure higher education's contribution to the common good.
Additional Info:
Indicators of the processes that enhance GTA teaching and professional development: the use of reflective practice, feedback, mentorship, and engagement in teaching practice. Including: online environment, role-play activity, micro-teaching, and independent course instruction.
Indicators of the processes that enhance GTA teaching and professional development: the use of reflective practice, feedback, mentorship, and engagement in teaching practice. Including: online environment, role-play activity, micro-teaching, and independent course instruction.
Additional Info:
Indicators of the processes that enhance GTA teaching and professional development: the use of reflective practice, feedback, mentorship, and engagement in teaching practice. Including: online environment, role-play activity, micro-teaching, and independent course instruction.
Table Of Content:
Special Issue Introduction
Introduction from Special Issue Editors (Cynthia Korpan, Lianne Fisher, Lorraine Godden, Shaya Golparian, Aisha Haque, Betsy Keating, Suzanne Le-May Sheffield, Annie Riel, Christina Skorobohacz, Roselynn Verwoord, Kim West)
Special Issue Article
Exploring Future Teachers’ Awareness, Competence, Confidence, and Attitudes Regarding Teaching Online: Incorporating Blended/Online Experience into the Teaching and Learning in Higher Education Course for Graduate Students (Suzanne Le-May Sheffield)
Developing Graduate Students' Self-Efficacy with Learner-Centred Lecturing (Meagan A. C. Troop, Lauren E. Wallar, Erin Aspenlieder)
Evaluating the Differential Impact of Teaching Assistant Training Programs on International Graduate Student Teaching (Ken N. Meadows, Karyn C. Olsen, Nanda Dimitrov, Debra L. Dawson)
Strategic Use of Role Playing in a Training Workshop for Chemistry Laboratory Teaching Assistants (Priyanka Lekhi, Sophia Nussbaum )
Addressing the Needs of Doctoral Students as Academic Practitioners: A Collaborative Inquiry on Teaching in Higher Education (Lisa J Starr, Ashley DeMartini)
Good Teaching Starts Here: Applied Learning at the Graduate Teaching Assistant Institute (Michele A. Parker, Diana Ashe, Jess Boersma, Robert Hicks, Victoria Bennett)
Indicators of the processes that enhance GTA teaching and professional development: the use of reflective practice, feedback, mentorship, and engagement in teaching practice. Including: online environment, role-play activity, micro-teaching, and independent course instruction.
Table Of Content:
Special Issue Introduction
Introduction from Special Issue Editors (Cynthia Korpan, Lianne Fisher, Lorraine Godden, Shaya Golparian, Aisha Haque, Betsy Keating, Suzanne Le-May Sheffield, Annie Riel, Christina Skorobohacz, Roselynn Verwoord, Kim West)
Special Issue Article
Exploring Future Teachers’ Awareness, Competence, Confidence, and Attitudes Regarding Teaching Online: Incorporating Blended/Online Experience into the Teaching and Learning in Higher Education Course for Graduate Students (Suzanne Le-May Sheffield)
Developing Graduate Students' Self-Efficacy with Learner-Centred Lecturing (Meagan A. C. Troop, Lauren E. Wallar, Erin Aspenlieder)
Evaluating the Differential Impact of Teaching Assistant Training Programs on International Graduate Student Teaching (Ken N. Meadows, Karyn C. Olsen, Nanda Dimitrov, Debra L. Dawson)
Strategic Use of Role Playing in a Training Workshop for Chemistry Laboratory Teaching Assistants (Priyanka Lekhi, Sophia Nussbaum )
Addressing the Needs of Doctoral Students as Academic Practitioners: A Collaborative Inquiry on Teaching in Higher Education (Lisa J Starr, Ashley DeMartini)
Good Teaching Starts Here: Applied Learning at the Graduate Teaching Assistant Institute (Michele A. Parker, Diana Ashe, Jess Boersma, Robert Hicks, Victoria Bennett)
Going Online: Perspectives on Digital Learning
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
In Going Online, one of our most respected online learning leaders offers insights into virtual education―what it is, how it works, where it came from, and where it may be headed. Robert Ubell reaches back to the days when distance learning was practiced by mail in correspondence schools and then leads ...
Click Here for Book Review
In Going Online, one of our most respected online learning leaders offers insights into virtual education―what it is, how it works, where it came from, and where it may be headed. Robert Ubell reaches back to the days when distance learning was practiced by mail in correspondence schools and then leads ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
In Going Online, one of our most respected online learning leaders offers insights into virtual education―what it is, how it works, where it came from, and where it may be headed. Robert Ubell reaches back to the days when distance learning was practiced by mail in correspondence schools and then leads us on a tour behind the screen, touching on a wide array of topics along the way, including what it takes to teach online and the virtual student experience. You’ll learn about:
-how to build a sustainable online program;
-how to create an active learning online course;
-why so many faculty resist teaching online;
-how virtual teamwork enhances digital instruction;
-how to manage online course ownership;
-how learning analytics improves online instruction.
Ubell says that it is not technology alone, but rather unconventional pedagogies, supported by technological innovations, that truly activate today's classrooms. He argues that innovations introduced online―principally peer-to-peer and collaborative learning―offer significantly increased creative learning options across all age groups and educational sectors. This impressive collection, drawn from Ubell's decades of experience as a digital education pioneer, presents a powerful case for embracing online learning for its transformational potential.
Table Of Content:
Foreword by Katepalli R. Sreenivasan
Acknowledgements
Part I. Virtual Classes
Ch 1. Dewey Goes Online
Ch 2. Virtual Team Learning
Ch 3. Active Learning: Interaction, Diversity and Evolution in Online Learning (John Vivolo)
Ch 4. What You Can Do Online, But Not on Campus
Ch 5. Why Faculty Don’t Want to Teach Online
Ch 6. Blind Scores in a Graduate Test: Conventional Compared with Online Outcomes With M. Hosein Fallah
Part II. Migrating Online
Ch 7. Migrating Online with A. Frank Mayadas
Ch 8. Who Owns What? Unbundling Online Course Property Rights
Ch 9. The Road Not Taken: Divergence of Corporate and Academic Online Instruction
Ch 10. Engineers Turn to Online Learning
Click Here for Book Review
In Going Online, one of our most respected online learning leaders offers insights into virtual education―what it is, how it works, where it came from, and where it may be headed. Robert Ubell reaches back to the days when distance learning was practiced by mail in correspondence schools and then leads us on a tour behind the screen, touching on a wide array of topics along the way, including what it takes to teach online and the virtual student experience. You’ll learn about:
-how to build a sustainable online program;
-how to create an active learning online course;
-why so many faculty resist teaching online;
-how virtual teamwork enhances digital instruction;
-how to manage online course ownership;
-how learning analytics improves online instruction.
Ubell says that it is not technology alone, but rather unconventional pedagogies, supported by technological innovations, that truly activate today's classrooms. He argues that innovations introduced online―principally peer-to-peer and collaborative learning―offer significantly increased creative learning options across all age groups and educational sectors. This impressive collection, drawn from Ubell's decades of experience as a digital education pioneer, presents a powerful case for embracing online learning for its transformational potential.
Table Of Content:
Foreword by Katepalli R. Sreenivasan
Acknowledgements
Part I. Virtual Classes
Ch 1. Dewey Goes Online
Ch 2. Virtual Team Learning
Ch 3. Active Learning: Interaction, Diversity and Evolution in Online Learning (John Vivolo)
Ch 4. What You Can Do Online, But Not on Campus
Ch 5. Why Faculty Don’t Want to Teach Online
Ch 6. Blind Scores in a Graduate Test: Conventional Compared with Online Outcomes With M. Hosein Fallah
Part II. Migrating Online
Ch 7. Migrating Online with A. Frank Mayadas
Ch 8. Who Owns What? Unbundling Online Course Property Rights
Ch 9. The Road Not Taken: Divergence of Corporate and Academic Online Instruction
Ch 10. Engineers Turn to Online Learning
"Of Monks' Cells and Wagon Trains, Excellence and Collegiality"
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Describes an approach to faculty development that relies on faculty learning from one another through peer observation. Rather than equating such observation with evaluating a colleague's performance, faculty observers are urged to approach the assignment as "students of teaching."
Describes an approach to faculty development that relies on faculty learning from one another through peer observation. Rather than equating such observation with evaluating a colleague's performance, faculty observers are urged to approach the assignment as "students of teaching."
Additional Info:
Describes an approach to faculty development that relies on faculty learning from one another through peer observation. Rather than equating such observation with evaluating a colleague's performance, faculty observers are urged to approach the assignment as "students of teaching."
Describes an approach to faculty development that relies on faculty learning from one another through peer observation. Rather than equating such observation with evaluating a colleague's performance, faculty observers are urged to approach the assignment as "students of teaching."
"Creating a Culture of Commitment to Learning and Teaching: Twenty Reflections from Twenty Years Experience in Faculty Development"
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
"Looking for Good Teaching: A Guide to Peer Observation"
Additional Info:
This observation guide lists 270 separate items, in checklist format, to be used for informal evaluation of classroom teachers by their peers. Items for observation are given for mechanics of teaching, scholarship, organization, classroom relationships, and miscellaneous teaching functions, as well as for preparation, topic choice, quality of interaction, quality of content and discussion, and method and efficiency of question-asking on the part of the teacher.
This observation guide lists 270 separate items, in checklist format, to be used for informal evaluation of classroom teachers by their peers. Items for observation are given for mechanics of teaching, scholarship, organization, classroom relationships, and miscellaneous teaching functions, as well as for preparation, topic choice, quality of interaction, quality of content and discussion, and method and efficiency of question-asking on the part of the teacher.
Additional Info:
This observation guide lists 270 separate items, in checklist format, to be used for informal evaluation of classroom teachers by their peers. Items for observation are given for mechanics of teaching, scholarship, organization, classroom relationships, and miscellaneous teaching functions, as well as for preparation, topic choice, quality of interaction, quality of content and discussion, and method and efficiency of question-asking on the part of the teacher.
This observation guide lists 270 separate items, in checklist format, to be used for informal evaluation of classroom teachers by their peers. Items for observation are given for mechanics of teaching, scholarship, organization, classroom relationships, and miscellaneous teaching functions, as well as for preparation, topic choice, quality of interaction, quality of content and discussion, and method and efficiency of question-asking on the part of the teacher.
Additional Info:
We pass on our traits through our genes but our cherished values, beliefs, and practices are transmitted through those units of meaning called memes. This remarkable book provides an authoritative account of how 'good work' endures in the sciences—and has profound implications for the quality of work across the professional landscape.
This book should sow the seeds of greatness for protégés and mentors alike, and ...
We pass on our traits through our genes but our cherished values, beliefs, and practices are transmitted through those units of meaning called memes. This remarkable book provides an authoritative account of how 'good work' endures in the sciences—and has profound implications for the quality of work across the professional landscape.
This book should sow the seeds of greatness for protégés and mentors alike, and ...
Additional Info:
We pass on our traits through our genes but our cherished values, beliefs, and practices are transmitted through those units of meaning called memes. This remarkable book provides an authoritative account of how 'good work' endures in the sciences—and has profound implications for the quality of work across the professional landscape.
This book should sow the seeds of greatness for protégés and mentors alike, and well beyond the discipline of science. Mentoring lineages are the hallmark of disciplines that endure and have impact, a reality that the authors powerfully communicate.
Good Mentoring is a landmark study with implications for the continued vibrancy of any discipline. This is a fresh, eye-opening perspective on the social transmission of professional lineages. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The Authors
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Why Mentoring?
Part One: Three Examples of Good Mentoring
ch. 2 The Naturalist
ch. 3 The Physician-Scientist
ch. 4 The Moralist
Part Two: How Good Mentoring Works
ch. 5 Values, Practices, and Knowledge Through the Generations
ch. 6 How Values, Practices, and Knowledge Are Transmitted
ch. 7 Supportive Relationships as the Context for Intergenerational Influence
Part Three: Promoting Good Mentoring
ch. 8 What Have We Learned?
ch. 9 Where Do We Go from Here?
Appendix A: Data Collection, Coding, and Analyses
Appendix B: Science Apprenticeship Study and Interview Questions
Appendix C: Global Code Sheet
References
Index
We pass on our traits through our genes but our cherished values, beliefs, and practices are transmitted through those units of meaning called memes. This remarkable book provides an authoritative account of how 'good work' endures in the sciences—and has profound implications for the quality of work across the professional landscape.
This book should sow the seeds of greatness for protégés and mentors alike, and well beyond the discipline of science. Mentoring lineages are the hallmark of disciplines that endure and have impact, a reality that the authors powerfully communicate.
Good Mentoring is a landmark study with implications for the continued vibrancy of any discipline. This is a fresh, eye-opening perspective on the social transmission of professional lineages. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The Authors
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Why Mentoring?
Part One: Three Examples of Good Mentoring
ch. 2 The Naturalist
ch. 3 The Physician-Scientist
ch. 4 The Moralist
Part Two: How Good Mentoring Works
ch. 5 Values, Practices, and Knowledge Through the Generations
ch. 6 How Values, Practices, and Knowledge Are Transmitted
ch. 7 Supportive Relationships as the Context for Intergenerational Influence
Part Three: Promoting Good Mentoring
ch. 8 What Have We Learned?
ch. 9 Where Do We Go from Here?
Appendix A: Data Collection, Coding, and Analyses
Appendix B: Science Apprenticeship Study and Interview Questions
Appendix C: Global Code Sheet
References
Index
Critical Race Theory in Higher Education: 20 Years of Theoretical and Research Innovations: ASHE Higher Education Report, Volume 41, Number 3
Additional Info:
">Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Critical race theory (CRT) was introduced in 1995 and for almost twenty years, the theory has been used as a tool to examine People of Color’s experiences with racism in higher education. This monograph reviews the critical race literature with a focus on race and racism’s continued role and ...
">Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Critical race theory (CRT) was introduced in 1995 and for almost twenty years, the theory has been used as a tool to examine People of Color’s experiences with racism in higher education. This monograph reviews the critical race literature with a focus on race and racism’s continued role and ...
Additional Info:
">Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Critical race theory (CRT) was introduced in 1995 and for almost twenty years, the theory has been used as a tool to examine People of Color’s experiences with racism in higher education. This monograph reviews the critical race literature with a focus on race and racism’s continued role and presence in higher education, including:
• legal studies and history,
• methodology and student development theory,
• the use of storytelling and counterstories, and
• the types of and research on microaggressions.
The goal of the editors is to illuminate CRT as a theoretical framework, analytical tool, and research methodology in higher education. As part of critical race theory, scholars and educators are called upon to extend their commitment to social justice and to the eradication of racism and other forms of oppression.
This is the 3rd issue of the 41st volume of the Jossey-Bass series ASHE Higher Education Report. Each monograph is the definitive analysis of a tough higher education issue, based on thorough research of pertinent literature and institutional experiences. Topics are identified by a national survey. Noted practitioners and scholars are then commissioned to write the reports, with experts providing critical reviews of each manuscript before publication. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Executive Summary
Foreword
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Critical Race Theory
Critical Race Theory in Higher Education
Critical Legal Studies
The Origins of Critical Race Theory
Critical Race Theory
Key Tenets of Critical Race Theory
Critical Race Theory in Higher Education: 20 Years of Theoretical and Research Innovations
ch. 2 Critical Race Theory in Higher Education
Tensions and Possibilities
Race and Racism on the U.S. University Campus
Engaging with Students of Color’s Experiences
Understanding Faculty of Color’s Experiences
Critical Race Theory, Higher Education Policy, and the Law
Conclusion
ch. 3 Critical Race as a Methodology
A Critical Race Methodology
Elements of a Critical Race Methodology
Providing Voice and Legitimizing People of Color’s Experiences
Master Narrative/Majoritarian Stories
Storytelling
Counterstories
Functions of the Counterstory
Types of Counterstories
Descendant Theories of Critical Race Theory
Growing the Counterstory?
Positionality
Conclusion
ch. 4 Critical Race Theory as a (Student) Development Theory
Centering Race in Student Development
Critical Race Theory and Intersectionality
Critical Race Theory and Campus Environments
The Ecological Perspective of Campus Space
Impact to Student Development
Toward a Critical Race Theory of (Student) Leadership
Conclusion: The Educator as Architect
ch. 5 Racial Microaggressions
Racial Microaggressions in Scholarship
Contextualizing Microaggressions
Types of Microaggressions
Research on Microaggressions
Microaggressions and Critical Race Theory
Decolonizing Microaggressions: A Concluding Thought
ch. 6 Critical Race Theory and the Next 20 Years
Reflexivity and Listening
Call to Praxis
Glossary
Notes
References
Name Index
Subject Index
About the Authors
">Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Critical race theory (CRT) was introduced in 1995 and for almost twenty years, the theory has been used as a tool to examine People of Color’s experiences with racism in higher education. This monograph reviews the critical race literature with a focus on race and racism’s continued role and presence in higher education, including:
• legal studies and history,
• methodology and student development theory,
• the use of storytelling and counterstories, and
• the types of and research on microaggressions.
The goal of the editors is to illuminate CRT as a theoretical framework, analytical tool, and research methodology in higher education. As part of critical race theory, scholars and educators are called upon to extend their commitment to social justice and to the eradication of racism and other forms of oppression.
This is the 3rd issue of the 41st volume of the Jossey-Bass series ASHE Higher Education Report. Each monograph is the definitive analysis of a tough higher education issue, based on thorough research of pertinent literature and institutional experiences. Topics are identified by a national survey. Noted practitioners and scholars are then commissioned to write the reports, with experts providing critical reviews of each manuscript before publication. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Executive Summary
Foreword
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Critical Race Theory
Critical Race Theory in Higher Education
Critical Legal Studies
The Origins of Critical Race Theory
Critical Race Theory
Key Tenets of Critical Race Theory
Critical Race Theory in Higher Education: 20 Years of Theoretical and Research Innovations
ch. 2 Critical Race Theory in Higher Education
Tensions and Possibilities
Race and Racism on the U.S. University Campus
Engaging with Students of Color’s Experiences
Understanding Faculty of Color’s Experiences
Critical Race Theory, Higher Education Policy, and the Law
Conclusion
ch. 3 Critical Race as a Methodology
A Critical Race Methodology
Elements of a Critical Race Methodology
Providing Voice and Legitimizing People of Color’s Experiences
Master Narrative/Majoritarian Stories
Storytelling
Counterstories
Functions of the Counterstory
Types of Counterstories
Descendant Theories of Critical Race Theory
Growing the Counterstory?
Positionality
Conclusion
ch. 4 Critical Race Theory as a (Student) Development Theory
Centering Race in Student Development
Critical Race Theory and Intersectionality
Critical Race Theory and Campus Environments
The Ecological Perspective of Campus Space
Impact to Student Development
Toward a Critical Race Theory of (Student) Leadership
Conclusion: The Educator as Architect
ch. 5 Racial Microaggressions
Racial Microaggressions in Scholarship
Contextualizing Microaggressions
Types of Microaggressions
Research on Microaggressions
Microaggressions and Critical Race Theory
Decolonizing Microaggressions: A Concluding Thought
ch. 6 Critical Race Theory and the Next 20 Years
Reflexivity and Listening
Call to Praxis
Glossary
Notes
References
Name Index
Subject Index
About the Authors
Mentoring as Transformative Practice: Supporting Student and Faculty Diversity: New Directions for Higher Education, Number 171
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Scholars examining how women and people of color advance in academia invariably cite mentorship as one of the most important factors in facilitating student and faculty success.
Contributors to this volume underscore the importance of supporting one another, within and across differences, as critical to the development of a ...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Scholars examining how women and people of color advance in academia invariably cite mentorship as one of the most important factors in facilitating student and faculty success.
Contributors to this volume underscore the importance of supporting one another, within and across differences, as critical to the development of a ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Scholars examining how women and people of color advance in academia invariably cite mentorship as one of the most important factors in facilitating student and faculty success.
Contributors to this volume underscore the importance of supporting one another, within and across differences, as critical to the development of a diverse professoriate. This volume emphasizes and highlights:
- the importance of mentorship;
- policies, processes, and practices that result in successful mentoring relationships;
- real life mentoring experiences to inform students, beginning faculty, and those who would be mentors;
- evidence for policy makers about what works in the development of supportive and nurturing higher education learning environments.
The guiding principles underlying successful mentorships, interpersonally and programmatically, presented here can have the potential to transform higher education to better serve the needs of all its members.
This is the 171st volume of the Jossey-Bass quarterly report series New Directions for Higher Education. Addressed to presidents, vice presidents, deans, and other higher education decision makers on all kinds of campuses, it provides timely information and authoritative advice about major issues and administrative problems confronting every institution. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor’s Notes (Caroline S. Turner)
ch. 1 Mentoring Outside the Line: The Importance of Authenticity, Transparency, and Vulnerability in Effective Mentoring Relationships (Sharon Fries-Britt, Jeanette Snider)
Informed by the literature and professional practice, this chapter examines the unique mentoring challenges facing women and underrepresented minorities in higher education. Findings indicate that traditional mentoring approaches fall short in fully supporting the needs of underrepresented populations in higher education.
ch. 2 Digging Deeper: Exploring the Relationship Between Mentoring, Developmental Interactions, and Student Agency (Kimberly A. Griffin, Jennifer L. Eury, Meghan E. Gaffney, with Travis York, Jessica Bennett, Emil Cunningham, Autumn Griffin)
While many cite the importance of having a mentor, focusing on the quality and nature of specific interactions between students and faculty can lead to better strategies promoting student agency. This chapter presents narratives from students who work with the same mentor, focusing on their interactions and how they shaped students’ experiences and outcomes.
ch. 3 Critical Mentoring Practices to Support Diverse Students in Higher Education: Chicana/Latina Faculty Perspectives (Julie L´opez Figueroa, Gloria M. Rodriguez)
This chapter outlines critical practices that emerged from utilizing social justice frameworks to mentor first-generation, underrepresented minority students at the undergraduate to doctoral levels. The mentoring strategies include helping students to reframe instances when faculty and peers unconsciously conflate academic rigor with color-blind scholarship.
ch. 4 Educational Testimonio: Critical Pedagogy as Mentorship (Rebeca Burciaga, Natalia Cruz Navarro)
This chapter chronicles the use of educational testimonio as one approach to critical pedagogy as mentoring in a college classroom. Written from the perspectives of an instructor and a student, it explores educational testimonio as one tool that has implications beyond the classroom, including retention in higher education and supporting the development of aspirations beyond undergraduate schools on the path to the professoriate.
ch. 5 Of Feral Faculty and Magisterial Mowglis: The Domestication of Junior Faculty (Richard J. Reddick)
This chapter presents an assistant professor’s scholarly personal narrative at the precipice of promotion, and reveals how the feral child metaphor might aptly describe many junior professors’ experiences as they navigate a path toward tenure. This chronicling of mentorship in sometimes unexpected venues may aid new faculty and those invested in their success in both earning tenure and retaining them in the field.
ch. 6 Providing the Psychosocial Benefits of Mentoring to Women in STEM: CareerWISE as an Online Solution (Amy E. Dawson, Bianca L. Bernstein, Jennifer M. Bekki)
This chapter outlines the psychosocial aspects of mentoring that help women combat the barriers they commonly face in science, technology, engineering, and mathematics (STEM). The authors describe the CareerWISE online resilience training and how it can address the shortage of effective mentors and role models who have been shown to increase the persistence of women in STEM fields.
ch. 7 Transforming the Undergraduate Research Experience Through Sustained Mentoring: Creating a Strong Support Network and a Collaborative Learning Environment (Erika T. Camacho, Raquell M. Holmes, Stephen A. Wirkus)
This chapter describes how sustained mentoring together with rigorous collaborative learning and community building contributed to successful mathematical research and individual growth in the Applied Mathematical Sciences Summer Institute (AMSSI), a program that focused on women, underrepresented minorities, and individuals from small teaching institutions who might not have had the opportunity to do research otherwise. The collective learning and developmental experiences of AMSSI’s cofounders as students, teaching assistants, and faculty in other research programs, together with their humble upbringings and cultural histories, are what define the unique structure and mentoring blueprint of AMSSI.
ch. 8 Developing a Latino Mentoring Program: Project MALES (Mentoring to Achieve Latino Educational Success) (Victor B. S´aenz, Luis Ponjuan, Jorge Segovia Jr., Jos´e Del Real Viramontes)
This chapter highlights the development of Project MALES (Mentoring to Achieve Latino Educational Success). At the center of Project MALES is a mentoring program that aims to cultivate an engaged support network for males of color at the University of Texas at Austin and across surrounding communities. Specifically, there is a discussion of the theories and framework that guided the creation of this mentoring program and its ongoing development.
ch. 9 Weaving Authencity and Legitimacy: Latina Faculty Peer Mentoring (Anne-Marie N´u˜ nez, Elizabeth T. Murakami, Leslie D. Gonzales)
As an alternative to typical top-down mentoring models, the authors advance a conception of peer mentoring that is based on research about collectivist strategies that Latina faculty employ to navigate the academy. The authors advance recommendations for institutional agents to support mentoring for faculty who are members of historically underrepresented groups.
ch. 10 Enacting Feminist Alliance Principles in a Doctoral Writing Support Group (Beth Blue Swadener, Lacey Peters, Kimberly A. Eversman)
This study utilizes a multivocal narrative approach to analyze the dynamics, accomplishments, and challenges of an interdisciplinary doctoral support group consisting primarily of female members. The authors raise issues of power, alliance, troubling expert-novice models of mentoring, and the role of social justice pedagogy in the group.
Index
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Scholars examining how women and people of color advance in academia invariably cite mentorship as one of the most important factors in facilitating student and faculty success.
Contributors to this volume underscore the importance of supporting one another, within and across differences, as critical to the development of a diverse professoriate. This volume emphasizes and highlights:
- the importance of mentorship;
- policies, processes, and practices that result in successful mentoring relationships;
- real life mentoring experiences to inform students, beginning faculty, and those who would be mentors;
- evidence for policy makers about what works in the development of supportive and nurturing higher education learning environments.
The guiding principles underlying successful mentorships, interpersonally and programmatically, presented here can have the potential to transform higher education to better serve the needs of all its members.
This is the 171st volume of the Jossey-Bass quarterly report series New Directions for Higher Education. Addressed to presidents, vice presidents, deans, and other higher education decision makers on all kinds of campuses, it provides timely information and authoritative advice about major issues and administrative problems confronting every institution. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor’s Notes (Caroline S. Turner)
ch. 1 Mentoring Outside the Line: The Importance of Authenticity, Transparency, and Vulnerability in Effective Mentoring Relationships (Sharon Fries-Britt, Jeanette Snider)
Informed by the literature and professional practice, this chapter examines the unique mentoring challenges facing women and underrepresented minorities in higher education. Findings indicate that traditional mentoring approaches fall short in fully supporting the needs of underrepresented populations in higher education.
ch. 2 Digging Deeper: Exploring the Relationship Between Mentoring, Developmental Interactions, and Student Agency (Kimberly A. Griffin, Jennifer L. Eury, Meghan E. Gaffney, with Travis York, Jessica Bennett, Emil Cunningham, Autumn Griffin)
While many cite the importance of having a mentor, focusing on the quality and nature of specific interactions between students and faculty can lead to better strategies promoting student agency. This chapter presents narratives from students who work with the same mentor, focusing on their interactions and how they shaped students’ experiences and outcomes.
ch. 3 Critical Mentoring Practices to Support Diverse Students in Higher Education: Chicana/Latina Faculty Perspectives (Julie L´opez Figueroa, Gloria M. Rodriguez)
This chapter outlines critical practices that emerged from utilizing social justice frameworks to mentor first-generation, underrepresented minority students at the undergraduate to doctoral levels. The mentoring strategies include helping students to reframe instances when faculty and peers unconsciously conflate academic rigor with color-blind scholarship.
ch. 4 Educational Testimonio: Critical Pedagogy as Mentorship (Rebeca Burciaga, Natalia Cruz Navarro)
This chapter chronicles the use of educational testimonio as one approach to critical pedagogy as mentoring in a college classroom. Written from the perspectives of an instructor and a student, it explores educational testimonio as one tool that has implications beyond the classroom, including retention in higher education and supporting the development of aspirations beyond undergraduate schools on the path to the professoriate.
ch. 5 Of Feral Faculty and Magisterial Mowglis: The Domestication of Junior Faculty (Richard J. Reddick)
This chapter presents an assistant professor’s scholarly personal narrative at the precipice of promotion, and reveals how the feral child metaphor might aptly describe many junior professors’ experiences as they navigate a path toward tenure. This chronicling of mentorship in sometimes unexpected venues may aid new faculty and those invested in their success in both earning tenure and retaining them in the field.
ch. 6 Providing the Psychosocial Benefits of Mentoring to Women in STEM: CareerWISE as an Online Solution (Amy E. Dawson, Bianca L. Bernstein, Jennifer M. Bekki)
This chapter outlines the psychosocial aspects of mentoring that help women combat the barriers they commonly face in science, technology, engineering, and mathematics (STEM). The authors describe the CareerWISE online resilience training and how it can address the shortage of effective mentors and role models who have been shown to increase the persistence of women in STEM fields.
ch. 7 Transforming the Undergraduate Research Experience Through Sustained Mentoring: Creating a Strong Support Network and a Collaborative Learning Environment (Erika T. Camacho, Raquell M. Holmes, Stephen A. Wirkus)
This chapter describes how sustained mentoring together with rigorous collaborative learning and community building contributed to successful mathematical research and individual growth in the Applied Mathematical Sciences Summer Institute (AMSSI), a program that focused on women, underrepresented minorities, and individuals from small teaching institutions who might not have had the opportunity to do research otherwise. The collective learning and developmental experiences of AMSSI’s cofounders as students, teaching assistants, and faculty in other research programs, together with their humble upbringings and cultural histories, are what define the unique structure and mentoring blueprint of AMSSI.
ch. 8 Developing a Latino Mentoring Program: Project MALES (Mentoring to Achieve Latino Educational Success) (Victor B. S´aenz, Luis Ponjuan, Jorge Segovia Jr., Jos´e Del Real Viramontes)
This chapter highlights the development of Project MALES (Mentoring to Achieve Latino Educational Success). At the center of Project MALES is a mentoring program that aims to cultivate an engaged support network for males of color at the University of Texas at Austin and across surrounding communities. Specifically, there is a discussion of the theories and framework that guided the creation of this mentoring program and its ongoing development.
ch. 9 Weaving Authencity and Legitimacy: Latina Faculty Peer Mentoring (Anne-Marie N´u˜ nez, Elizabeth T. Murakami, Leslie D. Gonzales)
As an alternative to typical top-down mentoring models, the authors advance a conception of peer mentoring that is based on research about collectivist strategies that Latina faculty employ to navigate the academy. The authors advance recommendations for institutional agents to support mentoring for faculty who are members of historically underrepresented groups.
ch. 10 Enacting Feminist Alliance Principles in a Doctoral Writing Support Group (Beth Blue Swadener, Lacey Peters, Kimberly A. Eversman)
This study utilizes a multivocal narrative approach to analyze the dynamics, accomplishments, and challenges of an interdisciplinary doctoral support group consisting primarily of female members. The authors raise issues of power, alliance, troubling expert-novice models of mentoring, and the role of social justice pedagogy in the group.
Index
"Socializing Future Faculty to the Values of Undergraduate Education"
Additional Info:
Focuses on socializing future faculty to the values of undergraduate education. Values of hiring colleges and universities; Approaches to graduate preparation; Preparation of future faculty project; Initiatives and strategic benefits. INSET: More about support programs..
Focuses on socializing future faculty to the values of undergraduate education. Values of hiring colleges and universities; Approaches to graduate preparation; Preparation of future faculty project; Initiatives and strategic benefits. INSET: More about support programs..
Additional Info:
Focuses on socializing future faculty to the values of undergraduate education. Values of hiring colleges and universities; Approaches to graduate preparation; Preparation of future faculty project; Initiatives and strategic benefits. INSET: More about support programs..
Focuses on socializing future faculty to the values of undergraduate education. Values of hiring colleges and universities; Approaches to graduate preparation; Preparation of future faculty project; Initiatives and strategic benefits. INSET: More about support programs..
Additional Info:
• A faculty member publishes an article without offering coauthorship to a graduate assistant who has made a substantial conceptual or methodological contribution to the article.
• A professor does not permit graduate students to express viewpoints different from her own.
• A graduate student close to finishing his dissertation cannot reach his traveling advisor, a circumstance that jeopardizes his degree.
This book discusses these and other examples of faculty ...
• A faculty member publishes an article without offering coauthorship to a graduate assistant who has made a substantial conceptual or methodological contribution to the article.
• A professor does not permit graduate students to express viewpoints different from her own.
• A graduate student close to finishing his dissertation cannot reach his traveling advisor, a circumstance that jeopardizes his degree.
This book discusses these and other examples of faculty ...
Additional Info:
• A faculty member publishes an article without offering coauthorship to a graduate assistant who has made a substantial conceptual or methodological contribution to the article.
• A professor does not permit graduate students to express viewpoints different from her own.
• A graduate student close to finishing his dissertation cannot reach his traveling advisor, a circumstance that jeopardizes his degree.
This book discusses these and other examples of faculty misconduct—and how to avoid them.
Using data collected through faculty surveys, the authors describe behaviors associated with graduate teaching which are considered inappropriate and in violation of good teaching practices. They derive a normative structure that consists of five inviolable and eight admonitory proscriptive criteria to help graduate faculty make informed and acceptable professional choices.
The authors discuss the various ways in which faculty members acquire the norms of teaching and mentoring, including the graduate school socialization process, role models, disciplinary codes of ethics, and scholarship about the professoriate and professional performance. Analyzing the rich data gleaned from the faculty surveys, they track how these norms are understood and interpreted across academic disciplines and are influenced by such factors as gender, citizenship, age, academic rank, tenure, research activity, and administrative experience. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Tables
Acknowledgments
Introduction - The Critical Role of Norms in Graduate Education
ch. 1 Incidents of Faculty Improprieties in Graduate Training
ch. 2 Study Design
ch. 3 The Normative Structure of Graduate Education
ch. 4 Norm Espousal by Institutional Type and Academic Discipline
ch. 5 Personal Attributes and Norm Espousal
ch. 6 Norm Espousal and Faculty Professional Attainments and Involvement
ch. 7 Core Norms, Differentiated Norms, and Key Differentiating Factors
ch. 8 Graduate School Socialization and the Internalization of the Norms of Graduate Study
ch. 9 The Support of Graduate Teaching Norms by Supporting Organizations
ch. 10 Further Perspectives on the Internalization of the Norms of Graduate Teaching and Mentoring
ch. 11 Conclusion and Recommendations for Research, Policy, and Practice
Appendix A - The Graduate Teaching and Mentoring Behaviors Inventory
Appendix B - Means and Standard Deviations for Behaviors Included in the Graduate Teaching and Mentoring Behaviors Inventory (GTMBI)
Appendix C - Respondent Bias Assessment
References
Index
• A faculty member publishes an article without offering coauthorship to a graduate assistant who has made a substantial conceptual or methodological contribution to the article.
• A professor does not permit graduate students to express viewpoints different from her own.
• A graduate student close to finishing his dissertation cannot reach his traveling advisor, a circumstance that jeopardizes his degree.
This book discusses these and other examples of faculty misconduct—and how to avoid them.
Using data collected through faculty surveys, the authors describe behaviors associated with graduate teaching which are considered inappropriate and in violation of good teaching practices. They derive a normative structure that consists of five inviolable and eight admonitory proscriptive criteria to help graduate faculty make informed and acceptable professional choices.
The authors discuss the various ways in which faculty members acquire the norms of teaching and mentoring, including the graduate school socialization process, role models, disciplinary codes of ethics, and scholarship about the professoriate and professional performance. Analyzing the rich data gleaned from the faculty surveys, they track how these norms are understood and interpreted across academic disciplines and are influenced by such factors as gender, citizenship, age, academic rank, tenure, research activity, and administrative experience. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Tables
Acknowledgments
Introduction - The Critical Role of Norms in Graduate Education
ch. 1 Incidents of Faculty Improprieties in Graduate Training
ch. 2 Study Design
ch. 3 The Normative Structure of Graduate Education
ch. 4 Norm Espousal by Institutional Type and Academic Discipline
ch. 5 Personal Attributes and Norm Espousal
ch. 6 Norm Espousal and Faculty Professional Attainments and Involvement
ch. 7 Core Norms, Differentiated Norms, and Key Differentiating Factors
ch. 8 Graduate School Socialization and the Internalization of the Norms of Graduate Study
ch. 9 The Support of Graduate Teaching Norms by Supporting Organizations
ch. 10 Further Perspectives on the Internalization of the Norms of Graduate Teaching and Mentoring
ch. 11 Conclusion and Recommendations for Research, Policy, and Practice
Appendix A - The Graduate Teaching and Mentoring Behaviors Inventory
Appendix B - Means and Standard Deviations for Behaviors Included in the Graduate Teaching and Mentoring Behaviors Inventory (GTMBI)
Appendix C - Respondent Bias Assessment
References
Index
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
In The Learning Paradigm College, John Tagg builds on the ground-breaking Change magazine article he coauthored with Robert Barr in 1995, “From Teaching to Learning; A New Paradigm for Undergraduate Education.” That piece defined a paradigm shift happening in American higher education, placing more importance on learning outcomes and less on the quantity of instruction. As Tagg defines it, “Where the Instruction Paradigm highlights formal processes, the Learning Paradigm emphasizes results ...
In The Learning Paradigm College, John Tagg builds on the ground-breaking Change magazine article he coauthored with Robert Barr in 1995, “From Teaching to Learning; A New Paradigm for Undergraduate Education.” That piece defined a paradigm shift happening in American higher education, placing more importance on learning outcomes and less on the quantity of instruction. As Tagg defines it, “Where the Instruction Paradigm highlights formal processes, the Learning Paradigm emphasizes results ...
Additional Info:
In The Learning Paradigm College, John Tagg builds on the ground-breaking Change magazine article he coauthored with Robert Barr in 1995, “From Teaching to Learning; A New Paradigm for Undergraduate Education.” That piece defined a paradigm shift happening in American higher education, placing more importance on learning outcomes and less on the quantity of instruction. As Tagg defines it, “Where the Instruction Paradigm highlights formal processes, the Learning Paradigm emphasizes results or outcomes. Where the Instruction Paradigm attends to classes, the Learning Paradigm attends to students.” (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Dedication
About the Author
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
Part I. A New Paradigm?
ch. 1 The Challenge
ch. 2 The Problem of Scale: Why Innovations Don’t Transform Colleges
ch. 3 The Instruction Paradigm: Process Before Purpose
ch. 4 The Route to Transformation: The Learning Paradigm, Old and New
Part II. The Foundation: The Learners and the Learning
ch. 5 The Learners
ch. 6 Self-Theories and Academic Motivation
ch. 7 Approaches to Learning
Part III. The Learning Environment of the College
ch. 8 The Whole That Determines the Parts
ch. 9 The Cognitive Economy of the Instruction Paradigm College
Part IV. A Design for Learning
ch. 10 The Cognitive Economy of the Learning Paradigm College
ch. 11 A Learning Paradigm College Promotes Intrinsically Rewarding Goals
ch. 12 A Learning Paradigm College Requires Frequent, Continual, Connected, and Authentic Student Performances
ch. 13 A Learning Paradigm College Provides Consistent, Continual, Interactive Feedback to Students
ch. 14 A Learning Paradigm College Provides a Long Time Horizon for Learning
ch. 15 A Learning Paradigm College Creates Purposeful Communities of Practice
ch. 16 A Learning Paradigm College Aligns All of Its Activities Around the Mission of Producing Student Learning
Part V. Transforming the College
ch. 17 Barriers to Transformation
ch. 18 Scaffolding for Change
ch. 19 The Golden Rule
References
Index
In The Learning Paradigm College, John Tagg builds on the ground-breaking Change magazine article he coauthored with Robert Barr in 1995, “From Teaching to Learning; A New Paradigm for Undergraduate Education.” That piece defined a paradigm shift happening in American higher education, placing more importance on learning outcomes and less on the quantity of instruction. As Tagg defines it, “Where the Instruction Paradigm highlights formal processes, the Learning Paradigm emphasizes results or outcomes. Where the Instruction Paradigm attends to classes, the Learning Paradigm attends to students.” (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Dedication
About the Author
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
Part I. A New Paradigm?
ch. 1 The Challenge
ch. 2 The Problem of Scale: Why Innovations Don’t Transform Colleges
ch. 3 The Instruction Paradigm: Process Before Purpose
ch. 4 The Route to Transformation: The Learning Paradigm, Old and New
Part II. The Foundation: The Learners and the Learning
ch. 5 The Learners
ch. 6 Self-Theories and Academic Motivation
ch. 7 Approaches to Learning
Part III. The Learning Environment of the College
ch. 8 The Whole That Determines the Parts
ch. 9 The Cognitive Economy of the Instruction Paradigm College
Part IV. A Design for Learning
ch. 10 The Cognitive Economy of the Learning Paradigm College
ch. 11 A Learning Paradigm College Promotes Intrinsically Rewarding Goals
ch. 12 A Learning Paradigm College Requires Frequent, Continual, Connected, and Authentic Student Performances
ch. 13 A Learning Paradigm College Provides Consistent, Continual, Interactive Feedback to Students
ch. 14 A Learning Paradigm College Provides a Long Time Horizon for Learning
ch. 15 A Learning Paradigm College Creates Purposeful Communities of Practice
ch. 16 A Learning Paradigm College Aligns All of Its Activities Around the Mission of Producing Student Learning
Part V. Transforming the College
ch. 17 Barriers to Transformation
ch. 18 Scaffolding for Change
ch. 19 The Golden Rule
References
Index
Additional Info:
Having attended her first "unconference," the writer shares five ideas she brought to the event about "Teaching teachers technology," and five ideas she returned with. Also includes reflection on the "unconference" as a model for better faculty pedagogy workshops.
Having attended her first "unconference," the writer shares five ideas she brought to the event about "Teaching teachers technology," and five ideas she returned with. Also includes reflection on the "unconference" as a model for better faculty pedagogy workshops.
Additional Info:
Having attended her first "unconference," the writer shares five ideas she brought to the event about "Teaching teachers technology," and five ideas she returned with. Also includes reflection on the "unconference" as a model for better faculty pedagogy workshops.
Having attended her first "unconference," the writer shares five ideas she brought to the event about "Teaching teachers technology," and five ideas she returned with. Also includes reflection on the "unconference" as a model for better faculty pedagogy workshops.
Additional Info:
A faculty learning community is a faculty group engaging in activities that provide learning, development, and community. This web page lists 10 qualities guide the design and process of a faculty learning community.
A faculty learning community is a faculty group engaging in activities that provide learning, development, and community. This web page lists 10 qualities guide the design and process of a faculty learning community.
Additional Info:
A faculty learning community is a faculty group engaging in activities that provide learning, development, and community. This web page lists 10 qualities guide the design and process of a faculty learning community.
A faculty learning community is a faculty group engaging in activities that provide learning, development, and community. This web page lists 10 qualities guide the design and process of a faculty learning community.
Additional Info:
No matter what the writing assignment -- journal article, executive summary, grant proposal, curriculum guide, or consultant's report -- The Work of Writing will serve as an invaluable aid for faculty and professionals who need to hone their writing skills. In this book, Elizabeth Rankin draws on her years of experience as a leader of academic writing groups and shares a wealth of scenarios from actual writing experiences. These helpful ...
No matter what the writing assignment -- journal article, executive summary, grant proposal, curriculum guide, or consultant's report -- The Work of Writing will serve as an invaluable aid for faculty and professionals who need to hone their writing skills. In this book, Elizabeth Rankin draws on her years of experience as a leader of academic writing groups and shares a wealth of scenarios from actual writing experiences. These helpful ...
Additional Info:
No matter what the writing assignment -- journal article, executive summary, grant proposal, curriculum guide, or consultant's report -- The Work of Writing will serve as an invaluable aid for faculty and professionals who need to hone their writing skills. In this book, Elizabeth Rankin draws on her years of experience as a leader of academic writing groups and shares a wealth of scenarios from actual writing experiences. These helpful stories speak to complex issues of audience, purpose, genre, and voice that writers routinely address. Using the strategies found in The Work of Writing will make the job of the writer more manageable, more productive, and more rewarding. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
About the Author
ch. 1 The Work of Writing
ch. 2 Contributing to the Professional Conversation
ch. 3 Meeting Readers' Needs and Expectations
ch. 4 Finding Your Professional Voice
ch. 5 Seeing the Project Through
Afterword
App. A: Organizing a Writing Group
App. B: Sample Book Proposal Guidelines
App. C: A Few Good Books on Writingv References
Index
No matter what the writing assignment -- journal article, executive summary, grant proposal, curriculum guide, or consultant's report -- The Work of Writing will serve as an invaluable aid for faculty and professionals who need to hone their writing skills. In this book, Elizabeth Rankin draws on her years of experience as a leader of academic writing groups and shares a wealth of scenarios from actual writing experiences. These helpful stories speak to complex issues of audience, purpose, genre, and voice that writers routinely address. Using the strategies found in The Work of Writing will make the job of the writer more manageable, more productive, and more rewarding. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
About the Author
ch. 1 The Work of Writing
ch. 2 Contributing to the Professional Conversation
ch. 3 Meeting Readers' Needs and Expectations
ch. 4 Finding Your Professional Voice
ch. 5 Seeing the Project Through
Afterword
App. A: Organizing a Writing Group
App. B: Sample Book Proposal Guidelines
App. C: A Few Good Books on Writingv References
Index
Additional Info:
An article that reviews progress scholars and institutions have made to reshape the potential connections between faculty research and student learning, since Ernest Boyer’s landmark 1990 essay, “Scholarship Reconsidered” – developing our understanding of the research evidence, focusing on course design, and starting to reshape institutions.
An article that reviews progress scholars and institutions have made to reshape the potential connections between faculty research and student learning, since Ernest Boyer’s landmark 1990 essay, “Scholarship Reconsidered” – developing our understanding of the research evidence, focusing on course design, and starting to reshape institutions.
Additional Info:
An article that reviews progress scholars and institutions have made to reshape the potential connections between faculty research and student learning, since Ernest Boyer’s landmark 1990 essay, “Scholarship Reconsidered” – developing our understanding of the research evidence, focusing on course design, and starting to reshape institutions.
An article that reviews progress scholars and institutions have made to reshape the potential connections between faculty research and student learning, since Ernest Boyer’s landmark 1990 essay, “Scholarship Reconsidered” – developing our understanding of the research evidence, focusing on course design, and starting to reshape institutions.
"Enhancing the Research-Teaching Nexus"
Additional Info:
A short article by Diane Jonte-Pace, reviewing recent literature and issues, and commenting on specifically on aspects of the situation at Santa Clara University.
A short article by Diane Jonte-Pace, reviewing recent literature and issues, and commenting on specifically on aspects of the situation at Santa Clara University.
Additional Info:
A short article by Diane Jonte-Pace, reviewing recent literature and issues, and commenting on specifically on aspects of the situation at Santa Clara University.
A short article by Diane Jonte-Pace, reviewing recent literature and issues, and commenting on specifically on aspects of the situation at Santa Clara University.
Additional Info:
A quick review of the concept and basic contents of a teaching portfolio, by Boston University's Center for Excellence and Innovation in Teaching.
A quick review of the concept and basic contents of a teaching portfolio, by Boston University's Center for Excellence and Innovation in Teaching.
Additional Info:
A quick review of the concept and basic contents of a teaching portfolio, by Boston University's Center for Excellence and Innovation in Teaching.
A quick review of the concept and basic contents of a teaching portfolio, by Boston University's Center for Excellence and Innovation in Teaching.
Additional Info:
Written for educators, administrators, policy makers, and anyone else concerned with the future of higher education, Rethinking Faculty Work shows how changes in higher education are transforming the careers of faculty and provides a model that makes it possible for all faculty to be in a position to do their best. This important resource offers a vision of academic workplaces that will attract superb faculty committed to fulfilling the missions ...
Written for educators, administrators, policy makers, and anyone else concerned with the future of higher education, Rethinking Faculty Work shows how changes in higher education are transforming the careers of faculty and provides a model that makes it possible for all faculty to be in a position to do their best. This important resource offers a vision of academic workplaces that will attract superb faculty committed to fulfilling the missions ...
Additional Info:
Written for educators, administrators, policy makers, and anyone else concerned with the future of higher education, Rethinking Faculty Work shows how changes in higher education are transforming the careers of faculty and provides a model that makes it possible for all faculty to be in a position to do their best. This important resource offers a vision of academic workplaces that will attract superb faculty committed to fulfilling the missions of the universities and colleges where they work. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Part One: Higher Education's Changing Context
ch. 1 The Changing Context for Faculty Work and Workplaces
ch. 2 Trends in the National Workplace
ch. 3 Faculty Appointments and Faculty Members: Diversification, Growth, and Diversity
ch. 4 The Academic Profession Today: Diverse Appointments to Meet Diverse Needs
ch. 5 Attracting and Retaining Excellent Faculty
Part Two: The Framework
ch. 6 The Framework of Essential Elements
ch. 7 Respect: The Foundation for the Essential Elements
ch. 8 Shared Responsibility and Joint Leadership
Part Three: The Essential Elements
ch. 9 Equity in Academic Appointments
ch. 10 Academic Freedom
ch. 11 Ensuring Flexibility in Academic Appointments
ch. 12 Professional Growth
ch. 13 Collegiality
ch. 14 Why Rethink Faculty Work and Workplaces? A Call to Action
References
Name Index
Subject Index
Written for educators, administrators, policy makers, and anyone else concerned with the future of higher education, Rethinking Faculty Work shows how changes in higher education are transforming the careers of faculty and provides a model that makes it possible for all faculty to be in a position to do their best. This important resource offers a vision of academic workplaces that will attract superb faculty committed to fulfilling the missions of the universities and colleges where they work. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Part One: Higher Education's Changing Context
ch. 1 The Changing Context for Faculty Work and Workplaces
ch. 2 Trends in the National Workplace
ch. 3 Faculty Appointments and Faculty Members: Diversification, Growth, and Diversity
ch. 4 The Academic Profession Today: Diverse Appointments to Meet Diverse Needs
ch. 5 Attracting and Retaining Excellent Faculty
Part Two: The Framework
ch. 6 The Framework of Essential Elements
ch. 7 Respect: The Foundation for the Essential Elements
ch. 8 Shared Responsibility and Joint Leadership
Part Three: The Essential Elements
ch. 9 Equity in Academic Appointments
ch. 10 Academic Freedom
ch. 11 Ensuring Flexibility in Academic Appointments
ch. 12 Professional Growth
ch. 13 Collegiality
ch. 14 Why Rethink Faculty Work and Workplaces? A Call to Action
References
Name Index
Subject Index
Additional Info:
Focuses on the role of faculty members in the career of students. Anxieties expressed by deans and presidents of schools on how faculty members should be trained; How the popularity of religious studies reshaped the training of theological faculty; Capabilities of most theological faculty.
Focuses on the role of faculty members in the career of students. Anxieties expressed by deans and presidents of schools on how faculty members should be trained; How the popularity of religious studies reshaped the training of theological faculty; Capabilities of most theological faculty.
Additional Info:
Focuses on the role of faculty members in the career of students. Anxieties expressed by deans and presidents of schools on how faculty members should be trained; How the popularity of religious studies reshaped the training of theological faculty; Capabilities of most theological faculty.
Focuses on the role of faculty members in the career of students. Anxieties expressed by deans and presidents of schools on how faculty members should be trained; How the popularity of religious studies reshaped the training of theological faculty; Capabilities of most theological faculty.
Using Network and Mobile Technology to Bridge Formal and Informal Learning
Additional Info:
- includes a framework for the sustainability of new educational paradigms based on the combination of formal and informal learning processes supported by network and mobile technology (NMT)
- provides a series of recommendations on how to use attitudes towards NMT gained outside the school to integrate formal and informal learning
- gives a teacher training approach on how to use network and mobile technology-based informal learning to enhance ...
- includes a framework for the sustainability of new educational paradigms based on the combination of formal and informal learning processes supported by network and mobile technology (NMT)
- provides a series of recommendations on how to use attitudes towards NMT gained outside the school to integrate formal and informal learning
- gives a teacher training approach on how to use network and mobile technology-based informal learning to enhance ...
Additional Info:
- includes a framework for the sustainability of new educational paradigms based on the combination of formal and informal learning processes supported by network and mobile technology (NMT)
- provides a series of recommendations on how to use attitudes towards NMT gained outside the school to integrate formal and informal learning
- gives a teacher training approach on how to use network and mobile technology-based informal learning to enhance formal learning pathways
An ever-widening gap exists between how students and schools use communication technology. Using Network and Mobile Technology to Bridge Formal and Informal Learning introduces new methods (inspired by ‘pedagogy 2.0’) of harnessing the potential of communication technologies for teaching and learning. This book considers how attitudes towards network and mobile technology (NMT) gained outside the school can be shunted into new educational paradigms combining formal and informal learning processes. It begins with an overview of these paradigms, and their sustainability. It then considers the pedagogical dimension of formal/informal integration through NMT, moving on to teachers’ professional development. Next, the organizational development of schools in the context of formal and informal learning is detailed. Finally, the book covers the role of technologies supporting formal/informal integration into subject-oriented education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of figures and tables
List of abbreviations
Preface
About the contributors
ch. 1 Tapping the motivational potential of mobile handhelds: defining the research agenda (Cathy Tran, Mark Warschauer, and AnneMarie M. Conley)
- Introduction
- Educational technology and motivation: past, present and future
- Proposed research strands for motivation and mobile handheld technology
- Methodological considerations for research in mobile learning and motivation
- Conclusion
- Acknowledgments
- References
ch. 2 Using social network sites and mobile technology to scaffold equity of access to cultural resources (John Cook, Norbert Pachler, and Ben Bachmair)
- Introduction
- Resources for learning: self-representation and writing in a school context
- Key concepts
- Using NMT for bridging social capital
- Conclusions
- Notes
- Bibliography (John Cook, Norbert Pachler, Ben Bachmair)
ch. 3 A mobile Web 2.0 framework: reconceptualising teaching and learning (Thomas Cochrane, and Roger Bateman)
- Introduction
- Background
- Mobile Web 2.0 design framework: some examples of use
- Mobile Web 2.0 framework: key aspects
- Discussion
- Conclusion
- Bibliography
ch. 4 Facing up to it: blending formal and informal learning opportunities in higher education contexts (Julie Willems, and Debra Bateman)
- Introduction
- The blurring of formal and informal learning
- A new model for the knowledge economy
- Methodology
- Discussion
- Conclusionv - Bibliography
ch. 5 Networked lives for learning: digital media and young people across formal and informal contexts (Solveig Roth, and Ola Erstad)
- Introduction
- Networked lives
- Learning lives
- Methodology and research context
- Three portraits
- Interpretation of the portraits
- Conclusion
- Note
- Bibliography
ch. 6 Network and mobile technologies in education: a call for e-teachers (Guglielmo Trentin)
- Introduction
- The key issues
- From teacher to e-teacher
- E-teacher education and professional development
- Some conclusive reflections on e-teacher status
- Note
- Bibliography
ch. 7 Networked informal learning and continuing teacher education (Manuela Repetto)
- Introduction
- The Aladin project: general approach and activities
- The Aladin project: results and attestations
- Conclusion
- Note
- Bibliography
ch. 8 A conclusive thought: the opportunity to change education is, literally, at hand (Cathlee A. Norris, and Elliot Soloway)
- Introduction
- Technology = opportunity
- The Age of Mobilism = opportunity for K-12 to finally change
- Scaffolding the ‘demanded thinking’
- Barriers to change
- Stay tuned!
- Acknowledgment
- Notes
- Bibliography
Index
- includes a framework for the sustainability of new educational paradigms based on the combination of formal and informal learning processes supported by network and mobile technology (NMT)
- provides a series of recommendations on how to use attitudes towards NMT gained outside the school to integrate formal and informal learning
- gives a teacher training approach on how to use network and mobile technology-based informal learning to enhance formal learning pathways
An ever-widening gap exists between how students and schools use communication technology. Using Network and Mobile Technology to Bridge Formal and Informal Learning introduces new methods (inspired by ‘pedagogy 2.0’) of harnessing the potential of communication technologies for teaching and learning. This book considers how attitudes towards network and mobile technology (NMT) gained outside the school can be shunted into new educational paradigms combining formal and informal learning processes. It begins with an overview of these paradigms, and their sustainability. It then considers the pedagogical dimension of formal/informal integration through NMT, moving on to teachers’ professional development. Next, the organizational development of schools in the context of formal and informal learning is detailed. Finally, the book covers the role of technologies supporting formal/informal integration into subject-oriented education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of figures and tables
List of abbreviations
Preface
About the contributors
ch. 1 Tapping the motivational potential of mobile handhelds: defining the research agenda (Cathy Tran, Mark Warschauer, and AnneMarie M. Conley)
- Introduction
- Educational technology and motivation: past, present and future
- Proposed research strands for motivation and mobile handheld technology
- Methodological considerations for research in mobile learning and motivation
- Conclusion
- Acknowledgments
- References
ch. 2 Using social network sites and mobile technology to scaffold equity of access to cultural resources (John Cook, Norbert Pachler, and Ben Bachmair)
- Introduction
- Resources for learning: self-representation and writing in a school context
- Key concepts
- Using NMT for bridging social capital
- Conclusions
- Notes
- Bibliography (John Cook, Norbert Pachler, Ben Bachmair)
ch. 3 A mobile Web 2.0 framework: reconceptualising teaching and learning (Thomas Cochrane, and Roger Bateman)
- Introduction
- Background
- Mobile Web 2.0 design framework: some examples of use
- Mobile Web 2.0 framework: key aspects
- Discussion
- Conclusion
- Bibliography
ch. 4 Facing up to it: blending formal and informal learning opportunities in higher education contexts (Julie Willems, and Debra Bateman)
- Introduction
- The blurring of formal and informal learning
- A new model for the knowledge economy
- Methodology
- Discussion
- Conclusionv - Bibliography
ch. 5 Networked lives for learning: digital media and young people across formal and informal contexts (Solveig Roth, and Ola Erstad)
- Introduction
- Networked lives
- Learning lives
- Methodology and research context
- Three portraits
- Interpretation of the portraits
- Conclusion
- Note
- Bibliography
ch. 6 Network and mobile technologies in education: a call for e-teachers (Guglielmo Trentin)
- Introduction
- The key issues
- From teacher to e-teacher
- E-teacher education and professional development
- Some conclusive reflections on e-teacher status
- Note
- Bibliography
ch. 7 Networked informal learning and continuing teacher education (Manuela Repetto)
- Introduction
- The Aladin project: general approach and activities
- The Aladin project: results and attestations
- Conclusion
- Note
- Bibliography
ch. 8 A conclusive thought: the opportunity to change education is, literally, at hand (Cathlee A. Norris, and Elliot Soloway)
- Introduction
- Technology = opportunity
- The Age of Mobilism = opportunity for K-12 to finally change
- Scaffolding the ‘demanded thinking’
- Barriers to change
- Stay tuned!
- Acknowledgment
- Notes
- Bibliography
Index
Preparing for Promotion, Tenure, and Annual Review: A Faculty Guide, Second Edition
Additional Info:
This practical, best-selling book has guided thousands of faculty through the promotion and tenure process since its publication in 1995. This new edition has been significantly revised and expanded, but has also kept its focus on process—what faculty can do to make a better case for why they should be promoted or tenured.
This new edition of Preparing for Promotion, Tenure, and Annual Review contains a number of ...
This practical, best-selling book has guided thousands of faculty through the promotion and tenure process since its publication in 1995. This new edition has been significantly revised and expanded, but has also kept its focus on process—what faculty can do to make a better case for why they should be promoted or tenured.
This new edition of Preparing for Promotion, Tenure, and Annual Review contains a number of ...
Additional Info:
This practical, best-selling book has guided thousands of faculty through the promotion and tenure process since its publication in 1995. This new edition has been significantly revised and expanded, but has also kept its focus on process—what faculty can do to make a better case for why they should be promoted or tenured.
This new edition of Preparing for Promotion, Tenure, and Annual Review contains a number of additional resources not included in the previous version—materials that are designed to help faculty prepare for a major professional review—such as post-tenure review, teaching with technology, dealing with changing guidelines and policies, and suggestions on how annual review materials can be used as a foundation for the promotion and tenure portfolio.
In addition to updated references and resources, there are also expanded sections on scholarship, on teaching and on advising, on how to best document faculty role and impact as part of a team, and on collegiality. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
About the Author
Preface
Acknowledgments.
Introduction
Part I: Process
ch. 1 Planning Ahead
ch. 2 Documenting Your Work
Part II: Resources
ch. 3 Assessing Collegiality: A Faculty Survey
ch. 4 Documenting Effectiveness and Impact as a Member of a Team
ch. 5 Mini-Quest: Questionnaire for Evaluating an Instructional Unit
ch. 6 Documenting an Instructional Innovation or Use of Technology: Guidelines for Faculty
ch. 7 Student Ratings of Faculty: Special Instructions Settings
ch. 8 Evaluating an Advisor: Slelected Items From the ACT Survey of Academic Advising
ch. 9 Documenting and Assessing the Work of Faculty
ch. 10 The Teaching Portfolio: Narrative Guidelines of Faculty
ch. 11 Evaluating Teaching: Selected Additional References
ch. 12 Preparing for Promotion, Tenure, and Annual Review: A Faculty Checklist
Index
This practical, best-selling book has guided thousands of faculty through the promotion and tenure process since its publication in 1995. This new edition has been significantly revised and expanded, but has also kept its focus on process—what faculty can do to make a better case for why they should be promoted or tenured.
This new edition of Preparing for Promotion, Tenure, and Annual Review contains a number of additional resources not included in the previous version—materials that are designed to help faculty prepare for a major professional review—such as post-tenure review, teaching with technology, dealing with changing guidelines and policies, and suggestions on how annual review materials can be used as a foundation for the promotion and tenure portfolio.
In addition to updated references and resources, there are also expanded sections on scholarship, on teaching and on advising, on how to best document faculty role and impact as part of a team, and on collegiality. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
About the Author
Preface
Acknowledgments.
Introduction
Part I: Process
ch. 1 Planning Ahead
ch. 2 Documenting Your Work
Part II: Resources
ch. 3 Assessing Collegiality: A Faculty Survey
ch. 4 Documenting Effectiveness and Impact as a Member of a Team
ch. 5 Mini-Quest: Questionnaire for Evaluating an Instructional Unit
ch. 6 Documenting an Instructional Innovation or Use of Technology: Guidelines for Faculty
ch. 7 Student Ratings of Faculty: Special Instructions Settings
ch. 8 Evaluating an Advisor: Slelected Items From the ACT Survey of Academic Advising
ch. 9 Documenting and Assessing the Work of Faculty
ch. 10 The Teaching Portfolio: Narrative Guidelines of Faculty
ch. 11 Evaluating Teaching: Selected Additional References
ch. 12 Preparing for Promotion, Tenure, and Annual Review: A Faculty Checklist
Index
Additional Info:
Trustees and boards of theological schools provide long-range guidance and governance for their institution and it is crucial that they have the skills, knowledge and information to make sound and effective decisions.
In this issue:
• Who are the trustees of the approximately 250 theological schools in the United States?
• Do theological schools have the trustees they need? Do they have the perspective, motivation and capacity ...
Trustees and boards of theological schools provide long-range guidance and governance for their institution and it is crucial that they have the skills, knowledge and information to make sound and effective decisions.
In this issue:
• Who are the trustees of the approximately 250 theological schools in the United States?
• Do theological schools have the trustees they need? Do they have the perspective, motivation and capacity ...
Additional Info:
Trustees and boards of theological schools provide long-range guidance and governance for their institution and it is crucial that they have the skills, knowledge and information to make sound and effective decisions.
In this issue:
• Who are the trustees of the approximately 250 theological schools in the United States?
• Do theological schools have the trustees they need? Do they have the perspective, motivation and capacity that their institutions most urgently require?
(From the Publisher)
Trustees and boards of theological schools provide long-range guidance and governance for their institution and it is crucial that they have the skills, knowledge and information to make sound and effective decisions.
In this issue:
• Who are the trustees of the approximately 250 theological schools in the United States?
• Do theological schools have the trustees they need? Do they have the perspective, motivation and capacity that their institutions most urgently require?
(From the Publisher)
"The Re-examination of Faculty Priorities"
Additional Info:
Discusses how university presidents and provosts across America have been re-examining various aspects of the faculty reward system--from the obligations faculty are expected to perform, to the ways teaching and service are evaluated, to the bases for promotion and advancement. What set off this re-examination; Observations into changing expectations; Changes in how faculty are evaluated; Shifts in faculty incentives and rewards.
Discusses how university presidents and provosts across America have been re-examining various aspects of the faculty reward system--from the obligations faculty are expected to perform, to the ways teaching and service are evaluated, to the bases for promotion and advancement. What set off this re-examination; Observations into changing expectations; Changes in how faculty are evaluated; Shifts in faculty incentives and rewards.
Additional Info:
Discusses how university presidents and provosts across America have been re-examining various aspects of the faculty reward system--from the obligations faculty are expected to perform, to the ways teaching and service are evaluated, to the bases for promotion and advancement. What set off this re-examination; Observations into changing expectations; Changes in how faculty are evaluated; Shifts in faculty incentives and rewards.
Discusses how university presidents and provosts across America have been re-examining various aspects of the faculty reward system--from the obligations faculty are expected to perform, to the ways teaching and service are evaluated, to the bases for promotion and advancement. What set off this re-examination; Observations into changing expectations; Changes in how faculty are evaluated; Shifts in faculty incentives and rewards.
Teaching and Learning from the Inside Out: Revitalizing Ourselves and Our Institutions
Additional Info:
By reclaiming the passions of our hearts and exploring insights and ideas, we begin a remembering of ourselves. As we begin to reclaim our wholeness, we also have the capacity to renew and revitalize our institutions from within.
After a long career of writing and speaking about how living in congruence—without division between inner and outer life—allows for being present with ourselves and those who journey ...
By reclaiming the passions of our hearts and exploring insights and ideas, we begin a remembering of ourselves. As we begin to reclaim our wholeness, we also have the capacity to renew and revitalize our institutions from within.
After a long career of writing and speaking about how living in congruence—without division between inner and outer life—allows for being present with ourselves and those who journey ...
Additional Info:
By reclaiming the passions of our hearts and exploring insights and ideas, we begin a remembering of ourselves. As we begin to reclaim our wholeness, we also have the capacity to renew and revitalize our institutions from within.
After a long career of writing and speaking about how living in congruence—without division between inner and outer life—allows for being present with ourselves and those who journey with us, Parker Palmer and colleagues at the Center for Courage & Renewal developed a process of shared exploration. This Circle of Trust approach encourages people to live and work more authentically within their families, workplaces, and communities.
This issue explores the transformative power of engaging in a Circle of Trust. The authors examine its direct applications to teaching and learning, and they explore and discuss the research being done by the facilitators of this work.
This is the 130th volume of this Jossey-Bass higher education series. New Directions for Teaching and Learning offers a comprehensive range of ideas and techniques for improving college teaching based on the experience of seasoned instructors and the latest findings of educational and psychological researchers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 Principles and Practices of the Circle of Trust Approach 3- The directors of the Center for Courage & Renewal discuss the principles and practices of a Circle of Trust approach that have broad applicability across disciplines of teaching and learning. (Terry Chadsey, and Marcy Jackson)
ch. 2 Soul and Role Dialogues in Higher Education: Healing the Divided Self - This chapter describes the creation of a university faculty–staff group formed to explore the deep heartfelt and heartbroken nature of work in academia and to develop an intentional community to discuss ways of working productively in the tension between soul and role in higher education. (Paul Michalec, and Gary Brower)
ch. 3 The Circle of Trust Approach and a Counselor Training Program: A Hand in Glove Fit - This chapter explains how the Circle of Trust principles and practices have been actively infused in a Master's of Counseling Psychology, Marriage and Family Therapy Program and issues a call for systemic reform in our institutions of higher education to embrace a model more aligned with the relational and connected world in which we live. (Judith A. Goodell)
ch. 4 Dialing In to a Circle of Trust: A 'Medium' Tech Experiment and Poetic Evaluation - A distance learning model in Montana uses "found poems" as an evaluative tool to provide evidence that elements of transformational learning are achievable without direct face-to-face interaction between participants. (Christine T. Love)
ch. 5 The Power of Paradox in Learning to Teach - This chapter acknowledges the inherent uncertainty of both teaching and learning to teach and how learning to hold paradoxes may help teacher candidates live creatively with ambiguity. (Karen Noordhoff)
ch. 6 The Role of Identity in Transformational Learning, Teaching, and Leading - This chapter explores the relationship between the development of identity and integrity and the process of transformation within the context of a leadership preparation program. (Michael I. Poutiatine, and Dennis A. Conners)
ch. 7 Lessons Learned from Transformational Professional Development - A description and evaluation of a transformational professional development approach resulting in school cultures with greater relational trust and responsibility and commitment therein. (Twyla T. Miranda)
ch. 8 Circles of Learning in Mississippi: Community Recovery and Democracy Building - How an innovative community recovery and democracy building project, begun in the wake of Hurricane Katrina, offers a new approach for social change that addresses the root of human suffering lodged deep in the human heart where seeds of transformation also rest. (Bonnie Allen, and Estrus Tucker)
ch. 9 Measuring the Impact of the Circle of Trust Approach - This research identifies the impact of the Circle of Trust experience on the personal lives of the participants and the ways in which the experience has led to constructive action in their professional roles. (Janet Smith)
Index
By reclaiming the passions of our hearts and exploring insights and ideas, we begin a remembering of ourselves. As we begin to reclaim our wholeness, we also have the capacity to renew and revitalize our institutions from within.
After a long career of writing and speaking about how living in congruence—without division between inner and outer life—allows for being present with ourselves and those who journey with us, Parker Palmer and colleagues at the Center for Courage & Renewal developed a process of shared exploration. This Circle of Trust approach encourages people to live and work more authentically within their families, workplaces, and communities.
This issue explores the transformative power of engaging in a Circle of Trust. The authors examine its direct applications to teaching and learning, and they explore and discuss the research being done by the facilitators of this work.
This is the 130th volume of this Jossey-Bass higher education series. New Directions for Teaching and Learning offers a comprehensive range of ideas and techniques for improving college teaching based on the experience of seasoned instructors and the latest findings of educational and psychological researchers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 Principles and Practices of the Circle of Trust Approach 3- The directors of the Center for Courage & Renewal discuss the principles and practices of a Circle of Trust approach that have broad applicability across disciplines of teaching and learning. (Terry Chadsey, and Marcy Jackson)
ch. 2 Soul and Role Dialogues in Higher Education: Healing the Divided Self - This chapter describes the creation of a university faculty–staff group formed to explore the deep heartfelt and heartbroken nature of work in academia and to develop an intentional community to discuss ways of working productively in the tension between soul and role in higher education. (Paul Michalec, and Gary Brower)
ch. 3 The Circle of Trust Approach and a Counselor Training Program: A Hand in Glove Fit - This chapter explains how the Circle of Trust principles and practices have been actively infused in a Master's of Counseling Psychology, Marriage and Family Therapy Program and issues a call for systemic reform in our institutions of higher education to embrace a model more aligned with the relational and connected world in which we live. (Judith A. Goodell)
ch. 4 Dialing In to a Circle of Trust: A 'Medium' Tech Experiment and Poetic Evaluation - A distance learning model in Montana uses "found poems" as an evaluative tool to provide evidence that elements of transformational learning are achievable without direct face-to-face interaction between participants. (Christine T. Love)
ch. 5 The Power of Paradox in Learning to Teach - This chapter acknowledges the inherent uncertainty of both teaching and learning to teach and how learning to hold paradoxes may help teacher candidates live creatively with ambiguity. (Karen Noordhoff)
ch. 6 The Role of Identity in Transformational Learning, Teaching, and Leading - This chapter explores the relationship between the development of identity and integrity and the process of transformation within the context of a leadership preparation program. (Michael I. Poutiatine, and Dennis A. Conners)
ch. 7 Lessons Learned from Transformational Professional Development - A description and evaluation of a transformational professional development approach resulting in school cultures with greater relational trust and responsibility and commitment therein. (Twyla T. Miranda)
ch. 8 Circles of Learning in Mississippi: Community Recovery and Democracy Building - How an innovative community recovery and democracy building project, begun in the wake of Hurricane Katrina, offers a new approach for social change that addresses the root of human suffering lodged deep in the human heart where seeds of transformation also rest. (Bonnie Allen, and Estrus Tucker)
ch. 9 Measuring the Impact of the Circle of Trust Approach - This research identifies the impact of the Circle of Trust experience on the personal lives of the participants and the ways in which the experience has led to constructive action in their professional roles. (Janet Smith)
Index
Transformative Conversations: A Guide to Mentoring Communities Among Colleagues in Higher Education
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: From the Inter-generational Mentoring Community project, which develops the next generation of academic leaders, comes formation mentoring, a process to enable faculty to recover, sustain, and further develop a sense of vocation, mission, and purpose. This book is a concise and practical guide to convening and sustaining these kinds of formation ...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: From the Inter-generational Mentoring Community project, which develops the next generation of academic leaders, comes formation mentoring, a process to enable faculty to recover, sustain, and further develop a sense of vocation, mission, and purpose. This book is a concise and practical guide to convening and sustaining these kinds of formation ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: From the Inter-generational Mentoring Community project, which develops the next generation of academic leaders, comes formation mentoring, a process to enable faculty to recover, sustain, and further develop a sense of vocation, mission, and purpose. This book is a concise and practical guide to convening and sustaining these kinds of formation mentoring groups in higher education. It provides the necessary direction and structure to orient the process but is open-ended enough to apply across many settings and professional or educational disciplines. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Foreword: Rembering What The Ancients Knew
Introduction
Interlude: Finding the Time and Space for a More Meaningful Professional Life
ch. 1 What Is a Formation Mentoring Community?
Interlude: Message in a Bottle
ch. 2 Cultivating Growth: Conversation in Community
Interlude: Is There a Place for Me in a Formation Mentoring Community?
ch. 3 The Basics of Creating Formation Mentoring Communities on Your Campus
ch. 4 Collaborative Stewardship: Facilitating a Formation Mentoring Community
ch. 5 From Individual to Institutional Change: Ripples of Transformation
Afterword: Beyond The Small Group
Recommended Resources
Notes
Gratitudes
About the Authors
Index
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: From the Inter-generational Mentoring Community project, which develops the next generation of academic leaders, comes formation mentoring, a process to enable faculty to recover, sustain, and further develop a sense of vocation, mission, and purpose. This book is a concise and practical guide to convening and sustaining these kinds of formation mentoring groups in higher education. It provides the necessary direction and structure to orient the process but is open-ended enough to apply across many settings and professional or educational disciplines. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Foreword: Rembering What The Ancients Knew
Introduction
Interlude: Finding the Time and Space for a More Meaningful Professional Life
ch. 1 What Is a Formation Mentoring Community?
Interlude: Message in a Bottle
ch. 2 Cultivating Growth: Conversation in Community
Interlude: Is There a Place for Me in a Formation Mentoring Community?
ch. 3 The Basics of Creating Formation Mentoring Communities on Your Campus
ch. 4 Collaborative Stewardship: Facilitating a Formation Mentoring Community
ch. 5 From Individual to Institutional Change: Ripples of Transformation
Afterword: Beyond The Small Group
Recommended Resources
Notes
Gratitudes
About the Authors
Index
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Advancing Faculty Learning Through Interdisciplinary Collaboration
Additional Info:
This volume addresses the limitations of an instrumental perspective on collaboration and explores why stakeholders in higher education should refocus attention on collaboration as a source of faculty learning. The chapters establish a theoretical basis for thinking about faculty learning and then use case studies to explore this topic in the context of service or outreach, research, and teaching.
Included as well are a meta-analysis of the cases ...
This volume addresses the limitations of an instrumental perspective on collaboration and explores why stakeholders in higher education should refocus attention on collaboration as a source of faculty learning. The chapters establish a theoretical basis for thinking about faculty learning and then use case studies to explore this topic in the context of service or outreach, research, and teaching.
Included as well are a meta-analysis of the cases ...
Additional Info:
This volume addresses the limitations of an instrumental perspective on collaboration and explores why stakeholders in higher education should refocus attention on collaboration as a source of faculty learning. The chapters establish a theoretical basis for thinking about faculty learning and then use case studies to explore this topic in the context of service or outreach, research, and teaching.
Included as well are a meta-analysis of the cases to demonstrate what they teach about contexts that promote faculty learning and a discussion of the implications of the analysis for higher education policy and practice, including the evaluation of collaboratively produced work. The framework and cases are useful to an audience of academic leaders committed to faculty development and to creating hiring, promotion, and tenure policies that reward the full range of scholarly pursuits. They should also prove instructive to faculty embarking on interdisciplinary teaching, research, or outreach activities.
This is the 102nd issue of the Jossey-Bass quarterly report series New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 Learning as professional practice (Lisa R. Lattuca and Elizabeth G. Creamer)
ch. 2 Faculty work as learning : insights from theories of cognition (Lisa R Lattuca)
ch. 3 Interdisciplinary collaboration and academic work : a case study of a university-community partnership (Marilyn J. Arney and Dennis F. Brown)
ch. 4 Insight from multiple disciplinary angles : a case study of an interdisciplinary research team (Eizabeth G. Creamer)
ch. 5 The challenge of integration in interdisciplinary education (Michele Minnis and Vera John-Steiner)
ch. 6 Observations : taking seriously the topic of learning in studies of faculty work and careers (Anna Neumann)
ch. 7 Promoting the effective evaluation of collaboratively produced scholarship : a call to action (Elizabeth G. Creamer)
This volume addresses the limitations of an instrumental perspective on collaboration and explores why stakeholders in higher education should refocus attention on collaboration as a source of faculty learning. The chapters establish a theoretical basis for thinking about faculty learning and then use case studies to explore this topic in the context of service or outreach, research, and teaching.
Included as well are a meta-analysis of the cases to demonstrate what they teach about contexts that promote faculty learning and a discussion of the implications of the analysis for higher education policy and practice, including the evaluation of collaboratively produced work. The framework and cases are useful to an audience of academic leaders committed to faculty development and to creating hiring, promotion, and tenure policies that reward the full range of scholarly pursuits. They should also prove instructive to faculty embarking on interdisciplinary teaching, research, or outreach activities.
This is the 102nd issue of the Jossey-Bass quarterly report series New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 Learning as professional practice (Lisa R. Lattuca and Elizabeth G. Creamer)
ch. 2 Faculty work as learning : insights from theories of cognition (Lisa R Lattuca)
ch. 3 Interdisciplinary collaboration and academic work : a case study of a university-community partnership (Marilyn J. Arney and Dennis F. Brown)
ch. 4 Insight from multiple disciplinary angles : a case study of an interdisciplinary research team (Eizabeth G. Creamer)
ch. 5 The challenge of integration in interdisciplinary education (Michele Minnis and Vera John-Steiner)
ch. 6 Observations : taking seriously the topic of learning in studies of faculty work and careers (Anna Neumann)
ch. 7 Promoting the effective evaluation of collaboratively produced scholarship : a call to action (Elizabeth G. Creamer)
Additional Info:
A list of faculty development-related people and organizations tweeting on issues of technology in higher education.
A list of faculty development-related people and organizations tweeting on issues of technology in higher education.
Additional Info:
A list of faculty development-related people and organizations tweeting on issues of technology in higher education.
A list of faculty development-related people and organizations tweeting on issues of technology in higher education.
Additional Info:
Revitalizing Practice is designed to help theological faculties engage a common set of challenges, particularly in the areas of diversity, formation, and institutional identity. These are not technical problems but are instead the very stuff out of which teaching and learning are practiced. Yet addressing such issues requires intentional strategies and collaborative work. Revitalizing Practice offers four such intentional strategies: «A New Ecology Model», «An Improvisational Model», «An Appreciative Inquiry ...
Revitalizing Practice is designed to help theological faculties engage a common set of challenges, particularly in the areas of diversity, formation, and institutional identity. These are not technical problems but are instead the very stuff out of which teaching and learning are practiced. Yet addressing such issues requires intentional strategies and collaborative work. Revitalizing Practice offers four such intentional strategies: «A New Ecology Model», «An Improvisational Model», «An Appreciative Inquiry ...
Additional Info:
Revitalizing Practice is designed to help theological faculties engage a common set of challenges, particularly in the areas of diversity, formation, and institutional identity. These are not technical problems but are instead the very stuff out of which teaching and learning are practiced. Yet addressing such issues requires intentional strategies and collaborative work. Revitalizing Practice offers four such intentional strategies: «A New Ecology Model», «An Improvisational Model», «An Appreciative Inquiry Model», and «A World Café Model». Each of these models provides a thorough and practical framework (based on sound theoretical concepts) designed to help faculties revitalize their practices of theological teaching and learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Seminaries as Endangered Habitats in a Fragile Ecosystem: A New Ecology Model
ch. 2 Student Learning and Formation: An Improvisational Model
ch. 3 Listening and Learning to Teach in Theological Contexts: An Appreciative Inquiry Model
ch. 4 The Ministries for Which We Teach: A World Cafe Model
School Participating in The Lexington Seminar
Contributors
Index
Revitalizing Practice is designed to help theological faculties engage a common set of challenges, particularly in the areas of diversity, formation, and institutional identity. These are not technical problems but are instead the very stuff out of which teaching and learning are practiced. Yet addressing such issues requires intentional strategies and collaborative work. Revitalizing Practice offers four such intentional strategies: «A New Ecology Model», «An Improvisational Model», «An Appreciative Inquiry Model», and «A World Café Model». Each of these models provides a thorough and practical framework (based on sound theoretical concepts) designed to help faculties revitalize their practices of theological teaching and learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Seminaries as Endangered Habitats in a Fragile Ecosystem: A New Ecology Model
ch. 2 Student Learning and Formation: An Improvisational Model
ch. 3 Listening and Learning to Teach in Theological Contexts: An Appreciative Inquiry Model
ch. 4 The Ministries for Which We Teach: A World Cafe Model
School Participating in The Lexington Seminar
Contributors
Index
Professional Academic Writing in the Humanities and Social Sciences
Additional Info:
Susan Peck MacDonald here tackles important and often controversial contemporary questions regarding the rhetoric of inquiry, the social construction of knowledge, and the professionalization of the academy. MacDonald argues that the academy has devoted more effort to analyzing theory and method than to analyzing its own texts. Professional texts need further attention because they not only create but are also shaped by the knowledge that is special to each discipline. ...
Susan Peck MacDonald here tackles important and often controversial contemporary questions regarding the rhetoric of inquiry, the social construction of knowledge, and the professionalization of the academy. MacDonald argues that the academy has devoted more effort to analyzing theory and method than to analyzing its own texts. Professional texts need further attention because they not only create but are also shaped by the knowledge that is special to each discipline. ...
Additional Info:
Susan Peck MacDonald here tackles important and often controversial contemporary questions regarding the rhetoric of inquiry, the social construction of knowledge, and the professionalization of the academy. MacDonald argues that the academy has devoted more effort to analyzing theory and method than to analyzing its own texts. Professional texts need further attention because they not only create but are also shaped by the knowledge that is special to each discipline. Her assumption is that knowledge making is the distinctive activity of the academy at the professional level; for that reason, it is important to examine differences in the ways the professional texts of subdisciplinary communities focus on and consolidate knowledge within their fields.
MacDonald’s examination concentrates on three sample subdisciplinary fields: attachment research in psychology, Colonial New England social history, and Renaissance New Historicism in literary studies. By tracing, over a period of two decades, how members of each field have discussed a problem in their professional discourse, MacDonald explores whether they have progressed toward a greater resolution of their problems. In her examination of attachment research, she traces the field’s progress from its theoretical origins through its discovery of a method to a point of greater conceptual elaboration and agreement. Similarly, in Colonial New England social history, MacDonald examines debates over the values of narrative and analysis and, in Renaissance New Historicism, discusses particularist tendencies and ways in which New Historicist articles are organized by anecdotes and narratives.
MacDonald goes on to discuss sentence-level patterns, boldly proposing a method for examining how disciplinary differences in knowledge making are created and reflected at the sentence level.
Throughout her work, MacDonald stresses her conviction that academics need to do a better job of explaining their text-making axioms, clarifying their expectations of students at all levels, and monitoring their own professional practices. MacDonald’s proposals for both textual and sentence-level analysis will help academic professionals better understand how they might improve communication within their professional communities and with their students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
ch. 1 Patterns in Disciplinary Variation
ch. 2 Attachment Research: Compact Problem Definition in a Conceptually Driven Field
ch. 3 Colonial New England Social History: The Problematics of Contemporary History Writing
ch. 4 Renaissance New Historicism: Epistemic and Nonepistemic Textual Patterns
ch. 5 Sentence-Level Differences in Disciplinary Knowledge Making
ch. 6 Professional Sytles and Their Consequences
Appendix: The Sample
Notes
References
Index
Susan Peck MacDonald here tackles important and often controversial contemporary questions regarding the rhetoric of inquiry, the social construction of knowledge, and the professionalization of the academy. MacDonald argues that the academy has devoted more effort to analyzing theory and method than to analyzing its own texts. Professional texts need further attention because they not only create but are also shaped by the knowledge that is special to each discipline. Her assumption is that knowledge making is the distinctive activity of the academy at the professional level; for that reason, it is important to examine differences in the ways the professional texts of subdisciplinary communities focus on and consolidate knowledge within their fields.
MacDonald’s examination concentrates on three sample subdisciplinary fields: attachment research in psychology, Colonial New England social history, and Renaissance New Historicism in literary studies. By tracing, over a period of two decades, how members of each field have discussed a problem in their professional discourse, MacDonald explores whether they have progressed toward a greater resolution of their problems. In her examination of attachment research, she traces the field’s progress from its theoretical origins through its discovery of a method to a point of greater conceptual elaboration and agreement. Similarly, in Colonial New England social history, MacDonald examines debates over the values of narrative and analysis and, in Renaissance New Historicism, discusses particularist tendencies and ways in which New Historicist articles are organized by anecdotes and narratives.
MacDonald goes on to discuss sentence-level patterns, boldly proposing a method for examining how disciplinary differences in knowledge making are created and reflected at the sentence level.
Throughout her work, MacDonald stresses her conviction that academics need to do a better job of explaining their text-making axioms, clarifying their expectations of students at all levels, and monitoring their own professional practices. MacDonald’s proposals for both textual and sentence-level analysis will help academic professionals better understand how they might improve communication within their professional communities and with their students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
ch. 1 Patterns in Disciplinary Variation
ch. 2 Attachment Research: Compact Problem Definition in a Conceptually Driven Field
ch. 3 Colonial New England Social History: The Problematics of Contemporary History Writing
ch. 4 Renaissance New Historicism: Epistemic and Nonepistemic Textual Patterns
ch. 5 Sentence-Level Differences in Disciplinary Knowledge Making
ch. 6 Professional Sytles and Their Consequences
Appendix: The Sample
Notes
References
Index
The Next Generation: Preparing Graduate Students for the Professional Responsibilities of College Teachers
Additional Info:
This monograph presents results and recommendations from a project designed as a collaborative effort to prepare graduate students in the humanities for careers as scholar-teachers within institutions committed to liberal education. The project's two principle activities are discussed under the following headings: (1) Encountering Campus Cultures: Discovering the Responsibilities of College Teachers; and (2) Seminars: Reflecting on the Responsibilities of College Teachers. The first of these activities involved the Teaching Fellows in ...
This monograph presents results and recommendations from a project designed as a collaborative effort to prepare graduate students in the humanities for careers as scholar-teachers within institutions committed to liberal education. The project's two principle activities are discussed under the following headings: (1) Encountering Campus Cultures: Discovering the Responsibilities of College Teachers; and (2) Seminars: Reflecting on the Responsibilities of College Teachers. The first of these activities involved the Teaching Fellows in ...
Additional Info:
This monograph presents results and recommendations from a project designed as a collaborative effort to prepare graduate students in the humanities for careers as scholar-teachers within institutions committed to liberal education. The project's two principle activities are discussed under the following headings: (1) Encountering Campus Cultures: Discovering the Responsibilities of College Teachers; and (2) Seminars: Reflecting on the Responsibilities of College Teachers. The first of these activities involved the Teaching Fellows in campus visits during which they attended department and faculty meetings, observed and sometimes taught classes, and met with individual faculty members who assumed mentoring roles and with whom every aspect of the campus, cultural, career and professional life of the college teacher could be explored. The second activity provides the Teaching Fellows with an opportunity to reflect on what they learned at the colleges and involves two kinds of seminar: (1) the core seminar, which brings the experience of contact/encounter into the structure of graduate training; and (2) the disciplinary seminar, which focuses on the connection between scholarly work and teaching, helps prepare the graduate students within their disciplines, and serves as a means of reimagining and restructuring the graduate programs themselves. Findings show that doctoral students, if given the chance, are eager to engage in the work of academic leadership, even at the beginning of their careers and that a major factor in enhancing their willingness to assume an active role is their encounters with college faculty members. Several recommendations are offered and discussed for future consideration. These are: (1) that coalitions should be built to promote reform; (2) that graduate training must include preparation for the full range of professional responsibilities, especially teaching; (3) that support and incentives should be built for participation of graduate educators in these reform efforts; and (4) that alternative, especially collaborative, models should be developed for improving graduate preparation. (From the Publisher)
This monograph presents results and recommendations from a project designed as a collaborative effort to prepare graduate students in the humanities for careers as scholar-teachers within institutions committed to liberal education. The project's two principle activities are discussed under the following headings: (1) Encountering Campus Cultures: Discovering the Responsibilities of College Teachers; and (2) Seminars: Reflecting on the Responsibilities of College Teachers. The first of these activities involved the Teaching Fellows in campus visits during which they attended department and faculty meetings, observed and sometimes taught classes, and met with individual faculty members who assumed mentoring roles and with whom every aspect of the campus, cultural, career and professional life of the college teacher could be explored. The second activity provides the Teaching Fellows with an opportunity to reflect on what they learned at the colleges and involves two kinds of seminar: (1) the core seminar, which brings the experience of contact/encounter into the structure of graduate training; and (2) the disciplinary seminar, which focuses on the connection between scholarly work and teaching, helps prepare the graduate students within their disciplines, and serves as a means of reimagining and restructuring the graduate programs themselves. Findings show that doctoral students, if given the chance, are eager to engage in the work of academic leadership, even at the beginning of their careers and that a major factor in enhancing their willingness to assume an active role is their encounters with college faculty members. Several recommendations are offered and discussed for future consideration. These are: (1) that coalitions should be built to promote reform; (2) that graduate training must include preparation for the full range of professional responsibilities, especially teaching; (3) that support and incentives should be built for participation of graduate educators in these reform efforts; and (4) that alternative, especially collaborative, models should be developed for improving graduate preparation. (From the Publisher)
Developing New and Junior Faculty
Additional Info:
This volume offers a practical compendium of advice on how to foster the career development of new and junior faculty. It is organized around three main themes: research findings concerning new and junior faculty, model programs and strategies to support faculty development, and organizational factors that affect both the success of the strategies and the experiences of new and junior faculty. Whether readers are junior faculty, senior colleagues, faculty developers, ...
This volume offers a practical compendium of advice on how to foster the career development of new and junior faculty. It is organized around three main themes: research findings concerning new and junior faculty, model programs and strategies to support faculty development, and organizational factors that affect both the success of the strategies and the experiences of new and junior faculty. Whether readers are junior faculty, senior colleagues, faculty developers, ...
Additional Info:
This volume offers a practical compendium of advice on how to foster the career development of new and junior faculty. It is organized around three main themes: research findings concerning new and junior faculty, model programs and strategies to support faculty development, and organizational factors that affect both the success of the strategies and the experiences of new and junior faculty. Whether readers are junior faculty, senior colleagues, faculty developers, or academic administrators, all can learn how to create more supportive and stimulating environments for the newest members of their academic communities. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes (Ann E. Austin)
ch. 1 New and Junior Faculty: A Review of the Literature (M.J. Finkelstein, N.W. LaCelle-Peterson)
ch. 2 The Pretenure Years: A Longitudinal Perspective (D. Olsen, M.D. Sorcinelli)
ch. 3 New and Junior Faculty Stress: Research and Responses (M.D. Sorcinelli)
ch. 4 Orientation Programs for New Faculty (D. Fink)
ch. 5 Lessons Learned About Mentoring (R. Boice)
ch. 6 Improving Junior Faculty Scholarship (D.K. Jarvis)
ch. 7 Supporting Junior Faculty Through a Teaching Fellows Program (A.E. Austin)
ch. 8 The Role of the Chairperson in Support of Junior Faculty (D.W. Wheeler)
Summary and Further Reflections
Index
This volume offers a practical compendium of advice on how to foster the career development of new and junior faculty. It is organized around three main themes: research findings concerning new and junior faculty, model programs and strategies to support faculty development, and organizational factors that affect both the success of the strategies and the experiences of new and junior faculty. Whether readers are junior faculty, senior colleagues, faculty developers, or academic administrators, all can learn how to create more supportive and stimulating environments for the newest members of their academic communities. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes (Ann E. Austin)
ch. 1 New and Junior Faculty: A Review of the Literature (M.J. Finkelstein, N.W. LaCelle-Peterson)
ch. 2 The Pretenure Years: A Longitudinal Perspective (D. Olsen, M.D. Sorcinelli)
ch. 3 New and Junior Faculty Stress: Research and Responses (M.D. Sorcinelli)
ch. 4 Orientation Programs for New Faculty (D. Fink)
ch. 5 Lessons Learned About Mentoring (R. Boice)
ch. 6 Improving Junior Faculty Scholarship (D.K. Jarvis)
ch. 7 Supporting Junior Faculty Through a Teaching Fellows Program (A.E. Austin)
ch. 8 The Role of the Chairperson in Support of Junior Faculty (D.W. Wheeler)
Summary and Further Reflections
Index
Enhancing Student Learning: Setting the Campus Context
Additional Info:
In this important volume, the authors focus on the connections between academic learning and student affairs. Beginning with the premise that academic learning is a critical part of the overall personal development of each student, the authors show how student affairs professionals can work in harmony with their academic colleagues to create a campus milieu that is truly conducive to that development. Such a milieu would offer a rich array ...
In this important volume, the authors focus on the connections between academic learning and student affairs. Beginning with the premise that academic learning is a critical part of the overall personal development of each student, the authors show how student affairs professionals can work in harmony with their academic colleagues to create a campus milieu that is truly conducive to that development. Such a milieu would offer a rich array ...
Additional Info:
In this important volume, the authors focus on the connections between academic learning and student affairs. Beginning with the premise that academic learning is a critical part of the overall personal development of each student, the authors show how student affairs professionals can work in harmony with their academic colleagues to create a campus milieu that is truly conducive to that development. Such a milieu would offer a rich array of social, athletic, academic, and artistic events, all of which would enrich, enhance, and give deeper meaning to the learning that occurs in the classroom. With its emphasis upon partnership building and interdisciplinary collaboration, this work will be extremely useful to student affairs professionals, college administrators, and faculty members as they work together to design courses and programs that will optimize student learning. Co-published with American College Personnel Association. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Enhancing Student Learning
ch. 1 A Framework to Enhance Student Learning
ch. 2 Theories of Learning for College Students
ch. 3 Cultural Differences in Student Learning and Development
ch. 4 Learning and Development from Theory to Practice
ch. 5 Student Affairs and Learning in the Community College
ch. 6 Service-Learning: Exemplifying the Connections between Theory and Practice
ch. 7 Assessing Student Learning
ch. 8 Setting a New Context for Student Learning
About the Contributors
In this important volume, the authors focus on the connections between academic learning and student affairs. Beginning with the premise that academic learning is a critical part of the overall personal development of each student, the authors show how student affairs professionals can work in harmony with their academic colleagues to create a campus milieu that is truly conducive to that development. Such a milieu would offer a rich array of social, athletic, academic, and artistic events, all of which would enrich, enhance, and give deeper meaning to the learning that occurs in the classroom. With its emphasis upon partnership building and interdisciplinary collaboration, this work will be extremely useful to student affairs professionals, college administrators, and faculty members as they work together to design courses and programs that will optimize student learning. Co-published with American College Personnel Association. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Enhancing Student Learning
ch. 1 A Framework to Enhance Student Learning
ch. 2 Theories of Learning for College Students
ch. 3 Cultural Differences in Student Learning and Development
ch. 4 Learning and Development from Theory to Practice
ch. 5 Student Affairs and Learning in the Community College
ch. 6 Service-Learning: Exemplifying the Connections between Theory and Practice
ch. 7 Assessing Student Learning
ch. 8 Setting a New Context for Student Learning
About the Contributors
Working Effectively with Graduate Assistants
Additional Info:
While graduate assistants are valued as labour savers, they are also a precious resource whose preprofessional training needs careful design. Written by two leading authorities in the field of instructional development, this indispensable guide details the skills necessary for academics dealing with graduate assistants. The authors provide comprehensive coverage of all aspects of assistant preparation and assessment, and a chapter addressing special needs of international graduate assistants is included. (From ...
While graduate assistants are valued as labour savers, they are also a precious resource whose preprofessional training needs careful design. Written by two leading authorities in the field of instructional development, this indispensable guide details the skills necessary for academics dealing with graduate assistants. The authors provide comprehensive coverage of all aspects of assistant preparation and assessment, and a chapter addressing special needs of international graduate assistants is included. (From ...
Additional Info:
While graduate assistants are valued as labour savers, they are also a precious resource whose preprofessional training needs careful design. Written by two leading authorities in the field of instructional development, this indispensable guide details the skills necessary for academics dealing with graduate assistants. The authors provide comprehensive coverage of all aspects of assistant preparation and assessment, and a chapter addressing special needs of international graduate assistants is included. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Understanding the Challenges of Working With Graduate Teaching Assistants and Graduate Research Assistants
ch. 2 Establishing Supervisory Relationships With Graduate Teaching Assistants and Graduate Research Assistants
ch. 3 Recognizing and Adapting to Stages of Graduate Teaching Assistants' and Graduate Research Assistants' Development
ch. 4 Preparing Graduate Teaching Assistants for Special Challenges in Teaching
ch. 5 Preparing Graduate Teaching Assistants for Their Specific Instructional Roles
ch. 6 Preparing Graduate Research Assistants for Their Responsibilities
ch. 7 Addressing Special Considerations When Working With International Teaching Assistants
ch. 8 Assessing the Performance of Graduate Teaching Assistants and Graduate Research Assistants
ch. 9 Designing a Plan of Action
ch. 10 Selected References Useful to Supervisors of Graduate Teaching Assistants and Graduate Research Assistants
References
About the Authors
While graduate assistants are valued as labour savers, they are also a precious resource whose preprofessional training needs careful design. Written by two leading authorities in the field of instructional development, this indispensable guide details the skills necessary for academics dealing with graduate assistants. The authors provide comprehensive coverage of all aspects of assistant preparation and assessment, and a chapter addressing special needs of international graduate assistants is included. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Understanding the Challenges of Working With Graduate Teaching Assistants and Graduate Research Assistants
ch. 2 Establishing Supervisory Relationships With Graduate Teaching Assistants and Graduate Research Assistants
ch. 3 Recognizing and Adapting to Stages of Graduate Teaching Assistants' and Graduate Research Assistants' Development
ch. 4 Preparing Graduate Teaching Assistants for Special Challenges in Teaching
ch. 5 Preparing Graduate Teaching Assistants for Their Specific Instructional Roles
ch. 6 Preparing Graduate Research Assistants for Their Responsibilities
ch. 7 Addressing Special Considerations When Working With International Teaching Assistants
ch. 8 Assessing the Performance of Graduate Teaching Assistants and Graduate Research Assistants
ch. 9 Designing a Plan of Action
ch. 10 Selected References Useful to Supervisors of Graduate Teaching Assistants and Graduate Research Assistants
References
About the Authors
Designing Transformative Multicultural Initiatives: Theoretical Foundations, Practical Applications, and Facilitator Considerations
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Higher education is facing a perfect storm as it contends with changing demographics, shrinking budgets and concerns about access and cost, while underrepresented groups – both in faculty ranks and students – are voicing dissatisfaction with campus climate and demanding changes to structural inequities.
This book argues that, to address the ...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Higher education is facing a perfect storm as it contends with changing demographics, shrinking budgets and concerns about access and cost, while underrepresented groups – both in faculty ranks and students – are voicing dissatisfaction with campus climate and demanding changes to structural inequities.
This book argues that, to address the ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Higher education is facing a perfect storm as it contends with changing demographics, shrinking budgets and concerns about access and cost, while underrepresented groups – both in faculty ranks and students – are voicing dissatisfaction with campus climate and demanding changes to structural inequities.
This book argues that, to address the inexorable changes ahead, colleges and universities need both to centralize the value of diversity and inclusion and employ a set of strategies that are enacted at all levels of their institutions. It argues that individual and institutional change efforts can only be achieved by implementing “diversity as a value” – that is embracing social change efforts as central and additive rather than episodic and required – and provides the research and theoretical frameworks to support this approach, as well as tools and examples of practice that accomplish change.
The contributors to this book identify the elements that drive successful multicultural initiatives and that strengthen the effectiveness of campus efforts to dismantle systemic oppression, as well as the individual and organization skills needed to manage difference effectively. Among these is developing the capacity of administrators, faculty and student affairs professionals as conscious scholar practitioners to sensitively manage conflicts on campus, deconstruct challenging structures and reconstruct the environment intentionally to include in respectful ways experiences of historically marginalized groups and non-dominant ways of being in the world.
The books’ focus on developing capacities for multicultural competence aligns with higher education’s increasing emphasis on civic engagement and institutional goals promote skills to interact in meaningful and responsible ways around difference, whether of people, ideas or identities.
Designing Transformative Multicultural Initiatives provides guiding principles and practical strategies to successfully transform higher education to become fully inclusive and advance the success of all constituents and stakeholders. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgements
Introduction
Part One: Guiding Principles for Transformative Multicultural Initiatives (What are some useful guiding principles that help conscious scholar practitioners design transformative multicultural initiatives?)
ch. 1 Multicultural Initiatives as a Practice of Freedom (Sherry K. Watt)
ch. 2 Authentic, Action-Oriented Framing for Environmental Shifts (AAFES) Method (Sherry K. Watt)
ch. 3 Privilege Identity Exploration (PIE) Model Revisited: Strengthening Skills for Engaging Difference (Sherry K. Watt)
Part Two: Designing Multicultural Initiatives: A How to Manual (What techniques do conscious scholar practitioners use to develop a multicultural initiative that will lead to a successful outcome?)
ch. 4 Multicultural Initiatives as Bridges: Structures Necessary for Successful Facilitation (Cindy Ann Kilgo and Richard Barajas)
ch. 5 In Pursuit of a Strong, Clear Vision: Initiating and Sustaining Multicultural Change in Higher Education Organizations (Lacretia Johnson Flash)
ch. 6 Sharing Power and Privilege through the Scholarly Practice of Assessment (Wayne Jacobson)
Part Three: Scholarly Examples of Multicultural Initiatives in Teaching, Higher Education Administration, and Student Affairs Practice (What are examples of the varying types of multicultural initiatives in higher education and student affairs?)
ch. 7 Teaching Contemporary Leadership: Advancing Students’ Capacities to Engage
With Difference (John P. Dugan and Daviree Velázquez)
ch. 8 Aligning Actions With Core Values: Reflections of a Chief Diversity Officer and National Science Foundation ADVANCE Director on Advancing Faculty Diversity (Paulette Granberry Russell and Melissa McDaniels)
ch. 9 Creating Inclusive Organizations: One Student Affairs Division’s Efforts to Create Sustainable, Systemic Change (Kathy Obear and Shelly Kerr)
ch. 10 Dialogue Matters: Applying Critical Race Theory to Conversations About Race (Sherri Edvalson Erkel)
ch. 11 Confronting Systems of Privilege and Power Through Classroom Discussion: Uses of Power (Bridget Turner Kelly and Joy Gaston Gayles)
ch. 12 The Transformational Potential of Academic Affairs and Student Affairs Partnerships for Enacting Multicultural Initiatives (Lucy A. LePeau)
Part Four: Conscious Scholar Practitioners' Reflections on Identity, Power, and Privilege
(How do conscious scholar practitioners face the challenges within the convergence of identity, power, and privilege that are inherent to multicultural initiatives and campus organizational change?)
ch. 13 Politics of Intersecting Identities (John A. Mueller and Craig S. Pickett)
ch. 14 Toxic Environments: Perseverance in the Face of Resistance (Mary F. Howard)
ch. 15 Facing the Proverbial Lion of Racism (Jodi L. Linley and Sherry K. Watt)
ch. 16 The Art of Reflective Teaching (Ellen E. Fairchild)
ch. 17 Daring Greatly: A Reflective Critique of the Authentic, Action-Oriented Framing for Environmental Shifts (AAFES) Method (Tracy Robinson-Wood and Sherry K. Watt)
About the Editor and Contributors
Index
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Higher education is facing a perfect storm as it contends with changing demographics, shrinking budgets and concerns about access and cost, while underrepresented groups – both in faculty ranks and students – are voicing dissatisfaction with campus climate and demanding changes to structural inequities.
This book argues that, to address the inexorable changes ahead, colleges and universities need both to centralize the value of diversity and inclusion and employ a set of strategies that are enacted at all levels of their institutions. It argues that individual and institutional change efforts can only be achieved by implementing “diversity as a value” – that is embracing social change efforts as central and additive rather than episodic and required – and provides the research and theoretical frameworks to support this approach, as well as tools and examples of practice that accomplish change.
The contributors to this book identify the elements that drive successful multicultural initiatives and that strengthen the effectiveness of campus efforts to dismantle systemic oppression, as well as the individual and organization skills needed to manage difference effectively. Among these is developing the capacity of administrators, faculty and student affairs professionals as conscious scholar practitioners to sensitively manage conflicts on campus, deconstruct challenging structures and reconstruct the environment intentionally to include in respectful ways experiences of historically marginalized groups and non-dominant ways of being in the world.
The books’ focus on developing capacities for multicultural competence aligns with higher education’s increasing emphasis on civic engagement and institutional goals promote skills to interact in meaningful and responsible ways around difference, whether of people, ideas or identities.
Designing Transformative Multicultural Initiatives provides guiding principles and practical strategies to successfully transform higher education to become fully inclusive and advance the success of all constituents and stakeholders. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgements
Introduction
Part One: Guiding Principles for Transformative Multicultural Initiatives (What are some useful guiding principles that help conscious scholar practitioners design transformative multicultural initiatives?)
ch. 1 Multicultural Initiatives as a Practice of Freedom (Sherry K. Watt)
ch. 2 Authentic, Action-Oriented Framing for Environmental Shifts (AAFES) Method (Sherry K. Watt)
ch. 3 Privilege Identity Exploration (PIE) Model Revisited: Strengthening Skills for Engaging Difference (Sherry K. Watt)
Part Two: Designing Multicultural Initiatives: A How to Manual (What techniques do conscious scholar practitioners use to develop a multicultural initiative that will lead to a successful outcome?)
ch. 4 Multicultural Initiatives as Bridges: Structures Necessary for Successful Facilitation (Cindy Ann Kilgo and Richard Barajas)
ch. 5 In Pursuit of a Strong, Clear Vision: Initiating and Sustaining Multicultural Change in Higher Education Organizations (Lacretia Johnson Flash)
ch. 6 Sharing Power and Privilege through the Scholarly Practice of Assessment (Wayne Jacobson)
Part Three: Scholarly Examples of Multicultural Initiatives in Teaching, Higher Education Administration, and Student Affairs Practice (What are examples of the varying types of multicultural initiatives in higher education and student affairs?)
ch. 7 Teaching Contemporary Leadership: Advancing Students’ Capacities to Engage
With Difference (John P. Dugan and Daviree Velázquez)
ch. 8 Aligning Actions With Core Values: Reflections of a Chief Diversity Officer and National Science Foundation ADVANCE Director on Advancing Faculty Diversity (Paulette Granberry Russell and Melissa McDaniels)
ch. 9 Creating Inclusive Organizations: One Student Affairs Division’s Efforts to Create Sustainable, Systemic Change (Kathy Obear and Shelly Kerr)
ch. 10 Dialogue Matters: Applying Critical Race Theory to Conversations About Race (Sherri Edvalson Erkel)
ch. 11 Confronting Systems of Privilege and Power Through Classroom Discussion: Uses of Power (Bridget Turner Kelly and Joy Gaston Gayles)
ch. 12 The Transformational Potential of Academic Affairs and Student Affairs Partnerships for Enacting Multicultural Initiatives (Lucy A. LePeau)
Part Four: Conscious Scholar Practitioners' Reflections on Identity, Power, and Privilege
(How do conscious scholar practitioners face the challenges within the convergence of identity, power, and privilege that are inherent to multicultural initiatives and campus organizational change?)
ch. 13 Politics of Intersecting Identities (John A. Mueller and Craig S. Pickett)
ch. 14 Toxic Environments: Perseverance in the Face of Resistance (Mary F. Howard)
ch. 15 Facing the Proverbial Lion of Racism (Jodi L. Linley and Sherry K. Watt)
ch. 16 The Art of Reflective Teaching (Ellen E. Fairchild)
ch. 17 Daring Greatly: A Reflective Critique of the Authentic, Action-Oriented Framing for Environmental Shifts (AAFES) Method (Tracy Robinson-Wood and Sherry K. Watt)
About the Editor and Contributors
Index
Making Time, Making Change: Avoiding Overload in College Teaching
Additional Info:
Lack of time may be the single most commonly experienced problem among American faculty. It is fair to say that the overwhelming majority of the roughly 400,000 full time faculty in American colleges and universities feel overloaded in their teaching lives; they perceive that they do not have time to do their basic faculty duties properly; and they believe that overload goes with the job. We complain yet we do not ...
Lack of time may be the single most commonly experienced problem among American faculty. It is fair to say that the overwhelming majority of the roughly 400,000 full time faculty in American colleges and universities feel overloaded in their teaching lives; they perceive that they do not have time to do their basic faculty duties properly; and they believe that overload goes with the job. We complain yet we do not ...
Additional Info:
Lack of time may be the single most commonly experienced problem among American faculty. It is fair to say that the overwhelming majority of the roughly 400,000 full time faculty in American colleges and universities feel overloaded in their teaching lives; they perceive that they do not have time to do their basic faculty duties properly; and they believe that overload goes with the job. We complain yet we do not reflect on and evaluate our paradigms for how we use our time. Perhaps a pernicious norm has evolved: anyone not complaining about being overwhelmed is suspect. We act as if we have no choice. Einstein once remarked, "Insanity is doing the same thing over and over again and expecting different results." A Lakota Sioux saying puts the idea in concrete terms, "When your horse is dead, the proper strategy is to dismount." When it comes to avoiding overload, many of us sit on our dead horses kicking them in the sides over and over again, insanely, wondering why we don't get anywhere. However, we do have choices about how we use our time. Einstein suggested a way to discover our choices when he further observed, "Problems cannot be solved at the same level of awareness that created them." Essentially, that is the objective of this book: to elevate our awareness of how we use our time and how we might improve that use of time. We need to shift our perspective on using time from subject (a perspective from which we act naively) to object (a perspective on which we act intentionally). The tool that we will use to stimulate this shift in awareness comes from a vintage analysis of systems theory and research and focuses on managing the boundaries of our teaching selves better. In Making Time, Making Change, author Douglas Reimondo Robertson leads you on the road to a more rewarding, and less harried, teaching life! (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Dedication
Acknowledgements
About the Author
Toward Dismounting the Dead Horse
Avoiding Overload as Boundary Management
Control/Flow Paradox
Background
Intended Audiences
Objectives
Overview
Part I: Making Time
Be Able to be Efficient in All Things
Related Overload Adaptation
Teaching Applications
Know Your ``Lines in the Sand'' and State Them Clearly, Early, and Often
Interact with Students with Intentional Time and Depth
Use Technological Tools in Course-Related Scholarship
Use Technological Tools to Check for Plagiarism
Use Robots to Score and Record Tests
Digitize Everything that You Can
Word Process Written Feedback
Use Group Feedback Thoughtfully
Remember that Perfect Is Not Beautiful
Do Not Permit Handwritten Student Work
Parse Your Time and Set Appropriate Expectations
Express Your Values in How You Use Your Time
Related Overload Adaptation
Teaching Applications
Identify the Major Areas of Your Life
Assign Times for Each Area
Identify the Major Areas of Your Faculty Work
Assign a Weight to Each Area
Do the Math
Keep Doing the Math
Use Discretion in Disclosing the Details
Don't Hoard Responsibility, Share It
Related Overload Adaptation
Teaching Applications
Employ NIFs
Students
Mastery Learning Programs
Outside Experts
Research Data Bases
Require Students to Download and Print Course Materials
Required Students to Monitor Their Own Completion of Course Assignments
Require Students to Prepare Their Own Study Guides
For Every Aspect of Your Teaching, Find a Time and Place Befitting it
Related Overload Adaptation Teaching Applications
Identify the Major Activities of Your Teaching Work
Allocate Time to Each Type of Work
Create a Place Befitting Each Activity
Be Able to Block Access to You
Leave the Office
Work at Home if You Can
Know Your Campus Options
Know Your Community Options
Be Short with Many So That You May be Long With a Few
Related Overload Adaptation
Teaching Applications
Frame Asynchronous Communication Tools as Your Personal Staff
Be Proud of Your Personal Staff
Do Not Provide Immediate Access to You except during ``Open Door'' Periods
Teach Your Students Your Communication System
Create a Time and Place to Process Asynchronous Communication
Interact Electronically in Correspondence with the Time Available
Stick to Your Knitting, Refer to Other Helpers When Possible
Related Overload Adaptation
Teaching Applications
Do Not Try to Be a Counselor
Do Not Take on Being a Composition Teacher
Do Not Attempt to Be the Computer Support Desk
Do Not Think that You Need to Be a Librarian
Become Familiar with Pertinent Campus and Community Resources
Have a Current Referral Sheet and Use It
Part II: Making Change
Competing Commitments and Change
Assumption Hunting
Step 1: State the Change Commitment
Commitment Task
Commitment Examples
Step 2: Discern What You Are Doing to Prevent the Change from Happening
Interference Examples
Step 3: Identify the Competing Commitment
Competing Commitment Task
Competing Commitment Examples
Step 4: Discover the Big Assumption Behind the Competing Commitment
Big Assumption Task
Big Assumption Examples
Assumption Testing
Step 1: Observe Yourself in Relation to Your Big Assumption
Observation Task
Observation Example
Step 2: Search for Evidence that Undermines Your Big Assumption
Countervailing Evidence Task
Countervailing Evidence Example
Step 3: Construct a Biography of Your Big Assumption
Big Assumption Biography Task
Big Assumption Biography Example
Step 4: Conduct Mini-Experiments that Test Your Big Assumption
Mini-Experiment Task
Mini-Experiment Example
Networks and Change
Networks
Home Department
Step 1: List All of Your Colleagues in Your Department
Home Institution
Step 2: List All of the Members of Work Groups at Your Institution with Whom You Feel that You Meet Frequently, besides Your Department
Step 3: List Any Other Colleagues at Your Institution with Whom You Feel You Have a Relationship
Outside Professional Communities
Step 4: List All of Your Colleagues Outside of Your Institution with Whom You Feel You Have a Relationship
Sex and Number
Step 5: Beginning with Your Home Department List, then Home Institution List, and Finally Outside Professional Communities List, Designate the Sex of the Person and Enumerate the Relationship
Mattering
Step 6: For Each Relationship in General, Indicate How Much What that Person Thinks, Feels, or Does Matters to You
Mapping
Step 7: Sector by Sector (Department, Institution, Communities), Place Each Relationship on the Network Map in the Ring that Corresponds with How Much that Relationship Matters to You
Change
Desired Change
Step 8: Identify the Desired Change(s) in Your Professional Practice
Force Field Analysis
Step 9: For Each Relationship in General, Indicate whether You Think that if the Person Knew about Your Desired Change in Your Professional Practice that Person Would Support or Resist Your Making It
Force Field Mapping
Step 10: For Each Relationship, Place the Appropriate Support or Resistance Symbol (+, -, +/-, or blank) next to the Person's Numbered Circle or Square on the Network Map
Observing
Step 11: Examine Your Map and Take Note of Whatever Stands Out to You as important
Change Strategies
Step 12: Determine Strategies for Increasing the Support in Your Networks and Decreasing the Resistance, Particularly in Your Inner Circles
Bless Its Heart
References
Index
Lack of time may be the single most commonly experienced problem among American faculty. It is fair to say that the overwhelming majority of the roughly 400,000 full time faculty in American colleges and universities feel overloaded in their teaching lives; they perceive that they do not have time to do their basic faculty duties properly; and they believe that overload goes with the job. We complain yet we do not reflect on and evaluate our paradigms for how we use our time. Perhaps a pernicious norm has evolved: anyone not complaining about being overwhelmed is suspect. We act as if we have no choice. Einstein once remarked, "Insanity is doing the same thing over and over again and expecting different results." A Lakota Sioux saying puts the idea in concrete terms, "When your horse is dead, the proper strategy is to dismount." When it comes to avoiding overload, many of us sit on our dead horses kicking them in the sides over and over again, insanely, wondering why we don't get anywhere. However, we do have choices about how we use our time. Einstein suggested a way to discover our choices when he further observed, "Problems cannot be solved at the same level of awareness that created them." Essentially, that is the objective of this book: to elevate our awareness of how we use our time and how we might improve that use of time. We need to shift our perspective on using time from subject (a perspective from which we act naively) to object (a perspective on which we act intentionally). The tool that we will use to stimulate this shift in awareness comes from a vintage analysis of systems theory and research and focuses on managing the boundaries of our teaching selves better. In Making Time, Making Change, author Douglas Reimondo Robertson leads you on the road to a more rewarding, and less harried, teaching life! (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Dedication
Acknowledgements
About the Author
Toward Dismounting the Dead Horse
Avoiding Overload as Boundary Management
Control/Flow Paradox
Background
Intended Audiences
Objectives
Overview
Part I: Making Time
Be Able to be Efficient in All Things
Related Overload Adaptation
Teaching Applications
Know Your ``Lines in the Sand'' and State Them Clearly, Early, and Often
Interact with Students with Intentional Time and Depth
Use Technological Tools in Course-Related Scholarship
Use Technological Tools to Check for Plagiarism
Use Robots to Score and Record Tests
Digitize Everything that You Can
Word Process Written Feedback
Use Group Feedback Thoughtfully
Remember that Perfect Is Not Beautiful
Do Not Permit Handwritten Student Work
Parse Your Time and Set Appropriate Expectations
Express Your Values in How You Use Your Time
Related Overload Adaptation
Teaching Applications
Identify the Major Areas of Your Life
Assign Times for Each Area
Identify the Major Areas of Your Faculty Work
Assign a Weight to Each Area
Do the Math
Keep Doing the Math
Use Discretion in Disclosing the Details
Don't Hoard Responsibility, Share It
Related Overload Adaptation
Teaching Applications
Employ NIFs
Students
Mastery Learning Programs
Outside Experts
Research Data Bases
Require Students to Download and Print Course Materials
Required Students to Monitor Their Own Completion of Course Assignments
Require Students to Prepare Their Own Study Guides
For Every Aspect of Your Teaching, Find a Time and Place Befitting it
Related Overload Adaptation Teaching Applications
Identify the Major Activities of Your Teaching Work
Allocate Time to Each Type of Work
Create a Place Befitting Each Activity
Be Able to Block Access to You
Leave the Office
Work at Home if You Can
Know Your Campus Options
Know Your Community Options
Be Short with Many So That You May be Long With a Few
Related Overload Adaptation
Teaching Applications
Frame Asynchronous Communication Tools as Your Personal Staff
Be Proud of Your Personal Staff
Do Not Provide Immediate Access to You except during ``Open Door'' Periods
Teach Your Students Your Communication System
Create a Time and Place to Process Asynchronous Communication
Interact Electronically in Correspondence with the Time Available
Stick to Your Knitting, Refer to Other Helpers When Possible
Related Overload Adaptation
Teaching Applications
Do Not Try to Be a Counselor
Do Not Take on Being a Composition Teacher
Do Not Attempt to Be the Computer Support Desk
Do Not Think that You Need to Be a Librarian
Become Familiar with Pertinent Campus and Community Resources
Have a Current Referral Sheet and Use It
Part II: Making Change
Competing Commitments and Change
Assumption Hunting
Step 1: State the Change Commitment
Commitment Task
Commitment Examples
Step 2: Discern What You Are Doing to Prevent the Change from Happening
Interference Examples
Step 3: Identify the Competing Commitment
Competing Commitment Task
Competing Commitment Examples
Step 4: Discover the Big Assumption Behind the Competing Commitment
Big Assumption Task
Big Assumption Examples
Assumption Testing
Step 1: Observe Yourself in Relation to Your Big Assumption
Observation Task
Observation Example
Step 2: Search for Evidence that Undermines Your Big Assumption
Countervailing Evidence Task
Countervailing Evidence Example
Step 3: Construct a Biography of Your Big Assumption
Big Assumption Biography Task
Big Assumption Biography Example
Step 4: Conduct Mini-Experiments that Test Your Big Assumption
Mini-Experiment Task
Mini-Experiment Example
Networks and Change
Networks
Home Department
Step 1: List All of Your Colleagues in Your Department
Home Institution
Step 2: List All of the Members of Work Groups at Your Institution with Whom You Feel that You Meet Frequently, besides Your Department
Step 3: List Any Other Colleagues at Your Institution with Whom You Feel You Have a Relationship
Outside Professional Communities
Step 4: List All of Your Colleagues Outside of Your Institution with Whom You Feel You Have a Relationship
Sex and Number
Step 5: Beginning with Your Home Department List, then Home Institution List, and Finally Outside Professional Communities List, Designate the Sex of the Person and Enumerate the Relationship
Mattering
Step 6: For Each Relationship in General, Indicate How Much What that Person Thinks, Feels, or Does Matters to You
Mapping
Step 7: Sector by Sector (Department, Institution, Communities), Place Each Relationship on the Network Map in the Ring that Corresponds with How Much that Relationship Matters to You
Change
Desired Change
Step 8: Identify the Desired Change(s) in Your Professional Practice
Force Field Analysis
Step 9: For Each Relationship in General, Indicate whether You Think that if the Person Knew about Your Desired Change in Your Professional Practice that Person Would Support or Resist Your Making It
Force Field Mapping
Step 10: For Each Relationship, Place the Appropriate Support or Resistance Symbol (+, -, +/-, or blank) next to the Person's Numbered Circle or Square on the Network Map
Observing
Step 11: Examine Your Map and Take Note of Whatever Stands Out to You as important
Change Strategies
Step 12: Determine Strategies for Increasing the Support in Your Networks and Decreasing the Resistance, Particularly in Your Inner Circles
Bless Its Heart
References
Index
Inside the Undergraduate Teaching Experience: The University of Washington's Growth in Faculty Teaching Study
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Shows what kind of changes college faculty make to their teaching and why they make them.
The image of college faculty members as abstracted, white-haired, tweed-jacketed professors, mumbling lectures from notes that were yellowed by twenty years of repeated use is still pervasive. In this view, college faculty care ...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Shows what kind of changes college faculty make to their teaching and why they make them.
The image of college faculty members as abstracted, white-haired, tweed-jacketed professors, mumbling lectures from notes that were yellowed by twenty years of repeated use is still pervasive. In this view, college faculty care ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Shows what kind of changes college faculty make to their teaching and why they make them.
The image of college faculty members as abstracted, white-haired, tweed-jacketed professors, mumbling lectures from notes that were yellowed by twenty years of repeated use is still pervasive. In this view, college faculty care only about their research and have little connection to the students sitting passively in front of them. Inside the Undergraduate Teaching Experience directly challenges this view of today’s college faculty and serves as a guide for graduate students and new faculty who seek ways—both personal and pedagogical—to become more effective teachers.
Inside the Undergraduate Teaching Experience reports the results of the University of Washington’s Growth in Faculty Teaching Study (UW GIFTS), which sought to find out whether or not faculty ever change what they do in the classroom, even when there is little external pressure for them to do so. Key findings in the study were that all courses that faculty members taught were deeply embedded in their academic disciplines, even freshman-level classes; that content and critical thinking as goals for learning could not be separated; that faculty members were making changes to their teaching continuously; that such changes were motivated by the faculty member’s intentional assessment of the learning needs of her particular classes; and that most changes were aimed at helping students meet faculty members’ goals for learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Tables and Figures
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Gifts
College Teaching Realities
Purpose of the Study and Key Findings
Literatures
Our Paths
Organization
ch. 2 How Was the Study Conducted
Faculty Sample
Graduate Student Sample
Study Design
Generalizability and Usefulness
ch. 3 What Courses Did Faculty Describe?
Key Findings: Disciplinary Practice, Content, and Critical Thinking
Class Size, TA Help, and Course Levels
Pedagogy
Course Requirements
Learning beyond the Classroom
Summary: Courses
ch. 4 What Changes Did Faculty Make to Their Courses?
Changes to Courses
Few Changes
Big Directions of Change
Are You Still Making Changes to Your Teaching
Summary: Changes
ch. 5 Why Did Faculty Make Changes to Their Courses?
Reasons for Changes Made to Specific Courses
End-of-interview Ratings of Sources of Change
Summary: Reasons and Sources for Change
ch. 6 What Allowed Faculty to Teach from the Self?
The Importance of Changes in the Self
Moving Beyond the Graduate Student Experience
Learning to Trust Their Own Authority over Time
Permission to Make Mistakes
Knowing That They Know How to Teach
Paring Down, Opening Up, and Weaving In
Listening to Changes in the Self
Summary: Teaching from the Self
ch. 7 What Did Faculty Say about Students
Students as Learners
Students Today…
Praise for Students Today
Summary: Students and Other Learners
8. What “Research” Methods Did Faculty Use?
Sources of Information on Teaching and Learning
Tracking the Effects of Change
Summary: Researching One’s Own Teaching Effectiveness
9. Were There Differences across Groups?
Difference Based on Faculty Characteristics
Faculty of Color
Three Disciplines
Graduate Students and Faculty Members
Summary: Differences
10. Learning in the Act of Teaching
Appendices
Appendix A: UW GIFTS Interview Questions for Faculty
Appendix B: Focus Group Questions for Graduate Students
Appendix C: Tables on Statistically Significant Differences
Notes
Bibliography
Index
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Shows what kind of changes college faculty make to their teaching and why they make them.
The image of college faculty members as abstracted, white-haired, tweed-jacketed professors, mumbling lectures from notes that were yellowed by twenty years of repeated use is still pervasive. In this view, college faculty care only about their research and have little connection to the students sitting passively in front of them. Inside the Undergraduate Teaching Experience directly challenges this view of today’s college faculty and serves as a guide for graduate students and new faculty who seek ways—both personal and pedagogical—to become more effective teachers.
Inside the Undergraduate Teaching Experience reports the results of the University of Washington’s Growth in Faculty Teaching Study (UW GIFTS), which sought to find out whether or not faculty ever change what they do in the classroom, even when there is little external pressure for them to do so. Key findings in the study were that all courses that faculty members taught were deeply embedded in their academic disciplines, even freshman-level classes; that content and critical thinking as goals for learning could not be separated; that faculty members were making changes to their teaching continuously; that such changes were motivated by the faculty member’s intentional assessment of the learning needs of her particular classes; and that most changes were aimed at helping students meet faculty members’ goals for learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Tables and Figures
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Gifts
College Teaching Realities
Purpose of the Study and Key Findings
Literatures
Our Paths
Organization
ch. 2 How Was the Study Conducted
Faculty Sample
Graduate Student Sample
Study Design
Generalizability and Usefulness
ch. 3 What Courses Did Faculty Describe?
Key Findings: Disciplinary Practice, Content, and Critical Thinking
Class Size, TA Help, and Course Levels
Pedagogy
Course Requirements
Learning beyond the Classroom
Summary: Courses
ch. 4 What Changes Did Faculty Make to Their Courses?
Changes to Courses
Few Changes
Big Directions of Change
Are You Still Making Changes to Your Teaching
Summary: Changes
ch. 5 Why Did Faculty Make Changes to Their Courses?
Reasons for Changes Made to Specific Courses
End-of-interview Ratings of Sources of Change
Summary: Reasons and Sources for Change
ch. 6 What Allowed Faculty to Teach from the Self?
The Importance of Changes in the Self
Moving Beyond the Graduate Student Experience
Learning to Trust Their Own Authority over Time
Permission to Make Mistakes
Knowing That They Know How to Teach
Paring Down, Opening Up, and Weaving In
Listening to Changes in the Self
Summary: Teaching from the Self
ch. 7 What Did Faculty Say about Students
Students as Learners
Students Today…
Praise for Students Today
Summary: Students and Other Learners
8. What “Research” Methods Did Faculty Use?
Sources of Information on Teaching and Learning
Tracking the Effects of Change
Summary: Researching One’s Own Teaching Effectiveness
9. Were There Differences across Groups?
Difference Based on Faculty Characteristics
Faculty of Color
Three Disciplines
Graduate Students and Faculty Members
Summary: Differences
10. Learning in the Act of Teaching
Appendices
Appendix A: UW GIFTS Interview Questions for Faculty
Appendix B: Focus Group Questions for Graduate Students
Appendix C: Tables on Statistically Significant Differences
Notes
Bibliography
Index
Academic Life: Hospitality, Ethics, and Spirituality
Additional Info:
In this profound look at the academy, John Bennett reminds us that our leadership decisions always presuppose our philosophies of life and that understanding precedes practice. How we understand the communities we lead informs the many practical judgments we make about directions to take, structures to create, processes to initiate, and values to uphold.
Bennett argues that faculty may understand their departments or institutions in one of two ...
In this profound look at the academy, John Bennett reminds us that our leadership decisions always presuppose our philosophies of life and that understanding precedes practice. How we understand the communities we lead informs the many practical judgments we make about directions to take, structures to create, processes to initiate, and values to uphold.
Bennett argues that faculty may understand their departments or institutions in one of two ...
Additional Info:
In this profound look at the academy, John Bennett reminds us that our leadership decisions always presuppose our philosophies of life and that understanding precedes practice. How we understand the communities we lead informs the many practical judgments we make about directions to take, structures to create, processes to initiate, and values to uphold.
Bennett argues that faculty may understand their departments or institutions in one of two ways: as simply aggregations of individuals or as communities of intertwined persons. From these views, two different leadership values and positions emerge.
The first disposes us toward seeing academic conflict as inevitable and elevates heroic leadership styles where power is understood in terms of advancing one agenda over competitors. The second underwrites leadership as supporting openness to others and emphasizes the vital contributions that can follow.
By providing specific illustrations of the two modes of leadership and the nature of hospitality and openness, Academic Life presents a strong platform from which to build a rich and rewarding academic community. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 The nature of insistent individualism
ch. 2 Why the prevalence of insistent individualism?
ch. 3 Hospitality as an essential virtue
ch. 4 Self, others, institutions, and the common good
ch. 5 Conversation as an essential metaphor
ch. 6 The uses of conversation
ch. 7 Community and covenant
ch. 8 Engaged, but not heroic, leadership
In this profound look at the academy, John Bennett reminds us that our leadership decisions always presuppose our philosophies of life and that understanding precedes practice. How we understand the communities we lead informs the many practical judgments we make about directions to take, structures to create, processes to initiate, and values to uphold.
Bennett argues that faculty may understand their departments or institutions in one of two ways: as simply aggregations of individuals or as communities of intertwined persons. From these views, two different leadership values and positions emerge.
The first disposes us toward seeing academic conflict as inevitable and elevates heroic leadership styles where power is understood in terms of advancing one agenda over competitors. The second underwrites leadership as supporting openness to others and emphasizes the vital contributions that can follow.
By providing specific illustrations of the two modes of leadership and the nature of hospitality and openness, Academic Life presents a strong platform from which to build a rich and rewarding academic community. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 The nature of insistent individualism
ch. 2 Why the prevalence of insistent individualism?
ch. 3 Hospitality as an essential virtue
ch. 4 Self, others, institutions, and the common good
ch. 5 Conversation as an essential metaphor
ch. 6 The uses of conversation
ch. 7 Community and covenant
ch. 8 Engaged, but not heroic, leadership
It Works for Me: Becoming a Publishing Scholar/Researcher
Additional Info:
The authors’ purpose in this book is to provide “a collection of practical tips drawn from real-life experiences.” We believe this particular book is so important to share with today’s audience, we almost called it Take My Book, Please!
On the other hand, does the scholarly world need another book on the importance of scholarship? Further, if the book standard for tenure is slowly disappearing because so ...
The authors’ purpose in this book is to provide “a collection of practical tips drawn from real-life experiences.” We believe this particular book is so important to share with today’s audience, we almost called it Take My Book, Please!
On the other hand, does the scholarly world need another book on the importance of scholarship? Further, if the book standard for tenure is slowly disappearing because so ...
Additional Info:
The authors’ purpose in this book is to provide “a collection of practical tips drawn from real-life experiences.” We believe this particular book is so important to share with today’s audience, we almost called it Take My Book, Please!
On the other hand, does the scholarly world need another book on the importance of scholarship? Further, if the book standard for tenure is slowly disappearing because so many academic presses are closing, why would we bother to write one? And recent studies show that new faculty members consider university employment a 9:00-5:00 job, so doesn’t that leave out time for job-related reading? Finally, with the instant gratification of the internet, aren’t books dead in our culture or at least well on their way to extinction?
Why, then, in the name of all that’s sane, did we put this collection together?
a. Our publisher wanted a follow-up to our It Works for Me as a Scholar-Teacher as he believed we had a lot more to say on the subject.
b. With over 800 publications, we thought we had something insightful to say.
c. Most books on the importance of scholarship are either textbook in nature or extremely theoretical, while this book is neither.
d. With our successful It Works for Me series we’ve found a niche in the marketplace.
e. Being a large collaboration, this book provides many voices who all believe that reiterating the importance of scholarship is important.
f. With a series of short, practical tips on scholarship, this book is very easy to read and, hence, might be read.
Actually, all of the above are true. We feel certain you will benefit from the collective work found between these covers. To find information on the full “It Works for Me” series, go to www.newforums.com. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
Developing a Scholarly Frame of Mind
Creating Your Scholarly Plan
Overviews
Getting Published: Inquiring Minds Want to Know
The No-So-Obvious Strategies to Become a Publishing Research Scholar
Tips for Being Published in Academic Journals
Academic Publishing from an Unknown Regional University
Maintaining Scholarship in a Teaching-Focused Institution
Dave's Hints for Publishing
My Story
When Life Intervenes
A Transitional Journey
Order with Flexibility
Pre-Writing
Working with the IR Office
Identifying Emerging Topics of Scholarly Interest in the Discipline
Differentiating Journals
How to Get Involved in Research
Getting Started in Scholarly Writing
Writing Book Chapters for Publication
Time: The Elusive Ingredient in a Successful Recipe
When You Really Need It Published
Writing
Free to Write: Capturing the Creative Flow
A Research/Scholarly Paper Outline
Post-Writing
For Improved Scholarship, Know Your Editor(s)
Submitting a Manuscript? Do the Homework!
Applying Wagnerian Opera Theory to Scholarship: It's Not over Till
Turning Rejection Letters into Positive Advice
Other Scholarly Matters
Collabowriting Your Scholarship
Listen and Learn
Five Strategies for Successful Co-Authorizing of Articles
Virtual Collaboration
An International Learning Community: Successful Vehicle for Scholarship
The ABC's of Writing Groups at Small Universities
A Writing and Publication Group Becomes an Intellectual Community
Stalking the Reluctant Professor: How to Find a Mentor without Getting Arrested
Why Is It So Darned Hard to Get that Article Pushed out theDoor?
Collaboration Is King: Five Tips for Publishing Research Papers
Using Authentic Data in Classroom Exercises
A Scholarly Assignment
Co-Creating with Students: Establishing Trust in a Student-Faculty Research Group
Getting Published as a Graduate Student
Checking the Checker
New Directions
New Directions in Scholarship
Creating SOTL: An Experiment in Collaboration
Blending Service into Scholarship
Publishing Ideas from Courses that Extend Beyond Your Primary Discipline
S-t-r-e-t-c-h-i-n-g Yourself: Writing Outside Your Comfort Zone
Young Adult Literature as a Publishing Venue for the Higher Education Scholar
Sustaining Scholarship in a Digital Era
Presenting Live in South Africa . . . from My Family Room
Merging Discipline-Based Scholarship with the Scholarship of Teaching
The authors’ purpose in this book is to provide “a collection of practical tips drawn from real-life experiences.” We believe this particular book is so important to share with today’s audience, we almost called it Take My Book, Please!
On the other hand, does the scholarly world need another book on the importance of scholarship? Further, if the book standard for tenure is slowly disappearing because so many academic presses are closing, why would we bother to write one? And recent studies show that new faculty members consider university employment a 9:00-5:00 job, so doesn’t that leave out time for job-related reading? Finally, with the instant gratification of the internet, aren’t books dead in our culture or at least well on their way to extinction?
Why, then, in the name of all that’s sane, did we put this collection together?
a. Our publisher wanted a follow-up to our It Works for Me as a Scholar-Teacher as he believed we had a lot more to say on the subject.
b. With over 800 publications, we thought we had something insightful to say.
c. Most books on the importance of scholarship are either textbook in nature or extremely theoretical, while this book is neither.
d. With our successful It Works for Me series we’ve found a niche in the marketplace.
e. Being a large collaboration, this book provides many voices who all believe that reiterating the importance of scholarship is important.
f. With a series of short, practical tips on scholarship, this book is very easy to read and, hence, might be read.
Actually, all of the above are true. We feel certain you will benefit from the collective work found between these covers. To find information on the full “It Works for Me” series, go to www.newforums.com. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
Developing a Scholarly Frame of Mind
Creating Your Scholarly Plan
Overviews
Getting Published: Inquiring Minds Want to Know
The No-So-Obvious Strategies to Become a Publishing Research Scholar
Tips for Being Published in Academic Journals
Academic Publishing from an Unknown Regional University
Maintaining Scholarship in a Teaching-Focused Institution
Dave's Hints for Publishing
My Story
When Life Intervenes
A Transitional Journey
Order with Flexibility
Pre-Writing
Working with the IR Office
Identifying Emerging Topics of Scholarly Interest in the Discipline
Differentiating Journals
How to Get Involved in Research
Getting Started in Scholarly Writing
Writing Book Chapters for Publication
Time: The Elusive Ingredient in a Successful Recipe
When You Really Need It Published
Writing
Free to Write: Capturing the Creative Flow
A Research/Scholarly Paper Outline
Post-Writing
For Improved Scholarship, Know Your Editor(s)
Submitting a Manuscript? Do the Homework!
Applying Wagnerian Opera Theory to Scholarship: It's Not over Till
Turning Rejection Letters into Positive Advice
Other Scholarly Matters
Collabowriting Your Scholarship
Listen and Learn
Five Strategies for Successful Co-Authorizing of Articles
Virtual Collaboration
An International Learning Community: Successful Vehicle for Scholarship
The ABC's of Writing Groups at Small Universities
A Writing and Publication Group Becomes an Intellectual Community
Stalking the Reluctant Professor: How to Find a Mentor without Getting Arrested
Why Is It So Darned Hard to Get that Article Pushed out theDoor?
Collaboration Is King: Five Tips for Publishing Research Papers
Using Authentic Data in Classroom Exercises
A Scholarly Assignment
Co-Creating with Students: Establishing Trust in a Student-Faculty Research Group
Getting Published as a Graduate Student
Checking the Checker
New Directions
New Directions in Scholarship
Creating SOTL: An Experiment in Collaboration
Blending Service into Scholarship
Publishing Ideas from Courses that Extend Beyond Your Primary Discipline
S-t-r-e-t-c-h-i-n-g Yourself: Writing Outside Your Comfort Zone
Young Adult Literature as a Publishing Venue for the Higher Education Scholar
Sustaining Scholarship in a Digital Era
Presenting Live in South Africa . . . from My Family Room
Merging Discipline-Based Scholarship with the Scholarship of Teaching
Additional Info:
Kennesaw’s Center for Excellence in Teaching and Learning maintains one of the most extensive directories of conferences focused on college/university teaching and their sponsoring organizations.
Kennesaw’s Center for Excellence in Teaching and Learning maintains one of the most extensive directories of conferences focused on college/university teaching and their sponsoring organizations.
Additional Info:
Kennesaw’s Center for Excellence in Teaching and Learning maintains one of the most extensive directories of conferences focused on college/university teaching and their sponsoring organizations.
Kennesaw’s Center for Excellence in Teaching and Learning maintains one of the most extensive directories of conferences focused on college/university teaching and their sponsoring organizations.
Motivation from Within: Approaches for Encouraging Faculty and Students to Excel
Additional Info:
Motivation is not something one "does to" someone else--good motivational practice requires that we engage others in a common quest. (From the Publisher)
Motivation is not something one "does to" someone else--good motivational practice requires that we engage others in a common quest. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Motivation is not something one "does to" someone else--good motivational practice requires that we engage others in a common quest. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Motivation and Diversity
Motivation and Diversity: A Framework for Teaching.
Student Motivation and Epistemological Beliefs (Michael B. Paulsen & Kenneth A. Feldman).
Motivation for Higher-Order Learning (Janet G. Donald).
Motivation and Methods
Using the ARCS Motivational Process in Computer-Based Instruction and Distance Education (John M. Keller).
CORE Elements of Student Motivation in Problem-Based Learning (Marjorie M. MacKinnon).
The Motivational Benefits of Cooperative Learning (Theodore Panitz)
Motivation and The Institution
Faculty Motivation: The Role of Supportive Teaching Culture (Kenneth A. Feldman & Michael B. Paulsen).
Motivation in Interdisciplinary Programs (Edward B. Nuhfer).
Institutional Improvement and Motivated Faculty: A Case Study (Donald W. Farmer).
Conclusion
What Have We Learned? A Synthesis and Some Guidelines for Effective Motivation in Higher Education (Michael Theall & Jennifer Franklin)
Motivation is not something one "does to" someone else--good motivational practice requires that we engage others in a common quest. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Motivation and Diversity
Motivation and Diversity: A Framework for Teaching.
Student Motivation and Epistemological Beliefs (Michael B. Paulsen & Kenneth A. Feldman).
Motivation for Higher-Order Learning (Janet G. Donald).
Motivation and Methods
Using the ARCS Motivational Process in Computer-Based Instruction and Distance Education (John M. Keller).
CORE Elements of Student Motivation in Problem-Based Learning (Marjorie M. MacKinnon).
The Motivational Benefits of Cooperative Learning (Theodore Panitz)
Motivation and The Institution
Faculty Motivation: The Role of Supportive Teaching Culture (Kenneth A. Feldman & Michael B. Paulsen).
Motivation in Interdisciplinary Programs (Edward B. Nuhfer).
Institutional Improvement and Motivated Faculty: A Case Study (Donald W. Farmer).
Conclusion
What Have We Learned? A Synthesis and Some Guidelines for Effective Motivation in Higher Education (Michael Theall & Jennifer Franklin)
"Collegiality as a Moral and Ethical Practice"
Additional Info:
Calling for accountability, Practice What You Preach discusses ethical questions that arise in congregations and pastoral leadership. Formation of pastors, empowering leaders, resolving power struggles between clergy and laity--these and other critical pastoral issues are addressed by an ecumenical group of contributors. Divided into four parts: the way the churches train their pastors; the way their pastors live; the way communities worship; and the way communities behave, this collection identifies ...
Calling for accountability, Practice What You Preach discusses ethical questions that arise in congregations and pastoral leadership. Formation of pastors, empowering leaders, resolving power struggles between clergy and laity--these and other critical pastoral issues are addressed by an ecumenical group of contributors. Divided into four parts: the way the churches train their pastors; the way their pastors live; the way communities worship; and the way communities behave, this collection identifies ...
Additional Info:
Calling for accountability, Practice What You Preach discusses ethical questions that arise in congregations and pastoral leadership. Formation of pastors, empowering leaders, resolving power struggles between clergy and laity--these and other critical pastoral issues are addressed by an ecumenical group of contributors. Divided into four parts: the way the churches train their pastors; the way their pastors live; the way communities worship; and the way communities behave, this collection identifies and offers positive solutions to areas where churches are often slow to change. Each essay begins with a case describing a typical problem--from wages to in-fighting--and then discusses what virtues or character traits might be developed to resolve the problem effectively. An eye-opener of a book . . . it will involve you from page one as it invites intelligent people everywhere to reckon with its courageous, timely content. (From the Publisher)
Calling for accountability, Practice What You Preach discusses ethical questions that arise in congregations and pastoral leadership. Formation of pastors, empowering leaders, resolving power struggles between clergy and laity--these and other critical pastoral issues are addressed by an ecumenical group of contributors. Divided into four parts: the way the churches train their pastors; the way their pastors live; the way communities worship; and the way communities behave, this collection identifies and offers positive solutions to areas where churches are often slow to change. Each essay begins with a case describing a typical problem--from wages to in-fighting--and then discusses what virtues or character traits might be developed to resolve the problem effectively. An eye-opener of a book . . . it will involve you from page one as it invites intelligent people everywhere to reckon with its courageous, timely content. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
With this report, Barbara G. Wheeler ends a long and distinguished era as a lead researcher and author for the Auburn Studies series, the signature line of publications from the Center for the Study of Theological Education (CSTE). Beginning with Reaching Out (1993) which set a focused and extraordinarily generative vision for the CSTE, Wheeler went on to author or co-author fourteen of the twenty studies in this series. These studies ...
With this report, Barbara G. Wheeler ends a long and distinguished era as a lead researcher and author for the Auburn Studies series, the signature line of publications from the Center for the Study of Theological Education (CSTE). Beginning with Reaching Out (1993) which set a focused and extraordinarily generative vision for the CSTE, Wheeler went on to author or co-author fourteen of the twenty studies in this series. These studies ...
Additional Info:
With this report, Barbara G. Wheeler ends a long and distinguished era as a lead researcher and author for the Auburn Studies series, the signature line of publications from the Center for the Study of Theological Education (CSTE). Beginning with Reaching Out (1993) which set a focused and extraordinarily generative vision for the CSTE, Wheeler went on to author or co-author fourteen of the twenty studies in this series. These studies engaged many of the issues central to theological schools and their stakeholders: studies of enrollment and student debt, student recruitment and alumni success, and the status of faculties and senior leadership—both presidents and governing boards. With these and many other publications, lectures, and consulting projects, Wheeler established Auburn as a respected source for those wanting to understand the dynamics of this very particular set of institutions of higher education which prepare faith leaders for their vocations.
Governance That Works: Effective Leadership for Theological Schools exhibits Barbara Wheeler’s characteristically clear prose and keen insight readers of past Auburn Studies have come to expect. At a time when many theological schools are experiencing significant challenges, the report helpfully exegetes several schools as notable cases of effective governance. In general, the story is one of gradual change towards better governance policy and practice. Yet many boards struggle with improving board composition—including minority and gender inclusion but also people with the right skills and a capacity to be substantial donors to the school. Among a number of notable trends, the increasing power of chief executives—with generally strong support from their faculty and boards—greatly heightens the salience of interpersonal skills on the part of those executive leaders. In a related insight, the report shows how such an interpersonally wise senior executive develops stronger leadership within the faculty and board, and a more vital partnerships between the two. (Christian Scharen)
With this report, Barbara G. Wheeler ends a long and distinguished era as a lead researcher and author for the Auburn Studies series, the signature line of publications from the Center for the Study of Theological Education (CSTE). Beginning with Reaching Out (1993) which set a focused and extraordinarily generative vision for the CSTE, Wheeler went on to author or co-author fourteen of the twenty studies in this series. These studies engaged many of the issues central to theological schools and their stakeholders: studies of enrollment and student debt, student recruitment and alumni success, and the status of faculties and senior leadership—both presidents and governing boards. With these and many other publications, lectures, and consulting projects, Wheeler established Auburn as a respected source for those wanting to understand the dynamics of this very particular set of institutions of higher education which prepare faith leaders for their vocations.
Governance That Works: Effective Leadership for Theological Schools exhibits Barbara Wheeler’s characteristically clear prose and keen insight readers of past Auburn Studies have come to expect. At a time when many theological schools are experiencing significant challenges, the report helpfully exegetes several schools as notable cases of effective governance. In general, the story is one of gradual change towards better governance policy and practice. Yet many boards struggle with improving board composition—including minority and gender inclusion but also people with the right skills and a capacity to be substantial donors to the school. Among a number of notable trends, the increasing power of chief executives—with generally strong support from their faculty and boards—greatly heightens the salience of interpersonal skills on the part of those executive leaders. In a related insight, the report shows how such an interpersonally wise senior executive develops stronger leadership within the faculty and board, and a more vital partnerships between the two. (Christian Scharen)
"Where a Magic Dwells: A Teaching Casebook for Instructors of Religion in the University"
Additional Info:
This is a collection of case studies written by professor and by graduate students teaching in the field of religion. Each case highlights one or more teaching problem (or possibility), some facet of the mystery of teaching (and learning to teach) at the college level. Each case is intended to spark conversations about a particular collegiate teaching situation. (From the Publisher)
This is a collection of case studies written by professor and by graduate students teaching in the field of religion. Each case highlights one or more teaching problem (or possibility), some facet of the mystery of teaching (and learning to teach) at the college level. Each case is intended to spark conversations about a particular collegiate teaching situation. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This is a collection of case studies written by professor and by graduate students teaching in the field of religion. Each case highlights one or more teaching problem (or possibility), some facet of the mystery of teaching (and learning to teach) at the college level. Each case is intended to spark conversations about a particular collegiate teaching situation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Case 1 - Can you show me the way? (Bradley Herling and Douglas Hadley)
Case 2 - Daniel in the lion's den (Mark H. Mann)
Case 3 - The Opium of the classroom (Stephen Dawson)
Case 4 - The undermined student (Robert Parks)
Case 5 - The case of the untouchable topic (Douglas Hadley)
Case 6 - Zev and the crying presenter (Lesleigh Cushing)
Case 7 - When is enough, enough? (Greg Farr)
Case 8 - The sacred and the profane (Andrew Irvine and Bradley Herling)
Case 9 - Who am I? (Michael Mitchell)
Case 10 - Oh, my God, it's alive! (Lesleigh Cushing)
Case 11 - The voice of my beloved! Behold, he comes... (Bradely Herling)
Case 12 - Can Thomas Olafson still be saved?(Alina Feld)
Insider notes
This is a collection of case studies written by professor and by graduate students teaching in the field of religion. Each case highlights one or more teaching problem (or possibility), some facet of the mystery of teaching (and learning to teach) at the college level. Each case is intended to spark conversations about a particular collegiate teaching situation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Case 1 - Can you show me the way? (Bradley Herling and Douglas Hadley)
Case 2 - Daniel in the lion's den (Mark H. Mann)
Case 3 - The Opium of the classroom (Stephen Dawson)
Case 4 - The undermined student (Robert Parks)
Case 5 - The case of the untouchable topic (Douglas Hadley)
Case 6 - Zev and the crying presenter (Lesleigh Cushing)
Case 7 - When is enough, enough? (Greg Farr)
Case 8 - The sacred and the profane (Andrew Irvine and Bradley Herling)
Case 9 - Who am I? (Michael Mitchell)
Case 10 - Oh, my God, it's alive! (Lesleigh Cushing)
Case 11 - The voice of my beloved! Behold, he comes... (Bradely Herling)
Case 12 - Can Thomas Olafson still be saved?(Alina Feld)
Insider notes
Additional Info:
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Additional Info:
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Table Of Content:
Introduction (Jeanne P. McLean)
Academic Leadership: Roles, Issues, and Challenges (Jane I. Smith)
A New Dean Meets a New Day in Theological Education (James Hudnut-Beumler)
The Once and Future Dean: Reflections on Being a Chief Academic Officer (Elizabeth C. Nordbeck)
To a Candidate for Academic Leadership: A Letter (Russell E. Richey)
Of Force Fields and Aspirations: Being an Academic Dean in the Nineteen-Nineties (Brian O. McDermott, S.J.)
Academic Administration as an Inner Journey (Gordon T. Smith)
Developing the Community of Scholars (James L. Waits)
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Table Of Content:
Introduction (Jeanne P. McLean)
Academic Leadership: Roles, Issues, and Challenges (Jane I. Smith)
A New Dean Meets a New Day in Theological Education (James Hudnut-Beumler)
The Once and Future Dean: Reflections on Being a Chief Academic Officer (Elizabeth C. Nordbeck)
To a Candidate for Academic Leadership: A Letter (Russell E. Richey)
Of Force Fields and Aspirations: Being an Academic Dean in the Nineteen-Nineties (Brian O. McDermott, S.J.)
Academic Administration as an Inner Journey (Gordon T. Smith)
Developing the Community of Scholars (James L. Waits)
Additional Info:
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Additional Info:
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Table Of Content:
Introduction (Neely Dixon McCarter)
Leadership in the American Diocesan Seminary: Context, Institutions, and Personalities—1791 to 1965 (Joseph M. White)
The Effects of Institutional Change on the Office of Rector and President in the Catholic Theological Seminaries—1965 to 1994 (Robert J. Wister)
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Table Of Content:
Introduction (Neely Dixon McCarter)
Leadership in the American Diocesan Seminary: Context, Institutions, and Personalities—1791 to 1965 (Joseph M. White)
The Effects of Institutional Change on the Office of Rector and President in the Catholic Theological Seminaries—1965 to 1994 (Robert J. Wister)
Additional Info:
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Additional Info:
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Table Of Content:
Introduction (Neely Dixon McCarter)
Preface
The Office of President
Presidents and Finances
The President as Administrator
Relationships: Boards, Faculties, Staffs, Students, and Constituencies Presidential Profiles
Controversies
“Lord High Everything Else”: The Many Functions of the Seminary President
Concluding Remarks
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Table Of Content:
Introduction (Neely Dixon McCarter)
Preface
The Office of President
Presidents and Finances
The President as Administrator
Relationships: Boards, Faculties, Staffs, Students, and Constituencies Presidential Profiles
Controversies
“Lord High Everything Else”: The Many Functions of the Seminary President
Concluding Remarks
Additional Info:
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Additional Info:
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Table Of Content:
Introduction (Neely Dixon McCarter)
Work and Calling: An Interpretation of Presidents' Reflections on the Nature of Their Office (Malcolm L. Warford)
Toward Understanding the Seminary Presidency: Reflections of One President (Robert E. Cooley)
The Presidency in a Union School (Vincent Cushing)
Reflections on Fourteen Years as a Seminary President (James C. Fenhagen)
Reflections of a Pastor/President (Douglas W. Oldenburg)
The President as Pilgrim (Donald W. Shriver, Jr.)
On Becoming a Seminary President: Reflections on My Early Years at Hartford Seminary (Barbara Brown Zikmund)
Journal Issue. Full text is available online.
Table Of Content:
Introduction (Neely Dixon McCarter)
Work and Calling: An Interpretation of Presidents' Reflections on the Nature of Their Office (Malcolm L. Warford)
Toward Understanding the Seminary Presidency: Reflections of One President (Robert E. Cooley)
The Presidency in a Union School (Vincent Cushing)
Reflections on Fourteen Years as a Seminary President (James C. Fenhagen)
Reflections of a Pastor/President (Douglas W. Oldenburg)
The President as Pilgrim (Donald W. Shriver, Jr.)
On Becoming a Seminary President: Reflections on My Early Years at Hartford Seminary (Barbara Brown Zikmund)
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
An Illinois Sampler: Teaching and Research on the Prairie
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: How world-class research makes its way into lecture halls and seminar rooms
Major research universities expect faculty to conduct significant research but also to excel as teachers. Too often those outside the classroom assume that these two functions have little in common when in fact the best teachers conduct ...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: How world-class research makes its way into lecture halls and seminar rooms
Major research universities expect faculty to conduct significant research but also to excel as teachers. Too often those outside the classroom assume that these two functions have little in common when in fact the best teachers conduct ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: How world-class research makes its way into lecture halls and seminar rooms
Major research universities expect faculty to conduct significant research but also to excel as teachers. Too often those outside the classroom assume that these two functions have little in common when in fact the best teachers conduct exciting and innovative research that provides students the opportunity to learn by doing.
An Illinois Sampler presents personal accounts from faculty members at the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign and other contributors, about their research and how it enriches and energizes their teaching. Contributors from the humanities, engineering, social and natural sciences, and other disciplines explore how ideas, methods, and materials merge to lead their students down life-changing paths to creativity, discovery, and solutions. As faculty introduce their classes to work conducted from the Illinois prairie to the farms of Africa, from densely populated cities to dense computer coding, they generate an atmosphere where research, teaching, and learning thrive inside a feedback loop of education across disciplines.
Aimed at alumni and prospective students interested in the university's ongoing mission, as well as current faculty and students wishing to stay up to date on the diverse work being done around them, An Illinois Sampler offers a rare glimpse into the impact of cutting-edge research on undergraduate education in a rapidly changing world. The book also showcases the best, the most ambitious, and the most effective teaching practices developed and nurtured at one of the world's premier research universities.
"The late Ernie Boyer inspired his readers when he wrote about the 'scholarship' of teaching. Years later, the engagement of faculty in the scholarly assessment of what students know and can do and in the exploration of ways in which these outcomes might be improved remains a formidable challenge. This is especially the case in complex research universities. In this timely volume and in fields as diverse as dance, geology, music, medicine, kinesiology, mathematics, engineering, and microbiology we have firsthand accounts of what faculty members are doing to make a better tomorrow. The narratives are as inspiring as they are practical and deserve to be shared and read by those who care about the quality of American universities."--Stanley Ikenberry, President Emeritus of the University of Illinois
"The land-grant model is discovery of new knowledge, teaching students, and engaging the broader community. Something is lost when you try to separate the three concepts because they are mutually enriching--discovery comes in part by engaging the community, discovery by faculty and students strengthens education, etcetera. In this time of accountability and scarce resources, the academy must better explain this integration of effort, particularly in connection with the allocation of faculty time and compensation to research and engagement. The stories of scholar-educators from the University of Illinois, one of the great land-grant universities of the country, wonderfully illustrate how this all works."--Peter McPherson, President Emeritus of Michigan State University and President of the Association of Public and Land-grant Universities (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction: Charting Common Ground in the Teaching-Research Nexus (Mary-Ann Winkelmes and Antoinette Burton)
ch. 2 A Sense of the Earth (Bruce W. Fouke)
ch. 3 Collaborative Artists: How to Speak and Listen at the Same Time (Julie Jordan Gunn)
ch. 4 The Intimate University:’We Are All in This Together (Nancy Abelmann)
ch. 5 Painting with Numbers (and Shapes, and Symmetry) (Jayadev Athreya)
ch. 6 From Desk to Bench: Linking Students’ Interests to Science Curricula (Lauren A. Denofrio-Corrales and Yi Lu)
ch. 7 Bringing Statistics to Life (Flavia C. D. Andrade)
ch. 8 The Humanity of Teaching: Reflections from the Education Justice Project (D. Fairchild Ruggles, with Hugh Bishop, Rebecca Ginsburg, Audrey Petty, Anke Pinkert, and Agniezska Tuszynska)
ch. 9 Prairie Tales: The Life of the Lecture at Illinois (Laurie Johnson)
ch. 10 Engineering Professors Who Are Reengineering Their Courses: The iFoundry Perspective (Luisa-Maria Rosu, with Betty Jo Barrett, Bryan Wilcox, Geoffrey Herman, Raymond Price, and Lizanne DeStefano)
ch. 11 It’s More than an ‘Ghetto Story’: Using Dancehall as a Pedagogical Tool in the Classroom (Karen Flynn)
ch. 12 Experiencing Histories of the City (Mark D. Steinberg)
ch. 13 More than Creativity: Infusing Research in the Design Studio (William Sullivan)
ch. 14 The Maps on Our Backs (Thomas J. Bassett)
ch. 15 My Education as a Medical School Teacher (Richard I. Tapping)
ch. 16 Dance and the Alexander Technique: A Dynamic Research-Teaching Design (Rebecca Nettl-Fiol)
ch. 17 Five Things Only I Care About (Carol Spindel)
ch. 18 Creative Code in the Design Classroom: Preparing Students for Contemporary Professional Practice (Bradley Tober)
ch. 19 Cybernavigating (Kate Williams)
ch. 20 Humanities and Sciences at Work: Liberatory Education for Millennials (Kyle T. Mays)
About the Contributors
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: How world-class research makes its way into lecture halls and seminar rooms
Major research universities expect faculty to conduct significant research but also to excel as teachers. Too often those outside the classroom assume that these two functions have little in common when in fact the best teachers conduct exciting and innovative research that provides students the opportunity to learn by doing.
An Illinois Sampler presents personal accounts from faculty members at the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign and other contributors, about their research and how it enriches and energizes their teaching. Contributors from the humanities, engineering, social and natural sciences, and other disciplines explore how ideas, methods, and materials merge to lead their students down life-changing paths to creativity, discovery, and solutions. As faculty introduce their classes to work conducted from the Illinois prairie to the farms of Africa, from densely populated cities to dense computer coding, they generate an atmosphere where research, teaching, and learning thrive inside a feedback loop of education across disciplines.
Aimed at alumni and prospective students interested in the university's ongoing mission, as well as current faculty and students wishing to stay up to date on the diverse work being done around them, An Illinois Sampler offers a rare glimpse into the impact of cutting-edge research on undergraduate education in a rapidly changing world. The book also showcases the best, the most ambitious, and the most effective teaching practices developed and nurtured at one of the world's premier research universities.
"The late Ernie Boyer inspired his readers when he wrote about the 'scholarship' of teaching. Years later, the engagement of faculty in the scholarly assessment of what students know and can do and in the exploration of ways in which these outcomes might be improved remains a formidable challenge. This is especially the case in complex research universities. In this timely volume and in fields as diverse as dance, geology, music, medicine, kinesiology, mathematics, engineering, and microbiology we have firsthand accounts of what faculty members are doing to make a better tomorrow. The narratives are as inspiring as they are practical and deserve to be shared and read by those who care about the quality of American universities."--Stanley Ikenberry, President Emeritus of the University of Illinois
"The land-grant model is discovery of new knowledge, teaching students, and engaging the broader community. Something is lost when you try to separate the three concepts because they are mutually enriching--discovery comes in part by engaging the community, discovery by faculty and students strengthens education, etcetera. In this time of accountability and scarce resources, the academy must better explain this integration of effort, particularly in connection with the allocation of faculty time and compensation to research and engagement. The stories of scholar-educators from the University of Illinois, one of the great land-grant universities of the country, wonderfully illustrate how this all works."--Peter McPherson, President Emeritus of Michigan State University and President of the Association of Public and Land-grant Universities (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction: Charting Common Ground in the Teaching-Research Nexus (Mary-Ann Winkelmes and Antoinette Burton)
ch. 2 A Sense of the Earth (Bruce W. Fouke)
ch. 3 Collaborative Artists: How to Speak and Listen at the Same Time (Julie Jordan Gunn)
ch. 4 The Intimate University:’We Are All in This Together (Nancy Abelmann)
ch. 5 Painting with Numbers (and Shapes, and Symmetry) (Jayadev Athreya)
ch. 6 From Desk to Bench: Linking Students’ Interests to Science Curricula (Lauren A. Denofrio-Corrales and Yi Lu)
ch. 7 Bringing Statistics to Life (Flavia C. D. Andrade)
ch. 8 The Humanity of Teaching: Reflections from the Education Justice Project (D. Fairchild Ruggles, with Hugh Bishop, Rebecca Ginsburg, Audrey Petty, Anke Pinkert, and Agniezska Tuszynska)
ch. 9 Prairie Tales: The Life of the Lecture at Illinois (Laurie Johnson)
ch. 10 Engineering Professors Who Are Reengineering Their Courses: The iFoundry Perspective (Luisa-Maria Rosu, with Betty Jo Barrett, Bryan Wilcox, Geoffrey Herman, Raymond Price, and Lizanne DeStefano)
ch. 11 It’s More than an ‘Ghetto Story’: Using Dancehall as a Pedagogical Tool in the Classroom (Karen Flynn)
ch. 12 Experiencing Histories of the City (Mark D. Steinberg)
ch. 13 More than Creativity: Infusing Research in the Design Studio (William Sullivan)
ch. 14 The Maps on Our Backs (Thomas J. Bassett)
ch. 15 My Education as a Medical School Teacher (Richard I. Tapping)
ch. 16 Dance and the Alexander Technique: A Dynamic Research-Teaching Design (Rebecca Nettl-Fiol)
ch. 17 Five Things Only I Care About (Carol Spindel)
ch. 18 Creative Code in the Design Classroom: Preparing Students for Contemporary Professional Practice (Bradley Tober)
ch. 19 Cybernavigating (Kate Williams)
ch. 20 Humanities and Sciences at Work: Liberatory Education for Millennials (Kyle T. Mays)
About the Contributors
Additional Info:
The "Heeding New Voices" study, a year-long series of structured interviews with new faculty and graduate students aspiring to be faculty members around the country, sought both to give voice to those who are just beginning their academic careers and to provide guidance for the senior faculty, chairs, deans, and others in higher education responsible for shaping the professoriate of the future. This booklet, drawn in part from the study's ...
The "Heeding New Voices" study, a year-long series of structured interviews with new faculty and graduate students aspiring to be faculty members around the country, sought both to give voice to those who are just beginning their academic careers and to provide guidance for the senior faculty, chairs, deans, and others in higher education responsible for shaping the professoriate of the future. This booklet, drawn in part from the study's ...
Additional Info:
The "Heeding New Voices" study, a year-long series of structured interviews with new faculty and graduate students aspiring to be faculty members around the country, sought both to give voice to those who are just beginning their academic careers and to provide guidance for the senior faculty, chairs, deans, and others in higher education responsible for shaping the professoriate of the future. This booklet, drawn in part from the study's findings, includes: (1) ten principles of good practice; (2) inventories to prompt department chairs, senior colleagues, and other academic leaders to examine their individual and institutional practices; and (3) examples of concrete and innovative approaches to good practice being tried out now in a variety of institutional settings. The principles reflect the three categories of stated need from the "Heeding New Voices" interviews: improving review and tenure processes (principles 1-4), encouraging positive relations with colleagues and students (principles 5-7), and easing stresses of time and balance (principles 8-10). (Contains 13 references). (EV)
The "Heeding New Voices" study, a year-long series of structured interviews with new faculty and graduate students aspiring to be faculty members around the country, sought both to give voice to those who are just beginning their academic careers and to provide guidance for the senior faculty, chairs, deans, and others in higher education responsible for shaping the professoriate of the future. This booklet, drawn in part from the study's findings, includes: (1) ten principles of good practice; (2) inventories to prompt department chairs, senior colleagues, and other academic leaders to examine their individual and institutional practices; and (3) examples of concrete and innovative approaches to good practice being tried out now in a variety of institutional settings. The principles reflect the three categories of stated need from the "Heeding New Voices" interviews: improving review and tenure processes (principles 1-4), encouraging positive relations with colleagues and students (principles 5-7), and easing stresses of time and balance (principles 8-10). (Contains 13 references). (EV)
Additional Info:
Diverse teams of faculty and other academic and student affairs professionals from a wide range of institutions has drafted and revised institutional-level rubrics (and related materials) to correspond with the AAC&U "Essential Learning Outcomes." Each VALUE rubric contains the most broadly shared criteria or core characteristics considered to be critical for judging the quality of student work in a particular outcome area, including: intellectual/practical skills (such ...
Diverse teams of faculty and other academic and student affairs professionals from a wide range of institutions has drafted and revised institutional-level rubrics (and related materials) to correspond with the AAC&U "Essential Learning Outcomes." Each VALUE rubric contains the most broadly shared criteria or core characteristics considered to be critical for judging the quality of student work in a particular outcome area, including: intellectual/practical skills (such ...
Additional Info:
Diverse teams of faculty and other academic and student affairs professionals from a wide range of institutions has drafted and revised institutional-level rubrics (and related materials) to correspond with the AAC&U "Essential Learning Outcomes." Each VALUE rubric contains the most broadly shared criteria or core characteristics considered to be critical for judging the quality of student work in a particular outcome area, including: intellectual/practical skills (such as critical thinking and communication), personal and social responsibility (such as civic engagement and ethical reasoning), and integrative and applied learning.
Diverse teams of faculty and other academic and student affairs professionals from a wide range of institutions has drafted and revised institutional-level rubrics (and related materials) to correspond with the AAC&U "Essential Learning Outcomes." Each VALUE rubric contains the most broadly shared criteria or core characteristics considered to be critical for judging the quality of student work in a particular outcome area, including: intellectual/practical skills (such as critical thinking and communication), personal and social responsibility (such as civic engagement and ethical reasoning), and integrative and applied learning.
Creating Learning Communities: A Practical Guide to Winning Support, Organizing for Change, and Implementing Programs
Additional Info:
In recent years, learning communities - a curricular instructional innovation that integrates different facets of the undergraduate experience to enhance and enrich learning - have become the most promising new strategy for promoting student success and satisfaction in college. Learning communities give students the chance to deepen and diversify their education, connect with others who share their interests, and actively participate in the educational process.. "Creating Learning Communities is a ...
In recent years, learning communities - a curricular instructional innovation that integrates different facets of the undergraduate experience to enhance and enrich learning - have become the most promising new strategy for promoting student success and satisfaction in college. Learning communities give students the chance to deepen and diversify their education, connect with others who share their interests, and actively participate in the educational process.. "Creating Learning Communities is a ...
Additional Info:
In recent years, learning communities - a curricular instructional innovation that integrates different facets of the undergraduate experience to enhance and enrich learning - have become the most promising new strategy for promoting student success and satisfaction in college. Learning communities give students the chance to deepen and diversify their education, connect with others who share their interests, and actively participate in the educational process.. "Creating Learning Communities is a guide to the essentials of this rewarding new program area, including how to design, fund, staff, manage, and integrate learning communities into different campuses. Drawing from their own experience, as well as from experiences of campuses around the country, Nancy S. Shapiro and Jodi H. Levine provide both a sound theoretical rationale and nuts-and-bolts advice on the logistical, administrative, financial, and turf-related issues of creating an effective learning community. And perhaps most important, they show how to ensure that such communities embody and fulfill the objectives for which they were established. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Authors
ch. 1 Introduction: Why Learning Communities?
ch. 2 Types and Models of Learning Communities
ch. 3 Creating a Campus Culture for Learning Communities
ch. 4 Developing the Curricula
ch. 5 Recasting Faculty Roles and Rewards
ch. 6 Building Administrative Partnerships
ch. 7 Putting Administrative Structures in Place
ch. 8 Evaluating and Assessing Learning Communities
ch. 9 How Learning Communities Affect Students, Faculty, and the Institution
ch. 10 Concluding Advice and Reflections on Creating Learning Communities
App Learning Communities Contacts
References
Index
In recent years, learning communities - a curricular instructional innovation that integrates different facets of the undergraduate experience to enhance and enrich learning - have become the most promising new strategy for promoting student success and satisfaction in college. Learning communities give students the chance to deepen and diversify their education, connect with others who share their interests, and actively participate in the educational process.. "Creating Learning Communities is a guide to the essentials of this rewarding new program area, including how to design, fund, staff, manage, and integrate learning communities into different campuses. Drawing from their own experience, as well as from experiences of campuses around the country, Nancy S. Shapiro and Jodi H. Levine provide both a sound theoretical rationale and nuts-and-bolts advice on the logistical, administrative, financial, and turf-related issues of creating an effective learning community. And perhaps most important, they show how to ensure that such communities embody and fulfill the objectives for which they were established. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
The Authors
ch. 1 Introduction: Why Learning Communities?
ch. 2 Types and Models of Learning Communities
ch. 3 Creating a Campus Culture for Learning Communities
ch. 4 Developing the Curricula
ch. 5 Recasting Faculty Roles and Rewards
ch. 6 Building Administrative Partnerships
ch. 7 Putting Administrative Structures in Place
ch. 8 Evaluating and Assessing Learning Communities
ch. 9 How Learning Communities Affect Students, Faculty, and the Institution
ch. 10 Concluding Advice and Reflections on Creating Learning Communities
App Learning Communities Contacts
References
Index
Additional Info:
An independent professional development, training, and mentoring community of over 11,000 graduate students, post-docs and faculty members, dedicated to supporting academics in making successful transitions throughout their careers. Membership offers on-campus workshops, professional development and mentoring programs, discussion forums, newsletters, and resources
An independent professional development, training, and mentoring community of over 11,000 graduate students, post-docs and faculty members, dedicated to supporting academics in making successful transitions throughout their careers. Membership offers on-campus workshops, professional development and mentoring programs, discussion forums, newsletters, and resources
Additional Info:
An independent professional development, training, and mentoring community of over 11,000 graduate students, post-docs and faculty members, dedicated to supporting academics in making successful transitions throughout their careers. Membership offers on-campus workshops, professional development and mentoring programs, discussion forums, newsletters, and resources
An independent professional development, training, and mentoring community of over 11,000 graduate students, post-docs and faculty members, dedicated to supporting academics in making successful transitions throughout their careers. Membership offers on-campus workshops, professional development and mentoring programs, discussion forums, newsletters, and resources
Metateaching and the Instructional Map
Additional Info:
Bill Timpson presents his conception of metateaching. As metacognition is the idea of thinking about thinking, metateaching is the idea of thinking about teaching. Your mind will be infused with new, innovative — yet practical — ways to think about your classroom after reading this book.
You will learn about the Instructional Map, a systematic tool to help you organize your classes and visualize the direction, components, and impact of different ...
Bill Timpson presents his conception of metateaching. As metacognition is the idea of thinking about thinking, metateaching is the idea of thinking about teaching. Your mind will be infused with new, innovative — yet practical — ways to think about your classroom after reading this book.
You will learn about the Instructional Map, a systematic tool to help you organize your classes and visualize the direction, components, and impact of different ...
Additional Info:
Bill Timpson presents his conception of metateaching. As metacognition is the idea of thinking about thinking, metateaching is the idea of thinking about teaching. Your mind will be infused with new, innovative — yet practical — ways to think about your classroom after reading this book.
You will learn about the Instructional Map, a systematic tool to help you organize your classes and visualize the direction, components, and impact of different aspects of teaching. Ideas from the fields of cartography and orienteering will give you a fresh angle from which to view your teaching practice. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Passages and Pathfinders
Introduction
ch. 1: Of Story and Journey, Map, and Place
ch. 2: The Essence of Maps
ch. 3: Metacognition and Metateaching
ch. 4: The Instructional Map Explained
ch. 5: Using the Instructional Map
ch. 6: Observations, Presentations. and Student Reflections
ch. 7: The Instructional Map and Various Instructional Approaches
References
Bill Timpson presents his conception of metateaching. As metacognition is the idea of thinking about thinking, metateaching is the idea of thinking about teaching. Your mind will be infused with new, innovative — yet practical — ways to think about your classroom after reading this book.
You will learn about the Instructional Map, a systematic tool to help you organize your classes and visualize the direction, components, and impact of different aspects of teaching. Ideas from the fields of cartography and orienteering will give you a fresh angle from which to view your teaching practice. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Passages and Pathfinders
Introduction
ch. 1: Of Story and Journey, Map, and Place
ch. 2: The Essence of Maps
ch. 3: Metacognition and Metateaching
ch. 4: The Instructional Map Explained
ch. 5: Using the Instructional Map
ch. 6: Observations, Presentations. and Student Reflections
ch. 7: The Instructional Map and Various Instructional Approaches
References
"Nice Work if We Can Keep It: Confessions of a Junior Professor"
Additional Info:
A junior faculty member reflects on the dilemma of that professional position, noting that its anxieties fall into two categories: "Is this all there is?" and "What if we lose it?" She examines problems with, and prohibitions against, speaking one's mind in that position, sees solutions as being institutional or individual, and examines how concerns are linked to other campus constituencies.
A junior faculty member reflects on the dilemma of that professional position, noting that its anxieties fall into two categories: "Is this all there is?" and "What if we lose it?" She examines problems with, and prohibitions against, speaking one's mind in that position, sees solutions as being institutional or individual, and examines how concerns are linked to other campus constituencies.
Additional Info:
A junior faculty member reflects on the dilemma of that professional position, noting that its anxieties fall into two categories: "Is this all there is?" and "What if we lose it?" She examines problems with, and prohibitions against, speaking one's mind in that position, sees solutions as being institutional or individual, and examines how concerns are linked to other campus constituencies.
A junior faculty member reflects on the dilemma of that professional position, noting that its anxieties fall into two categories: "Is this all there is?" and "What if we lose it?" She examines problems with, and prohibitions against, speaking one's mind in that position, sees solutions as being institutional or individual, and examines how concerns are linked to other campus constituencies.
Additional Info:
Discusses the development of an effective teaching portfolio. Selecting the contents; Developing profile; Objective of portfolios.
Discusses the development of an effective teaching portfolio. Selecting the contents; Developing profile; Objective of portfolios.
Additional Info:
Discusses the development of an effective teaching portfolio. Selecting the contents; Developing profile; Objective of portfolios.
Discusses the development of an effective teaching portfolio. Selecting the contents; Developing profile; Objective of portfolios.
The Role of Self in Teacher Development
Additional Info:
The Role of Self in Teacher Development explores some of the major transition points in becoming a teacher and focuses explicitly on how issues of self and identity bear on these different points. The contributors examine not only pre-service teachers, but also the first years of teaching, the characteristics of the master teacher, and the processes of reexamining and affirming one's identity as a teacher. A recurrent theme throughout the ...
The Role of Self in Teacher Development explores some of the major transition points in becoming a teacher and focuses explicitly on how issues of self and identity bear on these different points. The contributors examine not only pre-service teachers, but also the first years of teaching, the characteristics of the master teacher, and the processes of reexamining and affirming one's identity as a teacher. A recurrent theme throughout the ...
Additional Info:
The Role of Self in Teacher Development explores some of the major transition points in becoming a teacher and focuses explicitly on how issues of self and identity bear on these different points. The contributors examine not only pre-service teachers, but also the first years of teaching, the characteristics of the master teacher, and the processes of reexamining and affirming one's identity as a teacher. A recurrent theme throughout the book is the importance of balancing the personal development of teachers with their professional development. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Balancing the Personal and Professional Development of Teachers
ch. 1 Deciding to Teach (Linda F. Tusin)
ch. 2 Deciding to Teach: Implications of a Self-Development Perspective (Stanley J. Zehm)
ch. 3 Becoming a Teacher: The Person in the Process (S. Vianne McLean)
ch. 4 Dimensions of Self That Influence Effective Teaching (Gary D. Borich)
ch. 5 Teacher Self-Appraisal and Appraisal of Self (Les Tickle)
ch. 6 Identity and Induction: Establishing the Self in the First Years of Teaching (Paul G. Schempp, Andrew C. Sparkes, Thomas J. Templin)
ch. 7 Caring: The Way of the Master Teacher (Karen J. Agne)
ch. 8 Effective Teachers: What They Do, How They Do It, and the Importance of Self-Knowledge (Don Hamachek)
Epilogue: How Can the Balance between the Personal and the Professional Be Achieved?
Indices
The Role of Self in Teacher Development explores some of the major transition points in becoming a teacher and focuses explicitly on how issues of self and identity bear on these different points. The contributors examine not only pre-service teachers, but also the first years of teaching, the characteristics of the master teacher, and the processes of reexamining and affirming one's identity as a teacher. A recurrent theme throughout the book is the importance of balancing the personal development of teachers with their professional development. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Balancing the Personal and Professional Development of Teachers
ch. 1 Deciding to Teach (Linda F. Tusin)
ch. 2 Deciding to Teach: Implications of a Self-Development Perspective (Stanley J. Zehm)
ch. 3 Becoming a Teacher: The Person in the Process (S. Vianne McLean)
ch. 4 Dimensions of Self That Influence Effective Teaching (Gary D. Borich)
ch. 5 Teacher Self-Appraisal and Appraisal of Self (Les Tickle)
ch. 6 Identity and Induction: Establishing the Self in the First Years of Teaching (Paul G. Schempp, Andrew C. Sparkes, Thomas J. Templin)
ch. 7 Caring: The Way of the Master Teacher (Karen J. Agne)
ch. 8 Effective Teachers: What They Do, How They Do It, and the Importance of Self-Knowledge (Don Hamachek)
Epilogue: How Can the Balance between the Personal and the Professional Be Achieved?
Indices
Improving College Teaching: Strategies for Developing Instructional Effectiveness
Additional Info:
This book shows college administrators, deans, department heads, and faculty development professionals how to improve the instructional performance of faculty members. It offers strategies for overcoming resistance and motivating faculty members to improve their teaching--and identifies the resources, activities, and services that will help them to succeed. (From the Publisher)
This book shows college administrators, deans, department heads, and faculty development professionals how to improve the instructional performance of faculty members. It offers strategies for overcoming resistance and motivating faculty members to improve their teaching--and identifies the resources, activities, and services that will help them to succeed. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This book shows college administrators, deans, department heads, and faculty development professionals how to improve the instructional performance of faculty members. It offers strategies for overcoming resistance and motivating faculty members to improve their teaching--and identifies the resources, activities, and services that will help them to succeed. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part One: Removing Barriers to Teaching Improvement
ch. 1. What Makes the Improvement of College Teaching Difficult?
ch. 2. Overcoming Faculty Resistance and Encouraging Participation
ch. 3. Improving Teaching: A Five-Step Process
Part Two: Key Elements of Successful Instructional Development
ch. 4. Ongoing Assessment and Feedback
ch. 5. A Flexible Mix of Improvement Activities
ch. 6. Colleagues Assisting Colleagues
ch. 7. Supportive Academic Leaders
Part Three: Institutional Options for Improving College Teaching
ch. 8. Organizational and Administrative Approaches
ch. 9. Profiles of Teaching Improvement Programs
ch. 10. Closing Advice on Improving College Teaching
Resources: A. How Do You Teach? A Checklist for Developing Instructional
Awareness B. Guidelines for Classroom Observation
This book shows college administrators, deans, department heads, and faculty development professionals how to improve the instructional performance of faculty members. It offers strategies for overcoming resistance and motivating faculty members to improve their teaching--and identifies the resources, activities, and services that will help them to succeed. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part One: Removing Barriers to Teaching Improvement
ch. 1. What Makes the Improvement of College Teaching Difficult?
ch. 2. Overcoming Faculty Resistance and Encouraging Participation
ch. 3. Improving Teaching: A Five-Step Process
Part Two: Key Elements of Successful Instructional Development
ch. 4. Ongoing Assessment and Feedback
ch. 5. A Flexible Mix of Improvement Activities
ch. 6. Colleagues Assisting Colleagues
ch. 7. Supportive Academic Leaders
Part Three: Institutional Options for Improving College Teaching
ch. 8. Organizational and Administrative Approaches
ch. 9. Profiles of Teaching Improvement Programs
ch. 10. Closing Advice on Improving College Teaching
Resources: A. How Do You Teach? A Checklist for Developing Instructional
Awareness B. Guidelines for Classroom Observation
Linked Courses for General Education and Integrative Learning: A Guide for Faculty and Administrators
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Research indicates that of the pedagogies recognized as “high impact”, learning communities – one approach to which, the linked course, is the subject of this book – lead to an increased level of student engagement in the freshman year that persists through the senior year, and improve retention.
This book focuses ...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Research indicates that of the pedagogies recognized as “high impact”, learning communities – one approach to which, the linked course, is the subject of this book – lead to an increased level of student engagement in the freshman year that persists through the senior year, and improve retention.
This book focuses ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Research indicates that of the pedagogies recognized as “high impact”, learning communities – one approach to which, the linked course, is the subject of this book – lead to an increased level of student engagement in the freshman year that persists through the senior year, and improve retention.
This book focuses on the learning community model that is the most flexible to implement in terms of scheduling, teacher collaboration, and design: the linked course. The faculty may teach independently or together, coordinating syllabi and assignments so that the classes complement each other, and often these courses are linked around a particular interdisciplinary theme. Creating a cohort that works together for two paired courses motivates students, while the course structure promotes integrative learning as students make connections between disciplines.
This volume covers both “linked courses” in which faculty may work to coordinate syllabi and assignments, but teach most of their courses separately, as well as well as “paired courses” in which two or more courses are team taught in an integrated program in which faculty participate as learners as well as teachers.
Part One, Linked Course Pedagogies, includes several case studies of specific linked courses, including a study skills course paired with a worldview course; a community college course that challenges students’ compartmentalized thinking; and a paired course whose outcomes can be directly compared to parallel stand-alone courses.
Part Two, Linked Course Programs, includes a description of several institutional programs representing a variety of linked course program models. Each chapter includes information about program implementation, staffing logistics and concerns, curriculum development, pedagogical strategies, and faculty development.
Part Three, Assessing Linked Courses, highlights the role of assessment in supporting, maintaining, and improving linked course programs by sharing assessment models and describing how faculty and administrators have used particular assessment practices in order to improve their linked course programs. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction: Why the Need for Learning Communities Now
Part One: Linked Course Pedagogies
ch. 1 Pairing Courses to Benefit Student Learning (Scott E. Gaier)
ch. 2 Linked Content Courses: A World Civilizations–World Religions Case Study (Jeffrey LaMonica)
ch. 3 Double Entry: Linking Introductory Financial Accounting and English Composition (Bruce A. Leauby and Mary C. Robertson)
ch. 4 Multiple Majors, One Writing Class: Discovering Commonalities Through Problematization (Irene Clark)
Part Two: Linked Course Programs
ch. 5 The Science of First-Year Learning Communities (Brandi Kutil)
ch. 6 Implementing a Linked Course Requirement in the Core Curriculum (Margot Soven)
ch. 7 Academic Partnerships with Residential Learning Communities (Maggie C. Parker and Alex Kappus)
ch. 8 Learning Communities in the New University (Siskanna Naynaha and Wendy Olson)
Part Three: Assessing Linked Courses
ch. 9 The Nuts and Bolts of Evaluating Linked Courses (Michael Roszkowski)
ch. 10 Using Program Assessments and Faculty Development to Deepen Student Learning (Lynn Dunlap and Maureen Pettitt)
ch. 11 Linked Course Assessment: The Problem With Quantitative Data (Bethany Blankenship)
ch. 12 Constant Reconnaissance: Assessment for Validation and Change (Greg Smith and Geoffrey Mamerow)
Editors and Contributors
Index
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Research indicates that of the pedagogies recognized as “high impact”, learning communities – one approach to which, the linked course, is the subject of this book – lead to an increased level of student engagement in the freshman year that persists through the senior year, and improve retention.
This book focuses on the learning community model that is the most flexible to implement in terms of scheduling, teacher collaboration, and design: the linked course. The faculty may teach independently or together, coordinating syllabi and assignments so that the classes complement each other, and often these courses are linked around a particular interdisciplinary theme. Creating a cohort that works together for two paired courses motivates students, while the course structure promotes integrative learning as students make connections between disciplines.
This volume covers both “linked courses” in which faculty may work to coordinate syllabi and assignments, but teach most of their courses separately, as well as well as “paired courses” in which two or more courses are team taught in an integrated program in which faculty participate as learners as well as teachers.
Part One, Linked Course Pedagogies, includes several case studies of specific linked courses, including a study skills course paired with a worldview course; a community college course that challenges students’ compartmentalized thinking; and a paired course whose outcomes can be directly compared to parallel stand-alone courses.
Part Two, Linked Course Programs, includes a description of several institutional programs representing a variety of linked course program models. Each chapter includes information about program implementation, staffing logistics and concerns, curriculum development, pedagogical strategies, and faculty development.
Part Three, Assessing Linked Courses, highlights the role of assessment in supporting, maintaining, and improving linked course programs by sharing assessment models and describing how faculty and administrators have used particular assessment practices in order to improve their linked course programs. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction: Why the Need for Learning Communities Now
Part One: Linked Course Pedagogies
ch. 1 Pairing Courses to Benefit Student Learning (Scott E. Gaier)
ch. 2 Linked Content Courses: A World Civilizations–World Religions Case Study (Jeffrey LaMonica)
ch. 3 Double Entry: Linking Introductory Financial Accounting and English Composition (Bruce A. Leauby and Mary C. Robertson)
ch. 4 Multiple Majors, One Writing Class: Discovering Commonalities Through Problematization (Irene Clark)
Part Two: Linked Course Programs
ch. 5 The Science of First-Year Learning Communities (Brandi Kutil)
ch. 6 Implementing a Linked Course Requirement in the Core Curriculum (Margot Soven)
ch. 7 Academic Partnerships with Residential Learning Communities (Maggie C. Parker and Alex Kappus)
ch. 8 Learning Communities in the New University (Siskanna Naynaha and Wendy Olson)
Part Three: Assessing Linked Courses
ch. 9 The Nuts and Bolts of Evaluating Linked Courses (Michael Roszkowski)
ch. 10 Using Program Assessments and Faculty Development to Deepen Student Learning (Lynn Dunlap and Maureen Pettitt)
ch. 11 Linked Course Assessment: The Problem With Quantitative Data (Bethany Blankenship)
ch. 12 Constant Reconnaissance: Assessment for Validation and Change (Greg Smith and Geoffrey Mamerow)
Editors and Contributors
Index
Leading a Diversity Culture Shift in Higher Education: Comprehensive Organizational Learning Strategies
Additional Info:
Leading a Diversity Culture Shift in Higher Education offers a practical and timely guide for launching, implementing, and institutionalizing diversity organizational learning. The authors draw from extensive interviews with chief diversity officers and college and university leaders to reveal the prevailing models and best practices for strengthening diversity practices within the higher education community today. They complement this original research with an analysis of key contextual factors that shape the ...
Leading a Diversity Culture Shift in Higher Education offers a practical and timely guide for launching, implementing, and institutionalizing diversity organizational learning. The authors draw from extensive interviews with chief diversity officers and college and university leaders to reveal the prevailing models and best practices for strengthening diversity practices within the higher education community today. They complement this original research with an analysis of key contextual factors that shape the ...
Additional Info:
Leading a Diversity Culture Shift in Higher Education offers a practical and timely guide for launching, implementing, and institutionalizing diversity organizational learning. The authors draw from extensive interviews with chief diversity officers and college and university leaders to reveal the prevailing models and best practices for strengthening diversity practices within the higher education community today. They complement this original research with an analysis of key contextual factors that shape the organizational learning process including administrative leadership, institutional mission and goals, historical legacy, geographic location, and campus structures and politics. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Foreword by Joe R. Feagin
Ch 1. An Improbable Landscape for Diversity Cultural Change
Ch 2. Laying the Groundwork for a Diversity Cultural Shift
Ch 3. A Framework for Systematic Diversity Organizational Learning
Ch 4. Representative Approaches to Diversity Organizational Learning
Ch 5. Future Aspirations and Expectations
Leading a Diversity Culture Shift in Higher Education offers a practical and timely guide for launching, implementing, and institutionalizing diversity organizational learning. The authors draw from extensive interviews with chief diversity officers and college and university leaders to reveal the prevailing models and best practices for strengthening diversity practices within the higher education community today. They complement this original research with an analysis of key contextual factors that shape the organizational learning process including administrative leadership, institutional mission and goals, historical legacy, geographic location, and campus structures and politics. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Foreword by Joe R. Feagin
Ch 1. An Improbable Landscape for Diversity Cultural Change
Ch 2. Laying the Groundwork for a Diversity Cultural Shift
Ch 3. A Framework for Systematic Diversity Organizational Learning
Ch 4. Representative Approaches to Diversity Organizational Learning
Ch 5. Future Aspirations and Expectations
C(H)AOS Theory: Reflections of Chief Academic Officers in Theological Education
Additional Info:
Members of the Association of Theological Schools' Chief Academic Officers Society (CAOS) -- deans and CAOs at more than 250 theological schools in the United States and Canada -- face a number of unique vocational tasks and trials. C(H)AOS Theory brings together in one volume perspectives from more than thirty veteran deans on a variety of topics related to academic leadership, from understanding institutional contexts and nurturing relationships to ...
Members of the Association of Theological Schools' Chief Academic Officers Society (CAOS) -- deans and CAOs at more than 250 theological schools in the United States and Canada -- face a number of unique vocational tasks and trials. C(H)AOS Theory brings together in one volume perspectives from more than thirty veteran deans on a variety of topics related to academic leadership, from understanding institutional contexts and nurturing relationships to ...
Additional Info:
Members of the Association of Theological Schools' Chief Academic Officers Society (CAOS) -- deans and CAOs at more than 250 theological schools in the United States and Canada -- face a number of unique vocational tasks and trials. C(H)AOS Theory brings together in one volume perspectives from more than thirty veteran deans on a variety of topics related to academic leadership, from understanding institutional contexts and nurturing relationships to negotiating conflict, setting and meeting academic goals, building budgets, working with assessment and accreditation, and more.
With its rich amalgam of useful information, bold instruction on a host of academic leadership issues, and lively narratives on the ways different colleagues address common challenges, C(H)AOS Theory will serve as a helpful resource for academic leaders. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgements
Introduction - Honoring Complexities, Celebrating Colleagueship: What to Expect from This Book
Reading Institutional Context
ch. 1 Academic Leadership and the Varieties of Theological Schools
Fins on the Left, Fins on the Right: Reading Context in Seminaries (Jana Childers)
Stop, Look, and Listen: Observation in Academic Leadership (Gale R. O'Day)
ch. 2 Developing Vision and Serving Mission
The Centrality of Institutional Mission as an Anchor of Corporate Vision (Jay Wade Marshall)
From Vision to Decision: Identifying the Dean's Essential Role in Facilitating the School's Mission (Richard Benson)
ch. 3 The Vocational Call and Multifaceted Role of the CAO
The Vocation of the Academic Dean (Stephen R. Graham)
The Vocational Call and Multiple Occupations of a CAO (Linda W. Bryan)
Nurturing Commitments
ch. 4 Relating to the CEO
Leading from the Middle (Willie James Jennings)
Building a Relationship That Furthers the Mission (Randolph MacFarland)
ch. 5 The Dean's Role in Governance
Governance and Faculty Leadership: Routine, Complex, Contentious, and Collaborative (D. Cameron Murchison)
Fulcrum Leadership and the Varied Dimensions of Governance (Anne T. Anderson)
ch. 6 Faculty Leadership and Development
Scaffolding That Supports Faculty Leadership: The Dean's Constructive Role (Anne B. Yardley)
Faculty Leadership and Development: Lessons from the Anabaptist-Pietist Tradition (Dale R. Stoffer)
ch. 7 The Dean's Relationship with Students
The Dean and Students: A Denominational Seminary Perspective (Ruth A. Meyers)
The Dean and Students: A Divinity School Perspective (Richard A. Rosengarten)
ch. 8 Modeling/Leading in Teaching and Scholarship
The Dean as Teacher and Scholar: Four Ways to Lead (Craig L. Nessan)
Leading as an Act of Academic Hospitality (Barbara Horkoff Mutch)
ch. 9 Leading in Diversity: Personal Experiences and Institutional Choices
The Stranger in the Center: The Academic Dean as Racial Minority (Stephen Breck Reid)
Locating Multiple Immigrant Identities and Belonging in Relatedness: Insights for Intercultural Leadership (Faustino M. Cruz)
In the Pursuit of a Community That Does Diversity Well (Sherwood G. Lingerfelter, with Winston E. Gooden, and Linda M. Wagener)
Reflections about Gender and Administration in Theological Education (Barbara Brown Zikmund)
Developing Competencies
ch. 10 Orchestrating People and Processes
The Dean as Administrator: It's All a Matter of Relationships (Gary Riebe-Estrella)
Focusing a Complex, Multidimensional Role: Observations from a Protestant Seminary Dean (John T. Carroll)
Building Consensus and Negotiating Conflict (Jack L. Seymour)
ch. 11 Building the Academic Budget
The Budget as a Mission Tool: Vision, Principles, and Strategies (Robin J. Steinke)
Entering Unfamiliar Territory: Budget Basics for the Dean of a University Theological School (Tite Tiénou)
ch. 12 Balancing Formation, Academic Learning, and Ecclesiastical Goals
Developing a Curriculum for Academic, Spiritual, and Vocational Formation (Bruce P. Powers)
Balancing Formation and Academic Learning (Ronald A. Mercier)
Living Fruitfully in the Tensions between Academy and Church (Ervin R. Stutzman)
ch. 13 Understanding and Using Assessment and Accreditation
Understanding and Fostering a Culture of Assessment: A Primer for Academic Deans (John F. VerBerkmoes)
Shifting Models of Assessment of Student Learning Outcomes: A Key to Renewal, Improvement, and Effectiveness (Leland V. Eliason)
ch. 14 Personal, Professional, and Spiritual Development
Finding Wholeness in the Role of the Dean (Bruce C. Birch)
Afterword - The Scholarship of Academic Leadership: A Postscript on the Work of Chief Academic Officers (Daniel O. Aleshire)
Contributors
Members of the Association of Theological Schools' Chief Academic Officers Society (CAOS) -- deans and CAOs at more than 250 theological schools in the United States and Canada -- face a number of unique vocational tasks and trials. C(H)AOS Theory brings together in one volume perspectives from more than thirty veteran deans on a variety of topics related to academic leadership, from understanding institutional contexts and nurturing relationships to negotiating conflict, setting and meeting academic goals, building budgets, working with assessment and accreditation, and more.
With its rich amalgam of useful information, bold instruction on a host of academic leadership issues, and lively narratives on the ways different colleagues address common challenges, C(H)AOS Theory will serve as a helpful resource for academic leaders. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgements
Introduction - Honoring Complexities, Celebrating Colleagueship: What to Expect from This Book
Reading Institutional Context
ch. 1 Academic Leadership and the Varieties of Theological Schools
Fins on the Left, Fins on the Right: Reading Context in Seminaries (Jana Childers)
Stop, Look, and Listen: Observation in Academic Leadership (Gale R. O'Day)
ch. 2 Developing Vision and Serving Mission
The Centrality of Institutional Mission as an Anchor of Corporate Vision (Jay Wade Marshall)
From Vision to Decision: Identifying the Dean's Essential Role in Facilitating the School's Mission (Richard Benson)
ch. 3 The Vocational Call and Multifaceted Role of the CAO
The Vocation of the Academic Dean (Stephen R. Graham)
The Vocational Call and Multiple Occupations of a CAO (Linda W. Bryan)
Nurturing Commitments
ch. 4 Relating to the CEO
Leading from the Middle (Willie James Jennings)
Building a Relationship That Furthers the Mission (Randolph MacFarland)
ch. 5 The Dean's Role in Governance
Governance and Faculty Leadership: Routine, Complex, Contentious, and Collaborative (D. Cameron Murchison)
Fulcrum Leadership and the Varied Dimensions of Governance (Anne T. Anderson)
ch. 6 Faculty Leadership and Development
Scaffolding That Supports Faculty Leadership: The Dean's Constructive Role (Anne B. Yardley)
Faculty Leadership and Development: Lessons from the Anabaptist-Pietist Tradition (Dale R. Stoffer)
ch. 7 The Dean's Relationship with Students
The Dean and Students: A Denominational Seminary Perspective (Ruth A. Meyers)
The Dean and Students: A Divinity School Perspective (Richard A. Rosengarten)
ch. 8 Modeling/Leading in Teaching and Scholarship
The Dean as Teacher and Scholar: Four Ways to Lead (Craig L. Nessan)
Leading as an Act of Academic Hospitality (Barbara Horkoff Mutch)
ch. 9 Leading in Diversity: Personal Experiences and Institutional Choices
The Stranger in the Center: The Academic Dean as Racial Minority (Stephen Breck Reid)
Locating Multiple Immigrant Identities and Belonging in Relatedness: Insights for Intercultural Leadership (Faustino M. Cruz)
In the Pursuit of a Community That Does Diversity Well (Sherwood G. Lingerfelter, with Winston E. Gooden, and Linda M. Wagener)
Reflections about Gender and Administration in Theological Education (Barbara Brown Zikmund)
Developing Competencies
ch. 10 Orchestrating People and Processes
The Dean as Administrator: It's All a Matter of Relationships (Gary Riebe-Estrella)
Focusing a Complex, Multidimensional Role: Observations from a Protestant Seminary Dean (John T. Carroll)
Building Consensus and Negotiating Conflict (Jack L. Seymour)
ch. 11 Building the Academic Budget
The Budget as a Mission Tool: Vision, Principles, and Strategies (Robin J. Steinke)
Entering Unfamiliar Territory: Budget Basics for the Dean of a University Theological School (Tite Tiénou)
ch. 12 Balancing Formation, Academic Learning, and Ecclesiastical Goals
Developing a Curriculum for Academic, Spiritual, and Vocational Formation (Bruce P. Powers)
Balancing Formation and Academic Learning (Ronald A. Mercier)
Living Fruitfully in the Tensions between Academy and Church (Ervin R. Stutzman)
ch. 13 Understanding and Using Assessment and Accreditation
Understanding and Fostering a Culture of Assessment: A Primer for Academic Deans (John F. VerBerkmoes)
Shifting Models of Assessment of Student Learning Outcomes: A Key to Renewal, Improvement, and Effectiveness (Leland V. Eliason)
ch. 14 Personal, Professional, and Spiritual Development
Finding Wholeness in the Role of the Dean (Bruce C. Birch)
Afterword - The Scholarship of Academic Leadership: A Postscript on the Work of Chief Academic Officers (Daniel O. Aleshire)
Contributors
Additional Info:
Monthly postings provide insight and advice for academic deans in theological education. Israel Galindo, Associate Dean for Lifelong Learning at Columbia Theological Seminary, formerly Academic Dean at Baptist Theological Seminary (Richmond), helps leaders apply Bowen Family Systems theory for healthy and effective functioning in home and work settings.
Monthly postings provide insight and advice for academic deans in theological education. Israel Galindo, Associate Dean for Lifelong Learning at Columbia Theological Seminary, formerly Academic Dean at Baptist Theological Seminary (Richmond), helps leaders apply Bowen Family Systems theory for healthy and effective functioning in home and work settings.
Additional Info:
Monthly postings provide insight and advice for academic deans in theological education. Israel Galindo, Associate Dean for Lifelong Learning at Columbia Theological Seminary, formerly Academic Dean at Baptist Theological Seminary (Richmond), helps leaders apply Bowen Family Systems theory for healthy and effective functioning in home and work settings.
Monthly postings provide insight and advice for academic deans in theological education. Israel Galindo, Associate Dean for Lifelong Learning at Columbia Theological Seminary, formerly Academic Dean at Baptist Theological Seminary (Richmond), helps leaders apply Bowen Family Systems theory for healthy and effective functioning in home and work settings.
Mentoring Revisited: Making an Impact on Individuals and Institutions
Additional Info:
If we believe that the welfare of individuals and the organization are one and the same, the points of compatibility and mutual support must be found and nurtured. If we value the "developmental culture" of an academic institution, the concerns of individuals for growth, change, advancement, recognition, and support can be brought into harmony with the goals of the "organizational culture" for stability, continuity, and community. The twenty-first century will ...
If we believe that the welfare of individuals and the organization are one and the same, the points of compatibility and mutual support must be found and nurtured. If we value the "developmental culture" of an academic institution, the concerns of individuals for growth, change, advancement, recognition, and support can be brought into harmony with the goals of the "organizational culture" for stability, continuity, and community. The twenty-first century will ...
Additional Info:
If we believe that the welfare of individuals and the organization are one and the same, the points of compatibility and mutual support must be found and nurtured. If we value the "developmental culture" of an academic institution, the concerns of individuals for growth, change, advancement, recognition, and support can be brought into harmony with the goals of the "organizational culture" for stability, continuity, and community. The twenty-first century will bring new challenges to higher education. Academic institutions must renew their responsibility to support the developmental needs of all their members. This commitment to support human growth is also part of institutional regeneration. An integrated, comprehensive model of personal and organizational development that includes mentoring for students, faculty, staff, and administrators can make a significant contribution to the best use of human resources, community building, and institutional vitality. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 New Directions for Mentoring: An Organizational Development Perspective (Marie A. Wunsch )
ch. 2 Mentoring: An Adult Developmental Perspective (Mary L. Otto)
ch. 3 Developing Mentoring Programs: Major Themes and Issues (Marie A. Wunsch)
ch. 4 Mentoring Undergraduate Minority Students: An Overview, Survey, and Model Program (Melvin C. Terrell, and R. Kipp Hassel)
ch. 5 Developing a Freshman Mentoring Program: A Small College Experience (Keith B. Wilson)
ch. 6 Enabling the Success of Junior Faculty Women Through Mentoring (Linda K. Johnsrud)
ch. 7 Mentoring New Faculty for Teaching and Research (William K. Jackson, Ronald D. Simpson)
ch. 8 Forging the Ties That Bind: Peer Mentoring Part-Time Faculty (Barbara J. Mills)
ch. 9 Mentoring Faculty at the Departmental Level (Kay U. Herr)
ch. 10 Mentoring Faculty for Midcareer Issues (Daniel W. Wheeler, B.J. Wheeler)
ch. 11 Peer Mentoring Among Graduate Students of Color: Expanding the Mentoring Relationship James Bonilla, Carleton Pickron, Travis Tatum)
ch. 12 Taking a Cultural Journey Through Mentorship: A Personal Story (Virgie O. Chattergy)
ch. 13 Mentoring Minority Graduate Students: A West Indian Narrative (Christine A. Stanley)
Appendix: A Checklist for Developing, Implementing, and Assessing Mentoring Programs
Index
If we believe that the welfare of individuals and the organization are one and the same, the points of compatibility and mutual support must be found and nurtured. If we value the "developmental culture" of an academic institution, the concerns of individuals for growth, change, advancement, recognition, and support can be brought into harmony with the goals of the "organizational culture" for stability, continuity, and community. The twenty-first century will bring new challenges to higher education. Academic institutions must renew their responsibility to support the developmental needs of all their members. This commitment to support human growth is also part of institutional regeneration. An integrated, comprehensive model of personal and organizational development that includes mentoring for students, faculty, staff, and administrators can make a significant contribution to the best use of human resources, community building, and institutional vitality. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 New Directions for Mentoring: An Organizational Development Perspective (Marie A. Wunsch )
ch. 2 Mentoring: An Adult Developmental Perspective (Mary L. Otto)
ch. 3 Developing Mentoring Programs: Major Themes and Issues (Marie A. Wunsch)
ch. 4 Mentoring Undergraduate Minority Students: An Overview, Survey, and Model Program (Melvin C. Terrell, and R. Kipp Hassel)
ch. 5 Developing a Freshman Mentoring Program: A Small College Experience (Keith B. Wilson)
ch. 6 Enabling the Success of Junior Faculty Women Through Mentoring (Linda K. Johnsrud)
ch. 7 Mentoring New Faculty for Teaching and Research (William K. Jackson, Ronald D. Simpson)
ch. 8 Forging the Ties That Bind: Peer Mentoring Part-Time Faculty (Barbara J. Mills)
ch. 9 Mentoring Faculty at the Departmental Level (Kay U. Herr)
ch. 10 Mentoring Faculty for Midcareer Issues (Daniel W. Wheeler, B.J. Wheeler)
ch. 11 Peer Mentoring Among Graduate Students of Color: Expanding the Mentoring Relationship James Bonilla, Carleton Pickron, Travis Tatum)
ch. 12 Taking a Cultural Journey Through Mentorship: A Personal Story (Virgie O. Chattergy)
ch. 13 Mentoring Minority Graduate Students: A West Indian Narrative (Christine A. Stanley)
Appendix: A Checklist for Developing, Implementing, and Assessing Mentoring Programs
Index
Teaching Well and Liking It: Motivating Faculty to Teach Effectively
Additional Info:
Any attempt to explain why someone is a good teacher--or is strongly motivated to teach effectively--involves a complex discussion of one of the oldest questions in human history: Why do people do what they do? In Teaching Well and Liking It, a distinguished group of internationally known scholars offers a sophisticated and stimulating look at the issues involved in motivating teachers to teach well in the challenging environment of the ...
Any attempt to explain why someone is a good teacher--or is strongly motivated to teach effectively--involves a complex discussion of one of the oldest questions in human history: Why do people do what they do? In Teaching Well and Liking It, a distinguished group of internationally known scholars offers a sophisticated and stimulating look at the issues involved in motivating teachers to teach well in the challenging environment of the ...
Additional Info:
Any attempt to explain why someone is a good teacher--or is strongly motivated to teach effectively--involves a complex discussion of one of the oldest questions in human history: Why do people do what they do? In Teaching Well and Liking It, a distinguished group of internationally known scholars offers a sophisticated and stimulating look at the issues involved in motivating teachers to teach well in the challenging environment of the modern university.
With college and university administrators worried about how to encourage faculty to devote energy to teaching, and students and their parents concerned that faculty are not dedicated to their teaching responsibilities, and faculty themselves feeling guilty and disappointed at their own failure to find satisfaction in teaching, the time is right for a book that explores the factors that inspire, nurture, and reward good teaching. Motivation, as volume editor James L. Bess points out, is a key factor when it comes to commitment, preparation, sustained effort, and performance in any work.
In fact, the effectiveness of any system of higher education is highly contingent on the quality of the teaching enterprise. What is learned, how much is learned, and progress in the psychosocial maturation of the student learner depend on the willingness of college and university faculty to devote long hours to all aspects of teaching. This collection of essays examines personal motivation to teach--both internal and external--as well as organizational conditions such as job characteristics, leadership, and student diversity, and system-wide conditions such as career phases, public policy, politics, and the vagaries of the academicmarketplace. It addresses the issues both theoretically and practically, drawing on the academic and hands-on experience of authors from many fields, including psychology, higher education, business, public policy, and sociology. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 The Meaning of Human Motivation
ch. 2 Wanting to Be a Good Teacher: What Have We Learned to Date?
ch. 3 Beyond Male Theory: A Feminist Perspective on Teaching Motivation
ch. 4 Self-Determined Teaching: Opportunities and Obstacles
ch. 5 Intrinsic Motivation and Effective Teaching: A Flow Analysis
ch. 6 Behavior Modification in a Loosely Coupled System of Higher Education
ch. 7 Expectancy Theory Approaches to Faculty Motivation
ch. 8 Implications of Goal-Setting Theory for Faculty Motivation
ch. 9 Organizational Cultures and Faculty Motivation
ch. 10 Organization Design and Job Characteristics
ch. 11 Technology and Teaching Motivation
ch. 12 Leadership and Faculty Motivation
ch. 13 Student Diversity: Challenge and Potential for Faculty Motivation
ch. 14 Assessment and Evaluation Techniques
ch. 15 The Influence of Faculty Backgrounds on the Motivation to Teach
ch. 16 Career Phases and Their Effect on Faculty Motivation
ch. 17 The Academic Marketplace and the Motivation to Teach
ch. 18 Public Policy and Faculty Motivation
ch. 19 The Politics of Motivation: A Comparative Perspective
ch. 20 Fostering Faculty Motivation to Teach: Approaches to Faculty Development
ch. 21 The Motivation to Teach: Perennial Conundrums
Contributors
Name Index
Subject Index
Any attempt to explain why someone is a good teacher--or is strongly motivated to teach effectively--involves a complex discussion of one of the oldest questions in human history: Why do people do what they do? In Teaching Well and Liking It, a distinguished group of internationally known scholars offers a sophisticated and stimulating look at the issues involved in motivating teachers to teach well in the challenging environment of the modern university.
With college and university administrators worried about how to encourage faculty to devote energy to teaching, and students and their parents concerned that faculty are not dedicated to their teaching responsibilities, and faculty themselves feeling guilty and disappointed at their own failure to find satisfaction in teaching, the time is right for a book that explores the factors that inspire, nurture, and reward good teaching. Motivation, as volume editor James L. Bess points out, is a key factor when it comes to commitment, preparation, sustained effort, and performance in any work.
In fact, the effectiveness of any system of higher education is highly contingent on the quality of the teaching enterprise. What is learned, how much is learned, and progress in the psychosocial maturation of the student learner depend on the willingness of college and university faculty to devote long hours to all aspects of teaching. This collection of essays examines personal motivation to teach--both internal and external--as well as organizational conditions such as job characteristics, leadership, and student diversity, and system-wide conditions such as career phases, public policy, politics, and the vagaries of the academicmarketplace. It addresses the issues both theoretically and practically, drawing on the academic and hands-on experience of authors from many fields, including psychology, higher education, business, public policy, and sociology. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 The Meaning of Human Motivation
ch. 2 Wanting to Be a Good Teacher: What Have We Learned to Date?
ch. 3 Beyond Male Theory: A Feminist Perspective on Teaching Motivation
ch. 4 Self-Determined Teaching: Opportunities and Obstacles
ch. 5 Intrinsic Motivation and Effective Teaching: A Flow Analysis
ch. 6 Behavior Modification in a Loosely Coupled System of Higher Education
ch. 7 Expectancy Theory Approaches to Faculty Motivation
ch. 8 Implications of Goal-Setting Theory for Faculty Motivation
ch. 9 Organizational Cultures and Faculty Motivation
ch. 10 Organization Design and Job Characteristics
ch. 11 Technology and Teaching Motivation
ch. 12 Leadership and Faculty Motivation
ch. 13 Student Diversity: Challenge and Potential for Faculty Motivation
ch. 14 Assessment and Evaluation Techniques
ch. 15 The Influence of Faculty Backgrounds on the Motivation to Teach
ch. 16 Career Phases and Their Effect on Faculty Motivation
ch. 17 The Academic Marketplace and the Motivation to Teach
ch. 18 Public Policy and Faculty Motivation
ch. 19 The Politics of Motivation: A Comparative Perspective
ch. 20 Fostering Faculty Motivation to Teach: Approaches to Faculty Development
ch. 21 The Motivation to Teach: Perennial Conundrums
Contributors
Name Index
Subject Index
Degrees That Matter: Moving Higher Education to a Learning Systems Paradigm
Additional Info:
Concerned by ongoing debates about higher education that talk past one another, the authors of this book show how to move beyond these and other obstacles to improve the student learning experience and further successful college outcomes. Offering an alternative to the culture of compliance in assessment and accreditation, they propose a different approach which they call the Learning System Paradigm. Building on the shift in focus from teaching to ...
Concerned by ongoing debates about higher education that talk past one another, the authors of this book show how to move beyond these and other obstacles to improve the student learning experience and further successful college outcomes. Offering an alternative to the culture of compliance in assessment and accreditation, they propose a different approach which they call the Learning System Paradigm. Building on the shift in focus from teaching to ...
Additional Info:
Concerned by ongoing debates about higher education that talk past one another, the authors of this book show how to move beyond these and other obstacles to improve the student learning experience and further successful college outcomes. Offering an alternative to the culture of compliance in assessment and accreditation, they propose a different approach which they call the Learning System Paradigm. Building on the shift in focus from teaching to learning, the new paradigm encourages faculty and staff to systematically seek out information on how well students are learning and how well various areas of the institution are supporting the student experience and to use that information to create more coherent and explicit learning experiences for students.
The authors begin by surveying the crowded terrain of reform in higher education and proceed from there to explore the emergence of this alternative paradigm that brings all these efforts together in a coherent way. The Learning System Paradigm presented in chapter two includes four key elements—consensus, alignment, student-centeredness, and communication. Chapter three focuses upon developing an encompassing notion of alignment that enables faculty, staff, and administrators to reshape institutional practice in ways that promote synergistic, integrative learning. Chapters four and five turn to practice, exploring the application of the paradigm to the work of curriculum mapping and assignment design. Chapter six focuses upon barriers to the work and presents ways to start and options for moving around barriers, and the final chapter explores ongoing implications of the new paradigm, offering strategies for communicating the impact of alignment on student learning.
The book draws upon two recent initiatives in the United States: the Tuning process, adapted from a European approach to breaking down siloes in the European Union educational space; and the Degree Qualifications Profile (DQP), a document that identifies and describes core areas of learning that are common to institutions in the US. Many of the examples are drawn from site visit reports, self-reported activities, workshops, and project experience collected by the National Institute for Learning Outcomes Assessment (NILOA) between 2010 and 2016. In that six-year window, NILOA witnessed the use of Tuning and/or the DQP in hundreds of institutions across the nation.(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Tables and Figures
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Ch 1. Landscape of Learning Initiatives
Ch 2. Shifting Paradigms
Ch 3. Aligning for Learning
Ch 4. Applying the Paradigm to Curriculum Mapping
Ch 5. Applying the Paradigm to Assignment Design
Ch 6. Perceived Barriers in the Learning Systems Paradigms
Ch 7. Reframing Academic Quality
Appendices
References
Concerned by ongoing debates about higher education that talk past one another, the authors of this book show how to move beyond these and other obstacles to improve the student learning experience and further successful college outcomes. Offering an alternative to the culture of compliance in assessment and accreditation, they propose a different approach which they call the Learning System Paradigm. Building on the shift in focus from teaching to learning, the new paradigm encourages faculty and staff to systematically seek out information on how well students are learning and how well various areas of the institution are supporting the student experience and to use that information to create more coherent and explicit learning experiences for students.
The authors begin by surveying the crowded terrain of reform in higher education and proceed from there to explore the emergence of this alternative paradigm that brings all these efforts together in a coherent way. The Learning System Paradigm presented in chapter two includes four key elements—consensus, alignment, student-centeredness, and communication. Chapter three focuses upon developing an encompassing notion of alignment that enables faculty, staff, and administrators to reshape institutional practice in ways that promote synergistic, integrative learning. Chapters four and five turn to practice, exploring the application of the paradigm to the work of curriculum mapping and assignment design. Chapter six focuses upon barriers to the work and presents ways to start and options for moving around barriers, and the final chapter explores ongoing implications of the new paradigm, offering strategies for communicating the impact of alignment on student learning.
The book draws upon two recent initiatives in the United States: the Tuning process, adapted from a European approach to breaking down siloes in the European Union educational space; and the Degree Qualifications Profile (DQP), a document that identifies and describes core areas of learning that are common to institutions in the US. Many of the examples are drawn from site visit reports, self-reported activities, workshops, and project experience collected by the National Institute for Learning Outcomes Assessment (NILOA) between 2010 and 2016. In that six-year window, NILOA witnessed the use of Tuning and/or the DQP in hundreds of institutions across the nation.(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Tables and Figures
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Ch 1. Landscape of Learning Initiatives
Ch 2. Shifting Paradigms
Ch 3. Aligning for Learning
Ch 4. Applying the Paradigm to Curriculum Mapping
Ch 5. Applying the Paradigm to Assignment Design
Ch 6. Perceived Barriers in the Learning Systems Paradigms
Ch 7. Reframing Academic Quality
Appendices
References
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
* This irreverent, but serious, guide to what life in higher education institutions is really like, now enhanced by 100 new tips
* Invaluable advice that ranges from getting your Ph.D. to setting the course of your academic career
Just landed your first faculty position? Close to getting your Ph.D., and planning a career in academe? What will academic life be like? How do you discover its tacit ...
* This irreverent, but serious, guide to what life in higher education institutions is really like, now enhanced by 100 new tips
* Invaluable advice that ranges from getting your Ph.D. to setting the course of your academic career
Just landed your first faculty position? Close to getting your Ph.D., and planning a career in academe? What will academic life be like? How do you discover its tacit ...
Additional Info:
* This irreverent, but serious, guide to what life in higher education institutions is really like, now enhanced by 100 new tips
* Invaluable advice that ranges from getting your Ph.D. to setting the course of your academic career
Just landed your first faculty position? Close to getting your Ph.D., and planning a career in academe? What will academic life be like? How do you discover its tacit rules? Develop the habits and networks needed for success? What issues will you encounter if you’re a person of color, or a woman? How is higher education changing?
Paul Gray and David E. Drew share their combined experience of many years as faculty and (recovering) administrators to offer even more insider advice—the kind that’s rarely taught or even talked about in graduate school – to help you succeed.
The 100 new hints expand sections on the dissertation process, job hunting, life in the classroom and on dealing with students, as well as on matters that affect readers’ careers, such as research, publication, and tenure. The book concludes with a tongue-in-cheek appendix on How to Become a Millionaire while an academic.
Already have the first edition? Give it to someone less fortunate than you, and take advantage of the new advice you will find in these pages. Too penurious to buy this book? Persuade a family member or friend to get it as a gift. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword 1 to the First Edition
Foreword 2 to the First Edition
Introduction
ch. 1 Basic Concepts
Gray’s Theorem of N + 2
Most academic fields are dominated by fewer than 100 powerful people
How to become known
Drew’s law on publishing papers
Make sure you have a mentor
Specialize. Get known for something
ch. 2 The PhD
Finish your PhD as early as possible
Be humble about your PhD
A PhD is primarily an indicator of survivorship
A PhD is a certification of research ability based on a sample of 1
A PhD is a license to reproduce
You must mave a PhD in hand
The key danger point is where you leave highly structured coursework
The PhD and part-time study
Avoid Watson’s syndrome
Celebrate your PhD!
ch. 3 The dissertation
Prelims
Finding a dissertation topic
Problem-solving mode
Put a lot of effort into writing your dissertation proposal
The range of your literature review
Selecting the dissertation advisory committee
The dissertation abstract
How long is too long for your dissertation?
The chain of references
Couple the likterature search closely with the discussion of results and the conclusion.
The risk of “not significant”results
The dissertation defense
ch. 4 Job Hunting
Job hunting is a research Project
Pick a place where you and your family want to live
When to apply for a faculty position
Find the best possible school for your first job
Change your career or move every seven years
Not-for-profit or for-profit for first or second job?
Exceptions to the previous hint
Build a Reference pool
Resumes are important
Dual careers
The short list
Jobs
Law of supply and demand
Research vs. teaching oriented institutions
The jobs may be at for profits
New programs
National rankings
Teaching in a community college
On-Line universities
The assistant dean strategy
Evaluate a postdoc carefully
Non-academic opportunities
Nonuniversity research organizations
Teaching Abroad for Fun and Profit
Interviewing
Tactics for interviewing
Dressing for the job interview
Don't be intimidated by the schools of those who interview you
Interview your potential bosses
Dealing with interviewers who published less than you did
Prepare an 'elevator speech"
Data Gathering
Determine the culture
Gather salary and tenure data
Obtaining tenure data is a little tricky
Ask about the retirement system
Parking
Determine real pay
Offers
Get the offer in writing, read it, and negotiate before you accept
Get the PhD bdefore you start the tenure track unless you are starving or homeless
Don’t take your first job at the school where you received your PhD
Choosing among offers
Hunting for the Next Job
Positioning for the next job
You become unemployed
ch. 5 Teaching and Service
Publications are the only form of portable wealth
Many colleges and universities value teaching
Teaching is a learned art
Being a mentor
Go to Toastmasters if needed
Meeting classes is paramount
Teaching can be a dangerous profession
Consider student costs when selecting textbooks.
Avoid serving on a committee where you are the technical expert
In The Classroom
Summaries lock in the material
Encourage questions
Enjoy your classes
Lecturing vs. facilitating
Teaching is not synonymous with lecturing
Lecture capture
Obtaining student responsesn through technology (clickers)
PowerPoint presentations
Teaching On-line
Distance education
Distance learning is a blessing. Distance learning is a threat
Students
Be wary of student excuses
Believe it or not, cheating is widespread
Teach every student
Teach to the student’s frame of reference
Distracted students
Undergraduates don’t remember more than 7 years back
Will this be on the final?
Grade inflation
Technobabble
Wikipedia and other web sources
Breaking the students' Wikipedia habit
Letters of reference for students
The student as customer mantra
ch. 6 Research
If you want a reserch career, make sure that the position you are offered allows you to actually do research
You can trade-off teaching load and research opportunities
Research requires both quantitative and qualitative skills. Learn grantsmanship
Don't be modest when writing a grant proposal
Protest if your brilliant grant proposal is declined
Build an advisory panel of nationally respected experts into your grant proposal
If you didn't build in an advisory panel it's not too late
Get the grant approval in writing
Get clearance before you study an organization
The institutional review board (IRB)
Academic trade journals are sources of higher education (and job) information
Collaborate and cooperate
Plagiarism is a No No
Back up, back up, back up your research
The “mode”of the number of publications is 0 followed closely by 1
ch. 7 Tenure
Tenure is the prize
Your promotion dossier
Why tenure is such a hurdle
If , by chance, you achieve tenure, never take another appolntment without it
Tenure, like reaserch support, can be negotiated on the way in
Tenure is tougher in cross-disciplinary fields
Tenure is forever (almost)
Tenure as we know it today may not be here forever
The number of tenured slots may decrease with time
The Mechanics of Tenure
The tenure clock is really four and a half years not seven
The Dreaded Impact Factor
Tenure committees look almost exclusively at refereed publications
Download counts
Multiple authored papers
Publication quality counts
Rolling reviews
ch. 8 Academic Rank
Being a tenured full professor is freedom
As a full professor you must be known for something
Avoid becoming the pitied “Permanent Associate Professor”
Promotion is an opportunity for a larger pay raise
ch. 9 Your Financial Life As An Academic
Academics are risk averse
Contracts are given to faculty for nine months
Salaries vary by field
Summer pay
The zero raise years
Retirement savings
Tax Deferral
Administrators make more
ch. 10 Life As An Academic
Good deans/bad deans
Never, ever choose sides in department politics
Don’t take a joint appointment
Join the faculty club
Office hours
Sabbaticals
Maintain collegiality
As an academic you are a public person
Freedom of speech
Attend Invited Lectures
Serving as an external reviewer
Keeping up with your field
You can go home again-retreat rights.
The board of trustees
Your Administrative Life
Secretaries are a scarce resource
Value your teaching assistants and graders
Grading
Your research assisstants require supervision.
Physical plant
Be careful what you delegate
Business cards
Your Digital Life
Learn the idiosyncracies of your institution's computer center
Electronic mail
The down side of e-mail
Don’t get on too many e-mail lists
Your students love e-mail, texting, and twitter
Keep up with computer developments
Meetings and digital publication
Interlibrary loan is quicker and more efficient than it used to be
Use digital libraries if they are available in your field
Telecommuting
Your web site
Your web visibility
The persistence of language
Institutional Citizen
Get to know the development people in your school and support them
Be responsive to your alumni office
When you do something noteworthy,m let your public relations department know
Communicating your field to the public
The faculty senate in most institutions provides a forum
Service
Department Chair
Never, never become a department chair unless you’re a tenured full professor
Be aware that the powers of a department chair are few
The role conflict in the job
Leadership
Dealing with student problems
Redeeming social values of being chair
Don’t stay in the chair position too long
Travel
Professional travel
Attend conferences
Choosing your conferen
* This irreverent, but serious, guide to what life in higher education institutions is really like, now enhanced by 100 new tips
* Invaluable advice that ranges from getting your Ph.D. to setting the course of your academic career
Just landed your first faculty position? Close to getting your Ph.D., and planning a career in academe? What will academic life be like? How do you discover its tacit rules? Develop the habits and networks needed for success? What issues will you encounter if you’re a person of color, or a woman? How is higher education changing?
Paul Gray and David E. Drew share their combined experience of many years as faculty and (recovering) administrators to offer even more insider advice—the kind that’s rarely taught or even talked about in graduate school – to help you succeed.
The 100 new hints expand sections on the dissertation process, job hunting, life in the classroom and on dealing with students, as well as on matters that affect readers’ careers, such as research, publication, and tenure. The book concludes with a tongue-in-cheek appendix on How to Become a Millionaire while an academic.
Already have the first edition? Give it to someone less fortunate than you, and take advantage of the new advice you will find in these pages. Too penurious to buy this book? Persuade a family member or friend to get it as a gift. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword 1 to the First Edition
Foreword 2 to the First Edition
Introduction
ch. 1 Basic Concepts
Gray’s Theorem of N + 2
Most academic fields are dominated by fewer than 100 powerful people
How to become known
Drew’s law on publishing papers
Make sure you have a mentor
Specialize. Get known for something
ch. 2 The PhD
Finish your PhD as early as possible
Be humble about your PhD
A PhD is primarily an indicator of survivorship
A PhD is a certification of research ability based on a sample of 1
A PhD is a license to reproduce
You must mave a PhD in hand
The key danger point is where you leave highly structured coursework
The PhD and part-time study
Avoid Watson’s syndrome
Celebrate your PhD!
ch. 3 The dissertation
Prelims
Finding a dissertation topic
Problem-solving mode
Put a lot of effort into writing your dissertation proposal
The range of your literature review
Selecting the dissertation advisory committee
The dissertation abstract
How long is too long for your dissertation?
The chain of references
Couple the likterature search closely with the discussion of results and the conclusion.
The risk of “not significant”results
The dissertation defense
ch. 4 Job Hunting
Job hunting is a research Project
Pick a place where you and your family want to live
When to apply for a faculty position
Find the best possible school for your first job
Change your career or move every seven years
Not-for-profit or for-profit for first or second job?
Exceptions to the previous hint
Build a Reference pool
Resumes are important
Dual careers
The short list
Jobs
Law of supply and demand
Research vs. teaching oriented institutions
The jobs may be at for profits
New programs
National rankings
Teaching in a community college
On-Line universities
The assistant dean strategy
Evaluate a postdoc carefully
Non-academic opportunities
Nonuniversity research organizations
Teaching Abroad for Fun and Profit
Interviewing
Tactics for interviewing
Dressing for the job interview
Don't be intimidated by the schools of those who interview you
Interview your potential bosses
Dealing with interviewers who published less than you did
Prepare an 'elevator speech"
Data Gathering
Determine the culture
Gather salary and tenure data
Obtaining tenure data is a little tricky
Ask about the retirement system
Parking
Determine real pay
Offers
Get the offer in writing, read it, and negotiate before you accept
Get the PhD bdefore you start the tenure track unless you are starving or homeless
Don’t take your first job at the school where you received your PhD
Choosing among offers
Hunting for the Next Job
Positioning for the next job
You become unemployed
ch. 5 Teaching and Service
Publications are the only form of portable wealth
Many colleges and universities value teaching
Teaching is a learned art
Being a mentor
Go to Toastmasters if needed
Meeting classes is paramount
Teaching can be a dangerous profession
Consider student costs when selecting textbooks.
Avoid serving on a committee where you are the technical expert
In The Classroom
Summaries lock in the material
Encourage questions
Enjoy your classes
Lecturing vs. facilitating
Teaching is not synonymous with lecturing
Lecture capture
Obtaining student responsesn through technology (clickers)
PowerPoint presentations
Teaching On-line
Distance education
Distance learning is a blessing. Distance learning is a threat
Students
Be wary of student excuses
Believe it or not, cheating is widespread
Teach every student
Teach to the student’s frame of reference
Distracted students
Undergraduates don’t remember more than 7 years back
Will this be on the final?
Grade inflation
Technobabble
Wikipedia and other web sources
Breaking the students' Wikipedia habit
Letters of reference for students
The student as customer mantra
ch. 6 Research
If you want a reserch career, make sure that the position you are offered allows you to actually do research
You can trade-off teaching load and research opportunities
Research requires both quantitative and qualitative skills. Learn grantsmanship
Don't be modest when writing a grant proposal
Protest if your brilliant grant proposal is declined
Build an advisory panel of nationally respected experts into your grant proposal
If you didn't build in an advisory panel it's not too late
Get the grant approval in writing
Get clearance before you study an organization
The institutional review board (IRB)
Academic trade journals are sources of higher education (and job) information
Collaborate and cooperate
Plagiarism is a No No
Back up, back up, back up your research
The “mode”of the number of publications is 0 followed closely by 1
ch. 7 Tenure
Tenure is the prize
Your promotion dossier
Why tenure is such a hurdle
If , by chance, you achieve tenure, never take another appolntment without it
Tenure, like reaserch support, can be negotiated on the way in
Tenure is tougher in cross-disciplinary fields
Tenure is forever (almost)
Tenure as we know it today may not be here forever
The number of tenured slots may decrease with time
The Mechanics of Tenure
The tenure clock is really four and a half years not seven
The Dreaded Impact Factor
Tenure committees look almost exclusively at refereed publications
Download counts
Multiple authored papers
Publication quality counts
Rolling reviews
ch. 8 Academic Rank
Being a tenured full professor is freedom
As a full professor you must be known for something
Avoid becoming the pitied “Permanent Associate Professor”
Promotion is an opportunity for a larger pay raise
ch. 9 Your Financial Life As An Academic
Academics are risk averse
Contracts are given to faculty for nine months
Salaries vary by field
Summer pay
The zero raise years
Retirement savings
Tax Deferral
Administrators make more
ch. 10 Life As An Academic
Good deans/bad deans
Never, ever choose sides in department politics
Don’t take a joint appointment
Join the faculty club
Office hours
Sabbaticals
Maintain collegiality
As an academic you are a public person
Freedom of speech
Attend Invited Lectures
Serving as an external reviewer
Keeping up with your field
You can go home again-retreat rights.
The board of trustees
Your Administrative Life
Secretaries are a scarce resource
Value your teaching assistants and graders
Grading
Your research assisstants require supervision.
Physical plant
Be careful what you delegate
Business cards
Your Digital Life
Learn the idiosyncracies of your institution's computer center
Electronic mail
The down side of e-mail
Don’t get on too many e-mail lists
Your students love e-mail, texting, and twitter
Keep up with computer developments
Meetings and digital publication
Interlibrary loan is quicker and more efficient than it used to be
Use digital libraries if they are available in your field
Telecommuting
Your web site
Your web visibility
The persistence of language
Institutional Citizen
Get to know the development people in your school and support them
Be responsive to your alumni office
When you do something noteworthy,m let your public relations department know
Communicating your field to the public
The faculty senate in most institutions provides a forum
Service
Department Chair
Never, never become a department chair unless you’re a tenured full professor
Be aware that the powers of a department chair are few
The role conflict in the job
Leadership
Dealing with student problems
Redeeming social values of being chair
Don’t stay in the chair position too long
Travel
Professional travel
Attend conferences
Choosing your conferen
Socialization of Graduate and Professional Students in Higher Education: A Perilous Passage?
Additional Info:
This report on the process of graduate and professional student socialization provides information that can be of use to graduate program faculty and administrators, professional associations, state legislatures, and professional licensing bodies charged with assuring clients that well qualified professional practitioners are being prepared in the nation's universities. It addresses implications of issues raised in current literature for designing more effective graduate programs. Socialization in graduate school refers to the ...
This report on the process of graduate and professional student socialization provides information that can be of use to graduate program faculty and administrators, professional associations, state legislatures, and professional licensing bodies charged with assuring clients that well qualified professional practitioners are being prepared in the nation's universities. It addresses implications of issues raised in current literature for designing more effective graduate programs. Socialization in graduate school refers to the ...
Additional Info:
This report on the process of graduate and professional student socialization provides information that can be of use to graduate program faculty and administrators, professional associations, state legislatures, and professional licensing bodies charged with assuring clients that well qualified professional practitioners are being prepared in the nation's universities. It addresses implications of issues raised in current literature for designing more effective graduate programs. Socialization in graduate school refers to the processes through which individuals gain the knowledge, skills, and values necessary for successful entry into a professional career requiring an advanced level of specialized knowledge and skills. The first two sections, "The Professional and Socialization" and "Conceptualizing Socialization in Graduate and Professional Programs," describe the various elements of this socialization process, drawing from research on adult socialization, role acquisition, and career development. The third section, "A Framework for the Socialization of Graduate and Professional Students," presents a conceptual model of graduate and professional student socialization that assumes socialization occurs through an interactive set of stages. The fourth section, "Institutional Culture: Recurrent Themes," illustrates several changing patterns in graduate education that are exerting pressure for reform. The fifth section, "Institutional Culture and Socialization: Differences among Academic Programs," contrasts socialization processes across academic program goals, faculty expectations, and student peer culture. The final section, "Easing the Perilous Passage," discusses modifying the graduate degree program and faculty and administrator roles, increasing diversity, and offering support to students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
The Professions and Socialization
The Professions in Society
Characterizing Socialization
Dimensions of Socialization
Conceptualizing Socialization in Graduate and Professional Programs
Stages of Socialization
Core Elements of Socialization
Structural Engagement
A Framework for the Socialization of Graduate and Professional Students
Linear Models of Socialization
Nonlinear Models of Socialization
An Interactive Framework for the Socialization of Graduate and Professional Students
Institutional Culture: Recurrent Themes
Diversity
International Graduate Students
Professionalism
Professionalization
Ethics
Technology and Distance Learning
Institutional Culture and Socialization: Differences Among Academic Programs
Knowledge Acquisition
Investment
Involvement
Structural Engagement
Easing the Perilous Passage
Modifying the Program
Increasing Diversity
Offering Support for Students
Modifying Faculty and Administrative Roles
References
Index
This report on the process of graduate and professional student socialization provides information that can be of use to graduate program faculty and administrators, professional associations, state legislatures, and professional licensing bodies charged with assuring clients that well qualified professional practitioners are being prepared in the nation's universities. It addresses implications of issues raised in current literature for designing more effective graduate programs. Socialization in graduate school refers to the processes through which individuals gain the knowledge, skills, and values necessary for successful entry into a professional career requiring an advanced level of specialized knowledge and skills. The first two sections, "The Professional and Socialization" and "Conceptualizing Socialization in Graduate and Professional Programs," describe the various elements of this socialization process, drawing from research on adult socialization, role acquisition, and career development. The third section, "A Framework for the Socialization of Graduate and Professional Students," presents a conceptual model of graduate and professional student socialization that assumes socialization occurs through an interactive set of stages. The fourth section, "Institutional Culture: Recurrent Themes," illustrates several changing patterns in graduate education that are exerting pressure for reform. The fifth section, "Institutional Culture and Socialization: Differences among Academic Programs," contrasts socialization processes across academic program goals, faculty expectations, and student peer culture. The final section, "Easing the Perilous Passage," discusses modifying the graduate degree program and faculty and administrator roles, increasing diversity, and offering support to students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
The Professions and Socialization
The Professions in Society
Characterizing Socialization
Dimensions of Socialization
Conceptualizing Socialization in Graduate and Professional Programs
Stages of Socialization
Core Elements of Socialization
Structural Engagement
A Framework for the Socialization of Graduate and Professional Students
Linear Models of Socialization
Nonlinear Models of Socialization
An Interactive Framework for the Socialization of Graduate and Professional Students
Institutional Culture: Recurrent Themes
Diversity
International Graduate Students
Professionalism
Professionalization
Ethics
Technology and Distance Learning
Institutional Culture and Socialization: Differences Among Academic Programs
Knowledge Acquisition
Investment
Involvement
Structural Engagement
Easing the Perilous Passage
Modifying the Program
Increasing Diversity
Offering Support for Students
Modifying Faculty and Administrative Roles
References
Index
Understanding Writing Transfer: Implications for Transformative Student Learning in Higher Education
Additional Info:
While education is based on the broad assumption that what one learns here can transfer over there– across critical transitions – what do we really know about the transfer of knowledge?
The question is all the more urgent at a time when there are pressures to “unbundle” higher education to target learning particular subjects and skills for occupational credentialing to the detriment of integrative education that enables students to ...
While education is based on the broad assumption that what one learns here can transfer over there– across critical transitions – what do we really know about the transfer of knowledge?
The question is all the more urgent at a time when there are pressures to “unbundle” higher education to target learning particular subjects and skills for occupational credentialing to the detriment of integrative education that enables students to ...
Additional Info:
While education is based on the broad assumption that what one learns here can transfer over there– across critical transitions – what do we really know about the transfer of knowledge?
The question is all the more urgent at a time when there are pressures to “unbundle” higher education to target learning particular subjects and skills for occupational credentialing to the detriment of integrative education that enables students to make connections and integrate their knowledge, skills and habits of mind into a adaptable and critical stance toward the world.
This book – the fruit of two-year multi-institutional studies by forty-five researchers from twenty-eight institutions in five countries – identifies enabling practices for, and five essential principles about, writing transfer that should inform decision-making by all higher education stakeholders about how to generally promote the transfer of knowledge.
This collection concisely summarizes what we know about writing transfer and explores the implications of writing transfer research for universities’ institutional decisions about writing across the curriculum requirements, general education programs, online and hybrid learning, outcomes assessment, writing-supported experiential learning, e-portfolios, first-year experiences, and other higher education initiatives.
This volume makes writing transfer research accessible to administrators, faculty decision makers, and other stakeholders across the curriculum who have a vested interest in preparing students to succeed in their future writing tasks in academia, the workplace, and their civic lives, and offers a framework for addressing the tensions between competency-based education and the integration of knowledge so vital for our society. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword—Betsy O. Barefoot and John N. Gardner
Ch 1. Five Essential Principles About Writing Transfer, Jessie L. Moore
Part One: Critical Sites of Impact
Ch 2. Transfer and Educational Reform in the Twenty-First Century: College and Career Readiness and the Common Core Standards, Linda Adler-Kassner
Ch 3. Pedagogy and Learning in a Digital Ecosystem, Rebecca Frost Davis
Ch 4. Writing, Transfer, and ePortfolios: A Possible Trifecta in Supporting Student Learning, Kathleen Blake Yancey
Ch 5. Writing High-Impact Practices: Developing Proactive Knowledge in Complex Contexts, Peter Felten
Ch 6. Diversity, Global Citizenship, and Writing Transfer,Brooke Barnett, Woody Pelton, Francois Masuka, Kevin Morrison, and Jessie L. Moore
Ch 7. Telling Expectations About Academic Writing: If Not Working, What About Knotworking?, Carmen M. Werder
Part Two: Principles at Work: Implications for Practice Case Studies
Ch 8. Rethinking the Role of Higher Education in College Preparedness and Success From the Perspective of Writing Transfer, Alison Farrell, Sandra Kane, Cecilia Dube, and Steve Salchak
Ch 9. Teaching for Transfer, Liane Robertson and Kara Taczak
Ch 10. Student Drafting Behaviors in and Beyond the First-Year Seminar, Diane E. Boyd
Ch 11. Cueing and Adapting First-Year Writing Knowledge: Support for Transfer Into Disciplinary Writing, Gwen Gorzelsky, Carol Hayes, Ed Jones, and Dana Lynn Driscoll
Ch 12. Promoting Cross-Disciplinary Transfer: A Case Study in Genre Learning, Mary Goldschmidt
Ch 13. “The Hardest Thing With Writing Is Not Getting Enough Instruction”: Helping Educators Guide Students Through Writing Challenges, Elizabeth Wardle and Nicolette Mercer Clement
Ch 14. Coda, Randall Bass
About the Editors and Contributors
Index
While education is based on the broad assumption that what one learns here can transfer over there– across critical transitions – what do we really know about the transfer of knowledge?
The question is all the more urgent at a time when there are pressures to “unbundle” higher education to target learning particular subjects and skills for occupational credentialing to the detriment of integrative education that enables students to make connections and integrate their knowledge, skills and habits of mind into a adaptable and critical stance toward the world.
This book – the fruit of two-year multi-institutional studies by forty-five researchers from twenty-eight institutions in five countries – identifies enabling practices for, and five essential principles about, writing transfer that should inform decision-making by all higher education stakeholders about how to generally promote the transfer of knowledge.
This collection concisely summarizes what we know about writing transfer and explores the implications of writing transfer research for universities’ institutional decisions about writing across the curriculum requirements, general education programs, online and hybrid learning, outcomes assessment, writing-supported experiential learning, e-portfolios, first-year experiences, and other higher education initiatives.
This volume makes writing transfer research accessible to administrators, faculty decision makers, and other stakeholders across the curriculum who have a vested interest in preparing students to succeed in their future writing tasks in academia, the workplace, and their civic lives, and offers a framework for addressing the tensions between competency-based education and the integration of knowledge so vital for our society. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword—Betsy O. Barefoot and John N. Gardner
Ch 1. Five Essential Principles About Writing Transfer, Jessie L. Moore
Part One: Critical Sites of Impact
Ch 2. Transfer and Educational Reform in the Twenty-First Century: College and Career Readiness and the Common Core Standards, Linda Adler-Kassner
Ch 3. Pedagogy and Learning in a Digital Ecosystem, Rebecca Frost Davis
Ch 4. Writing, Transfer, and ePortfolios: A Possible Trifecta in Supporting Student Learning, Kathleen Blake Yancey
Ch 5. Writing High-Impact Practices: Developing Proactive Knowledge in Complex Contexts, Peter Felten
Ch 6. Diversity, Global Citizenship, and Writing Transfer,Brooke Barnett, Woody Pelton, Francois Masuka, Kevin Morrison, and Jessie L. Moore
Ch 7. Telling Expectations About Academic Writing: If Not Working, What About Knotworking?, Carmen M. Werder
Part Two: Principles at Work: Implications for Practice Case Studies
Ch 8. Rethinking the Role of Higher Education in College Preparedness and Success From the Perspective of Writing Transfer, Alison Farrell, Sandra Kane, Cecilia Dube, and Steve Salchak
Ch 9. Teaching for Transfer, Liane Robertson and Kara Taczak
Ch 10. Student Drafting Behaviors in and Beyond the First-Year Seminar, Diane E. Boyd
Ch 11. Cueing and Adapting First-Year Writing Knowledge: Support for Transfer Into Disciplinary Writing, Gwen Gorzelsky, Carol Hayes, Ed Jones, and Dana Lynn Driscoll
Ch 12. Promoting Cross-Disciplinary Transfer: A Case Study in Genre Learning, Mary Goldschmidt
Ch 13. “The Hardest Thing With Writing Is Not Getting Enough Instruction”: Helping Educators Guide Students Through Writing Challenges, Elizabeth Wardle and Nicolette Mercer Clement
Ch 14. Coda, Randall Bass
About the Editors and Contributors
Index
Envisioning the Future of Doctoral Education: Preparing Stewards of the Discipline Carnegie Essays on the Doctorate
Additional Info:
The development of students as “stewards of the discipline” should be the purpose of doctoral education. A steward is a scholar in the fullest sense of the term—someone who can imaginatively generate new knowledge, critically conserve valuable and useful ideas, and responsibly transform those understandings through writing, teaching, and application. Stewardship also has an ethical and moral dimension; it is a role that transcends a collection of accomplishments and ...
The development of students as “stewards of the discipline” should be the purpose of doctoral education. A steward is a scholar in the fullest sense of the term—someone who can imaginatively generate new knowledge, critically conserve valuable and useful ideas, and responsibly transform those understandings through writing, teaching, and application. Stewardship also has an ethical and moral dimension; it is a role that transcends a collection of accomplishments and ...
Additional Info:
The development of students as “stewards of the discipline” should be the purpose of doctoral education. A steward is a scholar in the fullest sense of the term—someone who can imaginatively generate new knowledge, critically conserve valuable and useful ideas, and responsibly transform those understandings through writing, teaching, and application. Stewardship also has an ethical and moral dimension; it is a role that transcends a collection of accomplishments and skills. A steward is someone to whom the vigor, quality, and integrity of the field can be entrusted. The most important period of a steward’s formation occurs during formal doctoral education.
Envisioning the Future of Doctoral Education is a collection of essays commissioned for the Carnegie Initiative on the Doctorate. The question posed to the essayists in this volume was, “If you could start de novo, what would be the best way to structure doctoral education in your field to prepare stewards of the discipline?” The authors of the essays are respected thinkers, researchers, and scholars who are experienced with and thoughtful about doctoral education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The Authors
Part One: Introduction
ch. 1 Preparing Stewards of the Discipline (Chris M. Golde)
Part Two: Commentaries
ch. 2 Who Should Do What: Implications for Institutional and National Leaders (Kenneth Prewitt)
ch. 3 Vectors of Change (David Damrosch)
ch. 4 Heeding the Voices of Graduate Students and Postdocs (Crispin Taylor).
Part Three: The Essays
ch. 5 Unmasking Uncertainties and Embracing Contradictions: Graduate Education in the Sciences (Yehuda Elkana)
Doctoral Education in Mathematics
ch. 6 Developing Scholars and Professionals: The Case of Mathematics (Hyman Bass)
ch. 7 A Time for Change? The Mathematics Doctorate
Doctoral Education in Chemistry (Tony F. Chan)
ch. 8 Time for Reform? (Alvin L. Kwiram)
ch. 9 Developing Breadth and Depth of Knowledge: The Doctorate in Chemistry (Ronald Breslow)
ch. 10 Training Future Leaders (Angelica M. Stacy)
Doctoral Education in Neuroscience
ch. 11 Maintaining Vitality Through Change: Graduate Education in Neuroscience (Zach W. Hall)
ch. 12 The Challenges of Multidisciplinarity: Neuroscience and the Doctorate (Steven E. Hyman)
Doctoral Education in Education
ch. 13 Stewards of a Field, Stewards of an Enterprise: The Doctorate in Education (Virginia Richardson)
ch. 14 Toward a Future as Rich as Our Past (David C. Berliner)
Doctoral Education in History
ch. 15 Expanding the Domain of History (Thomas Bender)
ch. 16 Historians, the Historical Forces They Have Fostered, and the Doctorate in History (Joyce Appleby)
ch. 17 Getting Ready to Do History (William Cronon)
Doctoral Education in English
ch. 18 Rethinking the Ph.D. in English (Andrea Abernethy Lunsford)
ch. 19 Toward a New Consensus: The Ph.D. in English (Gerald Graff)
ch. 20 Words and Responsibilities: Graduate Education and the Humanities (Catharine R. Stimpson)
Part Four: Conclusion
ch. 21 The Questions in the Back of the Book (George E. Walker)
Name Index
Subject Index
The development of students as “stewards of the discipline” should be the purpose of doctoral education. A steward is a scholar in the fullest sense of the term—someone who can imaginatively generate new knowledge, critically conserve valuable and useful ideas, and responsibly transform those understandings through writing, teaching, and application. Stewardship also has an ethical and moral dimension; it is a role that transcends a collection of accomplishments and skills. A steward is someone to whom the vigor, quality, and integrity of the field can be entrusted. The most important period of a steward’s formation occurs during formal doctoral education.
Envisioning the Future of Doctoral Education is a collection of essays commissioned for the Carnegie Initiative on the Doctorate. The question posed to the essayists in this volume was, “If you could start de novo, what would be the best way to structure doctoral education in your field to prepare stewards of the discipline?” The authors of the essays are respected thinkers, researchers, and scholars who are experienced with and thoughtful about doctoral education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The Authors
Part One: Introduction
ch. 1 Preparing Stewards of the Discipline (Chris M. Golde)
Part Two: Commentaries
ch. 2 Who Should Do What: Implications for Institutional and National Leaders (Kenneth Prewitt)
ch. 3 Vectors of Change (David Damrosch)
ch. 4 Heeding the Voices of Graduate Students and Postdocs (Crispin Taylor).
Part Three: The Essays
ch. 5 Unmasking Uncertainties and Embracing Contradictions: Graduate Education in the Sciences (Yehuda Elkana)
Doctoral Education in Mathematics
ch. 6 Developing Scholars and Professionals: The Case of Mathematics (Hyman Bass)
ch. 7 A Time for Change? The Mathematics Doctorate
Doctoral Education in Chemistry (Tony F. Chan)
ch. 8 Time for Reform? (Alvin L. Kwiram)
ch. 9 Developing Breadth and Depth of Knowledge: The Doctorate in Chemistry (Ronald Breslow)
ch. 10 Training Future Leaders (Angelica M. Stacy)
Doctoral Education in Neuroscience
ch. 11 Maintaining Vitality Through Change: Graduate Education in Neuroscience (Zach W. Hall)
ch. 12 The Challenges of Multidisciplinarity: Neuroscience and the Doctorate (Steven E. Hyman)
Doctoral Education in Education
ch. 13 Stewards of a Field, Stewards of an Enterprise: The Doctorate in Education (Virginia Richardson)
ch. 14 Toward a Future as Rich as Our Past (David C. Berliner)
Doctoral Education in History
ch. 15 Expanding the Domain of History (Thomas Bender)
ch. 16 Historians, the Historical Forces They Have Fostered, and the Doctorate in History (Joyce Appleby)
ch. 17 Getting Ready to Do History (William Cronon)
Doctoral Education in English
ch. 18 Rethinking the Ph.D. in English (Andrea Abernethy Lunsford)
ch. 19 Toward a New Consensus: The Ph.D. in English (Gerald Graff)
ch. 20 Words and Responsibilities: Graduate Education and the Humanities (Catharine R. Stimpson)
Part Four: Conclusion
ch. 21 The Questions in the Back of the Book (George E. Walker)
Name Index
Subject Index
The Mentoring Continuum From Graduate School through Tenure
Additional Info:
Skill at mentoring has . . . attained a certain cachet among those at all career stages who find in it an alternative way of being in academe-one that tilts away from the endemic competition of the research environment in favor of cooperation and mutual purpose. Part of mentoring’s appeal lies in its ability to gesture in two directions at once: forward . . . to new modalities and more egalitarian relationships, and backward, to ...
Skill at mentoring has . . . attained a certain cachet among those at all career stages who find in it an alternative way of being in academe-one that tilts away from the endemic competition of the research environment in favor of cooperation and mutual purpose. Part of mentoring’s appeal lies in its ability to gesture in two directions at once: forward . . . to new modalities and more egalitarian relationships, and backward, to ...
Additional Info:
Skill at mentoring has . . . attained a certain cachet among those at all career stages who find in it an alternative way of being in academe-one that tilts away from the endemic competition of the research environment in favor of cooperation and mutual purpose. Part of mentoring’s appeal lies in its ability to gesture in two directions at once: forward . . . to new modalities and more egalitarian relationships, and backward, to a tradition of cross-generational support and identification as old as universities themselves, and that continues to feed the romance of the academic life in the minds of would-be faculty. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Contributors
Acknowledgments
Introduction (Glenn Wright)
Part One: Origins
ch. 1 With a Little Help from My Friends: The Role of Peer Mentoring in Graduate Student Teaching Assistant Development (Michael Amlung, Elizabeth A. Simpson, Melissa Dengler, Brian Stone, Grace Williams, and Denise P. Domizi)
ch. 2 Graduate School–Facilitated Peer Mentoring for Degree Completion: Dissertation-Writing Boot Camps (Jan Allen)
ch. 3 Subject Matter Plus: Mentoring for Nonacademic Careers (Paula Chambers)
ch. 4 Graduate Mentoring against Common Sense (Ron Krabill)
Part Two: Transitions
ch. 5 Mentors’ Conceptions of Mentoring in Formalized Faculty Relationships (Susanna Calkins and Greg Light)
ch. 6 Taking Ownership of Your Mentoring: Lessons Learned from Participating in the Earth Science Women’s Network (Mirjam S. Glessmer, Amanda S. Adams, Meredith G. Hastings, and Rebecca T. Barnes)
ch. 7 “Mentoring Up”: Learning to Manage Your Mentoring Relationships (Steven Paul Lee, Richard McGee, Christine Pfund, and Janet Branchaw)
ch. 8 Shifting Vision: Mentoring as Faculty Development for All Levels of Experience (Jennifer W. Shewmaker and Phyllis Bolin)
ch. 9 Building a Culture of Mentoring via a Faculty Mentoring Portal (Julie Welch, Krista Hoffman-Longtin, Miriam Cohen Dell, Jon Eynon, Daniel Rusyniak, and Mary Dankoski)
Part Three: Dialogues and Reflections
ch. 10 Graduate Student Peer-Mentoring Programs: Benefiting Students, Faculty, and Academic Programs (Beth A. Boehm and Amy J. Lueck)
ch. 11 The Family Plan: A Dialogue about Graduate Students, Babies, and the Unique Demands of the Advisor-Student Relation (Leonard Cassuto and Jane Van Slembrouck)
ch. 12 Cross-Race Faculty Mentoring (Christine A. Stanley and Yvonna S. Lincoln)
ch. 13 Graduate Student ISO a Mentor: A Dialogue about Mentoring (Jan Allen and Kevin Johnston)
ch. 14 Growing into Mentoring, and into the Profession: A Reflection on Intentionally Cultivating Mentoring Communities (Nina B. Namaste)
ch. 15 My Lucky Life and Hard Times (Leonard Cassuto)
Resources
Index
Skill at mentoring has . . . attained a certain cachet among those at all career stages who find in it an alternative way of being in academe-one that tilts away from the endemic competition of the research environment in favor of cooperation and mutual purpose. Part of mentoring’s appeal lies in its ability to gesture in two directions at once: forward . . . to new modalities and more egalitarian relationships, and backward, to a tradition of cross-generational support and identification as old as universities themselves, and that continues to feed the romance of the academic life in the minds of would-be faculty. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Contributors
Acknowledgments
Introduction (Glenn Wright)
Part One: Origins
ch. 1 With a Little Help from My Friends: The Role of Peer Mentoring in Graduate Student Teaching Assistant Development (Michael Amlung, Elizabeth A. Simpson, Melissa Dengler, Brian Stone, Grace Williams, and Denise P. Domizi)
ch. 2 Graduate School–Facilitated Peer Mentoring for Degree Completion: Dissertation-Writing Boot Camps (Jan Allen)
ch. 3 Subject Matter Plus: Mentoring for Nonacademic Careers (Paula Chambers)
ch. 4 Graduate Mentoring against Common Sense (Ron Krabill)
Part Two: Transitions
ch. 5 Mentors’ Conceptions of Mentoring in Formalized Faculty Relationships (Susanna Calkins and Greg Light)
ch. 6 Taking Ownership of Your Mentoring: Lessons Learned from Participating in the Earth Science Women’s Network (Mirjam S. Glessmer, Amanda S. Adams, Meredith G. Hastings, and Rebecca T. Barnes)
ch. 7 “Mentoring Up”: Learning to Manage Your Mentoring Relationships (Steven Paul Lee, Richard McGee, Christine Pfund, and Janet Branchaw)
ch. 8 Shifting Vision: Mentoring as Faculty Development for All Levels of Experience (Jennifer W. Shewmaker and Phyllis Bolin)
ch. 9 Building a Culture of Mentoring via a Faculty Mentoring Portal (Julie Welch, Krista Hoffman-Longtin, Miriam Cohen Dell, Jon Eynon, Daniel Rusyniak, and Mary Dankoski)
Part Three: Dialogues and Reflections
ch. 10 Graduate Student Peer-Mentoring Programs: Benefiting Students, Faculty, and Academic Programs (Beth A. Boehm and Amy J. Lueck)
ch. 11 The Family Plan: A Dialogue about Graduate Students, Babies, and the Unique Demands of the Advisor-Student Relation (Leonard Cassuto and Jane Van Slembrouck)
ch. 12 Cross-Race Faculty Mentoring (Christine A. Stanley and Yvonna S. Lincoln)
ch. 13 Graduate Student ISO a Mentor: A Dialogue about Mentoring (Jan Allen and Kevin Johnston)
ch. 14 Growing into Mentoring, and into the Profession: A Reflection on Intentionally Cultivating Mentoring Communities (Nina B. Namaste)
ch. 15 My Lucky Life and Hard Times (Leonard Cassuto)
Resources
Index
Recognizing Faculty Work: Reward Systems for the Year 2000
Additional Info:
This volume is structured to provide practical assistance to those engaged in the review of faculty reward systems on their campuses and to provide guidelines to academic administrators, deans, and chairs who are leading these efforts. Chapters have been designed to address major issues relating to promotion, tenure, and merit pay. The different ways in which campuses have approached the process of clarifying their missions and modifying their faculty reward ...
This volume is structured to provide practical assistance to those engaged in the review of faculty reward systems on their campuses and to provide guidelines to academic administrators, deans, and chairs who are leading these efforts. Chapters have been designed to address major issues relating to promotion, tenure, and merit pay. The different ways in which campuses have approached the process of clarifying their missions and modifying their faculty reward ...
Additional Info:
This volume is structured to provide practical assistance to those engaged in the review of faculty reward systems on their campuses and to provide guidelines to academic administrators, deans, and chairs who are leading these efforts. Chapters have been designed to address major issues relating to promotion, tenure, and merit pay. The different ways in which campuses have approached the process of clarifying their missions and modifying their faculty reward structures are illustrated. Reference materials from scholarly associations and accreditation agencies are included to demonstrate disciplinary perspectives. A model for change is presented along with criteria for assessing a promotion and tenure system. A professional portfolio to document the work of faculty is also described. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Changing Priorities and the Faculty Reward System (Robert M. Diamond)
ch. 2 Instituting Change in the Faculty Reward System (Robert M. Diamond)
ch. 3 Differences Among the Disciplines (Bronwyn E. Adam, Alton O. Roberts)
ch. 4 Institutional Approaches to the Issues of Reward and Scholarship (Alton O. Roberts, Jon F. Wergin, Bronwyn E. Adam)
ch. 5 Revitalizing Faculty Work Through Intrinsic Rewards (Robert C. Froh, Robert J. Menges, Charles J. Walker)
ch. 6 Representing Faculty Work: The Professional Portfolio (Robert C. Froh, Peter J. Gray, Leo M. Lambert)
Appendix: Departmental Statements on Faculty Rewards
Index
This volume is structured to provide practical assistance to those engaged in the review of faculty reward systems on their campuses and to provide guidelines to academic administrators, deans, and chairs who are leading these efforts. Chapters have been designed to address major issues relating to promotion, tenure, and merit pay. The different ways in which campuses have approached the process of clarifying their missions and modifying their faculty reward structures are illustrated. Reference materials from scholarly associations and accreditation agencies are included to demonstrate disciplinary perspectives. A model for change is presented along with criteria for assessing a promotion and tenure system. A professional portfolio to document the work of faculty is also described. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes
ch. 1 Changing Priorities and the Faculty Reward System (Robert M. Diamond)
ch. 2 Instituting Change in the Faculty Reward System (Robert M. Diamond)
ch. 3 Differences Among the Disciplines (Bronwyn E. Adam, Alton O. Roberts)
ch. 4 Institutional Approaches to the Issues of Reward and Scholarship (Alton O. Roberts, Jon F. Wergin, Bronwyn E. Adam)
ch. 5 Revitalizing Faculty Work Through Intrinsic Rewards (Robert C. Froh, Robert J. Menges, Charles J. Walker)
ch. 6 Representing Faculty Work: The Professional Portfolio (Robert C. Froh, Peter J. Gray, Leo M. Lambert)
Appendix: Departmental Statements on Faculty Rewards
Index
Tell Me So I Can Hear You: A Developmental Approach to Feedback for Educators
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: In Tell Me So I Can Hear You, Eleanor Drago-Severson and Jessica Blum-DeStefano show how education leaders can learn to deliver feedback in a way that strengthens relationships as well as performance and builds the capacity for growth. Drawing on constructive-developmental theory, the authors describe four stages of adult growth and ...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: In Tell Me So I Can Hear You, Eleanor Drago-Severson and Jessica Blum-DeStefano show how education leaders can learn to deliver feedback in a way that strengthens relationships as well as performance and builds the capacity for growth. Drawing on constructive-developmental theory, the authors describe four stages of adult growth and ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: In Tell Me So I Can Hear You, Eleanor Drago-Severson and Jessica Blum-DeStefano show how education leaders can learn to deliver feedback in a way that strengthens relationships as well as performance and builds the capacity for growth. Drawing on constructive-developmental theory, the authors describe four stages of adult growth and development and explain how to differentiate feedback for colleagues with different “ways of knowing,” which include:
- Instrumental knowers, who tend to see things in black and white (“Did I do it right or wrong?”) and may need to develop the capacity for reflection.
- Socializing knowers, who are concerned with maintaining relationships (“What do you want me to do?”) and may need support developing their own ideas.
- Self-authoring knowers, who have strong ideologies and values (“How does this fit with my goals and vision?”) and may need help with perspective taking.
- Self-transformative knowers, who are able to examine issues from multiple points of view (“How can I understand this more deeply?”) and may need guidance in resolving tensions and contradictions.
The authors show how leaders can provide feedback in ways that “meet people where they are” while expanding the developmental capacities educators bring to their work. Drago-Severson and Blum-DeStefano provide real-life examples with practical strategies for creating a safe space for feedback, finding the right words, and bridging feedback and action. Tell Me So I Can Hear You offers invaluable guidance to help educators support a culture of learning in classrooms, schools, and districts. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 A Developmental Approach to Feedback
ch. 2 What Do We Know About Effective Feedback?
ch. 3 Theoretical Foundations of Feedback for Growth
ch. 4 How Do Different Ways of Knowing Influence
How We Receive Feedback?
ch. 5 How Do Different Ways of Knowing Influence
How We Give Feedback?
ch. 6 Building a Culture of Feedback and Trust
ch. 7 Framing Constructive and Inquiry-Oriented Feedback
ch. 8 Giving Feedback in the Moment
ch. 9 Bridging Feedback and Action
ch. 10 king Out and Growing from Feedback
Epilogue
Notes
Acknowledgments
About the Author
Index
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: In Tell Me So I Can Hear You, Eleanor Drago-Severson and Jessica Blum-DeStefano show how education leaders can learn to deliver feedback in a way that strengthens relationships as well as performance and builds the capacity for growth. Drawing on constructive-developmental theory, the authors describe four stages of adult growth and development and explain how to differentiate feedback for colleagues with different “ways of knowing,” which include:
- Instrumental knowers, who tend to see things in black and white (“Did I do it right or wrong?”) and may need to develop the capacity for reflection.
- Socializing knowers, who are concerned with maintaining relationships (“What do you want me to do?”) and may need support developing their own ideas.
- Self-authoring knowers, who have strong ideologies and values (“How does this fit with my goals and vision?”) and may need help with perspective taking.
- Self-transformative knowers, who are able to examine issues from multiple points of view (“How can I understand this more deeply?”) and may need guidance in resolving tensions and contradictions.
The authors show how leaders can provide feedback in ways that “meet people where they are” while expanding the developmental capacities educators bring to their work. Drago-Severson and Blum-DeStefano provide real-life examples with practical strategies for creating a safe space for feedback, finding the right words, and bridging feedback and action. Tell Me So I Can Hear You offers invaluable guidance to help educators support a culture of learning in classrooms, schools, and districts. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 A Developmental Approach to Feedback
ch. 2 What Do We Know About Effective Feedback?
ch. 3 Theoretical Foundations of Feedback for Growth
ch. 4 How Do Different Ways of Knowing Influence
How We Receive Feedback?
ch. 5 How Do Different Ways of Knowing Influence
How We Give Feedback?
ch. 6 Building a Culture of Feedback and Trust
ch. 7 Framing Constructive and Inquiry-Oriented Feedback
ch. 8 Giving Feedback in the Moment
ch. 9 Bridging Feedback and Action
ch. 10 king Out and Growing from Feedback
Epilogue
Notes
Acknowledgments
About the Author
Index
Additional Info:
Very helpful overview, followed by more detailed and extended discussion as well as references.
Very helpful overview, followed by more detailed and extended discussion as well as references.
Additional Info:
Very helpful overview, followed by more detailed and extended discussion as well as references.
Very helpful overview, followed by more detailed and extended discussion as well as references.
Additional Info:
An Auburn Studies report on a study of 24 “top supplier” doctoral programs in theology and religion—those that send the most graduates to teach in seminaries and divinity schools. The report raises questions about the practices of programs and the employment prospects of graduates.
An Auburn Studies report on a study of 24 “top supplier” doctoral programs in theology and religion—those that send the most graduates to teach in seminaries and divinity schools. The report raises questions about the practices of programs and the employment prospects of graduates.
Additional Info:
An Auburn Studies report on a study of 24 “top supplier” doctoral programs in theology and religion—those that send the most graduates to teach in seminaries and divinity schools. The report raises questions about the practices of programs and the employment prospects of graduates.
An Auburn Studies report on a study of 24 “top supplier” doctoral programs in theology and religion—those that send the most graduates to teach in seminaries and divinity schools. The report raises questions about the practices of programs and the employment prospects of graduates.
Additional Info:
Policies should encourage senior professors to engage in periodic review of their performance and professional goals and allow deans and department chairs to negotiate revised responsibilities are necessary to take fuller advantage of the gifts senior faculty can share with their institutions – and to ensure that senior faculty are treated fairly and consistently.
Policies should encourage senior professors to engage in periodic review of their performance and professional goals and allow deans and department chairs to negotiate revised responsibilities are necessary to take fuller advantage of the gifts senior faculty can share with their institutions – and to ensure that senior faculty are treated fairly and consistently.
Additional Info:
Policies should encourage senior professors to engage in periodic review of their performance and professional goals and allow deans and department chairs to negotiate revised responsibilities are necessary to take fuller advantage of the gifts senior faculty can share with their institutions – and to ensure that senior faculty are treated fairly and consistently.
Policies should encourage senior professors to engage in periodic review of their performance and professional goals and allow deans and department chairs to negotiate revised responsibilities are necessary to take fuller advantage of the gifts senior faculty can share with their institutions – and to ensure that senior faculty are treated fairly and consistently.
Additional Info:
A brief review and annotated bibliography on designing a teaching portfolio.
A brief review and annotated bibliography on designing a teaching portfolio.
Additional Info:
A brief review and annotated bibliography on designing a teaching portfolio.
A brief review and annotated bibliography on designing a teaching portfolio.
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Initial findings from this exploratory study indicate significant questions, such as: why does the focus of faculty work appear to shift and, in later career? How do the administrative and leadership roles often assumed by midlife and mid-career faculty affect other dimensions of faculty work? Is the level of work satisfaction of mid-career faculty a function of the job demands or of life assessment and career questioning? What roles do ...
Initial findings from this exploratory study indicate significant questions, such as: why does the focus of faculty work appear to shift and, in later career? How do the administrative and leadership roles often assumed by midlife and mid-career faculty affect other dimensions of faculty work? Is the level of work satisfaction of mid-career faculty a function of the job demands or of life assessment and career questioning? What roles do ...
Additional Info:
Initial findings from this exploratory study indicate significant questions, such as: why does the focus of faculty work appear to shift and, in later career? How do the administrative and leadership roles often assumed by midlife and mid-career faculty affect other dimensions of faculty work? Is the level of work satisfaction of mid-career faculty a function of the job demands or of life assessment and career questioning? What roles do institutional context and disciplinary field play in the experiences and perceptions of the middle years of the academic life cycle?
Initial findings from this exploratory study indicate significant questions, such as: why does the focus of faculty work appear to shift and, in later career? How do the administrative and leadership roles often assumed by midlife and mid-career faculty affect other dimensions of faculty work? Is the level of work satisfaction of mid-career faculty a function of the job demands or of life assessment and career questioning? What roles do institutional context and disciplinary field play in the experiences and perceptions of the middle years of the academic life cycle?
Success After Tenure: Supporting Mid-Career Faculty
Additional Info:
This book brings together leading practitioners and scholars engaged in professional development programming for and research on mid-career faculty members. The chapters focus on key areas of career development and advancement that can enhance both individual growth and institutional change to better support mid-career faculties.
The mid-career stage is the longest segment of the faculty career and it contains the largest cohort of faculty. Also, mid-career faculty are ...
This book brings together leading practitioners and scholars engaged in professional development programming for and research on mid-career faculty members. The chapters focus on key areas of career development and advancement that can enhance both individual growth and institutional change to better support mid-career faculties.
The mid-career stage is the longest segment of the faculty career and it contains the largest cohort of faculty. Also, mid-career faculty are ...
Additional Info:
This book brings together leading practitioners and scholars engaged in professional development programming for and research on mid-career faculty members. The chapters focus on key areas of career development and advancement that can enhance both individual growth and institutional change to better support mid-career faculties.
The mid-career stage is the longest segment of the faculty career and it contains the largest cohort of faculty. Also, mid-career faculty are tasked with being the next generation of faculty leaders and mentors on their respective campuses, with little to no supports to do so effectively, at a time when higher education continues to face unprecedented challenges while managing continued goal of diversifying both the student and faculty bodies.
The stories, examples, data, and resources shared in this book will provide inspiration--and reality checks--to the administrators, faculty developers, and department chairs charged with better supporting their faculties as they engage in academic work. Current and prospective faculty members will learn about trends in mid-career faculty development resources, see examples of how to create such supports when they are lacking on their campuses, and gain insights on how to strategically advance their own careers based on the realities of the professoriate.
The book features a variety of institution types: community colleges, regional/comprehensive institutions, liberal arts colleges, public research universities, ivy league institutions, international institutions, and those with targeted missions such as HSI/MSI and Jesuit.
Topics include faculty development for formal and informal leadership roles; strategies to support professional growth, renewal, time and people management; teaching and learning as a form of scholarship; the role of learning communities and networks as a source of support and professional revitalization; global engagement to support scholarship and teaching; strategies to recruit, retain, and promote underrepresented faculty populations; the policy-practice connection; and gender differences related to key mid-career outcomes.
While the authors acknowledge that the challenges facing the mid-career stage are numerous and varying, they offer a counter narrative by looking at ways that faculty and/or institutions can assert themselves to find opportunities within challenging contexts. They suggest that these challenges highlight priority mentoring areas, and support the creation of new and innovative faculty development supports at institutional, departmental, and individual levels. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Mary Deane Sorcinelli)
Acknowledgments
Introduction (Vicki L. Baker, Aimee LaPointe Terosky, Laura Gail Lunsford, Gretchen Neisler, Meghan J. Pifer)
Ch 1. Faculty Development in the United States: Past and Present (Vicki L. Baker, Christina M. Vo Phan)
Part One: Leadership Development (Laura Gail Lunsford)
Ch 2. The Academic Leadership Institute for Mid-Career Faculty (Vicki L. Baker, Laura Gail Lunsford, Meghan J. Pifer
Ch 3. Developing Leaders for the Next Phase of Jesuit Higher Education: Ignatian Leadership Program for Faculty (Karin Botto, Carolyn Berenato)
Ch 4. “Stayin’ Alive” and Thriving at Mid-Career (Amy Strage)
Part Two: Teaching and Learning (Aimee LaPointe Terosky)
Ch 5. Examining Mid-Career Faculty Development Through a Sociocultural, Professional Learning Lens (Annique Boelryk,Cheryl Amundsen)
Ch 6. Scholarship of Teaching and Learning as a Vehicle for Thriving in Mid-Career (Mike Pinter)
Ch 7. Attracting Mid-Career Faculty to Teach in First-Year Student Learning Communities (Hillary H. Steiner)
Part Three: Scholarly Development (Gretchen Neisler)
Ch 8. Global Research Innovation: A Case of Evolving the Mid-Career Faculty Research Portfolio (Gretchen Neisler)
Ch 9. Under Pressure: The Challenge for Mid-Career Researchers in the Innovation Age (George Carayannopoulos, Ruth Graham)
Ch 10. Getting Over the Hump: Continued Professional Development for Mid-Career Faculty (LeRhonda Manigault-Bryant, Denise Kimber Buell, Lee Y. Park, John P. Gerry)
Ch 11. Faculty Development for Mid-Career Women in STEM: Cementing Career Success, Building Future Leaders (Sandra L. Laursen, Ann E. Austin)
Part Four: Special Topics (Meghan J. Pifer)
Ch 12. “Where did all the Mentoring Go?” Exploring Undefined Mid-Career Paths Through Informal Peer-Mentoring Networks (Jeannetta G. Williams, Kim Case)
Ch 13. Evidence-Based Faculty Development: The COACHE Research-Practice Partnership (Kiernan Mathews, R. Todd Benson)
Ch 14. Navigating a Foggy Climate: Women Associate Professors' Sense of Agency and Work Environment Experiences (Courtney Lennartz, KerryAnn O’Meara)
Ch 15. Supporting Mid-Career Faculty Members: A Research and Practice Agenda (Jaime Lester, Jennifer Lebrón, Carrie Klein)
Editors and Contributors
Index
This book brings together leading practitioners and scholars engaged in professional development programming for and research on mid-career faculty members. The chapters focus on key areas of career development and advancement that can enhance both individual growth and institutional change to better support mid-career faculties.
The mid-career stage is the longest segment of the faculty career and it contains the largest cohort of faculty. Also, mid-career faculty are tasked with being the next generation of faculty leaders and mentors on their respective campuses, with little to no supports to do so effectively, at a time when higher education continues to face unprecedented challenges while managing continued goal of diversifying both the student and faculty bodies.
The stories, examples, data, and resources shared in this book will provide inspiration--and reality checks--to the administrators, faculty developers, and department chairs charged with better supporting their faculties as they engage in academic work. Current and prospective faculty members will learn about trends in mid-career faculty development resources, see examples of how to create such supports when they are lacking on their campuses, and gain insights on how to strategically advance their own careers based on the realities of the professoriate.
The book features a variety of institution types: community colleges, regional/comprehensive institutions, liberal arts colleges, public research universities, ivy league institutions, international institutions, and those with targeted missions such as HSI/MSI and Jesuit.
Topics include faculty development for formal and informal leadership roles; strategies to support professional growth, renewal, time and people management; teaching and learning as a form of scholarship; the role of learning communities and networks as a source of support and professional revitalization; global engagement to support scholarship and teaching; strategies to recruit, retain, and promote underrepresented faculty populations; the policy-practice connection; and gender differences related to key mid-career outcomes.
While the authors acknowledge that the challenges facing the mid-career stage are numerous and varying, they offer a counter narrative by looking at ways that faculty and/or institutions can assert themselves to find opportunities within challenging contexts. They suggest that these challenges highlight priority mentoring areas, and support the creation of new and innovative faculty development supports at institutional, departmental, and individual levels. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Mary Deane Sorcinelli)
Acknowledgments
Introduction (Vicki L. Baker, Aimee LaPointe Terosky, Laura Gail Lunsford, Gretchen Neisler, Meghan J. Pifer)
Ch 1. Faculty Development in the United States: Past and Present (Vicki L. Baker, Christina M. Vo Phan)
Part One: Leadership Development (Laura Gail Lunsford)
Ch 2. The Academic Leadership Institute for Mid-Career Faculty (Vicki L. Baker, Laura Gail Lunsford, Meghan J. Pifer
Ch 3. Developing Leaders for the Next Phase of Jesuit Higher Education: Ignatian Leadership Program for Faculty (Karin Botto, Carolyn Berenato)
Ch 4. “Stayin’ Alive” and Thriving at Mid-Career (Amy Strage)
Part Two: Teaching and Learning (Aimee LaPointe Terosky)
Ch 5. Examining Mid-Career Faculty Development Through a Sociocultural, Professional Learning Lens (Annique Boelryk,Cheryl Amundsen)
Ch 6. Scholarship of Teaching and Learning as a Vehicle for Thriving in Mid-Career (Mike Pinter)
Ch 7. Attracting Mid-Career Faculty to Teach in First-Year Student Learning Communities (Hillary H. Steiner)
Part Three: Scholarly Development (Gretchen Neisler)
Ch 8. Global Research Innovation: A Case of Evolving the Mid-Career Faculty Research Portfolio (Gretchen Neisler)
Ch 9. Under Pressure: The Challenge for Mid-Career Researchers in the Innovation Age (George Carayannopoulos, Ruth Graham)
Ch 10. Getting Over the Hump: Continued Professional Development for Mid-Career Faculty (LeRhonda Manigault-Bryant, Denise Kimber Buell, Lee Y. Park, John P. Gerry)
Ch 11. Faculty Development for Mid-Career Women in STEM: Cementing Career Success, Building Future Leaders (Sandra L. Laursen, Ann E. Austin)
Part Four: Special Topics (Meghan J. Pifer)
Ch 12. “Where did all the Mentoring Go?” Exploring Undefined Mid-Career Paths Through Informal Peer-Mentoring Networks (Jeannetta G. Williams, Kim Case)
Ch 13. Evidence-Based Faculty Development: The COACHE Research-Practice Partnership (Kiernan Mathews, R. Todd Benson)
Ch 14. Navigating a Foggy Climate: Women Associate Professors' Sense of Agency and Work Environment Experiences (Courtney Lennartz, KerryAnn O’Meara)
Ch 15. Supporting Mid-Career Faculty Members: A Research and Practice Agenda (Jaime Lester, Jennifer Lebrón, Carrie Klein)
Editors and Contributors
Index
Additional Info:
The article discusses associate professors in the U.S., focusing on their overall happiness and attitudes related to their positions. The article cites a study conducted by the Collaborative on Academic Careers in Higher Education at Harvard University which provides statistics related to the job satisfaction of associate professors in areas such as leadership, collaboration, and workload. The article explores the tenure track process for college teachers, notes that few ...
The article discusses associate professors in the U.S., focusing on their overall happiness and attitudes related to their positions. The article cites a study conducted by the Collaborative on Academic Careers in Higher Education at Harvard University which provides statistics related to the job satisfaction of associate professors in areas such as leadership, collaboration, and workload. The article explores the tenure track process for college teachers, notes that few ...
Additional Info:
The article discusses associate professors in the U.S., focusing on their overall happiness and attitudes related to their positions. The article cites a study conducted by the Collaborative on Academic Careers in Higher Education at Harvard University which provides statistics related to the job satisfaction of associate professors in areas such as leadership, collaboration, and workload. The article explores the tenure track process for college teachers, notes that few personal and professional services are offered to mid-career professors, and provides comments from various associate professors including Judith C. Amburgey-Peters, Karen L. Kelsky, and Margaret Soltan.
The article discusses associate professors in the U.S., focusing on their overall happiness and attitudes related to their positions. The article cites a study conducted by the Collaborative on Academic Careers in Higher Education at Harvard University which provides statistics related to the job satisfaction of associate professors in areas such as leadership, collaboration, and workload. The article explores the tenure track process for college teachers, notes that few personal and professional services are offered to mid-career professors, and provides comments from various associate professors including Judith C. Amburgey-Peters, Karen L. Kelsky, and Margaret Soltan.
Additional Info:
The actual program is limited to graduate students at the University of North Texas, but the website provides a helpful description of an online program to prepare graduate students for teaching roles in higher education by equipping them with teaching skills, knowledge about teaching strategies and peer support.
The actual program is limited to graduate students at the University of North Texas, but the website provides a helpful description of an online program to prepare graduate students for teaching roles in higher education by equipping them with teaching skills, knowledge about teaching strategies and peer support.
Additional Info:
The actual program is limited to graduate students at the University of North Texas, but the website provides a helpful description of an online program to prepare graduate students for teaching roles in higher education by equipping them with teaching skills, knowledge about teaching strategies and peer support.
The actual program is limited to graduate students at the University of North Texas, but the website provides a helpful description of an online program to prepare graduate students for teaching roles in higher education by equipping them with teaching skills, knowledge about teaching strategies and peer support.
Additional Info:
Asserts that while prospective distance educators are flocking to certification programs, some academics question their value. Although certification programs, which can differ significantly in nature and intensity, go well beyond simple technology training, many newly certified distance educators have found that the certification does not necessarily lead to job security or even employment.
Asserts that while prospective distance educators are flocking to certification programs, some academics question their value. Although certification programs, which can differ significantly in nature and intensity, go well beyond simple technology training, many newly certified distance educators have found that the certification does not necessarily lead to job security or even employment.
Additional Info:
Asserts that while prospective distance educators are flocking to certification programs, some academics question their value. Although certification programs, which can differ significantly in nature and intensity, go well beyond simple technology training, many newly certified distance educators have found that the certification does not necessarily lead to job security or even employment.
Asserts that while prospective distance educators are flocking to certification programs, some academics question their value. Although certification programs, which can differ significantly in nature and intensity, go well beyond simple technology training, many newly certified distance educators have found that the certification does not necessarily lead to job security or even employment.
Additional Info:
Informal student evaluations of faculty were started in the 1960's by enterprising college students.(1) Since then, their use has spread so that now they are administered in almost all American colleges and universities and are probably the main source of information used for evaluating faculty teaching performance.(2) There is an enormous literature on the subject of student evaluations of faculty (SEF).(3) The following is a summary of some developments in ...
Informal student evaluations of faculty were started in the 1960's by enterprising college students.(1) Since then, their use has spread so that now they are administered in almost all American colleges and universities and are probably the main source of information used for evaluating faculty teaching performance.(2) There is an enormous literature on the subject of student evaluations of faculty (SEF).(3) The following is a summary of some developments in ...
Additional Info:
Informal student evaluations of faculty were started in the 1960's by enterprising college students.(1) Since then, their use has spread so that now they are administered in almost all American colleges and universities and are probably the main source of information used for evaluating faculty teaching performance.(2) There is an enormous literature on the subject of student evaluations of faculty (SEF).(3) The following is a summary of some developments in that literature that should be of special interest to faculty, with particular emphasis on criticisms of SEF that have emerged recently. But I begin with the arguments in favor of the use of SEF.
Informal student evaluations of faculty were started in the 1960's by enterprising college students.(1) Since then, their use has spread so that now they are administered in almost all American colleges and universities and are probably the main source of information used for evaluating faculty teaching performance.(2) There is an enormous literature on the subject of student evaluations of faculty (SEF).(3) The following is a summary of some developments in that literature that should be of special interest to faculty, with particular emphasis on criticisms of SEF that have emerged recently. But I begin with the arguments in favor of the use of SEF.
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Leadership Can Be Taught: A Bold Approach for a Complex World
Additional Info:
If leaders are made, not born, what is the best way to teach the skills they need to be effective? Today's complex times require a new kind of leadership--one that encompasses a mind-set and capabilities that can't necessarily be taught by conventional methods. In this unique leadership book, Sharon Daloz Parks invites readers to step into the classroom of Harvard leadership virtuoso Ronald Heifetz and his colleagues to understand this ...
If leaders are made, not born, what is the best way to teach the skills they need to be effective? Today's complex times require a new kind of leadership--one that encompasses a mind-set and capabilities that can't necessarily be taught by conventional methods. In this unique leadership book, Sharon Daloz Parks invites readers to step into the classroom of Harvard leadership virtuoso Ronald Heifetz and his colleagues to understand this ...
Additional Info:
If leaders are made, not born, what is the best way to teach the skills they need to be effective? Today's complex times require a new kind of leadership--one that encompasses a mind-set and capabilities that can't necessarily be taught by conventional methods. In this unique leadership book, Sharon Daloz Parks invites readers to step into the classroom of Harvard leadership virtuoso Ronald Heifetz and his colleagues to understand this dynamic type of leadership and experience a corresponding mode of learning called "case in point." Unlike traditional teaching approaches that analyze the experiences of past leaders, case in point uses individuals' own experiences--and the classroom environment itself--as a crucible for learning. This bold approach enables emerging leaders to work actively through the complex demands of today's workplace and build their skills as they discover theory in practice. Through an engaging, you-are-there writing style, Parks outlines essential features of this approach that can be applied across a range of settings. In the process, Leadership Can Be Taught reveals how we can learn, practice, and teach the art of leadership in more skilled, effective, and inspired forms. Sharon Daloz Parks is director of leadership for the New Commons--an initiative of the Whidbey Institute in Clinton, WA. She has held faculty and research positions at the Harvard Divinity School, Harvard Business School, and the Kennedy School of Government at Harvard University. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Leadership for a Changing Word - A Call to Adaptive Work
ch. 2 How De We Begin? - Differing Expectations
ch. 3 What is Really Going On Here? - Engaging People at the Edge of Learning
ch. 4 Learning from Failure in Public - The Power of Small Group Consultation
ch. 5 Listening to the Music Beneath the Words - The Practice of Presence
ch. 6 What Endures? - The Power of Language, Image, and Metaphor
ch. 7 Courage and Costs - Discovering How to Teach the Unteachable
ch. 8 The Same Approach - Other Teachers - The Question of Transferability
ch. 9 Toward a More Adequate Myth - The Art of Leadership
ch. 10 Leadership Can Be-Learned - Strengths and Limitations of This Approach
Notes
Index
About the Author
If leaders are made, not born, what is the best way to teach the skills they need to be effective? Today's complex times require a new kind of leadership--one that encompasses a mind-set and capabilities that can't necessarily be taught by conventional methods. In this unique leadership book, Sharon Daloz Parks invites readers to step into the classroom of Harvard leadership virtuoso Ronald Heifetz and his colleagues to understand this dynamic type of leadership and experience a corresponding mode of learning called "case in point." Unlike traditional teaching approaches that analyze the experiences of past leaders, case in point uses individuals' own experiences--and the classroom environment itself--as a crucible for learning. This bold approach enables emerging leaders to work actively through the complex demands of today's workplace and build their skills as they discover theory in practice. Through an engaging, you-are-there writing style, Parks outlines essential features of this approach that can be applied across a range of settings. In the process, Leadership Can Be Taught reveals how we can learn, practice, and teach the art of leadership in more skilled, effective, and inspired forms. Sharon Daloz Parks is director of leadership for the New Commons--an initiative of the Whidbey Institute in Clinton, WA. She has held faculty and research positions at the Harvard Divinity School, Harvard Business School, and the Kennedy School of Government at Harvard University. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Leadership for a Changing Word - A Call to Adaptive Work
ch. 2 How De We Begin? - Differing Expectations
ch. 3 What is Really Going On Here? - Engaging People at the Edge of Learning
ch. 4 Learning from Failure in Public - The Power of Small Group Consultation
ch. 5 Listening to the Music Beneath the Words - The Practice of Presence
ch. 6 What Endures? - The Power of Language, Image, and Metaphor
ch. 7 Courage and Costs - Discovering How to Teach the Unteachable
ch. 8 The Same Approach - Other Teachers - The Question of Transferability
ch. 9 Toward a More Adequate Myth - The Art of Leadership
ch. 10 Leadership Can Be-Learned - Strengths and Limitations of This Approach
Notes
Index
About the Author
Mending the Cracks in the Ivory Tower: Strategies for Conflict Management in Higher Education
Additional Info:
This book's 14 chapters provide models of conflict management and practical guidance for those working in institutions of higher education. (From the Publisher)
This book's 14 chapters provide models of conflict management and practical guidance for those working in institutions of higher education. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This book's 14 chapters provide models of conflict management and practical guidance for those working in institutions of higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 "What's It All About? Conflict in Academia" (Susan A Holton)
ch. 2 "Administration in an Age of Conflict" (Gerald Graff)
ch. 3 "The Janus Syndrome: Managing Conflict from the Middle" (Walter H. Gmelch)
ch. 4 "Chairs as Department Managers: Working with Support Staff" (Mary Lou Higgerson)
ch. 5 "Spanning the Abyss: Managing Conflict Between Deans and Chairs"(Ann F. Lucas)
ch. 6 "The Cutting Edge: The Dean and Conflict" (Nancy L. Sorenson)
ch. 7 "And Never the Twain Shall Meet: Administrator-Faculty Conflict"(Judith A. Sturnick)
ch. 8 "Managing Conflict on the Front Lines: Lessons from the Journals of a Former Dean and Provost" (Clara M. Lovett)
ch. 9 "Student Affairs and Academic Affairs: Partners in Conflict Resolution" (Lynn Willett)
ch. 10 "Can We Agree To Disagree? Faculty-Faculty Conflict" (Cynthia Berryman-Fink)
ch. 11 "Views from Different Sides of the Desk: Conflict Between Faculty and Students" (John W. "Sam" Keltner)
ch. 12 "Student-Student Conflict: Whose Problem Is It Anyway?" (Janet Rifkin)
ch. 13 "Conflict Resolution in the Academy: A Modest Proposal" (Joel M. Douglas)
ch. 14 "Academic Mortar To Mend the Cracks: The Holton Model for Conflict Management" (Susan A Holton)
Appendix: "Conflict Management Programs for Administrators"
This book's 14 chapters provide models of conflict management and practical guidance for those working in institutions of higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 "What's It All About? Conflict in Academia" (Susan A Holton)
ch. 2 "Administration in an Age of Conflict" (Gerald Graff)
ch. 3 "The Janus Syndrome: Managing Conflict from the Middle" (Walter H. Gmelch)
ch. 4 "Chairs as Department Managers: Working with Support Staff" (Mary Lou Higgerson)
ch. 5 "Spanning the Abyss: Managing Conflict Between Deans and Chairs"(Ann F. Lucas)
ch. 6 "The Cutting Edge: The Dean and Conflict" (Nancy L. Sorenson)
ch. 7 "And Never the Twain Shall Meet: Administrator-Faculty Conflict"(Judith A. Sturnick)
ch. 8 "Managing Conflict on the Front Lines: Lessons from the Journals of a Former Dean and Provost" (Clara M. Lovett)
ch. 9 "Student Affairs and Academic Affairs: Partners in Conflict Resolution" (Lynn Willett)
ch. 10 "Can We Agree To Disagree? Faculty-Faculty Conflict" (Cynthia Berryman-Fink)
ch. 11 "Views from Different Sides of the Desk: Conflict Between Faculty and Students" (John W. "Sam" Keltner)
ch. 12 "Student-Student Conflict: Whose Problem Is It Anyway?" (Janet Rifkin)
ch. 13 "Conflict Resolution in the Academy: A Modest Proposal" (Joel M. Douglas)
ch. 14 "Academic Mortar To Mend the Cracks: The Holton Model for Conflict Management" (Susan A Holton)
Appendix: "Conflict Management Programs for Administrators"
Additional Info:
Student evaluations of teaching are a common fixture at American law schools, but they harbor surprising biases. Extensive psychology research demonstrates that these assessments respond overwhelmingly to a professor’s appearance and nonverbal behavior; ratings based on just thirty seconds of silent videotape correlate strongly with end-of-semester evaluations. The nonverbal behaviors that influence teaching evaluations are rooted in physiology, culture, and habit, allowing characteristics like race and gender to affect ...
Student evaluations of teaching are a common fixture at American law schools, but they harbor surprising biases. Extensive psychology research demonstrates that these assessments respond overwhelmingly to a professor’s appearance and nonverbal behavior; ratings based on just thirty seconds of silent videotape correlate strongly with end-of-semester evaluations. The nonverbal behaviors that influence teaching evaluations are rooted in physiology, culture, and habit, allowing characteristics like race and gender to affect ...
Additional Info:
Student evaluations of teaching are a common fixture at American law schools, but they harbor surprising biases. Extensive psychology research demonstrates that these assessments respond overwhelmingly to a professor’s appearance and nonverbal behavior; ratings based on just thirty seconds of silent videotape correlate strongly with end-of-semester evaluations. The nonverbal behaviors that influence teaching evaluations are rooted in physiology, culture, and habit, allowing characteristics like race and gender to affect evaluations. The current process of gathering evaluations, moreover, allows social stereotypes to filter students’ perceptions, increasing risks of bias. These distortions are inevitable products of the intuitive, “system one” cognitive processes that the present process taps. The cure for these biases requires schools to design new student evaluation systems, such as ones based on facilitated group discussion, that enable more reflective, deliberative judgments. This article draws upon research in cognitive decision making, both to present the compelling case for reforming the current system of evaluating classroom performance and to illuminate the cognitive processes that underlie many facets of the legal system.
Student evaluations of teaching are a common fixture at American law schools, but they harbor surprising biases. Extensive psychology research demonstrates that these assessments respond overwhelmingly to a professor’s appearance and nonverbal behavior; ratings based on just thirty seconds of silent videotape correlate strongly with end-of-semester evaluations. The nonverbal behaviors that influence teaching evaluations are rooted in physiology, culture, and habit, allowing characteristics like race and gender to affect evaluations. The current process of gathering evaluations, moreover, allows social stereotypes to filter students’ perceptions, increasing risks of bias. These distortions are inevitable products of the intuitive, “system one” cognitive processes that the present process taps. The cure for these biases requires schools to design new student evaluation systems, such as ones based on facilitated group discussion, that enable more reflective, deliberative judgments. This article draws upon research in cognitive decision making, both to present the compelling case for reforming the current system of evaluating classroom performance and to illuminate the cognitive processes that underlie many facets of the legal system.
Academic Leadership: A Practical Guide to Chairing the Department
Additional Info:
Dr. Leaming's book provides a comforting reminder that we need not waste time and energy reinventing the wheel. New and veteran administrators, particularly at the academic departmental level, can gain invaluable guidance by taking advantage of Dean Leaming's 30-plus years of experience. Whatever they are experiencing, he has already been through numerous times. He knows their challenges and anxieties, and, more importantly, the solutions to them. His book is written ...
Dr. Leaming's book provides a comforting reminder that we need not waste time and energy reinventing the wheel. New and veteran administrators, particularly at the academic departmental level, can gain invaluable guidance by taking advantage of Dean Leaming's 30-plus years of experience. Whatever they are experiencing, he has already been through numerous times. He knows their challenges and anxieties, and, more importantly, the solutions to them. His book is written ...
Additional Info:
Dr. Leaming's book provides a comforting reminder that we need not waste time and energy reinventing the wheel. New and veteran administrators, particularly at the academic departmental level, can gain invaluable guidance by taking advantage of Dean Leaming's 30-plus years of experience. Whatever they are experiencing, he has already been through numerous times. He knows their challenges and anxieties, and, more importantly, the solutions to them. His book is written in plain, easy-to-understand language. It deals with everyday duties from attracting and hiring the most qualified people to dismissing those who don't work out, and from encouraging good teaching and research to dealing with difficult faculty members. The book also includes helpful summaries, checklists, tables and sample forms. Academic Leadership: A Practical Guide to Chairing the Department is a must-have resource book for the newly appointed department head that wants to avoid the trial-and-error management method. Dr. Leaming has been a department head at five universities and a dean at two. And he has laid out a roadmap that will come in handy continually for even the experienced person who still has a distance to travel down the administrative highway. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword.
Preface.
Part I: Leadership.
1. Advice for New Chairpersons.
2. Seven Habits of Successful Chairpersons.
3. Providing Leadership.
4. Duties and Responsibilities of Chairpersons.
5. Timesaving Tips for Effective Chairpersons.
6. Communicating.
Part II: Department.
7. Developing a Departmental Vision.
8. Improving Your Department.
9. Developing Outcome Assessment Programs.
10. Managing Change.
11. Building and Maintaining Morale.
12. Managing Conflict.
13. Working With Constituents.
14. Working With Your Dean.
15. Dealing With Curriculum Matters.
16. Conducting Effective Meetings.
17. Budget and Financial Management.
Part III: Legal Issues.
18. Avoiding Legal Problems.
19. Understanding Sexual Harassment and the Americans with Disabilities Act.
Part IV: Faculty.
20. Recruiting and Hiring Faculty.
21. Retaining, Mentoring, and Terminating Faculty.
22. Strategies for Faculty Development.
23. Evaluating Faculty Performance.
24. Handling Promotion and Tenure Issues.
25. Dealing With Chronic Low Achievers.
26. Dealing With Difficult Faculty.
Part V: Students.
27. Recruiting and Retaining Students.
28. Dealing With Emotional and Disrespectful Student Behavior.
Part VI: Looking Ahead.
29. Moving Up the Administrative Ladder.
30. Where Do You Go From Here?
Appendixes.
Index.
Dr. Leaming's book provides a comforting reminder that we need not waste time and energy reinventing the wheel. New and veteran administrators, particularly at the academic departmental level, can gain invaluable guidance by taking advantage of Dean Leaming's 30-plus years of experience. Whatever they are experiencing, he has already been through numerous times. He knows their challenges and anxieties, and, more importantly, the solutions to them. His book is written in plain, easy-to-understand language. It deals with everyday duties from attracting and hiring the most qualified people to dismissing those who don't work out, and from encouraging good teaching and research to dealing with difficult faculty members. The book also includes helpful summaries, checklists, tables and sample forms. Academic Leadership: A Practical Guide to Chairing the Department is a must-have resource book for the newly appointed department head that wants to avoid the trial-and-error management method. Dr. Leaming has been a department head at five universities and a dean at two. And he has laid out a roadmap that will come in handy continually for even the experienced person who still has a distance to travel down the administrative highway. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword.
Preface.
Part I: Leadership.
1. Advice for New Chairpersons.
2. Seven Habits of Successful Chairpersons.
3. Providing Leadership.
4. Duties and Responsibilities of Chairpersons.
5. Timesaving Tips for Effective Chairpersons.
6. Communicating.
Part II: Department.
7. Developing a Departmental Vision.
8. Improving Your Department.
9. Developing Outcome Assessment Programs.
10. Managing Change.
11. Building and Maintaining Morale.
12. Managing Conflict.
13. Working With Constituents.
14. Working With Your Dean.
15. Dealing With Curriculum Matters.
16. Conducting Effective Meetings.
17. Budget and Financial Management.
Part III: Legal Issues.
18. Avoiding Legal Problems.
19. Understanding Sexual Harassment and the Americans with Disabilities Act.
Part IV: Faculty.
20. Recruiting and Hiring Faculty.
21. Retaining, Mentoring, and Terminating Faculty.
22. Strategies for Faculty Development.
23. Evaluating Faculty Performance.
24. Handling Promotion and Tenure Issues.
25. Dealing With Chronic Low Achievers.
26. Dealing With Difficult Faculty.
Part V: Students.
27. Recruiting and Retaining Students.
28. Dealing With Emotional and Disrespectful Student Behavior.
Part VI: Looking Ahead.
29. Moving Up the Administrative Ladder.
30. Where Do You Go From Here?
Appendixes.
Index.
Additional Info:
Describes the seven areas that should be considered when evaluating teaching: subject matter mastery, curriculum development, course design, delivery instruction, assessment of instruction, availability to students, and administrative requirements. Idea Paper no. 21, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Describes the seven areas that should be considered when evaluating teaching: subject matter mastery, curriculum development, course design, delivery instruction, assessment of instruction, availability to students, and administrative requirements. Idea Paper no. 21, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Additional Info:
Describes the seven areas that should be considered when evaluating teaching: subject matter mastery, curriculum development, course design, delivery instruction, assessment of instruction, availability to students, and administrative requirements. Idea Paper no. 21, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
Describes the seven areas that should be considered when evaluating teaching: subject matter mastery, curriculum development, course design, delivery instruction, assessment of instruction, availability to students, and administrative requirements. Idea Paper no. 21, from the series developed by the Center for Faculty Evaluation and Development, Kansas State University.
The Professional Development of Graduate Teaching Assistants
Additional Info:
As both the need for and the expectations of teaching assistants in higher education rise, institutions must ensure that graduate TAs provide effective instruction. This comprehensive TA training handbook is an essential resource for those who prepare graduate TAs for their responsibilities in the classroom and for their overall professional development. Written by experts in the field of TA development, this book provides a clear framework for implementing and assessing ...
As both the need for and the expectations of teaching assistants in higher education rise, institutions must ensure that graduate TAs provide effective instruction. This comprehensive TA training handbook is an essential resource for those who prepare graduate TAs for their responsibilities in the classroom and for their overall professional development. Written by experts in the field of TA development, this book provides a clear framework for implementing and assessing ...
Additional Info:
As both the need for and the expectations of teaching assistants in higher education rise, institutions must ensure that graduate TAs provide effective instruction. This comprehensive TA training handbook is an essential resource for those who prepare graduate TAs for their responsibilities in the classroom and for their overall professional development. Written by experts in the field of TA development, this book provides a clear framework for implementing and assessing an effective program. It is an ideal resource for all those who are interested in developing or improving TA training programs. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Preparing graduate students to teach: Past, present, and future (Nancy Van Note Chism)
ch. 2 The role of centralized programs in preparing graduate students to teach (Jacqueline Mintz)
ch. 3 The disciplinary/departmental context of TA training (Shirley Ronkowski)
ch. 4 Thinking developmentally about TAs (Jody D. Nyquist)
ch. 5 Creating a foundation for instructional decisions (Marilla D. Svinicki)
ch. 6 Strategies for responding to diversity in the classroom (Mathew L. Ouellett and Mary Deane Sorcinelli)
ch. 7 Getting started with TA training on your campus (Frederic Stout)
ch. 8 Teaching teaching: The importance of courses on teaching in TA training programs (Michele Marincovich)
ch. 9 International TA training and beyond (Ellen Sarkisian & Virginia Maurer)
ch. 10 Helping TAs improve undergraduate writing (Jack Prostko)
ch. 11 Technology and TA training (Michael J. Albright)
ch. 12 Evaluating TA teaching (Beverly Black and Matt Kaplan)
ch. 13 Teaching portfolios as a tool for TA development (Pat Hutchings)
ch. 14 Evaluating TA programs (Nancy Van Note Chism)
ch. 15 TA certificate programs (Stacey Lane Tice, Patricia H. Featherstone and Howard C. Johnson)
ch. 16 Preparing future faculty programs (Stacey Lane Tice, Jerry G. Gaff, and Anne Pruitt-Logan
As both the need for and the expectations of teaching assistants in higher education rise, institutions must ensure that graduate TAs provide effective instruction. This comprehensive TA training handbook is an essential resource for those who prepare graduate TAs for their responsibilities in the classroom and for their overall professional development. Written by experts in the field of TA development, this book provides a clear framework for implementing and assessing an effective program. It is an ideal resource for all those who are interested in developing or improving TA training programs. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Preparing graduate students to teach: Past, present, and future (Nancy Van Note Chism)
ch. 2 The role of centralized programs in preparing graduate students to teach (Jacqueline Mintz)
ch. 3 The disciplinary/departmental context of TA training (Shirley Ronkowski)
ch. 4 Thinking developmentally about TAs (Jody D. Nyquist)
ch. 5 Creating a foundation for instructional decisions (Marilla D. Svinicki)
ch. 6 Strategies for responding to diversity in the classroom (Mathew L. Ouellett and Mary Deane Sorcinelli)
ch. 7 Getting started with TA training on your campus (Frederic Stout)
ch. 8 Teaching teaching: The importance of courses on teaching in TA training programs (Michele Marincovich)
ch. 9 International TA training and beyond (Ellen Sarkisian & Virginia Maurer)
ch. 10 Helping TAs improve undergraduate writing (Jack Prostko)
ch. 11 Technology and TA training (Michael J. Albright)
ch. 12 Evaluating TA teaching (Beverly Black and Matt Kaplan)
ch. 13 Teaching portfolios as a tool for TA development (Pat Hutchings)
ch. 14 Evaluating TA programs (Nancy Van Note Chism)
ch. 15 TA certificate programs (Stacey Lane Tice, Patricia H. Featherstone and Howard C. Johnson)
ch. 16 Preparing future faculty programs (Stacey Lane Tice, Jerry G. Gaff, and Anne Pruitt-Logan
Promotion and Tenure Confidential
Additional Info:
Sitting down with a young and brilliant mathematician, I asked what he thought were his biggest problems in working toward tenure. Instead of describing difficulties with his equations or his software programs, he lamented that (a) his graduate assistant wasn’t completing his tasks on time, (b) his department chair didn’t seem to care if junior faculty obtained grants, and (c) a senior professor kept glaring at him in ...
Sitting down with a young and brilliant mathematician, I asked what he thought were his biggest problems in working toward tenure. Instead of describing difficulties with his equations or his software programs, he lamented that (a) his graduate assistant wasn’t completing his tasks on time, (b) his department chair didn’t seem to care if junior faculty obtained grants, and (c) a senior professor kept glaring at him in ...
Additional Info:
Sitting down with a young and brilliant mathematician, I asked what he thought were his biggest problems in working toward tenure. Instead of describing difficulties with his equations or his software programs, he lamented that (a) his graduate assistant wasn’t completing his tasks on time, (b) his department chair didn’t seem to care if junior faculty obtained grants, and (c) a senior professor kept glaring at him in faculty meetings. He knew he could handle the intellectual side of being an academic—but what about the people side? ‘Why didn’t they offer
Promotion and Tenure Confidential provides that course in an astute and practical book, which shows that P&T is not just about research, teaching, and service but also about human relations and political good sense. Drawing on research and extensive interviews with junior and senior faculty across many institutions, David D. Perlmutter provides clear-sighted guidance on planning and managing an academic career, from graduate school to tenure and beyond.
Topics include:
Making the transformation from student and protégé to teacher and mentor.
Seeking out and holding onto lifelong allies.
How to manage your online reputation and avoid “death by Google”.
What to say and what not to say to deans and department chairs.
How meeting deadlines wins points with everyone in your life.
How, when, and to whom to say “no”.
When and how to look for a new job when you have a job.
How (and whom) to ask for letters of recommendation.
What to do if you know you’re not going to get tenure.
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Promotion and Tenure Up Close and Personal
ch. 1 The Doctorate and the Career Track
ch. 2 The Academic Job Search
ch. 3 Colleagues and Academic Cultures
ch. 4 The Balancing Act - Self, Family, and Tenure
ch. 5 Student Relations
ch. 6 Steps to Tenure and Promotion and Beyond
Notes
Acknowledgments
Index
Sitting down with a young and brilliant mathematician, I asked what he thought were his biggest problems in working toward tenure. Instead of describing difficulties with his equations or his software programs, he lamented that (a) his graduate assistant wasn’t completing his tasks on time, (b) his department chair didn’t seem to care if junior faculty obtained grants, and (c) a senior professor kept glaring at him in faculty meetings. He knew he could handle the intellectual side of being an academic—but what about the people side? ‘Why didn’t they offer
Promotion and Tenure Confidential provides that course in an astute and practical book, which shows that P&T is not just about research, teaching, and service but also about human relations and political good sense. Drawing on research and extensive interviews with junior and senior faculty across many institutions, David D. Perlmutter provides clear-sighted guidance on planning and managing an academic career, from graduate school to tenure and beyond.
Topics include:
Making the transformation from student and protégé to teacher and mentor.
Seeking out and holding onto lifelong allies.
How to manage your online reputation and avoid “death by Google”.
What to say and what not to say to deans and department chairs.
How meeting deadlines wins points with everyone in your life.
How, when, and to whom to say “no”.
When and how to look for a new job when you have a job.
How (and whom) to ask for letters of recommendation.
What to do if you know you’re not going to get tenure.
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: Promotion and Tenure Up Close and Personal
ch. 1 The Doctorate and the Career Track
ch. 2 The Academic Job Search
ch. 3 Colleagues and Academic Cultures
ch. 4 The Balancing Act - Self, Family, and Tenure
ch. 5 Student Relations
ch. 6 Steps to Tenure and Promotion and Beyond
Notes
Acknowledgments
Index
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
"Visualizing Yourself As A Successful College Teacher, Writer, and Colleague"
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Navigating the Dissertation: Strategies for New Doctoral Advising Faculty and Their Advisees
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: This book examines the intricacies of the doctoral educational process and delineates a process for continuous improvement that will shape and enhance better professional relationships between dissertation advisors and their advisees and cultivate opportunities for increased retention and graduation. The book includes critical principles, interwoven with students’ real life experiences which ...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: This book examines the intricacies of the doctoral educational process and delineates a process for continuous improvement that will shape and enhance better professional relationships between dissertation advisors and their advisees and cultivate opportunities for increased retention and graduation. The book includes critical principles, interwoven with students’ real life experiences which ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: This book examines the intricacies of the doctoral educational process and delineates a process for continuous improvement that will shape and enhance better professional relationships between dissertation advisors and their advisees and cultivate opportunities for increased retention and graduation. The book includes critical principles, interwoven with students’ real life experiences which serve as illustrative vehicles. Moreover, its innovative approach – a book written for new advisors and their advisees or for seasoned advisors seeking new ways to communicate with their advisees – departs from other books that provide generally only a one-dimensional view, usually from the student’s perspective. The titles of many of these are couched in metaphors of survival and overcoming a threat, rather than centered in strong initiatives that will lead to timely graduation in a supportive and encouraging environment. This book offers innovative and pioneering leadership approaches to transport advisors and advisees to a successful outcome. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Preface
ch. 1 Dissertation Advising: The Need for Collaborative Training Models
ch. 2 The Rules of Engagement
ch. 3 Defining Editing Expectations: More Rules of Engagement
ch. 4 The Toxic Committee
ch. 5 Considerations When Forming a Committee: For Advisees
ch. 6 Selection of the Advisee: For Faculty
ch. 7 Other Considerations for the Advisor as Leader
ch. 8 Vetting the Committee
ch. 9 Discovering the Dissertation Topic
ch. 10 The Concept Paper and the Quality Circle Review
ch. 11 Implementation of Editorial Commentary and Technology
ch. 12 Naming Conventions for Maintaining Draft Files
ch. 13 Working Against the Grain: For Advisors
ch. 14 Working Against the Grain: For Advisees
ch. 15 Dissertation Proposal and the Human Subject Institutional Review Board (HSIRB)
Protocol: Symmetry in Design
ch. 16 Preparing for the Oral Defense of the Dissertation: 17 Easy Steps
ch. 17 Bill of Rights for the Advisee/Advisor
ch. 18 Combating the Dissertation Blues: Comprehensive Examinations - The Prelude
ch. 19 The Dissertation Writing Blues
ch. 20 The Dissertation Aftermath Blues
ch. 21 Debriefing: An Essential Final Step in Doctoral Education
ch. 22 New Forms and New Paradigms
ch. 23 Personalizing Academic Misconduct: An Approach for the Graduate Classroom
ch. 24 The Future of Doctoral Education: A Visionary Perspective
ch. 25 Quick Takes
About the Author
Index of Book
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: This book examines the intricacies of the doctoral educational process and delineates a process for continuous improvement that will shape and enhance better professional relationships between dissertation advisors and their advisees and cultivate opportunities for increased retention and graduation. The book includes critical principles, interwoven with students’ real life experiences which serve as illustrative vehicles. Moreover, its innovative approach – a book written for new advisors and their advisees or for seasoned advisors seeking new ways to communicate with their advisees – departs from other books that provide generally only a one-dimensional view, usually from the student’s perspective. The titles of many of these are couched in metaphors of survival and overcoming a threat, rather than centered in strong initiatives that will lead to timely graduation in a supportive and encouraging environment. This book offers innovative and pioneering leadership approaches to transport advisors and advisees to a successful outcome. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Preface
ch. 1 Dissertation Advising: The Need for Collaborative Training Models
ch. 2 The Rules of Engagement
ch. 3 Defining Editing Expectations: More Rules of Engagement
ch. 4 The Toxic Committee
ch. 5 Considerations When Forming a Committee: For Advisees
ch. 6 Selection of the Advisee: For Faculty
ch. 7 Other Considerations for the Advisor as Leader
ch. 8 Vetting the Committee
ch. 9 Discovering the Dissertation Topic
ch. 10 The Concept Paper and the Quality Circle Review
ch. 11 Implementation of Editorial Commentary and Technology
ch. 12 Naming Conventions for Maintaining Draft Files
ch. 13 Working Against the Grain: For Advisors
ch. 14 Working Against the Grain: For Advisees
ch. 15 Dissertation Proposal and the Human Subject Institutional Review Board (HSIRB)
Protocol: Symmetry in Design
ch. 16 Preparing for the Oral Defense of the Dissertation: 17 Easy Steps
ch. 17 Bill of Rights for the Advisee/Advisor
ch. 18 Combating the Dissertation Blues: Comprehensive Examinations - The Prelude
ch. 19 The Dissertation Writing Blues
ch. 20 The Dissertation Aftermath Blues
ch. 21 Debriefing: An Essential Final Step in Doctoral Education
ch. 22 New Forms and New Paradigms
ch. 23 Personalizing Academic Misconduct: An Approach for the Graduate Classroom
ch. 24 The Future of Doctoral Education: A Visionary Perspective
ch. 25 Quick Takes
About the Author
Index of Book
A New Academic Compact: Revisioning the Relationship between Faculty and Their Institutions
Additional Info:
Highlighting the Associated New American Colleges' Faculty Work Project, this volume examines the call for redefining faculty roles and institutional relationships. Believing that in order to serve students successfully colleges must invest in faculty effectiveness, the overriding goal of the project has been to lay the conceptual groundwork for bringing an institution's faculty policies and practices and the actual work patterns of faculty into alignment with the institutional mission. (From ...
Highlighting the Associated New American Colleges' Faculty Work Project, this volume examines the call for redefining faculty roles and institutional relationships. Believing that in order to serve students successfully colleges must invest in faculty effectiveness, the overriding goal of the project has been to lay the conceptual groundwork for bringing an institution's faculty policies and practices and the actual work patterns of faculty into alignment with the institutional mission. (From ...
Additional Info:
Highlighting the Associated New American Colleges' Faculty Work Project, this volume examines the call for redefining faculty roles and institutional relationships. Believing that in order to serve students successfully colleges must invest in faculty effectiveness, the overriding goal of the project has been to lay the conceptual groundwork for bringing an institution's faculty policies and practices and the actual work patterns of faculty into alignment with the institutional mission. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
About the Editors
About the Contributors
Participants
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Section I: The Compact ch. 1 A New Academic Compact (Jerry Berberet) ch. 2 Professional Development Across the Faculty Career (Marion Terenzio)
ch. 3 Faculty as Institutional Citizens (Lawry Finsen)
ch. 4 Faculty Workload (Linda A. McMillin)
Section II: The Compact in Action
ch. 5 Shared Governance at Butler University (Patricia Bacon)
ch. 6 Workload Differentiation at Ithaca College (Garry Brodhead)
ch. 7 Workload Rebalancing at St. Mary's College of California (Ed Biglin)
Section III: The Compact in Context
ch. 8 A Panel of Experts Responds (Christine M. Licata, Robert M. Diamond, Mary Burgan, Charles E. Glassick, C. J. Weiser, Ric Weibl)
ch. 9 Reflections on The Faculty Work Project (Jon Wergin)
ch. 10 A Holistic Model For Faculty and Institutional Development (Jacqueline A. Mintz)
ch. 11 Institutional Governance (Thomas C. Longin)
Bibliography
Index
Highlighting the Associated New American Colleges' Faculty Work Project, this volume examines the call for redefining faculty roles and institutional relationships. Believing that in order to serve students successfully colleges must invest in faculty effectiveness, the overriding goal of the project has been to lay the conceptual groundwork for bringing an institution's faculty policies and practices and the actual work patterns of faculty into alignment with the institutional mission. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
About the Editors
About the Contributors
Participants
Foreword
Acknowledgments
Introduction
Section I: The Compact ch. 1 A New Academic Compact (Jerry Berberet) ch. 2 Professional Development Across the Faculty Career (Marion Terenzio)
ch. 3 Faculty as Institutional Citizens (Lawry Finsen)
ch. 4 Faculty Workload (Linda A. McMillin)
Section II: The Compact in Action
ch. 5 Shared Governance at Butler University (Patricia Bacon)
ch. 6 Workload Differentiation at Ithaca College (Garry Brodhead)
ch. 7 Workload Rebalancing at St. Mary's College of California (Ed Biglin)
Section III: The Compact in Context
ch. 8 A Panel of Experts Responds (Christine M. Licata, Robert M. Diamond, Mary Burgan, Charles E. Glassick, C. J. Weiser, Ric Weibl)
ch. 9 Reflections on The Faculty Work Project (Jon Wergin)
ch. 10 A Holistic Model For Faculty and Institutional Development (Jacqueline A. Mintz)
ch. 11 Institutional Governance (Thomas C. Longin)
Bibliography
Index
Reflective Practice for Educators: Professional Development to Improve Student Learning
Additional Info:
In this age of seemingly endless mandated reforms, reflective practice is a truly effective, empowering way to make meaningful, positive changes. Written for teachers, counselors, administrators, and professional development specialists in schools and universities, this book is an educators' guide to reflective practice. The authors explain its potential to create meaningful change in schools and show you how to integrate it effectively into the daily work of schools. The book:<...
In this age of seemingly endless mandated reforms, reflective practice is a truly effective, empowering way to make meaningful, positive changes. Written for teachers, counselors, administrators, and professional development specialists in schools and universities, this book is an educators' guide to reflective practice. The authors explain its potential to create meaningful change in schools and show you how to integrate it effectively into the daily work of schools. The book:<...
Additional Info:
In this age of seemingly endless mandated reforms, reflective practice is a truly effective, empowering way to make meaningful, positive changes. Written for teachers, counselors, administrators, and professional development specialists in schools and universities, this book is an educators' guide to reflective practice. The authors explain its potential to create meaningful change in schools and show you how to integrate it effectively into the daily work of schools. The book:
* Explains reflective practice as a professional development strategy
* Offers ideas and practical strategies to facilitate collaborative, data-based inquiry, dialogue
* Describes reflective practice in action and illustrates its power to create meaningful change in classrooms
* Shows how reflective practice is an important step in creating professional learning organizations
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
About the authors
ch. 1 Reflective practice, school reform, and professional development
ch. 2 Engaging in reflective practice : a cycle of experiential learning
ch. 3 The keystone of reflective practice : gathering data
ch. 4 Facilitating reflective practice in the workplace
ch. 5 The problematic student
ch. 6 Bullying and victimization in the classroom
ch. 7 Teachers and kids as reflective practitioners of their learning
ch. 8 Reflective practice for empowerment
References
Index
In this age of seemingly endless mandated reforms, reflective practice is a truly effective, empowering way to make meaningful, positive changes. Written for teachers, counselors, administrators, and professional development specialists in schools and universities, this book is an educators' guide to reflective practice. The authors explain its potential to create meaningful change in schools and show you how to integrate it effectively into the daily work of schools. The book:
* Explains reflective practice as a professional development strategy
* Offers ideas and practical strategies to facilitate collaborative, data-based inquiry, dialogue
* Describes reflective practice in action and illustrates its power to create meaningful change in classrooms
* Shows how reflective practice is an important step in creating professional learning organizations
(From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
About the authors
ch. 1 Reflective practice, school reform, and professional development
ch. 2 Engaging in reflective practice : a cycle of experiential learning
ch. 3 The keystone of reflective practice : gathering data
ch. 4 Facilitating reflective practice in the workplace
ch. 5 The problematic student
ch. 6 Bullying and victimization in the classroom
ch. 7 Teachers and kids as reflective practitioners of their learning
ch. 8 Reflective practice for empowerment
References
Index
Leading Academic Change: Essential Roles for Department Chairs
Additional Info:
For the 80,000 department chairs working on campuses across the nation, this visionary yet practical book shows how to manage academic change at the department level. It provides useful ideas and strategies on handling resistance to change, transforming departments into productive learning communities, and improving educational quality for students. In twelve incisive chapters, top academic scholars, authors, and consultants address topics and trends as diverse as service learning, technologicalchange, curriculum renewal, ...
For the 80,000 department chairs working on campuses across the nation, this visionary yet practical book shows how to manage academic change at the department level. It provides useful ideas and strategies on handling resistance to change, transforming departments into productive learning communities, and improving educational quality for students. In twelve incisive chapters, top academic scholars, authors, and consultants address topics and trends as diverse as service learning, technologicalchange, curriculum renewal, ...
Additional Info:
For the 80,000 department chairs working on campuses across the nation, this visionary yet practical book shows how to manage academic change at the department level. It provides useful ideas and strategies on handling resistance to change, transforming departments into productive learning communities, and improving educational quality for students. In twelve incisive chapters, top academic scholars, authors, and consultants address topics and trends as diverse as service learning, technologicalchange, curriculum renewal, faculty reward systems, and post-tenure review. They offer effective models to help department chairs and administrators work through the change process, including recommendations based on real-world experiences. They also integrate the latest research with examples of best practices into a readable, accessible format. Whether you are a department chair, administrator, or a faculty member aspiring to improve your department, Leading Academic Change is the expert's guide to mobilizing faculty energy towards academic success. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Questions and Activities for Each Chapter
A Teamwork Approach to Change in the Academic Department (A. Lucas)
A Collaborative Model for Leading Academic Change (A. Lucas)
Handling Resistance to Change (S. Cheldelin)
Transforming Departments into Productive Learning Communities (T. Angelo)
The Collaborative Role of the Chair in Departmental Change
The Departmental Statement on Promotion and Tenure: A Key to Successful Leadership (R. Diamond)
Post-Tenure Review (C. Licata)
Strengthening the Departmental Voice in the Faculty Reward System (H. Altman)
Leading Innovative Change in Curriculum and Teaching
Monitoring and Improving Educational Quality in the Academic Department (L. Gardiner)
Service Learning and the Engaged Department: A Strategy with Many Uses (E. Zlotkowski)
Giving Faculty Ownership of Technological Change in the Department (A. Bates)
Leading Curriculum Renewal (A. Ferren & K. Mussell)
The Academy as Learning Community: Contradiction in Terms or Realizable Future? (P. Senge)
For the 80,000 department chairs working on campuses across the nation, this visionary yet practical book shows how to manage academic change at the department level. It provides useful ideas and strategies on handling resistance to change, transforming departments into productive learning communities, and improving educational quality for students. In twelve incisive chapters, top academic scholars, authors, and consultants address topics and trends as diverse as service learning, technologicalchange, curriculum renewal, faculty reward systems, and post-tenure review. They offer effective models to help department chairs and administrators work through the change process, including recommendations based on real-world experiences. They also integrate the latest research with examples of best practices into a readable, accessible format. Whether you are a department chair, administrator, or a faculty member aspiring to improve your department, Leading Academic Change is the expert's guide to mobilizing faculty energy towards academic success. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Questions and Activities for Each Chapter
A Teamwork Approach to Change in the Academic Department (A. Lucas)
A Collaborative Model for Leading Academic Change (A. Lucas)
Handling Resistance to Change (S. Cheldelin)
Transforming Departments into Productive Learning Communities (T. Angelo)
The Collaborative Role of the Chair in Departmental Change
The Departmental Statement on Promotion and Tenure: A Key to Successful Leadership (R. Diamond)
Post-Tenure Review (C. Licata)
Strengthening the Departmental Voice in the Faculty Reward System (H. Altman)
Leading Innovative Change in Curriculum and Teaching
Monitoring and Improving Educational Quality in the Academic Department (L. Gardiner)
Service Learning and the Engaged Department: A Strategy with Many Uses (E. Zlotkowski)
Giving Faculty Ownership of Technological Change in the Department (A. Bates)
Leading Curriculum Renewal (A. Ferren & K. Mussell)
The Academy as Learning Community: Contradiction in Terms or Realizable Future? (P. Senge)
"Enhancing Educational Capital: Challenges and Benefits"
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Variations on a Teaching/Learning Workshop: Pedagogy and Faculty Development in Religious Studies
Additional Info:
An ethnographic study of a series of workshops on pedagogy in religious studies, inaugurated by the American Academy of Religion. Reporting on workshops in New England and the Maritimes, the east, southeast, and southwest, discusses what was and was not effective in the workshops, variables contributing to success that people setting up similar workshops can draw on, and the current state and recent history of religious studies. (From the Publisher)
An ethnographic study of a series of workshops on pedagogy in religious studies, inaugurated by the American Academy of Religion. Reporting on workshops in New England and the Maritimes, the east, southeast, and southwest, discusses what was and was not effective in the workshops, variables contributing to success that people setting up similar workshops can draw on, and the current state and recent history of religious studies. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
An ethnographic study of a series of workshops on pedagogy in religious studies, inaugurated by the American Academy of Religion. Reporting on workshops in New England and the Maritimes, the east, southeast, and southwest, discusses what was and was not effective in the workshops, variables contributing to success that people setting up similar workshops can draw on, and the current state and recent history of religious studies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Forward
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 How It All Came About
ch. 2 The Tools of Teaching: The New England / Maritimes Workshop
ch. 3 Non-Textual Materials and Gender: The Eastern International Workshop
ch. 4 Teaching Religious Studies in the Southeast
ch. 5 Teaching Religious Studies in the Southwest
ch. 6 What Made Them Work?
ch. 7 Implications for Faculty Development
Appendix
Index
An ethnographic study of a series of workshops on pedagogy in religious studies, inaugurated by the American Academy of Religion. Reporting on workshops in New England and the Maritimes, the east, southeast, and southwest, discusses what was and was not effective in the workshops, variables contributing to success that people setting up similar workshops can draw on, and the current state and recent history of religious studies. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Forward
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 How It All Came About
ch. 2 The Tools of Teaching: The New England / Maritimes Workshop
ch. 3 Non-Textual Materials and Gender: The Eastern International Workshop
ch. 4 Teaching Religious Studies in the Southeast
ch. 5 Teaching Religious Studies in the Southwest
ch. 6 What Made Them Work?
ch. 7 Implications for Faculty Development
Appendix
Index
Sustaining Teacher Leadership: Beyond the Boundaries of an Enabling School Culture
Additional Info:
Sustaining Teacher Leadership describes a model for linking leadership and learning and identifies six components of an enabling culture for teacher leadership: learning, valuing, nurturing, supporting, sharing, and coaching. The model is based on an historical review of artifacts from earlier qualitative studies that report on eight years of a middle school's restructuring and restructuring experiences. (From the Publisher)
Sustaining Teacher Leadership describes a model for linking leadership and learning and identifies six components of an enabling culture for teacher leadership: learning, valuing, nurturing, supporting, sharing, and coaching. The model is based on an historical review of artifacts from earlier qualitative studies that report on eight years of a middle school's restructuring and restructuring experiences. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Sustaining Teacher Leadership describes a model for linking leadership and learning and identifies six components of an enabling culture for teacher leadership: learning, valuing, nurturing, supporting, sharing, and coaching. The model is based on an historical review of artifacts from earlier qualitative studies that report on eight years of a middle school's restructuring and restructuring experiences. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
ch. 1 Teacher leadership in the 21st century : an introduction
ch. 2 Context and methods
ch. 3 Enabling culture for teacher leadership
ch. 4 Developing a teacher leader identity
ch. 5 Teacher leaders influence an inchoate school culture
ch. 6 Implications for further study
App. A : artifacts list
App. B : interview protocol
References
Index
Author's biographical sketch
Sustaining Teacher Leadership describes a model for linking leadership and learning and identifies six components of an enabling culture for teacher leadership: learning, valuing, nurturing, supporting, sharing, and coaching. The model is based on an historical review of artifacts from earlier qualitative studies that report on eight years of a middle school's restructuring and restructuring experiences. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
ch. 1 Teacher leadership in the 21st century : an introduction
ch. 2 Context and methods
ch. 3 Enabling culture for teacher leadership
ch. 4 Developing a teacher leader identity
ch. 5 Teacher leaders influence an inchoate school culture
ch. 6 Implications for further study
App. A : artifacts list
App. B : interview protocol
References
Index
Author's biographical sketch
Additional Info:
The Council of Independent Colleges offers annual Workshops for Department and Division Chairs to strengthen leadership at the departmental level. Resources and slides from previous workshops are also available on their website. The workshops are designed to serve both experienced and new chairs of departments or divisions at independent colleges and universities. Campuses are encouraged to send several department or division chairs to the workshop so that they can support ...
The Council of Independent Colleges offers annual Workshops for Department and Division Chairs to strengthen leadership at the departmental level. Resources and slides from previous workshops are also available on their website. The workshops are designed to serve both experienced and new chairs of departments or divisions at independent colleges and universities. Campuses are encouraged to send several department or division chairs to the workshop so that they can support ...
Additional Info:
The Council of Independent Colleges offers annual Workshops for Department and Division Chairs to strengthen leadership at the departmental level. Resources and slides from previous workshops are also available on their website. The workshops are designed to serve both experienced and new chairs of departments or divisions at independent colleges and universities. Campuses are encouraged to send several department or division chairs to the workshop so that they can support one another in instituting change upon return to campus and develop stronger working relationships among institutional chairs.
The Council of Independent Colleges offers annual Workshops for Department and Division Chairs to strengthen leadership at the departmental level. Resources and slides from previous workshops are also available on their website. The workshops are designed to serve both experienced and new chairs of departments or divisions at independent colleges and universities. Campuses are encouraged to send several department or division chairs to the workshop so that they can support one another in instituting change upon return to campus and develop stronger working relationships among institutional chairs.
Practically Speaking: A Sourcebook for Instructional Consultants in Higher Education
Additional Info:
A uniquely comprehensive resource about instructional consultation in higher education -- At many colleges, universities, and professional schools, consultants are available to faculty who wish to assess and improve their teaching. Consultation is widely regarded as a powerful intervention for improving teaching and learning. No service provided by teaching centers has greater potential for producing deep and enduring effects on teachers and teaching. A think tank was charged with identifying ...
A uniquely comprehensive resource about instructional consultation in higher education -- At many colleges, universities, and professional schools, consultants are available to faculty who wish to assess and improve their teaching. Consultation is widely regarded as a powerful intervention for improving teaching and learning. No service provided by teaching centers has greater potential for producing deep and enduring effects on teachers and teaching. A think tank was charged with identifying ...
Additional Info:
A uniquely comprehensive resource about instructional consultation in higher education -- At many colleges, universities, and professional schools, consultants are available to faculty who wish to assess and improve their teaching. Consultation is widely regarded as a powerful intervention for improving teaching and learning. No service provided by teaching centers has greater potential for producing deep and enduring effects on teachers and teaching. A think tank was charged with identifying the knowledge base underlying instructional consultation, examining current practices, and recommending how best practices might best be disseminated. This book is the result of the think tank's work. The book offers a thoughtful blend of research-based principles and practical advice. It speaks practically to the practitioner. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Skills and techniques of instructional consultation. Interactions of teaching improvement / Kathleen T. Brinko
Instructional consulting : a guide for developing professional knowledge / L. Dee Fink
Creative art of effective consultation / Laura L.B. Border
First meeting with the client / Bette LeSere Erickson, Mary Deane Sorcinelli
Collecting information using class observation / Karron Lewis
Small group methods for collecting information from students / Richard Tiberius
Collecting information using videotape / Eric Kristensen
Collecting information using student ratings / Michael Theall, Jennifer Franklin
Data review and follow up consultation / Bette LeSere Erickson, Mary Deane Sorcinelli
Collaborative consultation for international faculty / Erin Porter, Ghislaine Kozuh
Consulting with faculty in small groups / William C. Rando
Programmatic approaches to instructional consultation. Overview of instructional consultation in North America / Diane E. Morrison
Microteaching, teaching laboratory, and alliances for change / Richard Tiberius
Partners in learning : breaking down the barriers around teaching / Myrna Smith
Small Group Instructional Diagnosis (SGID) / Lisa Firing Lenze
Instructional skills workshop program : a peer based model for the improvement of teaching and learning / Judy Wilbee
Teaching improvement process / Mary Deane Sorcinelli
Considerations in setting up a peer consultant program / Michael Kerwin
Context of instructional consultation. Higher education in North America / Charles Claxton
Local variables that affect consultation / Diane E. Morrison
Variability among faculty / Mary Ann Shea
Faculty face student diversity / Milton G. Spann, Jr., Suella McCrimmon
Effects of classroom environments / Gabriele Bauer
Identifying and assessing your consultation style / Laura L.B. Border
Developmental stages of an educational consultant : theoretical perspective / Richard Tiberius, Jane Tipping, Ronald Smith
Personal account of the development of one consultant / David Way
Evaluating instructional consultation. Issues in evaluating consultation ; Evaluating a teaching consultation service / Glenn R. Erickson
Evaluating a consultation program for part time faculty / Barbara J. Millis
Training instructional consultants. Instructional consultants as reflective practitioners / Ronald Smith
Training new consultants in the Connecticut Community Technical College system / Bille Searle, Patricia A. Cook
Training new consultants in the Kentucky Community College system : the teaching consultants' workshop / Michael Kerwin, Judy Rhoads
Training TA's as consultants at the University of Michigan ; workshop for peer mentors / Beverly Black, Bronwen Gates
Professional development for consultants at the University of Washington's Center for Instructional Development and Research / Jody D. Nyquist, Donald H. Wulff
Training new consultants at Stanford University : the TA Consultants Program / Michele Marincovich
Reflecting on practice : observing ourselves consulting / Barbara Hofer, Beverly Black, Linda Acitelli
Using case studies to train instructional consultants / Barbara J. Millis
Professional organizations of instructional consultation / Kathleen T. Brinko
A uniquely comprehensive resource about instructional consultation in higher education -- At many colleges, universities, and professional schools, consultants are available to faculty who wish to assess and improve their teaching. Consultation is widely regarded as a powerful intervention for improving teaching and learning. No service provided by teaching centers has greater potential for producing deep and enduring effects on teachers and teaching. A think tank was charged with identifying the knowledge base underlying instructional consultation, examining current practices, and recommending how best practices might best be disseminated. This book is the result of the think tank's work. The book offers a thoughtful blend of research-based principles and practical advice. It speaks practically to the practitioner. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Skills and techniques of instructional consultation. Interactions of teaching improvement / Kathleen T. Brinko
Instructional consulting : a guide for developing professional knowledge / L. Dee Fink
Creative art of effective consultation / Laura L.B. Border
First meeting with the client / Bette LeSere Erickson, Mary Deane Sorcinelli
Collecting information using class observation / Karron Lewis
Small group methods for collecting information from students / Richard Tiberius
Collecting information using videotape / Eric Kristensen
Collecting information using student ratings / Michael Theall, Jennifer Franklin
Data review and follow up consultation / Bette LeSere Erickson, Mary Deane Sorcinelli
Collaborative consultation for international faculty / Erin Porter, Ghislaine Kozuh
Consulting with faculty in small groups / William C. Rando
Programmatic approaches to instructional consultation. Overview of instructional consultation in North America / Diane E. Morrison
Microteaching, teaching laboratory, and alliances for change / Richard Tiberius
Partners in learning : breaking down the barriers around teaching / Myrna Smith
Small Group Instructional Diagnosis (SGID) / Lisa Firing Lenze
Instructional skills workshop program : a peer based model for the improvement of teaching and learning / Judy Wilbee
Teaching improvement process / Mary Deane Sorcinelli
Considerations in setting up a peer consultant program / Michael Kerwin
Context of instructional consultation. Higher education in North America / Charles Claxton
Local variables that affect consultation / Diane E. Morrison
Variability among faculty / Mary Ann Shea
Faculty face student diversity / Milton G. Spann, Jr., Suella McCrimmon
Effects of classroom environments / Gabriele Bauer
Identifying and assessing your consultation style / Laura L.B. Border
Developmental stages of an educational consultant : theoretical perspective / Richard Tiberius, Jane Tipping, Ronald Smith
Personal account of the development of one consultant / David Way
Evaluating instructional consultation. Issues in evaluating consultation ; Evaluating a teaching consultation service / Glenn R. Erickson
Evaluating a consultation program for part time faculty / Barbara J. Millis
Training instructional consultants. Instructional consultants as reflective practitioners / Ronald Smith
Training new consultants in the Connecticut Community Technical College system / Bille Searle, Patricia A. Cook
Training new consultants in the Kentucky Community College system : the teaching consultants' workshop / Michael Kerwin, Judy Rhoads
Training TA's as consultants at the University of Michigan ; workshop for peer mentors / Beverly Black, Bronwen Gates
Professional development for consultants at the University of Washington's Center for Instructional Development and Research / Jody D. Nyquist, Donald H. Wulff
Training new consultants at Stanford University : the TA Consultants Program / Michele Marincovich
Reflecting on practice : observing ourselves consulting / Barbara Hofer, Beverly Black, Linda Acitelli
Using case studies to train instructional consultants / Barbara J. Millis
Professional organizations of instructional consultation / Kathleen T. Brinko
Developing Non-Hierarchical Leadership on Campus: Case Studies and Best Practices in Higher Education
Additional Info:
Abstract: Key figures in the field of non-hierarchical leadership development share their insights on conceptualizing, promoting, and assessing models of leadership based on teamwork, diversity, and service. This volume will be essential for theorists and practitioners in higher education. (From the Publisher)
Abstract: Key figures in the field of non-hierarchical leadership development share their insights on conceptualizing, promoting, and assessing models of leadership based on teamwork, diversity, and service. This volume will be essential for theorists and practitioners in higher education. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Abstract: Key figures in the field of non-hierarchical leadership development share their insights on conceptualizing, promoting, and assessing models of leadership based on teamwork, diversity, and service. This volume will be essential for theorists and practitioners in higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
I. Thinking about Non-Hierarchical Leadership Development
ch. 1 An Interview with Helen S. Astin (Kathleen N. McMahon)
ch. 2 The Emergence of Inclusive, Process-Oriented Leadership (Shannon K. Faris and Charles L. Outcalt)
ch. 3 A Multiple-Level Approach for Understanding the Nature of Leadership Studies (Francis J. Yammarino and Fred Dansereau)
ch. 4 Developing Social Change Agents: Leadership Development for the 1990s and Beyond (Marguerite Bounous-Hammarth)
ch. 5 New Ways of Leading in a Networked World (Cynthia Cherrey and Kathleen Allen)
ch. 6 Using Postmodern Feminism to Reconceptualize "Citizenship" and "Community" (Lori E. Varlotta)
II. Putting Theory into Action: Successful Campus Programs
ch. 7 Developing an Interdisciplinary Doctoral Program in Leadership Studies (Mark T. Green, Jacquelyn Alexander, and Ray Boryczka)
ch. 8 Miami's Leadership Commitment (Dennis S. Roberts)
ch. 9 Spheres of Confluence: Non-Hierarchical Leadership in Action (David C. Robertson and Bryan J. Lubic)
ch. 10 The Peer-to-Peer Context (Sunshine B. Martin)
ch. 11 Common Cause: Different Routes (Cynthia Cherrey, Judi Biggs Garbuio, and Rachel Isgar)
ch. 12 Learning and Leading: A Class Project Provides Context (Nancy S. Huber)
ch. 13 Service, Spirituality, and Social Change (Diane Bischetti)
ch. 14 Designing Experiential Training Sessions for the Social Change Model of Leadership Development (Emily A. Langdon and Nancy B. Mathias)
ch. 15 Emerging Leaders: Leadership Development from a Community College Perspective (Heather Anderson, Paul Dale, James Rubin, Cindy Shoenhair, and Shelle Witten)
ch. 16 Non-Hierarchical Leadership in Action: Creating Change on Our College Campus (Tammera J. Klumpyan and Emily A. Langdon)
ch. 17 Overcoming Resistance to Change in Higher Education (Mary Liscinsky, Christopher S. Chambers, and Christopher R. Foley)
ch. 18 The Advent of Leadership Development in the UCLA International Student Orientation Program (Mariana Zavala-Corzo)
III. The Complex Intersections of Leadership and Identity
ch. 19 Intercultural Leadership: A Program Model for Students in Higher Education (Daniel C. Adams and Patricia M. Aqui)
ch. 20 Transforming Communities: Students Dialoguing across Racial and Ethnic Boundaries (Wayne R. Millette and Roger Fisher)
ch. 21 The Lavender Leader: An Inqueery into Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual, and Transgender Student Leadership (Ronni Sanlo)
IV. How We Define and Measure Success: Assessing Leadership Development
ch. 22 Developing Citizenship through Assessment: A Participatory Model for Guiding Learning and Leadership (Christine M. Cress)
ch. 23 Assessing Non-Hierarchical Leadership (Tracy M. Tyree)
Index
About the Contributors
Abstract: Key figures in the field of non-hierarchical leadership development share their insights on conceptualizing, promoting, and assessing models of leadership based on teamwork, diversity, and service. This volume will be essential for theorists and practitioners in higher education. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
I. Thinking about Non-Hierarchical Leadership Development
ch. 1 An Interview with Helen S. Astin (Kathleen N. McMahon)
ch. 2 The Emergence of Inclusive, Process-Oriented Leadership (Shannon K. Faris and Charles L. Outcalt)
ch. 3 A Multiple-Level Approach for Understanding the Nature of Leadership Studies (Francis J. Yammarino and Fred Dansereau)
ch. 4 Developing Social Change Agents: Leadership Development for the 1990s and Beyond (Marguerite Bounous-Hammarth)
ch. 5 New Ways of Leading in a Networked World (Cynthia Cherrey and Kathleen Allen)
ch. 6 Using Postmodern Feminism to Reconceptualize "Citizenship" and "Community" (Lori E. Varlotta)
II. Putting Theory into Action: Successful Campus Programs
ch. 7 Developing an Interdisciplinary Doctoral Program in Leadership Studies (Mark T. Green, Jacquelyn Alexander, and Ray Boryczka)
ch. 8 Miami's Leadership Commitment (Dennis S. Roberts)
ch. 9 Spheres of Confluence: Non-Hierarchical Leadership in Action (David C. Robertson and Bryan J. Lubic)
ch. 10 The Peer-to-Peer Context (Sunshine B. Martin)
ch. 11 Common Cause: Different Routes (Cynthia Cherrey, Judi Biggs Garbuio, and Rachel Isgar)
ch. 12 Learning and Leading: A Class Project Provides Context (Nancy S. Huber)
ch. 13 Service, Spirituality, and Social Change (Diane Bischetti)
ch. 14 Designing Experiential Training Sessions for the Social Change Model of Leadership Development (Emily A. Langdon and Nancy B. Mathias)
ch. 15 Emerging Leaders: Leadership Development from a Community College Perspective (Heather Anderson, Paul Dale, James Rubin, Cindy Shoenhair, and Shelle Witten)
ch. 16 Non-Hierarchical Leadership in Action: Creating Change on Our College Campus (Tammera J. Klumpyan and Emily A. Langdon)
ch. 17 Overcoming Resistance to Change in Higher Education (Mary Liscinsky, Christopher S. Chambers, and Christopher R. Foley)
ch. 18 The Advent of Leadership Development in the UCLA International Student Orientation Program (Mariana Zavala-Corzo)
III. The Complex Intersections of Leadership and Identity
ch. 19 Intercultural Leadership: A Program Model for Students in Higher Education (Daniel C. Adams and Patricia M. Aqui)
ch. 20 Transforming Communities: Students Dialoguing across Racial and Ethnic Boundaries (Wayne R. Millette and Roger Fisher)
ch. 21 The Lavender Leader: An Inqueery into Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual, and Transgender Student Leadership (Ronni Sanlo)
IV. How We Define and Measure Success: Assessing Leadership Development
ch. 22 Developing Citizenship through Assessment: A Participatory Model for Guiding Learning and Leadership (Christine M. Cress)
ch. 23 Assessing Non-Hierarchical Leadership (Tracy M. Tyree)
Index
About the Contributors
The Course Portfolio: How Faculty Can Examine Their Teaching to Advance Practice and Improve Student Learning
Additional Info:
Cousin to The Teaching Portfolio, which documents a broad sampling of a faculty member's pedagogical work, the course portfolio focuses instead on the unfolding of a single course, from conception to results. The volume covers defining features and functions, steps in development, audiences and occasions for use, and the course portfolio's place in the development of a scholarship of teaching and learning. It also includes nine case studies by faculty ...
Cousin to The Teaching Portfolio, which documents a broad sampling of a faculty member's pedagogical work, the course portfolio focuses instead on the unfolding of a single course, from conception to results. The volume covers defining features and functions, steps in development, audiences and occasions for use, and the course portfolio's place in the development of a scholarship of teaching and learning. It also includes nine case studies by faculty ...
Additional Info:
Cousin to The Teaching Portfolio, which documents a broad sampling of a faculty member's pedagogical work, the course portfolio focuses instead on the unfolding of a single course, from conception to results. The volume covers defining features and functions, steps in development, audiences and occasions for use, and the course portfolio's place in the development of a scholarship of teaching and learning. It also includes nine case studies by faculty in a range of disciplines who have developed and used course portfolios, as well as an annotated resource list. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface (Margaret A. Miller)
Acknowledgements
Introduction (Pat Hutchings)
ch. 1: Course Anatomy: The Dissection and Analysis of Knowledge Through Teaching (Lee S. Shulman)
ch. 2: Defining Features and Significant Functions of the Course Portfolio (Pat Hutchings)
Case Study 1: Writing a Course Portfolio for an Introductory Survey Course in American History (William W. Cutler, III)
Case Study 2: A Course Portfolio for A Graduate Nursing Course
ch. 3: Why Now: Course Portfolios in Context (Mary Taylor Huber)
Case Study 1: Writing a Course Portfolio for an Introductory Slavery Course in American History (William W. Cutler III)
Case Study 2: A Course Portfolio for A Graduate Nursing Course (Donna Martsoff)
Chapter 3: Why Now? Course Portfolios in Context (Mary Taylor Huber)
Case Study 3: A Course Portfolio for a Colloquium in 2oth-Century American Foreign Relations (Mary Ann Heiss)
Case Study 4: A Course Portfolio in Mathematics (Orin Chein)
ch. 4: How to Develop a Course Portfolio (Pat Hutchings)
Case Study 5: A Course Portfolio for Midcareer Reflection (Deborah M. Langsam)
Case Study 6: Post-Tenure Review: A Case Study of a Course Portfolio Within a Personnel File (Charles W. Mignon)
Case Study 7: A Portfolio That Makes a Point (Eli Passow)
ch. 5: Putting the Focus on Student Learning (Daniel Bernstein)
Case Study 8: A Course Portfolio for a Creative Writing Course (Pat Hutchings)
Case Study 9: A Hypertext Portfolio for an Experimental American Literature Course (Randy Bass)
ch. 6: Audiences and Occasions: Using Course Portfolios for Peer Collaboration and Review of Teaching (Pat Hutchings)
Works Cited
Resources for Further Work (Laurie Milford and Pat Hutchings)
Cousin to The Teaching Portfolio, which documents a broad sampling of a faculty member's pedagogical work, the course portfolio focuses instead on the unfolding of a single course, from conception to results. The volume covers defining features and functions, steps in development, audiences and occasions for use, and the course portfolio's place in the development of a scholarship of teaching and learning. It also includes nine case studies by faculty in a range of disciplines who have developed and used course portfolios, as well as an annotated resource list. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface (Margaret A. Miller)
Acknowledgements
Introduction (Pat Hutchings)
ch. 1: Course Anatomy: The Dissection and Analysis of Knowledge Through Teaching (Lee S. Shulman)
ch. 2: Defining Features and Significant Functions of the Course Portfolio (Pat Hutchings)
Case Study 1: Writing a Course Portfolio for an Introductory Survey Course in American History (William W. Cutler, III)
Case Study 2: A Course Portfolio for A Graduate Nursing Course
ch. 3: Why Now: Course Portfolios in Context (Mary Taylor Huber)
Case Study 1: Writing a Course Portfolio for an Introductory Slavery Course in American History (William W. Cutler III)
Case Study 2: A Course Portfolio for A Graduate Nursing Course (Donna Martsoff)
Chapter 3: Why Now? Course Portfolios in Context (Mary Taylor Huber)
Case Study 3: A Course Portfolio for a Colloquium in 2oth-Century American Foreign Relations (Mary Ann Heiss)
Case Study 4: A Course Portfolio in Mathematics (Orin Chein)
ch. 4: How to Develop a Course Portfolio (Pat Hutchings)
Case Study 5: A Course Portfolio for Midcareer Reflection (Deborah M. Langsam)
Case Study 6: Post-Tenure Review: A Case Study of a Course Portfolio Within a Personnel File (Charles W. Mignon)
Case Study 7: A Portfolio That Makes a Point (Eli Passow)
ch. 5: Putting the Focus on Student Learning (Daniel Bernstein)
Case Study 8: A Course Portfolio for a Creative Writing Course (Pat Hutchings)
Case Study 9: A Hypertext Portfolio for an Experimental American Literature Course (Randy Bass)
ch. 6: Audiences and Occasions: Using Course Portfolios for Peer Collaboration and Review of Teaching (Pat Hutchings)
Works Cited
Resources for Further Work (Laurie Milford and Pat Hutchings)
Taking College Teaching Seriously: Pedagogy Matters!: Fostering Student Success Through Faculty-Centered Practice Improvement
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: “College teaching is not rocket science – it’s much, much harder.” Diana Laurillard, University of London
College faculty, both adjunct and full-time, stand with their students at the coalface of learning, wishing for more to succeed and disappointed at how illusory academic success is for so many. Among the ...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: “College teaching is not rocket science – it’s much, much harder.” Diana Laurillard, University of London
College faculty, both adjunct and full-time, stand with their students at the coalface of learning, wishing for more to succeed and disappointed at how illusory academic success is for so many. Among the ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: “College teaching is not rocket science – it’s much, much harder.” Diana Laurillard, University of London
College faculty, both adjunct and full-time, stand with their students at the coalface of learning, wishing for more to succeed and disappointed at how illusory academic success is for so many. Among the array of investments colleges are making to improve student outcomes, from predictive data analysis to enhanced advising, too little attention is paid to supporting faculty. Yet the impact of teacher and teaching on student learning is incontrovertible. Taking College Teaching Seriously: Pedagogy Matters! stands against the tide – celebrating the incredible work faculty members do each day and challenging them to expand their capacity to present their content expertise effectively.
This book presents a model of embedded professional development, which capitalizes on the affordances of technology to enable groups of faculty to examine their practice in a non-evaluative context, but with a clear focus on improvement. The core of the work involves individual reflection and the design provides for an accessible way to “see” into the classrooms of discipline peers. Most importantly, the Taking College Teaching Seriously experience is not an intense one-shot, but rather a structured opportunity for a faculty member to examine and adapt practice over time and to assess the impact of changes on student learning.
Faculty who have participated in the Taking College Teaching Seriously experience found it to be transformative:
• English Professor, Kentucky: Participating in (the work) this year has helped me to be more reflective in every single action. I constantly analyze how each session went… (it) gave me the tools to think about every minute detail of a classroom.
• Adjunct Math Professor, Mississippi: Speaking as an adjunct, I have valued the chance to share my teaching and get ideas from others. I can honestly say that this experience has been a lifeline of sorts this year. In a “magic wand” instructional setting, I’d wish for the kind of honest, respectful and professionally challenging discussions we have in Classroom Notebook* at weekly staff meetings. *Classroom Notebook is the Taking College Teaching Seriously online platform
• Math Professor, NJ: I think the continual self-evaluation and reflection allowed us to work together to brainstorm improvements and positive tweaks to be more purposeful in our classrooms as opposed to just randomly reaching in the dark for ideas and techniques in HOPE of success.
Taking College Teaching Seriously: Pedagogy Matters! breaks new ground in professional development. Each faculty member is at the center of the learning experience, stimulated and supported by peers working in similar contexts. They share a desire to see more students learn deeply and find that honing their skill at adapting to the learning needs of specific classes and students allows them to realize this goal. Uniquely, Taking College Teaching Seriously illuminates the link between faculty teaching expertise and improving student outcomes.
The introduction to the book examines the challenges facing faculty in higher education today and reviews the literature on teaching and learning. Chapter 1 looks at the analytical foundations for all of the model’s elements, from adult learning theory to communities of practice, and Chapter 2 presents the model’s theory of change. Chapter 3 describes the model in detail and Chapters 4 and 5 concern the infrastructure of the faculty collaborative community, focusing on both its interpersonal and technological dimensions. The book concludes in Chapter 6 with an assessment of the value of this approach to professional development and a call to action for faculty member engagement in this important work, so essential to both professional passion and mandate. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
President's Perspective
Faculty Reflection
Introduction: Pedagogy and American Higher Education
ch. 1 The Contours of Practice Improvement
ch. 2 Theory of Change
ch. 3 Pedagogy Matters Tools and Routines
ch. 4 Scaffolding the Community I: Coaching and Sharing
ch. 5 Scaffolding the Community II: Norms and Infrastructure
ch. 6 Taking College Teaching Seriously: A Call to Action
Appendix
References
Index
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: “College teaching is not rocket science – it’s much, much harder.” Diana Laurillard, University of London
College faculty, both adjunct and full-time, stand with their students at the coalface of learning, wishing for more to succeed and disappointed at how illusory academic success is for so many. Among the array of investments colleges are making to improve student outcomes, from predictive data analysis to enhanced advising, too little attention is paid to supporting faculty. Yet the impact of teacher and teaching on student learning is incontrovertible. Taking College Teaching Seriously: Pedagogy Matters! stands against the tide – celebrating the incredible work faculty members do each day and challenging them to expand their capacity to present their content expertise effectively.
This book presents a model of embedded professional development, which capitalizes on the affordances of technology to enable groups of faculty to examine their practice in a non-evaluative context, but with a clear focus on improvement. The core of the work involves individual reflection and the design provides for an accessible way to “see” into the classrooms of discipline peers. Most importantly, the Taking College Teaching Seriously experience is not an intense one-shot, but rather a structured opportunity for a faculty member to examine and adapt practice over time and to assess the impact of changes on student learning.
Faculty who have participated in the Taking College Teaching Seriously experience found it to be transformative:
• English Professor, Kentucky: Participating in (the work) this year has helped me to be more reflective in every single action. I constantly analyze how each session went… (it) gave me the tools to think about every minute detail of a classroom.
• Adjunct Math Professor, Mississippi: Speaking as an adjunct, I have valued the chance to share my teaching and get ideas from others. I can honestly say that this experience has been a lifeline of sorts this year. In a “magic wand” instructional setting, I’d wish for the kind of honest, respectful and professionally challenging discussions we have in Classroom Notebook* at weekly staff meetings. *Classroom Notebook is the Taking College Teaching Seriously online platform
• Math Professor, NJ: I think the continual self-evaluation and reflection allowed us to work together to brainstorm improvements and positive tweaks to be more purposeful in our classrooms as opposed to just randomly reaching in the dark for ideas and techniques in HOPE of success.
Taking College Teaching Seriously: Pedagogy Matters! breaks new ground in professional development. Each faculty member is at the center of the learning experience, stimulated and supported by peers working in similar contexts. They share a desire to see more students learn deeply and find that honing their skill at adapting to the learning needs of specific classes and students allows them to realize this goal. Uniquely, Taking College Teaching Seriously illuminates the link between faculty teaching expertise and improving student outcomes.
The introduction to the book examines the challenges facing faculty in higher education today and reviews the literature on teaching and learning. Chapter 1 looks at the analytical foundations for all of the model’s elements, from adult learning theory to communities of practice, and Chapter 2 presents the model’s theory of change. Chapter 3 describes the model in detail and Chapters 4 and 5 concern the infrastructure of the faculty collaborative community, focusing on both its interpersonal and technological dimensions. The book concludes in Chapter 6 with an assessment of the value of this approach to professional development and a call to action for faculty member engagement in this important work, so essential to both professional passion and mandate. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
President's Perspective
Faculty Reflection
Introduction: Pedagogy and American Higher Education
ch. 1 The Contours of Practice Improvement
ch. 2 Theory of Change
ch. 3 Pedagogy Matters Tools and Routines
ch. 4 Scaffolding the Community I: Coaching and Sharing
ch. 5 Scaffolding the Community II: Norms and Infrastructure
ch. 6 Taking College Teaching Seriously: A Call to Action
Appendix
References
Index
Universal Challenges in Faculty Work: Fresh Perspectives from Around the World
Additional Info:
Global developments directly or indirectly affect teaching and learning in higher education. In this new era of telecommunication revolution and growing international cooperation, it is time for university and college teachers to talk across national boundaries about teaching. In this volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning, contributors from around the world describe issues they are currently facing in their teaching practice. National differences are put into the context ...
Global developments directly or indirectly affect teaching and learning in higher education. In this new era of telecommunication revolution and growing international cooperation, it is time for university and college teachers to talk across national boundaries about teaching. In this volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning, contributors from around the world describe issues they are currently facing in their teaching practice. National differences are put into the context ...
Additional Info:
Global developments directly or indirectly affect teaching and learning in higher education. In this new era of telecommunication revolution and growing international cooperation, it is time for university and college teachers to talk across national boundaries about teaching. In this volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning, contributors from around the world describe issues they are currently facing in their teaching practice. National differences are put into the context of universal themes. Faculty are responding to demands for social development and to pressures from the world of work. They are influenced by government policies and financial constraints. Regardless of the context within which they practice, faculty still struggle with the familiar issues of how to learn about teaching, how to juggle teaching and research, and how to evaluate both teaching and learning. The international perspectives presented in this volume give readers a fresh outlook on everyday concerns and introduce new thoughts on teaching and learning. This is the 72nd issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Global developments directly or indirectly affect teaching and learning in higher education. In this new era of telecommunication revolution and growing international cooperation, it is time for university and college teachers to talk across national boundaries about teaching. In this volume of New Directions for Teaching and Learning, contributors from around the world describe issues they are currently facing in their teaching practice. National differences are put into the context of universal themes. Faculty are responding to demands for social development and to pressures from the world of work. They are influenced by government policies and financial constraints. Regardless of the context within which they practice, faculty still struggle with the familiar issues of how to learn about teaching, how to juggle teaching and research, and how to evaluate both teaching and learning. The international perspectives presented in this volume give readers a fresh outlook on everyday concerns and introduce new thoughts on teaching and learning. This is the 72nd issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
"Legal Primer for New & Not-So-New Administrators"
Additional Info:
A 15,000 word article from AAUP (American Association of University Professors), addressing faculty recruitment, tenure and advancement, sexual harassment, academic freedom, and protections against personal liability. “In the end, if you apply institutional policies consistently and fairly, you will be in a solid position to defend decisions.”
A 15,000 word article from AAUP (American Association of University Professors), addressing faculty recruitment, tenure and advancement, sexual harassment, academic freedom, and protections against personal liability. “In the end, if you apply institutional policies consistently and fairly, you will be in a solid position to defend decisions.”
Additional Info:
A 15,000 word article from AAUP (American Association of University Professors), addressing faculty recruitment, tenure and advancement, sexual harassment, academic freedom, and protections against personal liability. “In the end, if you apply institutional policies consistently and fairly, you will be in a solid position to defend decisions.”
A 15,000 word article from AAUP (American Association of University Professors), addressing faculty recruitment, tenure and advancement, sexual harassment, academic freedom, and protections against personal liability. “In the end, if you apply institutional policies consistently and fairly, you will be in a solid position to defend decisions.”
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Good Practice in Tenure Evaluation: Advice for Tenured Faculty, Department Chairs, and Academic Administrators
Additional Info:
This report provides guidance on conducting tenure evaluations that are thoughtful and just. Practical suggestions for the tenure evaluation process fall into four themes. The first is that of the need for clarity in standards and procedures for evaluation. Institutions should ensure that their stated criteria for tenure match the criteria that, in actual practice, the institutions apply. A second major theme is that tenure decisions must be consistent over ...
This report provides guidance on conducting tenure evaluations that are thoughtful and just. Practical suggestions for the tenure evaluation process fall into four themes. The first is that of the need for clarity in standards and procedures for evaluation. Institutions should ensure that their stated criteria for tenure match the criteria that, in actual practice, the institutions apply. A second major theme is that tenure decisions must be consistent over ...
Additional Info:
This report provides guidance on conducting tenure evaluations that are thoughtful and just. Practical suggestions for the tenure evaluation process fall into four themes. The first is that of the need for clarity in standards and procedures for evaluation. Institutions should ensure that their stated criteria for tenure match the criteria that, in actual practice, the institutions apply. A second major theme is that tenure decisions must be consistent over time among candidates with different personal characteristics, such as race, gender, disability, and national origin. A third necessity is candor in the evaluation of tenure-track faculty. Periodic evaluations should be candid and expressed in plain English. The fourth theme is that of caring for unsuccessful candidates. Faculty and administrators must treat an unsuccessful tenure candidate with professionalism and decency. Active efforts to assist the candidate in relocating to another position are of mutual benefit to the individual and the institution. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Summary
ch. 1 Clarity in Standards and Procedures for Tenure Evaluation
ch. 2 Consistency in Tenure Decisions
ch. 3 Candor in the Evaluation of Tenure-Track Faculty
ch. 4 Caring for Unsuccessful Candidates
Conclusion: Moving Forward
Endnotes
Bibliography
This report provides guidance on conducting tenure evaluations that are thoughtful and just. Practical suggestions for the tenure evaluation process fall into four themes. The first is that of the need for clarity in standards and procedures for evaluation. Institutions should ensure that their stated criteria for tenure match the criteria that, in actual practice, the institutions apply. A second major theme is that tenure decisions must be consistent over time among candidates with different personal characteristics, such as race, gender, disability, and national origin. A third necessity is candor in the evaluation of tenure-track faculty. Periodic evaluations should be candid and expressed in plain English. The fourth theme is that of caring for unsuccessful candidates. Faculty and administrators must treat an unsuccessful tenure candidate with professionalism and decency. Active efforts to assist the candidate in relocating to another position are of mutual benefit to the individual and the institution. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Summary
ch. 1 Clarity in Standards and Procedures for Tenure Evaluation
ch. 2 Consistency in Tenure Decisions
ch. 3 Candor in the Evaluation of Tenure-Track Faculty
ch. 4 Caring for Unsuccessful Candidates
Conclusion: Moving Forward
Endnotes
Bibliography
A Guide for Leaders in Higher Education: Core Concepts, Competencies, and Tools
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
At a time when higher education faces the unprecedented challenges of declining revenues and increased scrutiny, questions about access, cost, and the value of degrees, and the imperative to educate a more diverse student body, there is an urgent need for leadership that is conversant with, and able to deploy, the competencies, ...
Click Here for Book Review
At a time when higher education faces the unprecedented challenges of declining revenues and increased scrutiny, questions about access, cost, and the value of degrees, and the imperative to educate a more diverse student body, there is an urgent need for leadership that is conversant with, and able to deploy, the competencies, ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
At a time when higher education faces the unprecedented challenges of declining revenues and increased scrutiny, questions about access, cost, and the value of degrees, and the imperative to educate a more diverse student body, there is an urgent need for leadership that is conversant with, and able to deploy, the competencies, management tools, and strategic skills that go beyond the technical or disciplinary preparation and “on the job” training that most leaders have received.
This book is intended as a practical resource for academic and administrative leaders in higher education who seek guidance in dealing with today’s complexity, opportunities, and demands. It is also addressed to those who aspire to hold positions of leadership, and to the many faculty and staff members who serve in informal leadership roles within their departments, disciplines, or institutions. Additionally, the book serves as a guide and resource for those responsible for the design and implementation of leadership development programs in higher education.
While recognizing the differences in mission and circumstance across institutional types, the authors begin by offering a foundational understanding of higher education as a sector, the political, social, and economic climate in which it operates, and the potential opportunities ahead. Subsequent sections of the book cover leadership concepts and competencies, along with a series of applied tools for leadership and organizational effectiveness. Each chapter concludes with related case studies and guiding questions for further reflection. The final section highlights models for developing institutional leadership programs that progressively meet the needs of leaders along their careers.
The content and format of this book reflect the authors’ views that leadership development is most effective when it is an intentional, reflective, and systematic experience. While they espouse the practice of general principles of leadership, they also take into account the unique context of higher education with its numerous internal and external stakeholders, multiple missions, particular organizational governance, and a culture that fosters individual autonomy and creativity. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Doug Lederman)
Preface & Acknowledgements
Part 1 - Leadership in Higher Education: A Critical Need in a Complex and Challenging Landscape
ch. 1 Leadership and Leadership Development in Higher Education: Time for Change
ch. 2 The Higher Education Landscape: Navigating the Organizational & Strategic Leadership Terrain
ch. 3 College and University Missions: Purposes, Principles, and Perspectives
ch. 4 Higher Education's Multiple Stakeholders: Perspectives and Pressures
Part 2 - Leadership Concepts and Competencies
ch. 5 Campus Cultures and Intercultural Tensions: The Leader as Organizational Ethnographer and Cross-Cultural Communicator
ch. 6 The Challenging Transition from Pilot to Air Traffic Controller: Leadership in Crowded Skies
ch. 7 What is Leadership?
ch. 8 Leadership-Communication Connections
ch. 9 The Competency Approach: A Two-Dimensional View of Higher Education Leadership
ch. 10 Formal and Informal Leadership in Higher Education: Roles and Responsibilities
Part 3 - Applied Tools for Leadership and Organizational Effectiveness
ch. 11 Becoming a Better Leader: Self-Assessment and Leadership Development
ch. 12 Envisioning and Achieving Excellence: A Rubric and Practical Tool for Organization Review and Improvement
ch. 13 Strategic Communication: Developing Essential Habits for Effective Leadership
ch. 14 Strategic Planning: Core Concepts and Critical Steps
ch. 15 Understanding and Leading Change in Colleges and Universities
ch. 16 Using Metrics to Track Progress, Measure Outcomes, and Assess Effectiveness
ch. 17 Crisis Leadership: Upholding Institutional Values
ch. 18 Organization Continuity and Change: Leadership Succession Planning
Part 4 - Leadership Development Models
ch. 19 Leadership Development in Higher Education: A Snapshot of Approaches, Characteristics, and Programs
Epilogue
Appendix A: Intercultural Communication Behavior Scales
Appendix B: Leadership Competencies Scorecard 2.0
Appendix C: Change Planning Worksheets
Appendix D: Snapshot of Signature Leadership Programs at Big Ten Academic Alliance Member Institutions
References
About the Authors
Index
Click Here for Book Review
At a time when higher education faces the unprecedented challenges of declining revenues and increased scrutiny, questions about access, cost, and the value of degrees, and the imperative to educate a more diverse student body, there is an urgent need for leadership that is conversant with, and able to deploy, the competencies, management tools, and strategic skills that go beyond the technical or disciplinary preparation and “on the job” training that most leaders have received.
This book is intended as a practical resource for academic and administrative leaders in higher education who seek guidance in dealing with today’s complexity, opportunities, and demands. It is also addressed to those who aspire to hold positions of leadership, and to the many faculty and staff members who serve in informal leadership roles within their departments, disciplines, or institutions. Additionally, the book serves as a guide and resource for those responsible for the design and implementation of leadership development programs in higher education.
While recognizing the differences in mission and circumstance across institutional types, the authors begin by offering a foundational understanding of higher education as a sector, the political, social, and economic climate in which it operates, and the potential opportunities ahead. Subsequent sections of the book cover leadership concepts and competencies, along with a series of applied tools for leadership and organizational effectiveness. Each chapter concludes with related case studies and guiding questions for further reflection. The final section highlights models for developing institutional leadership programs that progressively meet the needs of leaders along their careers.
The content and format of this book reflect the authors’ views that leadership development is most effective when it is an intentional, reflective, and systematic experience. While they espouse the practice of general principles of leadership, they also take into account the unique context of higher education with its numerous internal and external stakeholders, multiple missions, particular organizational governance, and a culture that fosters individual autonomy and creativity. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword (Doug Lederman)
Preface & Acknowledgements
Part 1 - Leadership in Higher Education: A Critical Need in a Complex and Challenging Landscape
ch. 1 Leadership and Leadership Development in Higher Education: Time for Change
ch. 2 The Higher Education Landscape: Navigating the Organizational & Strategic Leadership Terrain
ch. 3 College and University Missions: Purposes, Principles, and Perspectives
ch. 4 Higher Education's Multiple Stakeholders: Perspectives and Pressures
Part 2 - Leadership Concepts and Competencies
ch. 5 Campus Cultures and Intercultural Tensions: The Leader as Organizational Ethnographer and Cross-Cultural Communicator
ch. 6 The Challenging Transition from Pilot to Air Traffic Controller: Leadership in Crowded Skies
ch. 7 What is Leadership?
ch. 8 Leadership-Communication Connections
ch. 9 The Competency Approach: A Two-Dimensional View of Higher Education Leadership
ch. 10 Formal and Informal Leadership in Higher Education: Roles and Responsibilities
Part 3 - Applied Tools for Leadership and Organizational Effectiveness
ch. 11 Becoming a Better Leader: Self-Assessment and Leadership Development
ch. 12 Envisioning and Achieving Excellence: A Rubric and Practical Tool for Organization Review and Improvement
ch. 13 Strategic Communication: Developing Essential Habits for Effective Leadership
ch. 14 Strategic Planning: Core Concepts and Critical Steps
ch. 15 Understanding and Leading Change in Colleges and Universities
ch. 16 Using Metrics to Track Progress, Measure Outcomes, and Assess Effectiveness
ch. 17 Crisis Leadership: Upholding Institutional Values
ch. 18 Organization Continuity and Change: Leadership Succession Planning
Part 4 - Leadership Development Models
ch. 19 Leadership Development in Higher Education: A Snapshot of Approaches, Characteristics, and Programs
Epilogue
Appendix A: Intercultural Communication Behavior Scales
Appendix B: Leadership Competencies Scorecard 2.0
Appendix C: Change Planning Worksheets
Appendix D: Snapshot of Signature Leadership Programs at Big Ten Academic Alliance Member Institutions
References
About the Authors
Index
Developing Senior Faculty as Teachers
Additional Info:
Colleges and universities in the United States are experiencing a major shift: while their student bodies change, their faculties remain largely the same--at least in the short run. The student body grows increasingly diverse in terms of ethnicity, economic status, and academic preparedness, with more and more students coming from the groups that have been least-well-served by higher education in the past. Student retention and ultimate success depends, in part, ...
Colleges and universities in the United States are experiencing a major shift: while their student bodies change, their faculties remain largely the same--at least in the short run. The student body grows increasingly diverse in terms of ethnicity, economic status, and academic preparedness, with more and more students coming from the groups that have been least-well-served by higher education in the past. Student retention and ultimate success depends, in part, ...
Additional Info:
Colleges and universities in the United States are experiencing a major shift: while their student bodies change, their faculties remain largely the same--at least in the short run. The student body grows increasingly diverse in terms of ethnicity, economic status, and academic preparedness, with more and more students coming from the groups that have been least-well-served by higher education in the past. Student retention and ultimate success depends, in part, on the ability of professors--most of whom have been teaching for many years--to provide appropriate classroom experiences and learning assistance.
Faculty demographics present a start contrast: the professoriate, mostly white and male, will continue to age as the large faculty cohort hired in the 1960s and early 1970s reaches mid- and late career. More than half of all full-time faculty members in 1988 were over forty-five, nearly two-thirds had tenure, and relatively few between the ages of forty-five and sixty anticipated leaving their current position. The faculty members who face the challenges and opportunities of the college classroom in the 1990s are a seasoned, stable, and job-secure group. Happily for students and for institutions, faculty members frequently focus their energies on teaching in their later decades of their careers; to date, institutions seeking to support this crucial refocusing have not had resources or models to draw upon.
If senior faculty in their last decades of professional service do, in fact, turn their collective energies to improving teaching and learning, the potential for long-term impact on collegiate education is tremendous. Engaging senior faculty, who control the reward structure, in reflection on how excellent teaching is best supported can fundamentally alter institutional priorities toward a more appropriate balance between teaching and research--and create a better teaching environment. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes (Mark LaCelle-Peterson)
ch. 1 The Senior Faculty: A Portrait and Literature Review(R. Eugene Rice, Martin J. Finkelstein)
ch. 2 Institutions Matter: Campus Teaching Environments' Impact on Senior Faculty (Mark W. LaCelle-Peterson, Martin J. Finkelstein)
ch. 3 Primal Origins and Later Correctives for Midcareer Disillusionment (Robert Boice)
ch. 4 Designing a Reward System to Promote the Career Development of Senior Faculty (Donald W. Farmer)
ch. 5 Building Coalitions for Faculty Revitalization: The Case of Long Island University's Brooklyn Campus (Bernice Braid)
ch. 6 Redefining the Role of Senior Faculty at a Research University (William K. Jackson, Ronald D. Simpson)
ch. 7 Revitalizing Senior Faculty Through Statewide Efforts (Barbara Leigh Smith, Myrna J. Smith)
ch. 8 The Senior Faculty: Higher Education's Plentiful Yet Largely Untapped Resource (Martin J. Finkelstein, Nina Dorset Jemmott)
ch. 9 Resources for Developing Senior Faculty as Teachers (Robert K. Seal)
Index
Colleges and universities in the United States are experiencing a major shift: while their student bodies change, their faculties remain largely the same--at least in the short run. The student body grows increasingly diverse in terms of ethnicity, economic status, and academic preparedness, with more and more students coming from the groups that have been least-well-served by higher education in the past. Student retention and ultimate success depends, in part, on the ability of professors--most of whom have been teaching for many years--to provide appropriate classroom experiences and learning assistance.
Faculty demographics present a start contrast: the professoriate, mostly white and male, will continue to age as the large faculty cohort hired in the 1960s and early 1970s reaches mid- and late career. More than half of all full-time faculty members in 1988 were over forty-five, nearly two-thirds had tenure, and relatively few between the ages of forty-five and sixty anticipated leaving their current position. The faculty members who face the challenges and opportunities of the college classroom in the 1990s are a seasoned, stable, and job-secure group. Happily for students and for institutions, faculty members frequently focus their energies on teaching in their later decades of their careers; to date, institutions seeking to support this crucial refocusing have not had resources or models to draw upon.
If senior faculty in their last decades of professional service do, in fact, turn their collective energies to improving teaching and learning, the potential for long-term impact on collegiate education is tremendous. Engaging senior faculty, who control the reward structure, in reflection on how excellent teaching is best supported can fundamentally alter institutional priorities toward a more appropriate balance between teaching and research--and create a better teaching environment. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' Notes (Mark LaCelle-Peterson)
ch. 1 The Senior Faculty: A Portrait and Literature Review(R. Eugene Rice, Martin J. Finkelstein)
ch. 2 Institutions Matter: Campus Teaching Environments' Impact on Senior Faculty (Mark W. LaCelle-Peterson, Martin J. Finkelstein)
ch. 3 Primal Origins and Later Correctives for Midcareer Disillusionment (Robert Boice)
ch. 4 Designing a Reward System to Promote the Career Development of Senior Faculty (Donald W. Farmer)
ch. 5 Building Coalitions for Faculty Revitalization: The Case of Long Island University's Brooklyn Campus (Bernice Braid)
ch. 6 Redefining the Role of Senior Faculty at a Research University (William K. Jackson, Ronald D. Simpson)
ch. 7 Revitalizing Senior Faculty Through Statewide Efforts (Barbara Leigh Smith, Myrna J. Smith)
ch. 8 The Senior Faculty: Higher Education's Plentiful Yet Largely Untapped Resource (Martin J. Finkelstein, Nina Dorset Jemmott)
ch. 9 Resources for Developing Senior Faculty as Teachers (Robert K. Seal)
Index
New Perspectives on Designing and Implementing Effective Workshops
Additional Info:
This sourcebook provides workshop leaders and designers with the information necessary to hone their skills in everything from planning and instructional design to delivery and evaluation. The authors are seasoned workshop veterans who give practical suggestions grounded in both experience and theory. This volume will help professionals navigate the challenges and exploit the potential of distance learning; effectively use technology and the media to enhance their workshops; and negotiate power ...
This sourcebook provides workshop leaders and designers with the information necessary to hone their skills in everything from planning and instructional design to delivery and evaluation. The authors are seasoned workshop veterans who give practical suggestions grounded in both experience and theory. This volume will help professionals navigate the challenges and exploit the potential of distance learning; effectively use technology and the media to enhance their workshops; and negotiate power ...
Additional Info:
This sourcebook provides workshop leaders and designers with the information necessary to hone their skills in everything from planning and instructional design to delivery and evaluation. The authors are seasoned workshop veterans who give practical suggestions grounded in both experience and theory. This volume will help professionals navigate the challenges and exploit the potential of distance learning; effectively use technology and the media to enhance their workshops; and negotiate power dynamics in the intensity of the workshop atmosphere. This is the 76th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals page. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1. Workshop Planning (Thomas J. Sork)
ch. 2. Motivationwith a Mission: Understanding Motivation and Culture in Workshop Design (Raymond J. Wlodkowski)
ch. 3. Group Learning in Workshops (Anne M. Will)
ch. 4. Negotiating Power Dynamics in Workshops (Juanita Johnson-Bailey, Ronald M. Cervero)
ch. 5. Residential Workshops (Gretchen Bersch, Jean Anderson Fleming)
ch. 6. Workshops at a Distance (Chere Campbell Gibson, Terry L. Gibson)
ch. 7. Workshop Evaluation: Old Myths and New Wisdom (Grover J. Andrews)
ch. 8. Confessions of a Workshop-aholic (Doe Hentschel)
ch. 9. The Workshop Through New Eyes (Jean Anderson Fleming)
This sourcebook provides workshop leaders and designers with the information necessary to hone their skills in everything from planning and instructional design to delivery and evaluation. The authors are seasoned workshop veterans who give practical suggestions grounded in both experience and theory. This volume will help professionals navigate the challenges and exploit the potential of distance learning; effectively use technology and the media to enhance their workshops; and negotiate power dynamics in the intensity of the workshop atmosphere. This is the 76th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Adult and Continuing Education. For more information on the series, please see the Journals and Periodicals page. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1. Workshop Planning (Thomas J. Sork)
ch. 2. Motivationwith a Mission: Understanding Motivation and Culture in Workshop Design (Raymond J. Wlodkowski)
ch. 3. Group Learning in Workshops (Anne M. Will)
ch. 4. Negotiating Power Dynamics in Workshops (Juanita Johnson-Bailey, Ronald M. Cervero)
ch. 5. Residential Workshops (Gretchen Bersch, Jean Anderson Fleming)
ch. 6. Workshops at a Distance (Chere Campbell Gibson, Terry L. Gibson)
ch. 7. Workshop Evaluation: Old Myths and New Wisdom (Grover J. Andrews)
ch. 8. Confessions of a Workshop-aholic (Doe Hentschel)
ch. 9. The Workshop Through New Eyes (Jean Anderson Fleming)
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
While teaching workshops like those offered by the Wabash Center provide a unique opportunity for scholars to reflect on their teaching, three elements important to the workshops' success can be effective in institutional settings as well. Certain characteristics of community, conversation stimulated by differences, and appropriate attention to self-care help create an environment supportive of faculty development throughout a scholar's career.
While teaching workshops like those offered by the Wabash Center provide a unique opportunity for scholars to reflect on their teaching, three elements important to the workshops' success can be effective in institutional settings as well. Certain characteristics of community, conversation stimulated by differences, and appropriate attention to self-care help create an environment supportive of faculty development throughout a scholar's career.
Additional Info:
While teaching workshops like those offered by the Wabash Center provide a unique opportunity for scholars to reflect on their teaching, three elements important to the workshops' success can be effective in institutional settings as well. Certain characteristics of community, conversation stimulated by differences, and appropriate attention to self-care help create an environment supportive of faculty development throughout a scholar's career.
While teaching workshops like those offered by the Wabash Center provide a unique opportunity for scholars to reflect on their teaching, three elements important to the workshops' success can be effective in institutional settings as well. Certain characteristics of community, conversation stimulated by differences, and appropriate attention to self-care help create an environment supportive of faculty development throughout a scholar's career.
Additional Info:
In spring 2000, the authors undertook a study to explore the interaction between academic librarians and faculty at the University of Manitoba, the impact of librarians’ contributions, and the future roles of librarians. The following five areas were investigated: teaching/instruction, information services, information technology, research, and collections. The results clearly show that when faculty interact with librarians, librarians have a very positive and considerable impact on both faculty and students. ...
In spring 2000, the authors undertook a study to explore the interaction between academic librarians and faculty at the University of Manitoba, the impact of librarians’ contributions, and the future roles of librarians. The following five areas were investigated: teaching/instruction, information services, information technology, research, and collections. The results clearly show that when faculty interact with librarians, librarians have a very positive and considerable impact on both faculty and students. ...
Additional Info:
In spring 2000, the authors undertook a study to explore the interaction between academic librarians and faculty at the University of Manitoba, the impact of librarians’ contributions, and the future roles of librarians. The following five areas were investigated: teaching/instruction, information services, information technology, research, and collections. The results clearly show that when faculty interact with librarians, librarians have a very positive and considerable impact on both faculty and students. In addition, the faculty responses indicate that they are receptive to collaborating with librarians at a higher level of interaction than currently experienced.
In spring 2000, the authors undertook a study to explore the interaction between academic librarians and faculty at the University of Manitoba, the impact of librarians’ contributions, and the future roles of librarians. The following five areas were investigated: teaching/instruction, information services, information technology, research, and collections. The results clearly show that when faculty interact with librarians, librarians have a very positive and considerable impact on both faculty and students. In addition, the faculty responses indicate that they are receptive to collaborating with librarians at a higher level of interaction than currently experienced.
Leadership Without Easy Answers
Additional Info:
The economy uncertain, education in decline, cities under siege, crime and poverty spiraling upward, international relations roiling: we look to leaders for solutions, and when they don't deliver, we simply add their failure to our list of woes. In doing do, we do them and ourselves a grave disservice. We are indeed facing an unprecedented crisis of leadership, Ronald Heifetz avows, but it stems as much from our demands and ...
The economy uncertain, education in decline, cities under siege, crime and poverty spiraling upward, international relations roiling: we look to leaders for solutions, and when they don't deliver, we simply add their failure to our list of woes. In doing do, we do them and ourselves a grave disservice. We are indeed facing an unprecedented crisis of leadership, Ronald Heifetz avows, but it stems as much from our demands and ...
Additional Info:
The economy uncertain, education in decline, cities under siege, crime and poverty spiraling upward, international relations roiling: we look to leaders for solutions, and when they don't deliver, we simply add their failure to our list of woes. In doing do, we do them and ourselves a grave disservice. We are indeed facing an unprecedented crisis of leadership, Ronald Heifetz avows, but it stems as much from our demands and expectations as from any leader's inability to meet them. His book gets at both of these problems, offering a practical approach to leadership for those who lead as well as those who look to them for answers. Fitting the theory and practice of leadership to our extraordinary times, the book promotes a new social contract, a revitalization of our civic life just when we most need it. Drawing on a dozen years of research among managers, officers, and politicians in the public realm and the private sector, among the nonprofits, and in teaching, Heifetz presents clear, concrete prescriptions for anyone who needs to take the lead in almost any situation, under almost any organizational conditions, no matter who is in charge, His strategy applies not only to people at the top but also to those who must lead without authority--activists as well as presidents, managers as well as workers on the front line. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
Pt. I Setting the Frame
ch. 1 Values in Leadership
ch. 2 To Lead or Mislead?
ch. 3 The Roots of Authority
Pt. II Leading With Authority
ch. 4 Mobilizing Adaptive Work
ch. 5 Applying Power
ch. 6 On a Razor's Edge
ch. 7 Falling Off the Edge
Pt. III Leading Without Authority
ch. 8 Creative Deviance on the Frontline
ch. 9 Modulating the Provocation
Pt. IV Staying Alive
ch. 10 Assassination
ch. 11 The Personal Challenge
Notes
Acknowledgments
Index
The economy uncertain, education in decline, cities under siege, crime and poverty spiraling upward, international relations roiling: we look to leaders for solutions, and when they don't deliver, we simply add their failure to our list of woes. In doing do, we do them and ourselves a grave disservice. We are indeed facing an unprecedented crisis of leadership, Ronald Heifetz avows, but it stems as much from our demands and expectations as from any leader's inability to meet them. His book gets at both of these problems, offering a practical approach to leadership for those who lead as well as those who look to them for answers. Fitting the theory and practice of leadership to our extraordinary times, the book promotes a new social contract, a revitalization of our civic life just when we most need it. Drawing on a dozen years of research among managers, officers, and politicians in the public realm and the private sector, among the nonprofits, and in teaching, Heifetz presents clear, concrete prescriptions for anyone who needs to take the lead in almost any situation, under almost any organizational conditions, no matter who is in charge, His strategy applies not only to people at the top but also to those who must lead without authority--activists as well as presidents, managers as well as workers on the front line. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
Pt. I Setting the Frame
ch. 1 Values in Leadership
ch. 2 To Lead or Mislead?
ch. 3 The Roots of Authority
Pt. II Leading With Authority
ch. 4 Mobilizing Adaptive Work
ch. 5 Applying Power
ch. 6 On a Razor's Edge
ch. 7 Falling Off the Edge
Pt. III Leading Without Authority
ch. 8 Creative Deviance on the Frontline
ch. 9 Modulating the Provocation
Pt. IV Staying Alive
ch. 10 Assassination
ch. 11 The Personal Challenge
Notes
Acknowledgments
Index
Grant Writing: Practical Strategies For Scholars And Professionals
Additional Info:
A first of its kind, this book provides you everything you need to know about successfully navigating the grant writing process including understanding the language of grant writing, finding grants, preparing the proposal, completing the application, preparing budgets, organizing information and timelines, revising and editing the proposal, including the assessment and evaluation, and building meaningful relationships with program officers and colleagues. (From the Publisher)
A first of its kind, this book provides you everything you need to know about successfully navigating the grant writing process including understanding the language of grant writing, finding grants, preparing the proposal, completing the application, preparing budgets, organizing information and timelines, revising and editing the proposal, including the assessment and evaluation, and building meaningful relationships with program officers and colleagues. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
A first of its kind, this book provides you everything you need to know about successfully navigating the grant writing process including understanding the language of grant writing, finding grants, preparing the proposal, completing the application, preparing budgets, organizing information and timelines, revising and editing the proposal, including the assessment and evaluation, and building meaningful relationships with program officers and colleagues. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Authors' Note Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Overture: An Introduction to Grants
ch. 2 Exposition: Finding the Grants
ch. 3 Theme and Variations: Developing the Proposal
ch. 4 Recapitulation: Completing the Proposal
ch. 5 Finale: Revising and Editing the Proposal
ch. 6 Encore: Beyond the Proposal Epilogue
Appendix A: Grant Professionals Association Code of Ethics and Standards
Appendix B: Grant Public Law 106-107
Appendix C: Grants.Gov Privacy Policy
Appendix D: Eligibility for Government Grants
Appendix E: Processes for Grant Application
Appendix F: Sample Grant Review Process NSF
Appendix G: Sample Grant Review Process NEH
Appendix H: Sample Letter of Intent
Appendix I: Sample Final Report
Appendix J: Glossary of Terms
References
Index About the Authors
A first of its kind, this book provides you everything you need to know about successfully navigating the grant writing process including understanding the language of grant writing, finding grants, preparing the proposal, completing the application, preparing budgets, organizing information and timelines, revising and editing the proposal, including the assessment and evaluation, and building meaningful relationships with program officers and colleagues. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Authors' Note Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Overture: An Introduction to Grants
ch. 2 Exposition: Finding the Grants
ch. 3 Theme and Variations: Developing the Proposal
ch. 4 Recapitulation: Completing the Proposal
ch. 5 Finale: Revising and Editing the Proposal
ch. 6 Encore: Beyond the Proposal Epilogue
Appendix A: Grant Professionals Association Code of Ethics and Standards
Appendix B: Grant Public Law 106-107
Appendix C: Grants.Gov Privacy Policy
Appendix D: Eligibility for Government Grants
Appendix E: Processes for Grant Application
Appendix F: Sample Grant Review Process NSF
Appendix G: Sample Grant Review Process NEH
Appendix H: Sample Letter of Intent
Appendix I: Sample Final Report
Appendix J: Glossary of Terms
References
Index About the Authors
Field Guide to Academic Leadership: A Publication of the National Academy for Academic Leadership
Additional Info:
This guide for those in leadership positions at academic institutions provides information and suggestions for action and administrative practice related to a range of issues. The guide blends research on leadership, change, teaching, and learning with the insights of academic leaders and researchers across the US, and stresses the need for cooperation and collaboration among leaders. Two introductory chapters review forces of change affecting higher education and introduce elements for ...
This guide for those in leadership positions at academic institutions provides information and suggestions for action and administrative practice related to a range of issues. The guide blends research on leadership, change, teaching, and learning with the insights of academic leaders and researchers across the US, and stresses the need for cooperation and collaboration among leaders. Two introductory chapters review forces of change affecting higher education and introduce elements for ...
Additional Info:
This guide for those in leadership positions at academic institutions provides information and suggestions for action and administrative practice related to a range of issues. The guide blends research on leadership, change, teaching, and learning with the insights of academic leaders and researchers across the US, and stresses the need for cooperation and collaboration among leaders. Two introductory chapters review forces of change affecting higher education and introduce elements for significant change, while the bulk of the book offers material on leadership roles and challenges, teaching and learning, assessment, organizational issues, and position-specific issues. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Pt. 1 Basics
ch. 1 Pressures for Fundamental Reform: Creating a Viable Academic Future (Alan E. Guskin and Mary B. Marcy)
ch. 2 Requisites for Sustainable Institutional Change (Robert M. Diamond, Lion F. Gardiner and Daniel W.Wheeler)
Pt. 2 Leadership
ch. 3 Leadership and Change (Dale W. Lick)
ch. 4 Mission and Vision Statements: An Essential First Step (William G. Tierney)
ch. 5 Moving Mountains: Institutional Culture and Transformational Change (Judith A. Ramaley)
ch. 6 Building on Style for More Effective Relationships and Results (Robert M. Diamond and Charles M. Spuches)
Pt. 3 Academics
ch. 7 Research on Learning and Student Development and Its Implications (Lion F. Gardiner)
ch. 8 Student Development: Monitoring the Quality of Learning and Development (Lion F. Gardiner)
ch. 9 Curricula and Courses: Administrative Issues (Robert M. Diamond)
ch. 10 Teaching Strategies for the Twenty-First Century (James Eison)
ch. 11 Technology in the Learning Process (Wallace Hannum)
ch. 12 Improving Academic Advising: Issues and Action Areas for Campus Leaders (Franklin P. Wilbur)
ch. 13 Faculty Development: An Investment for the Future (Marilla Svinicki)
Pt. 4 Assessment
ch. 14 Evaluation and Assessment: An Institutional Context (Michael Theall)
ch. 15 Academic Program Review (Jon F. Wergin)
ch. 16 Leadership in Faculty Evaluation (Michael Theall)
ch. 17 The Mission-Driven Faculty Reward System (Robert M. Diamond)
Pt. 5 Other Issues
ch. 18 Supportive Financial Systems (Susan Stetson Clarke)
ch. 19 Enhancing Student Learning Through Collaboration Between Academic Affairs and Student Affairs (George D. Kuh and Sara E. Hinkle)
ch. 20 Dealing with Technology: Administrative Issues (Steven W. Gilbert and Stephen C. Ehrmann)
ch. 21 Diversity Issues (Joseph H. Silver, Sr.)
Pt. 6 Position-Specific Issues for Academic Leaders
ch. 22 The Role of Governing Boards: Issues, Recommendations, and Resources
ch. 23 Creating Change: Suggestions for the New President (Kenneth A. Shaw)
ch. 24 Transforming the Small College: A Challenge for Presidential Leadership (Eugene Hotchkiss)
ch. 25 Presidents and Chief Academic Officers of Community Colleges (Louis S. Albert)
ch. 26 Chief Academic Officers (Leo M. Lambert)
ch. 27 Academic Deans (Deryl R. Leaming)
ch. 28 Chairs as Institutional Leaders (Daniel W. Wheeler)
Pt. 7 Conclusion
ch. 29 Some Final Observations (Robert M. Diamond)
App Participants at Minnowbrook Conferences
Glossary of Academic Terms
Name Index
Subject Index
This guide for those in leadership positions at academic institutions provides information and suggestions for action and administrative practice related to a range of issues. The guide blends research on leadership, change, teaching, and learning with the insights of academic leaders and researchers across the US, and stresses the need for cooperation and collaboration among leaders. Two introductory chapters review forces of change affecting higher education and introduce elements for significant change, while the bulk of the book offers material on leadership roles and challenges, teaching and learning, assessment, organizational issues, and position-specific issues. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Pt. 1 Basics
ch. 1 Pressures for Fundamental Reform: Creating a Viable Academic Future (Alan E. Guskin and Mary B. Marcy)
ch. 2 Requisites for Sustainable Institutional Change (Robert M. Diamond, Lion F. Gardiner and Daniel W.Wheeler)
Pt. 2 Leadership
ch. 3 Leadership and Change (Dale W. Lick)
ch. 4 Mission and Vision Statements: An Essential First Step (William G. Tierney)
ch. 5 Moving Mountains: Institutional Culture and Transformational Change (Judith A. Ramaley)
ch. 6 Building on Style for More Effective Relationships and Results (Robert M. Diamond and Charles M. Spuches)
Pt. 3 Academics
ch. 7 Research on Learning and Student Development and Its Implications (Lion F. Gardiner)
ch. 8 Student Development: Monitoring the Quality of Learning and Development (Lion F. Gardiner)
ch. 9 Curricula and Courses: Administrative Issues (Robert M. Diamond)
ch. 10 Teaching Strategies for the Twenty-First Century (James Eison)
ch. 11 Technology in the Learning Process (Wallace Hannum)
ch. 12 Improving Academic Advising: Issues and Action Areas for Campus Leaders (Franklin P. Wilbur)
ch. 13 Faculty Development: An Investment for the Future (Marilla Svinicki)
Pt. 4 Assessment
ch. 14 Evaluation and Assessment: An Institutional Context (Michael Theall)
ch. 15 Academic Program Review (Jon F. Wergin)
ch. 16 Leadership in Faculty Evaluation (Michael Theall)
ch. 17 The Mission-Driven Faculty Reward System (Robert M. Diamond)
Pt. 5 Other Issues
ch. 18 Supportive Financial Systems (Susan Stetson Clarke)
ch. 19 Enhancing Student Learning Through Collaboration Between Academic Affairs and Student Affairs (George D. Kuh and Sara E. Hinkle)
ch. 20 Dealing with Technology: Administrative Issues (Steven W. Gilbert and Stephen C. Ehrmann)
ch. 21 Diversity Issues (Joseph H. Silver, Sr.)
Pt. 6 Position-Specific Issues for Academic Leaders
ch. 22 The Role of Governing Boards: Issues, Recommendations, and Resources
ch. 23 Creating Change: Suggestions for the New President (Kenneth A. Shaw)
ch. 24 Transforming the Small College: A Challenge for Presidential Leadership (Eugene Hotchkiss)
ch. 25 Presidents and Chief Academic Officers of Community Colleges (Louis S. Albert)
ch. 26 Chief Academic Officers (Leo M. Lambert)
ch. 27 Academic Deans (Deryl R. Leaming)
ch. 28 Chairs as Institutional Leaders (Daniel W. Wheeler)
Pt. 7 Conclusion
ch. 29 Some Final Observations (Robert M. Diamond)
App Participants at Minnowbrook Conferences
Glossary of Academic Terms
Name Index
Subject Index
Additional Info:
Practically focused, easily accessible, this book is directly relevant to the academic environment in which department chairs operate. The authors—internationally known experts in academic administration—conducted interviews with department chairs and heads at 38 academic institutions from across the U.S. and Canada, public and private, two-year and four-year.
The extensive interviews resulted in four thematic patterns that covered the overarching issues department chairs face: quality, change, culture, and ...
Practically focused, easily accessible, this book is directly relevant to the academic environment in which department chairs operate. The authors—internationally known experts in academic administration—conducted interviews with department chairs and heads at 38 academic institutions from across the U.S. and Canada, public and private, two-year and four-year.
The extensive interviews resulted in four thematic patterns that covered the overarching issues department chairs face: quality, change, culture, and ...
Additional Info:
Practically focused, easily accessible, this book is directly relevant to the academic environment in which department chairs operate. The authors—internationally known experts in academic administration—conducted interviews with department chairs and heads at 38 academic institutions from across the U.S. and Canada, public and private, two-year and four-year.
The extensive interviews resulted in four thematic patterns that covered the overarching issues department chairs face: quality, change, culture, and leadership. Each chapter is packed with practical advice and concludes with questions and resources to help chairs develop constructive responses to the myriad issues facing them. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
About the Authors
Foreword
Preface
Part 1 Fifteen Strategies in the Building Process
ch. 1 Difficulties in the Building Process
The Context for Leadership
Chairing the Department
The Nature of the Department
The Nature of Faculty Work
A Self-Assessment
Endnotes
Suggested Resources
ch. 2 Consider Your Own Development
Learn About Your Role and Responsibilities in the Department and the Institution
Create a Balance Between Your Professional and Personal Lives
Prepare for Your Professional Future
Conclusion
Endnotes
Suggested Resources
ch. 3 Reflect on Your Role as an Academic Leader
Establish a Collective Departmental Vision or Focus
Develop Faculty Ownership of the Vision
Initiate Changes Carefully
Allocate Resources of Time, Information, and Assignments to Implement the Vision and Departmental Goals
Monitor Progress Toward Achieving the Vision and Goals
Conclusion
Endnotes
Suggested Resources
ch. 4 Create a Positive Interpersonal Work Environment
Establish an Open Atmosphere to Build Trust
Listen to Faculty Needs and Interests
Motivate Faculty and Collaboratively Set Goals
Develop Leadership Skills that Empower Faculty and Provide Effective Feedback
Feedback Techniques
Represent Faculty to Colleagues and Senior Administrators
Serve as a Role Model and Mentor
Encourage and Support Faculty
Conclusion
Endnotes
Suggested Resources
Part 2 Applying the Strategies ch. 5 Help New Faculty Become Oriented
Communicate Expectations for Performance
Provide Feedback on Progress
Enhance Collegial Review Processes
Create Flexible Time Lines for Tenure
Encourage Mentoring and Integration by Senior Faculty
Extend Mentoring and Feedback to Graduate Students Who Aspire to be Faculty Members
Recognize the Department Chair as a Career Sponsor
Support Teaching, Particularly at the Undergraduate Level
Support Scholarly Development
Foster a Balance Between Professional and Personal Life
Conclusion
Endnotes
Suggested Resources
ch. 6 Improve Faculty Teaching
Promote Excellence in Teaching
Support Teaching Improvement
Address Teaching Problems
Employ Case Studies to Guide Your Response to Teaching Problems
Conclusion
Suggested Resources
ch. 7 Improve the Scholarship of Faculty
Foster a Strong Research Climate
Detect a Problem Situation as Early as Possible
Clarify the Reasons for Lack of Performance
Identify a Plan for Improvement
Follow Up on the Plan
Conclusion
Endnotes
Suggested Resources
ch. 8 Refocus Faculty Efforts
Detect the Signs of Lack of Focus
Explore Options with the Individual
Mutually Design a Plan for Intervention
Arrange for Activities, Resources, and Feedback
Conclusion
Suggested Resources
ch. 9 Address Personal Issues of Faculty
Differentiate Between Short- and Long-Term Issues
Adopt Strategies for Temporary Problems
Adopt Strategies for Intervening in Chronic Cases
Conclusion
Suggested Resources
ch. 10 Employ Technology Wisely
Be Aware of Technological Developments
Encourage Faculty and Staff Technology Literacy
Support Technology Training
Use Technology Efficiently
Use Technology to Facilitate Outcomes, Assessment, and Accountability
Develop a Plan for Resource Allocation
Adopt Emerging Technologies Prudently
Consider the Impact on Student Services
Conclusion
Endnotes
Suggested Resources
ch. 11 Adapt to Funding and Resources Challenges
Clarify Responsibility for Budget Development and Allocation
Recognize the Implications of Budget Pressures
Diversify Funding Through Revenue Generation Strategies
Capitalize on Changes in Staffing
Maintain High Morale During Trying Times
Conclusion
Endnotes
Suggested Resources
ch. 12 Foster a Culture of Continuous Improvement
Make Continuous Improvement a Priority
Devise Strategies and Resources to Support Quality Improvement Efforts
Student Learning Assessment
Teaching Effectiveness Assessment
Program Effectiveness Assessment
Encourage Support of Continuous Improvement Efforts
Adopt Reliable Assessment Measures to Track Progress Over Time, Make Comparisons, and Demonstrate Results
An Illustration of the Process
Conclusion
Suggested Resources
ch. 13 Build an Agenda
Four Dimensions of the Building Process
Implementing the Agenda
Conclusion
Endnotes
References
The National Study and the Follow-Up Study
Topical Index to Strategies
Index
Practically focused, easily accessible, this book is directly relevant to the academic environment in which department chairs operate. The authors—internationally known experts in academic administration—conducted interviews with department chairs and heads at 38 academic institutions from across the U.S. and Canada, public and private, two-year and four-year.
The extensive interviews resulted in four thematic patterns that covered the overarching issues department chairs face: quality, change, culture, and leadership. Each chapter is packed with practical advice and concludes with questions and resources to help chairs develop constructive responses to the myriad issues facing them. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
About the Authors
Foreword
Preface
Part 1 Fifteen Strategies in the Building Process
ch. 1 Difficulties in the Building Process
The Context for Leadership
Chairing the Department
The Nature of the Department
The Nature of Faculty Work
A Self-Assessment
Endnotes
Suggested Resources
ch. 2 Consider Your Own Development
Learn About Your Role and Responsibilities in the Department and the Institution
Create a Balance Between Your Professional and Personal Lives
Prepare for Your Professional Future
Conclusion
Endnotes
Suggested Resources
ch. 3 Reflect on Your Role as an Academic Leader
Establish a Collective Departmental Vision or Focus
Develop Faculty Ownership of the Vision
Initiate Changes Carefully
Allocate Resources of Time, Information, and Assignments to Implement the Vision and Departmental Goals
Monitor Progress Toward Achieving the Vision and Goals
Conclusion
Endnotes
Suggested Resources
ch. 4 Create a Positive Interpersonal Work Environment
Establish an Open Atmosphere to Build Trust
Listen to Faculty Needs and Interests
Motivate Faculty and Collaboratively Set Goals
Develop Leadership Skills that Empower Faculty and Provide Effective Feedback
Feedback Techniques
Represent Faculty to Colleagues and Senior Administrators
Serve as a Role Model and Mentor
Encourage and Support Faculty
Conclusion
Endnotes
Suggested Resources
Part 2 Applying the Strategies ch. 5 Help New Faculty Become Oriented
Communicate Expectations for Performance
Provide Feedback on Progress
Enhance Collegial Review Processes
Create Flexible Time Lines for Tenure
Encourage Mentoring and Integration by Senior Faculty
Extend Mentoring and Feedback to Graduate Students Who Aspire to be Faculty Members
Recognize the Department Chair as a Career Sponsor
Support Teaching, Particularly at the Undergraduate Level
Support Scholarly Development
Foster a Balance Between Professional and Personal Life
Conclusion
Endnotes
Suggested Resources
ch. 6 Improve Faculty Teaching
Promote Excellence in Teaching
Support Teaching Improvement
Address Teaching Problems
Employ Case Studies to Guide Your Response to Teaching Problems
Conclusion
Suggested Resources
ch. 7 Improve the Scholarship of Faculty
Foster a Strong Research Climate
Detect a Problem Situation as Early as Possible
Clarify the Reasons for Lack of Performance
Identify a Plan for Improvement
Follow Up on the Plan
Conclusion
Endnotes
Suggested Resources
ch. 8 Refocus Faculty Efforts
Detect the Signs of Lack of Focus
Explore Options with the Individual
Mutually Design a Plan for Intervention
Arrange for Activities, Resources, and Feedback
Conclusion
Suggested Resources
ch. 9 Address Personal Issues of Faculty
Differentiate Between Short- and Long-Term Issues
Adopt Strategies for Temporary Problems
Adopt Strategies for Intervening in Chronic Cases
Conclusion
Suggested Resources
ch. 10 Employ Technology Wisely
Be Aware of Technological Developments
Encourage Faculty and Staff Technology Literacy
Support Technology Training
Use Technology Efficiently
Use Technology to Facilitate Outcomes, Assessment, and Accountability
Develop a Plan for Resource Allocation
Adopt Emerging Technologies Prudently
Consider the Impact on Student Services
Conclusion
Endnotes
Suggested Resources
ch. 11 Adapt to Funding and Resources Challenges
Clarify Responsibility for Budget Development and Allocation
Recognize the Implications of Budget Pressures
Diversify Funding Through Revenue Generation Strategies
Capitalize on Changes in Staffing
Maintain High Morale During Trying Times
Conclusion
Endnotes
Suggested Resources
ch. 12 Foster a Culture of Continuous Improvement
Make Continuous Improvement a Priority
Devise Strategies and Resources to Support Quality Improvement Efforts
Student Learning Assessment
Teaching Effectiveness Assessment
Program Effectiveness Assessment
Encourage Support of Continuous Improvement Efforts
Adopt Reliable Assessment Measures to Track Progress Over Time, Make Comparisons, and Demonstrate Results
An Illustration of the Process
Conclusion
Suggested Resources
ch. 13 Build an Agenda
Four Dimensions of the Building Process
Implementing the Agenda
Conclusion
Endnotes
References
The National Study and the Follow-Up Study
Topical Index to Strategies
Index
The Department Chair as Academic Leader
Additional Info:
This important new work will help department chairs, faculty, and administrators understand and address the increasing complexity of relationships within higher education, as well as the growing influence of external factors. The Department Chair as Academic Leader is a completely updated revision of Allan Tucker's seminal contribution, Chairing the Academic Department, last published in 1992. This work reflects the approach used in the ACE Workshops for Division and Department Chairs and ...
This important new work will help department chairs, faculty, and administrators understand and address the increasing complexity of relationships within higher education, as well as the growing influence of external factors. The Department Chair as Academic Leader is a completely updated revision of Allan Tucker's seminal contribution, Chairing the Academic Department, last published in 1992. This work reflects the approach used in the ACE Workshops for Division and Department Chairs and ...
Additional Info:
This important new work will help department chairs, faculty, and administrators understand and address the increasing complexity of relationships within higher education, as well as the growing influence of external factors. The Department Chair as Academic Leader is a completely updated revision of Allan Tucker's seminal contribution, Chairing the Academic Department, last published in 1992. This work reflects the approach used in the ACE Workshops for Division and Department Chairs and Deans. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
Acknowledgments
Roles and Responsibilities: Past, Present, and Future
The Academic Department: A New Geography
Roles and Responsibilities of Department Chairs
The Department and its People
The Chair and Department Members
Recruiting the Department's Constituents
Faculty Work and Workload
Developing and Evaluating Department Members
The Department and its Operations
The Department as a Collectivity
Curriculum, Pedagogy, and Student Advising
Resource Management for Chairs
Strategic Planning in the Department
The Department and the University
The Chair and the Dean
Legal Issues for Chairs
Evaluating the Department
The Chair and External Audiences
Epilogue
Index
This important new work will help department chairs, faculty, and administrators understand and address the increasing complexity of relationships within higher education, as well as the growing influence of external factors. The Department Chair as Academic Leader is a completely updated revision of Allan Tucker's seminal contribution, Chairing the Academic Department, last published in 1992. This work reflects the approach used in the ACE Workshops for Division and Department Chairs and Deans. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Introduction
Acknowledgments
Roles and Responsibilities: Past, Present, and Future
The Academic Department: A New Geography
Roles and Responsibilities of Department Chairs
The Department and its People
The Chair and Department Members
Recruiting the Department's Constituents
Faculty Work and Workload
Developing and Evaluating Department Members
The Department and its Operations
The Department as a Collectivity
Curriculum, Pedagogy, and Student Advising
Resource Management for Chairs
Strategic Planning in the Department
The Department and the University
The Chair and the Dean
Legal Issues for Chairs
Evaluating the Department
The Chair and External Audiences
Epilogue
Index
Additional Info:
Changing our colleges and universities into learning institutions has become increasingly important at the same time it has become more difficult. Faculty learning communities have proven to be effective for addressing institutional challenges, from preparing the faculty of the future and reinvigorating senior faculty, to implementing new courses, curricula, and campus initiatives on diversity and technology. The results of faculty learning community programs parallel for faculty members the results of ...
Changing our colleges and universities into learning institutions has become increasingly important at the same time it has become more difficult. Faculty learning communities have proven to be effective for addressing institutional challenges, from preparing the faculty of the future and reinvigorating senior faculty, to implementing new courses, curricula, and campus initiatives on diversity and technology. The results of faculty learning community programs parallel for faculty members the results of ...
Additional Info:
Changing our colleges and universities into learning institutions has become increasingly important at the same time it has become more difficult. Faculty learning communities have proven to be effective for addressing institutional challenges, from preparing the faculty of the future and reinvigorating senior faculty, to implementing new courses, curricula, and campus initiatives on diversity and technology. The results of faculty learning community programs parallel for faculty members the results of student learning communities for students, such as retention, deeper learning, respect for other cultures, and greater civic participation.
The chapters in this issue of New Directions for Teaching and Learning describe from a practitioner's perspective the history, development, implementation, and results of faculty learning communities across a wide range of institutions and purposes. Institutions are invited to use this volume to initiate faculty learning communities on their campuses.
This is the 97th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' notes
ch. 1 Introduction to faculty learning communities (Miton D. Cox)
ch. 2 Overview of faculty learning communities (Laurie Richlin and Amy Essington)
ch. 3 Institutional considerations in developing a faculty learning community program (Gary M. Shulman, Milton D. Cox, Laurie Richlin)
ch. 4 Developing facilitators for faculty learning communities (Karin L. Sandell, Katy Wigley and Ann Kovalchick)
ch. 5 Facilitating faculty learning communities : a compact guide to creating change and inspiring community (Martha C. Petrone and Leslie Ortquist-Ahrens)
ch. 6 Developing a statewide faculty learning community program (Sheryl Hanssen, Alan Kalish, Wayne E. Hall, Catherine M. Gynn, Mary Louise Holly, and Dan Madigan)
ch. 7 Managing multiple faculty learning communities (Melody Ayn Barton and Laurie Richlin)
ch. 8 Assessing faculty learning communities (Harry Hubball, Anthony Clarke and Andrea L. Beach)
ch. 9 Technology in support of faculty learning communities (Harry Hubball, Anthony Clarke, and Andrea L. Beach)
ch. 10 Supporting diversity with faculty learning communities : teaching and learning across boundaries (Norman Vaughan)
ch. 11 Developing scholarly teaching and the scholarship of teaching and learning through faculty learning communities (Laurie Richlin and Milton D. Cox)
ch. 12 Midcareer and senior faculty learning communities : learning throughout faculty careers (Muriel L. Blaisdell and Milton D. Cox)
ch. 13 Faculty learning communities for preparing future faculty (Laurie Richlin and Amy Essington)
Changing our colleges and universities into learning institutions has become increasingly important at the same time it has become more difficult. Faculty learning communities have proven to be effective for addressing institutional challenges, from preparing the faculty of the future and reinvigorating senior faculty, to implementing new courses, curricula, and campus initiatives on diversity and technology. The results of faculty learning community programs parallel for faculty members the results of student learning communities for students, such as retention, deeper learning, respect for other cultures, and greater civic participation.
The chapters in this issue of New Directions for Teaching and Learning describe from a practitioner's perspective the history, development, implementation, and results of faculty learning communities across a wide range of institutions and purposes. Institutions are invited to use this volume to initiate faculty learning communities on their campuses.
This is the 97th issue of the quarterly journal New Directions for Teaching and Learning. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editors' notes
ch. 1 Introduction to faculty learning communities (Miton D. Cox)
ch. 2 Overview of faculty learning communities (Laurie Richlin and Amy Essington)
ch. 3 Institutional considerations in developing a faculty learning community program (Gary M. Shulman, Milton D. Cox, Laurie Richlin)
ch. 4 Developing facilitators for faculty learning communities (Karin L. Sandell, Katy Wigley and Ann Kovalchick)
ch. 5 Facilitating faculty learning communities : a compact guide to creating change and inspiring community (Martha C. Petrone and Leslie Ortquist-Ahrens)
ch. 6 Developing a statewide faculty learning community program (Sheryl Hanssen, Alan Kalish, Wayne E. Hall, Catherine M. Gynn, Mary Louise Holly, and Dan Madigan)
ch. 7 Managing multiple faculty learning communities (Melody Ayn Barton and Laurie Richlin)
ch. 8 Assessing faculty learning communities (Harry Hubball, Anthony Clarke and Andrea L. Beach)
ch. 9 Technology in support of faculty learning communities (Harry Hubball, Anthony Clarke, and Andrea L. Beach)
ch. 10 Supporting diversity with faculty learning communities : teaching and learning across boundaries (Norman Vaughan)
ch. 11 Developing scholarly teaching and the scholarship of teaching and learning through faculty learning communities (Laurie Richlin and Milton D. Cox)
ch. 12 Midcareer and senior faculty learning communities : learning throughout faculty careers (Muriel L. Blaisdell and Milton D. Cox)
ch. 13 Faculty learning communities for preparing future faculty (Laurie Richlin and Amy Essington)
Pedagogies for the Future: Leading Quality Learning and Teaching in Higher Education
Additional Info:
Pedagogies for the Future illustrates a unique and exciting endeavor whereby a group of academics across one university developed a professional learning community for the purposes of investigating, articulating and developing their scholarship of practice. Through their collaborative efforts, these educator-researchers sit at the forefront of calls to take teaching seriously in higher education and to recognize the powerful potential of interdisciplinary collaboration. The book provides a model for establishing ...
Pedagogies for the Future illustrates a unique and exciting endeavor whereby a group of academics across one university developed a professional learning community for the purposes of investigating, articulating and developing their scholarship of practice. Through their collaborative efforts, these educator-researchers sit at the forefront of calls to take teaching seriously in higher education and to recognize the powerful potential of interdisciplinary collaboration. The book provides a model for establishing ...
Additional Info:
Pedagogies for the Future illustrates a unique and exciting endeavor whereby a group of academics across one university developed a professional learning community for the purposes of investigating, articulating and developing their scholarship of practice. Through their collaborative efforts, these educator-researchers sit at the forefront of calls to take teaching seriously in higher education and to recognize the powerful potential of interdisciplinary collaboration. The book provides a model for establishing learning communities in higher education and demonstrates that such work is not only possible but also successful. From vision to reality, Pedagogies for the Future offers important insights into the complex nature of researching teaching and learning in higher education from the perspectives of those directly engaged in it. This book will be of great interest and value to both scholars and administrators. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The Cover: Pedagogies for the Future
Acknowledgements
The Authors
ch. 1 Pedagogies for the Future: Leading Quality Learning and Teaching in Higher Education (Robyn Brandenburg & Jacqueline Z. Wilson)
ch. 2 Stepping Out in Style: Leading the Way in Teaching and Learning in Higher Education (John Longhran)
ch. 3 When Their Experience Meets Ours: Learning About Teaching Through Reflection and Student Voice (Robyn Brandenburg)
ch. 4 Toward A Pedagogy of Well-Being for Early Childhood Pre-Service Educators (Sue Emmett)
ch. 5 An Aboriginal Pathway to Learning: My Story: A Conversation with Bonnie Fagan (Bonnie Fagan with Robyn Brandenburg & Liz Crothers)
ch. 6 Environment Science and Expeirential Learning: A Conversation (Peter Gell with Robyn Brandenburg)
ch. 7 Learning to Think Like a Teacher Educator: Pedagogy, Practice and Performance (Sharon McDonough)
ch. 8 Layered Stories as Opportunities to Show and Engage in Learning (Amanda McGraw)
ch. 9 “Back to the Future”: Building Mentoring Capacity in Physical Education Teacher Education Students: An “Assessment for Learning” Approach (Amanda Mooney & Loris Gullock)
ch. 10 Students’ Beliefs Regarding Philosophical Study and Their Development as Critical Thinkers (Jane Mummery)
ch. 11 Letter to Dead Philosopher: Formative Assessment for Deep Learning (Marnie Nolton)
ch. 12 Educational Dissonance: Reconciling a Radical Upbringing and a Conformist Career (Jacqueline Z. Wilson)
Index
Pedagogies for the Future illustrates a unique and exciting endeavor whereby a group of academics across one university developed a professional learning community for the purposes of investigating, articulating and developing their scholarship of practice. Through their collaborative efforts, these educator-researchers sit at the forefront of calls to take teaching seriously in higher education and to recognize the powerful potential of interdisciplinary collaboration. The book provides a model for establishing learning communities in higher education and demonstrates that such work is not only possible but also successful. From vision to reality, Pedagogies for the Future offers important insights into the complex nature of researching teaching and learning in higher education from the perspectives of those directly engaged in it. This book will be of great interest and value to both scholars and administrators. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The Cover: Pedagogies for the Future
Acknowledgements
The Authors
ch. 1 Pedagogies for the Future: Leading Quality Learning and Teaching in Higher Education (Robyn Brandenburg & Jacqueline Z. Wilson)
ch. 2 Stepping Out in Style: Leading the Way in Teaching and Learning in Higher Education (John Longhran)
ch. 3 When Their Experience Meets Ours: Learning About Teaching Through Reflection and Student Voice (Robyn Brandenburg)
ch. 4 Toward A Pedagogy of Well-Being for Early Childhood Pre-Service Educators (Sue Emmett)
ch. 5 An Aboriginal Pathway to Learning: My Story: A Conversation with Bonnie Fagan (Bonnie Fagan with Robyn Brandenburg & Liz Crothers)
ch. 6 Environment Science and Expeirential Learning: A Conversation (Peter Gell with Robyn Brandenburg)
ch. 7 Learning to Think Like a Teacher Educator: Pedagogy, Practice and Performance (Sharon McDonough)
ch. 8 Layered Stories as Opportunities to Show and Engage in Learning (Amanda McGraw)
ch. 9 “Back to the Future”: Building Mentoring Capacity in Physical Education Teacher Education Students: An “Assessment for Learning” Approach (Amanda Mooney & Loris Gullock)
ch. 10 Students’ Beliefs Regarding Philosophical Study and Their Development as Critical Thinkers (Jane Mummery)
ch. 11 Letter to Dead Philosopher: Formative Assessment for Deep Learning (Marnie Nolton)
ch. 12 Educational Dissonance: Reconciling a Radical Upbringing and a Conformist Career (Jacqueline Z. Wilson)
Index
Turning Professors into Teachers: A New Approach to Faculty Development and Student Learning
Additional Info:
A really thoughtful and skillful examination (based on two research projects conducted between 1978 and 1987 which involved fifteen institutions) of the ways in which faculty and students think and learn, offering a concept of undergraduate teaching as a lifelong art that involves the continuous interaction of professors and students. (From the Publisher)
A really thoughtful and skillful examination (based on two research projects conducted between 1978 and 1987 which involved fifteen institutions) of the ways in which faculty and students think and learn, offering a concept of undergraduate teaching as a lifelong art that involves the continuous interaction of professors and students. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
A really thoughtful and skillful examination (based on two research projects conducted between 1978 and 1987 which involved fifteen institutions) of the ways in which faculty and students think and learn, offering a concept of undergraduate teaching as a lifelong art that involves the continuous interaction of professors and students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Conditions of a New Pedagogy for Undergraduate Learning
An inquiry-oriented approach to faculty development and student learning
Thinking styles in the disciplines and in student learning
Promoting student learning
Three professors report about observing their teaching and their students' learning
Tools for understanding students - the Omnibus personality inventory
Tools for understanding students - the interview
Interviews about teaching and student learning with a biologist and a political scientist
Reenvisioning undergraduate teaching
References
Index
A really thoughtful and skillful examination (based on two research projects conducted between 1978 and 1987 which involved fifteen institutions) of the ways in which faculty and students think and learn, offering a concept of undergraduate teaching as a lifelong art that involves the continuous interaction of professors and students. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Conditions of a New Pedagogy for Undergraduate Learning
An inquiry-oriented approach to faculty development and student learning
Thinking styles in the disciplines and in student learning
Promoting student learning
Three professors report about observing their teaching and their students' learning
Tools for understanding students - the Omnibus personality inventory
Tools for understanding students - the interview
Interviews about teaching and student learning with a biologist and a political scientist
Reenvisioning undergraduate teaching
References
Index
Inside the Role of Dean: International Perspectives on Leading in Higher Education
Additional Info:
Despite deans playing critical roles in education, little is known about the knowledge, skills, and dispositions needed for the job, or the practical dilemmas they face on an almost daily basis. Each chapter of this international collection opens the role up for examination and critique, developing a deeper understanding of what it means to be a dean, and offering insights into the transition into the role, managing the daily demands ...
Despite deans playing critical roles in education, little is known about the knowledge, skills, and dispositions needed for the job, or the practical dilemmas they face on an almost daily basis. Each chapter of this international collection opens the role up for examination and critique, developing a deeper understanding of what it means to be a dean, and offering insights into the transition into the role, managing the daily demands ...
Additional Info:
Despite deans playing critical roles in education, little is known about the knowledge, skills, and dispositions needed for the job, or the practical dilemmas they face on an almost daily basis. Each chapter of this international collection opens the role up for examination and critique, developing a deeper understanding of what it means to be a dean, and offering insights into the transition into the role, managing the daily demands and expectations of it, and what it means to exit the deanship. The book brings being a dean and the leadership inherent in the position into sharp focus based on international perspectives on doing the job.
Table Of Content:
PART I
Understanding self in relation to role
1 A process of change: the transition to becoming a dean
John Loughran
2 At your service: an associate dean’s role
Renée T. Clift
3 A dean’s roles in different contexts: simply a matter of boundary crossing?
Douwe Beijaard
PART II
Explicating leadership
4 Fortress days—1,278 of them
Peter Gronn
5 Twenty-five years of deaning: a colourful journey
Theo Wubbels
6 Academic leadership: careerism with a sense of calling
Peter P. Grimmett
PART III
A focus on leading in teacher education
7 The dean as cultural leader
Michael Schratz
8 Beyond the campus: a dean’s “external roles” and the impact on college priorities
Donna L. Wiseman
9 The art of diplomacy: looking back at the position as Head of Teacher Education
Kari Smith
PART IV
Learning when to leave
10 Outside the circle of knowing: life beyond the dean’s office
Geoffrey E. Mills
11 The impossible dream: doing deanship with pessimistic optimism
Jennifer M. Gore
12 Deaning: duty and desire
Cheryl J. Craig and Lily Orland-Barak
Despite deans playing critical roles in education, little is known about the knowledge, skills, and dispositions needed for the job, or the practical dilemmas they face on an almost daily basis. Each chapter of this international collection opens the role up for examination and critique, developing a deeper understanding of what it means to be a dean, and offering insights into the transition into the role, managing the daily demands and expectations of it, and what it means to exit the deanship. The book brings being a dean and the leadership inherent in the position into sharp focus based on international perspectives on doing the job.
Table Of Content:
PART I
Understanding self in relation to role
1 A process of change: the transition to becoming a dean
John Loughran
2 At your service: an associate dean’s role
Renée T. Clift
3 A dean’s roles in different contexts: simply a matter of boundary crossing?
Douwe Beijaard
PART II
Explicating leadership
4 Fortress days—1,278 of them
Peter Gronn
5 Twenty-five years of deaning: a colourful journey
Theo Wubbels
6 Academic leadership: careerism with a sense of calling
Peter P. Grimmett
PART III
A focus on leading in teacher education
7 The dean as cultural leader
Michael Schratz
8 Beyond the campus: a dean’s “external roles” and the impact on college priorities
Donna L. Wiseman
9 The art of diplomacy: looking back at the position as Head of Teacher Education
Kari Smith
PART IV
Learning when to leave
10 Outside the circle of knowing: life beyond the dean’s office
Geoffrey E. Mills
11 The impossible dream: doing deanship with pessimistic optimism
Jennifer M. Gore
12 Deaning: duty and desire
Cheryl J. Craig and Lily Orland-Barak
Additional Info:
A 13 page document from Stanford University's Center for Teaching and Learning, including short pithy, creative, and encouraging "Ten Commandments" of best practices (pdf).
A 13 page document from Stanford University's Center for Teaching and Learning, including short pithy, creative, and encouraging "Ten Commandments" of best practices (pdf).
Additional Info:
A 13 page document from Stanford University's Center for Teaching and Learning, including short pithy, creative, and encouraging "Ten Commandments" of best practices (pdf).
A 13 page document from Stanford University's Center for Teaching and Learning, including short pithy, creative, and encouraging "Ten Commandments" of best practices (pdf).
Additional Info:
Immerse yourself in exploring the heart of teacher leadership!
Practicing the art of teacher leadership requires self-reflection, creativity, and discipline. This comprehensive reader brings together the top voices in the field, encouraging teacher leaders to examine the tensions in their practice. Edited by recognized leadership experts Richard H. Ackerman (author of The Wounded Leader) and Sarah V. Mackenzie, this must-have resource contains classic essays and contemporary gems that ...
Immerse yourself in exploring the heart of teacher leadership!
Practicing the art of teacher leadership requires self-reflection, creativity, and discipline. This comprehensive reader brings together the top voices in the field, encouraging teacher leaders to examine the tensions in their practice. Edited by recognized leadership experts Richard H. Ackerman (author of The Wounded Leader) and Sarah V. Mackenzie, this must-have resource contains classic essays and contemporary gems that ...
Additional Info:
Immerse yourself in exploring the heart of teacher leadership!
Practicing the art of teacher leadership requires self-reflection, creativity, and discipline. This comprehensive reader brings together the top voices in the field, encouraging teacher leaders to examine the tensions in their practice. Edited by recognized leadership experts Richard H. Ackerman (author of The Wounded Leader) and Sarah V. Mackenzie, this must-have resource contains classic essays and contemporary gems that explore teacher leadership in insightful and surprising ways.
This well-organized compendium features stories and lessons from teacher leaders that explore current issues, underlying feelings, and fresh perspectives. Within a five-part structure, each section begins with an introduction and closes with questions designed to encourage reflection and discussion. Readers will be able to use
* Stories, essays, and research findings for insight and exploration
* Protocols to structure conversations about common issues
* Ideas for inspiring and motivating other educators to examine and improve their practices
* Contributions from teacher leader experts such as Roland Barth, Barnett Barry, Mary Dietz, Gordon A. Donaldson Jr., Michael Fullan, Sam M. Intrator, Marilyn Katzenmeyter, Linda Lambert, Ann Liebermann, Gayle Moller, and many more
Revealing the inner world of teacher leaders will prompt readers to think more deeply about their own leadership. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
Part I: Looking at Teacher Leadership
ch. 1. Surprising Outcomes or Why Do They Read Macbeth (Elizabeth Wiley)
ch. 2. The Teacher Leader (Roland S. Barth)
ch. 3. What Research Says About Teacher Leadership - Ann Lieberman (Lynne Miller)
ch. 4. Teachers as Leaders: Emergence of a New Paradigm (Frank Crowther, Stephen S. Kaagan, Margaret Ferguson, and Leonne Hann)
ch. 5. Honoring the Uniqueness of Teacher Leaders (Marilyn Katzenmeyer and Gayle Moller)
ch. 6. I'm Not Like You (Laura Reasoner Jones)
Questions for Reflection and Conversation
Part II: Teacher Leaders Everywhere
ch. 7. Teacher Professionalism: Diamonds on the Souls of Her Shoes (Nancy Flanagan)
ch. 8. Leadership to the Fore (Michael Fullan)
ch. 9. Teaching as Leading (Linda Lambert, Michelle Collay, Mary E. Dietz, Karen Kent, and Anna Ershler Richert)
ch. 10. What Teachers Bring to Leadership: The Distinctive Assets of Teachers Who Lead (Gordan A. Donaldson, Jr.)
ch. 11. Leading From the Parking Lot (Barbara H. White)
Questions for Reflection and Conversation
Part III: The Heart of Teacher Leaders
ch. 12. The Courage to Lead (Todd West)
ch. 13. On the Balcony (Kathy Stockford)
ch. 14. Teacher Leadership: Noble Aspiration or Myth? (Hank Ogilby)
ch. 15. The Golden Rule of Leadership (Samuel Moring)
ch. 16. A Year in the Life of a Teacher Leader: Enacting Core Beliefs (Terry Young)
ch. 17. Works Well With Others: The Nurturing of a Teacher Leader (Barbara McGillicuddy Bolton)
ch. 18. The Code of Silence (Betsy Webb)
ch. 19. Confessions of a Teacher Leader (Liz Murray)
ch. 20. Reaching Out to Parents (Deborah Vose)
ch. 21. A Roaring Silence (Wendy Lessard)
ch. 22. Education's Glass Ceiling (William Ferriter)
ch. 23. Learning in the Risk Zone (Stephanie Marshall)
ch. 24. Hard Lessons About Leadership (Jennifer Ribeiro)
ch. 25. I, Leader (Gary Chapin)
Questions for Reflection and Conversation
Part IV: Keeping the Teacher in the Leader
ch. 26. Looking Within: A Principal's Thoughts About Teacher Leadership (George F. Marnik)
ch. 27. Taking on Teacher Leadership: A Foray Into Netherland (JoAnne C. Dowd)
ch. 28. To Lead or Not to Lead? A Quandary for Newly Tenured Teachers (Morgaen L. Donaldson)
ch. 29. The Continuum of Leadership Development: Teacher Leaders Move to Administration (Sarah V. Mackenzie)
ch. 30. Working Together Through Learning-Oriented Leadership: Promising Practices for Supporting Teacher Leadership and Growth (Eleanor E. Drago-Severson)
ch. 31. Encouraging Districtwide Teacher Leadership (Mary Ann Minard)
Questions for Reflection and Conversation
Part V: Nuturing Teacher Leaders
ch. 32. It Isn't Just a Dream (Linda Bowe)
ch. 33. The Heart of Teaching: Making the Connection Between Teaching, Leadership, and Inner Life (Sam M. Intrator)
ch. 34. Learning and Growing From Convening: A Context for Reflecting on Teacher Practice (Eleanor E. Drago-Severson, Jennifer Roloff Welch, and Anne E. Jones)
ch. 35. America's Teaching Profession and the Teacher Leaders Network (Barnett Berry and John Norton)
ch. 36. Teacher Leaders Redefining the Status Quo Through Critical Friends Groups (Deborah Bambino)
ch. 37. The Paradox of Teacher Leadership (Jed Frank Lippard)
ch. 38. The Times They Are A-changing (Martha McFarland Williams)
Questions for Reflection and Conversation
Part VI: Conclusion
ch. 39. (How) Can a New Vision of Teacher Leadership Be Fulfilled? (Sarah V. Mackenzie)
ch. 40. Leading From the Back (Richard H. Ackerman)
Index
About the Editors
About the Contributors
Immerse yourself in exploring the heart of teacher leadership!
Practicing the art of teacher leadership requires self-reflection, creativity, and discipline. This comprehensive reader brings together the top voices in the field, encouraging teacher leaders to examine the tensions in their practice. Edited by recognized leadership experts Richard H. Ackerman (author of The Wounded Leader) and Sarah V. Mackenzie, this must-have resource contains classic essays and contemporary gems that explore teacher leadership in insightful and surprising ways.
This well-organized compendium features stories and lessons from teacher leaders that explore current issues, underlying feelings, and fresh perspectives. Within a five-part structure, each section begins with an introduction and closes with questions designed to encourage reflection and discussion. Readers will be able to use
* Stories, essays, and research findings for insight and exploration
* Protocols to structure conversations about common issues
* Ideas for inspiring and motivating other educators to examine and improve their practices
* Contributions from teacher leader experts such as Roland Barth, Barnett Barry, Mary Dietz, Gordon A. Donaldson Jr., Michael Fullan, Sam M. Intrator, Marilyn Katzenmeyter, Linda Lambert, Ann Liebermann, Gayle Moller, and many more
Revealing the inner world of teacher leaders will prompt readers to think more deeply about their own leadership. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
Part I: Looking at Teacher Leadership
ch. 1. Surprising Outcomes or Why Do They Read Macbeth (Elizabeth Wiley)
ch. 2. The Teacher Leader (Roland S. Barth)
ch. 3. What Research Says About Teacher Leadership - Ann Lieberman (Lynne Miller)
ch. 4. Teachers as Leaders: Emergence of a New Paradigm (Frank Crowther, Stephen S. Kaagan, Margaret Ferguson, and Leonne Hann)
ch. 5. Honoring the Uniqueness of Teacher Leaders (Marilyn Katzenmeyer and Gayle Moller)
ch. 6. I'm Not Like You (Laura Reasoner Jones)
Questions for Reflection and Conversation
Part II: Teacher Leaders Everywhere
ch. 7. Teacher Professionalism: Diamonds on the Souls of Her Shoes (Nancy Flanagan)
ch. 8. Leadership to the Fore (Michael Fullan)
ch. 9. Teaching as Leading (Linda Lambert, Michelle Collay, Mary E. Dietz, Karen Kent, and Anna Ershler Richert)
ch. 10. What Teachers Bring to Leadership: The Distinctive Assets of Teachers Who Lead (Gordan A. Donaldson, Jr.)
ch. 11. Leading From the Parking Lot (Barbara H. White)
Questions for Reflection and Conversation
Part III: The Heart of Teacher Leaders
ch. 12. The Courage to Lead (Todd West)
ch. 13. On the Balcony (Kathy Stockford)
ch. 14. Teacher Leadership: Noble Aspiration or Myth? (Hank Ogilby)
ch. 15. The Golden Rule of Leadership (Samuel Moring)
ch. 16. A Year in the Life of a Teacher Leader: Enacting Core Beliefs (Terry Young)
ch. 17. Works Well With Others: The Nurturing of a Teacher Leader (Barbara McGillicuddy Bolton)
ch. 18. The Code of Silence (Betsy Webb)
ch. 19. Confessions of a Teacher Leader (Liz Murray)
ch. 20. Reaching Out to Parents (Deborah Vose)
ch. 21. A Roaring Silence (Wendy Lessard)
ch. 22. Education's Glass Ceiling (William Ferriter)
ch. 23. Learning in the Risk Zone (Stephanie Marshall)
ch. 24. Hard Lessons About Leadership (Jennifer Ribeiro)
ch. 25. I, Leader (Gary Chapin)
Questions for Reflection and Conversation
Part IV: Keeping the Teacher in the Leader
ch. 26. Looking Within: A Principal's Thoughts About Teacher Leadership (George F. Marnik)
ch. 27. Taking on Teacher Leadership: A Foray Into Netherland (JoAnne C. Dowd)
ch. 28. To Lead or Not to Lead? A Quandary for Newly Tenured Teachers (Morgaen L. Donaldson)
ch. 29. The Continuum of Leadership Development: Teacher Leaders Move to Administration (Sarah V. Mackenzie)
ch. 30. Working Together Through Learning-Oriented Leadership: Promising Practices for Supporting Teacher Leadership and Growth (Eleanor E. Drago-Severson)
ch. 31. Encouraging Districtwide Teacher Leadership (Mary Ann Minard)
Questions for Reflection and Conversation
Part V: Nuturing Teacher Leaders
ch. 32. It Isn't Just a Dream (Linda Bowe)
ch. 33. The Heart of Teaching: Making the Connection Between Teaching, Leadership, and Inner Life (Sam M. Intrator)
ch. 34. Learning and Growing From Convening: A Context for Reflecting on Teacher Practice (Eleanor E. Drago-Severson, Jennifer Roloff Welch, and Anne E. Jones)
ch. 35. America's Teaching Profession and the Teacher Leaders Network (Barnett Berry and John Norton)
ch. 36. Teacher Leaders Redefining the Status Quo Through Critical Friends Groups (Deborah Bambino)
ch. 37. The Paradox of Teacher Leadership (Jed Frank Lippard)
ch. 38. The Times They Are A-changing (Martha McFarland Williams)
Questions for Reflection and Conversation
Part VI: Conclusion
ch. 39. (How) Can a New Vision of Teacher Leadership Be Fulfilled? (Sarah V. Mackenzie)
ch. 40. Leading From the Back (Richard H. Ackerman)
Index
About the Editors
About the Contributors
Cultivating Communities of Practice: A Guide to Managing Knowledge
Additional Info:
In Cultivating Communities of Practice, Etienne Wenger, Richard McDermott, and William M. Snyder argue that while communities form naturally, organizations need to become more proactive and systematic about developing and integrating them into their strategy. This book provides practical models and methods for stewarding these communities to reach their full potential - without squelching the inner drive that makes them so valuable. (From the Publisher)
In Cultivating Communities of Practice, Etienne Wenger, Richard McDermott, and William M. Snyder argue that while communities form naturally, organizations need to become more proactive and systematic about developing and integrating them into their strategy. This book provides practical models and methods for stewarding these communities to reach their full potential - without squelching the inner drive that makes them so valuable. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
In Cultivating Communities of Practice, Etienne Wenger, Richard McDermott, and William M. Snyder argue that while communities form naturally, organizations need to become more proactive and systematic about developing and integrating them into their strategy. This book provides practical models and methods for stewarding these communities to reach their full potential - without squelching the inner drive that makes them so valuable. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Communities of Practice and Their Value to Organizations
ch. 2 Communities of Practice and Their Structural Elements
ch. 3 Seven Principles for Cultivating Communities of Practice
ch. 4 The Early Stages of Development: Planning and Launching Communities of Practice
ch. 5 The Mature Stages of Development: Growing and Sustaining Communities of Practice
ch. 6 The Challenge of Distributed Communities
ch. 7 The Downside of Communities of Practice
ch. 8 Measuring and Managing Value Creation
ch. 9 Community-Based Knowledge Initiatives
ch. 10 Reweaving the World: Communities beyond Organizations
Notes
Bibliography
Index
About the Authors
In Cultivating Communities of Practice, Etienne Wenger, Richard McDermott, and William M. Snyder argue that while communities form naturally, organizations need to become more proactive and systematic about developing and integrating them into their strategy. This book provides practical models and methods for stewarding these communities to reach their full potential - without squelching the inner drive that makes them so valuable. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Communities of Practice and Their Value to Organizations
ch. 2 Communities of Practice and Their Structural Elements
ch. 3 Seven Principles for Cultivating Communities of Practice
ch. 4 The Early Stages of Development: Planning and Launching Communities of Practice
ch. 5 The Mature Stages of Development: Growing and Sustaining Communities of Practice
ch. 6 The Challenge of Distributed Communities
ch. 7 The Downside of Communities of Practice
ch. 8 Measuring and Managing Value Creation
ch. 9 Community-Based Knowledge Initiatives
ch. 10 Reweaving the World: Communities beyond Organizations
Notes
Bibliography
Index
About the Authors
Dynamic Discernment: Reason, Emotion, and Power in Change Leadership
Additional Info:
In order to fulfill their missions, institutions sometimes have to change. Leaders guiding communities through such moments or eras need instructional resources, and we do them a disservice when we oversimplify the work of change leadership. “Ten Easy Solutions” do not exist, and suggesting they do causes leaders to feel discouraged, like there must be something wrong with them when they fear, falter, or fail. Change leadership is hard, sometimes ...
In order to fulfill their missions, institutions sometimes have to change. Leaders guiding communities through such moments or eras need instructional resources, and we do them a disservice when we oversimplify the work of change leadership. “Ten Easy Solutions” do not exist, and suggesting they do causes leaders to feel discouraged, like there must be something wrong with them when they fear, falter, or fail. Change leadership is hard, sometimes ...
Additional Info:
In order to fulfill their missions, institutions sometimes have to change. Leaders guiding communities through such moments or eras need instructional resources, and we do them a disservice when we oversimplify the work of change leadership. “Ten Easy Solutions” do not exist, and suggesting they do causes leaders to feel discouraged, like there must be something wrong with them when they fear, falter, or fail. Change leadership is hard, sometimes even painful, but it is not impossible when approached with appreciation for complexity and a broad repertoire. Dynamic Discernment: Reason, Emotion, and Power in Change Leadership chops through the thicket of change dynamics, opening up three different pathways:
• Reason, where change leaders educate their communities and plot out concrete actions;
• Emotion, where leaders manage the reactivity that change can incite in a separate-yet-connected style of engagement; and
• Power, where leaders take seriously the ways in which grass-roots and top-down forms of authority can find common ground. Sarah Drummond has experienced change leadership firsthand in numerous contexts, and this book uses abundant illustrations and examples, but Dynamic Discernment is best understood as a new and multidisciplinary theory of change. Although aimed at religious leaders, any who serve a mission-driven institution will find resonance. The book provides guidance for (1) recognizing the dominant dynamic at work in a community experiencing change and (2) choosing leadership practices accordingly. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Ch 1. How We Think about Change
Ch 2. Reason
Ch 3. Emotion
Ch 4. Power
Ch 5. Discernment on the Leadership Terrain
Acknowledgements
Bibliography
In order to fulfill their missions, institutions sometimes have to change. Leaders guiding communities through such moments or eras need instructional resources, and we do them a disservice when we oversimplify the work of change leadership. “Ten Easy Solutions” do not exist, and suggesting they do causes leaders to feel discouraged, like there must be something wrong with them when they fear, falter, or fail. Change leadership is hard, sometimes even painful, but it is not impossible when approached with appreciation for complexity and a broad repertoire. Dynamic Discernment: Reason, Emotion, and Power in Change Leadership chops through the thicket of change dynamics, opening up three different pathways:
• Reason, where change leaders educate their communities and plot out concrete actions;
• Emotion, where leaders manage the reactivity that change can incite in a separate-yet-connected style of engagement; and
• Power, where leaders take seriously the ways in which grass-roots and top-down forms of authority can find common ground. Sarah Drummond has experienced change leadership firsthand in numerous contexts, and this book uses abundant illustrations and examples, but Dynamic Discernment is best understood as a new and multidisciplinary theory of change. Although aimed at religious leaders, any who serve a mission-driven institution will find resonance. The book provides guidance for (1) recognizing the dominant dynamic at work in a community experiencing change and (2) choosing leadership practices accordingly. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Ch 1. How We Think about Change
Ch 2. Reason
Ch 3. Emotion
Ch 4. Power
Ch 5. Discernment on the Leadership Terrain
Acknowledgements
Bibliography
Additional Info:
This article argues that good practice in teaching and learning in the English-speaking world may be compromised by structural changes in the higher education system. The impact of these changes is, however, affected by leadership practices and working cultures at the departmental level. These can, it is argued, assist in the development of 'deeper' teaching and learning practices even in a context which may be seen as unfavourable to them. ...
This article argues that good practice in teaching and learning in the English-speaking world may be compromised by structural changes in the higher education system. The impact of these changes is, however, affected by leadership practices and working cultures at the departmental level. These can, it is argued, assist in the development of 'deeper' teaching and learning practices even in a context which may be seen as unfavourable to them. ...
Additional Info:
This article argues that good practice in teaching and learning in the English-speaking world may be compromised by structural changes in the higher education system. The impact of these changes is, however, affected by leadership practices and working cultures at the departmental level. These can, it is argued, assist in the development of 'deeper' teaching and learning practices even in a context which may be seen as unfavourable to them. Rejecting simplistic notions of transformational leadership and organisational cultural engineering, the article identifies activity systems at the local, departmental, level as the central loci of changes in approaches to and recurrent practices in teaching and learning. Desirable change is most likely to be achieved in collective and collaborative ways, which means that change processes are contingent and contextualised, and that outcomes are unpredictable and fuzzy. The data in this article come from in-depth interviews with academics in England and Canada; from one author's previous studies; and from literatures on faculty's work environments in English-speaking countries.
This article argues that good practice in teaching and learning in the English-speaking world may be compromised by structural changes in the higher education system. The impact of these changes is, however, affected by leadership practices and working cultures at the departmental level. These can, it is argued, assist in the development of 'deeper' teaching and learning practices even in a context which may be seen as unfavourable to them. Rejecting simplistic notions of transformational leadership and organisational cultural engineering, the article identifies activity systems at the local, departmental, level as the central loci of changes in approaches to and recurrent practices in teaching and learning. Desirable change is most likely to be achieved in collective and collaborative ways, which means that change processes are contingent and contextualised, and that outcomes are unpredictable and fuzzy. The data in this article come from in-depth interviews with academics in England and Canada; from one author's previous studies; and from literatures on faculty's work environments in English-speaking countries.
Communities of Practice: Learning, Meaning, and Identity
Additional Info:
Communities of Practice presents a theory of learning that starts with this assumption: engagement in social practice is the fundamental process by which we learn and so become who we are. The primary unit of analysis of this process is neither the individual nor social institutions but rather the informal "communities of practice" that people form as they pursue shared enterprises over time. In order to give a social account ...
Communities of Practice presents a theory of learning that starts with this assumption: engagement in social practice is the fundamental process by which we learn and so become who we are. The primary unit of analysis of this process is neither the individual nor social institutions but rather the informal "communities of practice" that people form as they pursue shared enterprises over time. In order to give a social account ...
Additional Info:
Communities of Practice presents a theory of learning that starts with this assumption: engagement in social practice is the fundamental process by which we learn and so become who we are. The primary unit of analysis of this process is neither the individual nor social institutions but rather the informal "communities of practice" that people form as they pursue shared enterprises over time. In order to give a social account of learning, the theory explores in a systematic way the intersection of issues of community, social practice, meaning, and identity. The result is a broad conceptual framework for thinking about learning as a process of social participation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series foreword
Acknowledgments
Prologue: Contexts
Introduction: A social theory of learning
Pt. I Practice
Intro I The concept of practice
ch. 1 Meaning
ch. 2 Community
ch. 3 Learning
ch. 4 Boundary
ch. 5 Locality
Coda I Knowing in practice
Pt. II Identity
Intro II A focus on identity
ch. 6 Identity in practice
ch. 7 Participation and non-participation
ch. 8 Modes of belonging
ch. 9 Identification and negotiability
Coda II Learning communities
Epilogue: Design
Synopsis: Design for learning
ch. 10 Learning Architectures
ch. 11 Organizations
ch. 12 Education
Notes
Bibliography
Index
Communities of Practice presents a theory of learning that starts with this assumption: engagement in social practice is the fundamental process by which we learn and so become who we are. The primary unit of analysis of this process is neither the individual nor social institutions but rather the informal "communities of practice" that people form as they pursue shared enterprises over time. In order to give a social account of learning, the theory explores in a systematic way the intersection of issues of community, social practice, meaning, and identity. The result is a broad conceptual framework for thinking about learning as a process of social participation. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Series foreword
Acknowledgments
Prologue: Contexts
Introduction: A social theory of learning
Pt. I Practice
Intro I The concept of practice
ch. 1 Meaning
ch. 2 Community
ch. 3 Learning
ch. 4 Boundary
ch. 5 Locality
Coda I Knowing in practice
Pt. II Identity
Intro II A focus on identity
ch. 6 Identity in practice
ch. 7 Participation and non-participation
ch. 8 Modes of belonging
ch. 9 Identification and negotiability
Coda II Learning communities
Epilogue: Design
Synopsis: Design for learning
ch. 10 Learning Architectures
ch. 11 Organizations
ch. 12 Education
Notes
Bibliography
Index
Additional Info:
A quarterly bulletin published online (subscription restrictions) by Wiley-Blackwell, for chairs, deans, academic vice presidents, and other administrators, Practical information, written by practitioners from their own experience.
A quarterly bulletin published online (subscription restrictions) by Wiley-Blackwell, for chairs, deans, academic vice presidents, and other administrators, Practical information, written by practitioners from their own experience.
Additional Info:
A quarterly bulletin published online (subscription restrictions) by Wiley-Blackwell, for chairs, deans, academic vice presidents, and other administrators, Practical information, written by practitioners from their own experience.
A quarterly bulletin published online (subscription restrictions) by Wiley-Blackwell, for chairs, deans, academic vice presidents, and other administrators, Practical information, written by practitioners from their own experience.
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
Servant Leadership for Higher Education: Principles and Practices
Additional Info:
If higher education is to fulfill its mission, the academy must continue to emphasize the ideals of thought, reflection, and development as well as action. This book stresses the importance of understanding that service is a pre-requisite to leadership. This practical book contains leadership principles and strategies and is based on research and best practice. The book is organized around ten principles of servant leadership and how these principles apply ...
If higher education is to fulfill its mission, the academy must continue to emphasize the ideals of thought, reflection, and development as well as action. This book stresses the importance of understanding that service is a pre-requisite to leadership. This practical book contains leadership principles and strategies and is based on research and best practice. The book is organized around ten principles of servant leadership and how these principles apply ...
Additional Info:
If higher education is to fulfill its mission, the academy must continue to emphasize the ideals of thought, reflection, and development as well as action. This book stresses the importance of understanding that service is a pre-requisite to leadership. This practical book contains leadership principles and strategies and is based on research and best practice. The book is organized around ten principles of servant leadership and how these principles apply to common issues faced in departments and institutions of higher education. The situations addressed are representative so that it is easy to see how the principles apply to other concerns or issues. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Unsuccessful Leadership Models
ch. 2 Servant Leadership: A Philosophy of Living
ch. 3 Servant Leadership Principles
ch. 4 Principle One: Service to Others Is the Highest Priority
ch. 5 Principle Two: Facilitate Meeting the Needs of Others
ch. 6 Principle Three: Foster Problem Solving and Taking Responsibility at All Levels
ch. 7 Principle Four: Promote Emotional Healing in People and the Organization
ch. 8 Principle Five: Means Are as Important as Ends
ch. 9 Principle Six: Keep One Eye on the Present and One on the Future
ch. 10 Principle Seven: Embrace Paradoxes and Dilemmas
ch. 11 Principle Eight: Leave a Legacy to Society
ch. 12 Principle Nine: Model Servant Leadership
ch. 13 Principle Ten: Develop More Servant Leaders
ch. 14 Care and Feeding of Servant Leaders
ch. 15 Some Common Questions (Myths) Regarding Servant Leadership
Epilogue
References
The Author
Index
If higher education is to fulfill its mission, the academy must continue to emphasize the ideals of thought, reflection, and development as well as action. This book stresses the importance of understanding that service is a pre-requisite to leadership. This practical book contains leadership principles and strategies and is based on research and best practice. The book is organized around ten principles of servant leadership and how these principles apply to common issues faced in departments and institutions of higher education. The situations addressed are representative so that it is easy to see how the principles apply to other concerns or issues. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Preface
Acknowledgments
Introduction
ch. 1 Unsuccessful Leadership Models
ch. 2 Servant Leadership: A Philosophy of Living
ch. 3 Servant Leadership Principles
ch. 4 Principle One: Service to Others Is the Highest Priority
ch. 5 Principle Two: Facilitate Meeting the Needs of Others
ch. 6 Principle Three: Foster Problem Solving and Taking Responsibility at All Levels
ch. 7 Principle Four: Promote Emotional Healing in People and the Organization
ch. 8 Principle Five: Means Are as Important as Ends
ch. 9 Principle Six: Keep One Eye on the Present and One on the Future
ch. 10 Principle Seven: Embrace Paradoxes and Dilemmas
ch. 11 Principle Eight: Leave a Legacy to Society
ch. 12 Principle Nine: Model Servant Leadership
ch. 13 Principle Ten: Develop More Servant Leaders
ch. 14 Care and Feeding of Servant Leaders
ch. 15 Some Common Questions (Myths) Regarding Servant Leadership
Epilogue
References
The Author
Index
Leadership Case Studies in Education
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Leadership Case Studies in Education looks at leadership through the eyes of educators. The text examines how the major theories and models of leadership apply to education. Taking a clear, concise, and informative approach, Peter G. Northouse, Marie Lee, and contributors from all levels of the education discipline provide readers with ...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Leadership Case Studies in Education looks at leadership through the eyes of educators. The text examines how the major theories and models of leadership apply to education. Taking a clear, concise, and informative approach, Peter G. Northouse, Marie Lee, and contributors from all levels of the education discipline provide readers with ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Leadership Case Studies in Education looks at leadership through the eyes of educators. The text examines how the major theories and models of leadership apply to education. Taking a clear, concise, and informative approach, Peter G. Northouse, Marie Lee, and contributors from all levels of the education discipline provide readers with real-world case studies that illustrate the complex leadership challenges and issues facing educators today. Engaging, practical, and relevant, Leadership Case Studies in Education is the perfect companion for educational leadership courses. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 Trait Approach
ch. 3 Skills Approach
ch. 4 Behavioral Approach
ch. 5 Situational Approach
ch. 6 Path-Goal Theory
ch. 7 Leader-Member Exchange Theory
ch. 8 Transformational Leadership
ch. 9 Authentic Leadership
ch. 10 Servant Leadership
ch. 11 Adaptive Leadership
ch. 12 Psychodynamic Approach
ch. 13 Leadership Ethnics
ch. 14 Team Leadership
ch. 15 Gender and Leadership
ch. 16 Cultural and Leadership
Index
About the Authors
About the Contributors
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Leadership Case Studies in Education looks at leadership through the eyes of educators. The text examines how the major theories and models of leadership apply to education. Taking a clear, concise, and informative approach, Peter G. Northouse, Marie Lee, and contributors from all levels of the education discipline provide readers with real-world case studies that illustrate the complex leadership challenges and issues facing educators today. Engaging, practical, and relevant, Leadership Case Studies in Education is the perfect companion for educational leadership courses. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
ch. 1 Introduction
ch. 2 Trait Approach
ch. 3 Skills Approach
ch. 4 Behavioral Approach
ch. 5 Situational Approach
ch. 6 Path-Goal Theory
ch. 7 Leader-Member Exchange Theory
ch. 8 Transformational Leadership
ch. 9 Authentic Leadership
ch. 10 Servant Leadership
ch. 11 Adaptive Leadership
ch. 12 Psychodynamic Approach
ch. 13 Leadership Ethnics
ch. 14 Team Leadership
ch. 15 Gender and Leadership
ch. 16 Cultural and Leadership
Index
About the Authors
About the Contributors
The How To Grants Manual: Successful Grantseeking Techniques for Obtaining Public and Private Grants, 8th Edition
Additional Info:
This book breaks down the sometimes overwhelming and difficult task of creating a successful grant winning proposal into a series of clear and definable steps that lead to grant success. The implementation of these pro-active grant steps results in government, foundation and corporate grants success.
Whether you are with a non-profit organization, a school district, or an institution of higher education, this step-by-step process will demystify the grants ...
This book breaks down the sometimes overwhelming and difficult task of creating a successful grant winning proposal into a series of clear and definable steps that lead to grant success. The implementation of these pro-active grant steps results in government, foundation and corporate grants success.
Whether you are with a non-profit organization, a school district, or an institution of higher education, this step-by-step process will demystify the grants ...
Additional Info:
This book breaks down the sometimes overwhelming and difficult task of creating a successful grant winning proposal into a series of clear and definable steps that lead to grant success. The implementation of these pro-active grant steps results in government, foundation and corporate grants success.
Whether you are with a non-profit organization, a school district, or an institution of higher education, this step-by-step process will demystify the grants process and help you become a confident and knowledgeable grantseeker.
Researching the grantor, reviewing previously funded proposals, and making pre-proposal contact with the funding source are just a few of the pro-active steps that will help to assure you that what you propose is right for the grantor and that the grantor should therefore select you to fund. The exhibits/worksheets in The “How To” Grants Manual further support this successful system.
Revisions to grant-seeking strategies have caused the author, working with grantors and advisory groups, to retool the manual's worksheets and communications templates. These extremely useful supplementary materials are available to students and instructors, contact textbooks@rowman.com for details.
If your organization or institution wants to increase your success in attracting grants, this book if for you. From operating grants to technology to research, this book will help you outline your plan for success. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Exhibits, Figures, and Tables
Introduction
Part 1: Getting Ready to Seek Grant Support for You and Your Organization
ch. 1 Grant Seeking Pitfalls and Potential Hazards
ch. 2 Your Plan for Grants Success and How to Get There
ch. 3 Creating a Success Based Proactive Grants System
ch. 4 ntegrating Time Management into a Successful Grants Career
ch. 5 Searching the Literature to Document Your Project’s Statement of Need: Creating and Urgent and Compelling Case
ch. 6 Developing and Evaluating Alternative Solutions
ch. 7 Creating Key Search Terms to Identify the Best Grantor(s): Redefining Your Project and Improving Your Research/Grants Profile
ch. 8 Capitalizing on Your Capabilities
ch. 9 Forming Grant-Winning Teams and Consortia: Recruiting Volunteers for Advisory Groups
ch. 10 Documenting Organizational Support for Your Proposal: Preproposal Approval
ch. 11 Where the Money Is: Selecting the Right Marketplace for Your Project
Part 2: Public/Government Funding Opportunities
ch. 12 Understanding the Government Grants Marketplace
ch. 13 Researching the Federal Government Marketplace
ch. 14 Completing Your Research and Contacting Government Grantors, Past Grantees, and Past Reviewers to Increase Your Success Rate
ch. 15 Planning the Successful Federal Proposal
ch. 16 Improving Your Federal Proposal: The Grants Quality Circle
ch. 17 Submission
ch. 18 Federal Grant Requirements
ch. 19 Dealing with the Decision of Public Funding Sources
ch. 20 Follow-Up with Government Funding Sources
Part 3: Private/Foundation Funding Opportunities
ch. 21 Understanding the Foundation Grants Marketplace
ch. 22 Researching Potential Private Foundation Grantors: How to Find the Foundation That Is Best Suited to Fund Your Project
ch. 23 Contacting a Private Foundation Before Submission
ch. 24 Applying for Private Foundation Funds: Letter of Inquiry and Letter Proposal
ch. 25 Quality Circles, Proposal Submission, the Decision, and Follow-Up: Private Foundation Funding Sources
Part 4: Private/Corporate Funding Opportunities
ch. 26 Understanding the Corporate Grants Marketplace
ch. 27 Researching Corporate Grantors: How to Find the Corporate Funding Source That Is Best Suited to Fund Your Project
ch. 28 Preproposal Contact with Corporate Grantors
ch. 29 Applying for Corporate Funds
ch. 30 Corporate Proposal Submission, the Decision, and Follow-Up
ch. 31 Putting It All Together to Work for You
List of Resources
Index
About the Author
This book breaks down the sometimes overwhelming and difficult task of creating a successful grant winning proposal into a series of clear and definable steps that lead to grant success. The implementation of these pro-active grant steps results in government, foundation and corporate grants success.
Whether you are with a non-profit organization, a school district, or an institution of higher education, this step-by-step process will demystify the grants process and help you become a confident and knowledgeable grantseeker.
Researching the grantor, reviewing previously funded proposals, and making pre-proposal contact with the funding source are just a few of the pro-active steps that will help to assure you that what you propose is right for the grantor and that the grantor should therefore select you to fund. The exhibits/worksheets in The “How To” Grants Manual further support this successful system.
Revisions to grant-seeking strategies have caused the author, working with grantors and advisory groups, to retool the manual's worksheets and communications templates. These extremely useful supplementary materials are available to students and instructors, contact textbooks@rowman.com for details.
If your organization or institution wants to increase your success in attracting grants, this book if for you. From operating grants to technology to research, this book will help you outline your plan for success. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
List of Exhibits, Figures, and Tables
Introduction
Part 1: Getting Ready to Seek Grant Support for You and Your Organization
ch. 1 Grant Seeking Pitfalls and Potential Hazards
ch. 2 Your Plan for Grants Success and How to Get There
ch. 3 Creating a Success Based Proactive Grants System
ch. 4 ntegrating Time Management into a Successful Grants Career
ch. 5 Searching the Literature to Document Your Project’s Statement of Need: Creating and Urgent and Compelling Case
ch. 6 Developing and Evaluating Alternative Solutions
ch. 7 Creating Key Search Terms to Identify the Best Grantor(s): Redefining Your Project and Improving Your Research/Grants Profile
ch. 8 Capitalizing on Your Capabilities
ch. 9 Forming Grant-Winning Teams and Consortia: Recruiting Volunteers for Advisory Groups
ch. 10 Documenting Organizational Support for Your Proposal: Preproposal Approval
ch. 11 Where the Money Is: Selecting the Right Marketplace for Your Project
Part 2: Public/Government Funding Opportunities
ch. 12 Understanding the Government Grants Marketplace
ch. 13 Researching the Federal Government Marketplace
ch. 14 Completing Your Research and Contacting Government Grantors, Past Grantees, and Past Reviewers to Increase Your Success Rate
ch. 15 Planning the Successful Federal Proposal
ch. 16 Improving Your Federal Proposal: The Grants Quality Circle
ch. 17 Submission
ch. 18 Federal Grant Requirements
ch. 19 Dealing with the Decision of Public Funding Sources
ch. 20 Follow-Up with Government Funding Sources
Part 3: Private/Foundation Funding Opportunities
ch. 21 Understanding the Foundation Grants Marketplace
ch. 22 Researching Potential Private Foundation Grantors: How to Find the Foundation That Is Best Suited to Fund Your Project
ch. 23 Contacting a Private Foundation Before Submission
ch. 24 Applying for Private Foundation Funds: Letter of Inquiry and Letter Proposal
ch. 25 Quality Circles, Proposal Submission, the Decision, and Follow-Up: Private Foundation Funding Sources
Part 4: Private/Corporate Funding Opportunities
ch. 26 Understanding the Corporate Grants Marketplace
ch. 27 Researching Corporate Grantors: How to Find the Corporate Funding Source That Is Best Suited to Fund Your Project
ch. 28 Preproposal Contact with Corporate Grantors
ch. 29 Applying for Corporate Funds
ch. 30 Corporate Proposal Submission, the Decision, and Follow-Up
ch. 31 Putting It All Together to Work for You
List of Resources
Index
About the Author
Additional Info:
Links to related short articles on practical topics for establishing and administering a faculty learning community, such as: mission and purpose, curriculum, meetings and activities, administration, and assessment.
Links to related short articles on practical topics for establishing and administering a faculty learning community, such as: mission and purpose, curriculum, meetings and activities, administration, and assessment.
Additional Info:
Links to related short articles on practical topics for establishing and administering a faculty learning community, such as: mission and purpose, curriculum, meetings and activities, administration, and assessment.
Links to related short articles on practical topics for establishing and administering a faculty learning community, such as: mission and purpose, curriculum, meetings and activities, administration, and assessment.
Using Evidence of Student Learning to Improve Higher Education
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Dynamic changes are underway in American higher education. New providers, emerging technologies, cost concerns, student debt, and nagging doubts about quality all call out the need for institutions to show evidence of student learning. From scholars at the National Institute for Learning Outcomes Assessment (NILOA), Using Evidence of Student Learning to ...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Dynamic changes are underway in American higher education. New providers, emerging technologies, cost concerns, student debt, and nagging doubts about quality all call out the need for institutions to show evidence of student learning. From scholars at the National Institute for Learning Outcomes Assessment (NILOA), Using Evidence of Student Learning to ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Dynamic changes are underway in American higher education. New providers, emerging technologies, cost concerns, student debt, and nagging doubts about quality all call out the need for institutions to show evidence of student learning. From scholars at the National Institute for Learning Outcomes Assessment (NILOA), Using Evidence of Student Learning to Improve Higher Education presents a reframed conception and approach to student learning outcomes assessment. The authors explain why it is counterproductive to view collecting and using evidence of student accomplishment as primarily a compliance activity.
Today's circumstances demand a fresh and more strategic approach to the processes by which evidence about student learning is obtained and used to inform efforts to improve teaching, learning, and decision-making. Whether you're in the classroom, an administrative office, or on an assessment committee, data about what students know and are able to do are critical for guiding changes that are needed in institutional policies and practices to improve student learning and success.
Use this book to:
• Understand how and why student learning outcomes assessment can enhance student accomplishment and increase institutional effectiveness
• Shift the view of assessment from being externally driven to internally motivated
• Learn how assessment results can help inform decision-making
• Use assessment data to manage change and improve student success
Gauging student learning is necessary if institutions are to prepare students to meet the 21st century needs of employers and live an economically independent, civically responsible life. For assessment professionals and educational leaders, Using Evidence of Student Learning to Improve Higher Education offers both a compelling rationale and practical advice for making student learning outcomes assessment more effective and efficient. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
About the Authors
ch. 1 From Compliance to Ownership: Why and How Colleges and Universities Assess Student Learning (Stanley O. Ikenberry and George D. Kuh)
PART ONE What Works? Finding and Using Evidence
ch. 2 Evidence of Student Learning: What Counts and What Matters for Improvement (Pat Hutchings, Jillian Kinzie, and George D. Kuh)
ch. 3 Fostering Greater Use of Assessment Results: Principles for Effective Practice (Jillian Kinzie, Pat Hutchings, and Natasha A. Jankowski)
ch. 4 Making Assessment Consequential: Organizing to Yield Results (Jillian Kinzie and Natasha A. Jankowski)
PART TWO Who Cares? Engaging Key Stakeholders
ch. 5 Faculty and Students: Assessment at the Intersection of Teaching and Learning (Timothy Reese Cain and Pat Hutchings)
ch. 6 Leadership in Making Assessment Matter (Peter T. Ewell and Stanley O. Ikenberry)
ch. 7 Accreditation as Opportunity: Serving Two Purposes with Assessment (Peter T. Ewell and Natasha A. Jankowski)
ch. 8 The Bigger Picture: Student Learning Outcomes Assessment and External Entities (Jillian Kinzie, Stanley O. Ikenberry, and Peter T. Ewell)
PART THREE What Now? Focusing Assessment on Learning
ch. 9 Assessment and Initiative Fatigue: Keeping the Focus on Learning (George D. Kuh and Pat Hutchings)
ch. 10 From Compliance Reporting to Effective Communication: Assessment and Transparency (Natasha A. Jankowski and Timothy Reese Cain)
ch. 11 Making Assessment Matter (George D. Kuh, Stanley O. Ikenberry, Natasha A. Jankowski, Timothy Reese Cain, Peter T. Ewell, Pat Hutchings, and Jillian Kinzie)
References
Appendix A: NILOA National Advisory Panel
Appendix B: NILOA Staff, 2008 to 2014
Index
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Dynamic changes are underway in American higher education. New providers, emerging technologies, cost concerns, student debt, and nagging doubts about quality all call out the need for institutions to show evidence of student learning. From scholars at the National Institute for Learning Outcomes Assessment (NILOA), Using Evidence of Student Learning to Improve Higher Education presents a reframed conception and approach to student learning outcomes assessment. The authors explain why it is counterproductive to view collecting and using evidence of student accomplishment as primarily a compliance activity.
Today's circumstances demand a fresh and more strategic approach to the processes by which evidence about student learning is obtained and used to inform efforts to improve teaching, learning, and decision-making. Whether you're in the classroom, an administrative office, or on an assessment committee, data about what students know and are able to do are critical for guiding changes that are needed in institutional policies and practices to improve student learning and success.
Use this book to:
• Understand how and why student learning outcomes assessment can enhance student accomplishment and increase institutional effectiveness
• Shift the view of assessment from being externally driven to internally motivated
• Learn how assessment results can help inform decision-making
• Use assessment data to manage change and improve student success
Gauging student learning is necessary if institutions are to prepare students to meet the 21st century needs of employers and live an economically independent, civically responsible life. For assessment professionals and educational leaders, Using Evidence of Student Learning to Improve Higher Education offers both a compelling rationale and practical advice for making student learning outcomes assessment more effective and efficient. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
About the Authors
ch. 1 From Compliance to Ownership: Why and How Colleges and Universities Assess Student Learning (Stanley O. Ikenberry and George D. Kuh)
PART ONE What Works? Finding and Using Evidence
ch. 2 Evidence of Student Learning: What Counts and What Matters for Improvement (Pat Hutchings, Jillian Kinzie, and George D. Kuh)
ch. 3 Fostering Greater Use of Assessment Results: Principles for Effective Practice (Jillian Kinzie, Pat Hutchings, and Natasha A. Jankowski)
ch. 4 Making Assessment Consequential: Organizing to Yield Results (Jillian Kinzie and Natasha A. Jankowski)
PART TWO Who Cares? Engaging Key Stakeholders
ch. 5 Faculty and Students: Assessment at the Intersection of Teaching and Learning (Timothy Reese Cain and Pat Hutchings)
ch. 6 Leadership in Making Assessment Matter (Peter T. Ewell and Stanley O. Ikenberry)
ch. 7 Accreditation as Opportunity: Serving Two Purposes with Assessment (Peter T. Ewell and Natasha A. Jankowski)
ch. 8 The Bigger Picture: Student Learning Outcomes Assessment and External Entities (Jillian Kinzie, Stanley O. Ikenberry, and Peter T. Ewell)
PART THREE What Now? Focusing Assessment on Learning
ch. 9 Assessment and Initiative Fatigue: Keeping the Focus on Learning (George D. Kuh and Pat Hutchings)
ch. 10 From Compliance Reporting to Effective Communication: Assessment and Transparency (Natasha A. Jankowski and Timothy Reese Cain)
ch. 11 Making Assessment Matter (George D. Kuh, Stanley O. Ikenberry, Natasha A. Jankowski, Timothy Reese Cain, Peter T. Ewell, Pat Hutchings, and Jillian Kinzie)
References
Appendix A: NILOA National Advisory Panel
Appendix B: NILOA Staff, 2008 to 2014
Index
The Breadth of Current Faculty Development: Practitioners' Perspectives: Teaching and Learning
Additional Info:
With pedagogical philosophy and practice changing significantly, faculty development has become much more important.
Each chapter in this volume identifies particular areas of opportunity, and although the authors recognize that not every initiative suggested can be implemented by all institutions—circumstances such as institutional mission, available resources, and governance issues will dictate that—it is their hope that every reader will be able to glean details that might ...
With pedagogical philosophy and practice changing significantly, faculty development has become much more important.
Each chapter in this volume identifies particular areas of opportunity, and although the authors recognize that not every initiative suggested can be implemented by all institutions—circumstances such as institutional mission, available resources, and governance issues will dictate that—it is their hope that every reader will be able to glean details that might ...
Additional Info:
With pedagogical philosophy and practice changing significantly, faculty development has become much more important.
Each chapter in this volume identifies particular areas of opportunity, and although the authors recognize that not every initiative suggested can be implemented by all institutions—circumstances such as institutional mission, available resources, and governance issues will dictate that—it is their hope that every reader will be able to glean details that might provide a spark or fan a flame on campus. As educators themselves, McKee, Johnson, Ritchie, and Tew invite you to consider the challenges, explore the possibilities, and join them on the journey.
This is the 133rd volume of this Jossey-Bass higher education series. New Directions for Teaching and Learning offers a comprehensive range of ideas and techniques for improving college teaching based on the experience of seasoned instructors and the latest findings of educational and psychological researchers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 Setting the Stage for Teaching and Learning in American Higher Education: Making the Case for Faculty Development - This chapter identifies five major shifts in American higher education that are reshaping the necessity of effective, ongoing professional development of the faculty. (C. William McKee, W. Mark Tew)
ch. 2 Professional Development of the Faculty: Past and Present - This chapter reviews the unique contribution of three different faculty development research projects and identifies common themes with which educators have struggled over the past four decades. (C. William, Mitzy Johnson, William F. Ritchie, W. Mark Tew)
ch. 3 Cocreating Value in Teaching and Learning Centers - This chapter presents the history of teaching and learning centers, a snapshot of current practices at leading teaching and learning centers, and the contributions expected in the field of faculty development associated with the ongoing growth of teaching and learning centers. (DAvid W. Schumann, John Peters, taimi Olsen)
ch. 4 Creating a Culture of Appreciation for Faculty Development - This chapter presents views of a current trustee, a president, and financial officer regarding the importance of nonacademic support for cultivating a campus-wide culture of faculty development. (James P. Honan, Andrew Westmorelan, W. Mark Tew)
ch. 5 Innovative Ways of Assessing Faculty Development - Given the increased scrutiny of higher education and the general public’s desire for accountability, this chapter address how and why colleges and universities must enhance their ability to assess all their activities, including the professional development of the faculty. (L. Dee Fink)
ch. 6 Virtual Space (E-Learning) Faculty Development - This chapter explores the necessity of achieving professional development of the faculty who are working in a different instructional delivery environment and presents solutions adopted in the Mississippi Community College system. (Christian D. Pruett, Terry Pollard)
ch. 7 Clarifying the Differences between Training, Development, and Enrichment: The Role of Institutional Belief Constructs in Creating the Purpose of Faculty Learning Initiatives - In this chapter the contributors discuss the difference between procedural orientation and true development of a faculty member as an educational professional. ( Christopher Stabile, William F. Ritchie)
ch. 8 The Future of Faculty Development: Where Are We Going? - Written by foremost researchers in the field of professional development of the faculty, this chapter prognosticates what is ahead for higher education. (Ann E. Austin, Mary Deane Sorcinelli)
Index
With pedagogical philosophy and practice changing significantly, faculty development has become much more important.
Each chapter in this volume identifies particular areas of opportunity, and although the authors recognize that not every initiative suggested can be implemented by all institutions—circumstances such as institutional mission, available resources, and governance issues will dictate that—it is their hope that every reader will be able to glean details that might provide a spark or fan a flame on campus. As educators themselves, McKee, Johnson, Ritchie, and Tew invite you to consider the challenges, explore the possibilities, and join them on the journey.
This is the 133rd volume of this Jossey-Bass higher education series. New Directions for Teaching and Learning offers a comprehensive range of ideas and techniques for improving college teaching based on the experience of seasoned instructors and the latest findings of educational and psychological researchers. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Editor's Notes
ch. 1 Setting the Stage for Teaching and Learning in American Higher Education: Making the Case for Faculty Development - This chapter identifies five major shifts in American higher education that are reshaping the necessity of effective, ongoing professional development of the faculty. (C. William McKee, W. Mark Tew)
ch. 2 Professional Development of the Faculty: Past and Present - This chapter reviews the unique contribution of three different faculty development research projects and identifies common themes with which educators have struggled over the past four decades. (C. William, Mitzy Johnson, William F. Ritchie, W. Mark Tew)
ch. 3 Cocreating Value in Teaching and Learning Centers - This chapter presents the history of teaching and learning centers, a snapshot of current practices at leading teaching and learning centers, and the contributions expected in the field of faculty development associated with the ongoing growth of teaching and learning centers. (DAvid W. Schumann, John Peters, taimi Olsen)
ch. 4 Creating a Culture of Appreciation for Faculty Development - This chapter presents views of a current trustee, a president, and financial officer regarding the importance of nonacademic support for cultivating a campus-wide culture of faculty development. (James P. Honan, Andrew Westmorelan, W. Mark Tew)
ch. 5 Innovative Ways of Assessing Faculty Development - Given the increased scrutiny of higher education and the general public’s desire for accountability, this chapter address how and why colleges and universities must enhance their ability to assess all their activities, including the professional development of the faculty. (L. Dee Fink)
ch. 6 Virtual Space (E-Learning) Faculty Development - This chapter explores the necessity of achieving professional development of the faculty who are working in a different instructional delivery environment and presents solutions adopted in the Mississippi Community College system. (Christian D. Pruett, Terry Pollard)
ch. 7 Clarifying the Differences between Training, Development, and Enrichment: The Role of Institutional Belief Constructs in Creating the Purpose of Faculty Learning Initiatives - In this chapter the contributors discuss the difference between procedural orientation and true development of a faculty member as an educational professional. ( Christopher Stabile, William F. Ritchie)
ch. 8 The Future of Faculty Development: Where Are We Going? - Written by foremost researchers in the field of professional development of the faculty, this chapter prognosticates what is ahead for higher education. (Ann E. Austin, Mary Deane Sorcinelli)
Index
"Beyond the Graveyard: Engaging Faculty Involvement"
Additional Info:
Discusses the challenge that cultural diversity presents to the curriculum and how to engage faculty involvement. New constructs; Bringing cultures into the classroom; Resistance produced by change; Fear of what will happen when students are exposed to the knowledge of cultures that have suffered historical subordination; Innovations; More.
Discusses the challenge that cultural diversity presents to the curriculum and how to engage faculty involvement. New constructs; Bringing cultures into the classroom; Resistance produced by change; Fear of what will happen when students are exposed to the knowledge of cultures that have suffered historical subordination; Innovations; More.
Additional Info:
Discusses the challenge that cultural diversity presents to the curriculum and how to engage faculty involvement. New constructs; Bringing cultures into the classroom; Resistance produced by change; Fear of what will happen when students are exposed to the knowledge of cultures that have suffered historical subordination; Innovations; More.
Discusses the challenge that cultural diversity presents to the curriculum and how to engage faculty involvement. New constructs; Bringing cultures into the classroom; Resistance produced by change; Fear of what will happen when students are exposed to the knowledge of cultures that have suffered historical subordination; Innovations; More.
Relationships Between Teaching Faculty and Teaching Librarians
Additional Info:
This collection reflects the experiences of librarians, teaching faculty and library directors, whose perspectives range from cynicism to cautious optimism and idealism when it comes to working with teaching faculty. The volume includes case studies, surveys, sample questionnaires, statistics and a toolkit for establishing an effective library liaison program. The essays examine the teaching and learning environment, course growth and maintenance, and the "professor librarian" model. (From the Publisher)
This collection reflects the experiences of librarians, teaching faculty and library directors, whose perspectives range from cynicism to cautious optimism and idealism when it comes to working with teaching faculty. The volume includes case studies, surveys, sample questionnaires, statistics and a toolkit for establishing an effective library liaison program. The essays examine the teaching and learning environment, course growth and maintenance, and the "professor librarian" model. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This collection reflects the experiences of librarians, teaching faculty and library directors, whose perspectives range from cynicism to cautious optimism and idealism when it comes to working with teaching faculty. The volume includes case studies, surveys, sample questionnaires, statistics and a toolkit for establishing an effective library liaison program. The essays examine the teaching and learning environment, course growth and maintenance, and the "professor librarian" model. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction : do you really get more flies with honey?
ch. 1 "Getting psyched" about information literacy : a successful faculty-librarian collaboration for educational psychology and counseling (Lynn Lampert)
ch. 2 Finding common ground : an analysis of librarians' expressed attitudes towards faculty (Lisa M. Given, Heidi Julien)
ch. 3 Librarians grading : giving A's, B's, C's, D's, and F's (Nicole J. Auer, Ellen M. Krupar)
ch. 4 Can't get no respect : helping faculty to understand the educational power of information literacy (William B. Badke)
ch. 5 Research and writing and theses - oh my! : the journey of a collaboratively taught graduate research and writing course (Michelle Toth)
ch. 6 Library research project for first-year engineering students : results from collaboration by teaching and library faculty (Rachel Callison, Dan Budny, and Kate Thomes)
ch. 7 Librarians in the classroom (Peggie Partello)
ch. 8 Faculty-librarian collaboration to teach research skills : electronic symbiosis (Navaz P. Bhavnagri, and Veronica Bielat)
ch. 9 An ethnographic study of attitudes influencing faculty collaboration in library instruction (Kate Manuel, Susan E. Beck, and Molly Molloy)
ch. 10 The library liaison toolkit : learning to bridge the communication gap (Stephan J. Macaluso, and Barbara Whitney Petruzzelli)
Index
This collection reflects the experiences of librarians, teaching faculty and library directors, whose perspectives range from cynicism to cautious optimism and idealism when it comes to working with teaching faculty. The volume includes case studies, surveys, sample questionnaires, statistics and a toolkit for establishing an effective library liaison program. The essays examine the teaching and learning environment, course growth and maintenance, and the "professor librarian" model. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction : do you really get more flies with honey?
ch. 1 "Getting psyched" about information literacy : a successful faculty-librarian collaboration for educational psychology and counseling (Lynn Lampert)
ch. 2 Finding common ground : an analysis of librarians' expressed attitudes towards faculty (Lisa M. Given, Heidi Julien)
ch. 3 Librarians grading : giving A's, B's, C's, D's, and F's (Nicole J. Auer, Ellen M. Krupar)
ch. 4 Can't get no respect : helping faculty to understand the educational power of information literacy (William B. Badke)
ch. 5 Research and writing and theses - oh my! : the journey of a collaboratively taught graduate research and writing course (Michelle Toth)
ch. 6 Library research project for first-year engineering students : results from collaboration by teaching and library faculty (Rachel Callison, Dan Budny, and Kate Thomes)
ch. 7 Librarians in the classroom (Peggie Partello)
ch. 8 Faculty-librarian collaboration to teach research skills : electronic symbiosis (Navaz P. Bhavnagri, and Veronica Bielat)
ch. 9 An ethnographic study of attitudes influencing faculty collaboration in library instruction (Kate Manuel, Susan E. Beck, and Molly Molloy)
ch. 10 The library liaison toolkit : learning to bridge the communication gap (Stephan J. Macaluso, and Barbara Whitney Petruzzelli)
Index
Additional Info:
This book analyzes the behavior of chairs and deans through the political, structural, human resources, and symbolic frames. Lessons learned from the negative as well as the positive scenarios are highlighted, enabling deans and chairs to easily adapt them to their own situations. (From the Publisher)
This book analyzes the behavior of chairs and deans through the political, structural, human resources, and symbolic frames. Lessons learned from the negative as well as the positive scenarios are highlighted, enabling deans and chairs to easily adapt them to their own situations. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This book analyzes the behavior of chairs and deans through the political, structural, human resources, and symbolic frames. Lessons learned from the negative as well as the positive scenarios are highlighted, enabling deans and chairs to easily adapt them to their own situations. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction: Trapped between a Rock and a Hard Place
ch. 2 The Way It Is: Ferreting Out Root Stresses and Plotting New Tactics
ch. 3 Change: Stifling Bedlam and Taming Turbulence
ch. 4 Faculty: Confronting Creeps and Cliques
ch. 5 Resources: Stepping Up to Cutbacks
ch. 6 Bosses: Winning over the Higher-Ups
ch. 7 The Way It's Spozed to Be: Leadership in Action
ch. 8 Conclusion: Practice and Perseverance
Bibliography
About the Authors
This book analyzes the behavior of chairs and deans through the political, structural, human resources, and symbolic frames. Lessons learned from the negative as well as the positive scenarios are highlighted, enabling deans and chairs to easily adapt them to their own situations. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
ch. 1 Introduction: Trapped between a Rock and a Hard Place
ch. 2 The Way It Is: Ferreting Out Root Stresses and Plotting New Tactics
ch. 3 Change: Stifling Bedlam and Taming Turbulence
ch. 4 Faculty: Confronting Creeps and Cliques
ch. 5 Resources: Stepping Up to Cutbacks
ch. 6 Bosses: Winning over the Higher-Ups
ch. 7 The Way It's Spozed to Be: Leadership in Action
ch. 8 Conclusion: Practice and Perseverance
Bibliography
About the Authors
Chairing an Academic Department, Second Edition
Additional Info:
“Academic leaders may be the least studied and most misunderstood management position in the world,” authors Gmelch and Miskin state. Although chairs come to the position for varied reasons, few come with any specific leadership training. Once in the position, they are critiqued, judged, and evaluated by both their faculty and administrators—groups which frequently have conflicting criteria.
Based upon their extensive study of the demands on and ...
“Academic leaders may be the least studied and most misunderstood management position in the world,” authors Gmelch and Miskin state. Although chairs come to the position for varied reasons, few come with any specific leadership training. Once in the position, they are critiqued, judged, and evaluated by both their faculty and administrators—groups which frequently have conflicting criteria.
Based upon their extensive study of the demands on and ...
Additional Info:
“Academic leaders may be the least studied and most misunderstood management position in the world,” authors Gmelch and Miskin state. Although chairs come to the position for varied reasons, few come with any specific leadership training. Once in the position, they are critiqued, judged, and evaluated by both their faculty and administrators—groups which frequently have conflicting criteria.
Based upon their extensive study of the demands on and needs of chairs, the authors have distilled their findings into a practical and highly accessible volume to guide chairs in their growth. Despite the varied paths to the position, the authors state that all chairs find themselves in an environment distinct from their former faculty situation.
One of the most dramatic changes is that chairs need the ability to switch from one task or situation to another very quickly and must develop a facility for refocusing. As chairs, individuals assume four basic roles: faculty developer, manager, leader, and scholar. Because of these roles and the need to quickly refocus, Gmelch and Miskin advocate becoming a swivel chair. They state: “To balance their roles, chairs must learn to swivel without appearing dizzy, schizophrenic, or ‘two-faced.’” (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: The Call to Leadership
ch. 1 - Department Chair Roles: Weaving the Web
Part 1 Faculty Developer
ch. 2 - Recruit Quality Faculty: The Million Dollar Decision
ch. 3 - Support Your Faculty: 80 Percent of Your Resource
ch. 4 - Motivate Faculty Performance: Your Only Choice
Part 2 Manager
ch. 5 - Chair as Manager: Budgeting Sets the Stage
ch. 6 - Resource Decisions: Planning Directs the Action
Part 3 Leader
ch. 7 - Chair as Leader: Facing the Challenges
Part 4 Scholar
ch. 8 - Chair as Scholar: The Paradox of the Swivel Chair
“Academic leaders may be the least studied and most misunderstood management position in the world,” authors Gmelch and Miskin state. Although chairs come to the position for varied reasons, few come with any specific leadership training. Once in the position, they are critiqued, judged, and evaluated by both their faculty and administrators—groups which frequently have conflicting criteria.
Based upon their extensive study of the demands on and needs of chairs, the authors have distilled their findings into a practical and highly accessible volume to guide chairs in their growth. Despite the varied paths to the position, the authors state that all chairs find themselves in an environment distinct from their former faculty situation.
One of the most dramatic changes is that chairs need the ability to switch from one task or situation to another very quickly and must develop a facility for refocusing. As chairs, individuals assume four basic roles: faculty developer, manager, leader, and scholar. Because of these roles and the need to quickly refocus, Gmelch and Miskin advocate becoming a swivel chair. They state: “To balance their roles, chairs must learn to swivel without appearing dizzy, schizophrenic, or ‘two-faced.’” (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction: The Call to Leadership
ch. 1 - Department Chair Roles: Weaving the Web
Part 1 Faculty Developer
ch. 2 - Recruit Quality Faculty: The Million Dollar Decision
ch. 3 - Support Your Faculty: 80 Percent of Your Resource
ch. 4 - Motivate Faculty Performance: Your Only Choice
Part 2 Manager
ch. 5 - Chair as Manager: Budgeting Sets the Stage
ch. 6 - Resource Decisions: Planning Directs the Action
Part 3 Leader
ch. 7 - Chair as Leader: Facing the Challenges
Part 4 Scholar
ch. 8 - Chair as Scholar: The Paradox of the Swivel Chair
The Ethics of Teaching, 3rd ed.
Additional Info:
Written in a style that speaks directly to today's teacher, The Ethics of Teaching, Third Edition uses realistic case studies of day-to-day ethical dilemmas. The book covers such topics as punishment and due process, intellectual freedom, equal treatment of students, multiculturalism, religious differences, democracy, teacher burnout, professional conduct, parental rights and child abuse/neglect. (From the Publisher)
Written in a style that speaks directly to today's teacher, The Ethics of Teaching, Third Edition uses realistic case studies of day-to-day ethical dilemmas. The book covers such topics as punishment and due process, intellectual freedom, equal treatment of students, multiculturalism, religious differences, democracy, teacher burnout, professional conduct, parental rights and child abuse/neglect. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
Written in a style that speaks directly to today's teacher, The Ethics of Teaching, Third Edition uses realistic case studies of day-to-day ethical dilemmas. The book covers such topics as punishment and due process, intellectual freedom, equal treatment of students, multiculturalism, religious differences, democracy, teacher burnout, professional conduct, parental rights and child abuse/neglect. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 What this book is about
ch. 2 Punishment and due process
ch. 3 Intellectual freedom
ch. 4 Equal treatment of students
ch. 5 Dealing with diversity : multiculturalism and religion
ch. 6 Democracy, professionalism, and teaching with integrity
ch. 7 Conclusions and postscript
ch. 8 Supplemental case studies
Written in a style that speaks directly to today's teacher, The Ethics of Teaching, Third Edition uses realistic case studies of day-to-day ethical dilemmas. The book covers such topics as punishment and due process, intellectual freedom, equal treatment of students, multiculturalism, religious differences, democracy, teacher burnout, professional conduct, parental rights and child abuse/neglect. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 What this book is about
ch. 2 Punishment and due process
ch. 3 Intellectual freedom
ch. 4 Equal treatment of students
ch. 5 Dealing with diversity : multiculturalism and religion
ch. 6 Democracy, professionalism, and teaching with integrity
ch. 7 Conclusions and postscript
ch. 8 Supplemental case studies
"Do Initial Training Courses Have an Impact on University Teaching? The Evidence From Two Evaluative Studies of One Course"
Additional Info:
Summarizes evidence from two evaluative studies of the initial training course for new teaching staff at Oxford Brookes University, UK. Findings indicate that the course has had a positive effect for most of the participants. Presents evidence of the positive feedback in the form of comments from several participants. Attitude statements used in both studies are appended.
Summarizes evidence from two evaluative studies of the initial training course for new teaching staff at Oxford Brookes University, UK. Findings indicate that the course has had a positive effect for most of the participants. Presents evidence of the positive feedback in the form of comments from several participants. Attitude statements used in both studies are appended.
Additional Info:
Summarizes evidence from two evaluative studies of the initial training course for new teaching staff at Oxford Brookes University, UK. Findings indicate that the course has had a positive effect for most of the participants. Presents evidence of the positive feedback in the form of comments from several participants. Attitude statements used in both studies are appended.
Summarizes evidence from two evaluative studies of the initial training course for new teaching staff at Oxford Brookes University, UK. Findings indicate that the course has had a positive effect for most of the participants. Presents evidence of the positive feedback in the form of comments from several participants. Attitude statements used in both studies are appended.
Additional Info:
“Top 10 Tips for Staying Up to Date in Faculty Development" - including: journals, list-servs, Twitter feeds, and more.
“Top 10 Tips for Staying Up to Date in Faculty Development" - including: journals, list-servs, Twitter feeds, and more.
Additional Info:
“Top 10 Tips for Staying Up to Date in Faculty Development" - including: journals, list-servs, Twitter feeds, and more.
“Top 10 Tips for Staying Up to Date in Faculty Development" - including: journals, list-servs, Twitter feeds, and more.
The Provost's Handbook: The Role of the Chief Academic Officer
Additional Info:
As the chief academic officer, the provost plays the central role in the contemporary university or college. He or she leads the faculty and serves as their key representative to the administration while simultaneously acting as the administration’s spokesperson to the academic faculty. How has this essential leadership position evolved over the past few decades, and what are the best practices to adopt for succeeding in specific operational areas?<...
As the chief academic officer, the provost plays the central role in the contemporary university or college. He or she leads the faculty and serves as their key representative to the administration while simultaneously acting as the administration’s spokesperson to the academic faculty. How has this essential leadership position evolved over the past few decades, and what are the best practices to adopt for succeeding in specific operational areas?<...
Additional Info:
As the chief academic officer, the provost plays the central role in the contemporary university or college. He or she leads the faculty and serves as their key representative to the administration while simultaneously acting as the administration’s spokesperson to the academic faculty. How has this essential leadership position evolved over the past few decades, and what are the best practices to adopt for succeeding in specific operational areas?
In seventeen essays written by some of the most successful chief academic officers in the United States, The Provost’s Handbook outlines key topics related to the changing environment of higher education while explaining what constitutes effective leadership at the college and university level. How, for example, does the provost lead in a time of disruption and shifting needs? What skills should he or she nurture in new faculty? What role should data and institutional research play in decision making? How can a provost navigate the often stormy situations of shared governance? These questions—and many more challenges presented by this role—are addressed in this essential volume.
Assembled by James Martin and James E. Samels, accomplished authors and scholars of leadership in higher education, The Provost’s Handbook is destined to become the go-to resource for deans, presidents, trustees, and chief academic officers everywhere. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
I The Academic Agenda
ch. 1 New Skills, Old Skills, and Leading the Academic Community (James Martin and James E. Samels)
ch. 2 New Realities and Lingering Stereotypes: Key Trends for the National CAO Census (Bryan J. Cook, Christopher J. Nellum, and Meredith S. Billings)
ch. 3 Professional Development Programs for Chief Academic Officers: A Key to Effective Leadership (Richard Ekman)
ch. 4 The Scope of Academic Leadership at the Top: CAOs, Presidents, and Trustees (R. Michael Tanner)
ch. 5 Ground Level: How to Lead the Faulty as the First among Equals (Linda A. McMillin)
ch. 6 The CAO as Planner: Strategic Planning and the Office of Institutional Research (John D. Simon)
ch. 7 Difficult Change int he Provost’s Doman in Curriculum, Faculty Appointments, and Teaching Strategies (Robert M. Groves)
ch. 8 The CAO and the Curriculum: Developing and Implementing Effective Programs for a Contemporary Student Population (Lon S. Kaufman and Saul J. Weiner)
ch. 9 Technology and the Changing Classroom Experience: Best Practices for Curriculum, Resources, and Personnel (John G. Flores)
ch. 10 Academic Governance: The Art of Working with People (James R. Stellar and Michael A. Baer)
II Essential Partners
ch. 11 The CAO and the Chief Financial Officer: Managing a Critical Connection (James Gandre and Miroslava Mejia Krug)
ch. 12 The Academic Ask: Partnering Academic Affairs and Institutional Advancement (Bradley W. Bateman, Wesley R. Fugate, and Julia Beyer Houpt)
ch. 13 Working Effectively with the Senior Student Affairs Officer (Penny Rue and Suresh Subramani)
ch. 14 What Provosts Need to Know About Enrollment Management (Robin Mamlet, David Pershing, and Sheila Murphy)
ch. 15 Increasing Accountabilities: The Provost’s Role in Intercollegiate Athletics (George H. VanderZwaag and William Scott Green
ch. 16 Keep Your Friends Close and College Counsel Closer: New Developments in Higher Education Law (James E. Samels and James Martin
ch. 17 Building Bridges beyond the Quadrangle: The CAO and the External Community (Mark B. Lapping)
Bibliography
List of Contributors
Index
As the chief academic officer, the provost plays the central role in the contemporary university or college. He or she leads the faculty and serves as their key representative to the administration while simultaneously acting as the administration’s spokesperson to the academic faculty. How has this essential leadership position evolved over the past few decades, and what are the best practices to adopt for succeeding in specific operational areas?
In seventeen essays written by some of the most successful chief academic officers in the United States, The Provost’s Handbook outlines key topics related to the changing environment of higher education while explaining what constitutes effective leadership at the college and university level. How, for example, does the provost lead in a time of disruption and shifting needs? What skills should he or she nurture in new faculty? What role should data and institutional research play in decision making? How can a provost navigate the often stormy situations of shared governance? These questions—and many more challenges presented by this role—are addressed in this essential volume.
Assembled by James Martin and James E. Samels, accomplished authors and scholars of leadership in higher education, The Provost’s Handbook is destined to become the go-to resource for deans, presidents, trustees, and chief academic officers everywhere. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
I The Academic Agenda
ch. 1 New Skills, Old Skills, and Leading the Academic Community (James Martin and James E. Samels)
ch. 2 New Realities and Lingering Stereotypes: Key Trends for the National CAO Census (Bryan J. Cook, Christopher J. Nellum, and Meredith S. Billings)
ch. 3 Professional Development Programs for Chief Academic Officers: A Key to Effective Leadership (Richard Ekman)
ch. 4 The Scope of Academic Leadership at the Top: CAOs, Presidents, and Trustees (R. Michael Tanner)
ch. 5 Ground Level: How to Lead the Faulty as the First among Equals (Linda A. McMillin)
ch. 6 The CAO as Planner: Strategic Planning and the Office of Institutional Research (John D. Simon)
ch. 7 Difficult Change int he Provost’s Doman in Curriculum, Faculty Appointments, and Teaching Strategies (Robert M. Groves)
ch. 8 The CAO and the Curriculum: Developing and Implementing Effective Programs for a Contemporary Student Population (Lon S. Kaufman and Saul J. Weiner)
ch. 9 Technology and the Changing Classroom Experience: Best Practices for Curriculum, Resources, and Personnel (John G. Flores)
ch. 10 Academic Governance: The Art of Working with People (James R. Stellar and Michael A. Baer)
II Essential Partners
ch. 11 The CAO and the Chief Financial Officer: Managing a Critical Connection (James Gandre and Miroslava Mejia Krug)
ch. 12 The Academic Ask: Partnering Academic Affairs and Institutional Advancement (Bradley W. Bateman, Wesley R. Fugate, and Julia Beyer Houpt)
ch. 13 Working Effectively with the Senior Student Affairs Officer (Penny Rue and Suresh Subramani)
ch. 14 What Provosts Need to Know About Enrollment Management (Robin Mamlet, David Pershing, and Sheila Murphy)
ch. 15 Increasing Accountabilities: The Provost’s Role in Intercollegiate Athletics (George H. VanderZwaag and William Scott Green
ch. 16 Keep Your Friends Close and College Counsel Closer: New Developments in Higher Education Law (James E. Samels and James Martin
ch. 17 Building Bridges beyond the Quadrangle: The CAO and the External Community (Mark B. Lapping)
Bibliography
List of Contributors
Index
The Essential Department Chair: A Comprehensive Desk Reference, 2nd Edition
Additional Info:
This second edition of the informative and influential The Essential Department Chair offers academic chairs and department heads the information they need to excel in their roles. This book is about the "how" of academic administration: for instance, how do you cultivate a potential donor for much-needed departmental resources? How do you persuade your department members to work together more harmoniously? How do you keep the people who report to ...
This second edition of the informative and influential The Essential Department Chair offers academic chairs and department heads the information they need to excel in their roles. This book is about the "how" of academic administration: for instance, how do you cultivate a potential donor for much-needed departmental resources? How do you persuade your department members to work together more harmoniously? How do you keep the people who report to ...
Additional Info:
This second edition of the informative and influential The Essential Department Chair offers academic chairs and department heads the information they need to excel in their roles. This book is about the "how" of academic administration: for instance, how do you cultivate a potential donor for much-needed departmental resources? How do you persuade your department members to work together more harmoniously? How do you keep the people who report to you motivated and capable of seeing the big picture?
Thoroughly revised, updated, and expanded, this classic resource covers a broad spectrum of timely topics and is now truly more than a guide—it's a much-needed desk reference that tells you "everything you need to know to be a department chair." The Essential Department Chair contains information on topics such as essentials of creating a strategic plan, developing and overseeing a budget, key elements of fundraising, preparing for the role of chair, meeting the challenges of mentoring to increase productivity, and creating a more collegial atmosphere. The book also explores the chair's role in the search process, shows how to conduct a successful interview and what to do when it's time to let someone go. And the author includes suggestions for the best practices to adopt when doing an evaluation or assessment.
The Essential Department Chair, Second Edition, contains a wealth of new, realistic case studies to equip leaders in this pivotal position to excel in departmental and institutional life. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The Author
Introduction
PART ONE The Chair’s Role and Career Path
Ch 1. In the Trenches
Ch 2. Preparing for the Chair’s Role
Ch 3. Assessing What Kind of Department Chair You Are
Ch 4. Serving as an Untenured Department Chair
Ch 5. Coexisting with a Former Chair
Ch 6. Creating a Career Plan
Ch 7. Returning to the Faculty
Ch 8. Seeking Higher Administrative Positions
Ch 9. A Scenario Analysis on the Chair’s Role and Career Path
PART TWO Departmental Management and Politics
Ch 10. Understanding Departmental Ethics and Politics
Ch 11. Chairing Small Departments
Ch 12. Chairing Large Departments
Ch 13. Setting Course Rotations and Schedules
Ch 14. Making Decisions
Ch 15. Setting Annual Themes
Ch 16. Creating Departmental Centers for Excellence in
Teaching and Learning
Ch 17. A Scenario Analysis on Departmental Management and Politics
PART THREE The Chair’s Role in Searches, Hiring, and Firing
Ch 18. Writing Job Descriptions and Position Announcements
Ch 19. Understanding the Chair’s Role in the Search Process
Ch 20. Interviewing Candidates
Ch 21. Letting Someone Go
Ch 22. A Scenario Analysis on Hiring and Firing
PART FOUR Mentoring Challenges and Opportunities for Department Chairs
Ch 23. Helping Faculty Members Sharpen Their Focus
Ch 24. Coaching Faculty Members to Increase Productivity
Ch 25. Promoting a More Collegial Department
Ch 26. Coping with Passive-Aggressive Behavior
Ch 27. Resolving Chronic Complaints
Ch 28. Addressing Staff Conflicts
Ch 29. Overcoming Conflicts
Ch 30. A Scenario Analysis on Mentoring Challenges
PART FIVE The Chair’s Role in Faculty Development
Ch 31. Facilitating a Positive First-Year Faculty Experience
Ch 32. Coaching Faculty in Writing Effective Résumés
Ch 33. Creating an Effective Professional Development Plan
Ch 34. Creating an Effective Teaching Portfolio
Ch 35. Creating an Effective Course Syllabus
Ch 36. Promoting Creativity in Teaching and Learning
Ch 37. A Scenario Analysis on Faculty Development
PART SIX Best Practices in Evaluation and Assessment
Ch 38. Creating Written Evaluations
Ch 39. Conducting Oral Evaluation Sessions
Ch 40. Writing Letters of Recommendation
Ch 41. Doing Assessment Effectively
Ch 42. Conducting Program Reviews
Ch 43. Conducting Posttenure Reviews
Ch 44. A Scenario Analysis on Evaluation and Assessment
PART SEVEN Essentials of Budgeting and Planning
Ch 45. Strategic Planning
Ch 46. Planning a Budget
Ch 47. Implementing a Budget
Ch 48. Fundraising
Ch 49. Accounting for Sponsored Research
Ch 50. A Scenario Analysis on Strategic Budgeting and Planning
Epilogue: A Checklist for the Essential Department Chair
Index
This second edition of the informative and influential The Essential Department Chair offers academic chairs and department heads the information they need to excel in their roles. This book is about the "how" of academic administration: for instance, how do you cultivate a potential donor for much-needed departmental resources? How do you persuade your department members to work together more harmoniously? How do you keep the people who report to you motivated and capable of seeing the big picture?
Thoroughly revised, updated, and expanded, this classic resource covers a broad spectrum of timely topics and is now truly more than a guide—it's a much-needed desk reference that tells you "everything you need to know to be a department chair." The Essential Department Chair contains information on topics such as essentials of creating a strategic plan, developing and overseeing a budget, key elements of fundraising, preparing for the role of chair, meeting the challenges of mentoring to increase productivity, and creating a more collegial atmosphere. The book also explores the chair's role in the search process, shows how to conduct a successful interview and what to do when it's time to let someone go. And the author includes suggestions for the best practices to adopt when doing an evaluation or assessment.
The Essential Department Chair, Second Edition, contains a wealth of new, realistic case studies to equip leaders in this pivotal position to excel in departmental and institutional life. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
The Author
Introduction
PART ONE The Chair’s Role and Career Path
Ch 1. In the Trenches
Ch 2. Preparing for the Chair’s Role
Ch 3. Assessing What Kind of Department Chair You Are
Ch 4. Serving as an Untenured Department Chair
Ch 5. Coexisting with a Former Chair
Ch 6. Creating a Career Plan
Ch 7. Returning to the Faculty
Ch 8. Seeking Higher Administrative Positions
Ch 9. A Scenario Analysis on the Chair’s Role and Career Path
PART TWO Departmental Management and Politics
Ch 10. Understanding Departmental Ethics and Politics
Ch 11. Chairing Small Departments
Ch 12. Chairing Large Departments
Ch 13. Setting Course Rotations and Schedules
Ch 14. Making Decisions
Ch 15. Setting Annual Themes
Ch 16. Creating Departmental Centers for Excellence in
Teaching and Learning
Ch 17. A Scenario Analysis on Departmental Management and Politics
PART THREE The Chair’s Role in Searches, Hiring, and Firing
Ch 18. Writing Job Descriptions and Position Announcements
Ch 19. Understanding the Chair’s Role in the Search Process
Ch 20. Interviewing Candidates
Ch 21. Letting Someone Go
Ch 22. A Scenario Analysis on Hiring and Firing
PART FOUR Mentoring Challenges and Opportunities for Department Chairs
Ch 23. Helping Faculty Members Sharpen Their Focus
Ch 24. Coaching Faculty Members to Increase Productivity
Ch 25. Promoting a More Collegial Department
Ch 26. Coping with Passive-Aggressive Behavior
Ch 27. Resolving Chronic Complaints
Ch 28. Addressing Staff Conflicts
Ch 29. Overcoming Conflicts
Ch 30. A Scenario Analysis on Mentoring Challenges
PART FIVE The Chair’s Role in Faculty Development
Ch 31. Facilitating a Positive First-Year Faculty Experience
Ch 32. Coaching Faculty in Writing Effective Résumés
Ch 33. Creating an Effective Professional Development Plan
Ch 34. Creating an Effective Teaching Portfolio
Ch 35. Creating an Effective Course Syllabus
Ch 36. Promoting Creativity in Teaching and Learning
Ch 37. A Scenario Analysis on Faculty Development
PART SIX Best Practices in Evaluation and Assessment
Ch 38. Creating Written Evaluations
Ch 39. Conducting Oral Evaluation Sessions
Ch 40. Writing Letters of Recommendation
Ch 41. Doing Assessment Effectively
Ch 42. Conducting Program Reviews
Ch 43. Conducting Posttenure Reviews
Ch 44. A Scenario Analysis on Evaluation and Assessment
PART SEVEN Essentials of Budgeting and Planning
Ch 45. Strategic Planning
Ch 46. Planning a Budget
Ch 47. Implementing a Budget
Ch 48. Fundraising
Ch 49. Accounting for Sponsored Research
Ch 50. A Scenario Analysis on Strategic Budgeting and Planning
Epilogue: A Checklist for the Essential Department Chair
Index
The Department Chair Primer: What Chairs Need to Know and Do to Make a Difference, 2nd Edition
Additional Info:
If higher education is to fulfill its vital social mission, new department leaders must be prepared for their positions and get up to speed on the basics quickly, educating themselves about the role and continuing to learn on the job.
In this second edition of his classic resource, Don Chu outlines the proven ideas and strategies new department chairs need in order to do their jobs well. Thoroughly ...
If higher education is to fulfill its vital social mission, new department leaders must be prepared for their positions and get up to speed on the basics quickly, educating themselves about the role and continuing to learn on the job.
In this second edition of his classic resource, Don Chu outlines the proven ideas and strategies new department chairs need in order to do their jobs well. Thoroughly ...
Additional Info:
If higher education is to fulfill its vital social mission, new department leaders must be prepared for their positions and get up to speed on the basics quickly, educating themselves about the role and continuing to learn on the job.
In this second edition of his classic resource, Don Chu outlines the proven ideas and strategies new department chairs need in order to do their jobs well. Thoroughly revised and updated, The Department Chair Primer contains information that addresses the current pressures and challenges in higher education and offers practical suggestions for responding to them.
Filled with illustrative examples, the book gets straight to the heart of challenges and issues. Each chapter details a particular problem, includes a brief introduction to the topic, and provides tips on how to deal with the situation. Covering a wealth of topics, The Department Chair Primer
-Explores the chair's role as department leader
-Offers suggestions for handling stress and conflict
-Includes information on budgeting, resource management, and development
-Contains strategies for professional development, people management, and working with challenging personnel
-Presents ideas for handling department communications, student development, and strategic positioning
Written in a concise and accessible manner, The Department Chair Primer is an ideal resource for the busy new department chair. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface to the New Edition
PART ONE: WHAT NEW CHAIRS NEED TO KNOW
Ch 1. Why Department Chairs Are Important
Ch 2. The Chair’s Role as Department Leader
Ch 3. The Chair’s Ecosystem
Ch 4. Handling Stress and Conflict
Ch 5. What Kind of Chair Will You Be?
PART TWO: GETTING STARTED: HOW NEW CHAIRS CAN MAKE A DIFFERENCE
Ch 6. Before You Begin
Ch 7. Planning
Ch 8. Budget, Resource Management, and Development
Ch 9. Curriculum, Scheduling, and Instruction
Ch 10. Professional Development, Personnel Management, and Handling Challenging Personnel
Ch 11. Departmental Communication
Ch 12. Student Development
Ch 13. Strategic Positioning
Ch 14. Understanding Your Institution and Your Role as Department Chair
Resources
References
The Author
Index
If higher education is to fulfill its vital social mission, new department leaders must be prepared for their positions and get up to speed on the basics quickly, educating themselves about the role and continuing to learn on the job.
In this second edition of his classic resource, Don Chu outlines the proven ideas and strategies new department chairs need in order to do their jobs well. Thoroughly revised and updated, The Department Chair Primer contains information that addresses the current pressures and challenges in higher education and offers practical suggestions for responding to them.
Filled with illustrative examples, the book gets straight to the heart of challenges and issues. Each chapter details a particular problem, includes a brief introduction to the topic, and provides tips on how to deal with the situation. Covering a wealth of topics, The Department Chair Primer
-Explores the chair's role as department leader
-Offers suggestions for handling stress and conflict
-Includes information on budgeting, resource management, and development
-Contains strategies for professional development, people management, and working with challenging personnel
-Presents ideas for handling department communications, student development, and strategic positioning
Written in a concise and accessible manner, The Department Chair Primer is an ideal resource for the busy new department chair. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface to the New Edition
PART ONE: WHAT NEW CHAIRS NEED TO KNOW
Ch 1. Why Department Chairs Are Important
Ch 2. The Chair’s Role as Department Leader
Ch 3. The Chair’s Ecosystem
Ch 4. Handling Stress and Conflict
Ch 5. What Kind of Chair Will You Be?
PART TWO: GETTING STARTED: HOW NEW CHAIRS CAN MAKE A DIFFERENCE
Ch 6. Before You Begin
Ch 7. Planning
Ch 8. Budget, Resource Management, and Development
Ch 9. Curriculum, Scheduling, and Instruction
Ch 10. Professional Development, Personnel Management, and Handling Challenging Personnel
Ch 11. Departmental Communication
Ch 12. Student Development
Ch 13. Strategic Positioning
Ch 14. Understanding Your Institution and Your Role as Department Chair
Resources
References
The Author
Index
The Teaching Professor, Volume 29, Number 5
Additional Info:
Journal Issue.
Journal Issue.
Additional Info:
Journal Issue.
Table Of Content:
Questions That Bring Contemporary Context to Past Personalities (Perry Shaw)
Skillful Teaching: Core Assumptions
Ungraded Quizzes: Any Chance
They Promote Learning?
Millennial Students and Classroom Communication
Use of Appreciative Inquiry in the College Classroom
Process Memos: A Dialogue between Students and Teachers
Collaboration Tools That Build Student Engagement
Should Students Form Their Own Groups?
Journal Issue.
Table Of Content:
Questions That Bring Contemporary Context to Past Personalities (Perry Shaw)
Skillful Teaching: Core Assumptions
Ungraded Quizzes: Any Chance
They Promote Learning?
Millennial Students and Classroom Communication
Use of Appreciative Inquiry in the College Classroom
Process Memos: A Dialogue between Students and Teachers
Collaboration Tools That Build Student Engagement
Should Students Form Their Own Groups?
"Faculty Study Groups: Solving 'Good Problems' Through Study, Reflection, and Collaboration"
Additional Info:
We describe the development, implementation, and assessment of a faculty study group program designed to foster teaching as a reflective, collaborative activity within a research university. Conceived within conceptual frameworks that challenge technical/rationalist approaches to faculty development, the program was successful in creating opportunities for faculty of different disciplines, age groups, ranks, and teaching experience to establish productive discourse communities around their own teaching. Our experience shows that such ...
We describe the development, implementation, and assessment of a faculty study group program designed to foster teaching as a reflective, collaborative activity within a research university. Conceived within conceptual frameworks that challenge technical/rationalist approaches to faculty development, the program was successful in creating opportunities for faculty of different disciplines, age groups, ranks, and teaching experience to establish productive discourse communities around their own teaching. Our experience shows that such ...
Additional Info:
We describe the development, implementation, and assessment of a faculty study group program designed to foster teaching as a reflective, collaborative activity within a research university. Conceived within conceptual frameworks that challenge technical/rationalist approaches to faculty development, the program was successful in creating opportunities for faculty of different disciplines, age groups, ranks, and teaching experience to establish productive discourse communities around their own teaching. Our experience shows that such programs require careful thought and planning, which we detail here, and that faculty even in research oriented institutions can be captured by the “good problem” that teaching represents.
We describe the development, implementation, and assessment of a faculty study group program designed to foster teaching as a reflective, collaborative activity within a research university. Conceived within conceptual frameworks that challenge technical/rationalist approaches to faculty development, the program was successful in creating opportunities for faculty of different disciplines, age groups, ranks, and teaching experience to establish productive discourse communities around their own teaching. Our experience shows that such programs require careful thought and planning, which we detail here, and that faculty even in research oriented institutions can be captured by the “good problem” that teaching represents.
The Jossey-Bass Academic Administrator's Guide to Conflict Resolution
Additional Info:
Dealing with conflict is an evitable part of any academic administrator’s job. Often, however, new administrators lack the skills they need to successfully resolve campus conflicts. This important resource includes an array of strategies for identifying and managing conflict between individuals, within a department, and between departments. The Jossey-Bass Academic Administrator’s Guide to Conflict Resolution shows how to turn conflicts into problems to be solved. Authors Sandra I. ...
Dealing with conflict is an evitable part of any academic administrator’s job. Often, however, new administrators lack the skills they need to successfully resolve campus conflicts. This important resource includes an array of strategies for identifying and managing conflict between individuals, within a department, and between departments. The Jossey-Bass Academic Administrator’s Guide to Conflict Resolution shows how to turn conflicts into problems to be solved. Authors Sandra I. ...
Additional Info:
Dealing with conflict is an evitable part of any academic administrator’s job. Often, however, new administrators lack the skills they need to successfully resolve campus conflicts. This important resource includes an array of strategies for identifying and managing conflict between individuals, within a department, and between departments. The Jossey-Bass Academic Administrator’s Guide to Conflict Resolution shows how to turn conflicts into problems to be solved. Authors Sandra I. Cheldelin and Ann F. Lucas offer concrete approaches academic administrators can use to analyze conflicts and design effective interventions. The Jossey-Bass Academic Administrator’s Guide to Conflict Resolution is an invaluable tool that includes
· Guidelines for knowing when it is appropriate to intervene in a conflict
· Strategies for helping to change irrational and negative thinking to positive rational thought
· Methods for handling interpersonal conflict—between two parties—within a department
· An outline of the major approaches for managing conflict and information about when they work and when they don’t
· Effective strategies for preventing and solving specific problems (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
About the Authors
ch. 1 Understanding conflict
ch. 2 A framework for conflict analysis
ch. 3 Intrapersonal conflict: the impact of stress and negative thinking
ch. 4 Interpersonal conflict: Helping people who don’t get along
ch. 5 Intragroup conflict: the academic administrator as team leader
ch. 6 Intergroup conflict: conflict on a larger scale
ch. 7 Conflict intervention
ch. 8 Collaborating with other departments to manage conflict
Recommended Reading
Index
Dealing with conflict is an evitable part of any academic administrator’s job. Often, however, new administrators lack the skills they need to successfully resolve campus conflicts. This important resource includes an array of strategies for identifying and managing conflict between individuals, within a department, and between departments. The Jossey-Bass Academic Administrator’s Guide to Conflict Resolution shows how to turn conflicts into problems to be solved. Authors Sandra I. Cheldelin and Ann F. Lucas offer concrete approaches academic administrators can use to analyze conflicts and design effective interventions. The Jossey-Bass Academic Administrator’s Guide to Conflict Resolution is an invaluable tool that includes
· Guidelines for knowing when it is appropriate to intervene in a conflict
· Strategies for helping to change irrational and negative thinking to positive rational thought
· Methods for handling interpersonal conflict—between two parties—within a department
· An outline of the major approaches for managing conflict and information about when they work and when they don’t
· Effective strategies for preventing and solving specific problems (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
About the Authors
ch. 1 Understanding conflict
ch. 2 A framework for conflict analysis
ch. 3 Intrapersonal conflict: the impact of stress and negative thinking
ch. 4 Interpersonal conflict: Helping people who don’t get along
ch. 5 Intragroup conflict: the academic administrator as team leader
ch. 6 Intergroup conflict: conflict on a larger scale
ch. 7 Conflict intervention
ch. 8 Collaborating with other departments to manage conflict
Recommended Reading
Index
Using Consultants to Improve Teaching
Additional Info:
With increasing calls for accountability of faculty, the use of peers as teaching consultants could be the answer to how to monitor our own effectiveness as professionals. (From the Publisher)
With increasing calls for accountability of faculty, the use of peers as teaching consultants could be the answer to how to monitor our own effectiveness as professionals. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
With increasing calls for accountability of faculty, the use of peers as teaching consultants could be the answer to how to monitor our own effectiveness as professionals. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Consulting About Teaching: An Overview(Christopher Knapper, Sergio Piccinin)
ch. 2 A Conceptual Framework for Instructional Consultation(Owen Hicks)
ch. 3 Three Practical Strategies for Peer Consultation(Barbara J. Millis)
ch. 4 Instructional Consultation in a Statewide Setting(Michael A. Kerwin)
ch. 5 Peer Consultation and Faculty Learning Communities(Milton D. Cox)
ch. 6 Consultation Through Action Learning(Liz Beaty)
ch. 7 Consultation Using Critical FriAnds(Gunnar Handal)
ch. 8 How Individual Consultation Affects Teaching(Sergio Piccinin)
ch. 9 Toward an Integrated Approach to Instructional Consultation(Cynthia Weston, Lynn McAlpine)
ch. 10 Resources on Instructional Consultation(Sergio Piccinin, Christopher Knapper)
With increasing calls for accountability of faculty, the use of peers as teaching consultants could be the answer to how to monitor our own effectiveness as professionals. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
ch. 1 Consulting About Teaching: An Overview(Christopher Knapper, Sergio Piccinin)
ch. 2 A Conceptual Framework for Instructional Consultation(Owen Hicks)
ch. 3 Three Practical Strategies for Peer Consultation(Barbara J. Millis)
ch. 4 Instructional Consultation in a Statewide Setting(Michael A. Kerwin)
ch. 5 Peer Consultation and Faculty Learning Communities(Milton D. Cox)
ch. 6 Consultation Through Action Learning(Liz Beaty)
ch. 7 Consultation Using Critical FriAnds(Gunnar Handal)
ch. 8 How Individual Consultation Affects Teaching(Sergio Piccinin)
ch. 9 Toward an Integrated Approach to Instructional Consultation(Cynthia Weston, Lynn McAlpine)
ch. 10 Resources on Instructional Consultation(Sergio Piccinin, Christopher Knapper)
"Teaching Beyond the Borders: A Report From the Lilly-Luce Teaching Workshop"
Additional Info:
Additional Info:
The Essential Academic Dean: A Practical Guide to College Leadership
Additional Info:
The role of an academic dean is extremely complex, involving budgeting, community relations, personnel decisions, managing a large enterprise, mastering numerous details, fundraising, and guiding a school or college toward a compelling vision for the future. But no academic dean can quickly master all of the intricacies involved in this challenging position. For instance, how do you build support for a shared vision of your unit's future? How do you ...
The role of an academic dean is extremely complex, involving budgeting, community relations, personnel decisions, managing a large enterprise, mastering numerous details, fundraising, and guiding a school or college toward a compelling vision for the future. But no academic dean can quickly master all of the intricacies involved in this challenging position. For instance, how do you build support for a shared vision of your unit's future? How do you ...
Additional Info:
The role of an academic dean is extremely complex, involving budgeting, community relations, personnel decisions, managing a large enterprise, mastering numerous details, fundraising, and guiding a school or college toward a compelling vision for the future. But no academic dean can quickly master all of the intricacies involved in this challenging position. For instance, how do you build support for a shared vision of your unit's future? How do you interact effectively with all of the different internal and external constituencies that a dean must serve? How do you set, supervise, and implement a budget? How do you handle the volume of documents that cross your desk? How do you fire someone, ask a chair to step down, respond to a reporter on the telephone, and settle disputes about intellectual property rights? How do you know when it's time to consider leaving your current position for another opportunity? The Essential Academic Dean is about the "how" of academic leadership. Based on a series of workshops given by the author on college administration and management, each topic deals concisely with the most important information deans need at their fingertips when faced with a particular challenge or opportunity. Written both as a comprehensive guide to the academic deanship and as a ready reference to be consulted when needed, this book emphasizes proven solutions over untested theories and stresses what deans need to know now in order to be most successful as academic leaders. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
About the Author.
Introduction.
Part I: The Dean’s Role.
ch. 1 The View from the Middle.
ch. 2 Preparing for the Dean’s Role.
ch. 3 What Kind of Dean Are You?
ch. 4 Creating a Vision for the College.
ch. 5 Building a Shared Vision for the College.
ch. 6 Launching Initiatives.
ch. 7 Leading Reform.
ch. 8 A Scenario Analysis on the Dean’s Role.
Part II: The Dean’s Constituents.
ch. 9 Students.
ch. 10 Parents.
ch. 11 Faculty.
ch. 12 Challenging Employees.
ch. 13 Department Chairs.
ch. 14 Staff.
ch. 15 Other Deans.
ch. 16 Upper Administrators.
ch. 17 Friends of the College.
ch. 18 Donors and Potential Donors.
ch. 19 Boards, Trustees, and Legislators.
ch. 20 A Scenario Analysis on the Dean’s Constituents.
Part III: The Dean’s Staff.
ch. 21 Searching for and Building a Strong Administrative Team.
ch. 22 Interviewing a Candidate.
ch. 23 Closing the Deal.
ch. 24 A Scenario Analysis on the Dean’s Staff.
Part IV: The Dean’s Budget.
ch. 25 Setting Budgetary Priorities.
ch. 26 Supervising a Budget.
ch. 27 Implementing Budget Cuts.
ch. 28 A Scenario Analysis on the Dean’s Budget.
Part V: The Dean’s Documents.
ch. 29 Budget Proposals.
ch. 30 Faculty Evaluations.
ch. 31 Chair Evaluations.
ch. 32 Position Requests and Descriptions.
ch. 33 Program Reviews.
ch. 34 Policies and Procedures.
ch. 35 A Scenario Analysis on the Dean’s Documents.
Part VI: The Dean’s Leadership.
ch. 36 Leadership When Meeting One on One.
ch. 37 Leadership When Chairing Committees.
ch. 38 Leadership from the Middle.
ch. 39 Leadership in Development and Increasing Revenue.
ch. 40 A Scenario Analysis on the Dean’s Leadership.
Part VII: The Dean’s Challenges.
ch. 41 Terminating a Faculty Member.
ch. 42 Replacing a Chair.
ch. 43 Responding to Emergencies.
ch. 44 Dealing with the Media.
ch. 45 Intellectual Property Disputes.
ch. 46 Addressing Differences with Other Administrators.
ch. 47 A Scenario Analysis on the Dean’s Challenges.
Part VIII: The Dean’s Unique Opportunities.
ch. 48 The Honors College.
ch. 49 The Professional School.
ch. 50 The Graduate School.
ch. 51 Consortia, Centers, and Institutes.
ch. 52 The Unionized Environment.
ch. 53 Promoting Diversity.
ch. 54 The Dean as Chief Academic Officer.
ch. 55 A Scenario Analysis on the Dean’s Unique Opportunities.
Part IX: The Dean’s Next Step.
ch. 56 Knowing When It’s Time to Go.
ch. 57 Changing Institutions.
ch. 58 Returning to the Faculty.
ch. 59 Planning for a Higher Administrative Role.
ch. 60 A Scenario Analysis on the Dean’s Next Step.
Epilogue: A Checklist for the Essential Academic Dean.
The role of an academic dean is extremely complex, involving budgeting, community relations, personnel decisions, managing a large enterprise, mastering numerous details, fundraising, and guiding a school or college toward a compelling vision for the future. But no academic dean can quickly master all of the intricacies involved in this challenging position. For instance, how do you build support for a shared vision of your unit's future? How do you interact effectively with all of the different internal and external constituencies that a dean must serve? How do you set, supervise, and implement a budget? How do you handle the volume of documents that cross your desk? How do you fire someone, ask a chair to step down, respond to a reporter on the telephone, and settle disputes about intellectual property rights? How do you know when it's time to consider leaving your current position for another opportunity? The Essential Academic Dean is about the "how" of academic leadership. Based on a series of workshops given by the author on college administration and management, each topic deals concisely with the most important information deans need at their fingertips when faced with a particular challenge or opportunity. Written both as a comprehensive guide to the academic deanship and as a ready reference to be consulted when needed, this book emphasizes proven solutions over untested theories and stresses what deans need to know now in order to be most successful as academic leaders. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
About the Author.
Introduction.
Part I: The Dean’s Role.
ch. 1 The View from the Middle.
ch. 2 Preparing for the Dean’s Role.
ch. 3 What Kind of Dean Are You?
ch. 4 Creating a Vision for the College.
ch. 5 Building a Shared Vision for the College.
ch. 6 Launching Initiatives.
ch. 7 Leading Reform.
ch. 8 A Scenario Analysis on the Dean’s Role.
Part II: The Dean’s Constituents.
ch. 9 Students.
ch. 10 Parents.
ch. 11 Faculty.
ch. 12 Challenging Employees.
ch. 13 Department Chairs.
ch. 14 Staff.
ch. 15 Other Deans.
ch. 16 Upper Administrators.
ch. 17 Friends of the College.
ch. 18 Donors and Potential Donors.
ch. 19 Boards, Trustees, and Legislators.
ch. 20 A Scenario Analysis on the Dean’s Constituents.
Part III: The Dean’s Staff.
ch. 21 Searching for and Building a Strong Administrative Team.
ch. 22 Interviewing a Candidate.
ch. 23 Closing the Deal.
ch. 24 A Scenario Analysis on the Dean’s Staff.
Part IV: The Dean’s Budget.
ch. 25 Setting Budgetary Priorities.
ch. 26 Supervising a Budget.
ch. 27 Implementing Budget Cuts.
ch. 28 A Scenario Analysis on the Dean’s Budget.
Part V: The Dean’s Documents.
ch. 29 Budget Proposals.
ch. 30 Faculty Evaluations.
ch. 31 Chair Evaluations.
ch. 32 Position Requests and Descriptions.
ch. 33 Program Reviews.
ch. 34 Policies and Procedures.
ch. 35 A Scenario Analysis on the Dean’s Documents.
Part VI: The Dean’s Leadership.
ch. 36 Leadership When Meeting One on One.
ch. 37 Leadership When Chairing Committees.
ch. 38 Leadership from the Middle.
ch. 39 Leadership in Development and Increasing Revenue.
ch. 40 A Scenario Analysis on the Dean’s Leadership.
Part VII: The Dean’s Challenges.
ch. 41 Terminating a Faculty Member.
ch. 42 Replacing a Chair.
ch. 43 Responding to Emergencies.
ch. 44 Dealing with the Media.
ch. 45 Intellectual Property Disputes.
ch. 46 Addressing Differences with Other Administrators.
ch. 47 A Scenario Analysis on the Dean’s Challenges.
Part VIII: The Dean’s Unique Opportunities.
ch. 48 The Honors College.
ch. 49 The Professional School.
ch. 50 The Graduate School.
ch. 51 Consortia, Centers, and Institutes.
ch. 52 The Unionized Environment.
ch. 53 Promoting Diversity.
ch. 54 The Dean as Chief Academic Officer.
ch. 55 A Scenario Analysis on the Dean’s Unique Opportunities.
Part IX: The Dean’s Next Step.
ch. 56 Knowing When It’s Time to Go.
ch. 57 Changing Institutions.
ch. 58 Returning to the Faculty.
ch. 59 Planning for a Higher Administrative Role.
ch. 60 A Scenario Analysis on the Dean’s Next Step.
Epilogue: A Checklist for the Essential Academic Dean.
Additional Info:
For those considering adopting team teaching, or interested in reviewing their own practice, this book offers an over-view of this pedagogy, its challenges and rewards, and a rich range of examples in which teachers present and reflect upon their approaches.
The interaction of two teachers—both the intellectual interaction involved in the design of the course, and the pedagogical interaction in the teaching of the course—creates a ...
For those considering adopting team teaching, or interested in reviewing their own practice, this book offers an over-view of this pedagogy, its challenges and rewards, and a rich range of examples in which teachers present and reflect upon their approaches.
The interaction of two teachers—both the intellectual interaction involved in the design of the course, and the pedagogical interaction in the teaching of the course—creates a ...
Additional Info:
For those considering adopting team teaching, or interested in reviewing their own practice, this book offers an over-view of this pedagogy, its challenges and rewards, and a rich range of examples in which teachers present and reflect upon their approaches.
The interaction of two teachers—both the intellectual interaction involved in the design of the course, and the pedagogical interaction in the teaching of the course—creates a dynamic environment that reflects the way scholars make meaning of the world. The process naturally breaks down the teacher-centered classroom by creating a scholarly community in which teachers and students work together to understand important ideas, and where students don’t just learn content, but begin to understand how knowledge is constructed, grasp the connections between disciplines as well as their different perspectives, see greater coherence in the curriculum, and appreciate how having more than one teacher in the classroom leads naturally to dialogue and active learning.
Each of the five examples in this book shares the story of a course at a different institution, and each is designed to reflect a number of different variables in team-taught courses. They represent courses in a variety of different disciplines, including the sciences, social sciences, humanities, and the arts; and at a range of levels, from first-year seminars to graduate courses. They also illustrate a number of different models for instructional teams, such as faculty from the same disciplines, from related disciplines, from two very different disciplines, from different institutions, and one pairing of a faculty member and a staff member.
This book provides insight into the impact of team teaching on student learning and on faculty development. It also addresses the challenges, both pedagogical an administrative, that need to be addressed for team teaching to be effective. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Foreword
Introduction
ch. 1 Origins - Team Teaching in the Sciences (Amy Jessen-Marshall and Halard L. Lescinsky)
ch. 2 Lessons Learned by a Philosopher and a Biologist in Team Teaching a First-Year Seminar on ‘‘Disease and Culture: Why You Are a Walking Petri Dish’’ (Min-Ken Liao and Sarah Worth)
ch. 3 Arts and Community - Lessons in Team Teaching (Robert A. Richter and Margaret E. Thomas)
ch. 4 Interracial Team Teaching in Social Work (Mathew L. Ouellett and Edith Fraser)
ch. 5 Lessons Learned From an Interdisciplinary Course in Undergraduate Science (Ronald J. Duchovic)
Contributors
Index
For those considering adopting team teaching, or interested in reviewing their own practice, this book offers an over-view of this pedagogy, its challenges and rewards, and a rich range of examples in which teachers present and reflect upon their approaches.
The interaction of two teachers—both the intellectual interaction involved in the design of the course, and the pedagogical interaction in the teaching of the course—creates a dynamic environment that reflects the way scholars make meaning of the world. The process naturally breaks down the teacher-centered classroom by creating a scholarly community in which teachers and students work together to understand important ideas, and where students don’t just learn content, but begin to understand how knowledge is constructed, grasp the connections between disciplines as well as their different perspectives, see greater coherence in the curriculum, and appreciate how having more than one teacher in the classroom leads naturally to dialogue and active learning.
Each of the five examples in this book shares the story of a course at a different institution, and each is designed to reflect a number of different variables in team-taught courses. They represent courses in a variety of different disciplines, including the sciences, social sciences, humanities, and the arts; and at a range of levels, from first-year seminars to graduate courses. They also illustrate a number of different models for instructional teams, such as faculty from the same disciplines, from related disciplines, from two very different disciplines, from different institutions, and one pairing of a faculty member and a staff member.
This book provides insight into the impact of team teaching on student learning and on faculty development. It also addresses the challenges, both pedagogical an administrative, that need to be addressed for team teaching to be effective. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Acknowledgments
Foreword
Introduction
ch. 1 Origins - Team Teaching in the Sciences (Amy Jessen-Marshall and Halard L. Lescinsky)
ch. 2 Lessons Learned by a Philosopher and a Biologist in Team Teaching a First-Year Seminar on ‘‘Disease and Culture: Why You Are a Walking Petri Dish’’ (Min-Ken Liao and Sarah Worth)
ch. 3 Arts and Community - Lessons in Team Teaching (Robert A. Richter and Margaret E. Thomas)
ch. 4 Interracial Team Teaching in Social Work (Mathew L. Ouellett and Edith Fraser)
ch. 5 Lessons Learned From an Interdisciplinary Course in Undergraduate Science (Ronald J. Duchovic)
Contributors
Index
The Vitality of Senior Faculty Members: Snow on the Roof-Fire in the Furnace
Additional Info:
By the year 2000, 50 percent of full-time faculty will be over 55, and 68 percent will be over 50. Just when many universities and colleges in America are making major shifts in their missions and their organizational structures, faculty members who are expected to implement these bold new visions will be out singing up for their senior citizen discount cards. Is it any cause for alarm? (From the Publisher)
By the year 2000, 50 percent of full-time faculty will be over 55, and 68 percent will be over 50. Just when many universities and colleges in America are making major shifts in their missions and their organizational structures, faculty members who are expected to implement these bold new visions will be out singing up for their senior citizen discount cards. Is it any cause for alarm? (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
By the year 2000, 50 percent of full-time faculty will be over 55, and 68 percent will be over 50. Just when many universities and colleges in America are making major shifts in their missions and their organizational structures, faculty members who are expected to implement these bold new visions will be out singing up for their senior citizen discount cards. Is it any cause for alarm? (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Senior Faculty and Institutional Vitality
The Case of Stephen Abbot
The Productivity of Senior Faculty
Looking Inside for Vitality - Internal factors affecting the productivity of senior faculty
Looking Outside for Vitality - Institutional factors affecting the productivity of senior faculty
Conclusions and Themes to Guide Approaches to the vitality of Senior Faculty
Approaches to Faculty and Institutional Vitality
Appendix
References
Index
ASHE-ERIC Higher Education Reports
By the year 2000, 50 percent of full-time faculty will be over 55, and 68 percent will be over 50. Just when many universities and colleges in America are making major shifts in their missions and their organizational structures, faculty members who are expected to implement these bold new visions will be out singing up for their senior citizen discount cards. Is it any cause for alarm? (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Foreword
Senior Faculty and Institutional Vitality
The Case of Stephen Abbot
The Productivity of Senior Faculty
Looking Inside for Vitality - Internal factors affecting the productivity of senior faculty
Looking Outside for Vitality - Institutional factors affecting the productivity of senior faculty
Conclusions and Themes to Guide Approaches to the vitality of Senior Faculty
Approaches to Faculty and Institutional Vitality
Appendix
References
Index
ASHE-ERIC Higher Education Reports
Connecting Learning Across the Institution
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Most research on learning tends to occur in silos based on stakeholder perspective. This volume seeks to break down these silos and draw together scholars who research learning from different perspectives to highlight commonalities in learning for students, faculty, and institutions. When we understand how learning is experienced across the institution, ...
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Most research on learning tends to occur in silos based on stakeholder perspective. This volume seeks to break down these silos and draw together scholars who research learning from different perspectives to highlight commonalities in learning for students, faculty, and institutions. When we understand how learning is experienced across the institution, ...
Additional Info:
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Most research on learning tends to occur in silos based on stakeholder perspective. This volume seeks to break down these silos and draw together scholars who research learning from different perspectives to highlight commonalities in learning for students, faculty, and institutions. When we understand how learning is experienced across the institution, we can develop strategies that help support, enhance, and reinforce learning for all.
Exploring what it means to bridge learning across the institution, this volume provides a roadmap to improve learning for all. Both scholarly and practical, it advances the knowledge about the ways we investigate and study learning across and for various groups of learners.
It also:
• Collects thinking about learning in its various formats in one location
• Provides a platform for synthesis
• Outlines key questions for thinking more deeply about learning on campus.
Instead of thinking of learning as discrete depending on the stakeholder group, this volume highlights the commonalities across all types of learners. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part I: Setting the Context
Editor's Notes (Pamela L. Eddy)
ch. 1 Integration of Learning Model: How College Students Integrate Learning (James P. Barber)
ch. 2 Faculty as Border Crossers: A Study of Fulbright Faculty (Pamela L. Eddy)
ch. 3 Civic Engagement and Organizational Learning Strategies for Student Success (Tami L. Moore, Jesse P. Mendez)
Part II: Examples From Stakeholder Groups
ch. 4 “Orthogonality” in Learning and Assessment (David Leslie)
ch. 5 Promoting High-Impact Student Learning: Connecting Key Components of the Collegiate Experience (Matthew Wawrzynski, Roger Baldwin)
ch. 6 Developing Learning in Faculty: Seeking Expert Assistance From Colleagues (Todd Zakrajsek)
ch. 7 Blended Learning as Transformational Institutional Learning (Kim VanDerLinden)
Part III: Planning for the Future
ch. 8 Constructing an Overarching Framework for Learning—Connecting the Dots (Marilyn J. Amey)
ch. 9 Finding and Fostering Learning: What College and University Leaders Need to Know and What They Can Do (Anna Neumann, Liza Bolitzer)
ch. 10 Bringing It All Together Through Group Learning (Shannon M. Chance)
Index
Click Here for Book Review
Abstract: Most research on learning tends to occur in silos based on stakeholder perspective. This volume seeks to break down these silos and draw together scholars who research learning from different perspectives to highlight commonalities in learning for students, faculty, and institutions. When we understand how learning is experienced across the institution, we can develop strategies that help support, enhance, and reinforce learning for all.
Exploring what it means to bridge learning across the institution, this volume provides a roadmap to improve learning for all. Both scholarly and practical, it advances the knowledge about the ways we investigate and study learning across and for various groups of learners.
It also:
• Collects thinking about learning in its various formats in one location
• Provides a platform for synthesis
• Outlines key questions for thinking more deeply about learning on campus.
Instead of thinking of learning as discrete depending on the stakeholder group, this volume highlights the commonalities across all types of learners. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Part I: Setting the Context
Editor's Notes (Pamela L. Eddy)
ch. 1 Integration of Learning Model: How College Students Integrate Learning (James P. Barber)
ch. 2 Faculty as Border Crossers: A Study of Fulbright Faculty (Pamela L. Eddy)
ch. 3 Civic Engagement and Organizational Learning Strategies for Student Success (Tami L. Moore, Jesse P. Mendez)
Part II: Examples From Stakeholder Groups
ch. 4 “Orthogonality” in Learning and Assessment (David Leslie)
ch. 5 Promoting High-Impact Student Learning: Connecting Key Components of the Collegiate Experience (Matthew Wawrzynski, Roger Baldwin)
ch. 6 Developing Learning in Faculty: Seeking Expert Assistance From Colleagues (Todd Zakrajsek)
ch. 7 Blended Learning as Transformational Institutional Learning (Kim VanDerLinden)
Part III: Planning for the Future
ch. 8 Constructing an Overarching Framework for Learning—Connecting the Dots (Marilyn J. Amey)
ch. 9 Finding and Fostering Learning: What College and University Leaders Need to Know and What They Can Do (Anna Neumann, Liza Bolitzer)
ch. 10 Bringing It All Together Through Group Learning (Shannon M. Chance)
Index
Additional Info:
With more than a few misgivings but desperate to pay off her loans, Nicole Adams, a newly minted Ph.D. in philosophy, accepts an assistant professorship at Higher State, a small state university in "the middle of the Midwest". Little does she suspect that on just her second day, still flustered and disoriented in her new surroundings, she'll be plunged into a mystery. Crusty R. Reynolds Raskin, with whom she ...
With more than a few misgivings but desperate to pay off her loans, Nicole Adams, a newly minted Ph.D. in philosophy, accepts an assistant professorship at Higher State, a small state university in "the middle of the Midwest". Little does she suspect that on just her second day, still flustered and disoriented in her new surroundings, she'll be plunged into a mystery. Crusty R. Reynolds Raskin, with whom she ...
Additional Info:
With more than a few misgivings but desperate to pay off her loans, Nicole Adams, a newly minted Ph.D. in philosophy, accepts an assistant professorship at Higher State, a small state university in "the middle of the Midwest". Little does she suspect that on just her second day, still flustered and disoriented in her new surroundings, she'll be plunged into a mystery. Crusty R. Reynolds Raskin, with whom she uneasily shares an office, disappears after his desk and files have been ransacked. The police are called. Two weeks later, with Raskin still missing, Nicole receives a threatening phone call...
Read one way up, this is an entertaining parody of an academic mystery that satirizes the ways of academe. Turning the book upside down reveals another purpose: each chapter is in fact a case study, as is revealed by a series of discussion questions intended for faculty orientation and development.
As the mystery unfolds, each chapter shows Nicole encountering testing situations such as student incivility and sexual harassment, problems with her first day of class, dilemmas concerning teaching evaluation and peer observation and issues related to assessment, classroom technology and the rights of faculty and students, among others.
This little book can be read and used both ways: as pure entertainment or as a series of cases whose humorous presentation will break down academic barriers and promote spirited discussion. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Case Studies and Discussion Issues
Discussion Questions
ch. 1 Discussion Question 3
ch. 2 Discussion Question 4
ch. 3 Discussion Question 5
ch. 4 Discussion Question 6
ch. 5 Discussion Question 8
ch. 6 Discussion Question 9
ch. 7 Discussion Question 10
ch. 8 Discussion Question 11
ch. 9 Discussion Question 12
ch. 10 Discussion Question 13
ch. 12 Discussion Question 14
ch. 13 Discussion Question 15
ch. 15 Discussion Question 17
ch. 17 Discussion Question 18
ch. 19 Discussion Question 19
ch. 20 Discussion Question 21
ch. 22 Discussion Question 22
With more than a few misgivings but desperate to pay off her loans, Nicole Adams, a newly minted Ph.D. in philosophy, accepts an assistant professorship at Higher State, a small state university in "the middle of the Midwest". Little does she suspect that on just her second day, still flustered and disoriented in her new surroundings, she'll be plunged into a mystery. Crusty R. Reynolds Raskin, with whom she uneasily shares an office, disappears after his desk and files have been ransacked. The police are called. Two weeks later, with Raskin still missing, Nicole receives a threatening phone call...
Read one way up, this is an entertaining parody of an academic mystery that satirizes the ways of academe. Turning the book upside down reveals another purpose: each chapter is in fact a case study, as is revealed by a series of discussion questions intended for faculty orientation and development.
As the mystery unfolds, each chapter shows Nicole encountering testing situations such as student incivility and sexual harassment, problems with her first day of class, dilemmas concerning teaching evaluation and peer observation and issues related to assessment, classroom technology and the rights of faculty and students, among others.
This little book can be read and used both ways: as pure entertainment or as a series of cases whose humorous presentation will break down academic barriers and promote spirited discussion. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
Case Studies and Discussion Issues
Discussion Questions
ch. 1 Discussion Question 3
ch. 2 Discussion Question 4
ch. 3 Discussion Question 5
ch. 4 Discussion Question 6
ch. 5 Discussion Question 8
ch. 6 Discussion Question 9
ch. 7 Discussion Question 10
ch. 8 Discussion Question 11
ch. 9 Discussion Question 12
ch. 10 Discussion Question 13
ch. 12 Discussion Question 14
ch. 13 Discussion Question 15
ch. 15 Discussion Question 17
ch. 17 Discussion Question 18
ch. 19 Discussion Question 19
ch. 20 Discussion Question 21
ch. 22 Discussion Question 22
Grant Writing 101: Everything You Need to Start Raising Funds Today
Additional Info:
This book offers you no-frills essentials and down-and-dirty tricks for producing great grant-writing results. (From the Publisher)
This book offers you no-frills essentials and down-and-dirty tricks for producing great grant-writing results. (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This book offers you no-frills essentials and down-and-dirty tricks for producing great grant-writing results. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Types of Proposals
ch. 2 Preparing to Write a Grant Proposal
ch. 3 Components of a Grant Proposal
ch. 4 Write Your Proposal in Three Easy Steps
ch. 5 Ten Ways To Make Your Proposal Irresistible
ch. 6 Tips for Finding the Right Grantor
ch. 7 Ten Things to Do While You're Waiting
ch. 8 Things to Do When You're Approved
ch. 9 Ten Things to Do if You're Rejected
ch. 10 Ten Tips For Long-Term Success
ch. 11 Top Ten Other Uses for Your Proposals
Appendix I. Sample Grant Deadline Matrix
Appendix II. Sample Congratulations Letter
Appendix III. Sample Final Report
Appendix IV. Short Grant Proposal Sample
Appendix V. Medium Grant Proposal Sample
Appendix VI. Long Grant Proposal Sample
Appendix VII. List of Available Items
Appendix VIII. Sample Program & Project Budgets
Appendix IX. List of Ways to Earn Funds
Appendix X. Ten Best Grant-writing References
Index
This book offers you no-frills essentials and down-and-dirty tricks for producing great grant-writing results. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction
ch. 1 Types of Proposals
ch. 2 Preparing to Write a Grant Proposal
ch. 3 Components of a Grant Proposal
ch. 4 Write Your Proposal in Three Easy Steps
ch. 5 Ten Ways To Make Your Proposal Irresistible
ch. 6 Tips for Finding the Right Grantor
ch. 7 Ten Things to Do While You're Waiting
ch. 8 Things to Do When You're Approved
ch. 9 Ten Things to Do if You're Rejected
ch. 10 Ten Tips For Long-Term Success
ch. 11 Top Ten Other Uses for Your Proposals
Appendix I. Sample Grant Deadline Matrix
Appendix II. Sample Congratulations Letter
Appendix III. Sample Final Report
Appendix IV. Short Grant Proposal Sample
Appendix V. Medium Grant Proposal Sample
Appendix VI. Long Grant Proposal Sample
Appendix VII. List of Available Items
Appendix VIII. Sample Program & Project Budgets
Appendix IX. List of Ways to Earn Funds
Appendix X. Ten Best Grant-writing References
Index
The Ethics of Teaching
Additional Info:
This book evolved by collecting a variety of teaching situations that commonly occur in college and university settings. The authors then created responses to the situations and circulated both the cases and the responses to reviewers from a number of departments across the country. As a result, the vast majority of the cases are "discipline free." (From the Publisher)
This book evolved by collecting a variety of teaching situations that commonly occur in college and university settings. The authors then created responses to the situations and circulated both the cases and the responses to reviewers from a number of departments across the country. As a result, the vast majority of the cases are "discipline free." (From the Publisher)
Additional Info:
This book evolved by collecting a variety of teaching situations that commonly occur in college and university settings. The authors then created responses to the situations and circulated both the cases and the responses to reviewers from a number of departments across the country. As a result, the vast majority of the cases are "discipline free." (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
Pt. I The Classroom Ambiance
ch. 1 Instructors' Classroom Policies
ch. 2 Student Deportment in the Classroom
Pt. II The Classroom Learning Experience
ch. 3 nstructors' Presentation Style and Content
ch. 4 Required In-Class Learning Activities
Pt. III Assessment of Students
ch. 5 Testing and Other Academic Evaluations
ch. 6 Grading Methods
ch. 7 Feedback to Students
ch. 8 Writing Reference Letters for Students
ch. 9 Biased Treatment of Students
ch. 10 Academic Dishonesty
Pt. IV Outside the Classroom
ch. 11 Availability to Students
ch. 12 Student-Faculty Interactions
Pt. V Relationships in Academia
ch. 13 Multiple Role Relations and Conflicts of Interest
ch. 14 Interprofessional Relations
ch. 15 Exploitation of Students
ch. 16 Discrimination
ch. 17 Manipulative Students and Instructors
ch. 18 Supervising, Advising, and Collaboration With Students
Pt. VI Responsibilities to Students and Colleagues
ch. 19 Instructor Competency
ch. 20 Confidentiality Issues
ch. 21 Political and Public Statements
ch. 22 Responsibilities to the Institution
Afterword: Prevention and Peer Intervention
References
Subject Index
This book evolved by collecting a variety of teaching situations that commonly occur in college and university settings. The authors then created responses to the situations and circulated both the cases and the responses to reviewers from a number of departments across the country. As a result, the vast majority of the cases are "discipline free." (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Introduction
Pt. I The Classroom Ambiance
ch. 1 Instructors' Classroom Policies
ch. 2 Student Deportment in the Classroom
Pt. II The Classroom Learning Experience
ch. 3 nstructors' Presentation Style and Content
ch. 4 Required In-Class Learning Activities
Pt. III Assessment of Students
ch. 5 Testing and Other Academic Evaluations
ch. 6 Grading Methods
ch. 7 Feedback to Students
ch. 8 Writing Reference Letters for Students
ch. 9 Biased Treatment of Students
ch. 10 Academic Dishonesty
Pt. IV Outside the Classroom
ch. 11 Availability to Students
ch. 12 Student-Faculty Interactions
Pt. V Relationships in Academia
ch. 13 Multiple Role Relations and Conflicts of Interest
ch. 14 Interprofessional Relations
ch. 15 Exploitation of Students
ch. 16 Discrimination
ch. 17 Manipulative Students and Instructors
ch. 18 Supervising, Advising, and Collaboration With Students
Pt. VI Responsibilities to Students and Colleagues
ch. 19 Instructor Competency
ch. 20 Confidentiality Issues
ch. 21 Political and Public Statements
ch. 22 Responsibilities to the Institution
Afterword: Prevention and Peer Intervention
References
Subject Index
The Only Grant-Writing Book You'll Ever Need
Additional Info:
This book is designed to help nonprofit organizations craft proposals for grants from foundations, companies, and government agencies. Ellen Karsh, a writer and former director of the Mayor's Office of Grants Administration, in New York, and Arlen Sue Fox, associate executive director for development at Sunnyside Community Services, also in New York, significantly update this edition from 2005 by including interviews with grant makers about how the current economic crisis is ...
This book is designed to help nonprofit organizations craft proposals for grants from foundations, companies, and government agencies. Ellen Karsh, a writer and former director of the Mayor's Office of Grants Administration, in New York, and Arlen Sue Fox, associate executive director for development at Sunnyside Community Services, also in New York, significantly update this edition from 2005 by including interviews with grant makers about how the current economic crisis is ...
Additional Info:
This book is designed to help nonprofit organizations craft proposals for grants from foundations, companies, and government agencies. Ellen Karsh, a writer and former director of the Mayor's Office of Grants Administration, in New York, and Arlen Sue Fox, associate executive director for development at Sunnyside Community Services, also in New York, significantly update this edition from 2005 by including interviews with grant makers about how the current economic crisis is affecting their giving and how grant seekers can improve their chances of garnering support. The book includes a proposal checklist, a glossary of terms, sample grant forms, and a list of Web sites that provide information on grants offered by foundations, corporations, and the government. —from the Chronicle of Philanthropy (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction to the Third Edition
Funders' Roundtable: Economic Summit
Part I: Prerequisites
ch. 1 Who Am I? (and What in the World Do I Want to Do?)
ch. 2 Wait a Second - What Is a Grant . . . and Where Do I Get One?
ch. 3 Making (Dollars and) Sense of Grant-Application Packages: What Grantmakers Want
ch. 4 Getting Ready to Write a Grant Proposal
If You're a Not-for-Profit Organization
If You're a Government Agency or School District
If You're an Individual Grant Seeker . . .
ch. 5 Funders' Roundtable I
Part II: It's Finally Time to Write the Proposal
ch. 6 Foundations of Proposal Writing
ch. 7 Writing (Proposals) with Style: Twelve Basic Rules
ch. 8 Writing (Proposals) with Style: Tackling the Blank Page
ch. 9 Identifying and Documenting the Need: What Problem Will a Grant Fix?
ch. 10 Goals and Objectives: What Do You Hope to Achieve If You Get the Money?
ch. 11 Developing and Presenting a Winning Program
ch. 12 Finding Partners and Building Coalitions (The MOUs That Roared)
ch. 13 The Evaluation Plan: How Can You Be Sure If Your Program Worked?
ch. 14 The Budget: How Much Will It Cost . . .
ch. 15 Sustainability: How Will You Continue the Program When the Grant Funds Run Out? (and You'd Better Not Say, "I Won't!")
ch. 16 Capacity: Proving That You Can Get the Job Done
ch. 17 Front and Back: The Cover Page or Cover Letter, the Abstract, the Table of Contents, and the Appendix
ch. 18 Funders' Roundtable II
Part III: After the Proposal . . .
ch. 19 The Site Visit - Playing Host
ch. 20 So Now You Know - What Next?
ch. 21 Funders' Roundtables III
Appendix 1 - 50 Tips for Improving Your Chances of Winning a Grant
Appendix 2 - Proposal Checklist
Appendix 3 - Glossary
Appendix 4 - Sample Grant Forms:
Washington (D.C.) Area Common Grant Application Format
Federal Cover Page, Form SF-424
Sample Cover Letter
Sample Letter of Inquiry (LOI)
Sample Abstract
Appendix 5 - Representative List of Community Foundations
Appendix 6 - Websites
Appendix 7 - Answers to Pop Quizzes
Acknowledgments
About the Authors
Index
This book is designed to help nonprofit organizations craft proposals for grants from foundations, companies, and government agencies. Ellen Karsh, a writer and former director of the Mayor's Office of Grants Administration, in New York, and Arlen Sue Fox, associate executive director for development at Sunnyside Community Services, also in New York, significantly update this edition from 2005 by including interviews with grant makers about how the current economic crisis is affecting their giving and how grant seekers can improve their chances of garnering support. The book includes a proposal checklist, a glossary of terms, sample grant forms, and a list of Web sites that provide information on grants offered by foundations, corporations, and the government. —from the Chronicle of Philanthropy (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Introduction to the Third Edition
Funders' Roundtable: Economic Summit
Part I: Prerequisites
ch. 1 Who Am I? (and What in the World Do I Want to Do?)
ch. 2 Wait a Second - What Is a Grant . . . and Where Do I Get One?
ch. 3 Making (Dollars and) Sense of Grant-Application Packages: What Grantmakers Want
ch. 4 Getting Ready to Write a Grant Proposal
If You're a Not-for-Profit Organization
If You're a Government Agency or School District
If You're an Individual Grant Seeker . . .
ch. 5 Funders' Roundtable I
Part II: It's Finally Time to Write the Proposal
ch. 6 Foundations of Proposal Writing
ch. 7 Writing (Proposals) with Style: Twelve Basic Rules
ch. 8 Writing (Proposals) with Style: Tackling the Blank Page
ch. 9 Identifying and Documenting the Need: What Problem Will a Grant Fix?
ch. 10 Goals and Objectives: What Do You Hope to Achieve If You Get the Money?
ch. 11 Developing and Presenting a Winning Program
ch. 12 Finding Partners and Building Coalitions (The MOUs That Roared)
ch. 13 The Evaluation Plan: How Can You Be Sure If Your Program Worked?
ch. 14 The Budget: How Much Will It Cost . . .
ch. 15 Sustainability: How Will You Continue the Program When the Grant Funds Run Out? (and You'd Better Not Say, "I Won't!")
ch. 16 Capacity: Proving That You Can Get the Job Done
ch. 17 Front and Back: The Cover Page or Cover Letter, the Abstract, the Table of Contents, and the Appendix
ch. 18 Funders' Roundtable II
Part III: After the Proposal . . .
ch. 19 The Site Visit - Playing Host
ch. 20 So Now You Know - What Next?
ch. 21 Funders' Roundtables III
Appendix 1 - 50 Tips for Improving Your Chances of Winning a Grant
Appendix 2 - Proposal Checklist
Appendix 3 - Glossary
Appendix 4 - Sample Grant Forms:
Washington (D.C.) Area Common Grant Application Format
Federal Cover Page, Form SF-424
Sample Cover Letter
Sample Letter of Inquiry (LOI)
Sample Abstract
Appendix 5 - Representative List of Community Foundations
Appendix 6 - Websites
Appendix 7 - Answers to Pop Quizzes
Acknowledgments
About the Authors
Index
Additional Info:
Leadership is an activity that not only manifests itself in formal positions, but also bubbles up in various places within an organization. Perhaps given the importance of leadership to any endeavor, the literature on this topic has burgeoned. Yet among these titles, Learning to Lead stands out as one of the best texts available on leadership for college and university administrators. Critical skills such as managing people, resolving conflict, and ...
Leadership is an activity that not only manifests itself in formal positions, but also bubbles up in various places within an organization. Perhaps given the importance of leadership to any endeavor, the literature on this topic has burgeoned. Yet among these titles, Learning to Lead stands out as one of the best texts available on leadership for college and university administrators. Critical skills such as managing people, resolving conflict, and ...
Additional Info:
Leadership is an activity that not only manifests itself in formal positions, but also bubbles up in various places within an organization. Perhaps given the importance of leadership to any endeavor, the literature on this topic has burgeoned. Yet among these titles, Learning to Lead stands out as one of the best texts available on leadership for college and university administrators. Critical skills such as managing people, resolving conflict, and making rational (and legal) decisions are explored within the context of the campus. The book also addresses the needs of those who facilitate leadership workshops, serve as mentors to potential leaders, and teach courses on higher education leadership and administration. While presenting all sides of key issues, the author calls for the reader to define his or her own position through a series of provocative reflection questions in each chapter. Thus the book invites interaction and teaches administrators not what to think about leadership, but how to think about it. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
Introduction: The Need for Institution-Wide Leadership
Part I. Understanding the Context for Leadership
ch. 1 Leadership and Administration: Building Practical Definitions
ch. 2 Institutional Structure and Mission: Knowing Your Place in Time and Space
Part II. Building the Skills for Leadership
ch. 3 Program Planning and Review: Exerting Influence and Maintaining Accountability
ch. 4 Meetings, Groups, and Teams: Learning to Collaborate
ch. 5 Communication and Conflict Resolution: Finding Agreement
ch. 6 Problem Solving and Decision Making: Employing Rational, Legal, and Ethical Criteria
ch. 7 Financial Management: Seeing Dollars Everywhere
ch. 8 Change: Moving Forward Gracefully
ch. 9 Positive Work Environments: Managing People and Encouraging Development
Part III. Continuing to Learn about Leadership
ch. 10 Perpetual Learning and Personal Renewal: Shaping the Leader Within
Appendix: Directory of Resources
Index
Leadership is an activity that not only manifests itself in formal positions, but also bubbles up in various places within an organization. Perhaps given the importance of leadership to any endeavor, the literature on this topic has burgeoned. Yet among these titles, Learning to Lead stands out as one of the best texts available on leadership for college and university administrators. Critical skills such as managing people, resolving conflict, and making rational (and legal) decisions are explored within the context of the campus. The book also addresses the needs of those who facilitate leadership workshops, serve as mentors to potential leaders, and teach courses on higher education leadership and administration. While presenting all sides of key issues, the author calls for the reader to define his or her own position through a series of provocative reflection questions in each chapter. Thus the book invites interaction and teaches administrators not what to think about leadership, but how to think about it. (From the Publisher)
Table Of Content:
Preface
Acknowledgments
Introduction: The Need for Institution-Wide Leadership
Part I. Understanding the Context for Leadership
ch. 1 Leadership and Administration: Building Practical Definitions
ch. 2 Institutional Structure and Mission: Knowing Your Place in Time and Space
Part II. Building the Skills for Leadership
ch. 3 Program Planning and Review: Exerting Influence and Maintaining Accountability
ch. 4 Meetings, Groups, and Teams: Learning to Collaborate
ch. 5 Communication and Conflict Resolution: Finding Agreement
ch. 6 Problem Solving and Decision Making: Employing Rational, Legal, and Ethical Criteria
ch. 7 Financial Management: Seeing Dollars Everywhere
ch. 8 Change: Moving Forward Gracefully
ch. 9 Positive Work Environments: Managing People and Encouraging Development
Part III. Continuing to Learn about Leadership
ch. 10 Perpetual Learning and Personal Renewal: Shaping the Leader Within
Appendix: Directory of Resources
Index